OLGA User Manual

DYNAMIC MULTIPHASE FLOW SIMULATOR
OLGA 2016
Version 2016.2
User manual
Copyright Notice
Copyright © 2017 Schlumberger. All rights reserved.
This work contains the confidential and proprietary trade secrets of Schlumberger and may not
be copied or stored in an information retrieval system, transferred, used, distributed, translated
or retransmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, in whole or in part,
without the express written permission of the copyright owner.
Trademarks & Service Marks

Schlumberger, the Schlumberger logotype, and other words or symbols used to identify the
products and services described herein are either trademarks, trade names or service marks of
Schlumberger and its licensors, or are the property of their respective owners. These marks
may not be copied, imitated or used, in whole or in part, without the express prior written
permission of Schlumberger. In addition, covers, page headers, custom graphics, icons, and
other design elements may be service marks, trademarks, and/or trade dress of Schlumberger,
and may not be copied, imitated, or used, in whole or in part, without the express prior written
permission of Schlumberger. Other company, product, and service names are the properties of
their respective owners.
® ®
ECLIPSE and ROCX are marks of Schlumberger.
An asterisk (*) is used throughout this document to designate other marks of Schlumberger.
Security Notice
The software described herein is configured to operate with at least the minimum specifications
set out by Schlumberger. You are advised that such minimum specifications are merely
recommendations and not intended to be limiting to configurations that may be used to operate
the software. Similarly, you are advised that the software should be operated in a secure
environment whether such software is operated across a network, on a single system and/or on
a plurality of systems. It is up to you to configure and maintain your networks and/or system(s)
in a secure manner. If you have further questions as to recommendations regarding
recommended specifications or security, please feel free to contact your local Schlumberger
representative.
-1-
OLGA User manual
Table of Contents
Table of Contents ....................................................................................................................... 2

OLGA User manual .................................................................................................................... 8
Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 9
Background .............................................................................................................................. 9
OLGA as a strategic tool ........................................................................................................ 10
Applications ............................................................................................................................ 10
Input files ................................................................................................................................ 14
Simulation model .................................................................................................................... 22
The OLGA model ...................................................................................................................... 24
OLGA Model basics................................................................................................................ 24
Transport Equations ........................................................................................................... 24
Flow regimes ...................................................................................................................... 28
Flowline modeling ............................................................................................................... 35
Line................................................................................................................................. 38
Numerics ............................................................................................................................ 38
Temperature ....................................................................................................................... 39
Initial conditions .................................................................................................................. 39
Steady state preprocessor.................................................................................................. 40
2nd order scheme .............................................................................................................. 42
Time step control ................................................................................................................ 45
Tuning ................................................................................................................................ 45
Fluids and PVT ....................................................................................................................... 46
Special fluids and solids ..................................................................................................... 46
PVT models ........................................................................................................................ 47
PVT lookup table ............................................................................................................ 47
Blackoil ........................................................................................................................... 49
Compositional tracking ................................................................................................... 58
Single component ........................................................................................................... 65
Standard Conditions in OLGA ............................................................................................ 71
Heat transfer ........................................................................................................................... 73
One-dimensional heat transfer ........................................................................................... 74
Thermal coupling to ambient .......................................................................................... 74
Thermal coupling between flowpaths ............................................................................. 79
Two-dimensional heat transfer ........................................................................................... 83
FEMTherm - Model description ...................................................................................... 83
FEMTherm / Solid bundle - How to use .......................................................................... 90
Boundary conditions ............................................................................................................... 91
Source ................................................................................................................................ 91
Well inflow and injection ..................................................................................................... 96
Point contact ................................................................................................................... 96
Zone ............................................................................................................................. 105
Near-wellbore ................................................................................................................... 107
Flow assurance and special modelling options .................................................................... 113
Slug tracking..................................................................................................................... 113
Model description ......................................................................................................... 113
How to use ................................................................................................................... 118
Slug tuning ................................................................................................................... 120
Pig .................................................................................................................................... 122
-2-
Table of Contents
Drilling .............................................................................................................................. 126

Corrosion .......................................................................................................................... 130
Elastic walls ...................................................................................................................... 134
Shut-in .............................................................................................................................. 140
Water module - Emulsion ................................................................................................. 141
Drilling fluid ....................................................................................................................... 147
PVT table approach ...................................................................................................... 148
Compositional approach ............................................................................................... 152
Built-in correlations ....................................................................................................... 155
Complex fluid (Deprecated) .............................................................................................. 158
Non-Newtonian rheology .................................................................................................. 159
Special fluids and solids ................................................................................................... 161
Hydrate ......................................................................................................................... 163
Inhibitor tracking ........................................................................................................... 168
Particle flow .................................................................................................................. 170
SteamWater-HC ........................................................................................................... 175
Tracer tracking.............................................................................................................. 179
Wax deposition ............................................................................................................. 181
User defined dispersions and plug-in framework.............................................................. 186
Equipment and devices ........................................................................................................ 191
Valve ................................................................................................................................ 191
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 191
Valve models ................................................................................................................ 191
How to use ................................................................................................................... 193
Theory .......................................................................................................................... 194
Introduction ................................................................................................................... 202
Venturi valve ................................................................................................................. 205
Gas sizing valve ........................................................................................................... 207
Check valve .................................................................................................................. 208
Standing valve .............................................................................................................. 208
GLV .............................................................................................................................. 212
Pumps .............................................................................................................................. 217
Pressure boost ............................................................................................................. 217
Simplified Pump............................................................................................................ 217
Pump battery ................................................................................................................ 220
Displacement pump ...................................................................................................... 222
Bornemann pump ......................................................................................................... 225
Centrifugal pump .......................................................................................................... 228
OneSubsea pump......................................................................................................... 234
ESPump (ESP) ............................................................................................................. 243
Jet pump....................................................................................................................... 246
Optional Built-In Bypass and Recycle........................................................................... 249
Controlling the pump speed .......................................................................................... 251
Compressor ...................................................................................................................... 251
Phase split node ............................................................................................................... 257
Separator.......................................................................................................................... 258
Heat exchanger ................................................................................................................ 261
Leak ................................................................................................................................. 262
Loss .................................................................................................................................. 264
Control systems .................................................................................................................... 265
Controller introduction ...................................................................................................... 265
-3-
OLGA User manual
Controller details .............................................................................................................. 266

Controller mode ................................................................................................................ 268
Controller activation/deactivation ...................................................................................... 269
Actuator time of controlled device................................................................................. 269
Analog vs. digital controllers ......................................................................................... 270
Constraining the controller output ..................................................................................... 270
Algebraic controller ........................................................................................................... 270
ASC controller .................................................................................................................. 271
Cascade controller ........................................................................................................... 273
ESD controller .................................................................................................................. 275
Manual controller .............................................................................................................. 278
Override controller ............................................................................................................ 278
PID controller.................................................................................................................... 280
PSV controller .................................................................................................................. 286
Scaler controller ............................................................................................................... 288
Selector controller ............................................................................................................ 289
STD controller .................................................................................................................. 291
Switch controller ............................................................................................................... 292
Table controller................................................................................................................. 293
Transmitter ....................................................................................................................... 293
OLGA extensibility ................................................................................................................ 294
REFERENCES ..................................................................................................................... 295
Server ...................................................................................................................................... 298
OLGA OPC server ................................................................................................................ 298
Submodelling ........................................................................................................................ 298
Introduction....................................................................................................................... 298
Reference manual .................................................................................................................. 299
Keywords .............................................................................................................................. 299
CaseDefinition .................................................................................................................. 299
ANIMATE (on CaseLevel) ............................................................................................ 299
CASE (on CaseLevel) .................................................................................................. 299
DTCONTROL (on CaseLevel) ...................................................................................... 300
ECLIPSEOPTIONS (on CaseLevel) ............................................................................. 301
EVENTLOGGING (on CaseLevel)................................................................................ 302
FILES (on CaseLevel) .................................................................................................. 302
INTEGRATION (on CaseLevel) .................................................................................... 303
OPTIONS (on CaseLevel) ............................................................................................ 305
RESTART (on CaseLevel) ........................................................................................... 308
SERVEROPTIONS (on CaseLevel) ............................................................................. 310
SCHEDULER (on CaseLevel) ...................................................................................... 311
UDFEED (on CaseLevel) ............................................................................................. 311
UDOPTIONS (on CaseLevel) ....................................................................................... 312
Compositional................................................................................................................... 312
BLACKOILCOMPONENT (on CaseLevel) ................................................................... 312
BLACKOILFEED (on CaseLevel) ................................................................................. 313
BLACKOILOPTIONS (on CaseLevel)........................................................................... 314
COMPOPTIONS (on CaseLevel) ................................................................................. 315
FEED (on CaseLevel)................................................................................................... 316
SINGLEOPTIONS (on CaseLevel) ............................................................................... 317
Controller .......................................................................................................................... 318
AlgebraicController ....................................................................................................... 318
-4-
Table of Contents
ASCController............................................................................................................... 321
CascadeController ........................................................................................................ 324
ESDController............................................................................................................... 328
ManualController .......................................................................................................... 331
OverrideController ........................................................................................................ 333
PIDController ................................................................................................................ 335
PSVController ............................................................................................................... 339
ScalerController ............................................................................................................ 342
SelectorController ......................................................................................................... 343
STDController ............................................................................................................... 346
SwitchController ........................................................................................................... 348
TableController ............................................................................................................. 350
Output........................................................................................................................... 351
Drilling .............................................................................................................................. 353
TOOLJOINT (on CaseLevel) ........................................................................................ 353
FA-models ........................................................................................................................ 354
FLUID (on CaseLevel) .................................................................................................. 354
PARTICLEOPTIONS (on CaseLevel)........................................................................... 355
SLUGTRACKING (on CaseLevel) ................................................................................ 356
SLUGTUNING (on CaseLevel) ..................................................................................... 358
WATEROPTIONS (on CaseLevel) ............................................................................... 358
FlowComponent ............................................................................................................... 362
Node ............................................................................................................................. 362
Flowpath ....................................................................................................................... 371
JunctionNode ............................................................................................................... 470
GlobalGeom ..................................................................................................................... 473
PIPE (on GlobalGeom) ................................................................................................. 473
GroupData ........................................................................................................................ 474
UDGroup ...................................................................................................................... 474
UDFRACTION (on UDGroup) ...................................................................................... 475
Library .............................................................................................................................. 476
DRILLINGFLUID (on Library) ....................................................................................... 476
HYDRATECURVE (on Library)..................................................................................... 478
MATERIAL (on Library) ................................................................................................ 479
PARTICLES (on Library) .............................................................................................. 481
RESERVOIRINFLOW (on Library) ............................................................................... 481
SHAPE (on Library) ...................................................................................................... 488
TABLE (on Library) ....................................................................................................... 489
TIMESERIES (on Library) ............................................................................................ 490
TRACERFEED (on Library) .......................................................................................... 491
UDDISPERSION (on Library) ....................................................................................... 492
UDPHASE (on Library) ................................................................................................. 492
WALL (on Library) ........................................................................................................ 492
Output............................................................................................................................... 495
OUTPUT (on CaseLevel) ............................................................................................. 495
OUTPUTDATA (on CaseLevel) .................................................................................... 495
PLOT (on CaseLevel) ................................................................................................... 495
PROFILE (on CaseLevel) ............................................................................................. 496
PROFILEDATA (on CaseLevel) ................................................................................... 497
SERVERDATA (on CaseLevel) .................................................................................... 497
TREND (on CaseLevel) ................................................................................................ 498
-5-
OLGA User manual
TRENDDATA (on CaseLevel) ...................................................................................... 499

Submodelling.................................................................................................................... 499
FLOWIN (on Submodel) ............................................................................................... 499
FLOWOUT (on Submodel) ........................................................................................... 501
SIGNALIN (on Submodel) ............................................................................................ 502
SIGNALOUT (on Submodel) ........................................................................................ 503
Submodel ..................................................................................................................... 503
SUBMODELCONTROL (on Submodel) ....................................................................... 504
SUBMODELTAG (on Submodel).................................................................................. 507
ProcessEquipment ........................................................................................................... 507
PhaseSplitNode ............................................................................................................ 507
Separator ...................................................................................................................... 509
BitNode......................................................................................................................... 512
StandNode ................................................................................................................... 513
JetPump ....................................................................................................................... 513
Output........................................................................................................................... 514
ThermalComponent .......................................................................................................... 522
Annulus ........................................................................................................................ 522
FluidBundle .................................................................................................................. 526
SolidBundle .................................................................................................................. 530
Output variables ................................................................................................................... 540
Global Output Variables ................................................................................................... 541
Branch Output Variables .................................................................................................. 543
Boundary Output Variables .............................................................................................. 546
Volume Output Variables.................................................................................................. 554
Bundle Output Variables................................................................................................... 559
Check valve Output Variables .......................................................................................... 559
Compositional Output Variables ....................................................................................... 559
Compressor Output Variables .......................................................................................... 568
Controller Output Variables .............................................................................................. 568
Corrosion Output Variables .............................................................................................. 569
Drilling Output Variables ................................................................................................... 570
Heat exchanger Output Variables .................................................................................... 575
HTCRIT Numerical codes................................................................................................. 575
Hydrate kinetics Output Variables .................................................................................... 577
Jet pump Output Variables ............................................................................................... 578
Leak Output Variables ...................................................................................................... 579
Node Output Variables ..................................................................................................... 581
OneSubsea pump Output Variables ................................................................................. 582
Particle flow Output Variables .......................................................................................... 582
Pig Output Variables ........................................................................................................ 585
Pump Output Variables .................................................................................................... 587
Separator Output Variables .............................................................................................. 588
Slug tracking Output Variables ......................................................................................... 591
Source Output Variables .................................................................................................. 597
Steam and Single component Output Variables ............................................................... 598
Tracer tracking Output Variables ...................................................................................... 599
Transmitter Output Variables............................................................................................ 601
UDPhase Output Variables .............................................................................................. 601
Valve Output Variables ..................................................................................................... 602
Wax deposition Output Variables ..................................................................................... 603
-6-
Table of Contents
Well Output Variables ....................................................................................................... 605

Fluid properties and other data files ..................................................................................... 606
Compressor data file ........................................................................................................ 607
Fann file............................................................................................................................ 609
Hydrate curve definition file .............................................................................................. 610
OLGA ROCX .................................................................................................................... 611
Rheology file..................................................................................................................... 611
UDPVT FILE AND UDFEED FILE .................................................................................... 613
Wax table file .................................................................................................................... 614
Fluid properties file ........................................................................................................... 615
Feed file for Compositional Tracking ............................................................................ 615
PVT properties for non-existing phase ......................................................................... 616
Keyword based format for fluid properties .................................................................... 616
Fixed/standard format for fluid properties ..................................................................... 630
Pump Data Files ............................................................................................................... 641
Pump Data Table for Centrifugal Pumps ...................................................................... 641
Pump Data Table for Displacement Pumps .................................................................. 645
Data Format for ESPDBFILEs ...................................................................................... 647
Restrictions and Limitations ................................................................................................. 650
Memory consumption ........................................................................................................... 650
Limitations in the use of fluid properties ............................................................................... 650
Input/Output Limitations ........................................................................................................ 651
Standard Conditions in OLGA .............................................................................................. 652
Flow Model Limitations ......................................................................................................... 653
Important Numerical Recommendations .............................................................................. 654
Compatibility matrix – modules/options in OLGA.................................................................. 656
-7-
OLGA User manual
OLGA User manual
The complete program documentation includes:
 OLGA* Release notes

 OLGA User manual (this document)
 OLGA GUI User manual
 OLGA Sample cases
 Well editor User manual
 OLGA Viewer User manual
 Pipeline editor User manual
 Profile generator User manual
 FEMTherm editor User manual
 OLGA OPC server guide
 OLGA Submodeling guide
 OLGA Namespace Explorer guide
 Installation guide
 ROCX User manual
All documents listed above are available from the Start menu (Start > All Programs > Schlumberger >
OLGA [version] > Documentation).
The OLGA User manual is also available from the Help menu in the GUI. User Manuals for other tools
included with the installation (for example, FEMTherm, ROCX, OLGA Namespace Explorer) are available
from the Help menus in the tools.
Release information
Refer to the Release notes for detailed release information.
Online help
OLGA is equipped with a context sensitive help document which can be opened directly from the user
interface. The help can be reached in several ways:
 Click the Properties view and press F1 -> leads to the information on the relevant model
 Select Help from the File menu
 Select the Help icon in the upper right corner of the OLGA main window.
Support center
The Support Portal provides useful information about frequently asked questions and known issues.
Please contact OLGA support if problems or missing functionality are encountered when using OLGA or
any of the related tools included in the OLGA software package.
-8-
Introduction
Introduction
OLGA is the industry standard tool for transient simulation of multiphase petroleum production. The
purpose of this manual is to assist you in the preparation of the input data for an OLGA simulation.
In this manual you can find
 a general introduction to OLGA

 an overview of the required and the optional input to OLGA. It also describes in some detail different
simulation options such as wax deposition, corrosion, and so on.
 a detailed description of all input data and the required fluid property tables
 a description of the output
The sample cases presented with the installation of OLGA illustrate important program options and typical
simulation output. A description of the sample cases is also included in this manual.
OLGA comes in a basic version with a number of optional modules: FEMTherm, ROCX, Multiphase
pumps, Corrosion, Wells, Slug tracking, Wax deposition, Inhibitor tracking, Compositional tracking, Single
component, Tuning, Hydrate kinetics, Plugin Interface, Complex fluid, OLGA High Definition, Risk
management and Optimisation and Blowout control.
There are a number of additional programs, such as the OLGA GUI and the FEMThermViewer, for the
preparation of input data and the visualization of results.
These optional modules and additional programs are available to you depending on you licensing
agreement with Schlumberger.
Background
OLGA 2016.2 is the latest version in a continuous development that was started by the Institute for Energy
Research (IFE) in 1980. The oil industry started using OLGA in 1984 when Statoil had supported its
development for three years. Data from the large scale flow loop at SINTEF, and later from the medium
scale loop at IFE, were essential for the development of the multiphase flow correlations and also for the
validation of OLGA. Oil companies have since then supported the development and provided field data to
help manage uncertainty, predominantly within the OLGA Verification and Improvement Project (OVIP).
OLGA has been commercially available since the SPT Group started marketing it in 1990.
OLGA is used for networks of wells, flowlines and pipelines and process equipment, covering the
production system from bottom hole into the production system. OLGA comes with a steady state pre-
processor included which is intended for calculating initial values to the transient simulations, but which
also is useful for traditional steady state parameter variations. However, the transient capabilities of OLGA
dramatically increase the range of applicability compared with steady state simulators.
-9-
OLGA User manual
OLGA as a strategic tool
OLGA is applied for engineering throughout field life, from conceptual studies to the support of operations.
However, the application has been extended to be an integral part of operator training simulators, used for
making operating procedures, training of operators and check out of control systems. Further, OLGA is
frequently embedded in on-line systems for monitoring of pipeline conditions and forecasting and planning
of operations.
OLGA can dynamically interface with all major dynamic process simulators, such as Hysys, DynSim,
UniSim, D-SPICE, INDISS and ASSETT. This allows for making integrated engineering simulators and
operator training simulators studying the process from bottom hole all the way through the process facility
in a single high fidelity model.
Note: The OLGA flow correlation has been implemented in all major steady state simulators, providing
consistent results moving between different simulators.
Applications
When the resources become more scarce and complicated to get to, careful design and optimisation of the
entire production system is vital for investments and revenues. The dimensions and layout of wells and
pipelines must be optimized for variable operational windows defined by changing reservoir properties and
limitations given by environment and processing facilities.
OLGA is used for design and engineering, mapping of operational limits and to establish operational
procedures. OLGA is also used for safety analysis to assess the consequences of equipment malfunctions
and operational failures.
REFERENCES contains a list of papers describing the OLGA model and its applications.
- 10 -
Introduction
Design and Engineering
OLGA is a powerful instrument for the design engineer when considering different concepts for
hydrocarbon production and transport - whether it is new developments or modifications to existing
installations.
1
OLGA should be used in the various design phases, that is, Conceptual, FEED and detailed design and
the following issues should be addressed.
Design
 Sizes of tubing and pipes

 Insulation and coverage
 Inhibitors for hydrate / wax
 Liquid inventory management / pigging
 Slug mitigation
 Processing capacity (Integrated simulation)
Focus on maximizing the production window during field life
 Initial
 Mid-life
 Tail
Accuracy / Uncertainty management
 Input accuracy
 Parameter sensitivity
Risk and Safety
Normally the engineering challenge becomes more severe when accounting for tail-end production with
reduced pressure, increasing water-cut and gas-oil ratio. This increase the slugging potential while fluid
temperature reduces which in turn increase the need for inhibitors and the operational window is generally
reduced.
Operation
OLGA should be used to establish
 Operational procedures and limitations

 Emergency procedures
 Contingency plans
1
Front End Engineering and Design
- 11 -
OLGA User manual
OLGA is also a very useful tool for operator training
 Training in flow assurance in general

 Practising operational procedures
 Initial start-up preparations
Some typical operational events suitable for OLGA simulations are discussed below.
Pipeline shut-down
If, for some reason, the flow in a pipeline must be shut down, different procedures can be investigated. The
dynamics during the shut-down can be studied, as well as the final conditions in the pipe. The liquid
content is of interest, as well as the temperature evolution in the fluid at rest, because the walls may cool
the fluid below a critical temperature where hydrates can start to form.
Pipeline blow-down
One of the primary strategies for hydrate prevention in case of a pipeline shut-down is to blow down. The
primary aim is to reduce the pipeline pressure below the pressure where hydrates can form. The main
effects that can be studied are the liquid and gas rates during the blow-down, the time required and the
final pressure.
Pipeline start-up
The initial conditions of a pipeline to be started is either specified by the user or defined by a restart from a
shut-down case. The start-up simulation can determine the evolution of any accumulated liquid slugs in the
system. A start-up procedure is often sought by which any terrain slugging is minimized or avoided
altogether. The Slug tracking module is very useful in this regard.
In a network case a strategy for the start-up procedure of several merging flow lines could be particularly
important.
Change in production
Sometimes the production level or type of fluid changes during the lifetime of a reservoir. The modification
of the liquid properties due to the presence of water is one of the important effects accounted for in OLGA.
A controlled change in the production rate or an injection of another fluid are important cases to be
simulated. Of particular interest is the dynamics of network interaction, for example, how the transport line
operation is affected by flow rate changes in one of several merging flow lines.
Process equipment
Process equipment can be used to regulate or control the varying flow conditions in a multi-phase flow line.
This is of special interest in cases where slugging is to be avoided.
The process equipment simulated in OLGA includes critical- and sub-critical chokes with fixed or controlled
openings, check-valves, compressors with speed and anti- surge controllers, separators, heat exchangers,
pumps and mass sources and sinks.
Pipeline pigging
OLGA can simulate the pigging of a pipeline. A user specified pig can be inserted in the pipeline in OLGA
at any time and place. Any liquid slugs that are created by the pig along the pipeline can be followed in
time. Of special interest is the determination of the size and velocity of a liquid slug leaving the system
ahead of a pig that has been inserted into a shut-down flow line.
- 12 -
Introduction
Hydrate control
Hydrate prevention and control are important for flow assurance. Passive and active control strategies can
be investigated: Passive control is mainly achieved by proper insulation while there are several options for
active control that can be simulated with OLGA: Bundles, electrical heating, inhibition by additives such as
MEG.
Wax deposition
In many production systems wax would tend to deposit on the pipe wall during production. The wax
deposition depends on the fluid composition and temperature. OLGA can model wax deposition as
function of time and location along the pipeline.
Tuning
Even if the OLGA models are sophisticated models made for conceptual studies and engineering will be
based on input and assumptions which are not 100% relevant for operations. Therefore, OLGA is
equipped with a tuning module which can be used online and offline to modify input parameters and also
critical model parameters to match field data.
Wells
 Flow stability: permanent or temporary slugging, rate changes, etc..

 Artificial lift for production optimization
 Shut-in/start-up - water cut limit for natural flow
 Cross flow between layers under static conditions
 WAG injection
 Horizontal wells / Smart wells
 Well Clean-up and Kick-off
 Well Testing
 Well control and Work-over Solutions
Safety Analysis
Safety analysis is an important field of application of OLGA. OLGA is capable of describing propagation of
pressure fronts. For such cases the time step can be limited by the velocity of sound across the shortest
pipe section.
OLGA may be useful for safety analysis in the design phase of a pipeline project, such as the positioning
of valves, regulation equipment, measuring devices, and so on. Critical ranges in pipe monitoring
equipment may be estimated and emergency procedures investigated.
Consequence analysis of possible accidents is another interesting application. The state of the pipeline
after a specified pipe rupture or after a failure in any process equipment can be determined using OLGA.
Simulations with OLGA can also be of help when defining strategies for accident management, for
example, well killing by fluid injection.
Finally it should be mentioned that the OLGA model is well suited for use with simulators designed for
particular pipelines and process systems. Apart from safety analysis and monitoring, such simulators are
powerful instruments in the training of operators.
- 13 -
OLGA User manual
Input files
The OLGA simulator uses text files for describing the simulation model:
 .opi; generated and used by the OLGA GUI

 .inp; input format used by OLGA 5 and earlier versions
 .key; input format used by OLGA
The .key format is the input file format for the OLGA engine. The OLGA GUI automatically generates files
in this format (with the extension .genkey). The .key format reflects the network model described in the
simulation model and should be the preferred format.
In addition to the simulation file, OLGA handles input in several other formats as described in Data files.
Simulation description
The input keywords are organized in Logical sections, with Case level at the top, followed by the various
network components and then the connections at the end.
Case level
Case level is defined as the global keywords specified outside of the network components and
connections. The following keywords are available at Case level:
CaseDefinition; Case, Files, Integration, Options, Dtcontrol, Restart, Serveroptions, Udoptions, Scheduler
Library; Material, Wall, Shape, Table, Drillingfluid, Hydratecurve, Timeseries, Tracerfeed, Udphase,
Uddispersion, Centpumpcurve, Reservoirinflow, Particles
Compositional; Compoptions, Feed, Udfeed, Blackoiloptions, Blackoilcomponent, Blackoilfeed,

Singleoptions
FA-models; Wateroptions, Fluid, Slugtuning, Slugtracking
Output; Animate, Output, Trend, Profile, Outputdata, Trenddata, Profiledata, Serverdata, Plot
Drilling; Tooljoint
Geometries; Globalgeom
Example - text file structure
Below are examples on how this is given in the genkey file:
CASE PROJECT="OLGA Manual", TITLE="Example case", AUTHOR="Schlumberger"
INTEGRATION STARTTIME=0, ENDTIME=7200, DTSTART=0.1, MINDT=0.1, MAXDT=5
FILES PVTFILE=fluid.tab
MATERIAL LABEL=MAT-1, DENSITY=0.785E+04, CAPACITY=0.5E+03, CONDUCTIVITY=0.5E+02
WALL LABEL=WALL-1, THICKNESS=(0.9000E-02, 0.2E-01), MATERIAL=(MAT-1, MAT-1)
Network components
The network components are the major building blocks in the simulation network.
Each network component is enclosed within start (NETWORKCOMPONENT) and end

(ENDNETWORKCOMPONENT) tags as shown below. Each data group belonging to this network
component will be written within these tags.
- 14 -
Introduction
NETWORKCOMPONENT TYPE=FlowPath, TAG=FP_BRAN
...
ENDNETWORKCOMPONENT
The following network component keywords can be specified (see links for further details on each
component):
FlowComponent: See 'Flowpath' on page 15, See 'NODE' on page 17
ProcessEquipment: See 'PHASESPLITNODE' on page 18, See 'SEPARATOR' on page 18
Controller: See 'CONTROLLER' on page 18
ThermalComponent: See 'ANNULUS' on page 19, See 'FLUIDBUNDLE' on page 19, See
'SOLIDBUNDLE' on page 19
Submodelling: Submodel
UserDefined: Udgroup
Flowpath
Piping
The flowpath can be divided into several pipes, which can have an inclination varying from the other pipes
in the flowpath. Each pipe can again be divided into sections as described above. All sections defined
within the same pipe must have the same diameter and inclination. Each pipe in the system can also have
a pipe wall consisting of layers of different materials.
The following keywords are used for Piping:
BRANCH; Defines geometry and fluid labels.
GEOMETRY; Defines starting point for flowpath.
PIPE; Specifies end point or length and elevation of a pipe. Further discretization, diameter, inner surface
roughness, and wall name are specified.
BRANCH LABEL=BRAN-1, GEOMETRY=GEOM-1, FLUID=1
GEOMETRY LABEL=GEOM-1
PIPE LABEL=PIPE-1, DIAMETER=0.12, ROUGHNESS=0.28E-04, NSEGMENT=4, LENGTH=0.4E+03,

ELEVATION=0, WALL=WALL-1
Position
The following keywords are used for Position:
 POSITION; Defined a named position for reference in other keywords
Boundary and Initial Conditions
For the solution of the flow equations, all relevant boundary conditions must be specified for all points in
the system where mass flow into or out of the system. Initial conditions at start up and parameters used for
calculating heat transfer must also be specified.
- 15 -
OLGA User manual
The following keywords are used for Boundary and Initial Conditions:
HEATTRANSFER; Definition of the heat transfer parameters.
INITIALCONDITION; Defines initial values for flow, pressure, temperature and holdup.
INITIALCONDITIONS is not required when a steady state calculation is performed.
NEARWELLSOURCE; Defines a near-wellbore source used together with OLGA ROCX.
SOURCE; Defines a mass source with name, position, and data necessary for calculating the mass flow
into or out of the system. The source flow can be given by a time series or determined by a controller.
WELL; Defines a well with name, position and flow characteristics.
ZONE; Defines a reservoir zone with name, position and reference to a reservoir inflow.
HEATTRANSFER PIPE=ALL, HAMBIENT=6.5, TAMBIENT=6, HMININNERWALL=0.5E+03
SOURCE LABEL=SOUR-1-1, PIPE=1, SECTION=1, TIME=0, TEMPERATURE=62, GASFRACTION=-1,

TOTALWATERFRACTION=-1, PRESSURE=70 bara, DIAMETER=0.12,
SOURCETYPE=PRESSUREDRIVEN
Process Equipment
To obtain a realistic simulation of a pipeline system, it is normally required to include some process
equipment in the simulation. OLGA supports a broad range of different types of process equipment, as
shown below.
It should be noted that the steady state preprocessor ignores the process equipment marked with (*) in the
list below.
The following keywords are used for Process equipment:
CHECKVALVE (*); Defines name, position and allowed flow direction for a check valve.
COMPRESSOR (*); Defines name, position and operating characteristics of a compressor.
HEATEXCHANGER; Defines name, position and characteristic data for a heat exchanger.
LOSS; Defines name, position and values for local pressure loss coefficients.
LEAK; Defines the position of a leak in the system with leak area and back pressure. The leak can also be
connected to another flowpath to simulate gas lift etc.
PRESSUREBOOST; Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump
CENTRIFUGALPUMP; Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump
ESPUMP(*); Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump
DISPLACEMENTPUMP; Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump
ONESUBSEAPUMP; Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump
BORNEMANNPUMP(*); Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump
PUMPBATTERY; Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump
SIMPLIFIEDPUMP Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump
TRANSMITTER (*); Defines a transmitter position and the variable to be transmitted.
- 16 -
Introduction
VALVE; Defines name, position and characteristic data for a choke or a valve.
VALVE LABEL=CHOKE-1-1, PIPE=PIPE-1, SECTIONBOUNDARY=4, DIAMETER=0.12, CD=0.7,

TIME=0, OPENING=1.0
Output
OLGA provides several output methods for plotting simulation results.
The following keywords are used for Output for Process equipment:
OUTPUT(DATA); Defines variable names, position and time for printed output.
PLOT; Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the OLGA viewer file.
PROFILE(DATA); Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the profile plot file.
TREND(DATA); Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the trend plot file.
SERVERDATA; Defines variable names to be available through server and for interactive plotting.
ANIMATE ; Defines time intervals for given variables to the 3D Plot.
TRENDDATA PIPE=1, SECTION=1, VARIABLE=(PT bara, TM, HOLHL, HOLWT)
PROFILEDATA VARIABLE=(GT, GG, GL)
NODE
PARAMETERS; A collection keyword for all node keys. This keyword is hidden in the GUI.
Output
The following keywords are available under the Output for NODE:
OUTPUTDATA; Defines variable names, position and time for printed output.
TRENDDATA; Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the trend plot file.
Process equipment
Transmitter: Defines the variable to be transmitted.
NETWORKCOMPONENT TYPE=Node, TAG=NODE_INLET
PARAMETERS LABEL=INLET, TYPE=CLOSED
ENDNETWORKCOMPONENT
- 17 -
OLGA User manual
NETWORKCOMPONENT TYPE=Node, TAG=NODE_OUTLET
PARAMETERS LABEL=OUTLET, GASFRACTION=-1, PRESSURE=50 bara, TEMPERATURE=32,

TIME=0, TOTALWATERFRACTION=-1, TYPE=PRESSURE, FLUID=1
ENDNETWORKCOMPONENT
PHASESPLITNODE
PARAMETERS; A collection keyword for all phase split node keys. This keyword is hidden in the GUI.
Output
The following keywords are used for Output for PHASESPLITNODE:
Process equipment
Transmitter: Defines the variable to be transmitted.
SEPARATOR
PARAMETERS; A collection keyword for all separator keys. This keyword is hidden in the GUI.
Output
The following keywords are used for Output for SEPARATOR
CONTROLLER
PARAMETERS; A collection keyword for all controller keys. This keyword is hidden in the GUI.
Output
The following keywords are used for Output for CONTROLLER:
- 18 -
Introduction
Note that there are several controller types. In the example below, Manual controller is used:
NETWORKCOMPONENT TYPE=ManualController, TAG=SetPoint-1
PARAMETERS SETPOINT=(2:0.1,2:0.2,0.3), TIME=(0,2000,2010,4000,4010) s, STROKETIME=0.0,

MAXCHANGE=1.0
ENDNETWORKCOMPONENT
ANNULUS
Initialconditions
PARAMETERS; A collection keyword for all annulus keys. This keyword is hidden in the GUI.
AmbientConditions
AMBIENTDATA; A collection keyword for specifying the Annulus ambient conditions.
AnnulusComponents
COMPONENT; A component to place within the annulus definition.
Output
PROFILEDATA; Defines variable names and time intervals for writing of data to the profile plot file.
FLUIDBUNDLE
Initialconditions
PARAMETERS; A collection keyword for all fluid bundle keys. This keyword is hidden in the GUI.
AmbientConditions
AMBIENTDATA; A collection keyword for specifying the fluid bundle ambient conditions.
BundleComponents
COMPONENT; A component to place within the fluid bundle definition.
Output
SOLIDBUNDLE
Initialconditions
PARAMETERS; A collection keyword for all solid bundle keys. This keyword is hidden in the GUI.
- 19 -
OLGA User manual
AmbientConditions
AMBIENTDATA; A collection keyword for specifying the solid bundle ambient conditions.
BundleComponents
COMPONENT; A component to place within the solid bundle definition.
Output
Connections
The CONNECTION keyword is used to couple network components, such as a node and a flowpath.
Each flowpath has an inlet and an outlet terminal that can be connected to a node terminal. Boundary
nodes (that is, NODE TYPE = CLOSED, MASSFLOW, PRESSURE) have one terminal, while nodes
connecting flowpaths have an arbitrary number of terminals where flowpaths can be connected to. Note
that the Junction node has a special terminal for the mixing section.
CONNECTION TERMINALS = (FP_BRAN INLET,NODE_INLET FLOWTERM_1)
CONNECTION TERMINALS = (FP_BRAN OUTLET,NODE_OUTLET FLOWTERM_1)
Separator and PhaseSplitNode have special handling of terminals.
The CONNECTION keyword is also used for coupling signal components.
CONNECTION TERMINALS = (FP_BRAN Transmitter-1@INPSIG, SETPOINT-1 OUTSIG_1)
Example file
The keyword examples shown above can be combined to an OLGA .key file or .genkey file
- 20 -
Introduction
- 21 -
OLGA User manual
Simulation model
An OLGA simulation is controlled by defining a set of data groups consisting of a keyword followed by a list
of keys with appropriate values. Each data group can be seen as either a simulation object, information
object, or administration object.
Logical sections
The different keywords are divided into logical sections:
 CaseDefinition: administration objects for simulation control

 Library: information objects referenced in one or more simulation objects
 Controller: controller simulation objects
 FlowComponent: network simulation objects
 Boundary&InitialConditions: simulation objects for flow in and out of flowpath
 ProcessEquipment: simulation objects for flow manipulation
 ThermalComponent: thermal simulation objects
 FA-models: administration objects for flow assurance models
 Compositional: administration and information objects for component tracking
 Output: administration objects for output generation
 Drilling: drilling simulation object
 Submodeling: simulation objects for submodeling
 OLGA Well: OLGA Well simulation object
Network model
A simulation model is then created by combining several simulation objects to form a simulation network,
where information objects can be used within the simulation objects and the administration objects control
various parts of the simulation. The simulation objects can again reference both information and
administration objects.
The network objects can be of the following types:
 Flowpath: the pipeline through which the fluid mix flows

 Node: a boundary condition or connection point for two or more flowpaths
 Separator: a special node model that can separate the fluid into single phases
 Controller: objects that perform supervision and automatic adjustments of other parts of the
simulation network
 Thermal: objects for ambient heat conditions
The simulation model can handle a network of diverging and converging flowpaths. Each flowpath consists
of a sequence of pipes and each pipe is divided into sections (that is, control volumes). These sections
correspond to the spatial mesh discretization in the numerical model. The staggered spatial mesh applies
flow variables (for example, velocity, mass flow, flux) at section boundaries and volume variables (for
example, pressure, temperature, mass, volume fractions) as average values in the middle of the section.
The figure below shows a flowpath divided into five sections.
- 22 -
Introduction
Each flowpath must start and end at a node, and there are two applications for nodes:
 Specifying boundary conditions for a flowpath: Closed node, Mass node and Pressure node.
 Coupling flowpaths (for example, split or merge): e.g. Internal node, Junction node and Phase split
node.
The figure below shows a simple simulation network consisting of three flowpaths and four nodes.
The flowpath is the main component in the simulation network, and can also contain other simulation
objects (for example, process equipment, not shown in the figure above).
It is also possible to describe the simulation model with a text file. See Input files for further descriptions.
- 23 -
OLGA User manual
The OLGA model
OLGA Model basics

OLGA is a three-fluid model, that is, separate continuity equations are applied for the gas, for the oil (or
condensate) and water liquids and also for oil (or condensate) and water droplets. Gas is always assumed
to be lighter than oil and water in OLGA, but oil may be either lighter or heavier than water.
These fluids may be coupled through interfacial mass transfer. Three momentum equations are used; one
for each of the continuous liquid phases (oil/condensate and water) and one for the combination of gas
with liquid droplets. The velocity of any liquid droplets entrained in the gas phase is given by a slip
relation. One mixture energy equation is applied; assuming that all phases are at the same temperature.
This yields seven conservation equations and one equation of state to be solved: the seven conservation
equations are three for mass, three for momentum, and one for energy, while the equation of state is for
pressure.
To close the system of equations, fluid properties, boundary and initial conditions are required.
The equations are linearized and a sequential solution scheme is applied. The pressure and temperature
calculations are de-coupled that is, current pressure is based on previous temperature.
The semi-implicit time integration implemented allows for relatively long time steps, orders of magnitudes
longer than those of an explicit method (which would be limited by the Courant Friedrich Levy criterion
based on the speed of sound).
The numerical error is corrected for over a period of time. The error manifests as an error in local fluid
volume (as compared to the relevant pipe volume).
[1] Note that the OLGA model has only been verified and tuned for fluids where oil is lighter than water.
Transport Equations
In the sections below, the transport equations at the foundation of OLGA are outlined on a general,
continuous form.
Note: Numerical considerations, such as discretization in time and space, are not addressed here.
Mass Transport Equations
For a mass field denoted mi traveling at velocity Ui the mass transport equation is
where ∂t denotes differentiation in time, ∂z denotes spatial differentiation, Ψji denotes the rate of mass
transfer between the j-th and i-th mass field, that is, dispersions, droplet deposition and entrainment, and
phase transitions, and Gi denotes any mass source/sink.
For standard, table-based, three-phase flow, five mass fields are considered - mass of gas phase, mass of
oil in the liquid layers, mass of water in the liquid layers, mass of oil droplets in gas, and mass of water
droplets in gas - which yields five mass transport equations. The only mass transfer terms considered are
those governing the entrainment and deposition of droplets, resulting in the five mass transport equations
below. Other dispersions and the mass distribution between the phases are given instantaneously based
on the current conditions.
- 24 -
The OLGA model
Mass transport equation for gas phase:
where a subscript G denotes gas phase.
Mass transport equation for oil in liquid layers:
where a subscript H denotes oil phase while subscripts l and g denote the liquid and gas layers,
respectively.
Mass transport equation for water in liquid layers:
where a subscript W denotes water phase while subscripts l and g denote the liquid and gas layers,
respectively.
Mass transport equation for oil droplets in gas layer:
where a subscript H denotes oil phase while subscripts l and g denote the liquid and gas layers,
respectively.
Mass transport equation for water droplets in gas layer:
where a subscript W denotes water phase while subscripts l and g denote the liquid and gas layers,
respectively.
Momentum Balance Equations
For a momentum field denoted miUi the momentum balance equation is
(1)
where ∂t denotes differentiation in time, ∂t denotes spatial differentiation, g is the acceleration of gravity, φ
is the pipe angle relative to the gravitational vector, Pi is the pressure force, GiUi is the momentum
contribution corresponding to the mass source/sink Gi, FIji are friction forces between the i-th and j-th mass
field, and Fw denotes the wall friction. Ψji denotes momentum contributions corresponding to the mass
transfer between the j-th and i-th mass field. In the equation above Ψ+ji accounts for a net contribution from
mass field i to j while Ψ-ji accounts for a net contribution from mass field j to i.
For standard, table-based, three-phase flow, three momentum balance equations are considered - one for
the gas layer, one for the oil layer, and one for the water layer - but before stating them a few
considerations need to be made.
- 25 -
OLGA User manual
First, introduce the definitions
where mg, mh, and mw are the masses associated with the gas, oil, and water layers, respectively.
Then define friction coefficients according to
where l and k are layers and the sum over i in l indicates summation over all mass fields associated with
layer l.
Finally, using information about the geometry and properties of the layers, the layer pressures Pi can be
rewritten in terms of the pressure P at the top of the pipe according to
where α denote layer volume fractions. The additional terms in equations for the oil and water layer
pressures are referred to as level gradients.
With these definitions at hand, the momentum equations can be written as below.
Momentum equation for the gas layer:
Momentum equation for the oil layer:
- 26 -
The OLGA model
Momentum equation for the water layer:
Conservation of Volume
Given the pressure, P, and the volume fractions, αi, the mass transport equations and momentum balance
equations above can be used to determine the masses, mi, and velocities, Ui.
Using the trivial constraint that the volume of the fluid equals to the volume of the pipe it resides in together
with the equation of state, the volume equation is given by
where L denotes the existing phases.
Now, given a temperature, T, the pressure, P, can be obtained, and, thus, all that remains is to determine
the temperature to solve the set of equations outlined.
Energy Balance
The energy balance equation for a mass field mi can be written as
where Ei denotes the field energy, Hi denotes the field enthalpy, S denotes enthalpy source/sink, Q is the
heat flux through the pipe wall, and Tij models the energy transfer between fields.
Because OLGA operates with a single temperature, the energy equation reduces to
(2)
- 27 -
OLGA User manual
Flow regimes
The equations governing the flow in OLGA, outlined in Transport Equations on page 24, contain a number
of undetermined quantities, for example, friction coefficients and mass transfer terms. The treatment of
these quantities are determined by the flow, or more precisely by the flow regime. OLGA recognizes two
basic classes of flow regimes, separated and distributed flow, the former subdivided into stratified and
annular flow and the latter subdivided into dispersed bubble flow and slug flow, see Figure 5.
Figure 1 Illustrations of the flow regimes in OLGA. For clarity, gas-liquid flow is used in the
illustrations. The top left and right image illustrate the separated flow regimes and the two images
on the bottom left illustrate the distributed ones.
 Stratified flow (a): For illustration purposes, a sharp gas-liquid interface is used despite that the
presence of droplets indicate that it should be diffuse.
 Annular flow (b): For illustration purposes, a sharp gas-liquid interface is used despite that it should be
diffuse.
 Dispersed bubble flow or bubbly flow (c).
 Slug flow (d): The turbulence at the slug front expels droplets into the gas layer ahead of the slug and
entrains gas bubbles into the slug body. Behind the slug, the Taylor/Dumitrescu bubble is seen with a
liquid layer smoothly decaying back to an equilibrium state.
The following sections outline the different flow regimes as well as the transition between them.
- 28 -
The OLGA model
Stratified flow
In Figure 2, the basic geometry parameters for stratified pipe flow are illustrated. For clarity, the illustration
is limited to two-phase flow, but the extension to three-phase flow is straight forward and will only add a
second liquid layer with associated parameters.
Figure 2 Illustration of the basic geometry parameter for stratified pipe flow used in OLGA. For
clarity, only two-phase gas-liquid flow is shown. The coordinate system is defined so that z
denotes the coordinate along the pipe while y denotes the elevation inside the pipe. φ denotes the
pipe inclination relative to the gravity vector while θ is used to denote pipe inclination relative to
the horizontal. hg and hl are the center line depths for the gas and liquid layers, respectively, and Ag
and Al are the areas of the gas and liquid layers, respectively. δl denotes half the liquid wetted
angle while Sg and Sl are the wetted perimeters for gas and liquid respectively. Finally, Sgl is the
gas-liquid interfacial perimeter.
Taking a step back, considering the momentum equations as derived from the generic conservation
equation for an extensive property, equation (1) in Transport Equations on page 24 can be written as
(3)
In principle this equation accounts for the full 3D effect of a slowly evolving three phase stratified flow
where the friction and mass flux depend on the 2-dimensional cross sectional dimension. OLGA has two
different fluid mechanical models for stratified flow: the OLGA flow model and the OLGA HD flow model.
The main difference between the two relates to how the cross sectional dimension is taken into account.
The parameters illustrated in the figure above, together with,for example, fluid properties and physical
properties of the pipe itself, are input to these models. Both models include liquid droplets in the gas and
oil-water dispersions.
- 29 -
OLGA User manual
The OLGA stratified flow model
The OLGA stratified flow model covers the stratified smooth and stratified wavy flow regimes. The cross
sectional dimension is taken into account by using average bulk velocities and friction model closures.
The momentum flux terms in equation (3) are approximated by
where Uf is the average bulk velocity, and subscript f denotes the phase.
The shear stress, f, is correlated to the friction factor, λf, and the bulk velocity through the relation
where ρf is the phase density.
Closure relations are used in determination of friction factors for the different phases. The frictions are
classified as either wall frictions or interfacial frictions.
In the OLGA stratified flow model the phase wall frictions are modeled starting from a single phase
analogy, where each layer is considered as being independent of the other layers. Hence, the gas-wall
friction is computed assuming that the gas flows as single phase closed duct flow above a 'frozen' liquid
layer. The liquid-wall frictions are computed assuming that the liquid flows as single phase open pipe flow,
in which the oil layer is assumed to be flowing above a 'frozen' water layer. However, the influence from
the interfacial shear on the wall frictions are accounted for. Furthermore, entrainment and deposition of
liquid droplets in the gas layer, gas (void) in the liquid layers and oil-water dispersions are predicted by the
model and taken into account in all calculations.
The friction factor applied for laminar flow is
The flow is considered laminar for Reynold numbers below the value Remin and turbulent for Reynold
numbers above the value Remax. Interpolation is used for Reynold numbers between the Remin and Remax.
The default values for the thresholds are Remin=2300 and Remax=3000.
For turbulent flow, the model estimates the wave height based on a correlation, and determines whether
the flow regime is smooth or wavy. The turbulent friction factors are determined from correlations taking
into account the flow regime, the wave height and the ratio between frictional and gravitational forces. In
addition the influence from the interfacial shear stress between the gas and the liquid and the presence of
liquid droplets in the gas is included.
Oil-water dispersions
Dispersions are assumed to travel with the same velocity as the continuous phase. that is, we assume
local no-slip. When oil and water are present, water can be dispersed in the oil layer or oil can be
dispersed in the water layer. More details about oil-water dispersions are described in Water.
Tuning of the OLGA stratified flow model
We refer to Tuning for a complete overview of the tuning possibilities for the fluid mechanical flow models.
- 30 -
The OLGA model
The OLGA HD stratified flow model
The OLGA HD stratified flow model, OLGA HD for short, computes the frictions and mass flux terms in (3)
above using a 2-dimensional velocity distributions over the pipe cross section instead of using bulk
velocities and friction factor closures as traditional 1-dimensional models, such as the OLGA stratified flow
model. Combining the 2-dimensional velocity distributions with the 1-dimensional conservation equations
yields a 3-dimensional representation of a slowly evolving flow. The evaluation speed is kept low by
analytical integration of the cross-sectional dimension prior to run-time. All in all this gives a 3-dimensional
flow description at 1-dimensional speed.
The model can handle 1-3 fluid layers, and features a generic layer approach as shown below.
The generic layer approach yields the velocity distribution over the pipe cross section and provides all
frictions and velocity shape factors. The special cases in which the upper and lower interfaces disappear,
is handled as well. The model agrees with the log law (in turbulence theory) at the pipe walls and a
generalized log law at interfaces. The model is adapted to handle wavy as well as smooth interfaces.
Integration of the velocity distribution yields a generic expression for the wall friction τ. For two phase flow,
when the possibility of partial back flow is neglected, the wall friction for gas and liquid can be written as
The wall friction depends on the Reynolds number Re, the wall roughness ks, the layer height, h, the
interface friction τi, and the turbulence parameter K. In the single phase limit, the generic wall friction
expression reduces to the Colebrook formula.
The interfacial frictions are found by coupling the layers and requiring continuity in forces and velocities
across the interfaces. The interfacial frictions depend on bulk velocities U, densities ρ, Reynolds numbers
Re and interfacial turbulence levels K in addition to the wall roughness ks and holdup. For two-phase gas
condensate flow, the expression for the interface friction is
Although the wall and interfacial frictions are given by mechanistic models, closure relations are used for
the turbulence parameters K which represent scaled eddy viscosities. Details, including derivations of the
turbulence parameters are given in reference [9]. Here the main formulas relevant for tuning of the model
are given. For smooth interfaces the turbulence parameter used by the model is
- 31 -
OLGA User manual
For wavy interfaces the gas and liquid are treated separately. For gas the expression used is
where Si is the interface perimeter, U is the bulk velocity, A is the pipe area, θ is the pipe angle to the
horizontal and, cg is a proportionality constant. The subscript g means gas and l means liquid.
For liquid the model uses
where cl is a constant.
Oil-water dispersions
Dispersions are assumed to travel with the same velocity as the continuous phase. that is, we assume
local no-slip. Non-uniform distributions yield a profile slip (bulk slip). When oil and water are present, OLGA
HD allows for co-existence of oil dispersed in water and water dispersed in oil. Computation of dispersion
viscosity and oil-water bulk slip are further described in Water module - Emulsion on page 141.
Tuning of the OLGA HD stratified flow model
It is possible to tune the wall and interfacial frictions by manipulation of the turbulence parameters K. In
three phase flow, the model uses four turbulence parameters:
Kg - turbulence parameter for the gas-oil interface, gas side
Kh - turbulence parameter for the gas-oil interface, oil side
Kb - turbulence parameter for the oil-water interface, oil side
Ka - turbulence parameter for the oil-water interface, water side
In practice the tuning is available through specification of the four keys: TC_GHFAC, TC_HGFAC,
TC_HWFAC and TC_WHFAC in the TUNING keyword. In the OLGA HD Stratified Flow Model these keys
are multiplied with the computed values of Kg, Kh, Kb and Ka respectively.
Figure 3 Illustration of the where the resulting parameters apply.
Note: The effect of varying the tuning keys on the wall and interface frictions is not linear. For two-phase
simulations, the model only uses two parameters. If one of the phases is gas, the model uses
TC_GHFAC for the gas side and TC_HGFAC for the liquid side. If no gas is present, the model uses
TC_WHFAC for the oil side and TC_WHFAC for the water side.
- 32 -
The OLGA model
We refer to Tuning on page 45 for a complete overview of the tuning possibilities for the fluid mechanical
flow models.
Annular flow
When the flow regime is annular, the flow model assumes that a dispersed oil-water layer exists at the pipe
wall, and that gas with liquid droplets exist in the center (see Figure 4). The wetted perimeter of the liquid
layer will in this case be equal to the pipe inner circumference.
Figure 4 Illustration of the cross section for annular flow.
If the volume fraction of water is below the inversion point, the liquid layer is assumed to be oil with
dispersed water, otherwise it is assumed as water with dispersed oil. In many respects the annular flow
regime is handled similarly to the stratified regime. Also here the cross sectional dimension is
approximated by bulk velocities and friction factor closures. The wall friction factor for the liquid layer at the
wall is calculated based on whether the flow is laminar or turbulent using interpolation between the laminar
and turbulent value for Reynold numbers between Remin(default value 2300) and Remax (default value
3000). The correlation used for the friction factor for the gas-liquid interface depends on the estimated
wave height and whether the flow is smooth or wavy.
Dispersed bubble flow
Dispersed bubble flow is characterized by a liquid continuum containing gas bubbles. Typically bubble flow
will occur when the liquid superficial velocity is large compared to the gas superficial velocity.
The OLGA flow model defines
where Ug is the average gas (bubble) velocity, Ul is the average liquid velocity, SD is the distribution slip
and Ur is the relative velocity. For bubble flow, the distribution slip and the relative velocity are determined
by the model from semi-empirical correlations.
The friction factors and the gas and liquid volume fractions are computed from semi-empirical correlations
taking the pipe inclination and the fluid properties into account.
- 33 -
OLGA User manual
Slug flow
Slug flow consists of liquid slugs separated by so-called Taylor/Dumitrescu bubbles, that is, elongated gas
bubbles several pipe diameters in length. There are several mechanisms that can be the onset of slugging,
for example, terrain slugs where liquid accumulates in dips or at a riser base, start-up slugs due to liquid
accumulated in low points during, for example, a shut-in, liquid surges due to pigging, or hydrodynamic
slugging due to instabilities induced by the flow itself. Common to all these situations are rapid changes in
holdup. Figure 5 illustrates a time series measurement of the holdup at a given position in a pipeline during
hydrodynamic slugging. The sharp jumps from a low to high holdup are slug fronts and the jumps from
high to low are slug tails. It can be seen that the jump in holdup is much sharper at the front and that a
distinctive holdup profile can be seen in the tail region.
Figure 5 Measurement of the holdup at a given position of a pipeline that is in hydrodynamic

slugging. This illustrates the effective holdup. In the slug bodies the gas is mixed into the liquid,
resulting in a bubbly flow that occupies the entire pipe cross section.
The standard OLGA flow regime treats hydrodynamic slug flow through the so-called unit cell model
whenever Slug tracking is not in use. In this approach, slug flow is treated in an average manner where a
control volume with hydrodynamic slug flow is assumed to consist of an infinitely long train of identical, fully
developed slug units. A slug unit consists of a Taylor/Dumitrescu bubble followed by a liquid slug, possibly
containing a fraction of small bubbles. The slug unit cell model utilizes the other three flow regimes to
describe the slug flow as a linear combination thereof; the Taylor/Dumitrescu bubble is modeled as either
stratified or annular flow while the slug body is described using bubbly flow. The slug unit cell model
provides information on mean holdup, mean pressure drop, and the slug fraction, that is, the relationship
between the length of the liquid slug as compared to the length of the slug unit, but it is unable to produce
information about slug length distributions or variations in slug frequency.
Note: The stratified flow regime in a Taylor/Dumitrescu bubble utilizes the OLGA stratified flow model.
To address individual slugs, whether induced by terrain effects, operationally induced, or hydrodynamic,
the slug tracking model must be invoked, see Slug tracking.
Flow regime transitions
The flow regime applied is determined in two steps. First, a candidate is determined for each class of flow
regimes, that is, for separated and distributed flow.
For separated flow, the choice between stratified and annular flow is purely based on the pipe inclination.
For downward flow, annular flow is assumed if sin(φ)<0.1 where φ is the pipe angle relative to the gravity
vector, that is, a pipe inclination at -84.3° relative to the horizontal. For upward flow, annular flow is
assumed if sin(φ)<0.5, that is, a +60° pipe inclination relative to the horizontal.
- 34 -
The OLGA model
For dispersed flow, the slug fraction determined by the slug unit cell model is considered. If the slug
fraction is unity or greater bubbly flow is used, otherwise slug flow is used as flow regime candidate.
When the two flow regime candidates for separated and dispersed flow has been settled, the flow regime
is determined by applying a minimum slip criterion.
Flowline modeling
The following sections outline how hydraulic systems can be set up in OLGA. The concepts of key
constituent parts of an OLGA model, e.g., branches, pipes, and nodes, will be briefly discussed.
Branch
In OLGA, a branch, also denoted flowpath, can be viewed as a pipeline stretching between two points in
space. The branch has an inlet and an outlet, each connected to a node that defines the local boundary
conditions. The notion of a branch having an inlet and an outlet implies that the branch also has a positive
flow direction, however properties of the flow are invariant to this direction and the only effect is whether
the flow through the branch is positive or negative. The branch itself contains no information about the
properties of the pipeline it forms, it is merely a container collecting all elements that define the pipeline,
e.g., pipes defining the physical properties of the pipeline, heat transfer defining its thermal behavior, and
equipment positioned in the branch.
Note: OLGA does not account for the effects of pipe bends apart from effects due to changes in static
head. Effects of pipe bends can be accounted for by explicitly adding pressure loss coefficients at
specified positions, please refer to the LOSS keyword.
Node
In OLGA, nodes can typically be generalized into three main categories; terminal nodes, internal nodes
and junction nodes. Terminal nodes, also known as boundary nodes, are connected to a single branch to
define the boundary conditions at the end of a network. Internal nodes can be viewed as mixing volumes
used to connect two or more branches.
An internal node has its own volume which is either specified by users or by default. The mass and energy
equations are set up and solved for the volume of the internal node. Momentum is not transferred over the
node. This means the fluid is accelerated from zero velocity to the velocity at the first/last boundary of a
connecting branch. A separator or a phase split node is handled as an internal node with regards to the
conservation equations.
A junction node does not have its own mixing volume. The mixing occurs in the first/last section of the
branch that is connected to the mixing terminal of this node. There is no storage of masses and energy in
the junction node itself. The node momentum velocity is calculated and is used for momentum equations of
the connecting branches that receive flows from the junction node. This means the fluid is accelerated
from the node velocity to the velocity at the first/last boundary of a connecting branch. Stand nodes, bit
nodes, and jet pumps, are treated as junction nodes, except the node velocity is set to zero for these three
node types. Hence, momentum is not transferred for these components. Junction nodes are the preferred
choice for multiple-in and single-out, or single-in and multiple-out configurations.
If for some reason it is desirable to divide a continuous flowpath into two flowpaths (single-in and single-
out), it is recommended to use a junction node to connect them. Even when conserving momentum, the
results obtained may be slightly different from the single flowpath case in simulations with multiple phases
(gas, oil and water), due to a slight difference in the calculation method used.
- 35 -
OLGA User manual
Note: Plots in the mixing section for the junction node may show values that are not consistent with the
values obtained at the connected flowpaths. This is because of how the node calculations are
performed. In particular, volume variables such as PT and TM show values at the section center that in
reality correspond to the values at the inlet boundary of the mixing volume closest to the node. These
inconsistencies can be safely ignored.
Pipe
A pipe is a straight segment of the pipeline with a defined length and elevation. Each pipe has a set of
constant properties, such as diameter, pipe wall, and wall surface roughness, but in a branch the different
pipes may have different sets of properties. Each pipe is split into several segments denoted sections, or
control volumes, see Figure 6. These sections form the spatial discretization of the model when solving the
equations outlined in Transport Equations on page 24.
Figure 6 Illustration of pipe split into six sections. The enumeration of sections (S) and section
boundaries (B) are indicated.
Position
To place equipment and devices as well as to retrieve output at specific locations in a branch, the position
needs to be determined. There are two ways to specify a position in a branch.
1. Use the PIPE key together with the SECTION or SECTIONBOUNDARY keys to reference a specific section
or section boundary in the pipe specified.
2. Use the ABSPOSITION key to specify a location in terms of the distance from the branch inlet. This
distance is then converted into a reference to a section or section boundary depending on its use. For
example, if the location is associated with a valve, it is converted to a section boundary reference,
while for source it is converted to a section reference. For section references, the position is moved to
the center of the section. For section boundary references, the position is moved to the closest section
boundary.
The specification of a position as outlined above, can either be given directly on the associated equipment,
device, or output specification, or it can be given indirectly as a reference to a POSITION keyword. The
POSITIONkeyword provides the same functionality as outlined above with the addition that it provides a
named reference that can be reused in multiple instances.
Multiple Pipes in the Cross Section
OLGA provides several different options for modeling configurations with multiple pipes in the same cross
section. For an individual pipe, it is possible to let it represent multiple identical pipes run in parallel and it
is also possible to use so-called simple annulus flow to model flow in an annulus without considering the
flow in the inner tubing. More advanced modeling capabilities are provided through the keywords
FLUIDBUNDLE and ANNULUS where different types of pipe-in-pipe setups can be achieved.
- 36 -
The OLGA model
Network
Using branches and nodes, see Figure 7, any type of network can be connected ranging from a single
branch configuration as shown in Figure 8, through converging and diverging networks as shown in Figure
9 and Figure 10, respectively, to looped networks as shown in Figure 11. Combinations of such
configurations allow any type of network to be created.
Figure 7 The basic components used to build a pipeline network.
Figure 8 Single branch configuration with a boundary node connected at each end of the branch.
Figure 9 Converging network (assuming flow from left to right). Four boundary nodes at the inlet
side are connected to branches that merge until reaching a single boundary node on the outlet
side.
Figure 10 Diverging network (assuming flow from left to right). A single boundary nodes at the inlet
side is connected to a branch that splits repeatedly into two at the internal node before reaching
four boundary nodes on the outlet side.
Figure 11 Looped network. From a single node at the inlet, the network splits into several parallel
branches before merging back again to reach a singe terminal node at the outlet.
- 37 -
OLGA User manual
Line
A LINE is a type of FLOWPATH for which simplified one-phase calculations are performed.
A LINE also takes into consideration frictional effects and gives a pressure drop along the pipeline. Thus, it
needs fluid properties as a function of both pressure and temperature. These fluid properties are given as
usual with the PVTFILE and FLUID keys.
Note: This also applies when running component tracking (for example, CompTrack, Blackoil). Example
1-phase fluid files are provided with the Sample cases.
How to use
The implementation of a LINE in the OLGA GUI is as follows:
From the Case level right-click and choose
Add → FlowComponent → FLOWPATH.
In the property window for the FLOWPATH choose LINE=YES.
Fill in the required fields in the Property editor. For further instructions on FLOWPATH properties see the
keyword description for FLOWPATH.
LINES must be connected to nodes just as FLOWPATHS are. These nodes must also be defined as
singe-phase by selecting LINE=YES.
Note: LINES cannot be connected to multiphase nodes. LINES can form networks but these networks
must be hydrodynamically decoupled from multiphase networks.
Numerics
OLGA applies one global time-step for the time integration and there is an automatic time-step control
based on the limitation that a fluid particle should not spend less than one time step on passing through
any numerical section length of a pipe (the Courant Friedrich Levy (CFL) criterion based on the fluid
velocity). The user controls the time integration by specifying simulation period in time, time-step
parameters such as initial time step and maximum and minimum time-step values. The latter overrules the
automatic control. There is also an option for using the second-derivative of pressure as a time step
controlling criterion. Some functions in OLGA, e.g. slug-tracking, take control of the time stepping to
ensure a successful simulation.
The spatial integration is performed on a user-defined grid. There are tools available to facilitate the
gridding. There are no formal limitations on the numerical section lengths, but it is considered good
practice to keep all neighbor section length ratios between 0.5 and 2:
0.5 ≤ Dxi/Dxi + 1 ≤ 2 for all i
Additionally it is recommended that each pipe should have at least two sections.
Due to the numerical solution scheme, OLGA is particularly well suited for simulating rather slow mass flow
transients. This is important for the simulation of long transport lines and thermal calculations, where
typical simulation times in the range of hours to several days, and sometimes years, will require long time
steps, to obtain efficient use of the computer.
OLGA is also being used successfully for fast transients such as water hammer and pressure surges in
general. Certain precautions with regards to spatial grid and time-stepping may be needed to keep the
numerical error within acceptable limits.
- 38 -
The OLGA model
The de-coupling of temperature from pressure would normally give a pressure wave propagation velocity
in gas which would be about 15% too low. However, a quasi implicit correction of temperature reduces this
error considerably.
Critical flow calculations are performed in the OLGA valve model, only. A valve with cross section equal to
the pipe should then be positioned on e.g. a pipe outlet if choked flow is expected.
Temperature
OLGA is particularly well suited for sophisticated thermal simulations. Because OLGA is one-dimensional
(calculates along the pipe axis) any 2 and 3-dimensional effects must be modeled explicitly. The basic
OLGA thermal model calculates the inner wall heat transfer coefficient. The built-in correlations are valid
for natural and forced convection and also for the transition between them. Flow pattern is accounted for.
The user may specify pipe walls with material properties, including emissivity to account for radiation, and
must give the ambient properties, that is, temperature and heat transfer coefficient. Based on this the fluid
temperature is calculated.
Special features such as Annulus, Solid- and Fluid bundles make it possible to simulate very complex
structures of pipe-in-pipe and parallel pipes within structures of various solid materials. Taking into account
that temperature is calculated along the pipes one obtains a combination of two-dimensional convective
heat transfer within 3-dimensional heat conducting structures.
Solid bundle cross section of 4 vertical tubes within rock – neighbor tubes are 2.5 m apart. The black "line"
is a temperature iso-line. You clearly see how the area between the tubes is subject to inter-tube heating.
Initial conditions
The requirement for initial conditions is a fundamental difference between a transient and a steady state
model, for example, the results of a steady state calculation may serve as the initial condition (at t = 0 ) for
a transient simulation.
With OLGA the user decides, and later specifies in the input, whether the simulation is to start from a user
defined condition (for instance a specific shut-in condition), or from a steady state multiphase flowing
situation calculated by the program. The steady state pre-processor in OLGA can be used to provide good
initial values for most production situations.
- 39 -
OLGA User manual
In addition, the user may specify the initial condition in detail, for example for a shut-in system, by defining
the initial values for pressures, temperatures, mass flow and gas fractions. Tools for interpolation are
available, for filling in the initial values in all numerical sections of the system.
Finally, the restart capability may be used to start a simulation from conditions saved during a previous
simulation.
Steady state preprocessor

The steady state preprocessor in OLGA computes a steady state solution for a pipeline or an entire flow
network. Steady state pressures, temperatures, mass flows, liquid hold-ups and flow regimes are
calculated along the pipelines.
The steady state preprocessor can be used to:
1. Eliminate the need for user-given initial conditions.

2. Get a consistent initial state as a basis for dynamic simulations.
3. Perform screening studies.
The steady state preprocessor can be used for flow networks with any combination of boundary conditions
at inlets and outlets. Both merging and diverging networks can be calculated. Except for displacement
pumps, Bornemann pumps, and pump battery, the steady state preprocessor incorporates the effect of
process equipment. For PID controllers, the bias settings are used as the controller outputs.
The point model used by the steady state preprocessor can be changed using extensions (see OLGA
Extensibility).
Model description
The steady state preprocessor finds a consistent solution for flow networks by iteration. Networks where all
inlet flows and outlet pressures are known are solved by the following sequence of computations:
1. Phase transitions are computed using old values of pressures and temperatures. The combination of
phase transition and inlet flows gives consistent flow rates along all the pipelines in the entire network.
2. Using the newly computed flows, old temperatures, and the pressure boundary conditions at the
outlet, new pressures are computed along all the pipelines in the network. The point model OLGAS
THREE-PHASE is used in this step.
3. The temperatures along all the network components are computed.
Iteration on the sequence (1) to (3) is performed until the change between two iterates is smaller than a
tolerance. If the inlet flows and/or outlet pressures are not known, an outer iteration is needed in addition
to the one shown above. In this iteration the initial guesses for inlet flows/outlet pressures are refined until
the residuals are smaller than a given tolerance.
How to use
To activate the steady state preprocessor from the OLGA GUI do the following:
In the Property editor for OPTIONS:
 Choose STEADYSTATE=ON to get a full steady state computation including calculations of

temperatures.
 Choose STEADYSTATE=NOTEMP to avoid the temperature calculation. In this case, initial
temperature profiles must be given for all the flow components in the network.
The latter option can be useful if the preprocessor has problems finding a solution. This implies that the
simulation must be run dynamically for some time to achieve a true thermal steady state solution.
- 40 -
The OLGA model
The steady state preprocessor can sometimes fail to find a solution if flows are negative, that is, if the flow
goes from the outlet to the inlet of a pipeline. For such pipelines you aretherefore recommended to set
INIFLOWDIR=NEGATIVE in the BRANCH input group.
To do some fast studies (screening studies), you can use the steady state preprocessor results. In this
case, use STEADYSTATE = ON under OPTIONS and STARTTIME equal ENDTIME under
INTEGRATION.
If input parameters (boundary conditions, valve openings, and so on) are given as time series, the steady
state preprocessor uses the values at the start time.
Notes
The solution computed by the steady state preprocessor and the solution obtained when simulation with
the dynamic solver until a steady state is achieved might not be equal. This is mainly because of the
following reasons:
1. For unstable systems (for example, slugging cases) the steady state preprocessor can find a solution
that differs from the average value in the transient solution because there is no truly steady-state
condition.
2. The steady state preprocessor has some small residual errors that are removed by the transient
simulation. In some sensitive cases, this can cause a difference in pressure, temperature and hold-up
profiles.
Therefore, if the slug flow regime is detected in the simulation, you are recommended to perform a
dynamic simulation with the slug tracking model.
The steady state preprocessor is not as robust as the dynamic OLGA. This is particularly the case for
simulations with pressure or well (productivity index) as inlet boundary conditions, or negative sources. In
such cases, if the preprocessor does not converge to a reliable solution, the preprocessor must be turned
OFF (STEADYSTATE=OFF under OPTIONS), and INITIALCONDITIONS must be applied to all the
FLOWPATHS instead.
The steady state preprocessor cannot handle counter-current flow (such as positive gas flow and negative
liquid flow).
The steady state preprocessor cannot handle zero flow in the pipeline, therefore it should not be used with
closed valves in the flowpath or with mass sources that sum up to zero flow rate at start time.
For flow networks with one or more separators, the steady state preprocessor uses a simplified approach.
The separator is treated as a simple node with mixture properties and the phase flow fractions of any
phase are assumed to be equal for any of the outlets of a separator. This approach can lead to
discontinuities between the steady state and dynamic solution.
The steady state preprocessor can be run with wax deposition or hydrate kinetics activated, but the
preprocessor does not consider the wax phase or hydrate formation.
The point model used by the steady-state preprocessor can be changed using extensions. Installed
extensions of this type are available in the key SSFLOWMODEL. If extensions are not used, the same
model as the FLOWMODEL key is used.
- 41 -
OLGA User manual
2nd order scheme

Mass equations can be solved with two different schemes in OLGA. The default is a 1st order scheme
(upwind implicit) and the alternative is a 2nd order Total Variation Diminishing (TVD) scheme.
The 1st order scheme is more robust and should be the preferred choice in most situations.
The 2nd order scheme has less numerical diffusion and therefore keeps holdup fronts better.
The 2nd order scheme for mass equations is to be used when it is important to track relatively sharp
holdup fronts. Examples are:
 Oil-Water fronts
 Inhibitor fronts
 Gas-Oil fronts
Model description
The 2nd order method used for the mass equations is a combination of different numerical schemes to get
a stable method that satisfies the TVD (total variation diminishing) condition. For smooth gradients the
method is 2nd order while for non-smooth flow (shocks) the method reduces to 1st order upstream. The
smoothness of the data is measured on the control volume boundary like this
Where m is the mass and θ is the measure of smoothness. If θ < 0 the method reduces to first order
upstream and if θ > 0 the method uses 2nd order methods. In the 2nd order region the numerical scheme
is determined based on a 2nd order limiter. In OLGA the limiter known as the van Leer limiter is chosen.
Simulation differences between the 1st order and 2nd order schemes
Figure 12 Profile plot of an oil–water front showing the differences between the two schemes. The
number of sections in the pipeline is 50, 100 and 500, respectively.
- 42 -
The OLGA model
Figure 13 Profile plots of a gas–oil front. The number of sections in the pipeline is 50, 100, 200, 500
and 1000, respectively.
Figure 14 Trend plot showing the hold-up at the top of a riser. The number of sections in the riser
is 15, 30 and 60, respectively.
- 43 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 15 The above figures show profile plots of an oil–water front. Inside the area filled with
water, there are three areas containing MEG.
- 44 -
The OLGA model
How to use
The 2nd order scheme for the mass equations is activated by setting MASSEQSCHEME=2NDORDER in
the OPTIONS keyword.
The 1st order scheme diffusive behavior reduces unphysical numerical instabilities in the simulation if they
occur. For simulations where instabilities are observed you are not recommended to use the 2nd order
scheme. For such problems the 2nd order scheme only make matters worse because it enhances the
numerical oscillations.
Because the 2nd order method is only implemented for the mass transport equations, the final result from
the equation set does not converge to 2nd order accuracy. The improvement in the result also differs
depending on which physical phenomena are of interest. For example, for simulations where pressure
waves or temperature waves are of interest, the improvement from the 2nd order method is small. For
simulations where propagation of holdup fronts is of interest, the improvement can be significant.
The 2nd order method only works if the CFL criterion is fulfilled. Therefore, it is not possible to violate the
CFL criterion by increasing MINDT when the 2nd order option is set.
Time step control

The DTCONTROL keyword makes it possible to adjust the time step according to different criteria. It
should be applied with care as it may affect the speed of the simulations.
DTCONTROL can be applied at Case level, for a flowpath and for a node. Keys available in each of these
three keywords are different, although some are present in more than one.
The keys can be categorized as either switches (accepting ON/OFF values) or tuning factors (accepting
values from 0 to 1). When a switch is OFF, the corresponding tuning factor is ignored. The smaller the
value of the tuning factor, the stricter the constraint set for the time step.
For individual flowpaths the tuning factors can be coupled to a controller. This means that the time step
controls can be modified and turned on and off at any time during the simulation. The main purpose of this
is to allow very careful time step control only when needed to not increase the run time more than
necessary. An example is turning on the rheology control only during start-up of pumps or sources when
the fluid velocity changes from very low (or zero) to a larger value.
Tuning
The TUNING keyword makes it possible to tune the fluid properties, friction, phase mass transfer and
entrainment of liquid droplets into the gas phase.
The TUNING keyword can be used for adjusting the OLGA model to specific sets of measured data or for
sensitivity studies. TUNING should be applied with great care, as it might cause the validation and
verification of the OLGA model to no longer be valid.
License requirements
The Tuning module requires a separate license.
Model description
The tuning coefficients are multiplied by the related values. These are either calculated by OLGA or set in
the input file. This depends on whether the tuned parameter is dynamically calculated by OLGA or case
invariant, for example, geometry information.
- 45 -
OLGA User manual
How to use
Specify the desired tuning coefficients and where they apply.
The tuning coefficients AREA, DIAMETER and ROUGHNESS can only be specified for an entire pipe or
an entire branch. It is not possible to specify these coefficients using the section key.
The keys POSITION, PIPE and SECTION will be processed in a nested manner. The number of entries
must either be one or a multiple of the listed number of combinations of pipes, sections or positions.
Fluids and PVT

There are four main methods for describing fluid properties (PVT) in OLGA:
 Lookup table: Fluid properties tabulated at given pressures and temperatures are read from a PVT-
file. The least computational demanding method. Suitable when the fluid composition does not change
much along the flowpaths or over time. See PVT lookup table on page 47 for more information.
 Compositional Tracking: The fluid properties are calculated using a full compositional approach. The
most computational demanding method. Should be considered when significant changes in the
composition are expected. See Compositional tracking on page 58 for more information.
 Blackoil: The fluid properties are calculated based on blackoil correlations. Useful when limited
information about the production fluid is available. See Blackoil on page 49 for more information.
 Single component: Handles single component fluids crossing the saturation line. Should be used for
fluids consisting of only one component. See Single component on page 65 for more information.
Special fluids and solids

The PVT methods can be combined with several different models to account for different types of fluids
and solids. See the compatibility table below for the full list of fluid and solids types available in OLGA and
for which PVT methods they can be used. Reservoir fluid refers to gas-oil-water fluids with Newtonian
rheology and are covered by all the PVT methods except Single component. For information about fluids
and solids (such as mud, particles and wax) that are covered by additional models, see Special fluids and
solids on page 161.
Table 1 Compatibility between fluid/solid models and PVT methods
- 46 -
The OLGA model
PVT models
PVT lookup table
The lookup table file is based on a PVT analysis/calculation of thermodynamic properties of a fluid with
constant total composition. The file name extension convention for this type of file is .tab.
A table file is normally generated by using a fluid property package with a specialized OLGA table file
generator.
A PVT lookup table file contains tables for varying pressure and temperature for basic fluid properties for
gas and liquid, and optionally water as a separate phase.
When applying the PVT lookup tables, OLGA reads the table files and interpolates in the property tables to
obtain fluid and related phase properties for specific pressures and temperatures at every segment along a
pipeline.
The required properties are listed in the description of the data file formats referenced below.
There are two types of table file formats which are accepted by OLGA: Fixed format and keyword-based
format.
The keyword-based format allows for some additional data that may be useful in some cases: The
composition is given and standard conditions properties are available separately, allowing a P-T table
range not including standard conditions, even if standard condition flow rates and phase ratios are given at
standard conditions in input and/or output.
Note: When more than one fluid properties file is used, they all have to have the same format.
The following sections describe how to use PVT lookup table files, model details and format of the lookup
table files for phase-related fluid properties:
Model description
It is assumed that the gas properties also include any water vapor contributions.
In the case where separate liquid/free water properties are given, the properties of the liquid phase are
interpreted as the properties of an oil/hydrocarbon phase.
The partial derivatives of gas and liquid densities with respect to pressure and temperature are required as
separate tables. This is because the partial derivatives should be those of the isolated phase, gas or liquid,
at the actual thermodynamic conditions. These cannot be obtained from the densities by interpolation in
the tables because the partial derivatives in that case would also include phase mass transfer/changes in
phase compositions.
OLGA has an internal water property package that can be used for gas-oil-water cases if there are no
water properties in the lookup table file. This option has the limitation that no water is present in the gas
phase and that water vaporization and condensation is not taken into account.
It is possible to define equidistant and non-equidistant regular and irregular pressure-temperature grids,
depending on file format.
A schematic representation of the pressure (P)-temperature (T) grid and indication of the two-phase region
in an equidistant table is given in Figure 16.
- 47 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 16 A schematic representation of a temperature-pressure equidistant table.
All pressure- and temperature-dependent properties will be given at such points in the P-T plane.
Properties at a given pressure and temperature are then calculated in OLGA by using bilinear interpolation
in the tables.
For the gas mass fraction, a more refined interpolation is used close to the two-phase envelope, utilizing
the bubble point pressures given in the file. For pressures above the bubble point pressure, the equilibrium
gas mass fraction is set to zero.
When generating a PVT lookup-table for OLGA, it is important to consider the following:
 When defining the pressure and temperature ranges for the lookup tables, it is important to include the
expected pressures and temperatures for the whole pipeline system modeled in OLGA. It is beneficial,
however, to obtain as much detail as possible within the pressure and temperature range. An
excessively wide range may result in lower accuracy for properties that varies non-linearly and could
thus give less accurate simulations.
 It is important to check the property tables for unphysical discontinuities or strange tendencies in the
properties as functions of P and T. This can be done by the plotting facility in the OLGA GUI.
 Check also that the gas and liquid fractions are properly set for the single-phase pressure-temperature
regions. Gas mass fraction should be zero to the left of the critical temperature and one to the right.
 Adding water to a composition in your PVT calculation tool: If there is free water in the reservoir
formation, the added water should be sufficient to saturate the gas phase. This may be particularly
important for gas wells.
 The properties of a phase (gas, oil, free water) which at thermodynamic equilibrium should not be
present for certain conditions, may still be required by OLGA in some situations. This issue is
discussed in more detail in the section PVT properties for non-existing phase.
- 48 -
The OLGA model
The syntax details for the two PVT file formats can be found in the following sections:
 Fixed format lookup table file

 In the case of activating the complex fluid module for multiphase flow with non-Newtonian liquid
rheology, additional input may be given in the fixed format file. See Complex fluid module for details.
 Keyword based lookup table file
How to use
The PVT lookup table files must be generated according to the rules given for the two formats defined for
OLGA:
 Fixed format, see Fixed format lookup table file for details.
 In the case of activating the complex fluid module for multiphase flow with non-Newtonian liquid
rheology, additional input may be given in the fixed format file. See the following section for details:
Complex fluid module.
 Keyword based format, see Keyword based lookup table file for details.
To activate the option of using lookup table files, the following input keys must be set:
 FILES PVTFILE must be set to the PVT lookup table files.

 OPTIONS COMPOSITIONAL must be set to OFF, MEG, MEOH or ETOH
 BRANCH FLUID must be set by using one of the following options:
 Keyword-based PVT file format:
 The relevant fluid label as defined in the lookup table file.
 Fixed format PVT file format:
 Number of the fluid as defined in the PVT file, numbering as sequence in file and sequence
of files, if multiple PVT files are defined.
 Label of fluid if defined in the PVT file.
 For keyword NODE of type mass, pressure, internal, separator or phase split, FLUID must be set for
the specific node according to the same rules as for branch.
Blackoil
Blackoil modeling enables you to make a compositional model with a minimum of input. Compared to
Compositional Tracking, the Blackoil model is faster in terms of cpu cycles, and it treats shut-in cases
more accurately than the standard PVT table option.
The module makes it possible to perform calculations with a minimum of information about the production
fluids. Details about the fluid composition are not required for a blackoil simulation; specific gravity of gas
and oil and the gas–oil ratio (GOR) at standard conditions are the only necessary data. If water is present,
also the specific gravity of water must be input. Note that no fluid table is needed.
A blackoil feed can consist of one gas, one oil and one water component. The gas component consists of
hydrocarbon gas, and optionally H2S, CO2 and N2 components. It is possible to specify more than one
blackoil feed, and for such a mixture each component of each feed is tracked, c.f. the example network in
Figure 17 below. Inside the OLGA engine, the Blackoil model uses the framework of the Compositional
Tracking module to track the components through the pipelines.
Water properties are calculated by the standard OLGA routines. The physical properties of gas and oil are
calculated from correlations belonging to a specific blackoil model –you can choose between four different
blackoil correlations. To find the properties at a position in a pipe, the correlations use the pressure and the
temperature, as well as the specific gravities of gas, oil and water, and the GOR, at that position. In the
case of multiple feeds, the specific gravities and the GOR are mixture values. The mixture is the average
taken over the constituting blackoils weighted by volume at standard conditions.
- 49 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 17 Network case with several blackoil fluids (feeds) specified. Each component is tracked
through the network. The fluid properties are calculated based on the fluid mixture.
Due to the limited amount of input, the Blackoil model can be a good choice when little is known about the
production fluids. For instance, during planning or design you can use specific gravities and a GOR typical
of the geographical area. Later when production is established, you can insert the actual values, and
possibly make use of the module’s tuning mechanism to further improve the match between observations
and the predictions made by OLGA.
As mentioned above, the Blackoil model is related to the Compositional Tracking module, and might be
preferred as the computationally faster alternative. This is because blackoil models are intrinsically crude,
and cannot provide the detailed analyses of Compositional Tracking. It is, however, possible to include the
effects of MEG in the density calculations by specifying a larger specific gravity for water. This method
should also be used if salts are present.
Model description
The following two assumptions are made for the Blackoil model:
1. An oil component cannot exist as gas in the gas phase. As a consequence, the module is not suited
for studying gas condensate systems. However, this assumption does not exclude the dispersion of oil
and water, the existence of water/oil droplets in the gas or gas bubbles in the liquids.
2. Gas can dissolve in oil.
Blackoil correlations
To calculate the solution gas-oil ratio RSGO and the bubble point pressure Pb, four different correlations
are available in OLGA. They are based on fluids from different areas, and have recommendation for use
as mentioned in Table 2 The default correlation is Lasater.
- 50 -
The OLGA model
Table 2 Blackoil correlations and their recommended usage.
Correlation API Description
Standing [23] API < 15 Based on fluids from California
Lasater [19] API > 15 Based on fluids from Canada, U.S. and South America
Vazquez & Beggs [37] API > 15 Similar to Lasater
Glasø [12] API > 15 Based on fluids from the North Sea
These correlations can be used to calculate the bubble-point pressure, Pb, for a given GOR or an
equilibrium value of RSGO (< GOR) at any pressure below Pb. If measured values for GOR and the bubble
point Pb(Tb) are available, you are recommended to tune the correlations for RSGO(P,T) and Pb(T). In the
following, the four sets of correlations are presented with their tuning coefficients.
Lasater correlation
The basis for the Lasater correlation is the following relationships:
with
, and
(4)
For the purpose of calculating the RSGO, the above equations are inverted with GOR replaced by RSGO,
and Pb replaced with the actual pressure P. That is, find yg from equation (4) with P instead of Pb, and invert
equation (4) to get RSGO, viz.:
(5)
Note: If P > Pb, then RSGO = GOR.
In these equations we have that
API = 141.5 / γo - 131.5
yg = mole fraction of gas
yo = mole fraction of oil
γg = specific gravity of gas
γo = specific gravity of oil
- 51 -
OLGA User manual
Mo = effective molecular weight of tank oil
GOR = gas-oil ratio
f1(yg) = tabulated function of yg
f2(API) = tabulated function of API
CPb = tuning coefficient (default = 1)
CRSGO = tuning coefficient (default = 1)
Pressure must be given with a unit of psia, temperature in °R (degrees Rankine), and GOR and RSGO in
scf/STBO.
Standing correlation
The bubble-point pressure at a given GOR is given by
where
(6)
Symbols have the same meanings as for the Lasater correlation.
To calculate RSGO, replace Pb with the actual pressure P, and replace GOR with RSGO, and invert
equation (6) to obtain
If the pressure is above the bubble-point pressure, then RSGO = GOR.
With the Standing correlation, pressure is measured in psia, and temperature is measured in °F.
Vazques & Beggs correlation
For API < 30:
, and
For API > 30:
, and
If P > Pb, then RSGO = GOR.
- 52 -
The OLGA model
Symbols have the same meanings as for the Lasater correlation. Units for pressure and temperature are
psia and R, respectively.
Glasø correlations
For known GOR, the bubble-point pressure is given implicitly by
and
Substitute RSGO for GOR and P for Pb to obtain
If P > Pb, then RSGO = GOR.
Symbols have the same meanings as for the Lasater correlation. Units for pressure and temperature are
psia and °F, respectively.
Oil and gas density

The oil density depends on pressure, temperature and the amount of gas dissolved in oil. At pressures
below the bubble-point the procedure is as follows.
First, the oil volume formation factor BO is calculated, see [23],
(7)
where
Now, the oil density is calculated as
The density at the bubble-point, ρob, is given by the above equations with RSGO = GOR. At pressures
above the bubble-point, the compressibility is taken into account, and the density is calculated by
co is the isothermal compressibility of undersaturated oil.
Units for equations (7) to : Temperature is given in °F, pressures in psia. BO is given in bbl/STB.
The basis for calculating the gas density is the compressibility equation of state, viz.:
When other variables have units of psia, ft3, lbm, moles and 0R, the gas constant R has the value 10.72.
Now, the gas volume formation factor, BG, can be expressed as
- 53 -
OLGA User manual
The gas density is obtained from
where ρgsc = 0.0764 γg. (The value 0.0764 is the density of air at standard conditions expressed as
lbm/ft3). γg denotes specific gravity of gas at standard conditions.
The gas compressibility z expresses the deviation of the real gas volume from the ideal gas behavior. The
assumption that real gas mixtures will have the same z-factor for the same values of pseudoreduced
pressure Ppr and temperature Tpr, is used to determine the value of z. An algebraic relationship, cf. [23],
has been developed, and this relates z to Ppr and Tpr. The implicit set of equations that emerges, requires
an iterative solution procedure. In order for OLGA to save cpu cycles, the z-values have been pre-
computed, and tabulated as a function of Ppr and Tpr.
Values for Tpr and Ppr are found from the pseudocritical temperature Tpc and the pseudocritical pressure Ppc:
Ppr = P/Ppc and Tpr = T/Tpc.
Empirical equations exist for Ppc and Tpc, [23], and we use them:
, and
As already mentioned, the units are psia and °R.
The presence of CO2 and H2S is accounted for by correcting the pseudocritical values Ppc and Tpc.
Nitrogen, N2, is assumed to have no significant effect on the z-factor. The corrected values become
and
where
where y is mole-fraction.
Oil and gas viscosity

Dead oil viscosity is calculated using the following equation:
- 54 -
The OLGA model
Now, the live oil viscosity μo is found by modifying the dead oil viscosity according to the gas dissolved in
the oil, that is,
where
, and
Note: Covisc is a tuning coefficient; its default value is 1.
If the pressure is above the bubble pressure Pb, the above expression corresponds to the viscosity at the
bubble point μob, where RSGO = GOR. For these pressures the viscosity is modified, viz.:
, with
Units: Pressures are measured in psia, temperatures in °F, viscosities in cp and RSGO in scf/STB.
The gas viscosity is calculated, according to [19], from the correlation
with
where Ma is the apparent molecular weight)
Units: ρg given in g/cm3; T in °R; μg in pc.
Liquid viscosity is calculated as for the standard PVT table option with oil viscosity as above.
- 55 -
OLGA User manual
Surface tension
The expression for the gas-oil surface tension needs to be simple without the information about the fluid
composition. Given values of API, T (°R) and P (psia), we can use
for dead oil, and then correct the value for saturated oil at saturation pressure:
For undersaturated oil, the corresponding saturation pressure for P(T,RS) is used. The unit of a surface
tension σ is dynes/cm (1 dyne/cm = 0.001 N/m).
The expression used for the gas-water surface tension is
For oil-water surface tension empirical data are scarce, and a preliminary relation is used:
with default coefficients A1 = 30.0, A2 = 0.0 and A3 = 0.0.
The above correlations are based on data from [17] and [1].
Thermodynamic properties of Blackoil
Specific heat of gas
The specific heat or heat capacity of gas cpg is tabulated as a function of temperature and specific gravity
of gas. The data are taken from [17], Figure 4-49. It is assumed that the specific heat of a gas mixture
corresponds to the specific heat of a pure gas with the same specific gravity.
Specific heat of oil
The specific heat of oil, cpl, can be calculated using the following equation, cf. [5]:
where
γo = specific gravity of oil
T = temperature in °C
The unit of cpl is kJ/kg °C.
Enthalpy of Gas
The enthalpy of gas, Hg is calculated from the equation
(8)
- 56 -
The OLGA model
The term (dH/dP)T can be expressed as
From tabulated values for cpg and z, a table for Hg can be generated; 0 °C and 1 bara is used as the zero
point. The compressibility factor z is tabulated as a function of Tpr and Ppr. Thus the term (dH/dP)TdP in
equation (8) can be expressed in terms of Tpr and Ppr:
Enthalpy of oil
The enthalpy of oil Ho is calculated directly by integrating cpo from zero to the actual temperature.
Modifications of Ho at elevated pressures are ignored.
Enthalpy of gas dissolved in oil
The latent heat for gas dissolved in oil ΔHgo is used to calculate the enthalpy of liquefied gas Hgo. We have
The term ΔHgo can be approximated by a simple correlation from [5]. First, the latent heat is estimated at 1
bara.
where Tabp is the atmospheric boiling point measured in K. The unit of the latent heat thus becomes kJ/kg.
Second, the latent heat is extrapolated for pressures above 1 bara, according to
Tabp is tabulated as a function of oil specific gravity and molecular weight, cf. [5], see Table 2 below.
Table 2: Tabp as a function of specific gravity of oil and molecular weight.
Atmospheric boiling point, Tabp (°C)
M 70 80 90 100 120 140 160 180 200 220
Spec grav. Tabp
0.6 27 42 60 79 104 128 146 165 190 205
0.9 66 93 116 132 165 202 222 252 274 294
- 57 -
OLGA User manual
Thermal conductivity
Data for the thermal conductivity of gas as a function of M and T is plotted in [17]. A function has been
developed that gives a reasonable approximation to these data, and this function is used by OLGA.
Little data are available for oil, and so a simple linear function is used, viz.:
The default values for the coefficients are: A=0.1385 W/m°C, and B=0.5*10 -4 W/m°C2.
Blackoil tuning
It is possible to tune the correlations for gas dissolved in oil RSGO, bubble pressure Pb and oil viscosity to
measured data.
Tuning of the correlations use data for a single fluid or a mixture. If there are several blackoil feeds (for
example, a network case), you must either tune to one of the fluids or to a mixture of the fluids. If the
measurements are from a separator, the data available will typically be for the mixture. Note that the tuned
correlations are used for the whole network. See the description of the correlations for how the tuned
parameters enter the calculations.
Tuning is specified through the BLACKOILOPTIONS keyword.
Converting to mass flow rate
When converting the volume flow rate at the standard conditions to the mass flow rate, OLGA first does a
recombination to saturate the gas phase with the water component. Secondly OLGA calculates the
densities of the gas, oil and water phase from the resulting composition and the densities given in
BLACKOILCOMPONENT by using the blackoil correlation. These densities are then combined with the
volumetric fractions specified in BLACKOILFEED to calculate the in-situ mass flow. When converting the
in-situ mass flow rates to the volumetric flow rate at standard conditions for output purposes, the phase-
fractions and densities at standard conditions are again calculated from the in-situ composition using the
blackoil correlations. These are then used to calculate the volumetric flows at standard condition.
Note: The Blackoil model has the same limitations to its usability as the Compositional Tracking module.
How to use
Set the following keywords to use the Blackoil model:
 OPTIONS to set COMPOSITIONAL = BLACKOIL

 BLACKOILOPTIONS to set GORMODEL (optional)
 BLACKOILCOMPONENT to set the properties of the gas, oil and/or water components
 BLACKOILFEED to combine the gas/oil/water blackoil components into feeds, and specify GOR and
WATERCUT.
 NODE/SOURCE/WELL to set flow rates or volume fractions of the feeds to enter the pipeline system
 The steady state pre-processor can be used with the Blackoil model. If one chooses to start from
INITIALCONDITIONS, the initial volume fractions for the feeds must be given.
Compositional tracking
Compositional tracking combines the powerful multiphase capabilities in OLGA with customized
calculations of fluid properties and mass transfer. The PVT package Multiflash, developed by KBC
Infochem, is used for thermodynamic equilibrium calculations on the fluid.
- 58 -
The OLGA model
With compositional tracking, every fluid component is accounted for throughout the calculation, enabling
simulation of scenarios such as start-up and blowdown with a high level of detail and accuracy. The extra
level of detail given by compositional tracking makes a case more CPU-intensive as compared to the
table-based approach, and, thus the simulation time will increase. Note that increasing the number of
components in a simulation will increase the simulation time.
OLGA simulations, using fluid tables, will in many cases give satisfactorily accurate results. Typically, this
is when the fluid does not change much along flowpaths or at boundaries in time. Typical cases where
compositional effects may have influence are:
 Networks with different fluids

 Changes in composition at boundaries
 Blowdown
 Gas injection / gas lift
 Start-up
 Shut-in and restart
The Compositional Tracking module requires a separate OLGA license and a separate license for the PVT
package used.
Model description
In OLGA simulations where the fluid is described by fluid tables, thermodynamic phase equilibrium and
fluid properties are calculated for a predefined composition. This composition is assumed to be constant
throughout the whole simulation. Different compositions can be used for each flowpath in a system, but
within each of these flowpaths the composition is constant in time.
In reality the composition can vary along the pipeline due to slip effects (velocity differences between
phases), interphasial mass transfer, merging network with different fluids, elevated geometry, and changes
in fluid composition at the inlet. In the Compositional Tracking model the mass equations are solved for
each component (for example, H2O, C1, C14-C22) in each phase (for example, gas, liquid droplets, bulk
hydrocarbon liquid and bulk water). Thus, the model keeps track of the changes in composition in both
time and space, and ensures a more accurate fluid description compared with using fluid tables.
PVT package
Using the in-situ composition, pressure and temperature, the thermodynamic phase equilibrium and fluid
properties are then calculated in all sections continuously during the simulation. Moreover, the derivatives
of mole fractions with respect to the in-situ pressure and temperature at phase equilibrium are also
delivered by the package. Based on these results, the mass transfer between the phases needed for the
mixture to be at equilibrium is calculated.
These thermodynamic calculations are performed by a third-party PVT package; the Multiflash from
Infochem/KBC.
Physical limits for the temperature and pressure used in the PVT calculations are introduced and cannot
be changed by the user (as it can with fluid tables). The temperature range is from -200 to 500 °C and the
pressure range is from 0.05 to 2000 bara. If the temperature or pressure goes out of range, they are reset
to the upper or lower limits. These reset values are used in the PVT calculations only and are not fed back
to the overall calculations of temperature and pressure.
The thermodynamic phase-equilibrium and fluid property calculations are based on the methods available
in the PVT package. Generally the models, that are available in the standalone software, may be specified
in the fluid file.
- 59 -
OLGA User manual
Note: Some equations of state and fluid property methods can increase the simulation time significantly.
This must be considered when choosing a fluid description.
Flash algorithms
The flash-algorithm used in the PVT package can be specified in the key FLASHTYPE. You can choose
from three models:
 TWOPHASE
 SIMPLETHREEPHASE
 FULLTHREEPHASE
FLASHTYPE = TWOPHASEFLASH treats water as an inert component, if water is present. Initially, a two-
phase flash is carried out for the hydrocarbon components. Then the water components is put in the gas or
water phase, depending if the water-phase should be gas or not.
Note: Hydrate inhibitors such as MeOH and glycols will also be inert, and placed in the same phase as
water. Also the classical mixing rule is used for all component pairs for the two-phase flash calculation.
This is the only option allowed when performing simulations with fluids consisting purely of non-aqueous
components. It can also be used with fluids containing aqueous components when high simulation speed
is wanted. However, if the amount of free water is believed to have a significant impact on the conclusions,
this options should be used with caution.
FLASHTYPE = SIMPLETHREEPHASE means that the water components are treated as an inert phase
initially. A two-phase flash is performed for the hydrocarbon components. Then aqueous components are
added to the hydrocarbon phases, and hydrocarbon components and inorganic gas components are
added to the aqueous phase until the fugacity is the same for all the phases.
Note: The classical mixing rule is used for all component pairs throughout the calculation.
This approach involves two simplifications relative to full three phase flash.
 The change in phase equilibrium due to dissolution of components in a phase is not taken into
account, that is, the result is not rigorous equilibrium but approximated equilibrium.
 A simplified model for the solubility of hydrocarbon components and inorganic gasses in the aqueous
phase and vice versa is used.
This is the default option when at least one aqueous component is defined in the feed file, and is expected
to provide accurate results for most simulations involving fluids consisting of both hydrocarbons and
aqueous components. Although not as severe, SIMPLETHREEPHASE suffers from the same defects as
TWOPHASE compared to FULLTHREEPHASE. However, if the amount of free water is believed to have a
significant impact on the conclusions, this option should be used with care.
Note: Simplified three phase is the recommended option for performing screening/approximate
simulations where high accuracy may not be required. This is because the full three phase option is
significantly slower than the simplified three phase option.
FLASHTYPE = FULLTHREEPHASE means that a full three-phase flash is performed for the total
composition. The fugacity of all the components in all the phases are the same. All the phases are in
rigorous equilibrium, that is, any component can dissolve in any phase. Classical mixing rule is used for
component pairs not involving aqueous components while the Huron-Vidal mixing rule is used for all
component pairs involving aqueous components.
- 60 -
The OLGA model
This option is significantly slower than the simplified three phase flash option. It is recommended as an
option to make a final check of whether the accuracy obtained using the simplified three phase flash is
adequate for the given case. Full three phase flash is also recommended if
 Hydrate control is important and MeOH or another component more volatile than H2O is used as
inhibitor.
 Tracking of hydrocarbons and inorganic gasses dissolved in the aqueous phase is important.
 Tracking of aqueous components dissolved in a hydrocarbon liquid phase or a dense gas phase is
important.
Viscosity correlations
There are a number of different viscosity correlations in the PVT package in OLGA. The three most widely
used correlations are Supertrapp, Pedersen and the Lohrenz-Bray-Clark (LBC) correlation. These models
have to be specified in the OLGA Compositional Tracking fluid file .
Both Supertrapp and Pedersen are based on the corresponding states principle (CSP), and usually
predicts viscosities within 10 % up to about 1 cP. For higher viscosities the capability of these methods are
more uncertain. However there is an increased computational cost in using these methods compared to
LBC.
However, the LBC model is not reliable as a predictive model. The following steps should therefore be
taken when using LBC:
 Match LBC to experimental or reliable simulated viscosity data (such as with Supertrapp or Pedersen)
 Check if tuned oil viscosity data match reasonably well with the experimental data. If a good match
cannot be obtained, use a more predictive viscosity model in OLGA Compositional Tracking module (a
mismatch is more likely for heavy oils).
 Substantial tuning of the LBC model can affect the gas viscosity. Evaluate gas viscosity before and
after tuning of the model.
Note: To get good simulation results, it is still recommended to match the viscosity model to
experimental viscosity data. Even if a more predictive model, such as Supertrapp or Pedersen, is
chosen.
It is further recommended to consider if oil viscosities at temperatures below approximately 20-40 C are
influenced by precipitated wax. None of the available models can account for the influence of precipitated
wax, nor the non-Newtonian effects associated with the precipitation. These models can still be tuned to
follow the apparent oil viscosities. Since the Compositional Tracking module does not account for wax
precipitation/deposition, viscosities will follow the apparent oil viscosity.
Dense phase specification
In the dense-phase region (see Figure 18), there are no good criteria to distinguish gas-like fluid from oil-
like fluid. However OLGA needs to assign the fluid to a phase in this region. So a line is assigned in the
dense-phase region, where the fluid goes from gas to liquid phase. Although the 'chosen' phase at a
pressure and temperature point does not affect the fluid properties, a phase transition across this line can
cause numerical problems in OLGA.
- 61 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 18 Dense phase region.
To better control phase transfer in the dense-phase region, it is possible to specify a density-limit in OLGA
(key DENSITYLIMIT in COMPOPTIONS). If this key is given, the fluid is considered to be liquid if it has a
higher density than the given density-limit and a fluid with lower density is defined as gas.
The value of this density-limit may vary, and depends on the purpose of using this key. If the simulation
enters the two-phase region from the gas-side (across the dew-point line), it would be preferable to keep
the fluid in gas-phase. A high density-limit is then needed. Similarly a low density-limit is needed, if the
simulation crosses the bubble-point line when it enters the two-phase region. Otherwise, if just a
reasonable value is needed, the density can be set to the density of the fluid close to the critical point. If
not specified, internal routines are used to decide phase.
Delay constants
The keys TCONDENSATE and TVAPORIZATION are non-equilibrium delay constants for the mass
transfer from liquid phase to gas phase and vice versa. The keys can be introduced for each component,
and the equilibrium state reached in the flash calculations will be delayed. The default value is no delay.
In the non-equilibrium model the convective mass transfer terms are calculated according to:
where u is the superficial velocity of the mixture flowing into the section calculated for the equilibrium
conditions at the section and Dz is the section length. The is the convective mass transfer term
calculated by the equilibrium model for component fc. TDELAY, fc is the non-equilibrium delay factor for
component fc, which has the dimension seconds. The user must specify the value of this factor, and
separate values can be given for vaporization (TVAPORIZATION) and condensation (TCONDENSATION).
- 62 -
The OLGA model
The local non-equilibrium mass transfer term is derived from the following equation:
where is the local mass transfer term calculated by the equilibrium model and TDELAY,fc is the delay
factor for component fc for condensation or vaporization dependent on the sign of the equilibrium mass
transfer term.
This yields:
How to use
Input
To use the Compositional Tracking model, follow the steps below.
Step 1
Use the Multiflash fluid package to characterize the fluids to the same pseudo components and generate
the feed file with all the necessary compositional data for the fluid.
The Plus and No-plus fluid types only require mole or weight fractions, mole weights and liquid densities.
For the Plus fluid, the PVT package generates pseudo-components based on the last (plus) component.
Once the fluid has been characterized, the feed file can be generated in the fluid package. Refer to the
Multiflash documentation to find out how this is done. The feed defined in the feed file is then available in
OLGA.
If the fluid has been characterized in another PVT software, all component properties such as the critical
temperature, acentric factor, and so on, must be entered into Multiflash.
Read more about feed files for Compositional Tracking here.
Step 2
Prepare the OLGA input using the following keywords:
 OPTIONS; COMPOSITIONAL set to ON.

 FILE; FEEDFILE to specify the feed file name.
 FEED; to define additional feeds and their composition (use components from the feed file).
 COMPOPTIONS; Define calculation options sent to the PVT package.
 INITIALCONDITIONS; to specify initial feeds.
 SOURCE; to specify feeds and feed flows in the mass source.
 WELL; to specify feeds in the well stream.
 NODE; to specify feeds and feed flows in mass flow and pressure nodes.
- 63 -
OLGA User manual
Step 3
Specify output variables for detailed plotting of simulation information.
 OUTPUTDATA to print compositional information to output file (*.out).

 TRENDDATA to print compositional variables to trend file (*.tpl).
 PROFILEDATA to print compositional variables to profile file (*.ppl).
 PLOTDATA to print compositional variables to OLGA Viewer file (*.plt).
Note: Output variables for rates at standard conditions (for example, QGST) are CPU demanding
because a flash must be performed, and should be used with care for Compositional Tracking
simulations.
There are some compositional output variables available in OLGA that enable you to investigate the
compositional behavior of the system. These variables are:
 Mass flow rate for each component in each phase (oil droplets, oil film, total oil phase, water droplets,
water film, total water phase, and gas).
 Mass rate of flashing for each component to gas phase, oil phase and water phase.
 Specific mass for each component in each phase.
 Mole fraction for each component in gas phase, oil phase and water phase.
 Equilibrium mole fraction for each component in gas phase, oil phase and water phase.
 Mass fraction for each component in gas phase, oil phase and water phase.
 Equilibrium mass fraction for each component in gas phase, oil phase and water phase.
 Total mole fraction (all phases) for each component.
 Total mass in branch for each component.
These compositional output variables can be configured for individual components by specifying the
COMPONENTS=(<component names>) key to each output keyword. If COMPONENTS is not specified,
OLGA generates output values of all components for the specified variable.
Step 4
Special considerations can be specified in the keyword COMPOPTIONS
 FLASHTYPE to specify flash algorithm.

 TCONDENSATION and TVAPORIZATION to specify delay constants to fluid components.
 DENSITYLIMIT to specify a density limit for the dense phase region.
 GASCOMPONENT and OILCOMPONENT to specify default gas- and oil-component in non-existing
phases.
There are default values for all keys, in which case none of these parameters have to be specified. The
effects of these keys are described in Model description on page 59.
Other considerations
 The maximum number of components allowed in a feed file is limited. The maximum number of
components for the Multiflash PVT package is 150.
 The general limitations to fluid modeling in OLGA, described in Limitations in the use of fluid
properties, still apply when using the Compositional Tracking module.
 Compositional Tracking is more CPU intensive than other fluid modules in OLGA.
- 64 -
The OLGA model
Combination with other models
The Compositional Tracking module cannot be combined with other compositional fluid models such as
Inhibitor Tracking, Blackoil or Wax.
Restart
You cannot change compositional model between restart cases.
Single component
The Single component module enables tracking of a single component, for example H 2O or CO2, that
crosses the saturation line in time or space in a pipeline.
The numerics in standard OLGA have been designed for multi component hydrocarbon fluids. Due to the
explicit coupling between volume balance and energy balance equations, standard OLGA becomes
unstable for single component fluids that cross the saturation line. The same can happen for multi
component fluids with very narrow phase envelopes, for example a fluid composed predominantly of one
component, but with a small amount of impurities. Because the behavior is very case dependent, it is hard
to give general guidelines on the exact amount of impurities required before standard OLGA can be
expected to yield reasonable results. You should, however, be careful when using standard OLGA to
simulate fluids consisting of 90% or more of one component. Besides the numerical issues, it is important
to make sure that the fluid property calculations are accurate for the particular fluid composition to be
simulated.
To circumvent this limitation, time constants, or delays, are introduced in the evaporation/condensation
process. The difference between the saturation temperature and the fluid temperature serves as a
potential for phase mass transfer. Multiplying this temperature difference with a certain heat or energy
transfer coefficient yields an energy transfer rate that can be used to estimate the mass transfer rate. An
asymptotic approach to equilibrium occurs where the speed at which equilibrium is reached is determined
by the size of the energy transfer coefficient.
The Single component module should be used for all single component fluids. Special options exist for
H2O and CO2, for which the fluid property calculations have been hard coded into OLGA. For other single
component fluids, it is necessary to specify input parameters to the fluid property calculations.
Note: The Single component module can only be applied to pure single component fluids. Therefore,
you cannot use OLGA to simulate single component fluids with small amounts of impurities.
The Single component module requires a separate license.
Model description
The following assumptions are made in the single component model:
 the gas and liquid phases have the same temperature.

 the pressure of the gas and liquid phases is the same.
 if the fluid temperature is higher than the saturation temperature, flashing or boiling of liquid will take
place.
 if the fluid temperature is lower than the saturation temperature, condensation of vapor takes place.
- 65 -
OLGA User manual
The inner pipe wall surface can be superheated or subcooled as compared to the saturation temperature.
Such situations might lead to surface boiling or surface condensation in cases where the liquid or gas is in
direct contact with the pipe wall. The resulting, additional, mass transfer term is not explicitly included, but
it can be accounted for by an enhanced heat transfer due to surface boiling/condensation.
Generation of gas and liquid properties
The equations used to calculate the H2O properties are taken from ref. 1. For CO2, the thermodynamic
equations are taken from ref. 4. The transport properties are calculated through the equations given in
ref. 2. For other single-component fluids than H2O and CO2, the Soave–Redlich–Kwong (SRK) cubic
equation of state (Appendix 1) is used to calculate the saturation line and the physical properties of the
vapor and liquid phases. Temperature dependent volume translation is applied to improve the accuracy of
phase density. The transport properties are determined by the corresponding state method by Pedersen
(ref. 2).
The evaluation of the fluid property equations is time consuming, and, therefore, they are only evaluated at
the start of the simulation. The properties are evaluated at a grid of pressure/temperature values that is
limited by the minimum and maximum values of pressure and temperature given in the input. An
equidistant grid is used with a minimum of 50 and maximum of 100 grid points for both pressure and
temperature. During the simulation, linear interpolation is used to evaluate the properties in between grid
points.
Saturation line for a single component
The saturation line is determined by solving the equal fugacity of gas and liquid from the equation of state
(EOS). Below the critical point, determined by the critical pressure, PC and the critical temperature, TC, the
saturation pressure, Psat(T), and saturation temperature, Tsat(P), at a given grid point (P,T) are determined
from the saturation line. Above the critical point, the saturation line is extrapolated with the slope of the
saturation line at the critical point.
Liquid properties for a single component
For pressures below the critical pressure liquid properties are determined by the EOS in the liquid region.
In the gas region, the liquid properties are extrapolated from the saturation point — the enthalpy equals the
gas enthalpy minus the latent heat at the saturation temperature and the density is integrated from the
vapor saturation pressure to actual pressure using the compressibility at the saturation temperature. All the
other properties are from the saturation temperature.
For pressures above the critical pressure, liquid properties are calculated from the EOS.
Gas properties for a single component
For pressures below the critical pressure, the gas properties in the gas region are acquired from the EOS.
In the liquid region and a pressure below the critical pressure, the gas properties are extrapolated from the
saturation line – the enthalpy equals the liquid enthalpy plus the latent heat at the saturation temperature
corresponding to the pressure and the density is acquired by linear interpolation between the value at
critical pressure and the saturation pressure. All other properties are taken at the saturation temperature
corresponding to the pressure. For pressures above the critical pressure, gas properties are calculated
based on the EOS. Using this procedure, the gas and liquid properties are continuous across the fictitious
gas-liquid (V–L) division line when the pressure is above the critical one.
At the critical point and its vicinity, the thermal capacity and density derivatives show extreme sensitivity to
temperature and pressure changes, even to the extent where discontinuities occur. Therefore, a buffer
zone is introduced near the critical temperature as shown below. Within this zone, the liquid density
- 66 -
The OLGA model
derivative and thermal capacity are given the values calculated at a temperature, Tlow, less than the
saturation point. Similarly, for the vapor phase, the gas density derivative and the thermal capacity are
given the values calculated at a temperature, Thigh, above the saturation point.
The buffer zone is bounded by the coordinates [Tlow, Psat(Tlow)], [Tlow, Pc], [Thigh, Pc], [Thigh, Psat(Thigh)].
Saturation line for H2O
Below the critical point, (PC,TC), the saturation pressure, Psat(T), and saturation temperature, Tsat(P), at a
given grid point (P,T), are determined from the saturation line. Above the critical point, PC = 221.2 bar and
T= 647.3 K, and up to T = 676 K and P = 250 bar, a straight line is used to divide the single-phase or
dense-phase region into gas and liquid. Above 676 K and 250 bar, the boundary line between region 2 and
region 3 is used as the division between gas and liquid. The definition of the regions is found in ref. 1.
- 67 -
OLGA User manual
Liquid properties for H2O
For pressures below 225 bar in region 1, the water properties equations found in ref. 1 are used for water
in the water region.
In the gas region, the properties for water are extrapolated from the saturation point – the enthalpy is
based on thermal capacity at the saturation temperature corresponding to a given pressure. The density,
on the other hand, is calculated using the density derivative w.r.t. pressure at the saturation pressure
corresponding to the given temperature. All the other properties are evaluated at the saturation
temperature.
For pressures above 225 bar, water properties are calculated based on equations for the different regions
specified in ref. 1.
The thermal capacity and enthalpy for water are singular near the critical point. To avoid numerical
problems in region 3, the water properties from region 1 are used instead of those for region 3 when the
pressure is below 225 bar. The same procedure is used for steam (gas).
Gas properties for H2O
For pressures below 225 bar, steam property equations for region 2 are used for gas in the gas region.
In the water region, the gas properties are extrapolated from the saturation point. Enthalpy is based on
thermal capacity at the saturation temperature corresponding to the given vapor pressure and the density
according to the density derivative with respect to pressure at the saturation pressure corresponding to the
given temperature. All other properties are evaluated at the saturation temperature corresponding to the
vapor pressure.
For pressures above 225 bar, vapor properties are calculated based on equations for the different regions.
Using this procedure, the vapor and water properties are continuous across the vapor-liquid (V–L) division
line when the pressure is above 225 bar.
Flashing/Condensation
The driving force for flashing of liquid or condensation of gas is the difference between the saturation
temperatures and the fluid temperature.
The effect of local boiling on a hot wall surface or condensation on a cold one are not explicitly included in
the mass balance of liquid and gas, but can be accounted for through an enhanced heat transfer at the
pipe wall.
The total energy available for generating gas or condensing it to obtain saturated conditions is
where mg is the specific mass of gas [kg/m3], ml is the specific mass of liquid [kg/m3], cpg is the specific heat
of gas [kJ/kgC], cpl is the specific heat of liquid [kJ/kgC], h is the heat transfer coefficient at inner wall
surface [kJ/m2sC], S is the inner surface area per unit volume of pipe [1/m] and V is the section volume
[m3].
The total mass transfer to obtain saturated conditions is:
where hsat,g is the enthalpy of saturated gas [kJ/kg] and hsat,l is the enthalpy of saturated liquid [kJ/kg].
- 68 -
The OLGA model
To reduce numerical problems, it is assumed that this mass transfer occurs over a time tψ. This yields the
mass transfer rate
The ψv is given in [kg/m3s]. The mass transfer per time step must not be larger than the available
component mass of the diminishing phase.
References
1. Revised Release on the IAPWS Industrial Formulation 1997 for the Thermodynamic Properties of
Water and Steam, The International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam, Lucerne,
Switzerland, August 2007.
2. K. S. Pedersen et al. Properties of Oils and Natural gases, Gulf Publishing Company, Houston, Texas,
1989.
3. B.E.Poling, J.M.Prausnitz, J.P.O’Connell. The properties of gases and liquids. 5th Edition. McGRAW-
HILL, 2000.
4. R. Span and W. Wagner. A New Equation of State for Carbon Dioxide Covering the Fluid Region from
the Triple-Point Temperature to 1100 K at Pressures up to 800 MPa. J. Phys. Chem. Ref. Data,
Vol. 25, No. 6, 1996.
Appendix 1
The Soave–Redlich–Kwong (SRK) equation of state:
where
R is the universal gas constant and ω is the acentric factor.
The SRK equation of state can be written on the form:
- 69 -
OLGA User manual
where Z is the compressibility factor.
The solution, Z, to the above equation is found by iteration. As initial guess, the pressure is given by the
Antoine equation except for CO2 where the Wagner equation is used. Coefficients for these equations can
be found in ref. 3.
The solution for Z can be adjusted by a volume tuning factor
according to
where XV1 and XV2 are given through the keys VOLX(1) and VOLX(2), respectively, and Pr = P/Pc.
The specific heat, CP, is calculated through the equation
where the coefficients, CPi, are given through the input by CPIC(i + 1).
How to use
The single component model is activated by setting the key COMPOSITIONAL=SINGLE under the
OPTIONS keyword.
The time constants for condensation and boiling are specified by the keys TCONDENSATION and
TBOILING, respectively, under the keyword SINGLEOPTIONS. These keys are available as time series if
desired. Large values of the time constants will slow down the mass transfer leading to a fairly large non-
equilibrium. Small values will speed up the mass transfer and thereby reduce the thermal non-equilibrium.
Too small values might however cause instabilities which in turn can result in nonphysical results.
The keyword SINGLEOPTIONS specifies options for COMPOSITIONAL=SINGLE. COMPONENT can

have the values H2O, CO2, or OTHER. H2O is set by default.
Note that if you use COMPONENT=OTHER, it is required to specify additional fluid properties. These are:
 viscosity tuning factor, VISX

 critical temperature, TC [C]
 critical pressure, PC [bara]
 acentric factor, OMEGA
 molecular weight, MW
 volume tuning factors, VOLX(2)
 coefficients in equation for specific heat, CPIC(5)
Also note that although it is possible to choose water as a component, all possible single components will
be treated similarly and as an 'oil phase'. This means that although the holdup in a single component water
simulation is 1 in a pipe, the HOLWT and HOLHL output from that pipe is 0 and 1 respectively. Similar
behavior is to be expected from other output-variables which has an option for water.
For many different components values of these coefficients can found in ref. 3.
The keys MINPRESSURE, MAXPRESSURE, MINTEMPERATURE and MAXTEMPERATURE in

SINGLEOPTIONS are used to generate a PVT tables for the single component properties, that is, no
external PVT file is needed. The properties are evaluated on a grid of pressure/temperature values that is
limited by the minimum and maximum values of pressure and temperature given in the input. An
equidistant grid is used with a minimum of 200 and maximum of 400 grid points for both pressure and
- 70 -
The OLGA model
temperature. The griding is adjusted so that a grid point is close to the critical point. During the simulation,
linear interpolation between the grid points (P,T) is applied.
For boundaries, sources and wells, the gas fraction will be either gas or liquid, all depending on the
specified temperature as compared to the saturation temperature at the specified pressure. For sources
without any given pressure, the pressure of the source receiving position is used.
The output variables TSAT, TSV, PSAT, PVAP (see output variables description) are used to retrieve the
vapor data. TSV equals TM and PVAP equals PT for single component simulations (no partial pressure
because only a single component is considered). Other data can be obtained by specifying compositional
variables.
Under OPTIONS, the key WRITEPVTFILES=[NO]/YES controls whether the program will write the single
component properties that are being used to file or not. For YES, a tab file <inputfile>_PVT.tab (fixed
format) will be generated. Furthermore, the saturation line will be written to a file <inputile>_pvt.env. Both
these files can be visualized in the GUI.
Standard Conditions in OLGA

Standard conditions for pressure and temperature normally refer to atmospheric conditions, and there are
varying definitions in different companies, regions and applications. It is generally expected that live
hydrocarbons are processed (stabilized) in some way before the properties of the separated fluid phases
at standard conditions can be measured or estimated.
The fluid phase properties, that is, densities, gas/oil ratio, and so on, depend on how the fluids are
processed from actual (in-situ) conditions to the standard conditions, that is, separator conditions and the
number of separation stages. OLGA, in some situations, accounts for any separation scheme (processing),
while in other cases standard condition fluid properties can only be based on a single-stage separation (a
flash) at built-in standard conditions. The default (built-in) standard conditions in OLGA are 1 atm
(14.7 psia) and 60 °F (15.6 °C).
The limitations with respect to standard conditions in OLGA depend on which type of fluid description is
used in a simulation model, as explained below.
Table-based Fluid Properties – Fixed format
The fixed (legacy) fluid file format contains tables of fluid properties based on single stage flash
simulations at given pressures and temperatures. The pressure and temperature intervals must comprise 1
atm and 60 °F, respectively, to enable the use of standard conditions in a simulation with this fluid file
format. OLGA obtains properties at standard conditions by interpolating in the fluid tables to the built-in
standard conditions of 1 atm and 60 °F. Thus, all input and output referring to standard conditions (for
example, QGST, GORST) is based on a single-stage separation when using this fluid description.
Table-based Fluid Properties – Keyword format
In addition to the information available in the legacy fluid file format, the improved keyword fluid table file
format contains information (in the header) about e.g. gas/oil ratio (GOR), water cut (WC) and phase
densities at standard conditions. Recent versions of OLGA use this information, instead of single-stage
interpolation in the property tables, when converting between actual and standard conditions. These
properties in the fluid file header need not be based on a single-stage flash, but can be the results from, for
example, a multi-stage separation, full process simulation or real field data. Thus, OLGA can account for
any applied processing scheme and standard conditions.
- 71 -
OLGA User manual
It should be noted, however, that PVT applications usually insert results from a single-stage flash at
standard conditions into the fluid file header when generating fluid files. This means that, to allow OLGA to
account for multi-stage processing, you must manually correct the values in the fluid file or use a different
PVT package to generate the file.
In some situations, PVT packages can fail to provide a reasonable density for one or more phases at
standard conditions. If at least one standard density value is less than or equal to zero, OLGA reverts to
interpolating in the property tables to obtain phase properties and fractions at the standard pressure and
temperature given in the fluid file header. If reasonable standard pressure and temperature values are not
provided in the fluid file, OLGA defaults to using 1 atm and 60 °F.
Compositional Tracking
When using compositional tracking in OLGA, conversion between standard and actual conditions is always
based on the results of a single-stage flash at 1 atm and 60 °F, using the in-situ fluid composition. Multi-
stage separation (processing, stabilization) can be simulated by including a separator train in the OLGA
model. However, this can increase the model complexity and simulation time considerably (depending on
the case) and only provides multi-stage separation phase flow rates at one location (typically at the outlet).
Black Oil Fluid Model
As explained in the section Blackoil - Model description on page 50, any oil component is always in the
liquid phase and does not evaporate at any conditions. Due to this limitation, the GOR in the Black Oil fluid
model is not affected by the number of separation stages. This means that single-stage flash properties or
results from multi-stage separation to standard conditions can be used as input to the simulation model.
However, you are recommended to use the tuning coefficients available for the selected Black Oil
correlation to obtain a good match of the bubble point curve and gas fractions at actual conditions when
such information is available.
General: GOR Adjustments
OLGA enables the GOR (or GLR, CGR) of a fluid to be adjusted by user input in, for example, a SOURCE
or a WELL. In Compositional Tracking, this adjustment is performed by flashing the feed fluid at standard
conditions and recombining the resulting phases according to the specified input value, thus changing the
composition of the fluid source.
For table-based fluid properties, OLGA tries instead to obtain the specified GOR by adjusting the gas
fraction at actual conditions. Therefore, it is impossible to adjust the GOR more than what corresponds to
an in-situ gas fraction of 0 (only liquid) or 1 (pure vapor). You are recommended to use a fluid property
table with the correct GOR instead of performing significant adjustments in the SOURCE or WELL
properties. In cases where adjustments are made, make sure that the specified value actually is obtained,
for example, by plotting the resulting GORST (and/or check if the in-situ gas flow fraction equals 0 or 1 at
the source section). Refer also to Source - Model description on page 91.
- 72 -
The OLGA model
Heat transfer
OLGA computes temperatures from energy conservation. Equation (2) in Transport Equations on page 24
represents the temperature equation for a section of a flowpath, including the heat transfer, Q.
One-dimensional heat transfer
Heat transfer between the fluid and the ambient is either user given or computed based on a thermal
connection through the pipe walls to the surroundings. When considering the ambient temperature, the
default behavior is to use a user given temperature of a surrounding heat reservoir, refer to Thermal
coupling to ambient on page 74 for details.
For fluid bundles and annuli, the ambient temperature for inner pipes can be given by the surrounding
fluid, see Thermal coupling between flowpaths on page 79, using specialized thermal components:
 Fluid bundle on page 80 - suitable when the effect of heat transfer between different flowpaths in a
fluid bundle is important.
 Annulus on page 80 - similar to the Fluid bundle, but specially designed for well and drilling
configurations.
Two-dimensional heat transfer
OLGA has the ability to account for complex interactions between flowpaths and surrounding solids using
a two-dimensional temperature field around flowpaths. This is useful when modeling, for example buried
pipelines or complex risers.
 Solid bundle should be used to investigate interactions between pipeline configurations and their
surroundings, see Two-dimensional heat transfer on page 83. Solid bundle uses FEMTherm to
compute a three-dimensional temperature by accounting for radial and angular dependencies in the
surrounding heat storage when computing the heat transfer between a pipeline configuration and the
surroundings, see FEMTherm - Model description on page 83.
- 73 -
OLGA User manual
One-dimensional heat transfer

Thermal coupling to ambient
The basic thermal coupling in OLGA considers radially symmetric heat transfer between the fluid inside a
section of a flowpath and the ambient through a set of concentric wall layers. The wall layers can for
example represent the actual pipe wall, cement, casing and insulation material, as well as the medium
surrounding the pipeline, for instance formation rock. An example of a pipeline with three concentric wall
layers is shown in Figure 19.
Figure 19 Pipe with three wall layers
For wall layers of solid material, thermal conduction and storage is considered. For fluid wall layers,
OLGA assumes a layer of stagnant fluid, and the heat flow is determined by natural convection. In
addition, thermal radiation across the fluid gap can be accounted for. Phase changing materials (see
Phase changing materials on page 75) can also be defined. Materials and the specification of material
properties are described in MATERIAL (on Library) on page 479. Large ambient temperature variations
may cause freezing or melting of the soil surrounding a pipeline. OLGA can provide detailed modeling of
the soil taking the latent heat of fusion and differences in thermal properties for frozen and unfrozen
materials into account (see Buried Pipelines on page 76).
Using the configuration illustrated in Figure 19, Figure 20 illustrates the boundary temperatures that go into
the heat transfer calculations.
Figure 20 Boundary temperatures for pipe with three wall layers
- 74 -
The OLGA model
OLGA sets up a system of dynamic equations describing the heat flow and heat storage in the pipe wall,
which determine the average temperature in each wall layer. The boundary condition on the inner wall
surface is
(9)
where qi is the heat flow from the fluid with average temperature Tf to the inner wall surface with
temperature Tiw. The inner wall heat transfer coefficient hi, is calculated by OLGA considering the
importance of natural vs. forced convection in the pipeline section as well as the influence of thermal
conduction in the fluid. The flow regime in the pipeline section is also accounted for in this calculation. For
high gas velocities, it can be shown that the average fluid temperature is not an accurate measure to use
in equation (9). Therefore, a correction term is used in such cases (see Adiabatic wall temperature
correction term on page 76).
For the outer wall surface, the boundary condition used is
where qamb is the heat flow from the outer wall surface with temperature Tow to the ambient with
temperature Tamb. The outer wall heat transfer coefficient hamb, is either user given or computed by OLGA
based on the type of ambient medium. In this case fluid properties and velocity of the ambient fluid must
be provided.
The equation system for temperatures in the wall layers is solved simultaneously with the energy balance
equation (2) in Transport Equations on page 24, thus ensuring an implicit coupling between the fluid
temperature and the temperatures in the wall layers.
Note: Heat can flow both ways through the pipe walls. The direction of flow is governed by the
difference in temperatures.
Reaching a thermal steady state in the total system, including the wall layers, can in some cases take a
very long time. If the dynamic process of heat storage in the walls is not of interest, a thermal steady state
computation for the wall layers can be used in combination with transient computation in the fluid.
Alternatively a U-value can be used. In this case, OLGA replaces the wall layer computation with the
simpler correlation
A summary of all available thermal calculation options and how to select between them is given in How to
use on page 78.
Phase changing materials
The model for simulating phase changing materials accounts for latent heat of fusion and the difference in
thermal properties for unfrozen and frozen materials. Thermal conductivity and heat capacity are given for
three ranges: above the melting point, below the melting point and in the transition zone.
For heat capacity, the value specified in CAPACITY is used for all temperatures above the melting point. A
multiplier (HCAPMULT) is used below the melting point. If the FUISIONMULT key is different from 0, a
step wise function is used for heat capacity having the value equal to FUSIONMULT*CAPACITY in the
phase changing region. If the FUSIONMULT key is 0, linear interpolation is performed between 1 and
HCAPMULT. The FUSIONMULT key takes the latent heat of fusion (additional energy added or withdrawn
for a phase change) into consideration.
The example below describes how the latent heat of fusion is calculated in a situation with a wet soil
material. The example uses a phase changing region from -1 to 0 C. This gives one multiplier between -1
- 75 -
OLGA User manual
and 0 C to account for the latent heat of fusion, while another multiplier is used below -1 C for the frozen
soil. The soil is assumed to have a dry density 1900 kg/m3, with 10% water weight/dry soil weight. The
moist unfrozen heat capacity is 1067 J/kgC (0.255 btu/lbF) and the frozen heat capacity is 876 J/kgC
(0.209 btu/lbF). The latent heat of fusion is (190 kg/m3*333 kJ/kg)/(2090 kg/m3) = 30.27 kJ/kg. This gives:
HCAPMULT = 876/1067 = 0.82
FUSIONMULT = (30270+1067)/1067 = 29.4
Thermal conductivity given in CONDUCTIVITY is used directly for temperatures above the melting point. A
conductivity multiplier (CONDMULT) is used for temperatures below the melting point. Linear interpolation
is used in between.
Adiabatic wall temperature correction term
OLGA applies an adiabatic wall temperature correction to the wall surface temperature (TWS) when the
liquid volume fraction (HOL) is less than 5% (AL > 0.95). The definition of adiabatic wall temperature is:
The temperature assumed by a wall in a moving fluid stream when there is no heat transfer between the
wall and the stream.
The temperature correction is given by:
where ΔTws is the adiabatic correction term for the wall surface temperature, w is the smoothing factor, µG
is the gas viscosity, uG is the average gas velocity and λG is the gas heat conductivity.
The correction term applies when the liquid volume fraction is less than 0.05.
Note that considerable amount of energy is added to the inner wall surface when high gas velocity
appears. The physical argument for this is high radial velocity gradient . That is: Gas velocity gradient
perpendicular to the flow direction (see Figure 21). The gas velocity is zero at the inner wall and increases
the further you go from the wall to the center of the pipeline. This causes the actual fluid temperature to be
at the highest at the wall and decrease towards the center of the pipeline.
Figure 21 Gas velocity and temperature profiles
Buried Pipelines
A buried pipeline configuration as illustrated in Figure 22 is not radially symmetric. However, as illustrated
below, buried pipelines can be modeled using concentric wall layers by letting the outermost wall layer
define the soil. The WALL option (where the heat flux is a function of the wall material properties) is in this
case recommended because of the large thermal mass of the soil.
- 76 -
The OLGA model
Figure 22 Illustration of a buried pipe
The thickness of the composite soil layer is based on an equivalent heat transfer coefficient for the soil for
a pipeline burial of a particular depth. Theoretically, the equivalent heat transfer coefficient from the outer
surface of a buried pipeline to the top of the soil can be calculated to be:
where D is the outer diameter of buried pipe, H is the distance from center of pipe to top of soil, λsoil is the
soil heat conductivity, hsoil overall heat transfer coefficient for soil.
The term cosh-1 (x) can be expressed mathematically as follows:
The adjusted thermal conductivity of the soil layer can be determined using the expression below for a
known value of the soil thermal conductivity:
where Rsi is the inner radius of soil layer (= outer radius of pipe wall), Rso is the outer radius of soil layer,
ksoil is the input value of soil conductivity.
The specific heat capacity of the soil may be adjusted as follows to predict the transient heat transfer
accurately:
where Cp, input is the input value of soil thermal capacity and Cp, soil is the soil thermal capacity.
Heat transfer at steady state conditions depends only on the outer soil layer radius Rso and on ksoil.
However, for dynamic situations, a good soil discretization is important to obtain a reliable temperature
profile. Alternatively, this can be modeled using the Solid bundle module, see Two-dimensional heat
transfer on page 83, utilizing FEMTherm (see FEMTherm - Model description on page 83).
- 77 -
OLGA User manual
How to use
In the OLGA GUI, the method used for temperature calculation is set from the OPTIONS keyword at the
Case level. In the OPTIONS Property editor the key TEMPERATURE can be set either to:
Setting Description
OFF No temperature calculation – initial temperatures must be specified with the INITIAL
keyword
ADIABATIC No heat transfer to surroundings
UGIVEN A user-defined overall heat transfer coefficient is used for the entire wall
WALL The heat flux through the pipe wall layers is calculated by the code with user-defined
thermal conductivities, specific heat capacities and densities for each wall layer
FASTWALL Similar to WALL but heat storage is neglected in the wall
User-defined heat transfer parameters for the chosen temperature option must be given for each pipeline.
In the OLGA GUI under Boundary&InitialConditions for each FLOWPATH, one or several
HEATTRANSFER keywords may be added. In the property window for each HEATTRANSFER keyword,
the required fields must be filled out.
Note: Each HEATTRANSFER keyword contains parameters for a range of pipes, each defined by a
PIPE keyword, see PIPE (on Flowpath) on page 441, which refers to a WALL keyword, see WALL (on
Library) on page 492, where the pipe wall is defined.
To include a fluid wall layer, TYPE must be set to FLUID in the MATERIAL keyword. In this case the fluid
density, viscosity and expansion coefficient must be defined in addition to the heat capacity and
conductivity. If radiation across the fluid filled layer is to be simulated, the emissivity of the inner and outer
surface of the fluid layer has to be given as well.
To simulate a phase changing material, TYPE must be set to PCM in the MATERIAL keyword. An upper
and lower temperature limit for melting and freezing must be specified, PHCHMAX and PHCHMIN.
Further, the three multipliers for properties below the melting point and in the phase changing region must
be given.
In a temperature calculation the homogeneous temperature profile along the pipeline should be critically
examined. Large discontinuities are often unphysical, although if large pressure differences occur between
two neighboring sections, the Joule-Thompson effect may give a substantial -temperature difference.
Furthermore, if there is a great difference in hold-up between two adjacent sections, temperature
differences can be expected depending on the thermal properties of the gas, liquid, and pipe walls, as well
as the surrounding medium.
Wall Layer Thickness
The numerical solution for the temperatures in the wall layers depends on the discretization of the layers.
For steady-state calculations it is sufficient to un-discretize the layers, however in transient simulations,
when heat storage in the pipe walls are important (cool down or warm up), a finer discretization of the wall
layers may be necessary. A wall layer should, as a rule of thumb, not be thicker than approximately 30% of
the outer radius of the layer. The change in thickness, δ, between two neighboring layers should be 0.2 ≤
δ(i)/δ(i-1) ≤ 5 to obtain a good accuracy.
- 78 -
The OLGA model
If ELECTRICHEAT is defined in the WALL definition, it is preferable to have at least three layers and
define the electric heating in the middle layer.
Very thin layers, such as paint, should be included in a neighboring layer by adjusting the thickness and
conductivity of that layer. Only the thickness must be adjusted if the thermal conductivity of the thin layer is
close to the conductivity of one of its neighbors.
Thermal coupling between flowpaths
OLGA can compute temperatures in complex configurations of pipelines in a cross section. Examples of
such configurations are bundled pipelines (pipe-in-pipe configurations) and annuli, possibly enclosed in a
surrounding solid medium. In such configurations, the temperature in one pipeline affects the temperature
in all the other pipelines. Therefore, heat transfer between the different pipelines in the cross section must
be taken into account.
When computing temperatures in cases containing fluid bundles or annuli, OLGA sets up an equations
system for all fluid and wall temperatures of all the flowpaths contained in the cross section in addition to
the axial energy transport (equation (2) in Transport Equations on page 24). The method does not
generate any additional gridding compared to solving each flowpath thermally decoupled from the others,
but the simultaneous solution of the cross sectional equation system ensures that the thermal interactions
between the different flowpaths are included. The equations used are in principle the same as the
equations for heat transfer through a single pipeline wall (see Thermal coupling to ambient), but some
additional considerations must be taken. For simplicity, this is illustrated using a pipe-in-pipe configuration
as illustrated in Figure 23.
Figure 23 One pipe (pipe A) inside another (pipe B)
For pipeline A, which is enclosed inside pipeline B, the equations describing heat transfer from a fluid
section to the ambient, are still valid. The only difference is that the ambient temperature of A is not user
given, but it is the fluid temperature of pipeline B. Replacing Tamb for pipeline A with TfB from pipeline B
couples the equations for the two pipelines. If not user given, the ambient heat transfer coefficient for
pipeline A is calculated considering natural vs. forced convection and thermal conductivity of the fluid in
pipeline B. Looking at pipeline B, the equations describing heat transfer to the ambient are valid also when
pipeline A is enclosed. However, the heat transferred from pipeline A to the fluid of pipeline B have to be
accounted for. When setting up equations for pipeline B, the heat transferred from pipe A is added as a
heat source in the energy balance equation (2).
- 79 -
OLGA User manual
Fluid bundle
For bundled pipelines, also termed fluid bundles, the flexibility regarding configurations that OLGA can
simulate is large, but some limitations exist. There are no restrictions on the number of pipelines contained
in a fluid bundle, or how they are enclosed inside each other (an example is illustrated in Figure 24).
However, pipelines contained in the same fluid bundle must have the same geometry (section lengths and
elevations), and each contained pipeline must have a constant diameter in the axial direction.
Figure 24 Fluid bundle
To invoke thermal computation for fluid bundles in which thermal interaction between the different pipelines
are taken into account, the Fluid bundle must be used, see Fluid bundle - How to use on page 81.
Annulus
The configuration of an annulus, see Figure 25, shows large similarities with a fluid bundle, cf. Figure 24.
The difference between the two is that diameters are allowed to change within an annulus, something that
is useful when modeling drilling configurations where the diameter is typically reduced as the well is drilled
deeper. Another example of use is for gas-lifted wells where gas is injected into the annulus between the
casing and tubing and recovered in the tubing together with the production fluid.
Figure 25 Example of an annulus configuration
For details on how to set up annuli, see How to use on page 81.
- 80 -
The OLGA model
Fluid bundle - How to use
To use the Bundle model, in the OLGA GUI do the following:
From the Case level, right-click and choose:
Add→ThermalComponent→FLUIDBUNDLE
In the OLGA GUI a fluid bundle consists of a carrier line enclosing one or several flow components
(flowpaths, lines, and/or bundles). The carrier line itself is either a regular flow-path or a line. To populate
the fluid bundle, the following has to be repeated for each participating flow component:
From the newly created fluid bundle, right-click and choose:
Add→BundleComponents→COMPONENT
In the Property editor for the newly created bundle component, fill out the required fields. In particular, a
reference to the flow component (FLOWPATH, LINE or FLUIDBUNDLE) have to be specified. N.B., no
new flow component is created by this procedure, and, thus, the component specified have to either exist
beforehand or be added to the case later.
The properties FROM and TO define the part of the flowpath that is enclosed in the bundle (axial
direction). They refer to position labels which must be defined under Piping for the FLOWPATH. Note that
the bundle must cover entire PIPEs.
The properties XOFFSET and YOFFSET are X- and Y-direction offsets for the component center from an
arbitrary reference point. All components contained in the same fluid bundle must have the same reference
point.
The property OUTERHVALUE may be used if the heat transfer coefficient from the outer wall surface of
the bundle component to the carrier line is known, otherwise forced/free convection will be applied.
Flowpaths that are contained within the same bundle have to have the same section lengths and
elevations. Pipe diameters must be constant in the axial direction.
The WALL or FASTWALL temperature calculation option must be specified when a fluid bundle is used in
a case.
Fluid bundle is part of the FEMTherm module that requires a separate license.
How to use
To use the Annulus model, in the OLGA GUI do the following:
Add→ThermalComponent→ANNULUS
In the OLGA GUI, an annulus consists of a carrier line enclosing one or several flowpaths. The carrier line
itself is a regular flowpath. To populate the annulus, the following has to be repeated for each participating
component:
From the newly created annulus, right-click and choose:
Add→AnnulusComponents→COMPONENT
In the Property editor for the newly created component, fill out the required fields. In particular, the
FLOWPATH identifier have to be specified.
Note: No flowpath is created by this procedure, and, thus, the flowpath specified must either exist
beforehand or be added to the case later.
- 81 -
OLGA User manual
The properties FROM and TO define the part of the flowpath that is enclosed in the annulus (axial
direction). They refer to position labels that must be defined under Piping for the FLOWPATH. The annulus
must cover entire PIPEs.
The properties XOFFSET and YOFFSET are X- and Y-direction offsets for the FLOWPATH center from an
arbitrary reference point. All flowpaths contained in the same annulus must have the same reference point.
The property OUTERHVALUE can be used if the heat transfer coefficient from the outer wall surface to the
carrier line is known, otherwise forced/free convection is applied.
Flowpaths that are contained within the same annulus must have the same section lengths and elevations.
Pipe diameters can vary in the axial direction.
The WALL or FASTWALL temperature calculation option must be specified when an annulus is present in
a case.
Annulus is part of the Wells module that requires a separate license.
- 82 -
The OLGA model
Two-dimensional heat transfer

To model detailed interactions between pipeline configurations and the surroundings when the
surroundings cannot be treated as a constant heat reservoir, solid bundles are used. Figure 26 illustrates a
buried fluid bundle. In this illustration, the fluid bundle is surrounded by a single polygon representing the
surrounding material. It should however be noted that the surroundings is not limited to a single shape,
and complex surroundings can be modeled using many different shapes. For details on the limitations that
apply to the positioning of shapes, see Figure 28 in FEMTherm - Model description on page 83. A
requirement for a solid bundle is that it must always have at least one solid shape. Several shapes can be
combined together with any number of pipelines, fluid bundles and annuli to model the system, but flow
components are restricted to have have a constant outer diameter within a solid bundle.
Figure 26 Example of solid bundle configuration representing a buried fluid bundle.
For solid bundles, two additional considerations arise; heat transport within the solid shape itself is
calculated and the thermal coupling between the outer wall surface and the shape(s) around it. For the
solid shape itself, the heat flow will in many cases be far from radial, requiring a two-dimensional
temperature field calculation. OLGA has a separate model that handles this: the FEMTherm model. See
FEMTherm - Model description on page 83 for a description of how temperatures and heat flow in the solid
shape is calculated, and how the two-dimensional temperature field in the solid shape couples to the wall
temperatures of the enclosed components.
FEMTherm - Model description
FEMTherm consists of a grid generator and a Finite Element Method (FEM) equation solver. The grid
generator makes a 2D finite element mesh in accordance with the Delaunay criterion. The finite element
equation solver determines the transient 2D temperature distribution of any user defined cross section,
which can have several shapes, that is, CIRCLES, ELLIPSES, RECTANGLES and POLYGONS. Figure 27
illustrates the grid system used for solving the 2-dimensional heat transfer equation in a rectangular cross
section with two interior pipelines. The simulation model consists of stacks of such cross sections along
the pipeline.
- 83 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 27 Cross section grid.
Multiple outer shapes as well as overlapping shapes are allowed. However, shapes inside an outer shape
are not allowed to partially overlap, or to be adjacent as shown in Figure 28. Note that the model is
constructed with the use of rectangles and circular pipes only.
Figure 28 Illustration of allowable FEMTherm/SOLIDBUNDLE configurations in OLGA.
In a FEMTherm calculation, OLGA solves the following equations in two steps:
1. Energy equation for the fluid in the pipe and the heat transfer equation for the layers of the pipe
WALL. These equations are solved for each of the pipe sections along the pipelines, giving the
profiles of the fluid temperature along the pipeline and in the pipe WALL.
2. FEMTherm establishes the thermal coupling of the pipelines and solves the 2-dimensional heat
transfer equation in the solid medium surrounding the pipe WALL, giving the temperature distribution
over the cross sections as well as the interaction between fluid temperatures in embedded pipes.
Note: FEMTherm calculations are based on linear theory, which assumes fixed geometry and material
properties. All materials are assumed to be homogeneous and isotropic. The integration in time is
performed using a fixed time step (no time step control) for the temperature distribution in the cross
section.
The combination of 1-dimensional fluid and WALL temperature equations along the pipelines and the 2-
dimensional heat transfer equations for the media in each of the cross sections along the pipeline results in
a 3-dimensional temperature field.
- 84 -
The OLGA model
Consider the pipe cross section in Figure 29.
Figure 29 Cross section grid and concentric pipe with a single wall layer.
In the situation of an incompressible fluid in the pipe visualized above, the governing equations for this
system are:
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
In the more general case, equations (10) and (11) are solved for each component and for each wall layer.
Equation (10) describes the energy conservation of the fluid, equation 11 the energy conservation of the
pipe WALL, and equations (12) to (14) the energy conservation with heat conduction in the interior of the
solid medium. In addition to these, a set of boundary and initial conditions are required for the calculation.
The temperature, T=T(x,y,z,t), is the central variable in FEMTherm and the parameters in the model are:
Af Area of the pipe cross section
Tf Temperature of the fluid
ρf Density of the fluid
Heat capacity of the fluid
Tw Temperature of the first wall layer
ρw Density of the first wall layer
- 85 -
OLGA User manual
Heat capacity of the first wall layer
Aw Cross sectional area of first wall layer
Flow rate of fluid
Heat transfer between fluid and first layer
Heat transfer between first layer and FEM domain boundary
Heat flux across FEM domain boundary
λ Conductivity of the solid interior of the bundle
ρ Density of the solid interior of the bundle
Cp Heat capacity of bundle
Heat flux at the FEM domain boundary
Unit outward normal at the FEM domain boundary

S Surface of the wall
The weak form of equations (12) to (14) according to classical functional analysis is:
where Ω is the interior of the FEM domain,  is the boundary subject to non-essential boundary
conditions and δT is the test function. The last term in this equation is used to impose the boundary
condition for the Newton’s law of cooling of external boundaries:
where the heat transfer coefficient, h, and the ambient temperature, Tamb, are user-defined constants.
The finite element domain is discretized using linear triangular elements, while the evolution in time is
modeled using a backward Euler scheme. By factoring out the ambient temperature, , and the
temperature in the last wall layer, , the following system of discrete equations is obtained.
This can now be used to solve the vector of nodal temperatures, , as a function of the ambient
temperature, the last wall layer temperatures of each component i and the temperature at previous time
step, . The wall layer temperatures are not yet known, and therefore the equation system in equations
(12) to (14) is coupled to and solved simultaneously with the equations for the fluid and wall temperatures
for all embedded components. The linearization needed for this coupling is derived in the following
manner:
- 86 -
The OLGA model
The 'ambient' temperature, , of the last wall layer of each component is obtained by taking the
average temperature in the FEM domain along the boundary of thei’th component, . This average
temperature of discrete nodal temperatures is defined by the function:
where
is the length of boundary i and the function TFEM is evaluated element by element along the boundary. By
the linearity of the solution, using superposition this can be written as:
where
is a vector of nodal temperatures resulting from the boundary condition at perimeter j, and
is a scaling of the nodal temperatures at timen. Given that the temperature, TFEM,within the FEM domain is
a linear function of the nodal temperatures, the constants a ij can easily be obtained from:
With the exception of the term, , these integrals are evaluated once. This is possible because
FEMTherm operates with a fixed time step, decoupled from the temperature calculations in the pipes. The
inertial term, however, must be evaluated for each section and each FEMTherm time step.
Numerical considerations
In OLGA the fluid temperature varies in the axial (z) direction only. Therefore the heat conduction in the
first WALL layer is always in the radial (r) direction. In the cross section below, two OLGA pipes are placed
within a circular cross section. The temperature of the fluid and the temperature of the pipe WALL are
solved with the OLGA model (finite difference method) on the assumption that radial heat conduction is
predominant. Thus the pipe WALL outer surface (see Figure 30) serves as an external boundary to the
finite element equation. The heat conduction in the rest of the cross section is in both spatial directions (x
and y). It is possible to include more than one radial conduction WALL layer in the model.
- 87 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 30 Two OLGA pipes in a cross section.
One needs to determine the number of nodes that is required to obtain a suitable grid and time step to
obtain numerical solutions to the heat transfer equations (equations (12) to (14)). The FEMTherm model
should be used with optimized spatial and temporal discretizations which gives a step-size independent
solution. In the figure below we see a close-up of the region between the two pipes in Figure 30 for three
examples of the spatial discretization. The numerical accuracy is strongly dependent on the number of
internal nodes (N) between external boundaries.
Figure 31 Different discretizations for the area between two OLGA pipes.
Due to the linear interpolation functions in the finite element calculation, we recommend that N should be
at least 4 to get a good approximation for the temperature field. In (a) N = 0, in (b) N = 3 and in (c) N = 4.
Thus the grid in (c) is the only acceptable grid for high precision calculations. The MESHFINENESS[*] key
in the SOLIDBUNDLE keyword sets the spatial resolution of the grid by determining the number of nodes
on the outermost shape. The number N can be checked after the simulation has been performed by
looking at the grid in FEMTherm Viewer.
Thermal calculations with the finite element method are computationally expensive and are not carried out
for every single time step in OLGA. We recommend that the time step for thermal calculations
- 88 -
The OLGA model
The key DELTAT in the SOLIDBUNDLE keyword should be below the smallest characteristic time constant
in the system. For complex pipes this constant may be difficult (if not impossible) to calculate, but a fairly
valid approximation is:
where ρ, Cp and λ are the density, specific heat capacity and thermal conductivity of a pipe layer thickness
L. Thus, one should determine this time constant for all the layers in a pipe and use a time step that is
below the smallest of these.
It should be noted that the thermal masses in the solid medium can be very large and it may require very
long simulation times to obtain thermal equilibrium when integrating the energy balance equation. To
account for this, without using the steady state pre-processor, it is possible to switch the TEMPERATURE
option from FASTWALL to WALL between restarts. This is in principle the procedure used in the steady
state pre-processor. The FASTWALL option is equal to setting the heat capacity parameter to zero and
can be used when there are no thermal transients. The increase in computational speed may be significant
when compared to using the WALL option. However, for transient analyses this option should only be used
to initialize the simulations.
The results from an OLGA simulation where the FEMTherm module has been applied can be visualized
using FEMTherm Viewer. Note that the FEMTherm code makes a triangle mesh also for the OLGA
WALLS (radial conduction layers) and the fluid within. This is for the purpose of visualization only. The
temperature is not calculated separately for these dummy nodes (e.g., the nodes in the WALL layers have
the same temperature for a given radius). See Figure 32 that shows an inner OLGA WALL with two outer
walls defined by SHAPE.
Figure 32 Left: Grid visualized in FEMTherm Viewer (the fluid in the middle will also have a mesh).
Right: Grid used in FEMTherm calculation.
The plotting frequency is determined by the key DTPLOT in the SOLIDBUNDLE keyword and should be
set judiciously. For very fine discretization and/or long bundle sections, the amount of data may become
exceedingly large for long simulations. By increasing the value of DTPLOT, the amount of data can be
limited.
[*] MESHFINENESS is the number of nodes, which are evenly distributed on the outer boundary of the
SHAPE with the longest circumference within a SOLID BUNDLE, which is not a POLYGON. The density of
nodes (nodes divided by circumference) on the SHAPE with the longest circumference determines the
number of nodes on all other non-POLYGON SHAPES to obtain a mesh with uniform node spacing.
- 89 -
OLGA User manual
FEMTherm / Solid bundle - How to use
FEMTherm is activated through the SOLIDBUNDLE keyword. To include a SOLIDBUNDLE/FEMTherm

computation in the simulation, the following must be done in the OLGA GUI:
Add →ThermalComponent → SOLIDBUNDLE.
A SOLIDBUNDLE consists of a collection of SHAPES, FLOWPATHS, LINES and/or FLUIDBUNDLES. In

the following these are referred to as bundle components. For each bundle component do the following:
From the newly created solid bundle, right click and choose:
Add → BundleComponents → COMPONENT.
In the Property editor for the newly created bundle component, fill out the required fields. In particular, a
reference to either a FLOWPATH, a LINE a FLUIDBUNDLE or a SHAPE must be specified. Note that no
new component is created by this procedure, and that the specified component must exist beforehand or
be added later.
The properties FROM and TO define the part of the component that is enclosed in the bundle (axial
direction). They refer to position labels.
The thermal computations are only affected by the relative position of one object to another. To give better
control of the cross section, without having to adjust the pipeline geometry, the coordinate system of the
bundle cross section is decoupled from the rest of the model. All components are by default placed
concentric around the origin and may be independently moved to its correct location with the keys
XOFFSET and YOFFSET. The only exception to this rule is for SHAPES of type RECTANGLE and
POLYGON. In this case, the x and y coordinates of the shape are given explicitly, but XOFFSET and
YOFFSET may still be used for an additional offset.
The property OUTERHVALUE may be used if the heat transfer coefficient from the outer surface of the
bundle component to the carrier line is known, otherwise forced/free convection will be applied.
The length and elevation of each section of a pipeline that is contained within a SOLIDBUNDLE must be
maintained.
A SOLIDBUNDLE/FEMTherm simulation requires that the WALL or FASTWALL temperature calculation

option is selected
For every SOLIDBUNDLE a finite element triangle mesh is generated. The fineness of the mesh is set by
the MESHFINENESS key. The value of this key denotes the number of nodes on the component with the
largest circumference. The higher the MESHFINENESS, the finer the mesh. However, the grid is not very
sensitive with respect to MESHFINENESS as the value of this parameter is being rounded off to multiples
of 32. The typical values for this key is between 128 and 640. To select this parameter wisely, it is
recommended to read about numerical considerations in Model descriptions.
The ambient conditions for the bundle may vary both in the vertical axis of the cross section and along the
length of the bundle. It is defined through the use of the AMBIENTDATA keyword.
AMBIENTDATA is not a required keyword. If it is not specified, OLGA uses the information in the
HEATTRANSFER keywords given in one of the FLOWPATHS in the bundle. However, this functionality is
mainly to ensure backwards compatibility and it is strongly recommended to specify the ambient conditions
in the bundle with the use of AMBIENTDATA. When several FLOWPATHS are included in a bundle
definition, and AMBIENTDATA is not specified, the HEATTRANSFER keyword(s) in the FLOWPATH with
the largest diameter will be used.
- 90 -
The OLGA model
The FEMTherm model is part of the FEMTherm module that requires a separate license.
Boundary conditions
The boundary conditions define the interface between the simulated system and its surroundings, and they
are crucial to the relevance of any type of simulation. For a network of pipelines and wells there are
several options available. OLGA basically uses flow rate or pressure. In addition to temperature, the gas-
liquid ratio must be specified at each flowpath inlet and outlet boundary (at least one pressure must be
given).
The boundary conditions, for example, a pressure, can be given as time series to model a certain transient
situation.
Inflow from reservoirs to well-bores define the most important boundary in a petroleum production
networks. In addition to various well-inflow correlations and options, OLGA comes with an implicit coupling
facility to the OLGA ROCX module, which is a 3-D, 3-phase reservoir simulator, especially optimized for
wellbore - near wellbore simulations. OLGA can also be run coupled with the ECLIPSE reservoir simulator,
in which case the reservoir inflow is determined by ECLIPSE and OLGA in interaction.
Source
A source can be used to model pipeline inflow and outflow of gas and liquid. OLGA uses mass flow rate for
internal calculations, but input flow rate can also be given as volumetric flow at standard conditions.
Wells and near wells are more specialized types of modeling pipeline inflow and outflow.
Model description
Two types of sources can be specified: the mass source and the pressure driven source, which is also
known as a controlled mass source or source controlled by valve (SOVA). Each type of source can be
either positive (flow into the pipeline) or negative (flow out of the pipeline).
The upstream (for positive source) or downstream (for negative source) pressure and temperature can be
specified. When the upstream/downstream pressure is given, the expansion from the given pressure to the
pressure inside the pipe section is accounted for in the temperature calculations. A mass source need not
specify the upstream/downstream pressure, and this is then set to the pressure inside the pipe section
where the source is introduced. A SOVA must always specify the upstream/downstream pressure.
The external pressure and temperature can be constant or given as a time series.
Phase fractions can be specified in the input for a positive source. For a negative source, the phase
fractions in the connected section are used.
- 91 -
OLGA User manual
Mass source
The mass source is the simplest model and has a given mass flow rate specified by the user.
Phase fractions for gas and water can be specified, from which the oil phase fraction is calculated. The
default value for gas is -1, which means it is read from the PVT file. The default value for water is 0.
If a controller is used, the actual mass flow rate into the section (positive source) or out of the section
(negative source) is a fraction of the mass flow rate given as input, with the fraction regulated by the
controller.
Note: The mass flow node covers the functionality of a mass source in the first section after a closed
node.
Pressure driven source (SOVA)
The flow for a SOVA is calculated from a flow equation for mass flow through an orifice, where the orifice
area can be governed by a controller.
The figure below illustrates this.
Figure 33 Illustration of a pressure driven source
Controlling the flow
The flow area of the SOVA is governed by the control system, where the valve has finite opening and
closing time (stroke time) specified by the user.
Both sub-critical and critical flow is described. For sub-critical flow the flow rate is governed by the
difference between the internal and external pressures, the upstream conditions and the flow area. For
critical flow the flow rate is governed by the upstream conditions and the flow area only. The pressure
difference determines the direction of flow in or out of the pipe.
The orifice area is calculated from:
where us is the controller signal and given by the boundaries below
Valve functionality
The valve-specific functionality is further described in the Valve section.
- 92 -
The OLGA model
Calculating mass flow at standard conditions
The following equations show how the total mass flow is calculated from volumetric flow given at standard
conditions. Symbols used in the equations are given below:
wc Water cut, volume of water divided by volume of liquid at standard condition
GOR Gas oil ratio, volume of gas divided by volume of oil at standard condition
GLR Gas liquid ratio, volume of gas divided by volume of liquid at standard condition
Q Volume flow
Mass flow
 Density
Indexes:
tot Total
ST At standard condition
g Gas phase
o Oil phase
liq Liquid phase (water + oil)
w Water phase
* Equivalent phase
The density in the equations below is taken from the PVT table. The properties at standard condition must
be included in the PVT table.
If WATERCUT, GOR and volume flow of gas at standard condition ( ) are known, use:
PHASE = GAS and STDFLOWRATE =
If WATERCUT, GOR and volume flow of liquid at standard condition ( ) are known, use:
PHASE = LIQUID and STDFLOWRATE =
If WATERCUT, GOR and volume flow of oil at standard condition ( ) are known, use:
PHASE = OIL and STDFLOWRATE =
If WATERCUT, GOR and volume flow of water at standard condition ( ) are known, use:
PHASE = WATER and STDFLOWRATE =
- 93 -
OLGA User manual
If WATERCUT, GLR and volume flow of gas at standard condition ( ) are known, use:
PHASE = GAS and STDFLOWRATE =
If WATERCUT, GLR and volume flow of liquid at standard condition ( ) are known, use:
PHASE = LIQUID and STDFLOWRATE =
If WATERCUT, GLR and volume flow of oil at standard condition ( ) are known, use:
PHASE = OIL and STDFLOWRATE =
If WATERCUT, GLR and volume flow of water at standard condition ( ) are known, use:
PHASE = WATER and STDFLOWRATE =
Specified GOR or GLR shifts the values of gas mass fraction in the PVT table with the following equation
(two phase)
where
GGP,T Gas mass flow at given pressure and temperature
GGST Gas mass flow at standard condition - calculated from given GOR or GLR
GHLST Oil mass flow at standard condition - calculated from given GOR or GLR
RSP,T Gas mass fraction at given pressure and temperature - value from the PVT table
RSST Gas mass fraction at standard condition - value from the PVT table
If the equivalent gas volumetric flow rate at standard condition ( ) and the mol weight of the total flow,
Mw, are known, use:
PHASE = GAS, STDFLOWRATE = and MOLWEIGHT = Mw
The density of the equivalent gas at standard conditions is then calculated from ideal gas law, and the total
mass flow is given from the following equation on condition that GOR or GLR is greater than 10 10 (infinitely
in OLGA)
If GOR or GLR is less than 1010 the total mass flow is calculated from the equations described earlier for
PHASE = GAS with = and = .
- 94 -
The OLGA model
Note: There are limitations on how much the value of GOR/GLR can be changed when using a PVT
table. You can check the source input by plotting the volume flow rates through the source at standard
conditions (for example, QGSTSOUR). For example, if a source using default GOR/GLR has no gas at
the in-situ conditions, you cannot give a lower GOR/GLR for this source. Removal of gas that is not
present is impossible.
Both source types can be used with the steady state preprocessor. However, with a closed node, the sum
of all flows into the adjacent section (including contributions from all sources, wells, and nearwells) cannot
be 0.
How to use
To define a SOURCE, follow the steps described below.
 Each SOURCE must have a unique LABEL.

 The position along the branch must be given, using the POSITION key, the ABSPOSITION key, or a
combination of the PIPE and SECTION keys.
 Phase fractions can be given either directly with the GASFRACTION and
WATERFRACTION/TOTALWATERFRACTION keys or at standard conditions with the
GLR/GOR/WATERCUT keys.
 The upstream/downstream PRESSURE and TEMPERATURE can be specified. See Model
description on page 91 for more information.
 Each source type is also available for use with the compositional models (Compositional Tracking,
Blackoil, MEG, Wax).
 All input variables can be defined as time series with the TIME key.
See the keyword SOURCE (on Flowpath) on page 380 for more details.
Mass source
There are several keys available to define the mass source.
When the mass flow rate is to be specified at the source temperature and pressure without Compositional
Tracking, use the key MASSFLOW.
With compositional models the keys FEEDMASSFLOW, FEEDMOLEFLOW or FEEDSTDFLOW can be

used.
When the volumetric flow rate at the standard conditions is given, the key STDFLOWRATE should be
used.
See keyword SOURCE for more details.
Pressure driven source (SOVA)
The SOVA massflow is defined by the valve specific input data. For further descriptions, see the Valve
section.
Both source types can be used with the steady state preprocessor. However, with a closed node, the sum
of all flows into the adjacent section (including contributions from all sources, wells, and nearwells) cannot
be 0.
- 95 -
OLGA User manual
Well inflow and injection

The Wells module provides the possibility of building virtual wells that can be used to analyze 'What if'
case scenarios. This is especially useful for analyzing:
 Start-up and shut down of production and well testing

 Complicated production from several reservoir zones
 Reservoir injection, for example, water alternating gas injection (WAG)
 Analysing cross flow between different reservoir zones
 Water cut limit
 Flow from multilateral wells
 Flow stability
 Flow assurance (hydrates)
 Gas lift requirements
 Production optimization
 Well test equipment sizing
It also enables a full-field integrated modeling approach, where a combination of reservoir, well bore,
pipeline network and facilities simulators are used to construct an analytical model of the full field
production system.
See also reference [21] which covers different topics where the OLGA Wells module could be used.
Production or injection flow equations other than linear, quadratic, or tabular are enabled by the Wells
module that requires a separate license.
Point contact
Several models are available for the calculation of the inflow performance relationship at a contact point.
The models vary in complexity from the relatively simple linear model, which uses a given Productivity and
Injectivity, to advanced models where the reservoir properties and inflow relationships play an important
role in the modeling. See The Wells module on page 99 for more details.
Model description
Well placement options
A well can be placed at the mid-point or the inlet (bottom) of the well section. When it is placed at the inlet,
the inlet or bottom hole flowing pressure is calculated by adding the hydrostatic pressure drop to the
pressure in the well section. If the well is placed at the mid-point of the section, the bottom hole flowing
pressure is equal to the pressure in the well section.
Phase fractions
For flows from the well section into the reservoir, the total mass flow is calculated with the gas mass flow
fraction equal to the gas mass fraction within the well section. For the flow from the reservoir into the well
section, the gas mass fraction of the oil and gas mixture of the well fluid, GASFRACTION, and water mass
fraction in the total mixture of the well fluid, WATERFRACTION (or TOTALWATERFRACTION) are given.
If GASFRACTION < 0 is given, the equilibrium gas mass fraction is used. If the water option is not used,
WATERFRACTION should be zero (default value).
- 96 -
The OLGA model
Options for calculating flow rate
Flow from reservoir into well
Two thermal options for calculating enthalpy inflow are available. The isothermal option assumes that the
fluid enters the well at the reservoir temperature, and reservoir fluid enthalpy is calculated on the basis of
reservoir temperature and well pressure. If the adiabatic option is used, the reservoir fluid enthalpy is
calculated on the basis of reservoir temperature and reservoir pressure. The fluid temperature can change
as the pressure decreases from the reservoir pressure to the pressure at the well section due to constant
enthalpy expansion and flashing.
The following three options are available for specifying the relationship between the mass flow rate and the
pressure difference (with the Wells module seven options are available.
1. Linear formula:
where Gw is the mass flow rate, pR the reservoir pressure, and pwf the bottom hole flowing pressure.
Constant B is defined as the productivity index. Constant A allows for a minimum pressure difference
required for the fluid to start to flow from the reservoir to the well and it must be less or equal to zero.
The inflow model Constant productivity index, equation (16) in the Wells module, can also be used for
linear inflow. This model is available for all users and is described in section Constant productivity
index below.
2. Non-linear formula:
where A, B and C are constants. Constant A allows for a minimum pressure difference required for
flow to start from the reservoir to the well.
3. Tabular form - see the keyword TABLE (on Library) on page 489:
The table input option is made to support gas and water coning.
The relationship between the flow rate (or other well parameters) and the pressure difference is given
by a table. If you do not give a zero flow point in the input, the program automatically adds a zero point
at zero pressure difference. For pressure differences within the range of the table, the flow rates are
calculated by a polynomial interpolation of second degree. For pressure differences larger than the
maximum value in the table, the flow rates are determined by a linear extrapolation using the tangent
to the quadratic curve at the end point of the table.
Flow from the well into the reservoir
For negative flow from the well to the reservoir, the negative enthalpy source corresponds to the pressure
and temperature conditions in the well section.
The following three options are available for specifying the relationship between the mass flow rate and the
pressure difference.
1. Linear formula:
where Gw is the mass flow rate into the reservoir and constant B is the injectivity index. Constant A
represents the minimum pressure difference required for the fluid to start to flow from the well into the
reservoir and it must be less than or equal to zero.
- 97 -
OLGA User manual
The inflow model Constant productivity index, equation (16), in the Wells module, can also be used for
linear inflow. This model is available for all users.
2. Non-linear formula:
where A, B and C are constants. A is the minimum pressure required for flow to start from the well into
the reservoir.
3. Tabular form - see keyword TABLE (on Library) on page 489:
The table input option is made to support gas and water coning.
The relationship between the flow rate (or other well parameters) and the pressure difference is given
by a table. If you do not give a zero flow point in the input, the program automatically adds a zero
pressure difference. The interpolation and extrapolation procedure is the same as for flow from the
reservoir to the well.
If equivalent pipe is used and there are wells in each parallel pipe, there are two ways to prepare the data
for these wells:
 Give input data for each individual well.

 Use a single equivalent well. Use one of the following procedures to construct data for the equivalent
well:
If the linear equation is used, the constants A and B for the equivalent well are:
where Ai and Bi are constants for each parallel well. N is number of parallel wells included in the equivalent
well.
If the non-linear equation is used, the constants A, B and C for the equivalent well are:
where Ai, Bi and Ci are the constants for each parallel well.
If the well performance is given by a table, the flow rate in the table is the sum of the flow rates of all the
parallel wells at the same pressure difference.
With the Wells module, seven new models for calculating the reservoir inflow are available. For these
models the reservoir performance can be specified through reservoir variables or from draw-down/build-up
tests from the actual well. See The Wells module on page 99 for more information.
- 98 -
The OLGA model
Dynamic Well Inflow
An option is available for simulating the dynamic characteristics of a well. For positive well flow, the
instantaneous flow rate for each phase, f, is calculated by
(15)
where qf is the instantaneous flow rate for phase f, is the steady-state flow with the bottom hole
flowing pressure at time t, and Tf is the time constant for the flow of phase f.
The steady-state flow for each phase is calculated by:
when the flowing pressure, Pwf, is less than a given threshold pressure, Plim,f. When Pwf is above Plim,f,
is set to zero. The productivity index, PIf, as well as the time constant Tf, can change with Pwf.
Numerically, equation (15) is solved by
As an option, a transport delay can be modeled by specifying a certain distance that the front of phase f
must travel before the actual inflow can be started. This distance, hf,o, is user determined.
If hf > hf,o, the flow rate into the well section is set to qf; otherwise, the flow rate into the well section is set to
zero.
The transient option is switched on if one or both of the time constants are greater than zero.
The transient option is only applied for positive flow (from the reservoir to the well section). For the
negative flow, the constants are assumed to be zero.
The Wells module
The Wells module is designed for well flow applications where the reservoir properties and the inflow
relationships play an important role in the modeling.
The Wells module is especially well suited to the following applications:
 Start-up and shut down of production and well testing.

 Complicated production from several reservoir zones.
 Reservoir injection, for example, water alternating gas injection (WAG).
 Analysing cross flow between different reservoir zones.
 Flow from multilateral wells.
- 99 -
OLGA User manual
Reservoir inflow
In the Wells module, the reservoir performance is specified through perme-ability, extension of the
reservoir, fluid properties and so on, or from draw-down/build-up tests from the actual well.
The reservoir inflow can be specified several ways, depending on the type of reservoir simulated. The
different inflow performance models are given below.
Constant productivity index
The linear form is used for the production of a typical oil reservoir, or as a first estimate when the
production curve for the well is not properly defined:
(16)
where pR is the static reservoir pressure, pwf is the flowing bottom hole pres-sure and J is the constant
productivity index given by:
Linear productivity (typical oil reservoir)
in oilfield units (stb/d/psi)
where
J Productivity index [stb/d/psi]
kh Effective permeability x net pay [mD ft]
n Oil viscosity [cP]
Bo Oil formation volume factor [Rft3/Sft3]
re Reservoir extension [ft]
rw Wellbore radius [ft]
s Mechanical skin
Forchheimer and Single Forchheimer model
When the full production curve can be estimated and a constant PI is not ap-plicable a quadratic form of
the relation between inflow and draw-down can be used, for example the Forchheimer model (see [4]):
where B and C are the linear and non-linear part of the productivity index respec-tively defined by:
- 100 -
The OLGA model
where B's unit is [psi2/(scf/d)], C's unit is [psi2/(scf2/d2)] and
T Reservoir temperature [°R] (RESTEMPERATURE)
mg Gas viscosity at reservoir conditions [cP] (VISGRES)
z Gas z-factor at reservoir conditions (ZFACT)
re Reservoir extension [ft] (RESEXT)
rw Wellbore radius [ft] (HOLES/2)
s Mechanical skin [-] (SKINS)
D Non-Darcy or turbulence skin [1/Sft3/d] (SKIND)
k Reservoir permeability [mD] (KPERM)
h Well effective net pay [ft] (HPAY)
For high pressure gas wells with limited draw down, pressure can be used instead of pressure-squared, in
which case the Single Forchheimer equation is written:
where B and C are defined by:
where B's unit is [psi/(scf/d)], C's unit is [psi/(scf2/d2)], and pav is defined as
Vogels equation
The following IPR equation, known as Vogels equation, was traditionally used for oil-well performance in
saturated oil reservoirs (see [4] ).
where q0,max is the theoretical maximum oil rate when flowing bottom hole pressure equals zero.
Note: The injection volume flow is calculated according to reservoir fluid density. That means that the
injection rate of - for example, water - is the volume rate found from Forchheimer multiplied with water
density, not the mass flow of gas in the reservoir.
- 101 -
OLGA User manual
Backpressure and normalized backpressure equations
For gas wells, the following simple equation is often used for the inflow performance (see [4]).
where C is defined by:
where C's unit is [scf/d/psi2n].
This equation is often referred to as the backpressure equation. The exponent n ranges in value from 0.5
to 1.0. A normalized form of this equation can be used for saturated oil wells:
where q0,max is the maximum oil rate when flowing bottom hole pressure equals zero.
Undersaturated oil wells
For oil wells producing from reservoirs with static reservoir pressure above the bubble point pressure, the
bottom hole flowing pressure might drop below the bubble point pressure during production. In these
cases the linear inflow relationship will not be sufficient alone to describe the inflow under varying flowing
pressures. The following two equations are therefore introduced:
for
and
for
where pb is the bubble point pressure.
Tabulated inflow performance curve
If neither of the above inflow performance curves nor the linear and non-linear option presented in this
section is applicable for the reservoir, you can specify a tabulated inflow curve. See the description at the
beginning of this section.
- 102 -
The OLGA model
Variable reservoir reference pressure
When a reservoir has been flowing for some time at high rates the reservoir pressure close to the well can
be reduced significantly. The initial static reservoir reference pressure is no longer applicable for specifying
the inflow from the zone and a reduced reference pressure is introduced.
For the model to take these local drawdown and build-up effects into account, the reservoir reference
pressure can be specified as a function of time by the user.
Injectivity index
The injectivity index is used for modeling of flow from the wellbore into the reservoir zone of gas,
hydrocarbon liquid or water. This option is, for example, used for pushing the gas back into the reservoir
during a work-over operation.
The injectivity index is adapted to specify the relation between the flow from the well into the reservoir and
the pressure build-up in the well. That is, when the bottom hole pressure exceeds the static reservoir
pressure, an inflow into the reservoir starts depending on the injectivity index.
The inflow into the reservoir can be specified on the same form as the well production, but a different
relationship can also be used. In addition, a separate linear injectivity index can be used for the oil phase
or the water phase.
Fracture pressure
When the pressure in the wellbore exceeds a certain value above the static reservoir pressure the
formation will break down. The pressure required to burst the formation is called the fracture pressure.
When the pressure inside the wellbore exceeds this pressure small fractures are created in the formation
resulting in a significant increase in injectivity, and the fluid in the wellbore flows into these fractures
instead of flowing into the reservoir matrix.
By specifying the fracture pressure, you define the maximum allowable pressure inside the wellbore. In the
Wells module, this is modeled by an 'infinite' inflow into the reservoir zone.
How to use
Standard and advanced well feature
There are two ways of specifying the data for flow between the reservoir and the well. You can either
specify the coefficients used in the inflow correlations directly, or you can specify traditional well/reservoir
variables such as permeability and net pay.
In the standard well for OLGA, the coefficients used in the inflow correlations is specified directly. Three
options are available for specifying the relationship between the mass flow rate and the pressure
difference: a linear formula, a non-linear formula and a tabular form. See Model description on page 96 for
more details.
The Wells module is designed for well flow applications where the reservoir properties and inflow
relationships play an important role in the modeling. In the Wells module, the reservoir performance is
specified through permeability, extension of reservoir, fluid properties, and so on. The well/reservoir
variables are translated into the coefficients used in the inflow correlations. The volume flow q is a function
of the bottom hole pressure pwf, the reservoir pressure pR, and the computed coefficients used in the inflow
correlations. The coefficients used in the inflow correlations can also be given directly.
There are several different inflow models implemented in the Wells module, such as Forchheimer, Vogels
and Backpressure. See Model description on page 96 for more information.
- 103 -
OLGA User manual
For advanced well inflow types, the coefficients can given directly by using the keys BINJ, CINJ, BPROD,
CPROD and EXPONENTN or by setting the reservoir variables through using some of the keys BOOIL,
BPPRESSURE, FRACPR, HOLES, HPAY, INJECTIVITY, INJPOSTFRACFACTOR,
INJPREFRACFRATOR, INJTHRESHOLD, KPERM, PHASE, PRODI, PRODPOSTFRACFACTOR,
PRODPREFRACFACTOR, QMAX, RESEXT, SKIND, SKINS, VISGRES, VISLRES and ZFACT. Which
key to use for the different well flow models is highlighted in the GUI interface.
The keys GASINJ, OILINJ and WATINJ can be used to specify the injection rate for each phase. The
specified values override the calculated injectivity for the different phases. Note that even if all the linear
phasewise injectivity keys are specified, AINJ and BINJ or INJECTIVITY must be given dummy values in
the input.
Note: The steady state pre-processor does not handle injection wells. For these cases a solution with
source close to 0 is found as input to the dynamic solver.
Input
The keyword ”WELL” is used to define required data for calculating the flow performance of wells.
Keyword dependencies: BRANCH, GEOMETRY, OPTIONS, POSITION, FEED
Required keys: LABEL, INJOPTION, PRODOPTION, RESPRESSURE, RESTEMPERATURE,

ISOTHERMAL, LOCATION (Default values can be used if specified)
You can use either the key ABSPOSITION or the key POSITION, or the keys PIPE and SECTION, to
locate the well.
The production and the injection models are specified through the keys PRODOPTION and INJOPTION
with the following values available:
 LINEAR
 QUADRATIC
 TABULAR
 FORCHHEIMER (The Forchheimer model)
 SINGLEFORCHHEIMER (Forchheimer with pressure instead of pressure squared)
 VOGELS (The Vogels equation for saturated oil reservoirs)
 BACKPRESSURE (The Backpressure equation for oil and gas wells)
 NORMALIZEDBACKPR (Normalized backpressure for saturated oil wells)
 UNDERSATURATED (Under saturated oil wells)
For advanced well inflow types the coefficients can be given directly by using the keys BINJ, CINJ,
BPROD, CPROD and EXPONENTN or by setting the reservoir variables through using some of the keys
BOOIL, BPPRESSURE, FRACPR, HOLES, HPAY, INJECTIVITY, INJPOSTFRACFACTOR,
INJPREFRACFRATOR, INJTHRESHOLD, KPERM, PHASE, PRODI, PRODPOSTFRACFACTOR,
PRODPREFRACFACTOR, QMAX, RESEXT, SKIND, SKINS, VISGRES, VISLRES and ZFACT. Which
key to use for the different well flow models is highlighted in the GUI interface.
When using the standard well in OLGA ,the key GASFRACTION, and WATERFRACTION or
TOTALWATERFRACTION, is appropriate to use because AINJ, BINJ, APROD and BPROD then are
mass based. Values from PVT table are used when GASFRACTION and TOTALWATERFRACTION is set
to -1 in the input.
With the advanced well inflow types, the key GORST and WATERCUT is appropriate to use because
AINJ, BINJ, APROD and BPROD then are volume based. WATERCUT is calculated from PVT table if set
to -1 in the input.
- 104 -
The OLGA model
If COMPOSITIONAL = ON in OPTION, either the key FEEDMASSFRACTION or FEEDMOLEFRACTION

is used.
If COMPOSITIONAL = BLACKOIL in OPTION, the key FEEDVOLFRACTION is used.
Note that you might not get as output the fractions or water cut specified for the well because this depends
on there being enough content of the specified phases in the well.
See the description of keyword WELL (on Flowpath) on page 392 for more details.
Output
The keywords TREND and PROFILE in the input file specify the output from the simulation.
The resulting trend file (*.tpl) and profile file (*.ppl) are used for plotting several Well variables (same
variables for Advanced and Standard well):
 Mass rates for each phase (gas, oil and water)

 Steady-state mass rates for each phase
 Total mass rate for the liquid phase and all phases
 Cone front for each phase
 Enthalpy for the well
See the Well Output Variables on page 605 for more details.
Zone
A zone is a region within a branch in which OLGA generates automatically inflows in each control volume,
based on a template definition.
Zone is only implicitly affected by license requirements, that is, it is only affected by license requirements
that apply to the inflows referenced.
Model description
General
Given a start position and an end position, inflows are generated automatically in all control volumes inside
the region, based on a template. While most properties are assumed to be constant over a zone, pressure
and temperature can change. Refer to the Interpolation section below for further details.
Refer to the individual sections to get detailed information on the various references given in the ZONE
keyword.
Reservoir inflow assumptions
The inflows specified generate well-type objects where the location is assumed to be in the middle of the
control volume. Furthermore, it is assumed, that all reservoir properties except for the reservoir pressure
and the reservoir temperature remain constant throughout the zone.
Interpolation
There are three different kinds of interpolation implemented, which are described in the following.
- 105 -
OLGA User manual
No interpolation
This option (referred to as OFF in the input) means that the reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature is
assumed to be constant through the entire zone.
Vertical interpolation
This option (referred to as VERTICAL in the input) applies linear interpolation with respect to the vertical
depth between the reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature specified at the zone endpoints.
Automatic interpolation
This option (referred to as AUTOMATIC in the input) requires that the reservoir pressure and reservoir
temperature is specified at one of the zone endpoints. Given this reference pressure, p0, the pressure,
p(h), is calculated at each depth h by integrating the hydrostatic pressure of the reservoir liquid according
to
The reservoir temperature is assumed to be constant.
How to use
General
Instead of specifying WELL keywords in numerous consecutive control volumes, the ZONE keyword can
be used to simplify input. The extend of the zone is specified through the position references
STARTPOSITION and ENDPOSITION. For each control volume between the endpoints, well-type objects
are generated automatically according to a template. The template is specified using the keyword
RESERVOIRINFLOW under Library and is linked to ZONE through the reference key
RESERVOIRINFLOW.
Reservoir inflow
The keyword RESERVOIRINFLOW under Library is in most parts a duplicate of the flow-path level
keyword WELL. As compared to WELL, there is no position to be specified because the positions of each
respective inflow is generated automatically through the input given on ZONE. Furthermore, the reservoir
pressure and reservoir temperature are specified through ZONE. For detailed information, please refer to
the section on interpolation below.
Coefficient specification
One final thing to be noted is the specification of the injection and production coefficients. On WELL, these
are specified for that particular inflow object whereas their interpretation in RESERVOIRINFLOW is
depending on the COEFTYPE key on ZONE. For COEFTYPE=TOTAL, the coefficient values are
considered to correspond to the sum for all contributions within the zone. For COEFTYPE=PERMETER,
the coefficient values mustbe multiplied by a length to generate the value for each individual inflow. To
illustrate this, consider a 1,000 meter long zone. If one of the coefficients is specified to equal 50 when
COEFTYPE=TOTAL, the equivalent input using COEFTYPE=PERMETER is to specify that very same
coefficient to be 0.050.
- 106 -
The OLGA model
Interpolation
The zone has a number of options for specifying the reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature;
INTERPOLATION={[OFF],VERTICAL,AUTOMATIC}. The default option, OFF, corresponds to constant
reservoir pressure and temperature as given through PRESSURE and TEMPERATURE. A more
advanced option is vertical interpolation. Here, the reservoir pressure and reservoir temperature are
specified at the zone endpoints (STARTPRESSURE, ENDPRESSURE, STARTTEMPERATURE, and
ENDTEMPERATURE) and linear interpolation is carried out as a function of vertical depth. The third
interpolation option, automatic interpolation, uses a uniform temperature while the pressure is calculated
through integrating the hydrostatic pressure contribution in the reservoir fluid starting at the given reference
pressure.
Time series
The PRESSURE and TEMPERATURE keys in the ZONE keyword can be given as time series. Note that
the number of elements in these time series must correspond to the number of elements in the TIME key
which is used for the RESERVOIRINFLOW keyword. The same correspondence must exist if
STARTPRESSURE/ENDPRESSURE and STARTTEMPERATURE/ENDTEMPERATURE is used.
Output
When specifying output variables for zones, output is always given accumulated over the entire zone. To
get data for the individual inflows, set ZONEDETAILS=YES in the TRENDDATA keyword. By doing so,
output is generated for each individual inflow that has been automatically generated in addition to the
accumulated one.
Note: It is not possible to get data for an individual inflow. It is either all or nothing.
Near-wellbore
Conventional dynamic well flow models use steady-state IPRs (Inflow Performance Relationship) to
describe the influx of oil and gas from the reservoir, ignoring the transients in the near-wellbore area.
Furthermore, reservoir models use steady-state lift curves to represent the TPRs (Tubing Performance
Relationship), which ignores the wellbore flow dynamics. Neither the well models nor the reservoir models
can account for the dynamic wellbore/reservoir interactions.
In OLGA, the IPR is described with the WELL keyword. With this model some transient phenomena in the
well are not accurately predicted, while others are not predicted at all. To bridge this modeling gap, OLGA
can be coupled to ROCX, a near wellbore reservoir model developed by IFE, or to the ECLIPSE Industry
Reference Reservoir Simulator.
Integrated simulations of wellbore (using OLGA) and the near wellbore reservoir (using ROCX or
ECLIPSE) should be used when transient phenomena in the wellbore/reservoir are studied. Typical
examples are:
 Well Shut-in/start-up
 Onset of instability
 Dynamic gas/water coning
 Well loading and back seepage
 Cross flow
- 107 -
OLGA User manual
To run OLGA-ROCX simulations, a ROCX Module license is required.
To run OLGA-ECLIPSE Link simulations, licenses for ECLIPSE and Open ECLIPSE are required.
Model description
To study wellbore-near wellbore reservoir interactions, OLGA can be coupled to either ROCX or ECLIPSE.
The description in this section applies to both.
During the simulation, OLGA provides the wellbore pressure to the reservoir model and the reservoir
model calculates the flow rate of each phase at the interface. The flow rates can be positive or negative
depending on the flow directions corresponding to production and injection respectively. In the case of
injection or back seepage, the phase mass fractions in the wellbore section that the reservoir model
interfaces to are converted to saturations to calculate the fractional injection rate for each phase.
The numerical coupling between OLGA and the reservoir simulator is implemented in an implicit scheme.
The concept of the implicit coupling here is that the reservoir model calculates a sensitivity coefficient for
the production rate with respect to the wellbore pressure at each time step and makes it available for
OLGA. At the next time step, OLGA uses this sensitivity coefficient to determine the new wellbore
pressure. The size of the near-wellbore domain contributing to the rate-pressure sensitivity calculation is
specified by the coupling level that can be given as a simulation input.
The principle of the implicit coupling can be summarized as follows:
1. Assuming the models have been integrated up to time step n, the wellbore model begins integration to
time step n+1 by requesting the reservoir model to calculate the sensitivity coefficients and ,
which are used in this relation:
where PP is the pressure in the wellbore, MP is the mass flow rate for each phase and the subscript p
refers to a given phase, that is, gas, oil or water.
2. The wellbore model uses the above relation as a boundary condition and solves for the complete
wellbore. The wellbore model has now completed time step n+1 and sends and to the
reservoir model.
3. The reservoir model completes its time step n+1 calculation by using the wellbore model supplied
boundary condition.
The sensitivity coefficient is calculated by
which can be analytically derived from the reservoir model equations. is simply given by
With this implicit coupling implementation, the integrated model can run simulations with relatively long
time steps while maintaining numerical stability.
- 108 -
The OLGA model
OLGA coupled with ROCX
The near-wellbore reservoir model ROCX is capable of simulating three-phase Newtonian Darcy flow in
porous media. The flow equations are solved in three dimensions, giving saturations and pressures
varying in space and time as output in addition to the flow rate of each phase at the boundary. Thermal
computation is also included. ROCX supports both radial and rectangular grids. The numerical and
physical kernel code is not affected by the choice of grid. An implicit modification of the IMPES (Implicit
Pressure Explicit Saturation) numerical scheme is used. The sensitivity coefficient is extracted from the
Jacobian matrix of the reservoir system of equations. The sensitivity coefficient that is used to determine
the implicit domain contributing to the rate-pressure sensitivity is read from the ROCX input file.
In addition to the PVT table functionality, ROCX is also equipped with a blackoil simulation functionality. In
this case the flow rate of each blackoil component is computed in addition to the phase rates.
During simulation, ROCX is considered as a plug-in to the OLGA model, and the integrated simulation is
fully controlled by OLGA.
OLGA coupled with ECLIPSE
During simulation, OLGA and ECLIPSE 300 are run as two separate processes that communicate through
Microsoft MPI. The simulation is controlled by OLGA. To further improve the numerical stability, the OLGA-
ECLIPSE link include an option to iterate if the difference between the predicted linearized flow rate (a)
differs from the flow rate computed in the reservoir simulator at the end of the time step. The tolerance for
this difference, as well as the maximum number of iterations, can be changed in the keyword
ECLIPSEOPTIONS on Case level. The size of the implicit domain can also be selected here.
Using OLGA PVT table together with ECLIPSE black oil
Using the PVT tab option in OLGA the fluid phases are tracked and the fluid phase properties and
composition of the phases are assumed to follow what is specified in the input tabulated file. When using
this option, no blackoil components are tracked in the wellbore. When interacting with the reservoir (where
a blackoil formulation is used) it is therefore important to be aware of some of the assumptions made when
fluid is entering or leaving the reservoir.
When the fluid is flowing from the reservoir, the phase volume flows are used to compute the mass flow of
each phase entering the wellbore. OLGA assumes the equilibrium as described by the PVT table file for
the entering fluid phases. This means that OLGA assumes that gas flowing into the wellbore can contain
water vapor, even if this is not the case in the reservoir model. Note that it is possible to tell OLGA to not
include water in the flash by choosing only a hydrocarbon flash.
For flow into the reservoir, a composition for the mapping of the flow onto the black oil components of
ECLIPSE is done. Water vapor in the gas is mapped onto the H2O component of ECLIPSE, where in the
reservoir water will flash to a liquid phase. The mass fraction of gas in the oil phase is computed and
passed onto ECLIPSE. A flash of the total composition that enters the reservoir is then performed by
ECLIPSE.
When using the PVT table option in OLGA, the same fluid characterization for generating the OLGA PVT
table file and the ECLIPSE black oil table should be used in order for the fluid properties to be similar.
How to use
To define a NEARWELLSOURCE, follow the steps below.
 Each NEARWELLSOURCE must have a unique LABEL.

 The position along the branch must be given, either by use of the POSITION key, ABSPOSITION, or
by a combination of the PIPE and SECTION keys.
- 109 -
OLGA User manual
For OLGA ROCX simulations
 The name of the ROCX input file must be given (key ROCX).
 A label that matches a position label defined in the ROCX input file must be given (key
RESBOUNDNAME).
ROCX reads its input from a keyword based text file. The data defined here is permeability and porosities
of the porous medium, fluid transport properties and thermal properties of the rock and fluids. Necessary
boundary and initial conditions must be given to enable simulation. As in OLGA, the boundary conditions
of the reservoir model can also be specified in time series. ROCX reserves the skin option for the situation
when the inflow deviation from its ideal cannot be properly accounted for by the reservoir model itself (for
example, the perforation skin). Standard industry file formats are used for output.
More information about how to define the input for the ROCX model can be found in the ROCX User
Manual.
For OLGA-ECLIPSE Link simulations
To specify the completion to connect to, give these keys, which must match the corresponding identifiers in
the ECLIPSE input file:
 The name of the well (key ECLIPSEWELL).

 The reservoir grid block indices of the connected block, BLOCKINDEX_I, BLOCKINDEX_J and
BLOCKINDEX_K.
 The name of the local grid refinement (key LGRNAME) that the well is completed in. The default name
is GLOB (no grid refinement).
ECLIPSE reads its input from a standard ECLIPSE 300 input file. Detailed information about how to define
the input for the ECLIPSE 300 model can be found in the standard documentation included in the
ECLIPSE installation.
Initial Conditions for OLGA ROCX
When OLGA is coupled to ROCX, the following are alternative ways to initialize the simulation.
 Each simulator is initialized as if it was run standalone. Tthat is, OLGA uses INITIALCONDITIONS for
the OLGA flow paths, and ROCX uses either manual or automatic initialization for the reservoir.
 ROCX is initialized with data from a restart record written at a certain time tb. OLGA uses
INITIALCONDITIONS for the OLGA flow paths. The start time of the ROCX simulation is set
automatically to the start time of the OLGA simulation.
 Both OLGA and ROCX are initialized from restart records. The details of this is described in the
section 'How to use the restart functionality' below.
Initial Conditions for the OLGA-ECLIPSE Link
When OLGA is coupled to ECLIPSE, the following are alternative ways to initialize the simulation
 Each simulator is initialized as if it was run standalone. That is, OLGA uses INITIALCONDITIONS for
the OLGA flow paths, and ECLIPSE uses initial values or equilibration for the reservoir.
 ECLIPSE is initialized with data from a restart record written at a certain time tb. The start time of the
ECLIPSE simulation is then automatically tb. This time (tb) must also be used as STARTTIME in the
INTEGRATION keyword of the OLGA simulation.
 Both OLGA and ECLIPSE are initialized from restart records. The details of this are described in the
section 'How to use the restart functionality' below.
- 110 -
The OLGA model
How to use the restart functionality
To run a restart simulation, the base case (in the following called B) must be set up to write restart data,
and the restart case (in the following called R) must be able to read the restart data. Two typical workflows
are described below.
1. In the base case, OLGA and the reservoir simulator are run standalone (not coupled). In the restart
run they are run coupled.
2. OLGA and the reservoir model are run coupled in the base run as well as in the restart run.
Restart for OLGA ROCX simulations
For workflow 1, the ROCX input as well as the OLGA input for the base case simulation must include
restart write instructions, so that restart records are written at the desired time. In workflow 2, a restart
record is written automatically by ROCX as well as by OLGA at the restart write times specified in the
OLGA input.
In a restart simulation, ROCX does not use the restart read time from its own input file, but uses the restart
read time set in the OLGA input (the READTIME key in the RESTART keyword). The name of the restart
data file (B.rrs) must be specified in the ROCX restart input file (R.rocx). For more information on how to
define restart input for ROCX, please refer to the ROCX User Manual.
Restart for OLGA-ECLIPSE Link simulations
For workflow 1, the ECLIPSE input as well as the OLGA input for the base case simulation must include
restart write instructions, so that restart records are written at the desired time. In workflow 2, a restart
record is written automatically by ECLIPSE as well as by OLGA at the end of the base case simulation.
Note that the OLGA simulation time must be equal to the ECLIPSE simulation time at any time throughout
the simulation. In a restart simulation, ECLIPSE uses the read time from its own input file (R.DATA).
Therefore, to ensure that OLGA and ECLIPSE reads restart data saved at the same time, you must make
sure that the restart read step number corresponds to the restart read time set in the OLGA input.
This can be achieved by the following steps.
 Open the ECLIPSE 300 file B.PRT.

 In this file, find the header for the restart record you want to start from. The 'time in seconds' in this
header must be used as STARTTIME in the INTEGRATION keyword of the OLGA restart simulation
(R.opi).
 In the same header, identify the corresponding step number.
 In the ECLIPSE 300 restart input file (R.DATA), use this step number in the RESTART specification.
 In the ECLIPSE 300 restart input file (R.DATA), the name of the base case (that is, B.DATA) must
also be given in the RESTART specification.
For more information on how to define the ECLIPSE 300 input files, please refer to the ECLIPSE
documentation in the ECLIPSE installation.
- 111 -
OLGA User manual
Notes OLGA ROCX
 OLGA ROCX is only compatible with the PVT table or blackoil tracking schemes (OPTIONS
COMPOSITIONAL=OFF or BLACKOIL).
 For three-phase simulations, ROCX uses the OLGA PVT table for looking up fluid properties.
Currently, only the three-phase fixed format OLGA PVT table can be used.
 The Steady-state preprocessor in OLGA cannot be applied for OLGA ROCX blackoil simulations. The
simulation can be initialized by initial conditions or restart files. ROCX has its own restart file with the
extension .rrs.
 Other limitations on the ROCX reservoir simulator are given in the ROCX User manual.
Notes OLGA-ECLIPSE Link
 The OLGA-ECLIPSE Link is compatible only with the PVT table or blackoil tracking scheme
(OPTIONS COMPOSITIONAL= OFF or BLACKOIL). Using the blackoil tracking scheme, exactly three
blackoil components must be used (one gas, one oil and one water component). The ECLIPSE 300
blackoil option must be used for the reservoir part.
 Only one reservoir instance can be linked with OLGA in a single simulation. However, this instance
can cover several reservoirs.
 There is no thermal computation in the reservoir, but the temperature versus depth can be input. This
is standard for ECLIPSE 300 blackoil. For the wellbore, all the temperature options in OLGA are
available.
 The Steady state pre-processor cannot be used when OLGA is coupled to ECLIPSE. The simulation
can be initialized by initial conditions, restart files or a combination of the two. Refer to the ECLIPSE
documentation for information on the input requirements for ECLIPSE 300.
 Different phases flow in the same direction in/out of a single completion. However different
completions can have different flow directions.
 There is a model difference regarding solubility in ECLIPSE blackoil compared to OLGA blackoil. The
limitations are: in OLGA oil cannot dissolve in gas, in ECLIPSE water cannot dissolve in gas.
 In general, the computational speed for small cases is comparable to the computational speed of
OLGA-ROCX. For large cases the speed is better.
 Usability limitations:
 The ECLIPSE input file cannot be generated by OLGA or any tool in the OLGA installation. GUI
support for generation of ECLIPSE input files is offered by Petrel.
 As a consequence of the previous point, there is no automatic coupling. This means that the user
input in the OLGA GUI is not used when generating the ECLIPSE input file or vice versa.
 It is the user's responsibility to assure that the PVT input in both simulators describe the same
fluid.
 The simulation start time in OLGA must be set manually to the simulation start time in ECLIPSE.
This is also required for restart simulations.
 There is no viewer in the OLGA installation for the reservoir part. Instead the reservoir output
must be viewed in standard ECLIPSE viewers such as Petrel, FloViz or Tecplot.
- 112 -
The OLGA model
Flow assurance and special modelling options
Slug tracking
In the standard OLGA model, physically sharp fronts in liquid holdup are smeared out by the numerical
scheme, a phenomenon that is more pronounced in horizontal or near horizontal high velocity transient
flow cases. In situations where slug flow is identified by the flow model, hydrodynamic slugs are accounted
for only in an average manner that does not give any information about slugs, their properties, or how they
affect the flow. However, many flow parameters are highly dependent on the slug pattern (for example, the
pressure drop in a flowpath). Thus, it is necessary to be able to account explicitly for the occurrence of
slugs.
The slug tracking model is designed to initiate, maintain, and track physically sharp fronts such as those
constituted by startup slugs and hydrodynamic slugs. Among other things, the model gives information
about position, velocity, length, and other characteristic quantities of each individual slug. In turn, this
information is used to give better estimates of the actual properties of the overall flow.
The slug tracking model have two different options initiating slugs (keyword SLUGTRACKING). These
options are:
1. Level slug initiation, which initiate slugs when changes in liquid hold-up are detected from one section
to another. The change in hold-up might be caused by a start-up situation, liquid sources, or boundary
conditions changing with time just as well as geometry effects. This option is activated through the
LEVEL key and is mainly to be used for well-defined start-up slugs.
2. Hydrodynamic slug initiation, which is the recommended slug initiation method for hydrodynamic and
terrain slugging. Hydrodynamic slugs can be initiated when OLGA predicts transitions from either
stratified or annular flow to slug flow. This option is activated by the key HYDRODYNAMIC.
In addition to these two options, there is manual hydrodynamic slug initiation. This option is activated
through the HYDRODYNAMIC key and requires that all slugs initiated are given as user input. Thus, to use
this option, detailed knowledge about the slugging is required because you have to specify the number of
slugs to set up, at which positions to set them up, and at which times.
Slug tracking is part of the Slug tracking module that requires a separate license.
Model description
In the slug tracking approach, the fixed grid in OLGA is supplemented by a moving grid that tracks the
position of each slug front and tail. Fronts and tails are then modeled as discontinuities in the mass and
velocity fields. This enables an efficient representation of the holdup distribution with a relatively small
number of grid points. The movement of these discontinuities are governed by the closure relationships
used in OLGA.
There are two types of slugs that can be initiated in OLGA. These types are level slugs and hydrodynamic
slugs. Level slugs are often initiated at low-points where liquid has accumulated, while hydrodynamic slugs
can be initiated at any point in the pipeline provided OLGA predicts slug flow (ID = 3).
- 113 -
OLGA User manual
Initiation of level slugs
Figure 50 Schematic visualization of a pipeline shut-in situation where liquid has been
accumulated at low points. The pipeline consists of a well, a transport line, and a riser.
Level slug initiation can be carried out at any time by setting LEVEL=ON in the SLUGTRACKING keyword.
Level slugs then are initiated in the user specified time interval given by STARTTIME and ENDTIME. The
detection of level slugs is based on differences in the gas fraction. SLUGVOID is used to specify the
maximum void allowed in a slug, whereas BUBBLEVOID determines the minimum void in a bubble. When
a section is found with void less than SLUGVOID, a level slug might be initiated, all depending on the void
in the neighboring sections. If the void increases and exceeds BUBBLEVOID within two upstream
sections, a tail is initiated. If, on the other hand, the void increases and exceeds BUBBLEVOID within two
downstream sections, a front is initiated.
Initiation of hydrodynamic slugs
Figure 51 Schematic visualization of the initiation of a hydrodynamic slug.
- 114 -
The OLGA model
If the key HYDRODYNAMIC=ON in the SLUGTRACKING keyword, and OLGA predicts slug flow (ID=3) at
boundary J, a hydrodynamic slug can be initiated in section J, J-1, or over both sections, see Figure 51.
The methodology for slug initiation depends on the value of SLUGTRACKINGMODEL under the OPTIONS
keyword (see description below).
Note: Initiating a new slug implies redistribution of masses, which might lead to discontinuities in
pressure in inclined or vertical pipes. To avoid such discontinuities, the new slug is set up with an as
short slug length as possible. These short hydrodynamic slugs then grow into larger slugs as they
propagate through the pipe if the conditions are favourable.
OPTIONS SLUGTRACKINGMODEL=OLGA2015
From OLGA 2015.1, a method of stochastic slug initiation has been implemented. This enables OLGA to
simulate the irregular behavior over time that characterizes the slug initiation better. The mechanistic
model for slug initiation derives from work carried out in the HORIZON II JIP [20]. The model is based on
the conservation equation for the number density of slugs:
(20)
where N represents the density of slugs in the pipeline (1/m) and UA represents the advection velocity
(average velocity with which slugs move through the pipeline). The term B is the 'birth' rate of slugs (rate at
which new slugs are formed 1/m/s), and D is the 'death' rate of slugs (1/m/s). Equation (20) is a continuum
equation, but OLGA slug tracking models slug birth and death as discrete events. When new short slugs
form in a region of separated flow, the rate of formation, is assumed to depend on the degree of instability
in the system and the spatial density of slug precursors Np (1/m).
The slug precursor density Np is obtained by simulating the unit cell length of successive short slugs of
lengths 5 to 10 diameters. To this end, a two-phase tail profile model [2] is applied to compute the holdup
distribution in the elongated bubble zone.
The introduction of slugs is governed by the slug growth criterion, also known as the minimum slip
criterion. This criterion can be expressed in terms of the front (VF) and tail (VT) velocities of a candidate
slug. If the flow is locally separated, we consider the introduction of a candidate slug and calculate its front
and tail velocities. If VF < VT, the slug will quickly die, so a new slug should not be introduced. On the other
hand, if VF > VT, the slug will grow, so a slug can be introduced. In the latter case, the decision to introduce
a slug or not is based on an estimate of the probability of slug formation.
The birth rate B is modeled in the form:
where kB is a constant. The final factor represents the (inverse) time for a slug to grow to a length of 10
times the pipe diameter D.
Then for a pipe section of length Δz and a time interval Δt, the probability of a new slug being formed is P
= B Δz Δt. In most cases, the time step is small, so that P << 1.
New slugs can also be formed by the introduction of a short Taylor bubble in a region of bubbly flow or to
split an existing slug. This is handled in a manner analogous to the introduction of a new slug into a region
of separated flow.
The death rate of slugs is not modeled explicitly in OLGA slug tracking. Instead, the death of an individual
slug occurs when the slug tail catches up with the slug front. The number of slugs can also be reduced by
slug merging, which occurs when the front of one slug catches up with the tail of the preceding slug.
- 115 -
OLGA User manual
In addition to the new and improved slug birth model, the slug tracking model has also been revised to
improve the physical basis of the model. In essence, the slug tracking functionality solves equations for the
motion of each slug front and tail. Thus, the key components of the physical model are the closures that
affect the slug front and tail velocity. The slug tail velocity is specified by a correlation based on that of
Bendiksen [2]. This has been thoroughly tested against a wide range of experimental data and found to be
accurate. The model also contains a factor governing the dependence of the slug tail velocity on the slug
length: The flow in the front region of each slug is dominated by a recirculation zone or wake driven by the
shear layer between the fast-moving liquid in the slug front and the relatively slow-moving liquid layer
which it overtakes. If a slug is shorter than the length of the wake zone (which is of order 5 to 10 times the
pipe diameter), the tail of the slug senses the velocity field in the wake. This leads to an increase in the tail
velocity for short slugs, as first reported by Fagundes Netto et al. [10]. Figure 52 shows a plot of slug tail
velocity against the slug length; the tail velocity VT is normalized with the value V∞ corresponding to an
infinitely long slug, and the slug length LS is normalized with the pipe diameter D. The plot comes from a
CFD study by Ujang et al. [36] and includes comparison with experimental data [10] and literature
correlations, see references [7] and [11]. The dependence on slug length was revised in OLGA 2015 and
with SLUGTRACKINGMODEL=OLGA2015 this behaviour contributes to a gradual evolution in the slug
length.
Figure 52 Variation of the slug tail velocity with slug length (for details see Ujang et al. [36])
Although SLUGTRACKINGMODEL=OLGA2015 is meant to be a predictive way to model slugs, there is a

tuning capability to help the user to match data. The tuning constant SLUGFREQCONST modifies the birth
rate model and the model for the slug tail velocity. Higher values increase the initiation frequency and
favour shorter slugs.
- 116 -
The OLGA model
OPTIONS SLUGTRACKINGMODEL=OLGA6
SLUGTRACKINGMODEL=OLGA6 activates the slug functionality, which was the only option in OLGA
2014.3 and earlier versions. In this model a slug is initiated in a section if:
 OLGA predicts slug flow.

 The distance to the closest slug must exceed a minimum distance.
 The time elapsed since a slug was either generated in or passed through the section must be larger
than a specified minimum time.
The minimum distance between slugs is specified through the INITFREQUENCY key (slug initiation
frequency, Fi). Using the slug initiation frequency, the minimum distance is calculated as UB/Fi, where UB is
the bubble nose velocity of the new slug. Per default, the minimum distance is 10 pipe diameters.
The idle time required before generating a new slug at any section boundary is specified through the
DELAYCONSTANT key. The delay constant, DC, is the number of pipe diameters a slug must travel
before the slug model tries to initiate a new slug at the same boundary. Thus, the time between two
consecutive slug initiations on any given boundary or the time between a slug passes a boundary and a
new slug can be set up is given by
D = pipe diameter [m]
Ul = average liquid velocity [m/s]
The default value for the delay constant is 150.
It is possible to estimate the value of the delay constant by using the Shea correlation for slug frequency.
This correlation is given by:
D= pipe diameter [m]
L= pipeline length [m]
Usl = superficial liquid velocity [m/s]
The delay constant should be tuned such that the resulting slug frequency is in the same order of
magnitude as Fsl. Note that this correlation is based on experimental data and field data for systems
dominated by hydrodynamic slugging. Thus, if terrain effects are predominant, you should not use the
Shea correlation. The default value of 150 has been found to yield good results for a number of cases.
When tuning this model we recommended that only the DELAYCONSTANT key is varied first. If it is not
possible to achieve the slug pattern sought by varying DELAYCONSTANT alone, INITFREQUENCY can
be modified as well.
- 117 -
OLGA User manual
How to use
General
1. Add the SLUGTRACKING keyword and choose slug initiation method(s) (LEVEL and/or
HYDRODYNAMIC).
2. Add trend and profile plot variables to see differences between running the simulation with and without
slug tracking, for example,
PROFILEDATA VARIABLE=(PT, TM, ID, HOL, HOLHL, HOLWT, UL, UG)
TRENDDATA PIPE=PIPE5, SECTION=3, VARIABLE=(QLT, QLTHL, QLTWT, ACCLIQ, ACCOIQ,

ACCWAQ)
The accumulated flow rates (ACCLIQ) can be used to estimate slug sizes.
3. Add global trend to get overview of the simulation.
TRENDDATA VARIABLE=(LIQC, OILC, WATC)
TRENDDATA VARIABLE=(RMERR, VOLGBL, HT, NSLUG)
Slug identification number
When initiated, each slug is assigned a unique identification number. The first slug initiated gets
identification number, and then 1 is added for each new slug initiated. This unique number enables the
possibility to follow the development of individual slugs as they move through the pipeline. It is possible to
plot, for example, slug length, front and tail velocities. Plotting individual slug data is useful mainly when
there are few slugs is the system. When hydrodynamic slugging generates lots of slugs, it is difficult to
identify which slug to consider.
Illegal slug section
An illegal section is a section where no slugs are initialized and through which no slugs are allowed to pass
(keyword SLUGILLEGAL). A slug front may enter into the illegal section, but it will be trapped inside it until
the slug tail reaches the section and the slug is removed. The first section in a flow-path is by default an
illegal section and so is the last one. This implies that slugs cannot propagate through networks.
If stability problems are encountered when using in-line process equipment together with slug tracking, it is
recommended that illegal sections are introduced around the process equipment. Furthermore, if there are
large changes in pipe diameter, for example, when modeling a separator at the end of a pipeline as a pipe
with big diameter, instabilities can be avoided by setting illegal sections on each side of such boundaries.
With long pipelines mainly operating in the slug flow regime, the number of slugs can become very large
which in turn results in long simulation times. In such situations, it is recommended to only allow for slugs
close to the pipeline outlet, say the last 5-10 km. Yet again, this can be accomplished by using the
keyword SLUGILLEGAL. In cases where terrain effects are predominant and large slugs develop far away
from the outlet, illegal sections should not be used to prevent such slugs from developing.
Flow regime
When slug tracking is activated, the flow regime indicator (ID) should be used with caution because the
flow regime is forced to bubbly inside liquid slugs whereas it is forced to stratified in slug bubbles. Thus,
the flow regime indicator will never indicate slug flow when slug tracking is activated.
- 118 -
The OLGA model
Vertical riser at the end of a pipeline
Problems might be encountered when slug tracking is activated and the pipeline has a vertical riser at the
end. The problems are usually caused by back-flow in the riser. If such problems are encountered, the
following actions might reduce them:
 Set the gas fraction on the outlet node equal to one. Now, if back-flow occurs at the outlet, only gas
will enter the pipeline.
 Unless the flow in the riser is expected to influence slug patterns significantly, set the riser pipeline
sections to illegal (SLUGILLEGAL).
 If possible, add a couple of horizontal sections at the top of the riser.
Startup slugs not detected
If all start-up slugs are not detected, it is possible to specify the void limits used for initializing start-up
slugs. This is done by modifying the void limits given by the keys BUBBLEVOID and SLUGVOID.
Hydrodynamic slug initiation
The initiation method for hydrodynamic slugs is selected with the key SLUGTRACKINGMODEL under the
OPTIONS keyword. Default is OLGA2015.
The slug model might initiate slugs too often or too seldom as compared to the expected slug pattern.
There are keys that enable you to tune the model to mimic the expected pattern.
The key SLUGFREQCONST can be used if SLUGTRACKINGMODEL=OLGA2015. If

SLUGTRACKINGMODEL=OLGA6, DELAYCONSTANT and INITFREQUENCY can be used. See Model
descriptions for details on how to use these tuning options.
- 119 -
OLGA User manual
Profile plots, trend plots, and slug statistics
When specifying, e.g., the hold-up (HOL) in TRENDDATA or PROFILEDATA, it is important to note that
the hold-up plotted is the section average. You cannot resolve the hold-up of individual slug and bubble
regions inside sections, but these are used to calculate the section average. To visualize the hold-up of
individual slugs/bubbles, specify HOLEXP under TRENDDATA. This will show the instantaneous hold-up
at the boundary specified.
It is possible to plot properties of individual slugs using their identification number. This feature is mainly of
use when there are few slugs in the system and the slugs of interest are easily identified. In cases with
severe slugging, the large number of slugs will make it virtually impossible to single out a particular slug.
However, it might be of interest to look at a statistical sample of slugs to get an idea of the general slug
properties. The syntax for addressing individual slugs is
TRENDDATA SLUGID=1, VARIABLE=(LSL, LSB, JSLT, JSLF, USF, UST, ZFSL, ZTSL, PTJF,
PTJT)
Slug statistics
There are usually two choices to assess slug statistics in OLGA. First of all the trend plot variables
LSLEXP and LSBEXP show the length of a liquid slug or slug bubble currently residing at a given section
boundary.
TRENDDATA PIPE=PIPE-1, SECTION=10, VARIABLE=LSLEXP
Using the OLGA GUI, these variables can be used to plot slug statistics. The slug statistics is generated by
post-processing of the .tpl-file and is accessed by selecting the variables LSLEXP_STAT and
LSBEXP_STAT in the trend plot window. These two plot variables represent the statistical distribution of
slug and slug bubble lengths at the boundary considered. The properties of these plots can be set through
'Slug Statistics...' on the Edit menu.
Also for positions, where plotting of LSLEXP is defined, a summary of the slug statistics is written to the
output file (.out file) for each DTOUT. Slug statistics is written together with some other slug information.
Slugs are counted for each section, and sorted by slug length interval using number of pipe diameters as
measure (to be applicable for all pipe diameters). The table contains number of slugs per section and per
slug length interval. An additional table listing positions with LSLEXP containing position, diameter, branch,
pipe and section is also written.
The slug statistics information is reset in a restart.
Notes
The limitations to the models used in slug tracking are described in Model description.
At present, it is not possible to run slug tracking in combination with
 Pig. The combination is not allowed.

 Complex fluid. The simulation will run, but as far as slugging goes, the results will be the same as if
complex fluid had not been used.
Slug tuning
The SLUGTUNING keyword makes it possible to tune parameters in the slug model.
The SLUGTUNING keyword is used for tuning the OLGA slug tracking model to specific sets of
measurement data or sensitivity studies. SLUGTUNING should be applied with great care, as it might
cause the validation and verification of the OLGA model to no longer be valid.
- 120 -
The OLGA model
Slug tuning is part of the Tuning module that requires a separate license.
Model description
The slug tuning coefficients are multiplied by the related values calculated by OLGA. The exception is slug
length which is interpreted directly as slug length in number of diameters.
The Taylor bubble velocity is calculated as
where
CUB1 = tuning coefficient 1 given by the key UBCOEFF1
CUB2 = tuning coefficient 2 given by the key UBCOEFF2
C0 = distribution coefficient
Umix = mixture velocity, that is, the sum of the superficial velocities
U0 = drift velocity
The slug front pressure drop is given by
where
CDP = tuning coefficient for slug front pressure drop given by key DPFACT
CDP0 = tuning coefficient for onset of slug front pressure drop given by key DPONSET
Lslug = slug length
f( l ) = additional pressure drop
Ucrit = cutoff velocity at which the slug front pressure drop is switched on
How to use
Specify the desired slug tuning coefficients and where they should be applied. See also SLUGTUNING.
Note: The slug tuning coefficients are global. It is not possible to specify different sets of tuning
parameters for different flow-paths.
- 121 -
OLGA User manual
Pig
A pig is a mechanical device which is inserted into a pipeline that moves with the flow. Such devices can
be used for, for example, inspection, internal cleaning, or pushing liquid out of the pipe. When running a
pigging operation, parameters of interest are for example
1. the pressure drop over a pig.

2. the rate and total volume of liquid pushed out of a pipeline ahead of a pig.
3. the liquid content of a pipeline before and after pigging.
4. the flow restriction caused by a pig.
5. the velocity of a pig.
6. the time for a pig to traverse a pipeline.
7. amount of wax dislodged from the wall.
Tracking of the liquid slug in front of a pig (TRACKSLUG=ON) is part of the Slug tracking module that
requires a separate license.
Any wax related features are part of the Wax deposition module that requires a separate license.
Model description
General
When running a pigging operation, it is optional whether or not the slug-tracking framework is to be
engaged to track the liquid slug in front of the pig. These two options use a unified scheme. This implies
that differences between two such simulations should only be attributed to effects associated with the
differences between explicitly treating liquid slugs or treating them in an average manner.
Explicit tracking of the liquid slug in front of the pig yields a more stable and accurate simulation that
properly accounts for the liquid build-up downstream of the pig. If the liquid slug is not explicitly tracked,
the liquid pushed through the pipe by a pig is only treated in an average fashion and no distinct build-up of
liquid is seen. As the model allows for liquid build-up in front of the pig, it also runs at the risk of a hold-up
approaching 1.0 as the pig approaches a section boundary. Because the hold-up in front of the pig is an
average hold-up between the pig and the downstream boundary, this output variable will show large
swings in connection to pigs crossing section boundaries. This is not a physical result, but merely an
artefact of averaged hold-ups not being able to capture the actual build-up of liquid. Furthermore, as a
consequence of the hold-up reaching 1.0 downstream the pig, there will be a larger leakage due to the
numerical scheme. It should be noted that to properly capture the physics, it is necessary to explicitly track
the liquid slug forming in front of the pig.
Friction forces and pigs
The friction forces acting on a pig are described in the following sections. For effects related to wax, please
refer to separate section below.
Static friction force
The static force between the pig and the pipe wall is denoted F0. For a static pig, this is the force that
needs to be overcome in order for the pig to start moving. Thus, a pig only starts moving if the pressure
difference over the pig yields a large enough force.
- 122 -
The OLGA model
Wall friction force
The wall friction force due to contact between the pig and the pipe wall is given by
where F0 is the static friction force [N], fw is the wall friction factor [Ns/m] and Up is the pig velocity [m/s],
As the pig velocity, Up, increases, the wall friction force decreases due to less contact between the pig and
the pipe wall. This effect is approximated by the wall friction factor.
Viscous friction force — the frictional pig model
When a pig is moving, the flow of the fluid film around the pig results in a viscous friction force. This force
is calculated through
where f1 is the linear friction factor [Ns/m], f2 is the quadratic friction factor [Ns2/m2] and Up is the ig velocity
[m/s].
Leakage
There are two different types of leakage.
Pressure drop induced leakage
Due to the pressure drop over the pig, liquid can be pushed from behind the pig to in front of it. The
pressure drop induced volumetric flux is given by
where cpl is the leakage factor [-], ΔPpig is the pressure drop over the pig [N/m 2] and ρ is the density [kg/m3].
Slip induced leakage (back leakage)
Due to slip between the pig and the fluid surrounding it, some fluid ahead of the pig will not be carried
along by it but rather leaks between the pig and the pipe wall. When the gap between the pig and pipe wall
is very narrow, the effects of gravity and the pressure gradient can be neglected when calculating the flow
of the fluid film that passes around the pig. Assuming laminar flow, the average film velocity becomes
where Up is the pig velocity [m/s]. Using this, the volumetric flow rate is then given by
where D is the inner pipe diameter [m] and Dp is the outer diameter of pig [m].
By default, the gap between the pig and pipe wall is equals two times the pipe roughness. You can
override this setting by specifying the pig diameter using the key DIAMETER.
The total volumetric leakage flow rate is split over the oil, water, and gas phases. For stratified flow, the
total leakage of gas, oil, and water is proportional to the hold-up each respective phase at that position.
For all other flow regimes, gas leakage is not allowed and the total leakage is split over water and oil in
proportion to the local water and oil hold-up, respectively.
- 123 -
OLGA User manual
Pig and Wax
Wax related friction forces
When there is a wax layer on the pipe walls, an additional friction, Fwbf, occurs due to the forces required to
break the wax layer off the wall. The wax layer breaking force is modeled as
where C is the wax breaking force coefficient [-], y is the wax layer yield stress [Pa], φ is the wax porosity
[-], L is the wax layer thickness [m], d is the inner pipe diameter [m], η is the pig wax removal efficiency [-]
and Φ is the pig form factor [-].
The wax breaking force coefficient, C, can be used to account for the effective shear surface orientation. C
= 1 implies that the wax layer shear surface is normal to the wall whereas C = √2 can be interpreted as an
effective shear surface forming a 45° angle against the wall. The coefficient can also be used to tune the
yield stress if, for example, wax layer yield stress measurements or estimates are available.
If the wax layer yield stress is determined internally, it is given by:
(21)
This equation is derived from the viscosity equation (22) below.
In cases where the pig has no through-flow, a slurry or plug with high wax content is assumed to build up
in front of the pig. This affects the rheological properties of the fluid near the pig. An estimate of the friction
effects caused by the interaction between the wax plug and the pipe wall is evaluated using the following
procedure:
1. Find the wax plug friction length by searching along the pipeline for existing suspended wax (bounded
by the accumulated amount of wax stripped from the wall), accounting for the wax plug porosity. The
wax plug length depends on the pig leakage factor. If there is full flow through the pig, the wax plug
friction length is set to zero. If there is no leakage, the full length of the wax plug is used. Interpolation
is applied for any intermediate situations.
2. The wall shear stress for the wax plug is calculated by using standard correlations for Bingham
plastics [8] and the effective viscosity model by Pedersen and Rønningsen [28]. The standard
Bingham correlations are used to calculate the shear stress as a function of average velocity. The
internal effective viscosity model may be used to find the yield stress and plastic viscosity for a given
suspended wax fraction according to
(22)
where µliq is the oil viscosity with no consideration to the precipitated wax [Pa s], Φwax is the volume
fraction of precipitated wax [-], dvx/dy is the shear rate [1/s], D = 37.82, E = 83.96 and F = 8.559⋅ 106,
The plastic viscosity is found by setting the shear rate, dvx/dy = 1000 1/s whereas the yield stress is
found through equation (21) above using the porosity of the wax plug in front of the pig instead of the
wax porosity. The yield stress and plastic viscosity are then used in the Bingham related equations to
calculate the friction forces acting on the pig and wax plug.
In the transition from non-Newtonian to Newtonian turbulent flow (Hedstrøm number between 1000
and 2000), splines are used to get a smooth transition between the friction factors calculated using the
Darby and Melson formula [8] (applied for Hedstrøm number > 2000) and Haaland’s formula [39]
(applied for Hedstrøm number <1000).
- 124 -
The OLGA model
Due to the upper bound on the effective viscosity, the wax plug shear stress is taken as the maximum
of the yield stress and the shear stress from the Bingham friction calculations.
3. The resulting frictional force is applied directly to the pig because the wax plug does not enter the
model explicitly but only as an 'effective friction length.'
Note: The standard scheme for wall friction is always applied regardless of the wax plug friction length.
The standard wall friction will, however, normally be insignificant as compared to the friction generated
by the 'virtual' wax plug. Furthermore, the gravitational effects of a wax plug are assumed to be taken
into account by the standard scheme.
Wax mass transfer from wall due to pigging
When performing a pigging operation to remove wax from the pipe wall, an additional term is added to the
standard shear related wax transport term (solid wax mass transport between bulk and wall) for the section
where a pig is located. This mass transfer rate [kg/s] is given by
where Up is the pig velocity [m/s], mwxw is the average wax mass on the wall in the control volume [kg/m3],
A is the cross-sectional pipe area [m2], and η is the pig wax removal efficiency [-]. The mass removed from
the wall is added to the fluid downstream the pig.
How to use
General
A pig is added to the simulation by declaring the PIG keyword on the flow-path where it is to be inserted.
Launch and trap position of the pig
A pig is launched and trapped at the boundaries closest to the positions given by the keys
LAUNCHPOSITION and TRAPPOSITION, respectively. The trap position is optional, and if not specified,
the pig traverses through the flow-paths until it exits through a terminal node and is removed.
Routing — Pig in network
In a network with bifurcations, the pig will enter the flow-path having the largest volumetric flow unless its
routing is specified by the key ROUTING.
Note: When routing is given, the flow-path where the pig is launched has to be included in the routing.
Leakage factor
The leakage factor, cpl, used in determining the volumetric flux of liquid from behind the pig to in front of it
can be specified in three different ways to override the default value. The default value for Cpl is 0 (zero
leakage):
1. Specify the leakage factor directly through the key LEAKAGEFACTOR.

2. Specify the relative leakage opening Aleak/Apipe through the key LEAKOPENING and evaluate the
leakage factor according to
- 125 -
OLGA User manual
3. Using the pressure loss coefficient, Fpig, specified through the LEAKDPCOEFF key, the leakage factor
is given by
The pressure loss coefficient can calibrated by letting fluid flow past a stationary pig.
Tracking the liquid slug
To track the liquid slug in front of a pig, set TRACKSLUG=ON.
Pig and Wax
When using the Wax deposition module (requires separate license), a number of input keys become
available when simulating a pigging operation.
 PGWXFORMFAC: wax cutting efficiency.

 WPPLASETVISC: plastic viscosity of wax plug. Set this parameter to -1 to use internal model.
 WPPOROSITY: porosity of wax plug.
 WPYIELDSTRESS: yield stress of wax plug. Set this parameter to -1 to use internal model.
 WXBRFCOEF: wax breaking force coefficient. This can for example be used to account for effective
shear surface orientation.
 WXRMEFF: wax removal efficiency.
 WXYIELDSTR: yield stress of wax layer on wall. Set this parameter to -1 to use internal model.
Output
Pig specific plotting variables are found in the subgroup Pig of the group Basic. In addition, slug related
plotting variables (group SlugTracking or group Compositional, subgroup Slug) apply when the liquid slug
in front of a pig is tracked.
Notes
 It is not possible to simulate the melting of a hydrate plug because the pig mass is constant.
 It is not possible to simulate a pig traversing through a pipeline at the same time as slug tracking is
enabled.
Drilling
The drilling option can be used to simulate the hydraulics during operations of running in hole or pulling out
hole of the drill string.
The drilling functionality in OLGA can be used for the study of drilling hydraulics and the modeling of
wellbore pressures and temperatures during several phases of the drilling operation. Although it was built
as a general purpose functionality, it is a particularly valuable tool in drilling operations with narrow margins
between pore- and fracture pressures. Typical examples of wells with narrow margins are:
 HPHT and ultra-HPHT wells

 Deep water wells
 ERD wells with long horizontal sections
 Wells in depleted reservoirs
The drilling option and its associates are part of the Wells module that requires a separate license.
- 126 -
The OLGA model
Model description
The network feature of OLGA is adapted to configure the flowpaths in the drilling hydraulics system. The
fluid flows from a surface flowpath to the drilling flowpath (drill string) and then return to surface in the
annulus flowpath (return line). The node that connects the surface line and the drill string is called stand
node. The node that connects the drill string and the annulus flowpath is called bit node. The inlet of the
surface line and the outlet of the annulus flowpath is connected to other types of nodes. The basic drilling
configuration is described in the How to use on page 128 section.
The running in hole (RIH) and pulling out of hole (POH) is realized by allowing the bit node to move up and
down the annulus flowpath. The speed of RIH or POH is specified either with a time series or through a
controller. The initial drilled depth and the bit depth (both are measured depth) are user inputs and they
can be at different depths. For the return line, the sections above the bit node are modeled as flow in
annulus, and the sections below the bit node and above the drilled depth are modeled as flow in pipe. The
sections below the drilled depth are not active, meaning that the flow conditions are not calculated. The
sources and wells in the return line below the drilled depth are deactivated (zero flowrate). The flowrate of
sources/wells in a partially drilled section is linearly scaled by the fraction of drilled length within the
section. Similarly, the sections of drill string above the stand node are inactive.
As the bit node is moved downwards, the length of the active part of the drill string increases. As it is
moved upwards, this length decreases. Currently, no special consideration is given for additional friction
forces due to the translation of the drill string.
Heat transfer between the drill string and the return line is modeled by the bundle feature of OLGA. The
temperature below the drilled depth is set to the ambient temperature of the outer most wall of the annulus
configuration of the drill path. For the sections of the drill string that are above the stand node, the wall
and fluid temperatures are set equal to the surface temperature specified by the SURFACEWALLTEMP
key in the BITNODE keyword.
The cutting transport can be activated by the PARTICLEFLOW key under OPTIONS keyword. The cutting
is generated only when the particle flow option is switched on. If so, cuttings will be automatically
generated according to the volume being drilled.
Rotating drill string
The rotation of the drill string has temperature and pressure effects on the surrounding fluid. The total
power of the drill string is determined by the torque (TORQUE key) and the rotational speed (ROTATION
key). When the bit is drilling into the formation, part of the total power is used to cut the rock. The
EFFICIENCY key determines the fraction of the total power that is used to cut the rock. The rest of power
is further divided into two - one part is evenly distributed along the return line, and the second part is lost
the fluid at the bit position (key FRACTIONTOBIT). When the bit is not drilling into the formation, the total
power is lost to the fluid in the return line as heat. This heat is evenly distributed along the return line from
the surface to the measured depth.
Defining POW as the total power of the drill string and using rpm as units for the rotational speed:
- 127 -
OLGA User manual
The power lost to the surrounding fluid can be calculated as follows:
Location Cutting rock Not cutting rock

Along the drill string POW*(1-EFFICIENCY)*(1-FRACTIONTOBIT) POW
At Bit position POW*(1-EFFICIENCY)*FRACTIONTOBIT 0
A special consideration is also made for the friction generated due to the rotation of the drill string,
dependent on the rotational speed.
How to use
The drilling functionality is enabled by setting DRILLING = ON in the OPTIONS keyword. Any drilling
configuration needs at least three flowpaths:
 One flowpath representing the drill string, connected to a closed node at the top and a BITNODE at
the bottom.
 One surface flowpath (termed 'surface line'). The surface line is connected to the drill string with a
STANDNODE.
 One return flowpath (termed 'annulus flowpath'). The annulus flowpath is connected to the drill string
at the bottom with a BITNODE.
Figure 53 An example of a basic drilling configuration.
The BITNODE at the end of the drill string flowpath is connected to a position in the annulus flowpath. The
STANDNODE at the end of the surface line flowpath is connected to a position in the drill string flowpath.
As the BITNODE moves down or up the annulus flowpath the position of the STANDNODE changes
accordingly such that the length of the active part of the drill string flowpath increases or decreases.
Currently, it is only possible to drill through one annulus flowpath. In other words, the BITNODE cannot
cross from one flowpath to another.
The drill string and the annulus flowpath must have the same inclination profile and discretization (section
number and section lengths).
- 128 -
The OLGA model
Initial configuration
The surface line and the drill string are connected using the DRILLSTRING key under the STANDNODE
keyword.
The heat transfer from the drill string flowpath to the annulus flowpath and from the annulus flowpath to the
walls outside the annulus flowpath is calculated by the bundle feature of OLGA (see Annulus - How to
use for more details). The entire drill path must be enclosed within one or more annulus configurations as
given in the ANNULUSLIST key.
The BITNODE is initially connected to a section of the annulus flowpath by defining the initial measured
depth of the bit node (INITBITMD). This measured depth is defined as the distance between the top of the
annulus flowpath and the position where the bit node is connected, or equivalently as the distance
between the stand node and the bit node.
From the BITNODE it is also possible to define how much of the annulus flowpath is initially drilled. This is
done using the INITDRILLEDMD key, which defines the absolute distance between the top of the annulus
flowpath and the bottom of the undrilled path.
The part of the drill string above the stand node and the part of the annulus flowpath below the initial drilled
depth are inactive and will be initially ignored (see Model description on page 127). If INITDRILLEDMD is
set equal to the length of the annulus flowpath, the entire annulus flowpath will be active throughout the
simulation and the BITNODE and STANDNODE can be used to simulate a flowpath moving inside another
for example in a Coiled Tubing operation.
Refer to the sample case for an example.
Drilling parameters
The rate at which the bit node moves is defined using the ROP key under the BITNODE keyword. Positive
ROP indicates the bit moving deeper into the annulus flowpath, while negative value means pulling the drill
string out of the system. ROP can be specified with a time series. Stepwise interpolation is used to
determine the ROP at a given time. The ROP can also be connected to a controller as a method to change
the ROP according to the depth or formation being drilled.
Several other parameters can be defined under the BITNODE keyword. Many of these are related to
thermal and pressure effects in the fluid due to the presence of the drill string, and are described under
Model description on page 127.
Output variables and plotting
Several output variables related to this functionality can be found under Drilling Output Variables on page
570.
Even though sections of the network can be inactive (undrilled parts of the annulus flowpath and parts of
the drill string above the stand node), all sections have values in the plot files. Therefore, we have included
an output variable (ACTIVE) to indicate whether a section is active or not. Plotted values for inactive
sections should be ignored.
When using an OLGA GUI compatible with the present drilling functionality, the plotting tool will filter out
values from inactive sections based on the ACTIVE plot variable. This means for example that a half-
drilled annulus flowpath will only show values for half of its sections. This may also mean empty plots if an
entire flowpath becomes inactive.When using an older plotting tool, you should make sure of always
looking at the ACTIVE output variable when analysing the results.
- 129 -
OLGA User manual
Additional information
Other models and keywords can be useful for simulating drilling scenarios:
 Include muds using the DRILLINGFLUID Library keyword.

 Use particle flow functionality to account for cuttings being generated while drilling (PARTICLEFLOW).
 Use ANNULUS keywords to specify drill string – annulus flowpath interaction
Note: If DRILLINGFLUIDs are defined, it is recommended to activate the PRESSURE key and/or the
GRADPRESSURE key under DTCONTROL to avoid pressure spikes that may appear when drilling new
sections.
Note: OLGA 5 cases cannot be converted to the current implementation.
Corrosion
The purpose is to calculate standard uniform CO2 corrosion and Top Of Line (TOL) CO2 corrosion. CO2
corrosion should be expected whenever CO2 and water is present.
The Corrosion Module requires a separate license.
Model description
The basic chemical reactions in CO2 corrosion are:
which dissociates in two steps:
In CO2 corrosion when the concentrations of Fe2+ and CO32- ions exceed the solubility limit, they combine to
form solid iron carbonate films according to:
These films can be more or less protective for further corrosion.
Currently, three CO2 corrosion models; the NORSOK M-506 model, the de Waard 95 model and the IFE
top-of-line corrosion model have been implemented in the OLGA three-phase flow model, see references
[24], [25] [42] and [43]. Corrosion dominated by H2S is at present not covered by the corrosion module.
The NORSOK and de Waard 95 models are both regarded as conservative models as they include only
limited effects of protective corrosion films. Protective corrosion films can form especially at high
temperature (above 60°C) and at high pH (above pH5.5). The corrosion rate will increase with temperature
for both models up to a limiting temperature where formation of protective corrosion films are predicted.
Both models are tuned to a large set of experimental data, but the NORSOK model takes somewhat larger
account for protective corrosion films at high temperature and high pH than the de Waard 95 model, as
more recent high temperature data also have been used.
- 130 -
The OLGA model
The NORSOK M-506 model gives the corrosion rate as function of pH, temperature, CO 2 partial pressure
and wall shear stress:
The de Waard 95 model gives the corrosion rate according to the following formula:
where Vr is the maximum corrosion rate based on the limiting reaction rate given as a function of
temperature, CO2 partial pressure and pH:
Vmis the maximum corrosion rate based on the limiting mass transfer rate given as a function of CO 2 partial
pressure, liquid flow velocity and hydraulic diameter:
and the scale protection factor Fscale is a function of temperature and CO2 partial pressure:
In the IFE top-of-line corrosion model the top-of-line corrosion rate is limited by the amount of iron that can
be dissolved in the condensed water:
where Rcond is the water condensation rate calculated by OLGA and the solubility of iron in the condensing
water CFe is a function of CO2 partial pressure, acetic acid content (HAc) and temperature:
The effect of acetic acid is only included in the top of line corrosion calculation, not in general bottom of
line CO2 corrosion rate calculation (NORSOK M-506 and de Waard 95). The flow field at each section
along the pipeline/network is used to calculate the corrosion rate. Top-of-line corrosion is only occurring in
stratified flow.
How to use
For Top Of Line (TOL) corrosion the water condensation rate is needed. This is not available when using
the Black oil model. When using the PVT table option it is only available for a three phase table and when
specifying:
 FLASHMODEL = WATER in OPTIONS.
When using compositional tracking (COMPOSITIONAL=ON IN OPTIONS). TOL can only be used when
specifying:
 FLASHTYPE = FULLTHREEPHASE or SIMPLETHREEPHASE in COMPOPTIONS.
The NORSOK and de Waard models can be used for all PVT calculation options (Black oil, PVT table and
Compositional Tracking).
- 131 -
OLGA User manual
The input parameters for the corrosion models are specified in the keyword statement CORROSION. Input
parameters for each branch of the network are as follows:
 CO2 mole % in the gas (key: CO2FRACTION)

 Total alkalinity Bicarbonate concentration in of the water phase (BICARBONATE). The alkalinity is
typically the sum of bicarbonate + 2x carbonate + acetate + any other carboxylates.
 Total acetic acid content, which is the sum of acetic acid and acetate (TOTAL_ACETIC_ACID)
 Total ionic strength in the water (IONICSTRENGTH)
 Inhibitor efficiency (INHIBITOREFF)
 Glycol concentration in the aqueous phase (GLYCOLFRACTION)
 The water cut limit where water droplets in oil will wet the wall (WCWET). If the water cut is higher
than this value, the water droplets will wet the wall, even if no continuous water film is present. The
default value is 30 %. This parameter is only used for the water wetting test in the corrosion module. It
has no influence on the flow conditions.
 An option for calculating pH based on saturated iron carbonate concentration in water (PHSAT)
 Maximum CO2 partial pressure in single phase liquid flow (PCO2MAX)
 Bubble point pressure , from which the CO2 partial pressure for single phase liquid flow will be
calculated (PTMAX)
Currently, the total alkalinity (bicarbonate), glycol concentrations, ionic strength, total acetic acid and water
wetting limit are given as constants for a given branch. The glycol concentration can either be set manually
or be determined by the MEG tracking function if available to the user. If the manual option is used, the
glycol concentration is constant through the whole pipeline. If the MEG tracking option is used, the glycol
concentration will be diluted in accordance with water condensation rates.
The water chemistry has a significant influence on the calculated corrosion rates. Experience in CO2
corrosion evaluation is therefore important to prepare input and evaluate simulation results properly.
For both the NORSOK and the de Waard 95 models the pH value in the bulk water phase is calculated as
a function of CO2 partial pressure, temperature, bicarbonate content and ionic strength by the formulas
given in the NORSOK model. The input parameters BICARBONATE and PHSAT can be used to choose
between different water chemistry conditions when calculating the pH value:
 Condensed water without corrosion products: BICARBONATE = 0, PHSAT = OFF

 Condensed water saturated with corrosion products: BICARBONATE = 0, PHSAT = ON
 Water with specified bicarbonate content (for example, formation water): BICARBONATE > 0, PHSAT
= OFF
The pH calculation is based on the CO2 partial pressure calculated as the CO2 mole % in the gas phase
multiplied by the total pressure, with a correction by the the fugacity coefficient, which can become
important at high total pressure. For a situation with no free gas phase, the CO2 content will be constant for
pressures above the bubble point pressure. The user must then manually supply the bubble point pressure
(PTMAX), which may be found by running OLGA. The maximum CO2 partial pressure is then calculated by
the code for all pressures higher than PTMAX: CO2FRACTION * PTMAX. This is done even though free
gas is present; the code only checks if the pressure is above PTMAX or not. Alternatively, the user may set
the maximum CO2 partial pressure directly, (PCO2MAX). If no free gas exists in the pipeline at all, PTMAX
or PCO2MAX can be found from measurements or calculations in a separator or in a pipeline further
downstream where a free gas phase exists.
In the de Waard 95 model, corrosion reduction due to protective films is not accounted for when formation
water is present. For ionic strengths larger than 0.2 M, formation water is assumed and there will be no
corrosion reduction due to scaling. For ionic strengths lower than 0.2 M, condensed water conditions are
assumed, and the scaling reduction factor is then dependent on the CO2 partial pressure and temperature.
- 132 -
The OLGA model
The presence of glycol will reduce the corrosion rate. The same glycol reduction factor is used for both the
NORSOK and the de Waard 95 models. The effect of corrosion inhibitors can be specified through the key
INHIBITOREFFICIENCY.
Note: Glycol is not considered for the TOL corrosion model.
Parameters calculated by the three phase flow model OLGA, which are used by the corrosion models, are
pressure (plot variable PT), temperature (TM), water velocity or mixture water/oil velocity, wall shear
stresses in water or alternatively liquid mixture (boundary variables TAUWWT, TAUWL), water volume
fraction (BEWT), oil film volume fraction (BEHL) and the near-wall water cut (WCWALL, which is given as
a fraction). WCWALL is defined to be 1.0 if there is any continuous water film at the wall. If water is present
only as droplets in the oil film, WCWALL is equal to the liquid film water cut. The liquid film water cut can
be expressed as USLWT/(USLWT+USLHL) where USLWT is the superficial velocity of water in the liquid
film, and USLHL is the superficial velocity of oil in the liquid film.
The water wetting conditions are determined as follows:
First, the water-oil flow regime is determined by the flow model. There are mainly two flow regime
conditions of concern for the corrosion model:
1. A continuous water film exists (WCWALL = 1.0). A continuous water film may be a result of
stratification, or due to a water cut above the flow model's water-oil inversion point. The water-oil
inversion point has a default value of 0.5 (water cut = 50%), but can be changed through the keyword
WATEROPTIONS, INVERSIONWATERFRAC. The OLGA code has been verified with 0.5 as
inversion point. Note that changing this value might change the flow predictions significantly.
2. Water only existing as droplets in a continuous oil film. For such cases, the water cut must be below
the flow model's inversion point (0.0 < WCWALL < INVERSIONWATERFRAC < 1.0)
This flow information is sent to the corrosion module where tests are performed to determine if water
wetting occurs:
Condition 1 will always give water wetting of the wall.
Condition 2 will give water wetting if the water cut (and WCWALL converted to %) is above the water
wetting limit, WCWET, given in the CORROSION keyword (default value 30 %).
For slug flow (output variable ID = 3), both conditions might be occurring intermittently, that is, a passing
slug bubble might be in condition 1, while the liquid slug might be in condition 2 or vice versa. Such cases
are treated as full water wetting (condition 1).
To sum up, the case of no water wetting can only occur in condition 2 when the liquid film water cut (and
WCWALL in %) is less than the water wetting limit (WCWET). In that case, zero corrosion rate follows. Full
water wetting will always occur if WCWALL (in %) is larger than or equal to WCWET.
In addition, the corrosion rates assuming full water wetting are always calculated.
Note: The corrosion models are not valid if pH > 6.5 or if T > 150° C. In cases where corrosion control
by pH stabilization is applied, the pH value might exceed the upper pH limit of the corrosion models. The
implemented corrosion models are not suitable for such cases. The corrosion models should not be
used for CO2 partial pressures above 10 bar. In addition, the NORSOK model is presently not valid for
pH < 3.5 or T < 20° C. You must ensure that these limits are not exceeded.
- 133 -
OLGA User manual
Note: The CO2 corrosion models are not valid when the ratio between CO2 and H2S partial pressure (or
the ratio between CO2 and H2S molar fraction in the gas phase) is lower than 20. The models should not
be used when the H2S partial pressure is higher than 100 mbar. For partial pressures ratios of CO 2 and
H2S between 20 and 500, the models will give an upper bound for the corrosion rate, but can be
conservative because iron sulfide films may be formed.
Elastic walls
The purpose of the elastic wall option is to account for radial pipe flexibility in simulations involving
pressure surges due to sudden changes in liquid velocity. This pressure increase/decrease, commonly
known as water hammer, can be significantly reduced if the pipe is allowed to expand/contract. The
expansion/contraction will also reduce the propagation speed of pressure waves.
The magnitude of influence from the wall flexibility can be measured by the ratio of the fluid
compressibility, κfluid, and wall flexibility, κwall (see Model description on page 138). If κwall/κfluid << 1, the effect
of wall flexibility can safely be assumed to be small. However, if κwall/κfluid > 0.2, the simulation results based
on rigid walls may be very conservative. The following figure illustrate the effect when the compressibility
ratio is approximately 0.5. The case is a water filled 5 km horizontal pipe, with a diameter of 20.8 cm and a
9 mm thick steel wall. The fluid is flowing with a velocity of 4 m/s before a near instantaneous closing of a
valve is performed 6 seconds into the simulation. To monitor the water hammer, the pressure in the
section upstream of the valve is plotted. The simulation is performed both with and without flexible walls
(red and black curve respectively).
Figure 54 Pressure in section upstream of a near instantaneously closing valve.
- 134 -
The OLGA model
The effect of the flexible pipe is most pronounced in the instantaneous change in pressure that occur 6
seconds into the simulation. This is the actual water hammer that will be discussed subsequently. After the
initial hammer, a period of packing can be observed. In this phase, the flexible wall behaves much in the
same manner as the rigid wall. However, it should be observed that the packing phase is prolonged and
the pressure increase due to packing is actually higher in the case with flexible walls.
Theoretical comparisons
In a perfectly rigid pipe, the theoretical hammer pressure is usually derived from the Joukowsky equation:
(23)
where H is the head in meters, a is the speed of propagation of the disturbance (speed of sound), g is the
acceleration of gravity and Δc is the change in velocity. In terms of the pressure, this equation becomes:
(24)
where ΔP is the change in pressure and ρ is the fluid density.
For slow closing valve action the following equation is often used.
(25)
where ΔP is the change in pressure given in psi, v is the fluid velocity [ft/s], L is the pipeline length [ft] and t is the
valve closing time [s]. This relation assumes incompressible fluid and tends towards infinity at small t.
- 135 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 55 Water hammer calculation in OLGA vs. theoretical equations (rigid walls).
Given that the valve closing time is small enough, simulated results in OLGA without elastic walls will be
comparable to the Jukowski equation. It should be noted that the total pressure increase in the pipeline
computed by OLGA may be higher than the maximum theoretical water hammer. This is because the
momentum of the upstream fluid will continue to pack the pipeline after the valve is fully closed (see Figure
55). For longer closing times, effects such as packing of pipeline before the valve is fully closed may give
rise to an additional increase in pressure that is not accounted for in either equation (24) or equation (25).
Section length considerations
The deflection of the section wall is assumed to be uniform (uniform expansion/contraction) and the
deflection of the pipe wall in one section is assumed to have no influence on the deflection in neighboring
sections. This is a simplifying assumption that is based the fact that pipes walls are normally relatively thin,
and that section lengths are larger than the pipe diameter. To argue the validity of this approximation, we
can look at the case presented Figure 56. This illustrates a longitudinal slice of a pipe with a pressurized
section of length L, the rest of the pipe is in equilibrium with the ambient pressure Pa. The pipe is assumed
to be relatively long compared with L, the radius R and the wall thickness e.
- 136 -
The OLGA model
Figure 56 Single section with pressure not equal to ambient pressure.
The solution to this problem can be expressed in terms of the solution of the uniformly loaded and
uniformly expanding pipe and a scaling a function, w (reported by e.g. Timoshenko and Woinowsky-
Krieger). The function w has a natural length scale kL = L ( R e )-1/2, where all problems with equal kL will
have identical scaling functions. The average value of w over the length L is presented in Figure 57 as a
function of kL. In this graph, a value of 1 represents the solution given by OLGA and a value less than 1
represents a smaller change in volume. Although OLGA will overestimate the change in volume inside the
section, it is apparent that the OLGA solution give a reasonable approximation for kL >= 10, which will give
a deviation of less than 2%. Similarly, one can argue that the change in volume outside the loaded section,
not accounted for by OLGA, will rapidly diminish for increasing section lengths. We therefore recommend
using section lengths larger than 10 ( R e )1/2 when the elastic wall option is used. In normal circumstances
this will not constitute a limitation as the thickness is generally smaller than the radius; given a case with
the e = R, the section length will then have to be 5 times the pipe diameter.
Figure 57 Average deflection of section wall in Figure 56 scaled with deflection of pipe with uniform
internal pressure.
- 137 -
OLGA User manual
Model description
The solution of the full fluid-structure interaction would entail solving an additional elliptic partial differential
equation on a far smaller time scale than required by the isolated fluid flow problem. However, by
introducing some assumptions, the equations can be decoupled and significantly simplified. In the
derivation of the equations used by OLGA we will make the following assumptions:
1. Linear elastic materials

2. Small deformations of pipe wall (change in diameter << diameter)
3. Uniform radial expansion (neglecting section end effects and interaction)
4. No dynamic effects of pipe wall (no wall inertia)
It is up to the User's discretion to verify that these assumptions are valid when using the elastic wall option
in OLGA.
When simulating flexible pipes, OLGA accounts for both changes in flow area and more importantly, the
effect the flexibility has on the overall compressibility of the pipe-fluid system. In the pressure evolution
equation solved by OLGA, this amounts to using a modified compressibility, κeff:
where κfluid is the compressibility integrated over all phases:
and κwall is the change in relative pipe area, A, for a unit change in internal pressure:
(26)
The pressure equation is also modified to account for the modified area. If the initial assumptions hold, the
effect on the flow is marginal but its inclusion is mandated by the need for a consistent calculation of the
volume error. The updated area is calculated as follows:
(27)
where R0 is the given radius of the pipe and ε(P) is relative change in radius, dependent on the internal
pressure, P, and external pressure, Po:
(28)
When OLGA is used to calculate the flexibility of the pipe, the thick wall equation is used:
(29)
where i is the wall layer index and Ri is the inner radius of wall layer i. Using equations (26) and (29) along
with assumption 3, we get:
(30)
If κ is specified in the input to OLGA, equation (30) is used to compute an equivalent value for γ, which is
then used in equations (27) and (28).
- 138 -
The OLGA model
The external pressure, Po, is taken to be the pressure in each OLGA section when the simulation starts
(after steady state preprocessor or initial conditions). This leads to an initially undeformed state. To get
consistent results in restart, given that the elastic properties may change, the deformations in the previous
run are automatically converted by OLGA to an initial (constant) strain:
εinitial is the initial relative change in radius, given by the deformation in the previous run. Thus, a wall may
be deformed, but not flexible, in a restart run even if flexible walls are turned off.
How to use
The elastic wall option is activated at a global level with the key OPTIONS.ELASTICWALLS = ON/OFF. If
OPTIONS.ELASTICWALLS = OFF, all walls are treated as inflexible (infinitely rigid). However, if this key is
set to ON, individual WALLS are treated as flexible/inflexible depending on the value of the key
WALL.ELASTIC = ON/OFF. If OPTIONS.ELASTICWALLS = ON, the Young's modulus of elasticity will be
a required key for materials (MATERIAL.EMOD).
There are two methods available for the elastic properties of a wall (when WALL.ELASTIC = ON).
1. Default option: Let OLGA compute the flexibility of the wall based on the radius of the pipe and
material properties of the wall layers. If this option is used, OLGA will omit any wall layer that has a
material with a Young's modulus less than WALL.ERATIOMIN times the Young's modulus of the inner
adjacent wall layer. All subsequent wall layers will also be excluded. This is because the thickness of
the wall is assumed to be unchanged and the wall flexibility can be significantly underpredicted if the
contribution from a very rigid wall layer, placed outside a very flexible wall layer, is included (see
Figure 58).
2. User given flexibility: The wall flexibility may be specified with the key WALL.KAPPA. This option is
particularly useful when the equation used by OLGA is not valid. This may apply when the wall is
stiffened with braces, surrounded by soil or encased by a flexible medium. This may also apply if a
significant part of the wall rigidity can be attributed to axial stresses or other 2 nd order effects.
Elastic wall properties may be changed in restart runs.
- 139 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 58 Insulated pipe. If the stiffness of the steel protective casing is included, the wall flexibility
will be very conservative.
Shut-in
The purpose of the SHUTIN keyword is to enable more robust simulations when the pressure and flow in
the pipeline is dominated by hydrostatic head, phase transition and thermal effects. A typical scenario
where the SHUTIN keyword may be applied is during shut-in simulations, or at the end of depressurization
simulations.
The numerical scheme for solving the transport equations in OLGA may sometimes become unstable after
the flow in the pipeline has stopped and the phases have separated. This is usually observed as sudden
fluctuations in velocities and is generally caused by numerical issues in inclined pipes with large hold-up
gradients. This instability may result in inaccurate results due to generated pressure pulses and
subsequent inaccuracies in flash calculations. If this behavior is observed, it is recommended to activate
the SHUTIN keyword to remove or reduce such instabilities. It should be noted that by enabling SHUTIN,
the numerical scheme in OLGA is modified to better represent the situation in the pipeline when the fluid is
at rest. It is therefore not recommended to activate this key during normal production.
Model description
The SHUTIN keyword makes the following modifications of the OLGA model:
 The flow regime is fixed to stratified and annular flow

 Oil and water droplets in the gas layer are turned off
 Across discontinuities in volume fractions, the mass and pressure gradient terms are redistributed in
the momentum equations in such a way that the slip should converge to zero.
- 140 -
The OLGA model
How to use
The SHUTIN keyword can be used to stabilize the numerical behavior for shut-in like simulations in a
flowpath, selected pipes or individual sections. It can also be repeatedly activated/deactivated at specific
points in time.
SHUTIN contain the following keys:
 TIME – Defines points in time where SHUTIN can be activated/deactivated

 ACTIVATE – List that determines if SHUTIN is active/inactive at the corresponding point in time
 PIPE – List of pipes to include
 SECTION – List of sections to include
If two or more SHUTIN keywords cover the same section, the functionality will be active in that section if at
least one SHUTIN keyword is set to active when the simulation has reached a given point in time.
Notes
The SHUTIN keyword is designed to work primarily in situations where gravitational pull and the pressure
gradient are in (near) balance. It is not recommended to activate this feature when it is reasonable to
expect significant flow. The applicability of the SHUTIN keyword must be carefully considered from case to
case.
Water module - Emulsion

The purpose of the Water module is to let the user specify the parameters and model used for oil/water
dispersion viscosities and to specify the approach used to determine the water distribution between liquid
and gas phases.
Changes to the dispersion model are recommended when experimental data shows that the default
options do not give a good description of the fluid. The module may also be used for sensitivity analysis
with respect to dispersion e.g. the water volume fraction at inversion point.
Model description
Calculation of velocity difference between water and liquid hydrocarbon ("slip velocity")
Three different options can normally be used for calculating the velocity difference between liquid water
and hydrocarbon liquid (we term the latter "oil" for simplicity). This velocity difference is termed the "slip
velocity" or just "slip". The liquid droplets flowing in the gas phase are not included in this context. The
three calculation options for slip velocity are invoked by selecting WATERSLIP=ON, OFF or CONSTANT
in the WATEROPTIONS keyword.
By turning the water slip option off (WATERSLIP = OFF), the user assumes that there is no velocity
difference between the oil and water flow fields. In this case oil and water are always assumed to flow as a
homogeneous mixture with average properties. The fluid mechanical model reduces to a two-phase gas-
liquid model. However, water enthalpies are accounted for in the temperature calculations.
- 141 -
OLGA User manual
By turning the water slip on (WATERSLIP=ON), the slip velocity will be computed by the fluid mechanical
flow model. Included in this is the computation of oil droplets dispersed in the water and water droplets
dispersed in the oil. The degree of such mixing will depend on flow parameters such as flow rates,
holdups, fluid properties and flow regime. The OLGA HD flow model (OPTIONS FLOWMODEL=OLGAHD)
allows for co-existence of oil droplets in water and water droplets in oil. The OLGA flow model
(OPTIONS FLOWMODEL=OLGA) assumes that water droplets can be entrained in continuous oil if the
water cut is less than the phase inversion point, and that oil droplets can be entrained in continuous water
if the water cut is above the inversion point. Phase inversion is assumed to occur at a water cut given by
the user through the key INVERSIONWATERFRAC (default value of 0.5). The degree of mixing of oil and
water can vary from fully separated to fully dispersed for both flow models. This applies to all gas/liquid
flow regimes.
It is possible to specify a maximum fraction of water (EMAX) that can be entrained in the oil for water cuts
between a lower critical value (given by FWLOW) and the inversion point (given by
INVERSIONWATERFRAC). In that case the degree of mixing of water into oil is predicted by OLGA, but
the maximum fraction of the total water stream that can be mixed into the oil is limited by EMAX:
(Volume flow of water in oil)/(Total volume flow of water) ≤ EMAX.
With the default values of FWLOW and EMAX, 0.0 and 1.0 respectively, no such limitation is defined.
The third option (WATERSLIP=CONSTANT) allows for specification of a constant velocity difference
between oil and water. This is a special option that should only be used with great care in special cases for
tuning purposes.
Dispersion viscosities
With the dispersion viscosity option turned on (DISPERSIONVISC= ON), six different viscosity models can
be chosen: Pal & Rhodes, Rønningsen, Pal & Rhodes correlated with experimental data, Woelflin, Barnea
& Mizrahi or table based model.
The mixture viscosity for oil continuous dispersions (µhw) and water continuous dispersions (µwh) are
expressed as:
where µh [cP] is oil viscosity, µw [cP] is water viscosity and µrel [-] is relative viscosity (dispersion viscosity /
viscosity of continuous phase).
Pal & Rhodes and Pal & Rhodes correlated with experimental data:
One correlation for relative viscosities of liquid/liquid dispersions was developed based on a generalization
of Einstein’s equation to also be valid for high concentrated dispersions. The correlation was published by
Pal and Rhodes (1989) [27] and is primarily developed for dispersions where coalescence and deposition
has negligible influence on the pressure drop (and the apparent viscosity).
- 142 -
The OLGA model
The equations below show the Pal & Rhodes correlations for relative viscosity of an oil continuous
dispersion (µrel,h) and a water continuous dispersion (µrel,w):
(31)
(32)
where
is the concentration of water droplets in the oil continuous dispersion, and
is the concentration of oil droplets in the water continuous dispersion. µrel is limited upwards to 10000.
The parameter Φµrel=100 is the dispersed phase volume fraction for which the relative viscosity µrel equals
100. Based on pipe flow experiments on stable oil continuous emulsions for different crude oils and
formation waters, the parameter Φµrel=100 is set equal to 0.765 (Søntvedt et al., 1994). In the present version
of the model, this correlation and the correlation parameters are also applied for water continuous
dispersions using the analogous quantities. It is still left to investigate how to discriminate between oil and
water continuous dispersions.
With an experimental point, Φrel (Φh or Φw depending on the inversion point) and µrel (µrel,w or µrel,h) specified,
the Pal & Rhodes method in equations (31) and (32) is rearranged to calculate the Φµrel=100 value:
Equation (31) is then used to calculate the water in oil dispersion viscosity. For oil in water dispersion,
equation (32) is used. Φrel is defined with the key PHIREL, µrel with the key VISCREL, and the inversion
point with the key INVERSIONWATERFRAC.
Rønningsen:
Another correlation for relative viscosities of an oil continuous dispersion is the correlation by Rønningsen
recommended for a shear rate of 500 1/s (2003) [31]:
where µrel,h is the relative viscosity (dispersion/oil), T is the temperature (deg C) and Φw is the volume % of
water dispersed in oil.
Above the inversion point, the viscosity of the oil in water dispersion is assumed equal to the pure water
viscosity, when the Rønningsen method is applied.
The possibility to use a simple volume weighting with a tuning factor is also available.
where the tuning factor VISCMOD can be specified through input as a tabulated function of
WATERCUT (wc).
- 143 -
OLGA User manual
Woelflin:
A third option for the relative viscosity is given by
Defined by WATEROPTIONS DISPMODEL = WOELFLIN. Two parameters can be set with this model:
AWOELFLIN (default value 4.2) and BWOELFLIN (default value 2.5).
Barnea & Mizrahi:
For the Barnea & Mizrahi correlation, the relative viscosity is given by
where
Here µc and µd are the viscosities for the continuous and dispersed phases, respectively. The model is
activated with WATEROPTIONS DISPMODEL = BARNEA.
Table based model:
The final way of giving a dispersion viscosity correlation is to use the table based model. This can be
defined by WATEROPTIONS DISPMODEL = INPUTVISC. The input is used as in this example:
WATEROPTIONS DISPMODEL=INPUTVISC, \
VISCMOD=(1,1.05,1.2,1.4,1.9,2.8,2.7,1.3,1.15,1.05,1)\,
WATERCUT=( 0,0.1,0.2,0.3,0.4,0.5,0.6,0.7,0.8,0.9,1),\,
WATERFLASH=ON, WATERSLIP=ON
Note: The Table base model should use WATERFLASH=ON and WATERSLIP=ON.
Note: The WATERCUT used as input is local water fraction in the dispersion layer.
Flashing/condensation of water
With the water flash option turned on for standard simulations with PVT tables (FLASHMODEL = WATER
in the OPTIONS keyword) the amount of water that evaporate or condense is calculated by OLGA under
the assumption that the gas phase is always saturated with water vapour. The pressure and temperature
dependent mass fraction of water vapour in the gas phase at water saturation is determined from the fluid
properties table. If water properties are calculated by OLGA itself, water vapour in the gas phase is
assumed to be zero and FLASHMODEL = WATER is disregarded.
If the Inhibitor tracking module is used (which uses PVT tables), it is not assumed that the gas phase is
saturated with water vapor, that is, the gas might be dry if there is no available water. In some instances,
therefore, inclusion of the inhibitor tracking option may provide more accurate calculation of the distribution
of water between phases.
WATERFLASH has no effect on Compositional Tracking simulations, in which case flashing of water is
decided by FLASHTYPE in COMPOPTIONS.
- 144 -
The OLGA model
How to use
The following sections describe how to use the keys in the WATEROPTIONS keyword.
Calculation of velocity difference between water and liquid hydrocarbon
By default OLGA calculates the velocities of the oil and water fields separately (WATERSLIP = ON). If
WATERSLIP = OFF, oil and water are always assumed to flow as a homogeneous mixture with average
properties. Finally, the user may specify a constant velocity difference between oil and water with
WATERSLIP = CONSTANT. The velocity difference is the specified by the key VELOCITYDIFFERENCE.
This is a special option that should only be used with great care in special cases for tuning purposes.
Dispersion viscosities
The water volume fraction at inversion point is determined by the key INVERSIONWATERFRAC (default:
INVERSIONWATERFRAC = 0.5).
If DISPERSIONVISC = ON, the dispersion viscosities are calculated according to the model specified in
the DISPMODEL key. If DISPERSIONVISC = OFF, the viscosities are read from the fluid property file
directly if WATERSLIP = ON. When WATERSLIP = OFF | CONSTANT, viscosities of liquids are weighted
according to volume fraction.
If DISPMODEL = PALRHODES, PHI100 must be given (default: PHI100 = 0.765). PHIREL and VISCREL
are required for the EXPERIMENT option (default: PHIREL = 0.765 and VISCREL = 100). The default
values for the EXPERIMENT option correspond to the standard PALRHODES model.
If DISPERSIONVISC = OFF and WATERSLIP = OFF, the volume weighting calculation of viscosities can
be tuned using the keys VISCMOD and WATERCUT. WATERCUT must be given as a list ascending
values for the water cut. For each value in WATERCUT a corresponding value for the viscosity tuning
factor must exist in the VISCMOD key.
Hints and tips
Water fractions in sources, wells and at boundaries (when using PVT tables) are specified either as the
mass fraction of liquid water relative to the total mass (flow) with the keyword WATERFRACTION or as
mass fraction of total water (liquid water plus the water vapour in the gas phase) with the keyword
TOTALWATERFRACTION. The water vapour fraction of the gas phase is taken from the fluid properties
table.
If TOTALWATERFRACTION is set to -1, its actual value is taken from the fluid properties table. With
FLASHMODEL = WATER this value is split into free water and water in gas according to the water mass
fraction in gas values from the fluid table, while with FLASHMODEL = HYDROCARBON the value is
interpreted as only free water (resulting in more free water than with FLASHMODEL = WATER).
The relations between the various mass fractions and mass flow for e.g. a mass source at a specific
temperature and pressure are then by definition:
Rs = Ggas/Ghc
Rswt = Gw/Gtot
Rswv = Gwv/Ggas
Rsw = GwL/Gtot
where
Rs: gas mass fraction
Rswt: total water mass fraction (TOTALWATERFRACTION)
- 145 -
OLGA User manual
Rswv: water vapor mass fraction (always from fluid table)
Rsw: liquid water mass fraction (WATERFRACTION)
Gtot: source total mass flow rate
Ghc:ource total mass flow rate exclusive of liquid water
Gw: mass flow rate of total water (vapor + liquid)
GwL:mass flow rate of liquid water
Ggas: mass flow rate of total gas (including any water vapor)
Gwv: mass flow rate of water vapor in the gas phase
Example: Assume a flowing mixture consisting of 50 kg/s gas (saturated with water), 30 kg/s of oil and 20
kg/s of aqueous phase. Furthermore, let the saturated gas flow include 1 kg/s of water. The various mass
fractions then become:
Rs = 50/(50+30) = 0.625
Rswt = (20+1)/(50+30+20) = 0.21
Rswv = 1/50 = 0.02
Rsw = 20/(50+30+20) = 0.20
Observe that either TOTALWATERFRACTION (Rswt) or WATERFRACTION (Rsw) can be specified for
the same e.g. source. If WATERFRACTION is specified all the water in the e.g. source is considered to be
liquid water.
When modeling a three-phase mixture using PVT tables where you want to include the mass transfer
between the free water and the gas phase, the water option in OLGA must be used with FLASHMODEL =
WATER. This option is more important for gas production systems than for "normal" oil production
systems.
When using two-phase PVT tables in OLGA simulations, internal routines are used for the calculation of
water properties. The water vapour mass fraction, however, will be set to zero; all water in the calculations
will be free water. If the fluid temperature becomes sub-zero, the enthalpy and entropy are extrapolated,
meaning that the fluid is in thermal but not in chemical equilibrium (sub-cooled water, not ice).
The user should be aware that when performing standard simulations with PVT tables there is no separate
water vapour mass balance equation. For three phase simulations, the gas phase is assumed to be
saturated with water. The amount of water vapour is determined by the water vapour mass fraction from
the PVT table. Therefore, the total water mass could be in error for cases where e.g. the inlet total water
mass flow rate is not sufficient to saturate the gas at the water vapour mass fraction from the PVT table.
However, MEG tracking has a water vapour mass balance equation that makes it suitable for simulating
three phase systems where a detailed analysis of the water distribution is necessary (can be used with no
MEG).
When using Compositional Tracking, the water vapour will be taken into account depending on
FLASHTYPE in COMPOPTIONS.
For multiphase transport systems where liquid accumulation could represent a problem, it is recommended
to perform three phase flow computations with the water slip switched on.
Note: The three phase flash option is only valid when a three phase fluid property file is used.
- 146 -
The OLGA model
Drilling fluid
History - terminology
Drilling fluids were originally developed to track the flow of different fluids used in drilling operations. For
example, muds of different densities can be pumped into the well during the drilling operation. In
underbalanced drilling, Nitrogen gas (N2) can be used as lift gas to create underbalanced pressure. As the
tracking scheme was first developed for drilling operations, these fluids were named drilling fluids. The
production engineers were quick to make use of the drilling fluids to simulate dead (stabilized) oil
circulation in deep water oil production loops. In well applications, drilling fluids are used to simulate well
clean-up, well work-over and initial start-up of wells after completion.
Application areas
The drilling fluids can be used when it is desired to track one or more fluids (in addition to the production
fluid), e.g. simulating one fluid displacing another. In drilling applications, the fluids can be oil and water
based muds, or nitrogen for gas lift in underbalanced drilling.
In well operations, drilling fluid is useful for simulating gas lift of wells, well clean-up, well work over and
initial start-up of well after completion.
Typical examples from flow assurance engineering are dead (stabilized) oil circulation in deep water
production loops, gas lift of deep water risers and simulating MEG distribution networks for gas
condensate production systems.
Drilling fluids can also be used to simulate scenarios where the muds cannot be treated as inert, and
where reservoir gas can dissolve in the mud.
Computational options
Two approaches are available in describing and modeling the mixing effects of different fluids: Gas
dissolvable and non-gas dissolvable.
Note: Only a single approach and computational method can be used within an OLGA case definition.
Gas dissolvable fluids
To handle the dissolution of gas into a drilling fluid, the compositional option must be used. The mixing and
phase changes of the mixture are determined by a rigorous equation of state approach. In many scenarios
within managed pressure drilling (MPD), it is important to compute the amount of reservoir gas that
dissolves in the mud, or the amount of gas that breaks out of solution. For such cases, the compositional
approach is recommended. See Drilling fluid properties using a compositional approach for details.
Non-gas dissolvable fluids
For non-gas dissolvable fluid options, drilling fluids do not change the flashing of the production fluid. The
boiling/condensation of oil or water mud is calculated based on the saturation curve. When the mixture
temperature is higher than the saturation temperature of the mud, the mud starts to boil. When the mixture
temperature is below the saturation temperature, the boiled mud condenses back to the liquid phase. The
boiling/condensation rate is determined by the difference between the saturation and mixture temperature
and energy available. The Antoine equation is used for the saturation curve:
- 147 -
OLGA User manual
Here P and T are pressure and temperature respectively.
For oil based mud a = 23.59218 and b = 4547.8.
For water based mud a = 25.27877 and b = 5132.0.
Gas mud remain in a single phase during the entire operation envelope. Physical properties are calculated
by assuming ideal mixing with the production fluid for all mud types.
The production fluid can contain hydrate inhibitors, such as MEG or MeOH. The effects of MEG on the
production fluids (density, viscosity, phase equilibrium) are considered, see Inhibitor tracking on page 168.
There are two methods for describing/calculating the flashing and fluid properties for non-gas dissolvable
fluids:
 Interpolation in PVT tables
The drilling fluid properties can be identified through a fluid property table set in the fluid properties
file. The fluid property tables referred must contain all physical properties normally present in a fluid
property file. A drilling fluid property table set is normally generated using a standalone fluid-package,
such as the OLGA Fluid Definition Tool (see the OLGA GUI User manual). The density and viscosity
can also be modified by using the Fluid Definition Tool or the Mud Property Table application available
in the Tools menu. For further details on the drilling fluid input with use of PVT tables, see How to use
the PVT table
 Built in correlations
For this option, the density and the viscosity ranges are specified at standard conditions. Based on
these standard properties, the density and viscosity at in-situ temperatures and pressures are
calculated by correlations. Conversion units for these drilling fluid properties are supported. For
details, see How to use built-in correlations.
Special treatment of drilling fluid rheology
The non-Newtonian flow behavior of drilling fluids can be accounted for through user input of tabulated
values of rheology parameters (yield stress, plastic viscosity, consistency factor). See DRILLINGFLUID for
details.
Drilling fluid is dependent on option drilling which is part of the Wells module. The Wells module requires a
separate license. For the compositional method, a license for the Compositional Tracking module is
required.
PVT table approach
Model description
The masses of the individual drilling fluids are tracked along the flowpaths. The physical properties of the
drilling fluids and process fluid mixture are calculated based on the assumption of ideal mixture. For the
PVT table interpolation, the solubility of the drilling fluid into other phases than the base fluid phase is
neglected. The drilling fluids do not affect the phase behavior/envelope of the process fluids.
The drilling fluid properties such as density and viscosity are tabulated as functions of pressure and
temperature, as for other standard fluid properties, see PVT Lookup table files. For modifying PVT tables
for base fluids to incorporate special fluid effects, the Fluid Definition Tool may be used, see Fluid
Definition tool in the OLGA GUI User manual.
- 148 -
The OLGA model
Each defined fluid is represented by a component when using the PVT table method. Additionally, cutting
may also be tracked as a separate component if PARTICLEFLOW = SIMPLE/ADVANCED under the
OPTIONS keyword.
An example is shown below:
FILES PVTFILE=("./case.tab", "./gasmud.tab", "./oilmud.tab", "./watermud.tab")

DRILLINGFLUID LABEL=GASMUD1, TYPE=GASMUD, FLUIDTABLE=2
DRILLINGFLUID LABEL=OILMUD1, TYPE=OILMUD, FLUIDTABLE=3
DRILLINGFLUID LABEL=WATERMUD1, TYPE=OILMUD, FLUIDTABLE=4
DRILLINGFLUID LABEL=GASMUD2, TYPE=GASMUD, FLUIDTABLE=2

DRILLINGFLUID LABEL=OILMUD2, TYPE=OILMUD, FLUIDTABLE=3
DRILLINGFLUID LABEL=WATERMUD2, TYPE=OILMUD, FLUIDTABLE=4
The tracked fluids/distinguishable materials:
Component ID Component name Description
1 HC Hydrocarbon mixture
2 H2O Aqueous mixture
3 MEG Hydrate inhibitor
7 GASMUD1 Gas mud 1
8 GASMUD2 Gas mud 2
9 OILMUD1 Oil mud 1
10 OILMUD2 Oil mud 2
11 WATERMUD1 Water mud 1
12 WATERMUD2 Water mud 2
13 CUTTING Cuttings
These components may be studied through the output keywords (TRENDDATA, PROFILEDATA, and so
on) by subscribing to the component variables. Note that it is not possible to refer to single components.
For example, it is possible to subscribe to CGHT, giving mass flow rates for all components in the oil, but it
is not possible to subscribe to CGHT only for component OILMUD1 through the GUI.
Non-Newtonian flow behavior
For the PVT table method, four non-Newtonian rheology models are available: Bingham, Power Law,
Herschel Bulkley and Robertson-Stiff (for Fann input only).
When Fann input is used, the generation of rheology parameters is done via a transformation from shear
stress/shear strain to shear stress/shear rate. These are fitted to the rheology models using a weighted
non-linear regression technique.
- 149 -
OLGA User manual
For all the non-Newtonian rheology models, the non-Newtonian influence on the turbulent, frictional
pressure drop is computed using the formalism given by Reed and Pilehvari [29] with some extensions.
The Reed and Pilehvari method is not used by the OLGA HD stratified flow model. For this model an
apparent viscosity is dynamically calculated, based on the local shear rate. This apparent viscosity is used
in the same friction factor formulae as for Newtonian fluids.
For the PVT table approach the rheology parameters may be given through the mud PVT table as well. For
details, see Fluid Definition tool in the OLGA GUI User manual.
Note: The non-Newtonian flow computation specified through selection of a Fann table (key
FANNTABLE) or a rheology table (key RHEOLOGYTABLE), only gives a correction in viscosity and not
in the wall friction for the HD flow model.
How to use drilling fluid with PVT tables
To invoke the drilling fluids, the key DRILLING in the OPTIONS keyword must be set to ON. After the
DRILLING option is activated, it cannot be deactivated in a subsequent restart from a RESTART file.
Drilling fluids are defined on Library level through use of the DRILLINGFLUID keyword. The drilling fluid
type must be set to gas, oil or water, that is, TYPE = GASMUD, OILMUD or WATERMUD. The drilling fluid
type denotes the phase of the drilling fluid.
For further info, see the keyword DRILLINGFLUID.
Interpolation in the PVT tables
The drilling fluid properties can be identified through a fluid property table in the fluid properties file. Use
the FLUIDTABLE key to refer to the file which contains the drilling fluid properties. The fluid properties
table referred must contain all physical properties normally present in a fluid property file. A drilling fluid
FLUIDTABLE is normally generated using a standalone fluid-package. A heading must be added to the
PVT file to indicate which type of the drilling fluid the PVT table is used for. The density and viscosity can
also be modified by using the Fluid Definition Tool or the Mud Property Table application available in the
Tools menu.
Non-Newtonian rheology
Non-Newtonian behavior of drilling fluids can be accounted for. For the PVT table method there are three
alternative workflows to achieve this:
1. User input of the rheology parameters yield stress or consistency factor in the mud PVT table. For oil
based muds the power law exponent or yield stress is read when the heading of the mud PVT table
contains the strings "POWEXPL" or "YIELDSTRL" respectively. For water based muds the power law
exponent or yield stress is read when the heading contains the strings "POWEXW" or "YIELDSTRW"
respectively. For both types of mud the power law exponent and/or the yield stress should then be
given in the file as function of pressure and temperature.
2. User input of FANN viscometer readings (stress-strain values) in a text file. OLGA will in this case
calculate the rheology parameter tables automatically. The FANN text file (*.fann) must be input under
the FILES keyword (use the FANNFILE key), and the keys FANNTABLE and RHEOLOGYMODEL
must be set in the DRILLINGFLUID keyword.
3. User input of a pre-calculated rheology parameter table file. This file (*.rheo) must be input under the
FILES keyword (use the RHEOLOGYFILE key), and the keys RHEOLOGYTABLE and
RHEOLOGYMODEL must be set in the DRILLINGFLUID keyword.
Four non-Newtonian rheology models are available in RHEOLOGYMODEL: Bingham, Power Law,
Herschel Bulkley and Robertson-Stiff ( the latter is only applicable when using RHEOLOGYTABLE or
FANNTABLE).
- 150 -
The OLGA model
Cuttings
Cuttings can be added to the simulation by using the particle flow functionality in OLGA (see Particle Flow
- How to use.).
Boundary conditions
Drilling fluids can be injected into the models through sources and boundary nodes (the SOURCE or
NODE keywords). For both keywords, the drilling fluid used must be identified by a label. The label must
be consistent with the label specified in the DRILLINGFLUID keyword.
Initial conditions
The initial composition can be specified using the FEEDNAME and the FEEDMASSFRACTION keys. If
these keys are not specified the following is done:
 For pipeline sections and separators: the code uses the composition of the production fluid given by
the FLUID key.
 For internal nodes and phase split nodes: the initial composition is calculated as a mixture of the
compositions in the nearest sections in the connected flowpaths.
To maintain backwards compatibility, the mass fraction of cuttings is specified using the FEED key when
DRILLING = ON, COMPOSITIONAL = OFF and PARTICLEFLOW = SIMPLE/ADVANCED. An example is
shown below:
When specifying initial conditions for a separator, the the INITOILLEVEL must be set in accordance to the
DRILLINGFLUID specified (e.g. if only oil is present INITOILLEVEL must be set to total height).
Output variables
A number of drilling mud variables can be plotted as either TREND or PROFILE variables. A
comprehensive list can be found under Drilling Output Variables on page 570.
Limitations
 A fluid PVT table can not be used simultaneously as a drilling fluid and a production fluid. If the same
fluid table is to be used in both fluids, the fluid file needs to be copied, one PVT table to create the
drilling fluid and the other as production fluid.
 The non-Newtonian flow computation specified through selection of a Fann table (key FANNTABLE)
or a rheology table (key RHEOLOGYTABLE), will only give a correction in viscosity and not in the wall
friction for the HD flow model.
The keywords below provide useful information:
 ANNULUS to specify the annulus configuration (thermal interactions)

 POSITION to specify initial bit position and leak-to positions
 LEAK to specify TOPOSITION (useful for simulating well unloading valves)
- 151 -
OLGA User manual
Compositional approach
Model description - Drilling fluid properties using a compositional approach
The compositional method for drilling fluids utilizes OLGA's standard framework for compositional
computations. A mixture composition is computed taking all fluids into account, including the drilling fluids.
The phase properties and solubility are computed by the standard OLGA PVT package. Ideal mixing is
assumed. The drilling fluids are treated as a composite phase of external and internal fluids mixed with
weight material. This means that e.g. the oil phase of an oil based mud often consists of oil (external fluid),
water or gas (internal fluids) and weight material. It is assumed that the presence of weight material does
not influence the fluid calculations, and it is assumed that the molar ratio of internal fluid versus external
fluid is constant but limited by the amount of internal phase present.
Non-Newtonian flow behavior
Four non-Newtonian rheology models are available: Bingham, Power law, Herschel-Bulkley and
Robertson-Stiff (for Fann input only).
When Fann input is used, the generation of rheology parameters is done via a transformation from shear
stress/shear strain to shear stress/shear rate. These are fitted to the rheology models using a weighted
non-linear regression technique.
For all the non-Newtonian rheology models, the non-Newtonian influence on the turbulent, frictional
pressure drop is computed using the formalism given by Reed and Pilehvari [29] with some extensions.
The Reed and Pilehvari method is not used by the OLGA HD stratified flow model. For this model an
apparent viscosity is dynamically calculated, based on the local shear rate. This apparent viscosity is used
in the same friction factor formulae as for Newtonian fluids.
Note: The non-Newtonian flow computation specified through selection of a Fann table (key
FANNTABLE) or a rheology table (key RHEOLOGYTABLE), will only give a correction in viscosity and
not in the wall friction for the HD flow model.
Note: When using CTMUD functionality without Fann readings, the viscosity of the muds is taken as the
viscosity of the continuous phase (that is, oil-based mud has the visosity of oil).
How to use drilling fluids with the compositional option
- 152 -
The OLGA model
A compositional computation for drilling fluids can be specified by selecting COMPOSITIONAL=ON

combined with DRILLING=ON in the OPTIONS keyword. In this case, the standard requirements for
compositional computations in OLGA must be fulfilled. In particular a FEEDFILE (.mfl) containing the
composition of the fluids in the simulation must be given under the FILES keyword. The compositional
keys must be set for each DRILLINGFLUID. The key FLUIDCOMPOSITION refers to a feed that must be
defined either in the fluid composition file, or as a user defined FEED under the COMPOSITIONAL group
in the OLGA GUI. This feed must describe the composition of the drilling fluid. The drilling fluids are treated
as a composite phase; the key TYPE defines the external phase, but internal phases and a weight material
can be specified as well. The four keys GASRATIO, OILRATIO, WATERRATIO and
WEIGHTMATERIALRATIO enable specification of the volumes that comprise the drilling fluid at standard
conditions. The unit of GASRATIO, OILRATIO, WATERRATIO and WEIGHTMATERIALRATIO must be
the same, but any volumetric unit in addition to percent or fractions can be used. The key
STDMUDWEIGHT is an alternative to using WEIGHTMATERIALRATIO. It can be used to specify the mud
weight at standard conditions.
For further info about the keyword DRILLINGFLUID, see DRILLINGFLUID.
Example: Oil Based Mud
To specify an oil based mud with water/oil ratio 20/80 (vol%) and mixture mud weight 1890 kg/m3, the
following keys (under DRILLINGFLUID) can be used:
LABEL = "Mud-1"
TYPE = OILMUD
FLUIDCOMPOSITION = "baseFluid-1"
GASRATIO = 0
OILRATIO = 80
WATERRATIO = 20
STDMUDWEIGHT = 1890 kg/m3
In the example above it is assumed that "baseFluid-1" is defined either in the .mfl file or as a user defined
feed.
Example: water based mud
A water based mud with oil/water ratio 23/77 (vol%) and mixture mud weight of 110 lb/ft3, can be specified
like this:
LABEL = "Mud-2"
TYPE = WATERMUD
FLUIDCOMPOSITION = "baseFluid-2"
GASRATIO = 0
OILRATIO = 23
WATERRATIO = 77
STDMUDWEIGHT = 110 lb/ft3
In the example above it is assumed that "baseFluid-2" is defined either in the .mfl file or as a user defined
feed.
- 153 -
OLGA User manual
Non-Newtonian behavior of drilling fluids can be accounted for. For the compositional method there are
three alternative workflows to achieve this:
1. User input of FANN viscometer readings (stress-strain values) in a text file. OLGA will in this case
calculate the rheology parameter tables automatically. The FANN text file (*.fann) must be input under
the FILES keyword (use the FANNFILE key), and the keys FANNTABLE and RHEOLOGYMODEL
must be set in the DRILLINGFLUID keyword.
2. User input of a pre-calculated rheology parameter table file. This file (*.rheo) must be input under the
FILES keyword (use the RHEOLOGYFILE key), and the keys RHEOLOGYTABLE and
RHEOLOGYMODEL must be set in the DRILLINGFLUID keyword.
Four non-Newtonian rheology models are available in RHEOLOGYMODEL: Bingham, Power Law,
Herschel Bulkley and Robertson-Stiff ( only applicable when using RHEOLOGYTABLE or FANNTABLE).
Cuttings
- How to use).
Note: For COMPOSITIONAL = ON, PARTICLEFLOW = SIMPLE is always used.
Boundary conditions using drilling fluid
NODE keywords). For both keywords, the drilling fluid used must be identified by a label. For the built-in
correlation method, the density and viscosity must be given as well. The label, density, and viscosity must
be consistent with the label and the density and viscosity must be within the ranges specified in the
DRILLINGFLUID keyword.
Initial conditions for the compositional method
For the compositional method, the FEEDNAME is used to initialize the flowpath with production fluid and
the DRILLINGFLUID key used to initialize the flowpath with mud. If these are not given, then:
 For pipeline sections and separators: The code uses the first feed in the .mfl file. This is consistent
with Compositional Tracking.
 For internal nodes and phase split nodes: The initial composition is calculated as a mixture of the
For the compositional approach, the mass fraction of cuttings can be specified using the
PARTICLEFRACTION key, as usual.
When specifying initial conditions for a separator, the INITOILLEVEL must be set in accordance to the
FEED or DRILLINGFLUID specified (for example, if only oil is present INITOILLEVEL must be set to total
height).
Output variables
- 154 -
The OLGA model
Limitations
The non-Newtonian flow computation specified through selection of a Fann table (key FANNTABLE) or a
rheology table (key RHEOLOGYTABLE), only give sa correction in viscosity and not in the wall friction for
the HD flow model.
 ANNULUS to specify the annulus configuration (thermal interactions).

 POSITION to specify initial bit position and leak-to positions.
 LEAK to specify TOPOSITION (useful for simulating well unloading valves).
Built-in correlations
Model description - Drilling fluid properties using built-in correlations
When the built-in correlations are used, and PARTICLEFLOW = SIMPLE/ADVANCED under OPTIONS,
the code uses the following sixteen components to keep track of the masses, properties and amount of
mixing of different drilling fluids:
Component ID Component name Description
1 HC Hydrocarbon mixture
2 H2O Aqueous mixture
3 MEG Hydrate inhibitor
4 GDENMIN Min gas density tracer for drilling fluid
5 GDENMAX Max gas density tracer for drilling fluid
6 GVISMIN Min gas viscosity tracer for drilling fluid
7 GVISMAX Max gas viscosity tracer for drilling fluid
8 ODENMIN Min oil density tracer for drilling fluid
9 ODENMAX Max oil density tracer for drilling fluid
10 OVISMIN Min oil viscosity tracer for drilling fluid
11 OVISMAX Max oil viscosity tracer for drilling fluid
12 WDENMIN Min water density tracer for drilling fluid
13 WDENMAX Max water density tracer for drilling fluid
14 WVISMIN Min water viscosity tracer for drilling fluid
- 155 -
OLGA User manual
15 WVISMAX Max water viscosity tracer for drilling fluid
16 CUTTING Cuttings
Components 1-3 are used to track the masses of the fluids specified in the keyword BRANCH. These
components may exist in the three fluid phases (gas, oil, and water). The physical properties for each of
the phases are calculated by interpolation from a standard fluid property P-T table set.
Components 4-7 are used to track the masses and viscosities of gas-based fluids. Gas-based fluids do not
flash to other phases. The mass ratio of component 4 and 5 determines the gas-based fluid density at the
standard conditions, while the ratio of 6 and 7 determines the fluid viscosity at the standard conditions. The
fluid density and viscosity are adjusted to in-situ temperature and pressure using built in correlations. The
in-situ density and viscosity of the gas phase are equal to the volume average of components 1-3 in the
gas phase, gas-based fluid components 4-7 and any cutting component dispersed in a gas continuous
layer and/or gas bubbles.
Components 8-11 are used to track the masses of oil-based muds. Oil-based mud does not flash to any
other phases. The mass ratio of component 8 and 9 determines the mud density at the standard
conditions, while the ratio of 10 and 11 the mud viscosity at the standard condition. The mud density and
viscosity are adjusted to in-situ temperature and pressure using built in correlations for oil-based mud. The
in-situ density and viscosity of the oil phase are equal to the volume average of components 1-3 in the oil
phase, mud components 8-11 and any cutting component dispersed in an oil continuous layer and/or oil
droplets.
Components 12-15 are used to track the masses and viscosities of water-based muds. Water-based mud
does not flash to any other phases. The mass ratio of component 12 and 13 determines the mud density at
the standard conditions, while the ratio of 14 and 15 determines the mud viscosity at the standard
condition. The mud density and viscosity are adjusted to in-situ temperature and pressure using built in
correlations for water-based mud. The in-situ density and viscosity of the water phase are equal to the
volume average of components 1-3 in the water phase, mud components 12-15, and any cutting
component dispersed in a water-continuous layer and/or water droplets.
The CUTTING component (16) is not available if PARTICLEFLOW=NO under OPTIONS.
How to use - Drilling fluid with built-in correlations
For further info, see the keyword DRILLINGFLUID.
Built in correlations
For the built in correlations for drilling fluid, the density and the viscosity are specified using the keys
MAXDENSITY, MINDENSITY, MAXVISCOSITY and MINVISCOSITY. These keys denote the drilling fluid
density and viscosity at standard conditions, see Model description - Drilling fluid properties using built-in
correlations on page 155. Based on these standard properties, the density and viscosity at in-situ
temperatures and pressures are calculated by correlations. Units of conversions of these drilling fluid
properties are supported. Thus, a valid density unit (such as LB/FT3) or viscosity unit (such as CP) must
follow the density and viscosity specifications.
- 156 -
The OLGA model
For the built-in correlation method, the mud viscosity at in-situ conditions is computed using simple linear
correlations based on the user given viscosity at standard conditions. The user can invoke the Vogel
viscosity model for water and oil based muds. The non-Newtonian flow computation specified through
selection of a Fann table (key FANNTABLE) or a Rheology table (key RHEOLGYTABLE) can not be used
together with built in correlations.
Cuttings
- How to use.). Note that for COMPOSITIONAL = ON, PARTICLEFLOW = SIMPLE will
always be used.
Boundary conditions using drilling fluid
NODE keywords). For both keywords, the drilling fluid used must be identified by a label. For the built-in
correlation method, the density and viscosity must be given as well. The label, density, and viscosity must
be consistent with the label and the density and viscosity must be within the ranges specified in the
DRILLINGFLUID keyword.
Initial conditions for the built-in correlation method
The initial composition can be specified using the FEEDNAME and the FEEDMASSFRACTION keys. If
these keys are not specified the following is done:
 For pipeline sections and separators: the code uses the composition of the production fluid given by
the FLUID key.
 For internal nodes and phase split nodes: the initial composition is calculated as a mixture of the
To maintain backward compatibility, the mass fraction of cuttings is specified using the FEED key when
DRILLING = ON, COMPOSITIONAL = OFF and PARTICLEFLOW = SIMPLE/ADVANCED. An example is
shown below:
Output variables
- 157 -
OLGA User manual
 ANNULUS to specify the annulus configuration (thermal interactions)

 POSITION to specify initial bit position and leak-to positions
 LEAK to specify TOPOSITION (useful for simulating well unloading valves)
Complex fluid (Deprecated)
Note: The Complex fluid module will be retired after the release of OLGA 2018 and will not be included
in later versions. Existing OLGA Complex Fluid module users on active maintenance will get support on
this feature until the release of OLGA 2019.1. The functionality is replaced by the RHEOLOGY keyword.
Complex fluids are liquids with high viscosity, yield stress, or liquids being shear thinning. Such properties
might arise in waxy oils or emulsions, which often are shear thinning and have high viscosity. A slurry of
hydrate crystals in oil may have a yield stress depending on the particle concentration. Hydrate is a snow-
like substance formed by water and natural gas that might occur in hydrocarbon transport lines at ambient
temperatures well above the normal freezing point of water at elevated pressure. Fluids that are shear
thinning and have a yield stress, for example, gelled waxy crude, can be simulated using OLGA's complex
fluid model.
The presence of yield stress or shear thinning in the liquid might result in a decreasing pressure drop with
increasing production rates up to a certain point where the pressure drop is at a minimum, even for
horizontal pipes. For production rates below this minimum, unstable operation might occur depending on
the boundary conditions of the transport line. These instabilities can interact with other, more well-known,
multiphase flow phenomena such as terrain slugging and give rise to a wider range of unstable operational
conditions. The purpose of the complex fluid model is to predict such behavior.
The Complex fluid module can be used whenever a fluid exhibits significant deviation from Newtonian
behavior, either by shear thinning (for example, heavy oils) or influence of yield stress (for example, waxy
oils). For Newtonian liquids, the module should be used when modeling fluids with viscosity above 50 cP
and it has been tested up to 1000 cP. The RHEOLOGY keyword can be used for the same purpose.
The Complex Fluid module requires a separate license.
Model description (Deprecated)
The complex fluid model utilizes the Bingham model for fluids exhibiting yield stress, while the Power law
is used for shear thinning fluids. As opposed to the complex viscosity model, the complex fluid model
includes numerous modifications to the physical models for both separated and distributed flow taking into
account the non-Newtonian behavior of the fluids. Non-Newtonian behavior can be modeled for the liquid
hydrocarbon phase, the water phase or both. The Newtonian option is included to capture the peculiarities
of higher viscosity liquids.
Bingham plastic model
where τ0 is the yield stress, µρ is plastic viscosity and is shear rate.
- 158 -
The OLGA model
Power law model
where K is consistency factor.
Newtonian fluid
where µ is viscosity.
When running standard OLGA, that is, without slug tracking activated, the use of complex fluid yields an
important improvement because the slug flow model includes the effects of the above rheologies and at
the same time as it covers the range of Reynolds numbers from laminar to turbulent flow. This affects the
bubble front velocity, and, consequently, the liquid accumulation. Furthermore, it yields a better model of
the liquid flowing below the slug bubble as well as a better prediction of the slug fraction. Using this as
basis for pressure drop predictions is a major difference from the complex viscosity model, which is very
important for more viscous liquids.
For stratified flow, the wall friction calculations should yield better results than when using an equivalent
viscosity.
How to use (Deprecated)
The Complex fluid module is activated in the FLUID keyword by setting the key TYPE = COMPLEXFLUID.
The fluid viscosity model to be used is determined by the keys CFLUML and CFLUMW for the liquid
hydrocarbon phase and water phase, respectively. Except for the default Newtonian modeling, fluid
viscosity can be modeled using either the Bingham model or the power law model.
The parameters of the viscosity models can be given in two ways. If the key FULL = YES, the fluid
viscosity parameters (yield stresses/power exponents) are read from the fluid property file as functions of
pressure and temperature. If, on the other hand, FULL = NO, the yield stresses YIELDSRL and
YIELDSTW or power exponents POWEXPL and POWEXPW have to be given if the liquid hydrocarbon or
water viscosity model is set to BINGHAM or POWERLAW respectively. For both options, the viscosity
given in the fluid file is interpreted as the plastic viscosity for Bingham fluids and as the consistency factor
for Power law fluids.
The RHEOLOGY keyword can be used for the same purpose. Note that the RHEOLOGY keyword has
extended functionality compared to the Complex fluid module.
OLGA can model fluids that are shear thinning (for example, heavy oils) or have a yield stress ((for
example, waxy oils) by using different non-Newtonian rheology models. The models available are:
Bingham, Power Law, Herschel-Bulkley and Robertson-Stiff. The parameters for these can be given in a
rheology table file as functions of pressure and temperature. Alternatively, a file with Fann readings for the
fluid can be given (see Fann table file). This Fann file is used by OLGA to calculate the rheology
parameters as a function of pressure and temperature for all the available models. The parameters can be
saved as a rheology table file (with extension .genrheo) by using the key WRITERHEOLOGYFILES under
OPTIONS.
When setting WRITERHEOLOGYFILES=YES, an additional file is also written, with the extension
.genrheofit. This file contains a summary of the calculated rheology parameters, as well as the
corresponding measured and calculated shear stresses. This file can be used to check how well a
rheology model matches measurements in the Fann table.
- 159 -
OLGA User manual
The rheology and Fann tables can be used both with production fluids and drilling fluids. For production
fluids, the RHEOLOGY keyword can be used at flowpath level to set the models for oil, gas and water
separately. The drilling fluid section gives more details on how the tables can be used with drilling fluids.
The non-Newtonian fluid models can affect the flow in two ways: they correct the viscosity of the fluid, and
they affect the flow model directly by correcting the wall friction factors. When using the HD flow model,
only the viscosity and not the wall friction will be corrected.
Model description
There are five different models that can be used in the RHEOLOGY keyword: the Newtonian model and
four non-Newtonian models (Bingham, Power Law, Herschel-Bulkley and Robertson-Stiff).
All five rheology models are characterized by the relation between the shear stress (τ) and the shear rate
( ̇).
Model Relation Parameters
Newtonian μ: viscosity
Bingham ̇ τ0: yield stress
μp: plastic viscosity
Power Law K: consistency factor
n: fluid index
Herschel-Bulkley τ0: yield stress
K: consistency factor
n: fluid index
Robertson-Stiff A,B,C: coefficients
The parameters for the correlations are user-input data as explained in How to use.
These models generally affect the calculations in two ways: modifying the apparent viscosity of the fluid,
and affecting the flow model itself (for example, by affecting the wall friction and the slug bubble rheology).
Currently, only the viscosity correction and not the flow model correction is applied when using the HD flow
model.
How to use
The rheology model for production fluids can be enabled using the RHEOLOGY keyword at flowpath level.
Properties for the gas, oil and water phases can be given separately.
- 160 -
The OLGA model
WATERRHEOLOGYDATA, OILRHEOLOGYDATA and GASRHEOLOGYDATA can be used to determine

where the rheology parameters are to be taken from. The PVT option reads the data from the PVT
property file. RHEOLOGYTABLE/FANNTABLE reads the data from a rheology/Fann table. Lastly, the
CONSTANT option enables you to input constant values manually.
The model to be applied is chosen using the WATERRHEOLOGYMODEL, OILRHEOLOGYMODEL and

GASRHEOLOGYMODEL keys.
See How to use drilling fluid with PVT tables and How to use drilling fluids with the compositional option for
more details on how the rheology models can be applied to drilling fluids.
How to convert Complex fluid input to RHEOLOGY input
In the OLGA GUI, the RHEOLOGY keyword is found under FA-models at the FLOWPATH level.
 The Complex fluid key CFLUML = NEWTONIAN is equivalent to using the RHEOLOGY key
OILRHEOLOGYDATA = PVT.
 If the Complex fluid key FULL = YES and CFLUML is set to BINGHAM (or POWERLAW), the
corresponding RHEOLOGY key values are OILRHEOLOGYMODEL = BINGHAM (or POWERLAW),
OILRHEOLOGYDATA = RHEOLOGYFILE and a RHEOLOGYTABLE must be selected. The rheology
table contains the rheology parameters as a function of pressure and temperature.
 If the Complex fluid key FULL = NO, CFLUML = BINGHAM and YIELDSTRL = x, the corresponding
RHEOLOGY key values are OILRHEOLOGYMODEL = BINGHAM, OILRHEOLOGYDATA =
CONSTANT and OILYIELDSTRESS = x. Note that also OILPLASTICVISCOSITY must be set to a
constant value.
 If the Complex fluid key FULL = NO, CFLUML = POWERLAW and POWEXPL = y, the corresponding
RHEOLOGY key values are OILRHEOLOGYMODEL = POWERLAW, OILRHEOLOGYDATA =
CONSTANT and OILEXPONENT = y. Note that also OILCONSISTENCY must be set to a constant
value.
The same type of correspondence between Complex fluid data and RHEOLOGY data exists for the water
phase.
Some extended features can be found in the RHEOLOGY keyword, that are not present in the Complex
fluid module. One is an option to use a table of FANN readings from which the rheology parameters will be
automatically computed, another is a possibility to specify non-Newtonian rheology also for the gas phase.
Special fluids and solids

There are several methods available in OLGA for describing and calculating the required fluid properties.
There are also functionality for addressing several types of fluids with special behavior. These are still
covered by the methods listed in the second row in the table below, but need additional data described in
the subsequent paragraphs.
- 161 -
OLGA User manual
Mud, drilling, completion, inert fluids
Special fluids, such as drilling, completion or other special (for example, non-flashing/inert) fluids, with or
without non-Newtonian rheology, can be described by using the DRILLINGFLUID specifications through
look-up tables or through the input file. See Drilling fluid on page 147 for details.
Particles
Particles such as sand or cuttings may be tracked by activating a special tracking option. See Introduction
to particles for details.
Inhibitors
Some inhibitors and their effects can be tracked and/or calculated in an OLGA simulation:
 Hydrate inhibitors, see details in Inhibitor tracking on page 168. Note that these inhibitors can also
have an effect on corrosion calculations.
 Corrosion model and effect of inhibitors. The corrosion model can be used together with inhibitor
tracking. See details in Corrosion on page 130 and keyword CORROSION (on Flowpath), key
GLYCOLFRACTION and Inhibitor tracking on page 168.
 Wax inhibitors: Currently, the only methods for reflecting wax inhibitors in the OLGA wax calculations
are to either modify the tabulated solubilities of waxy components in oil, or to tune the deposition rate
by using e.g. the key DIFFCOEFFMULT in the WAXDEPOSITION (on Flowpath) keyword. For details
about the wax data file and WAXDEPOSITION keyword, see Wax table file on page 614 and
WAXDEPOSITION (on Flowpath).
 Inhibitors may also be included in a simulation with full compositional tracking/dynamic
thermodynamic fluid property calculations, see Feed file for Compositional Tracking on page 615.
Hydrates
In the case of analyzing potential hydrate formation, there are two main methods of looking at this in
OLGA:
 Specifying a hydrate curve, OLGA only giving an indication if inside or outside of the pressure-
temperature region where formation occurs. See Hydrate check on page 163 for details.
 Hydrate formation with kinetics and related fluid rheology calculations. See Hydrate kinetics on page
166 for details.
- 162 -
The OLGA model
Wax
When analyzing wax precipitation effects (wall deposits, particle precipitation and non-Newtonian rheology
effects in oil flow), an additional lookup table file is required. This file describes the waxy and non-waxy
components and the waxy components' solubility in oil at given pressures and temperatures. See Wax
deposition on page 181 for details.
Steam
For steam-water-hydrocarbon mixtures, the required fluid description can be found here: SteamWater-HC
on page 175
CO2, H2O and other single component fluids
The single component description method can handle most kinds of single component fluids. Details can
be found in the following link: Single component introduction.
Stable oil-water emulsions
If a stable oil-water emulsion is expected, this can be simulated by specifying a fluid where the oil-water
mixture properties are given in the tables for the oil and water phases. In combination with this, the
WATEROPTIONS keyword can be used, setting WATERSLIP=OFF and DISPERSIONVISC=ON, using
the chosen DISPMODEL to obtain the desired apparent emulsion viscosity.
This is due to the oil-water dispersion model in OLGA only being able to handle instantaneous, velocity
dependent mixing of oil and water. Slow mixing/separation processes can thus not be handled by this
dispersion model.
Other non-Newtonian rheology models
Non-Newtonian fluids canalso be described through the FLUID keyword (complex viscosity and complex
fluid models). See FLUID (on CaseLevel) on page 354 for details. Note that the complex fluid model uses
additional rheology data from the fixed format lookup table file, see Complex fluid - Data from fluid property
file on page 639.
Hydrate
Hydrate check
Hydrate check should be used to get information on possible formation of hydrates when there is a risk of
reaching the pressure-temperature region where water can form hydrates. The user can specify hydrate
formation curves for each flowpath that should be investigated.
Model description
The program does the following:
1. For a given pressure and inhibitor concentration in a section, the temperature below where hydrate
may form is determined from the hydrate formation curve. The difference between the hydrate
formation temperature and the fluid temperature is then calculated, that is, the volume variable
DTHYD is updated.
2. For a given pressure and inhibitor concentration in a section, the pressure above where hydrate may
form is determined from the hydrate formation curve. The difference between the fluid pressure and
the hydrate formation pressure is then calculated, that is, the volume variable DPHYD is updated.
- 163 -
OLGA User manual
3. The positions and the values of the maximum temperature and pressure differences for hydrate
formation are calculated, that is, the branch variables MDPHYD, MDPPOS, MDTHYD and MDTPOS
are updated.
Interpolation and extrapolation of the hydrate curves:
An imaginary square is formed to define the limits of the hydrate curve(s).
When hydrate curves for different inhibitor concentrations (HAMMERSCHMIDT = OFF) are used, the four
sides are the highest/lowest temperature and highest/lowest pressure of the hydrate curves. All hydrate
curves are extrapolated so they reach two of the square sides as illustrated in the figure below for
INHIBCONC = 0%, INHIBCONC = 20% and INHIBCONC = 40%.
For HAMMERSCHMIDT = ON the highest/lowest pressure is defined by the hydrate curve for the inhibitor
concentration of 0%, while the highest/lowest temperature depends on the actual inhibitor concentration
(Hammerschmidt).
Figure 59 Hydrate curve square with different pressure/temperature conditions. Condition 1 and 2
has an inhibitor concentration of 40%, while Condition 3 has 0%.
When OLGA computes DPHYD and DTHYD it uses the inhibitor concentration and the pressure and
temperature in the section. See Condition 1 in the figure above.
If the Hammerschmidt equation is used (HAMMERSCHMIDT = ON), the hydrate temperature is calculated
based on the actual inhibitor concentration.
If HAMMERSCHMIDT = OFF it is checked whether the inhibitor concentration in a section is within the
range given by the hydrate curves. If it is above the highest inhibitor concentration, the hydrate curve for
the highest inhibitor concentration is used. If is below the lowest inhibitor concentration, the hydrate curve
for the lowest inhibitor concentration is used. If the inhibitor concentration in the section is between two
hydrate curves, OLGA interpolates the two hydrate curves to generate a new hydrate curve for the inhibitor
concentration in the section.
- 164 -
The OLGA model
When DPHYD is computed the temperature in the section is used to find the hydrate pressure for the given
inhibitor concentration. If the temperature in the section is inside the square and no match is found, the
highest hydrate pressure is used if the temperature is to the right of the hydrate curve (Condition 2) and
the lowest is used if it is to the left (HAMMERSCHMIDT = OFF only; hydrate pressure always defined
within the square with ON). If the temperature in the section is to the right of the square (Condition 3) the
highest pressure in the square is used as the hydrate pressure. When the temperature in the section is to
the left of the square the lowest pressure in the square is used as the hydrate pressure.
When DTHYD is computed the pressure in the section is used to find the hydrate temperature for the given
inhibitor concentration. If the pressure in the section is inside the square and no match is found, the
highest hydrate temperature is used if the pressure is above the hydrate curve (Condition 3) and the
lowest is used if it is below (HAMMERSCHMIDT = OFF only; hydrate temperature always defined within
the square with ON). If the pressure in the section is above the square (Condition 2) the highest
temperature in the square is used as the hydrate temperature. When the pressure in the section is below
the square the lowest temperature in the square is used as the hydrate temperature.
It should be noted that if the section pressure is above the highest pressure in the square the reported
DPHYD will always be a positive value that indicates hydrate formation. This can be misleading, especially
if the section temperature also is higher than the highest temperature in the square, in which case DTHYD
< 0 and the section temperature in reality may be far above the hydrate formation temperature, see
Condition 4.
To remove this source of error all hydrate curves should include both the minimum and maximum
pressure in the pipeline. That is, the hydrate curves in Figure 59 are not well defined for conditions 2, 3
and 4 (especially the hydrate curve for 0%). Also, it is recommended to always include the hydrate curve
for an inhibitor concentration of 0% to avoid underestimating the hydration formation temperature.
Using DEBUG = ON in OPTIONSOPTIONS, a warning is given the first time the fluid temperature is above
or below the maximum temperature in the 'hydrate curve' square to alert the user. This goes for pressure
above/below the square and inhibitor concentrations above/below the given values, as well.
How to use
Define the hydrate formation curves with the HYDRATECURVE keyword in the Library section.
In each flowpath, use the HYDRATECHECK keyword to specify a list of hydrate curves to apply. Each
HYDRATECURVE specified in a flowpath must have a unique inhibitor concentration (INHIBCONC).
The hydrate formation curve can be specified either with keys PRESSURE and TEMPERATURE, or from
an ASCII file where the hydrate formation curve is given.
The effect of an inhibitor on the hydrate formation temperature can be calculated. This requires the
Inhibitor tracking module or the Compositional tracking module with an inhibitor defined in the FEEDFILE.
Note that changes in the composition (except the specified inhibitor) does not affect the hydrate curve
calculations.
- 165 -
OLGA User manual
This effect can be calculated in two ways:
1. HAMMERSCHMIDT = OFF: One hydrate curve per inhibitor concentration (INHIBCONC) must be
given. OLGA will then interpolate between the curves defined in the HYDRATECHECK. One
HYDRATECURVE keyword must be defined for each curve and concentration.
2. HAMMERSCHMIDT = ON: The Hammerschmidt equation (see Inhibitor tracking on page 168) will be
used based on the hydrate curve for no inhibitor. The equation is valid for inhibitor concentrations
between 0% and 70%.
Note: For Compositional Tracking, the INHIBITOR must be defined in the FEEDFILE before it can be
selected in the HYDRATECURVE.
Hydrate kinetics
The hydrate kinetics model (CSMHYK) allows for the prediction of where and approximately where hydrate
plugs will form in oil and gas pipelines, and the transport properties of cold flow hydrate slurries. The
current version of the CSMHYK model (version 2) incorporates three distinct models for hydrate formation,
growth and transport. The KINETIC model is suitable for systems with small mass and heat transfer
resistances inside of the pipeline. The TRANSPORT model includes mass and heat diffusion through the
particle boundary layer and hydrate shell so that both heat and mass transport limitation will be taken into
account. The COLDFLOW model is intended to simulate a fully formed cold hydrate slurry system in which
only growth and possible agglomeration of already formed hydrate particles is considered.
Include the hydrate kinetics if the pipeline temperature is close to the hydrate formation temperature. If the
temperature drops sufficiently below the hydrate equilibrium temperature hydrate will be nucleated. The
formation of hydrate will affect both the temperature of the pipeline and the pressure drop due to increased
viscosity of the hydrate-oil slurry relative to oil viscosity.
The Hydrate kinetics module requires a separate license.
Model description
The Hydrate kinetics module combines the hydrate kinetics and rheological model developed by Colorado
School of Mines with the flow equations of the OLGA model. The hydrate kinetics model determines the
amount of gas and water consumed by hydrate formation and the effective viscosity of the hydrate particle
laden oil phase. The flow model integrates the mass consumption rate to obtain the amount of hydrate
phase and uses the effective viscosity for the flow calculations. The KINETIC model only considers the
hydrate reaction kinetics themselves, and so assumes that heat and mass transfer resistances are low.
The TRANSPORT model takes heat and mass transport into account in addition to the reaction kinetics.
This model assumes that the water phase is fully dispersed in the oil phase. The COLDFLOW model
assumes that the hydrate nucleation is fully formed in the cold fluid and that only hydrate particle growth
and agglomeration is taking place.
Hydrate reaction
The model assumes that hydrate formation will commence after sufficient sub-cooling (SUBCOOLING).
The default sub-cooling is 6.5°F. Whether the nucleation is assumed independent of other thermodynamic
properties than the hydrate equilibrium temperature at the given system pressure depends on the choice of
model.
Whether hydrates with properties of SI or SII structure are formed depends on the key STRUCTURE.
- 166 -
The OLGA model
The hydrate formation reaction will by default react gas (methane) hydrocarbons with liquid water to form
hydrate particles (OILGUESTFRACTION=0 and GASGUESTFRACTION=1).
The HYDRATEOPTIONS key GASGUESTFRACTION is the mass fraction of gas available for hydrate
formation to all the gas in a section, mg, that is,
The HYDRATEOPTIONS key OILGUESTFRACTION is the mass fraction of oil available for hydrate
formation to all the oil in a section, m0.
The hydrate reaction rate is limited to the mass available to react. First the gas mass will react, then the oil
mass will react. TRANSPORT and COLDFLOW model use a file (METHANECONCFILE) containing
concentration data for methane in bulk, and in equilibrium with hydrate to calculate mass diffusion. It is
assumed that enough free gas is present so that the bulk concentration of methane in the oil does not
change.
Flow model modifications
By default the hydrate particles will flow with the oil film. That is; the hydrate velocity will be the same as for
the oil film (COIL=1 and CWATER=0, denoted Co and Cw, respectively). But it is possible to relate the
hydrate velocity to both the oil and water velocity, uof and uwf, respectively, according to
An effective hydrate oil slurry viscosity, , is calculated by the Colorado School of Mines code:
hos
It is possible to force a drift flux relation between the gas velocity, ug, and the volume average liquid
velocity, ul by using the DRIFTFLUX, VELOCITYRATIO and DRIFTVELOCITY keys:
It is also possible to increase the drag between gas and liquid by using the FOGEXPONENT key:
The FOGEXPONENT will reduce the velocity difference between gas and liquid when hydrate particles are
present.
By using the FULLDISPERSION key, no slip between oil film and water film is used in the simulation.
Notes
The model is still in the research phase, and the initial emphasis has been on flowing liquid dominated
systems with excess of water and gas for hydrate formation. Future versions will likely also address gas
dominated systems and include a deposition mechanism. Special care should be taken when using the
model because the model has only been validated against limited data sets. Further, it is not designed for
shut-in and depressurization studies.
The hydrate particles are uniformly distributed in the oil phase. The hydrate equilibrium is pre-calculated
and the kinetic model developed for methane is adapted. For TRANSPORT and COLDFLOW data for
methane is used for diffusion mass transfer.
No deposition on wall is activated. Immediate nucleation of the hydrate particles (no induction time).
- 167 -
OLGA User manual
How to use
The hydrate kinetics model is activated through the HYDRATEKINETICS keyword. HYDRATEKINETICS
keyword is a FlowPath FA-Model (Flow Assurance Model). The tuning keys for thermodynamic, intrinsic,
transport and slurry behavior is located in the keyword HYDRATEOPTIONS, which is added to the
FlowPath along with the HYDRATEKINETICS keyword if these tuning keys are to be adjusted.
The HYDRATEKINETICS references a HYDRATECHECK that describe the hydrate equilibrium

temperature, and which must be present on the same FlowPath.
Inhibitor tracking
The Inhibitor tracking module allows for tracking of the contents of a hydrate inhibitor in the pipeline. The
module allows the choice between three inhibitors; MEG (mono-ethylene glycol), MEOH (methanol) or
ETOH (ethanol).
An important application of this module within flow assurance, is using it to ensure that the amount of
hydrate inhibitor throughout the pipelines is sufficient to prevent the formation of hydrates. In the standard
three-phase model of OLGA, the pipeline may contain water and inhibitor, but information regarding the
inhibitor concentration along the line is not available.
The Inhibitor tracking module requires a separate license.
Model description
The following assumptions are made for inhibitor tracking:
 The only properties of the aqueous phase affected by MEG are the viscosity, the density, and the
density’s derivatives.
 The water vapour content in the gas phase is adjusted by the mole fraction of MEG in the aqueous
phase.
 The mole fraction of inhibitor in gas is equal to the vapor pressure divided by the system pressure.
 There is no diffusion of MEG in the aqueous phase.
 The inhibitors do not effect flashing between gas and oil. This flash is calculated based upon the gas
mass fraction from the PVT table.
 There is no hydrocarbon component dissolved in the water.
 The Inhibitor tracking module is not aware of any special physics the user may have activated, and
hence may not work properly in combination with e.g. Wax or Corrosion. However, it should work with
all the features of basic OLGA.
 The Inhibitor tracking module must be used with a two-phase fluid table or with a three-phase fluid
table that has only H2O in the water phase.
 The active coefficients of inhibitor and H2O from UNIFAC correlations are used to calculate the
chemical potentials of MEOH/ETOH and H2O in the aqueous phase.
The Inhibitor tracking module uses a fluid of three components, namely
1. HC - Hydrocarbon in oil and gas phase.

2. H2O - Water, which can be in the gas and the aqueous phase.
3. Inhibitor - (MEG, MEOH or ETOH).
- 168 -
The OLGA model
At each time step the properties of the aqueous phase are calculated from the local pressure and
temperature, and also from the fluid composition in each section of the pipeline. The effects of the inhibitor
are included in the calculation of the density and viscosity of the aqueous phase. The method of Grunberg
and Nissan is used to calculate the viscosity of the inhibitor-water mixture, and the Hankinson-Brobst-
Thomson (HBT) technique yields an estimate of the liquid density. Descriptions and formulae for the
Grunberg and Nissan method and the HBT technique can be found in the open literature, see [30].
The effect of inhibitor can also be included in the calculation of the hydrate formation temperature. The
user can either specify a hydrate curve for each inhibitor concentration and let OLGA interpolate between
the values, or the Hammerschmidt formula for hydrate depression [14] can be used (the equation is valid
for inhibitor concentrations between 0% and 70%):
where
ΔT Hydrate depression, °F
M Molecular weight of inhibitor (MEG: 62.069 g/mol, MEOH: 32.042 g/mol, ETOH: 46.069 g/mol)
H Hammerschmidt constant, default value is 2335 delta F
W Weight per cent of the inhibitor in the liquid
TMEGCONC Calculated hydrate temperature
TMEGCONC=0 Hydrate temperature for no inhibitor
For the other properties of the aqueous phase, the effects of the inhibitor are neglected and pure water
properties from the three-phase fluid table or from OLGA are adopted.
How to use
With the Inhibitor tracking module, you can specify a hydrate inhibitor (one of MEG, MEOH, or ETOH) to
see the effect this will have on the formation of hydrates in the pipeline.
Specify the following keywords to use the Inhibitor tracking module:
 OPTIONS to set COMPOSITIONAL = MEG/MEOH/ETOH

 SOURCE to specify INHIBFRACTION in the mass source
 INITIALCONDITIONS to specify INHIBFRACTION at initial time (if STEADYSTATE = OFF in
OPTIONS)
 NODE to specify INHIBFRACTION at the boundary
 TRENDDATA/PROFILEDATA/OUTPUTDATA to print compositional variables for given components
 HYDRATECURVE and HYDRATECHECK to calculate the effect on the hydrate formation
temperature
Note that either INHIBFRACTION or TOTALINHIBFRACTION can be given. The former is the mass
fraction of the inhibitor in the total aqueous phase; the latter is the mass fraction of the inhibitor in relation
to the total aqueous phase + water vapour.
Note: Inhibitor tracking cannot be used together with Wax deposition.
- 169 -
OLGA User manual
Particle flow
Flow of solid particles in multiphase tubes and pipes is an important flow assurance issue. As well as being
a general nuisance, particles can affect the fluid flow and heat transfer significantly. They can cause
damage to equipment and pipes by erosion, and the blockage of pipes by particle deposition can cause
severe loss of production. An accurate model for solid particle transportation and deposition in multiphase
flow can help to optimize production from sand-prone reservoirs, clean-up operations and pipeline profiles.
This module should be used when it is relevant to simulate the transport and deposition of solid particles in
through the pipeline. Two models are available, which differ in complexity:
 The SIMPLE model is suitable for estimating the flow of suspended particles in transportation pipes
following one carrier phase, typically in stratified or annular flow.
 The ADVANCED model is more accurate and must be used in cases where deposition and mixing
between phases is expected.
More models can be added using extensions (see OLGA Extensibility).
Model description
There are two models available for simulating particle flow:
 The SIMPLE model considers only the axial movement of the particles. The particles remain in the
same carrier phase after they are injected into the system.
 The ADVANCED model considers formation of a bed as well as cross-sectional distribution of the
particles between the different fluid layers, in addition to the axial particle transport.
Both approaches use the same models for the velocity of the particles and the viscosity of the fluid-particle
mixture.
Slip velocity
Particles are assumed to be dispersed in the three phases (gas layer, oil layer and water). The particles
velocity is defined using a drift velocity or slippage defined as the velocity of the particles relative to the
velocity of the carrier phase. Only gravity induced slippage is considered, and therefore particles flowing
horizontally will move with the velocity of the carrier phase if no deposition is considered. The vertical
slippage between particles and fluid, Vsl, is calculated depending on the Reynolds number.
For laminar flow (Re < 3) the empirical correlation for Vsl is as follows [3]:
where ds is the particle diameter [m], ρs is the density of the solid particles [kg/m3], ρf is the density of the
fluid [kg/m3], µf is the viscosity of the fluid [kg/m3], Vsl is the slip velocity [m/s].
The Reynolds number for particles is based on Vsl and particle diameter:
For transitional flow (3 < Re < 300) the empirical correlation for Vsl is:
For fully developed turbulent flow (Re > 300) the empirical correlation for Vsl is:
- 170 -
The OLGA model
The axial slippage is given by Vsl multiplied by the cosine of the pipe angle with the gravity vector:
The particles velocity in a layer is linearly scaled down to zero when the concentration in the layer is
between 0.7 and 0.8.
Viscosity of the fluid-particle mixture
The viscosity of the fluid is corrected due to the suspended particles. For this, the Krieger-Dougherty
correction [18] factor is used:
where  is the volume fraction of suspended particles in the fluid.
SIMPLE model
Conservation equations are solved for the mass of particles in each fluid field. This determines the
particles concentration which can change with time and along the flowpath. For the simple model, the
particles when they are injected through a source or at boundary conditions, are assigned to the phase
with the highest volume, termed the carrier phase for these particles. There is no exchange of particles
between carrier phases. A consequence of this assumption is that if the flow is stopped, the particles will
tend to accumulate in the oil, water and gas layers independently, instead of accumulating on the bottom
layer, as in reality.
ADVANCED model
With this mode, conservations equations are solved for the mass of particles in two fields: the particles
suspended in the fluid layers, and the particles in the bed. The bed layer consists of two sub-layers: a
static part (called stationary bed) and a moving part (called moving bed or bed load).
For the suspension, conservation equations are solved for the total mass of suspended particles. This
makes it possible to account for mixing of particles between the oil, water and gas layers.
The entrainment and deposition rates of the particles determine the size of the bed, while the porosity of
the bed (available as user input) determines the amount of fluid trapped in the bed. We assume that the
fluid does not flow through the stationary bed.
Conditions of a bed
There are three equilibrium conditions of the particle transport mode: static bed (particles do not move at
all), bed load (some of the bed is moving but no particles entrained in the fluid layer above the bed), and
suspended load (some or all of the particles are entrained in the fluid layers).
We model the incipient condition of suspension as the point where the shear velocity at the bed surface
becomes greater than the settling velocity of the particles in the fluid in contact with the bed:
where τf is the shear stress and v* is the shear velocity of the fluid at the bed surface.
- 171 -
OLGA User manual
On the other hand, the incipient condition of bed load is calculated using doing a balance of the forces
acting on a particle:
In the figure, FL is the lift force, FD is the drag force, FB is the buoyancy force, FG is the gravity force, α is
the pipe inclination and Φ is the angle of repose, available as input. The effects of normal (Ni) and friction
(fi) forces are neglected at the initiation of the rolling of the particle.
Note: The angle of repose is defined as the steepest angle of descent or dip relative to the horizontal
plane to which a material can be piled without slumping.
For the particle to move upwards, the following condition needs to be satisfied at the contact point P1:
For the particle to move downwards, the following condition needs to be satisfied at the contact point P2:
The forces are calculated as follows:
where u is the fluid velocity in the velocity sub-layer above the bed and CD is the drag coefficient. Here, we
have used Saffman's model [16] for the lift force.
- 172 -
The OLGA model
Parameters of the moving bed
We use the correlation from Nielsen [6] to calculate the thickness and the velocity of the moving bed sub-
layer:
where δs is the thickness of the moving bed sub-layer, τw is the wall shear stress, τw,c is the wall shear
stress at incipient condition of bed load and Vb is the axial velocity of the moving bed.
The concentration of particles in the moving bed sub-layer is taken from the porosity of the bed (available
as input).
Concentration profile
The calculation of the concentration profile is based on the steady-state advection diffusion equation:
where Cs is the concentration of suspended particles. Here, we have assumed that the diffusivity is equal
to the eddy viscosity υt. This equation defines a concentration profile for the suspension. For multiphase
flow the concentration profile determines the distribution of the suspended particles in the flowing layers
and it is used to calculate the deposition rate.
The eddy viscosity used in the calculation of the particle concentration profile assumes separated flow. To
account for distributed flow regimes such as bubble and slug flow the concentration profile is calculated
with properties (such as layer heights, shear stress, density and viscosity) of the main region. The particles
are then distributed in the phases using layer heights calculated from the phase volume fractions of the
fluid mixture.
Entrainment and deposition
The deposition rate is defined as:
Where S is the length of the bed-suspension interface in a cross sectional cut, A is the pipe area, and
is the concentration of suspended particles at the bed surface. The latter is obtained by solving the
advection diffusion equation.
The entrainment rate is defined as:
Where Cb is the concentration of particles in the bed. Entrainment is only considered under the condition of
suspension.
- 173 -
OLGA User manual
Tuning
It is possible to tune the diffusivities in the ADVANCED particle model with the keys GASDIFFUSIVITY,
OILDIFFUSIVITY and WATERDIFFUSIVITY. These tuning factors are multiplied directly with the diffusivity
of the respective layer. The diffusivity tuning factor for the bottom layer is also multiplied with the shear
velocity used in the condition of incipient suspension. For separated flow setting the diffusivity to zero
results in no suspended particles in the given layer and the layers above. Note that the diffusivity tuning
factors are not taken into account by the Steady state preprocessor because bed formation is not included
and the distribution of particles in the fluid is simplified, see Particle flow- How to use.
How to use
You can include particles in an OLGA model by using the PARTICLEFLOW key under the OPTIONS
keyword. Two models are available: SIMPLE and ADVANCED, as described in Model description.
Particles can be entered into pipelines through sources or boundary nodes, and corresponding initial
conditions can be set in INITIALCONDITIONS, as well as for internal nodes, phase split nodes and
separators.
Particles can be defined both for compositional and non-compositional simulations. The SIMPLE model
can be used in both cases, while the ADVANCED model can be used only in non-compositional cases.
The particle flow functionality can be used with drilling fluids by setting DRILLING = ON under the
OPTIONS keyword to simulate drilling scenarios (see Drilling fluid for more details).
Properties
The density, diameter and heat capacity of the particles can be specified through the PARTICLES keyword
under Library. Only one type of particle can be specified for one simulation. If this keyword is not specified,
the default values are used.
Additionally, it is possible to adjust the properties of the particle bed for the ADVANCED model. The
available parameters are the angle of repose and the porosity of the bed. The corresponding input keys
can be defined using the PARTICLEOPTIONS keyword. Default values are used if this keyword is not
defined.
Boundary conditions
Particle flow can be specified by the PARTICLEFRACTION key in SOURCE or NODE. The value to enter
here is the mass of particles divided by the mass of the total mixture.
Initial conditions
An initial distribution of particles can be specified using the PARTICLEFRACTION key under the
INITIALCONDITIONS keyword.
Additionally, the initial mass fraction of particles can be given for internal nodes, separators and phase split
nodes using the PARTICLEFRACTION key in the corresponding keywords. An exception to this rule is that
the value is specified through the CUTTING component in a FEED when setting DRILLING=ON and
COMPOSITIONAL=OFF under OPTIONS (see Drilling fluid). This is to maintain backward compatibility.
Output variables
A number of output variables related to the particles are available for TREND and PROFILE plots under
the variable group ParticleFlow. A comprehensive list can be found under Particle flow Output Variables on
page 582.
- 174 -
The OLGA model
Extensions
Particle flow models can be added using extensions. These models are available in the key
PARTICLEMODEL, under PARTICLEOPTIONS. To use these, the PARTICLEFLOW=ADVANCED must
be selected. The key BEDPOROSITY will be available as a tuning parameter for the extension model.
However, the model may not take the parameter into account. Refer to the documentation of the extension
for more details..
Notes
 The Steady state preprocessor ignores the slip between the particles and fluids. It does not consider
the bed formation either.
 Only one particle size can be used for an OLGA model.
 The Steady state preprocessor with the ADVANCED model does not include bed formation and the
distribution of particles in the fluid is done according to the volumetric flowrates of the phases.
 See the Compatibility matrix for more information.
SteamWater-HC
The SteamWater-HC module is an improved way of tracking when there is a considerable amount of water
in the fluid. For such situations, this model has some benefits as compared to the table based approach:
1. The assumption in the standard table based that the gas phase is always saturated with steam (no
mass balance for steam) is lifted. This does not apply for Inhibitor Tracking and Compositional
Tracking as those models have a steam mass balance.
2. Evaporation of water does not require a pre-existing gas phase.
3. The ability to handle crossing of the saturation line in single component systems.
The second limitation is not a real limitation as there will usually be some HC gas in situations where water
is evaporating. The only situation where this limitation is real is if only water is present in the fluid and
temperature and pressure conditions are such that the saturation line is crossed.
The third limitation is related to the way the conservation equations are solved with an explicit coupling
between volume (pressure) balance and energy (temperature) balance.
This is solved by introducing time constants or delays in the evaporation/condensation process. The
difference between the saturation temperature and the fluid temperature serves as a potential for phase
mass transfer. Multiplying this temperature difference with a certain heat or energy transfer coefficient
gives a certain energy transfer rate that can be used to estimate the mass transfer rate. In that case an
asymptotic approach to equilibrium occurs. How fast this approach is depends on the size of the energy
transfer coefficient.
Also, this module gives more correct water/steam properties around the critical point and also in the
supercritical region.
The SteamWater–HC module should be used when there is a considerable amount of water in the fluid, or
when it is important to limit the rate of boiling/evaporation/condensation, e.g., when simulating drying of a
pipeline with hot gas.
SteamWater–HC is part of the Single component module that requires a separate license.
- 175 -
OLGA User manual
Model description
The following assumptions are made in the model:
 Oil, gas, water and vapor (steam) all have the same temperature, TM.
 The pressure of the water phase is equal to the total pressure.
 The pressure of vapor is equal to the partial pressure of vapor in the gas phase and is calculated
assuming an ideal mix of vapor and hydrocarbon gas.
 Water saturation temperature, Tsatw, is calculated from the total pressure.
 Vapor saturation temperature, Tsatv, is calculated from the partial pressure of vapor.
 If the fluid temperature, TM, is higher than Tsatw, flashing or boiling of water occurs.
 If TM is higher than Tsatv but lower than Tsatw, evaporation of water occurs.
 If TM is lower than Tsatv, condensation of vapor occurs.
Note: Tsatv is always less than or equal to Tsatw.
The inner pipe wall surface may be superheated or subcooled compared to Tsatw or Tsatv. Such a situation
can lead to surface boiling or surface condensation in cases where water or vapor is in direct contact with
the pipe wall. This additional mass transfer term will not be directly included but can be accounted for by
an enhanced heat transfer due to surface boiling/condensation.
Generation of steam and water properties
The equations used to calculate the steam and water properties are taken from ref. 1.
These equations are time consuming to solve and will therefore be used only at the start of a simulation.
The properties will be calculated at pressure/temperature values corresponding to the
pressure/temperature grid points specified in the PVT table prepared for the simulation.
After the saturation points and the physical properties are calculated for all the P/T grid points that
correspond to the PVT table for the HC mixture, linear interpolation between the grid points is applied
during the simulations. For simulation cases where the pressure may cross the critical pressure, it is
important that the HC PVT table contains a grid point that is close to the critical point to obtain accurate
crossing of the saturation line.
For all the cases, a pressure interval less than 10 bar and a temperature interval less than 10 K are
recommended to maintain acceptable accuracy of the linear interpolation.
Saturation line
Below the critical point, PC and TC, (pressure and temperature), the saturation pressure, P sat (T), and
saturation temperature, Tsat (P), at a given grid point, P,T, is determined from the saturation line.
Above the critical point, PC = 221.2 bar and TC = 647.3 K, and to 676 K and 250 bar, a straight line is
used to divide the single-phase or dense-phase region into vapor and liquid. Above 676 K and 250 bar, the
boundary line between region 2 and region 3 is used as the division between vapor and liquid. The
definition of the regions is described in ref. 1.
- 176 -
The OLGA model
Physical properties
Water properties:
For pressures below 225 bar, water property equations for region 1 (see ref. 1) are used for water in the
water region.
In the vapor region, the properties for water are extrapolated from the saturation point: Enthalpy is based
on thermal capacity at saturation temperature corresponding to a given pressure and the density according
to the density derivative to pressure at the saturation pressure corresponding to a given temperature. All
the other properties are from the saturation temperature.
For pressures above 225 bar, water properties are calculated based on equations for the different regions
specified in ref. 1.
Thermal capacity and enthalpy for water is singular near the critical point. To avoid numerical problems in
region 3 the water properties from region 1 instead of those for region 3 when the pressure is below 225
bar (the equations are very similar except when you are closer than <1C and 0.1 bar). The same is done
for steam.
Vapor properties:
For pressures below 225 bar, vapor property equations for region 2 are used for vapor in the vapor region.
In the water region, the vapor properties are extrapolated from the saturation point. Enthalpy is based on
thermal capacity at saturation temperature corresponding to the given vapor pressure and the density
according to the density derivative to pressure at the saturation pressure corresponding to the given
temperature. All the other properties are from the saturation temperature corresponding to the vapor
pressure.
For pressures above 225 bar, vapor properties are calculated based on equations for the different regions.
With this procedure, the vapor and water properties are continuous across the vapor-liquid (V-L) division
line when pressure is above 225 bar.
- 177 -
OLGA User manual
Vapor pressure:
where
where
Mvap is kmoles of vapor per unit volume [m3], MHC is kmoles of HC gas per unit volume [m3], Mgvap is mass of
vapor per unit volume, MgHC is mass of HC gas per unit volume, MwH2O is molweight of vapor (18 kg/kmol)
and MwHC is molweight of HC gas.
Flashing/Condensation
The driving force for flashing of water or condensation of vapor will be the difference between the
saturation temperatures and the fluid temperature. The vapor saturation temperature will be directly related
to the partial pressure of vapor assuming an ideal mixing of HC-gas and vapor. With the presence of HC-
gas in the fluid, a gradual transfer of mass of H2O will take place as the partial pressure of vapor changes.
With no HC-gas in the fluid the partial pressure of vapor will be equal to the total pressure and no bulk
mass transfer takes place until either sub-cooled water reaches saturation temperature or superheated
steam cools down below saturation temperature.
The effect of local boiling on a hot wall surface or condensation on a cold wall surface will not be included
directly in the mass balance of water and vapor but can be accounted for through an enhanced heat
transfer at the pipe wall.
The total energy available for generating vapor or condensing vapor to obtain saturated conditions is Htotv.
where mgHC is the specific mass of HC gas [kg/m3], mlHC is the pecific mass of HC liquid [kg/m3], mlwt is the
specific mass of water [kg/m3], mgv is the specific mass of vapor [kg/m3], cpgh is the specific heat of HC gas
[KJ/kgC], cplh specific heat of HC liquid [KJ/kgC], cpwt is the specific heat of water[KJ/kgC], cpv is the specific
heat of vapor [KJ/kgC].
The total mass transfer to obtain saturated conditions is:
To reduce numerical problems it will be assumed that this mass transfer will take a certain time TPSI. The
mass transfer rate will then be:
with unit [kg/m3s].
The mass transfer per time step must not be larger than the available mass of the diminishing phase
component.
- 178 -
The OLGA model
References
1. Revised Release on the IAPWS Industrial Formulation 1997 for the Thermodynamic Properties of Water
and Steam, The International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam, Lucerne, Switzerland,
August 2007
How to use
To activate the SteamWater-HC model, the input key COMPOSITIONAL under keyword OPTIONS must
be set to STEAMWATER-HC.
TCONDENSATION, TVAPORIZATION and TBOILING in keyword COMPOPTIONS can be used to specify

the time constants for condensation, evaporation and boiling, respectively. They are available as time
series if desired by using the subkey TIME (but not for Compositional Tracking). Large values will slow
down the mass transfer leading to fairly large non-equilibrium. Small values will speed up the mass
transfer thereby reducing the thermal non-equilibrium. Too small values may however cause instabilities
and probably nonphysical results.
For initialconditions, boundaries, sources and wells, the specified water fraction will be either steam or
liquid depending on the specified temperature compared to the water saturation temperature at the
specified pressure when STEAMFRACTION is set to -1 (default). For sources without any pressure given,
the pressure of the source receiving position will be used. STEAMFRACTION can be set between 0 and 1
to give both water and steam.
New output variables for presenting vapor data have been implemented: TSAT, TSV, PSAT, PVAP (see
output variables description). Other data for vapor can be obtained by specifying compositional variables.
After the saturation points and the physical properties are calculated for all the P/T grid points that
correspond to the PVT table for the HC mixture, linear interpolation between the grid points is applied
during the simulations. For simulation cases where the pressure may cross the critical pressure, it is
important that the HC PVT table contains a grid point that is close to the critical point to obtain accurate
crossing of the saturation line.
In OPTIONS the subkey WRITEPVTFILES=[NO]/YES controls if the program will write to file the
water/steam properties that are being used. For YES, tab files (fixed format) will be written for each HC
mixture PVT table, using the same P/T grid. The name of the file(s) will be
<inputfile>_pvt_<HCfluidlabel>.tab. Also, the saturation line will be written to a file with the name
<inputile>_pvt.env. Both can be viewed in the GUI.
For all the cases, a pressure interval less than 10 bar and a temperature interval less than 10 K are
recommended to maintain acceptable accuracy of the linear interpolation.
Tracer tracking
Tracer tracking can be used to simulate a distribution in space and time of mass, age and residence time
of tracers of such small amounts that their influence on the flow is negligible. Examples of such tracers are
KHI inhibitors, corrosion inhibitors and radioactive tracers.
Tracer tracking is part of the Inhibitor tracking module that requires a separate license.
Model description
The Tracer Tracking model in OLGA computes a distribution in space and time of tracer mass, residence
time and age (if the key AGING=ON). If aging is on, ages are divided into age groups (defined by the key
AGEBOUNDARIES), and the average age within each group is computed.
- 179 -
OLGA User manual
The computation of all these variables is based on simple conservation equations, here represented by the
equation for mass:
Here θ represents the sum of regular sources as well as the influence of entrainment and deposition of
droplets. The age- and residence time-equation has an additional source term that, in the case of aging,
accounts for the amount of time the tracer is subject to sub-cooling relative to an equilibrium temperature
(for example, the hydrate formation temperature in the case of KHI tracking).
The following assumptions are used:
 The presence of tracers is assumed to have no effect on the flow, that is, tracers usually exist in
amounts so small that the effect on the flow of the production fluids is negligible.
 The tracers/inhibitors are assumed to be carried in a carrying phase (condensate, water or gas).
Partitioning of tracers/inhibitors to phases other than the carrying phase is not included in the current
version of the model.
How to use
The following keywords and keys must be set to use tracer tracking.
In the Property editor for the keyword OPTIONS choose:
 TRACERTRACKING=ON
Specify one TRACERFEED for each tracer:
 In the OLGA GUI, at the library level right-click and choose Add > TRACERFEED.
In the Property editor for each TRACERFEED set the following keys:
LABEL Choose a label
AGING Must be set to ON to track age distribution of the tracer
CARRIERPHASE Specify the fluid phase on which the tracer is based
AGEBOUNDARIES May be specified when AGING=ON (numbers separated by comma)
LOWLOWBOUND Age below LOWLOWBOUND is not plotted
HIGHLOWBOUND Age below HIGHLOWBOUND is not plotted under certain conditions
Tracers may be fed into pipelines either via a SOURCE or via a MASSFLOW node.
In the Property editor for a SOURCE or a node of type MASSFLOW set the following keys:
SOURCETYPE: select TRACER
TRACERFEED: set the name of the tracer feed in this source/node
TRACERMASSFLOW: specify the tracer mass flow
TRACERAGE: specify the age of the tracer
TRACERRESIDENCETIME: specify the residence time of the tracer
To compute aging of a kinetic hydrate inhibitor, specify the HYDRATECHECK keyword.
Some output variables are available for plotting per tracer feed and per age group.
- 180 -
The OLGA model
Notes
 The current corrosion model and hydrate kinetics model in OLGA do not take into account the
inhibition effect of any tracer.
 Partitioning of tracers is not implemented in the current version.
 The distribution of ages (when applicable) is divided into a given number of groups. Each group has a
user given low and high bound of age. All the inhibitors within each group are assumed to have the
same age (average age).
 It is not possible to specify an initial condition (by the keyword INITIALCONDITIONS) containing
tracers, but the steady state preprocessor will compute an initial steady state tracer distribution.
 It will not be possible to specify the tracer content in negative sources. The amount of tracer going out
will be based on the concentration of the tracer in the section from which the source originates.
 Production flows from wells will not contain any tracer. The injection flows will be treated in the same
manner as negative sources.
 The tracer does not follow the water vapor phase. Any vaporization/condensation does not affect the
tracer mass, but the concentration changes. If a section is totally emptied of the carrying phase, e.g.
water, by vaporization, the remaining tracer is removed.
Tracer tracking can be combined with all other modules, but some limitations exist:
 Tracer tracking can be combined with slug tracking, but the tracer output variables are average values
for a section.
 Tracer tracking can be combined with pig tracking (which is a special version of slug tracking), but
distribution of tracer on each side of the pig might in some cases be inaccurate.
 Tracer functionality is not implemented in the near well module ROCX.
Wax deposition
The Wax deposition module allows for modeling of wax precipitation and deposition of wax on the wall.
Wax precipitation is calculated based on a pre-calculated wax table containing data on each of the wax
forming components. The format of this file is described in Wax table file. The wax file can be generated in
fluid packages such as Multiflash. Wax deposition will be calculated for all flowpaths, but different wax data
can be given for each flowpath.
Use this module when case laboratory experiments indicates the presence of wax, and the wax
appearance temperature is within the temperature envelope encountered during pipeline operation.
Example cases
1. During a system shut-in, when the temperature may fall under the wax appearance temperature and
wax solids starts to precipitate. This may cause both a reduction in effective pipe diameter and a
severe increase in oil viscosity. Gelling of the oil may occur at zero fluid velocity and sufficiently low
temperatures, making it difficult to restart the pipeline.
2. Production cases where low fluid temperatures occurs in the pipeline, where wax both deposits at the
wall and precipitates as particles suspended in the oil. Both diameter reduction due to the wax layer at
the wall and the effect of suspended wax particles on oil viscosity may significantly increase pipeline
pressure drop and thereby reduce the production capacity of a pipeline.
The Wax deposition module requires a separate license.
- 181 -
OLGA User manual
Model description
The model takes into account the thermal-hydraulic effects of the wax in the following way:
1. Mass conservation equations are solved for:

a. Wax dissolved in oil.
b. Wax precipitated and dispersed in oil.
c. Wax deposited at wall.
2. Pipe diameter and roughness for each section is adjusted depending on the thickness of wax
deposited on the wall.
3. Heat balance for precipitation, deposition and melting of wax.
4. Volume change due to precipitation, deposition and melting of wax.
5. Wall heat transfer is adjusted to take the wax layer into account.
6. Oil viscosity is adjusted to take into account any suspended (dispersed) wax.
Wax precipitation and dissolution in bulk
Precipitation and dissolution/melting of dispersed wax are calculated from variations of the wax component
solubility with pressure and temperature. The solubility variations are taken from the wax property tables.
Transport mechanisms from bulk to wall
Wax deposition can occur in two ways, either by diffusion of dissolved wax due to a temperature difference
between fluid and wall, or by transfer of precipitated wax due to shear.
The wax deposition rate due to molecular diffusion may be described by:
Where G [kg/(cm2s)] is the mass transfer rate of wax deposited and D [cm2/s] is the molecular diffusion
coefficient. The RRR and HEATANALOGY models are using the Hayduk & Minhas correlation. The
MATZAIN model is using the Wilke & Chang correlation. mfr [-] is the mass fraction of wax components, oil
[kg/cm3] is the oil density, and L [cm] is the thickness of the boundary flow layer. The boundary layer is
calculated differently for the different models activated through the key MODEL. In the RRR model, the
laminar velocity boundary layer is used. The HEATANALOGY model uses a laminar concentration
boundary layer based on the laminar thermal layer and the ratio of thermal versus mass diffusivity (Lewis
number). The MATZAIN model uses the laminar thermal boundary layer and an adjustment constant to
enhance diffusion.
It is assumed that the precipitation rate at the wall is much quicker than the rate of wax transported to the
wall, so that all wax transported from bulk to wall immediately precipitates.
It is possible to adjust the diffusion coefficient for the wax components by using the key
DIFFCOEFFMULT. The value is directly multiplied with the diffusion coefficients calculated by the code.
The key may be applied for all deposition models.
Wax layer porosity (volume fraction of trapped oil in wax layer), φ [-], is taken into account when
calculating the wax layer thickness.
- 182 -
The OLGA model
A model for shear stripping of wax is used as a wax deposition limiting effect in the MATZAIN and
HEATANALOGY models. The shear stripping terms are taken from the Matzain model [22]. The equation
for the rate of change in wax layer thickness is as follows:
where C2 and C3 are the constants given in [22]. Values: C2 = 0.055 and C3 = 1.4. is the change
rate due to diffusion, and porosity effects. The constant C1 = 15.0 from [22] is included in for the
MATZAIN model only. NSR is a flow regime dependent Reynolds number [22]:
for single phase, stratified flow.
for bubble and slug flow.
for annular flow.
Where ρo is the oil density [kg/m3], vo is the oil velocity [m/s], δ is the wax layer thickness [m], µof is the oil
viscosity kg/(m s), ρm is the average density of the gas-oil mixture and vl is the liquid velocity.
It is possible to adjust the constants related to the shear stripping model by using the keys
SHEARMULTC2 and SHEARMULTC3. These are tuning parameters multiplied directly with C2 and C3,
respectively.
Shear deposition effects may be included by applying the key COEFSHEAR when using the RRR or
HEATANALOGY models. The deposition rate constant K* (=COEFSHEAR) determines the volume rate of
precipitated wax deposited due to shear by the following formula:
where Cwall is the volume fraction of precipitated wax in the oil at the inner wall temperature, γ is the shear
rate at the wall [1/s], A is the surface area available for deposition [m 2] and ρwax is the average density of
the wax [kg/m3].
Transport mechanisms from wall to bulk (dissolution of wax layer)
Dissolution/melting of wax deposited on the wall may be activated separately through the keys
DISSOLUTION, DISSOLPRESS, DISSOLTDIFF and DISSOLRATE for the RRR model. The melting
process is calculated by the following method:
1. The dissolved wax concentration derivative with respect to temperature is found at the cloud point for
the pressure in the section.
- 183 -
OLGA User manual
2. The dissolved wax concentration at the wall is adjusted when the wall surface temperature is above
the dissolution temperature (found by applying DISSOLTDIFF). The adjustment is as follows:
where Cwax is the concentration of wax, TWS is wall surface temperature, is the
concentration derivative with respect to temperature at the cloud point (see point 1), WDT is the
dissolution temperature:
WDT = WAP + DISSOLTDIFF
WAP is from the wax tables, while DISSOLTDIFF may be a constant or a function of the section
pressure (through the given DISSOLPRESS).
3. The adjusted Cwax,wall is used in the normal diffusion equations where
Cwax,bulk- Cwax,wall
is the driving potential of the diffusion process. When
Cwax,wall > Cwax,bulk
, melting will occur.
4. The total dissolution and diffusion rate of wax from wall to bulk, , is limited upwards by
DISSOLRATE (kg/(m2s )):
where is the mass diffusion rate based solely on the wax concentration differences between wall
and bulk (see point 3). The default value of DISSOLRATE is 1.0e+12, which means that there is no
limitation of the dissolution and molar diffusion rate. The reduction to DISSOLRATE is done so that
the mass fraction of the wax components transported by diffusion is kept constant.
Viscosity of wax/oil dispersions
Calculation of the viscosity of the wax/oil dispersion is done using the model by Pedersen and Rønningen
[28]. The apparent viscosity of oil with suspended wax particles is calculated as follows:
where ηliq is the viscosity of the oil not considering solid wax and Φwax the volume fraction of precipitated
wax in the oil-wax suspension. is the shear rate. The parameters D, E and F have the following values
(viscosities in Pa s and shear rates in s-1)
D = 37.82
E = 83.96
F = 8.559*106
It is possible to tune the wax-oil dispersion viscosity model to measurements. The tuning parameters may
be given directly as input to OLGA when using this viscosity model. Keys: VISCMULTD, VISCMULTE,
VISCMULTF. These are multiplied with the D, E and F parameters, respectively.
- 184 -
The OLGA model
The shear rate used in the equation is limited to be 10 s-1 or larger to avoid division by zero. The resulting
viscosity, η, is limited to be ηliq or larger.
Wax layer properties
You can also give information about the porosity (oil volume fraction) of the wax layer, the roughness due
to deposited wax (keys: WAXROUGHNESS and MAXROUGHNESS) and the thermal conductivity of pure
wax. The conductivity may be set manually in the input file by using CONDUCTOPT = MANUAL and set
CONDUCTIVITY, or it may be taken from the wax tables (CONDUCTOPT = TABLE).
The instantaneous porosity of wax added to the wax layer may be set as a constant (INSTPOROSITYOPT
= MANUAL, WAXPOROSITY between 0.0 and 1.0), or be calculated by the code (INSTPOROSITYOPT =
AUTOMATIC, minimum and maximum limit given by MINPOROSITY and MAXPOROSITY). The
instantaneous porosity equation used by the code is as follows [22]:
where Coil is the porosity (volume fraction of oil in the wax film), ρo is the oil density [kg/m3], vl is the liquid
velocity [m/s], dw is the inner pipe diameter including the wax layer [m] and uo,f is the oil viscosity kg/(m s).
The effect of ageing may also be included by using the keys AGEINGOPT=AGEING, AGEINGTIME,
INITPOROSITY and HARDPOROSITY. This activates a linear ageing model where the entries for
AGEINGTIME, INITPOROSITY and HARDPOROSITY are used to determine the derivative of porosity
with time. The porosity is averaged over the new layer and the old, aged layer at each time step.
The porosity of the wax layer is taken into account when calculating the thermal conductivity of the wax
layer. The conductivity is found by using the following equation [34]
Where kdep is the overall thermal conductivity of the wax film, kwax is the conductivity of pure wax
(=CONDUCTIVITY in input), koil is the conductivity of oil and is the weight fraction of solid wax in the
wax film..
How to use
Input
To use the Wax deposition module, follow the steps below;
Step 1
Generate a wax file and an OLGA fluid table in a standalone fluid package.
When generating the OLGA fluid table, multiphase flashing (gas, oil, wax) should be used. The wax phase
will, however, normally not have a significant effect on the properties of the oil phase, apart from the
viscosity of the oil/wax dispersion, which is taken into account in the model.
- 185 -
OLGA User manual
Step 2
Prepare the OLGA input using the following keywords;
 OPTIONS to set WAXDEPOSITION = ON

 OPTIONS TEMPERATURE = WALL
 FILES WAXFILE to specify the file containing the wax data
WAXDEPOSITION to specify wax specific data for each flowpath. Wax deposition may be calculated by
using one of the three following models:
 RRR model [32]

 HEATANALOGY model [15]
 MATZAIN model, as described by Matzain et al., [22]
The required model is chosen by using the key MODEL in keyword WAXDEPOSITION.
 BOUNDARY, WELL and/or SOURCE to specify WAXFRACTION. A scaling factor for determining the
amount of wax forming components relative to a HC mixture. The value must be in the range [0,1]. If
all inflow boundaries have WAXFRACTION = 1 (default value), the amount of wax in the inflow will be
according to equilibrium (specified in the wax data file).
 TREND to print wax variables for given positions to a trend plot file
 OUTPUT to print wax variables for a branch at given times to an output file
 PROFILE to print wax variables for a branch at given times to a profile file
Output
The keywords TRENDDATA, PROFILEDATA and PLOT in the input file specifies the output from the
simulation.
The trend file (*.tpl), profile file (*.ppl) and plot file (*.plt) are used for plotting several variables related to
wax deposition:
The different was deposition variables are described in Wax deposition Output Variables on page 603.
The trend file and profile file are text files that can be viewed in the OLGA GUI. The plot file is a binary file
that is viewed in a separate plotting tool called the OLGA Viewer. Due to the binary format this file can use
a shorter plotting interval and is useful for detailed analysis.
Note: The wax deposition model cannot be used together with the slug tracking, Compositional Tracking
or the Inhibitor Tracking models. The steady state pre-processor will not consider the wax phase.
User defined dispersions and plug-in framework

This framework is designed as a flexible flow assurance framework for tracking user defined dispersions
and utilizing external physical models provided by the user through a DLL.
The plug-in framework for user defined phases is designed for simulation of, for example, sand transport,
hydrate formation, wax deposition or other phenomena involving solid particle type dispersions, and where
you want to use in-house physical models coupled to OLGA.
- 186 -
The OLGA model
You can through the input define new User Defined dispersed phases (“UD phases”) inside each layer and
phase in the OLGA model as depicted above.
You can then give physical models in a user made DLL for:
1. mass transfer between phases (for example, a hydrate formation model)

2. mass transfer between layers (for example, sand deposition to a bed or wax deposition to a wall layer)
3. modification of apparent viscosity due to the presence of the dispersion
4. PVT properties of the new phase and optionally modification of the gas/oil/water properties
5. modifications of the heat transfer coefficient between the fluid and the pipe wall
6. compositional calculations
A sample DLL with some simple physical models is provided with the installation. The sample cases utilize
the models in this DLL.
Refer to the "Model, Numerics and Programmer’s Guide for the OLGA Plug-In" for a detailed description of
the use of this system.
Model description
User Defined phases (UD phases) are assumed to be either transported in one of the built-in carrying flow
layers (gas, oil and water) or being part of the stationary bed or wall layers. The formation of the UD
phases, transport between layers, models for properties of the UD phases etc. are to be given in the user
provided plug-in DLL.
The Model, Numerics and Programmer’s Guide for the OLGA Plug-In describes the methods applied in the
sample plug-in DLL provided with the installation.
How to use
Refer to the 'Model, Numerics and Programmer’s Guide for the OLGA Plug-In' for a detailed description of
how to program a DLL with physical models to be used by OLGA. Note: This document is only available
on request.
User defined dispersed phases are defined through the input groups UDPHASE and UDDISPERSION (in
the Library section), UDOPTIONS (CaseDefinition section) and UDGROUP (UDData section).
- 187 -
OLGA User manual
UDPHASE defines the dispersions to be tracked, referring to a phase recognized by the models in the DLL
UDDISPERSION defined a set of UDPHASEs, that is, for defining a “dispersion in dispersion”, as e.g. a
combination of hydrates and water
UDOPTIONS is used for overall simulation parameters (To use UDOPTIONS, OPTIONS UDPLUGIN must
be set to YES).
UDGROUP is used to define combinations of UD phases. These are then referred to by SOURCE and
NODE (for boundary conditions) or INITIALCONDITIONS (for specifying the amount of UD phases at the
start of the simulation).
Plug-in DLL
Through UDOPTIONS PLUGINDLL the user may refer to a DLL to be used by the program for handling of
dispersions. The available interfaces and functionality is presented in the Plug-in Guide.
PVT Properties
PVT properties for a UD phase may be given as input to a user defined plug-in. The file to be used is
defined under FILES UDFILE. It may be referenced by the FLOWPATH BRANCH and NODE.
Compositional UD option
The composition of a dispersed UD phase may be tracked. The option is activated through the
UDOPTIONS COMPOSITIONAL key. A separate file defining the feeds and their properties must be given
under FILES UDFEEDFILE. This file is to be used by the user defined plug-in. The feeds may then be
referenced by nodes, sources and for giving initial conditions. NOTE: This option cannot be run
simultaneously with the OLGA Compositional tracking module.
Inflow
The inflow of UD phases is defined for each SOURCE, by reference either to a UDGROUP or a UDFEED.
The latter refers to a UD phase composition that must be defined in a plug-in.
Pressure boundary
The mass fractions of UD phases at a pressure boundary are defined for each relevant NODE by
reference either to a UDGROUP or a UDFEED. The latter refers to a UD phase composition that must be
defined in a plug-in.
Initial conditions
The initial fraction of each UDGROUP in the pipeline is given by the reference to UDFEED (for
composition tracking) or UDGROUP under INITIALCONDITIONS. The values for each UDFRACTION in
the UDGROUP are used as follows:
1. If INMASSFRACTION and OUTMASSFRACTION are specified, these are used with linear
interpolation.
2. Otherwise the value in MASSFRACTION corresponding to the start time is used.
- 188 -
The OLGA model
Plotting of output
Specific output variables are available for plotting of dispersed phases. The variables are grouped under
“ParticleField” in the output variable list and cover this information for each dispersed phase:
P-ACCG : Accumulated mass flow [kg/s]
P-ACCQ : Accumulated volume flow [kg/s]
P-G: mass flow rate [kg/s]
P-HOL: volume fraction [-]
P-M: specific mass [kg/m3]
P-Q: volumetric flow rate [m3/s]
P-U: velocity [m/s]
P-US: superficial velocity [m/s]
P-H: Enthalpy of UD Phase [J/kg]
P-CP: Specific heat of UD Phase [J/kg/K]
P-RO: Density of UD Phase [kg/m3]
P-DRDP: Pressure differential of UD Phase [kg/m-N]
These variables are available for regular trend and profile plots and text output.
To enable these plot variables, one or all of PHASE, DISPERSION, and FLOWLAYER must be given.
PHASE = <UD-PHASE>
DISPERSION = <UD-DISPERSION>
FLOWLAYER = ALL, GAS, OIL, WATER, BED, WALL
At least one of these options must be given if a UD phase variable shall be plotted.
All three options can be combined.
The pre-defined phases (gas, oil, and water) are not available for plotting of UD phase variables, but will
be added to FLOWLAYER when plotting without any specified PHASE or DISPERSION.
Furthermore, cross sectional plots of particle concentration and dispersion velocity are available through
the CROSSDATA definition under OUTPUT for each FLOWPATH:
Concentration of dispersion (particles) from bottom to top of line along vertical diameter: P-CON
Volume velocity profile from bottom to top of line along vertical diameter: U-PROFILE
These data files have extension “csp” and can be plotted in the GUI. The concentration profile will be
plotted for each UD phase and the plot variables will automatically be labeled accordingly in the csp file.
The plot interval is the same as for the TREND plots.
Notes
Some default sample physical models are included in the plug-in DLL provided with the installation. These
are available for test purposes only to illustrate the use of the framework for User Defined phases (UD
phases).
- 189 -
OLGA User manual
Compatibility
The plug-in framework with tracking of User Defined phases is compatible with the following models or
modules:
Source, Valve, Loss, HeatExchanger, CheckValve, Slug Tracking
The system cannot be used in connection with the following models or modules:
Separator, Phase split node, Leak, Pump, Well, NearWellSource, Compressor, FLUID keyword,
COMPOSITIONAL=ON/MEG/… , OPTIONS DRILLING=ON, OPTIONS WAXDEPOSITION=ON,
OPTIONS TRACERTRACKING=ON
Some of these limitations may be lifted in future versions.
For further limitations, see the Model, Numerics and Programmer’s Guide for the OLGA Plug-In.
Examples
Given a case with the following UD phase definitions:
UDPHASE LABEL = "Hydrate", …
UDDISPERSION LABEL = "HydrateWater", …
Ex 1 – Plot for whole phase/dispersion
To plot for the total phase Hydrate from all layers (including bed and wall):
TRENDDATA PHASE=”Hydrate”, VARIABLE=(P_M)
To plot for the total dispersion HydrateWater from all layers (including bed and wall):
TRENDDATA DISPERSION=”HydrateWater”, VARIABLE=(P-M)
Ex 2 – Plot for phase/dispersion in layer
To plot for the phase Hydrate in the gas layer:
TRENDDATA PHASE=”Hydrate”, FLOWLAYER=GAS, VARIABLE=(P-M)
To plot for the phase Hydrate in the gas layer and in the bed layer (2 plots):
TRENDDATA DISPERSION=”HydrateWater”, FLOWLAYER=(GAS, BED), VARIABLE=(P-M)
To plot for all phases in all layers (5 plots):
TRENDDATA PHASE=”Hydrate”, FLOWLAYER=ALL, VARIABLE=(P-M)
Ex 3 – Plot for layers
To plot for the gas layer:
TRENDDATA FLOWLAYER=GAS, VARIABLE=(P-M)
To plot for all layers (5 plots):
TRENDDATA FLOWLAYER=ALL, VARIABLE=(P-M)
- 190 -
The OLGA model
Equipment and devices
Valve
Introduction
The valve models the pressure drop and critical flow constraints for flow through chokes, orifices and
valves. The primary use of the valve model is to model pressure drop and critical flow constraints in
orifices, chokes and different types of valves. For high fluid velocities in the pipeline, a fully open valve can
be used to limit the flow to critical flow by adding a choke with choke diameter equal to the pipeline
diameter. Position the valve at the section boundary of the pipe where the flow rate must be limited. The
valve model is applicable for both sub-critical and critical flow. In sub-critical flow, both upstream conditions
and downstream pressure have an impact on the flow.
The valve model is a generalized model. By combining the different valve model keys, a large range of
choke valves as well as orifices can be modeled. The type of valves that can be simulated range from:
 Multi-turn valves such as gate valves, globe valves and pinch valves.
 Quarter-turn valves, such as ball valves, butterfly valves and plug valves. Gate and isolation valves
are often operated with a fixed opening or fully open or fully closed. Control valves are dynamically
actuated to control pressure, flow, liquid level or other measurable process variables.
 Standing valves in well applications, liquid level control valves on separator liquid drains.
Valve models
There are two main valve models in OLGA: Choke model on page 194 and the Cuttings equation on
page 200. These models form the basis for the four valve model options: GASSIZING, STANDINGVALVE,
VENTURI and HYDROVALVE.
How to use on page 204 - Uses the choke model to describe the pressure drop flow rate relationship over
the choke. It includes test and limitation of mass flow rate to critical flow in the throat. In addition it is
possible to use valve sizing coefficients as input to the choke model.
Standing valve - Combines the choke model pressure drop calculation with check valve functionality.
The primary use of standing valve is in well applications in particular well clean-up simulations. The
Standing valve can also be used to model valves on liquid drains in separators where the valves are used
to hold back liquids in the separators and the throat is completely filled with liquids such that it prevents
gas to penetrate through the throat.
Venturi valve on page 205 - A choke model with the assumption of a gradual flowing area contraction
followed by a gradual flowing area expansion. This assumption is different compared to the other valve
models.
Gas sizing valve on page 207 - Uses the valve sizing equation for sub-critical and critical flow.
The valve models in OLGA enable the following valve geometries.
- 191 -
OLGA User manual
- 192 -
The OLGA model
Figure 60 Valve geometries are enabled through different options and keywords in OLGA:
 Orifice (a): vena contracta is downstream of/outside throat. Available for the Standing valve and Hydro
valve model.
 Bean (b): vena contracta is inside the throat. A built in pressure recovery from vena contracta to exit of
throat is included in the model.This recovery comes in addition to recovery from throat exit to
downstream. Available for the Standing valve and Hydro valve model.
 Venturi (c): Bernoulli equation is used from throat to downstream conditions. Available in the Venturi
model.
How to use
Position the valve at one of the section boundaries. It is only allowed to have one valve at each section
boundary. The valve cannot be placed at the first section boundary in a flowpath if it is next to a closed
node
Select model option, key MODEL
Choose between the available valve models:
 HYDROVALVE
 STANDINGVALVE
 VENTURI
 GASSIZING
Control relative valve opening
To control the valve flow in the choke, or the pressure drop over it, connect a controller to the input signal
terminal VALVESIG. When connected, VALVESIG determines the relative valve opening. If no controller is
connected to the VALVESIG terminal the key OPENING is used to specify the relative valve opening. The
given OPENING can be constant, or a function of time. Use key TIME in combination with key OPENING
to specify a time varying opening.
- 193 -
OLGA User manual
Specify valve stem travel time
It is possible to limit the rate of change in the valve position by specifying the key STROKETIME. The
stroke time for valve is defined as the time the valve uses for 100% stem travel. Stem travel of 100%
means going from fully open to fully closed or equivalent fully closed to fully open. To specify a different
opening time than closing time specify the keys OPENINGTIME and CLOSINGTIME.
How to tune the valve coefficients
It is possible to tune the choke and valve coefficients. The model provides the input signal terminal
CVTUNINGSIG. By connecting a controller to the signal terminal CVTUNINGSIG the current valve
coefficient CD, or the valve Cv/Cg. will be scaled with the output of the controller.
Theory
Choke model
Introduction
The OLGA choke model forms the basis of the following OLGA valve models:
 How to use on page 204 - The standard choke model. In addition valve sizing coefficents can be
combined with the choke model.
 Model description on page 208 - The choke model with check functionality.
 Venturi valve on page 205 - The choke model with gradual change in geometry.
Model description
The choke model in OLGA calculates the pressure drop and the critical flow rate over the choke. The
choke model uses mixture balance equations for mass, momentum and energy. Compression of gas into
the narrow throat is accounted for in the model. A circular-symmetric flow geometry and steady-state over
the choke is assumed. See Selmer-Olsen et al. for the full model description [33]. The flow through the
choke is assumed frictionless and adiabatic. The gravity terms are neglected.
There are several options in the choke model with regards to:
 Valve geometry
 Thermal and phase equilibrium
 Recovery
 Slip
Valve geometry
The geometry of the choke internals varies from the different types of chokes. It can be sudden changes in
the flowing area from upstream position to throat and a new sudden change in flowing area to downstream
position; examples are orifices and gate valves. These valves should use orifice type valve geometries.
The geometry of the choke mainly affect the choke discharge coefficient and pressure recovery.
For STANDINGVALVE and HYDROVALVE the following two circular-symmetric flow geometries are
enabled:
1. Orifice type has no spatial extension and vena contracta behind the confined area of the valve.
2. Bean type which has a spatial extension and vena contracta inside the confined area of the valve. A
built-in pressure recovery from vena contracta to exit of throat is included in the model. This recovery
comes in addition to recovery from throat exit to downstream.
- 194 -
The OLGA model
Figure 61 Orifice and bean valve geometry options
For the venturi geometry see Venturi valve on page 205.
Pressure drop calculations
The choke model describes the pressure flow relations appearing in the choke for both subcritical and
critical flow. In subcritical flow, pressure drop is a function of flow rate and choke opening. The flow rate
through a critical flow is governed by the upstream conditions and the choke opening (choke flow area).
The choke flow rate is limited to critical flow. Figure 61 shows an conceptual illustration of a choke where
fluid is flowing from position 1 through the throat t to position 2. Figure 63 shows the positioning of the
choke at section boundary J. Upstream section J-1 is equivalent to position 1 in Figure 62 and downstream
section J is equivalent to position 2 in Figure 62.
Figure 62 An illustration of a choke. Fluid is flowing from position 1 to position 2.
- 195 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 63 The choke is modeled at section boundary J.
The pressure drop from inlet to throat
By assuming frictionless flow through the choke and ignoring the gravity term the Bernoulli equation for the
fluid mixture flow from inlet (1) to throat (t) can be written as:
(33)
where
um: mixture velocity (m/s)
ρm: momentum density (kg/m3)
P: pressure (Pa)
The momentum density is a function of the flowing gas mass fraction and the gas liquid slip ratio:
(34)
where k is the slip ratio ρg is the gas density and ρl is the liquid density. The flowing gas mass fraction, x, is
defined as:
, (35)
where M is the overall mass flow through the choke and Mg is the gas flow through the choke.
The slip ratio is given by:
, (36)
where ug is the gas velocity and ul is the liquid velocity.
The steady-state continuity equation relates total mass flow rate to mixture volume flux and the flowing
area:
(37)
where A is the cross sectional area.
Recovery after throat
Combining the Bernoulli equation with the continuity equation yields the relation between pressure drop
from inlet to throat, and the flow rate and choke area. To account for pressure recovery, conversion of
kinetic energy to potential energy as the fluid expands from throat condition to downstream, the
momentum equation is used:
(38)
- 196 -
The OLGA model
The overall pressure drop over the choke is found by combining equations (33) through (38).
Note: This step is handled differently for the VENTURI model, Venturi valve on page 205.
Critical flow
The critical flow through the choke is found at the maximum of equation (33). Differentiating equation (33)
with respect to pressure and combining with equation (37) yields the following relation for the critical flow,
Mc,
The throat area, At, is corrected with the choke discharge coefficient, Cd, to find the minimum flow area.
Phase and thermal equilibrium
Three main options are available when calculating the phase fractions in the choke
1. FROZEN: Means no phase mass transfer from upstream to throat condition. By default the gas is
expanded from upstream condition to throat condition assuming constant entropy and the liquid
expansion is assumed isothermal (constant temperature only dependent on pressure), but thermal
equilibrium can be enabled. The phase properties (density, heat capacity and so on) are calculated
using the simplified fluid properties. Finally no heat transfer between the gas and the liquid is
assumed.
2. HENRYFAUSKE: Similar to FROZEN, but allows a phase change from upstream to throat conditions.
The gas fraction in throat is corrected for mass transfer in the throat t to become
where is the upstream gas fraction, and
, where
is the change in equilibrium gas fraction with pressure and N is defined as:
, and
The updates above are consistent with equation (24) and (30) in the paper [3] by Henry and Fauske.
3. EQUILIBRIUM: Full mass and thermal equilibrium is assumed in the throat. The phase properties are
calculated using the same PVT properties as the rest of the OLGA model. The flow is homogeneous,
no slip is allowed. The flow in the choke must follow an isentropic path. That is constant entropy is
assumed moving from upstream to throat condition.
Note: When using the full equilibrium model or the Henry-Fauske equilibrium model make sure that
entropy is given in the fluid file (with the word ENTROPY in the heading of the fluid file). It is required for
the full equilibrium model. For the Henry-Fauske model, the entropy (if missing in the fluid file) will be
calculated from the enthalpy and density data in the fluid tables, this might slow down the simulation.
See Calculation of entropy changes for Henry-Fauske model for more details.
- 197 -
OLGA User manual
Calculation of entropy changes for Henry-Fauske model
The entropy changes (if entropy data is missing in the fluid file) will be calculated from enthalpy, mass
fraction and density by integrating the following equation from the upstream conditions (position 1) to the
throat conditions (position 2):
The integration is performed in two steps, from P1 to P2 at T1 and from T1 to T2 at P2.
Simplified fluid property calculations
The liquid properties are calculated in position 1 and treated as constant, while the gas is
compressed/expanded isentropically. The gas density is calculated as:
where γ is the isentropic gas expansion coefficient,
If thermal phase equilibrium is enabled the isentropic expansion coefficient is calculated based on all
phases (i ∈ {gas, oil, water}):
Throat temperature
The output variable (TVALVE) is defined as the gas temperature in throat assuming an isentropic process
from upstream conditions to throat conditions:
Gas-liquid slip calculations
By default there is no slip between the gas and the liquid flowing through the choke. If slip is activated, it is
calculated from an modified Chisholm slip equation:
How to use
Basic configuration and control of the choke opening is described in Valve on page 191.
The choke area and discharge coefficient are required input to the choke model. The choke area is
determined by the choke diameter which has to be specified in the DIAMETER key. The discharge
coefficient is default set to 0.84 this value can be changed in CD key.
Note: The VENTURI model has a special geometry which requires other model parameters, see Venturi
valve on page 205 for more information.
- 198 -
The OLGA model
Note: With the HYDROVALVE model it is possible to use a table containing valve sizing coefficients vs
opening to determine the choke area instead of using the DIAMETER and CD keys. See How to use on
page 204 for more information.
The Valve model can be used to model nozzles. By using the NNOZZLES key one can specify the number
of nozzles for a given diameter. It is possible to have several nozzles with different diameters by giving a
list in the DIAMETER key and in the NNOZZLES key. For example, setting DIAMETER = (0.1, 0.2) m and
NNOZZLES = (2, 3) will define two nozzles with a diameter of 0.1 m and three of 0.2 m. The combined
area of the nozzles is used in the choke model to determine the pressure-flow relations and critical flow
limit.
Select valve geometry, key VALVEGEOMETRY:
 ORIFICE - Default, no spatial extension of the valve assumed. For example orifices and gate valves.
 BEAN - Spatial extension with vena contracta inside the confined area of the valve.
See Valve geometry for details.
Note: VALVEGEOMETRY cannot be set if VENTURI is chosen as model, see Venturi valve on page
205 for more information.
Select equilibrium model, key EQUILIBRIUMMODEL:
 FROZEN: Default. Should be used when there is single phase flow through the valve. For valves with
no practical pressure drop, valves that are operated fully open or closed such as isolation valves and
when the valve is used for routing the flow.
 EQUILIBIRUM: Full mass and thermal gas/liquid l equilibrium. For models using two and three phase
fluids and for valves with considerable pressure drop causing the fluid to flash from upstream to throat
or downstream condition. It is not possible to combine with the slip model because it is a homogenous
equilibrium model. Might slow down the simulation.
 HENRYFAUSKE: Partial equilibrium. For models using two and three phase fluids and for valves with
considerable pressure drop causing the fluid to flash from upstream to throat or downstream condition.
Enable thermal phase equilibrium between gas and liquid in throat, key THERMALPHASEEQ.
For the FROZEN and HENRYFAUSKE equilibrium model it is possible to turn on thermal equilibrium:
 NO: Default. Gas is expanded isentropic to throat while liquid is isothermal. For isolation and routing
valves, single phase valves and control valves with moderate pressure drop.
 YES: Thermal equilibrium between gas and liquid. For chokes and valves with large potential pressure
drop such as pressure relief and depressurization valves.
See Phase and thermal equilibrium for model details.
Select slip model, key SLIPMODEL:
 NOSLIP: Default. For valves with large pressure drop, narrow throat opening/throat area compared to
pipe area no slip can be assumed. This includes pressure letdown and depressurization valves.
Control valves at separator and liquid outlets no slip can be assumed.
 CHISHOLM: For isolation valves, fully open/fully closed valves it is generally wise to use Chisholm slip
model. That is, whenever it is reasonable to assume gas and liquid has different velocities.
See Gas-liquid slip calculations for model details.
- 199 -
OLGA User manual
Enable recovery, key RECOVERY:
 OFF: Default. For valves and nozzles with geometries that include abrupt changes in flowing area or
diameter.
 ON: Generally recovery is advisable if there is a gradual change in geometry from throat to
downstream the valve. Typical examples are the geometry of venturi nozzles and valves that
resembles these geometries.
Note: RECOVERY cannot be turned off if VENTURI is chosen as model, see Venturi valve on page 205
for more information.
Valve sizing equation
Introduction
In the valve model the pressure drop and critical flow are calculated according to a valve sizing equation.
The valve model is used directly by the GASSIZING model and can be combined with the choke model by
using the HYDROVALVE with table input.
Model description
The valve model uses a table (keyword TABLE) that contains the valve sizing coefficients, Cv or Cg, versus
valve opening.
It is possible to give a table representing the valve sizing coefficients either for gas flow or for liquid flow. It
is not possible to give a table for two/three-phase flow. The sizing coefficients are tabulated as functions of
the relative valve opening. The liquid valve sizing coefficient can also be given as a function of both
relative valve opening and pressure drop over the valve.
Note: The input data for the valve sizing coefficients must be consistent with the units specified together
with the valve sizing equations below.
The orifice equation describes the relation between pressure drop over the orifice, pipe flow area, orifice
area, total mass flux and the velocities in the fields:
where:
Wtot Total mass flux
αi Volumetric fraction of mass field i
Ui Velocity of mass field i
A Pipeline area
Ao Orifice area
Cd Orifice discharge coefficient
ΔPo Orifice pressure drop
- 200 -
The OLGA model
for single phase fluids the orifice equation reduces to:
(39)
If defining nozzles, the orifice area Ao is calculated as the sum of the areas of the nozzles. From the orifice
equation relations between pressure drop, valve sizing coefficient and the volumetric flow rate can be
derived.
Liquid valve sizing equation
The liquid sizing equation describes the relationship between pressure drop, valve sizing coefficient and
the volumetric flow rate (note the inherent units):
where:
Q Flow rate (gal/min.)
1/2
Cv Valve sizing coefficient (gal/min / psi )
G Specific gravity (-). Water = 1.
3
ρref Water density at 39°F/4°C and 1 atmosphere (998.84 kg/m )
ΔP Pressure drop (psi)
Gas valve sizing equation
The gas sizing equation describes the relationship between pressure drop, gas sizing coefficient Cg and
mass flow rate (note the inherent units):
where:
Qm Mass flow rate (lb/hr.)
ρg Gas density (lb/ft3)
P1 Upstream pressure (psi)
Cg Gas sizing coefficient (lb/hr / (psi × lb/ft3)1/2)
Cf Coefficient ratio, Cg/Cv
- 201 -
OLGA User manual
Critical flow
The valve model checks against critical flow conditions and limits the flow to critical as an upper limit. In
critical flow only upstream conditions has an impact on the flow. That is the flow through the valve; choke
or orifice is independent of downstream condition (pressure) when critical flow occurs. When critical flow
occur the fluid velocity is identical to the speed of sound for the fluid in the flowing conditions (upstream
pressure and temperature). The speed of sound for a fluid is dependent on the amount of gas, oil and
water. The speed of sound for the pure single phases (gas and liquid) is much higher than the speed of
sound for a mixture of gas and liquid. In fact, the speed of sound drops steeply when adding small
amounts of gas to a fluid of single phase liquid. Similarly the speed of sound for the fluid drops a lot when
adding small amounts of liquid to a single phase gas fluid. Figure 64 below attempts to illustrate how the
speed of sound for a mixture of gas and liquid depends on the gas/liquid fraction. The effect of gas liquid
ratio on the sonic velocity is incorporated in the model.
Figure 64 Sonic velocity as a function of void fraction
Introduction
The Hydro valve model option allows the use of the standard choke model described in Choke model on
page 194. It is also possible to combine valve sizing coefficients with the choke model this is described
here.
Model description
In the valve model the pressure drop and critical flow are calculated according to a valve sizing equation.
In OLGA two types of valve sizing equations are available a liquid sizing equation and a gas sizing
equation. The liquid sizing equation describes the relationship between pressure drop, valve sizing
coefficient and the volumetric flow rate (note the inherent units):
(40)
- 202 -
The OLGA model
where:
Q Flow rate (gal/min.)
1/2
Cv Valve sizing coefficient (gal/min / psi )
G Specific gravity (-). Water = 1.
3
ρref Water density at 39°F/4°C and 1 atmosphere (998.84 kg/m )
The gas sizing equation describes the relationship between pressure drop, gas sizing coefficient Cg and
mass flow rate (note the inherent units):
(41)
where:
The sizing coefficients ( Cg/Cv) are tabulated as functions of the relative valve opening.
Conversion between valve sizing coefficient and orifice area
As an example the method for converting liquid valve sizing coefficients is described here. By assuming
the liquid to be incompressible the orifice equation (equation (39) in Valve sizing equation on page 200),
can be written as:
(42)
where ρ is fluid density and Q is volumetric flow rate. Rearranging and using:
- 203 -
OLGA User manual
the volume flow can be expressed as:
. (43)
By comparing with the valve liquid sizing equation (40) and assuming the same units are used in the orifice
equation and the sizing equation the following relations between Cv and Ao can be obtained:
Converting to SI units:
and inserting the reference water density yields the following equation:
Note: OLGA uses the discharge coefficient to modify the flow area in equation (42). A common
definition in the industry is to use the discharge coefficient to modify the flow, that is, the is
multiplied outside the square brackets.
To convert between the discharge coefficient, Cd, used to modify the flow:
to the definition used in OLGA ,Cd,OLGA, the following conversion is needed:
The multiphase valve flow rate is calculated using the choke model in OLGA, see Choke model on page
194. The choke flow area, Ao, is used in the choke model. Critical flow is determined by the choke model.
For conversion of gas valve sizing coefficients the gas sizing equation (41) is used in the same manner as
the liquid valve sizing equation (40). The gas sizing equation is used to find the choke (orifice) flow area,
Ao, from the tabulated gas valve sizing coefficient, Cg, and by combining equations (42) and (41). The
upstream gas density is used in the calculation.
How to use
The available options and required input to the HYDROVALVE are the same as in the CHOKE model, with
the exception that valve sizing coefficients are used instead of specifying diameter and discharge
coefficeient. Because data sheets for Cv and Cg most often includes the recovery effect it is not possible to
activate recovery if valve sizing coefficients are used in the HYDROVALVE model.
1. Select the HYDROVALVE option in the MODEL key.

2. Use the TABLE key to select a TABLE keyword containing valve characteristics,valve sizing
coefficients (Cv or Cg) tabulated versus valve opening.
- 204 -
The OLGA model
Choose valve sizing equation, key PHASE
 LIQUID - The Liquid sizing equation. For liquid flow, near incompressible gas flow and two/three-
phase flow. The liquid valve sizing coefficient can also be given as a function of both relative valve
opening and pressure drop over the valve.
 GAS - The Gas sizing equation. For compressible gas flow. The ratio of gas sizing coefficient and
valve coefficient has to be set in the key CF.
Venturi valve
The Venturi model assumes a gradual flowing area contraction followed by a gradual flowing area
expansion. The gradual change in the valve geometry is manufactured to minimize the losses/ maximize
the recovery.
Model description
The Venturi valve uses the OLGA choke model for pressure drop flow calculation. The OLGA choke model
includes test against critical flow. The differences between the Venturi model and the choke model are:
1. The Venturi model uses the Bernoulli equation to calculate the recovery from throat to outlet condition,
where the choke model uses the momentum equation.
2. The Venturi model includes loss terms in the Bernoulli equation both for the pressure drop calculation
from inlet to throat and the recovery from throat to outlet, where the choke model uses the discharge
coefficient to account for losses.
Figure 65 Schematics showing Venturi valve in OLGA.
The model uses the Bernoulli equation with a loss term for the area contraction from inlet (1) to throat (2),
see Figure 65.
(44)
where
um mixture velocity (m/s)
ρm momentum density (kg/m3)
P pressure (Pa)
kl,i loss coefficient for the inlet/entry, key KLOSSENTRY
- 205 -
OLGA User manual
Equation (44) above replaces equation (1) in the choke model. The main difference between the Venturi
valve and the Hydro valve when integrating from 1 to 2 is the loss term and the loss coefficient kl,i.
When considering the recovery from throat (2) to downstream (3) the choke model uses the momentum
balance. However in the Venturi valve model, the Bernoulli equation with a loss term for the area
expansion is used also from throat (2) to outlet (3)
(45)
where
um mixture velocity (m/s)
ρm momentum density (kg/m3)
P pressure (Pa)
kl,o is the loss coefficient for the outlet/exit, key KLOSSEXIT
In the Hydro valve model, losses (equivalent to kl,i and kl,o) is lumped together and accounted for in a
multiplicative manner in terms of the discharge coefficient Cd. The relation between the loss coefficient kl,i
and the discharge coefficient Cd is
(46)
The rest of the equations are equal to the choke model, see Hydro valve.
Figure 66 Valve characteristic of Hydro valve (black curve) and Venturi (red curve) valve models
Figure 66 shows the valve characteristics of valve models Hydro valve and Venturi. The valves are sized
and parameterized to be comparable. The y-axis shows the total mass flow rate through the valve and the
x-axis shows the pressure downstream of the valve, with increasing downstream pressure along the axis.
The upstream pressure is kept constant at 30 bar.
- 206 -
The OLGA model
Note: The Hydro valve goes out of critical flow slightly before 20 bar downstream pressure. The Venturi
valve goes out of critical flow around 24-24.7 bar downstream pressure. The discharge coefficient Cd in
the Hydro valve is set according to equation (46) above:
so that the critical flow rate for Hydro valve equals the critical flow rate of the Venturi valve. The Venturi
valve is more energy efficient with smaller losses. The Bernoulli equation from throat to downstream
condition, equation (45), conserves the energy differently than the momentum equation. Thus, the Hydro
valve goes out of critical flow rate at a lower downstream pressure than the Venturi valve.
How to use
To use the Venturi valve model, you must:
1. Select the VENTURI option in the MODEL key.

2. Specify inlet and throat diameter with the keys INLETDIAMETER and THROATDIAMETER.
3. Specify the loss coefficients with the keys KLOSSENTRY and KLOSSEXIT (the default value is 0.01).
Gas sizing valve
Uses the gas sizing equation for sub-critical and critical flow. The gas sizing valve should be used when
the flow through the valve is compressible and data for the gas sizing coefficient Cg is available.
Model description
The gas sizing equation is used to calculate the relation between flow rate and pressure drop for both sub-
critical and critical flow:
where:
The upstream gas density is used in the calculation.
Critical flow rate is obtained by setting the sine-term to 1.
- 207 -
OLGA User manual
How to use
To use the gas sizing valve model you must:
1. Select the GASSIZING option in the MODEL key

2. Specify Cg vs. relative valve opening in a table
3. Specify the Cf, ratio between gas and liquid sizing coefficient
Check valve
A check valve allows flow in only one direction and prevents the total flow from flowing in the opposite
direction.
Model description
The check valve closes if the total volume flow is in the wrong direction. Thus, there can be a negative flow
of liquid and positive flow of gas through the check valve. A check valve remains closed until the pressure
difference across it is sufficiently large to give flow in the desired direction.
How to use
Position the check valve at any section boundary in the pipeline. If ABSPOSITION is used, the check valve
is moved to the closest section boundary.
Set the allowed flow direction in the DIRECTION key.
Standing valve
The standing valve model combines the default OLGA choke model with check valve functionality. The
check valve opens when the pressure upstream the valve is larger than downstream the valve. The
standing valve model also allows an optional back pressure valve to be added on the same section
boundary as the standing valve. With the optional back pressure valve, negative mass flow through the
section boundary appear provided that downstream pressure is larger than the upstream pressure plus a
threshold value. In contrast the Check valve on page 208 only prevents the flow from flowing in an
undesirable direction and doesn't include any pressure drop calculations, critical flow limitation or back
pressure valve.
Model description
The standing valve uses the OLGA choke model for pressure drop flow calculation. The default OLGA
choke model includes test against critical flow. In addition, counter current flow can occur in the throat with
the default OLGA choke model. With counter current flow one consider two phases to flow in opposite
directions, often gas in one direction and liquid in the other direction. The standing valve model does not
allow counter current flow in throat.
- 208 -
The OLGA model
Figure 67 Schematics showing standing valve in OLGA.
Consider the schematics of a standing valve shown in Figure 67, if upstream pressure PU is larger than
down stream pressure PD the ball will be lifted from the seat and fluid is free to flow through the valve.
Throat is the opening between the ball and the wall where the ball is sliding. In OLGA the throat is
represented at the section boundary. The fluid velocity around the ball will be high and prohibit back flow.
The pressure flow characteristics of a standing valve is in Figure 68.
- 209 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 68 Pressure flow characteristics of standing valve with constant upstream pressure PU= 14
bara and increasing downstream pressure PD
The schematics of a standing valve with a back pressure valve is shown in Figure 69. The standing valve
and back pressure valve are located at the same section boundary. The spring on the back pressure valve
represents the back pressure threshold value PT.
Figure 69 Schematics showing standing valve in combination with back pressure valve in OLGA.
- 210 -
The OLGA model
Depending on the pressure conditions it will flow through the standing valve FS > 0, the back pressure
valve FB < 0 or no flow at all. The conditions can be summarized:
The pressure flow characteristics of the standing valve combined with back pressure valve is shown in
Figure 70.
Figure 70 Pressure flow characteristics of standing valve combined with back pressure valve,
constant upstream pressure PU = 14 bara and increasing downstream pressure PD, back pressure
threshold PT= 0.25 bar.
How to use
To use the standing valve model you must:
1. Select the STANDINGVALVE option in the model key.

2. Specify the flow direction through the standing valve with the key FLOWDIRECTION.
3. To include a back pressure valve set the key BACKPRESSUREVALVE to YES, then the following
input is needed:
a. Set the back pressure valve port size with the BPVDIAMETER key.
b. Set the back pressure valve differential pressure threshold with the BPVDELTA key.
- 211 -
OLGA User manual
GLV
In the gas lift process, either continuous or intermittent, relatively high pressure gas is injected downhole
through a gas lift valve (GLV) into the production string to lift the fluid to the surface. The bottom hole
pressure after shut-in is often much higher than the bottom hole pressure at normal production conditions.
Several gas lift valves (unloading valves) are spaced along the depth of the well to lower the compressor
discharge pressure required during the startup phase of gas lift after a shut-in operation. Properly spaced
and designed, these unloading valves should close one after the other from top to bottom as the lift gas
reaches the deeper valves. The unloading valve opens or closes depending on the casing pressure and
tubing pressure. The opening pressures are affected by downhole temperature as the temperature
changes the forces acting on the valve stem.
The characteristics of a GLV can be given by several sets of curves where each curve shows the gas
injection rates at different production pressures at a constant injection pressure. The keyword TABLE
provides the channel for users to specify such GLV characteristics. Another available option is computation
of the GLV response from correlations, using parameters from the Valve Performance Clearinghouse TM
(VPCTM) database.
The keyword LEAK allows you to specify the lift gas injection position, select the method for computation of
the GLV response, and specify parameters for the selected method.
As many leaks can be given as the actual gas lift well configuration requires.
Combining the functions that are provided by the keywords LEAK, ANNULUS and (possibly) TABLE, it is
possible to simulate different gas lift configurations and various operations such as startup, shut-in, and
steady-state operation. Gas lift distribution systems and production networks of wells can be simulated
with the network capability of OLGA.
Use this valve whenever the gas-lifted well contains unloading valves of which the opening depends on the
production and injection pressure. Such a model can be used to:
 Dimension and space the unloading valves along the wellbore.

 Calculate compressor discharge pressure required to unload the well.
 Check the possibility of flow instability such as casing heading, density wave instability. The GLV
dynamics have major impact on the flow stability of gas lift systems.
 Trouble shoot problems such as interference of unloading valves during normal operation
(simultaneous gas injections through more than one GLV).
 Find various remedies to flow instability.
The GASLIFTVALVE and GASLIFTTABLE options under the keyword LEAK are part of the Wells module
that requires a separate license.
Model description
A gas lift valve (GLV) is used to inject gas into the tubing from the annulus/casing. Typically more than one
GLV is placed after each other down the annulus. The intention is that the GLV closest to the wellhead
opens first, and as the tubing pressure decreases this GLV will close and the next GLV open (this might
already be open depending on the response curve). This cycle is repeated until the injected gas reaches
the operating GLV (lowermost active GLV). When the gas lift gas reaches the operating GLV, gas is
continuously injected through this GLV and stable production is optimized by regulating the optimum
amount of gas (injection gas rate). At constant injection pressure (casing pressure), all GLVs above the
operating GLV should be closed. If the tubing pressure is increased for any reason (for example, choke
back production at the wellhead, a big liquid slug coming from the productive formation), this can cause the
opening of some GLVs. This opening is the automatic response of the GLVs to stabilize the flow. The
injection of gas reduces the liquid head pressure in the tubing until the GLVs are closed again.
- 212 -
The OLGA model
Figure 71 shows an example of these 'response curves' where tubing pressure is along the x-axis,
standard volume gas rate along the y-axis, and there is one curve for each casing pressure.
Figure 71 Example of GLV Response Curves
The GLV is constructed to respond on both the casing pressure and tubing pressure, see Figure 72. The
casing and tubing pressure work together to open the valve, while the gas (typically nitrogen) charged
dome works in the opposite direction. The curve for the casing pressure of 730 psig illustrates the
behavior. For low tubing pressures the combined force is not enough to open the valve (Pt < 330 psig). For
tubing pressures above the 'opening pressure' of 330 psig the valve starts to open; the 'Throttling region'
from 330 to approximately 600 psig is where the valve goes from closed to fully open. For a tubing
pressure approaching the casing pressure the flow decreases as the differential pressure decreases, and
above 730 psig (Pt > Pc) there is no flow as there is a check valve that stops the flow going from the tubing
to the casing.
In the input to OLGA, the terms injection pressure and production pressure is used instead of casing
pressure and tubing pressure respectively, because the injection gas may be injected in the tubing instead
of the casing, and the well fluid flows up the casing. The intention of the GLV is to allow flow from the
injection to the production side, so using the terms injection/production makes the input more general.
- 213 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 72 Sketch of typical casing (injection) pressure operated GLV (with gas charge)
The GLV in Figure 72 is characterized as an Injection or Casing Pressure Operated GLV because the
injection/casing pressure works on the large part of the bellows (AINJ) while the tubing pressure works on
the small part (APROD). The force balance for the point where the GLV starts to open is then:
(47)
where R = ASEAT/ABELLOWS. PINJ and PPROD switch places in the equation for a Production or Tubing Pressure
Operated GLV.
Calculation of flow for valve type GASLIFTTABLE
The standard volume gas rate through the GLV is found by linear interpolation in the response curves
using the calculated injection pressure (upstream the GLV) and production pressure (downstream). The
response curves must be defined in the TABLE keyword and referred to in the LEAK keyword in the gas
Lift Table input group.
First, the code finds the two response curves with injection pressures that are closest (higher and lower) to
the current injection pressure. One gas rate is found for each curve by interpolating using the current
production pressure, and then the resulting gas rate is found by interpolating between these two rates
using the current injection pressure. If the current injection pressure is below the lowest given injection
pressure, the curve for the lowest injection pressure is used directly and vice versa for injection pressure
above the highest given injection pressure. That is, no extrapolation for injection pressures.
Extrapolation is performed in the direction of decreasing production pressure to find the opening
production pressure, if not given (allowed with a negative extrapolated value, as would be the case for the
injection pressure of 790 psig in Figure 71). It is required that the last point in a response curve (the point
with highest production pressure) has a gas rate of 0. It is possible to create a curve with only one point for
which this is not a requirement (a way to specify constant standard volume flow for all production
pressures below the injection pressure).
- 214 -
The OLGA model
Associated liquid (in case of liquid on the injection side) through the GLV is calculated by setting the total
mass flux WTOT [kg/(m2s)] as:
where WG is the gas mass flux derived from the response curves, G is the gas density and mix the volume
averaged density. For each phase, P, (gas, oil, water, and so on) the mass flux through the GLV is:
where xP is the mass fraction of the phase upstream the GLV (in the section where the GLV is placed).
Temperature effect for valve type GASLIFTTABLE
In the case of a gas charged dome (a GLV might have a spring instead) the pressure in the dome will
increase with increasing temperature as the gas is contained in the dome. This means that the required
force from the production and injection side to open the GLV also increases with increasing temperature.
According to Winkler and Eads [38] the increased pressure in a nitrogen charged dome/bellows (based on
reference temperature TREFof 60 °F) is expressed like:
(48)
For nitrogen 60 °F base pressure less than 1238 psia:
(49)
For nitrogen 60 °F base pressure from 1238 to 3000 psia:
(50)
where TBis the bellows temperature, and the pressures and temperature are given in psia and °F. These
equations have been implemented in OLGA, but with a user given reference temperature. That is, it has
been assumed that the equations give reasonable results also for other reference temperatures than 60
°F.
The bellows temperature will depend on the production temperature, injection temperature, flow conditions,
geometry of GLV, placement of GLV, and so on. The user must give a parameter α where the bellows
temperature is a linear interpolation between the injection and production temperature:
From the force balance equation (47) we get the following expressions for the increase in required
production pressure to open the GLV (assuming constant injection pressure):
(51)
(52)
where ΔPB is calculated in equations (48) to (50).This effect can be significant. For a sufficiently high
temperature above the given reference temperature the GLV might never open:
- 215 -
OLGA User manual
In OLGA this effect is included with a right-shift of all the response curves associated with the GLV. The
point with maximum gas rate (for each of the curves) is identified, and the points to the left of this
maximum point are shifted with the calculated ΔPPROD. The new response curve will then consist of the
adjusted left side of the curve, the original right side of the curve, and a new maximum point where they
cross each other.
This procedure is a simplification of how the response curves are affected in the dynamic region; only the
opening point is correctly calculated (except for the uncertainty in using in equations (48) to (50) for a
reference temperature different from 60 °F). For example, the curve for a casing/injection pressure of 850
psig in Figure 71 will not be affected by temperature with this procedure. This is not physically correct.
Calculations for valve type GASLIFTVALVE
In this case the flow is computed using data from the Valve Performance Clearinghouse TM(VPCTM)
database. For documentation of the calculations used for this method we refer to this paper: [41].
Notes
 For valve type GASLIFTTABLES, the temperature effects on the opening/closing of a GLV are mainly
uncertainties in using the GLV characteristics. The average of the temperatures on the production and
injection side is used as temperature inside the valve body. In reality, the temperature distribution
within the valve is more complex because of interaction between the production string and the
injection string, the expansion of lift gas through the valve, and axial heat transfer along the pipes.
 It is also assumed that the maximum flow rate point of the GLV performance curve corresponds to the
flow rate of a fully opened valve. For the curves which do not have the maximum point, the effects of
temperature on the closing of the valve are not considered.
 For valve type GASLIFTVALVE, the demo database provided with the OLGA installation is only
intended for demo purposes, it is not suitable for engineering use.
How to use
Use the keyword LEAK to specify the gas injection position, the method for computation of the GLV
response, and the parameters for the selected method.
Two methods are available for simulation of GLVs: GASLIFTTABLE and GASLIFTVALVE.
 GASLIFTTABLE allows for reference to several sets of curves where each curve defines the gas flow
rate as a function of production pressure at a constant injection pressure. Use the keyword TABLE to
specify the curves.
 GASLIFTVALVE allows for computation of the GLV response by correlations, using data from the
Valve Performance ClearinghouseTM (VPCTM) database.
A demo database is provided with the OLGA installation to illustrate the use of the correlation based GLV
computation.
To use the VPC database change the VPCFILE key under the FILES keyword to show the file path to your
database. An empty entry means that OLGA will use the demo database.
Note that the VPC database is not a part of OLGA and must be bought separately.
When the valve type GASLIFTVALVE is selected in the OLGA GUI, the valves for which data is available
are automatically read from the database and presented in a drop-down list.
When a specific valve is selected, lists of port size, choke size and correlations are automatically obtained
and presented as drop-down lists as well.
The test rack opening pressure, the liquid volume in the dome, the measured load rate and the maximum
allowed stem travel must also be specified.
- 216 -
The OLGA model
Use the ANNULUS keyword to configure the injection and production strings.
Pumps
Pressure boost
Use the Pressure boost keyword to give a pressure increase in the pipe without knowing the details of the
pressure boosting equipment.
The PressureBoost pump is to be used in the design phase before the actual pump is selected to include a
pressure increase in the pipeline.
Model description
The PressureBoost pump increases the pressure between two sections in OLGA. The maximum pressure
increase of the pump is set in the DELTAPRESSURE key (ΔPMax). The actual pressure increase (ΔP) is
calculated from ΔPMax and the pump input signal DPSIG:
P = DPSIG · ΔPMax
DPSIG is limited upwards and downwards:
0 < DPSIG < 1
The heat added to the fluid (WFluid) is calculated from the heat of an isentropic compression (WIsentropic) from
upstream pressure (PUp) to PUp + ΔP:
Where ηIsentropic is an user given isentropic efficiency.
How to use
 Add a PressureBoost pump the pipeline, and define the pressure increase in the DELTAPRESSURE
key.
 Combine the PressureBoost pump and a flow controller to achieve the desired flow through the
pipeline
Notes
 The defined pressure increase is independent of the flow.

 No bypass or recycle line is available for this Multiphase pump module.
Simplified Pump
The SIMPLIFIEDPUMP keyword is used to model simplified centrifugal pump.
If the inlet pressure of a pipeline is too low to drive the fluid to the outlet of the pipeline, or if we want to
increase the oil production, a pump can be installed to increase the flow rate in the pipeline.
Use the Simplified pump to roughly simulate multiphase transient ΔP and efficiency with only three
algebraic coefficients, as either constant or linearly sensitive to transient fluctuations in speed, flowrate,
and void fraction.
No license is required for Simplified pump module.
- 217 -
OLGA User manual
Model description
Theory and multiphase dynamics
The simplified centrifugal pump in OLGA is intended for quick, approximate modeling. It models a
linearized approximation to the local behavior of a real centrifugal pump, and is therefore only accurate for
use across small excursions from its specified local operational point (where the tangent to the real
nonlinear operating curve does not change significantly).
These simple algebraic expressions are used to calculate the pressure increase over this simplified pump,
as well as its pump efficiency:
where:
ΔPo Pump pressure increase at rated density ( bar )
ΔP Pump pressure increase ( bar )
N Pump speed ( rpm )
Q Flow rate ( m3/s )
a Gas volume fraction
η Pump efficiency ( adiabatic )
ρ Specific density ( kg/m3 )
D1,2,3 Input coefficients for pressure increase
E1,2,3 Input coefficients for efficiency
Subscripts: r = rated
The power to the fluid is calculated in the following manner:
1. Inlet enthalpy (Hs) (J/kg) and entropy (Ss) are found from the fluid file. The enthalpy at discharge
pressure is found assuming isentropic conditions (H--iso). The actual enthalpy change is then calculated
by following formula:
- 218 -
The OLGA model
2. Outlet enthalpy is calculated from:
3. The power input to the fluid is calculated from:
where Wfluid is in W, and GT is the total mass flow in kg/s.
Total shaft power:
Pump torque:
Pump hydraulic torque:
where
ω = 2 π N / 60, and ηM the pump mechanical efficiency.
Modeling in OLGA
Note that by setting the coefficients D1,2,3 and E1,2,3 = 0.0, a pump with a constant pressure increase is
simulated. If you want to obtain a certain flow rate in a simple way, you can either iterate on the input value
for ΔPr or assume some value for D1 and let a controller determine the necessary speed.
Energy balance
The total power input to the fluid is:
where TH is the pump hydraulic torque, ω the pump speed and ηM the pump mechanical efficiency.
How to use
General setup
1. Add the SIMPLIFIEDPUMP keyword to the desired flowpath.

2. Specify pump location by one of ABSPOSITION (length), PIPE & SECTIONBOUNDARY, or
POSITION (an alias)
3. Choose any applicable means of controlling the pump speed.
Simplified Centrifugal setup
In addition to the General Setup above, you must specify DPRATED, FLOWRATED, SPEEDR, and
MAXSPEED. Also override the (900 kg/m3) default of the required DENSITYR with your actual rated liquid
density, if significantly different.
You can also specify related sensitivity of pump DP to varying speed, flowrate, and void fraction via the
linear departure coefficients DCOEFF1 - DCOEFF3. NOTE: Without these optional user inputs, the OLGA
simplified centrifugal pump defaults to a constant DP = DPRATED regardless of any transients.
- 219 -
OLGA User manual
You can also override the default (0.5) adiabatic efficiency by entering EFFRATED, then make that
efficiency sensitive to speed, flowrate, and void fraction if desired by also entering ECOEFF1 - ECOEFF3.
Note: Adiabatic efficiency of the Simplified Centrifugal Pump affects OLGA calculations for fluid heating,
hydraulic horsepower, total shaft horsepower and torque, through the relations documented in Simplified
Pump - Model description.
If more accurate estimation of Total Shaft Power is also required, you can also override the default (0.7)
EFFIMECH.
Note: Pumps cannot be positioned at the first or last section boundary of a flowpath.
Pump battery
Pump battery is a positive displacement pump of piston type typically used for liquid systems, for example,
drilling applications.
Pump battery is suitable when accurate measures of, for example, liquid volumetric flow rates against
pump capacity are required. This is achieved by specifying a linear dependence between the total
volumetric flow rate and the operating speed of the pump battery.
Note: The volumetric flow rates are subjected to the control limits imposed by the restrictions specified
for minimum and maximum flow rates as well as maximum hydraulic horsepower and outlet pressure.
The volumetric efficiency can also be accounted for.
Pump battery requires the Wells Module.
Model description
The total volumetric flow rate of the pump battery is proportional to the rate of pump strokes. The volume
delivered by the pump at a given pump rate is defined through a proportionality factor for the volume
delivered at a certain pump rate according to:
where
QP Volume delivered by the pump battery
PFAC Pumping factor
SPES Strokes per time unit
- 220 -
The OLGA model
The pump rate is subject to limitations on:
 maximum hydraulic horsepower allowed.

 maximum pump rate.
 minimum pump rate.
 maximum pump pressure allowed.
If any of these limitations are in play, the pump rate is automatically adjusted. Additional limitations can be
imposed, for example, based on fluid rate and inflow rate.
The total hydraulic horsepower, HHP, is calculated from the following definition:
where
Qinj pump injection rate (bbl/min)
WHP pump injection pressure (bara)
Energy balance
The calculation of the total power input to the fluid, QPt, is based on the isentropic compression work from
inlet pressure to outlet pressure.
Volumetric efficiency
To handle gas-liquid systems, the volumetric efficiency of the pump needs to be taken into account. The
volumetric efficiency is defined as the ratio between the net volume induced into the chamber at inlet
conditions, V, and the swept volume, VS, calculated according to
where VC is the clearance volume and v is ratio between the volume of the fluid mixture at the outlet
pressure and the inlet pressure assuming incompressible liquid, as given by
where
volume fraction of gas at inlet pressure
pi inlet pressure
po outlet pressure
k adiabatic gas constant
The ratio between the clearance volume and the swept volume, VC/VS, is denoted the clearance ratio and
is given through the input key CLEARANCERATIO.
- 221 -
OLGA User manual
How to use
General setup
Add PUMPBATTERY to the desired flowpath and specify its position.
The required input keys MAXSPEED, MINCAPACITY, MAXCAPACITY, MAXPRESSURE, and HPMAX
together with the optional input key MINSPEED are used to specify basic limitations on horsepower, flow
rates, and pressure.
Choose any applicable means of controlling the pump speed.
The key CLEARANCERATIO can be used to impose a volumetric efficiency to account for the effects of
the compressibility of gas in a gas-liquid mixture.
Note: Pumps can neither be positioned at the first nor the last section boundary of a flowpath.
Displacement pump
The DISPLACEMENTPUMP keyword is used to model positive displacement (volume) pumps.
If the inlet pressure of a pipeline is too low to drive the fluid to the outlet of the pipeline, or if you want to
Use the displacement pump to rigorously model the real nonlinear transient operation of a particular
multiphase positive displacement pump (including recycle and bypass). OLGA calculations are based on
either built-in nonlinear curves for a 'typical' pump, or detailed manufacturer's curves expressing that
multiphase displacement pump's internal backflow rate as a five-dimensional tabular function of speed, dP,
multiphase void fraction, inlet pressure, and liquid-phase viscosity.
The displacement pumps are part of the Multiphase pump module that requires a separate license.
Model description
For the displacement pump, the pump flow rate is the theoretical flow rate minus the backflow through the
pump. The theoretical flow rate is a function of the pump speed and the characteristics of the pump,
expressed through the specific flow rate. The backflow rate is a function of several parameters and is
tabulated in a backflow table. This can be summarized as follows:
(53)
- 222 -
The OLGA model
where
Q0 theoretical flow rate
Qb back flow rate
Qspc pump specific flow rate
N pump speed
ΔP pressure increase across the pump
αI void fraction at the pump inlet
vI liquid kinetic viscosity
PI pressure at the pump inlet
Modeling in OLGA
For a given displacement pump, the specific flow rate Qspc is a constant. Qb is tabulated in the backflow
table as a function of N, ΔP, aI, nl and PI.
A default implementation of the backflow table is implemented in the displacement pump (and also
documented in an external file that is linked to the example displacement pump in the pump.opi sample
case installed with OLGA). Other backflow tables may be given by using the TABLE keyword.(See Pump
Data Table for Displacement Pumps.)
The OLGA displacement pump model also includes embedded numerical models for typical recycle and
bypass lines, including user-specified orifices that can be linked to OLGA controllers. For more detail, see
the heading Pump Bypass And Recycle below.
Energy balance
The total power input to the fluid is calculated by summing the mechanical work on the fluid and the
different losses as follows.
The power used for mechanical work on the fluid, QPM, is calculated as the isentropic compression work
from inlet pressure, PI, to outlet pressure PI + ΔP.
Mechanical friction loss:
Viscous friction loss:
- 223 -
OLGA User manual
where
a experiment coefficient for mechanical friction loss
b experiment coefficient for viscous friction loss
Nref pump reference speed
QPmf,ref mechanical friction loss at the pump reference speed
QPvis,ref viscous loss at the pump reference speed
Then, the total power input to the fluid is calculated as:
How to use
General setup
1. Add the DISPLACEMENTPUMP keyword to the desired flowpath.

POSITION (an alias).
Pump setup
The OLGA Displacement Pump requires significantly different types of inputs from the Centrifugal or
Simplified Pumps. For example, none of DENSITYR, FLOWRATED, HEADRATED, SPEEDR, or TORQR
are used.
You must enter SPECAPACITY (the total specific volume displaced per revolution or displacement cycle).
as well as MAXSPEED. OLGA then multiplies these two inputs to determine the (gross) theoretical
volumetric flowrate displaced (before subtracting internal bypass).
The OLGA Displacement Pump runs without any further inputs, although equipment manufacturers or
others with detailed knowledge might want to override the defaults of one or more of ACOEFFICIENT,
BCOEFFICIENT, MDISSIPATION, VDISSIPATION, and so on, to tune the model precisely.
You can optionally enter custom transient displacement pump backflow (performance) curves to precisely
represent the exact transient response surface for your actual pump. However, note that the required input
format is a complex five-dimensional matrix of internal backflow rates as a function of pump speed, head,
void fraction, inlet pressure, and liquid viscosity - information normally only available from the
manufacturer's experts, perhaps even requiring new experimental work on a prototype pump for your
particular fluid and operating conditions. For more specific information about the theoretical basis of these
special OLGA input requirements, consult the theory section in Model description.
As for the Centrifugal pump, this PUMPTYPE also supports additional provisions for simple 'branch-less'
bypass and recycle modeling to further increase the realism of OLGA's transient responses for typical
pump packages. The setup procedures and modeling assumptions for these built-in bypass and recycle
features are described in Pump Bypass And Recycle.
- 224 -
The OLGA model
Notes
 The recycle flow and bypass flows around the OLGA displacement pumps are considered as flows
through controlled chokes. Each flow is calculated with the given pressure difference between the two
sides of the choke and the choke upstream conditions. The pipeline effect of the recycle flowline and
bypass flowline is not considered. However, you can make a separate recycle flow line and bypass
flows line, which is connected to the pump upstream pipeline and downstream pipeline.
 The recycle flow can only flow from the pump downstream section to the upstream section, and the
bypass flow can only flow from the pump upstream section to the downstream section. You cannot
insert any component in the recycle flowline or bypass flowline, because no pipeline is considered.
 Pumps cannot be positioned at the first or last section boundary of a flowpath.
Bornemann pump
The BORNEMANNPUMP keyword is used to model Bornemann pumps. It is based on a displacement

pump model as described by Bornemann.
If the inlet pressure of a pipeline is too low to drive the fluid to the outlet of the pipeline, or if you want to
Use the Bornemann pump to rigorously model the transient operation of a particular multiphase
Bornemann twin-screw pump. OLGA calculations are based on specific data from the manufacturer for
each pump model type.
The Bornemann pumps are part of the Multiphase pump module that requires a separate license.
Model description
For the Bornemann pump, the pump flow rate is the theoretical flow rate minus the backflow through the
pump. The theoretical flow rate is a function of the pump speed and the characteristics of the pump. The
backflow rate is a function of several parameters. This can be summarized as follows:
- 225 -
OLGA User manual
Where,
3
m /h
Overall capacity of the pump
3
m /h Theoretical capacity of the pump without any loss
3
m /h/rpm Geometrical capacity of the pump
3
m /h Backflow
3
m /h/bar Reference backflow for water
N rpm Rotational speed

bar Pressure difference over the pump
3
kg/m Fluid density
Pa.s Fluid dynamic viscosity
2
m /s Fluid kinematic viscosity
The reference properties are set to,
= 1000 kg/m3
= 10–3 Pa.s
= 2 m3/h/bar
Modeling in OLGA
The geometrical capacity (volume) of the Bornemann pump is specified in the GUI by selecting a pump
model and a pitch.
Energy balance
The total power input to the fluid is calculated by summing the hydrodynamic power on the fluid and the
hydrodynamic losses as follows:
- 226 -
The OLGA model
Where:
W Total shaft power (added to fluid)
W Hydrodynamic power
W Hydrodynamic losses
aperf - Performance factor depending on pump type
m3/h Theoretical capacity of the pump without any loss
bar Pressure difference over the pump
W Friction loss depending on pump type
N rpm Rotational speed
rpm Reference rotational speed
m2/s Fluid kinematic viscosity
Pa.s Fluid dynamic viscosity
kg/m3 Fluid density
The reference properties are set to
= 1000 kg/m3
= 10–3 Pa.s
= 1450 rpm
How to use
General setup
Add the BORNEMANNPUMP keyword to the desired flowpath.
Specify pump location by one of ABSPOSITION (length), PIPE & SECTIONBOUNDARY, or POSITION
(an alias).
See Bornemann Pump - Introduction for OLGA module license requirements.
Pump setup
You must select a MODEL and a PITCH, and then the corresponding VOLUME.
You can enter a PREFSPEED which is used without controller, and a MAXSPEED which is used as a limit
for the speed when controlled by a speed signal. The resulting pump speed is the product of the speed
signal (between 0 and 1) with the MAXSPEED.
- 227 -
OLGA User manual
You do not need to enter power parameters because power loss calculations are based on specific
parameters for each Bornemann pump model. For the theoretical basis of these input requirements, see
the Bornemann pump theory topic in the Bornemann Pump - Model description section.
Notes
 Bornemann pump modeling in OLGA is mainly about the transfer function, which is defined by the fluid
transport and the change in process conditions (temperature and pressure at inlet and outlet). OLGA
does not model what happens inside the pump with regard to separation and liquid circulation (neither
recycle nor bypass flow).
 Pumps cannot be positioned at the first or last section boundary of a flowpath.
 Currently, Bornemann pumps are not implemented for the steady-state preprocessor.
Centrifugal pump
The CENTRIFUGALPUMP keyword is used to model rotodynamic pumps.
If the inlet pressure of a pipeline is too low to drive the fluid to the outlet of the pipeline, or if we want to
Use the Centrifugal pump to rigorously model the real nonlinear transient operation of a particular
multiphase centrifugal pump (including recycle and bypass). OLGA calculations are based on either built-in
nonlinear curves for a typical pump, or user input of special dimensionless OLGA curves for a particular
pump that must usually be derived from given dimensional curves before OLGA entry.
The centrifugal pump are part of the Multiphase pump module that requires a separate license.
Model description
For a generalized multiphase centrifugal pump, the pressure increase over the pump, ΔP, is dependent on
the flow rate Q, pump speed N, inlet gas volume fraction aI, and the pump inlet pressure PI:
For the liquid (assuming incompressible), the specific work delivered from the pump into the fluid is:
where PO is the pump outlet pressure, PI is the pump inlet pressure and l is the liquid density. For a
compressible gas, and assuming a polytropic process, the work done by the pump is:
Where n is the polytropic constant and ρg,I the gas density at pump inlet.
The work input to the gas is equal to the increase in the gas enthalpy. When the gas is assumed to be
ideal Win can be written as:
- 228 -
The OLGA model
The polytropic efficiency is defined as the ratio of the work done by the pump divided by the work input to
the gas. If the adiabatic constant k for the gas and the compressor efficiency ηp are given, the polytropic
constant n can be calculated.
For a two-phase mixture, the pump power to the fluid is weighted by mass fractions (αm = gas mass
fraction) as follows:
(54)
With W calculated from the pump characteristics, equation (54) can be solved for PO/PI. The relationship
between head H and specific work W is W = gH = ghHR, where HR is rated head and h is the head ratio.
For a two-phase mixture (except for very high gas fractions) an isothermal compression of the gas may be
assumed (that is, n=1.0) to account for rapid vapor-phase heat loss to all of the associated liquid, the
pump impeller / case, and the surroundings. Assuming n = 1.0, equation (54) can then be rewritten by a
series expansion to:
Modeling in OLGA
The centrifugal pump model in OLGA calculates the pump performance, head and torque, for the entire
possible operating range of a centrifugal pump (including non-standard operating regimes such as
backflow and negative speed) by interpolating flow rate, pump speed and gas volume fraction (GVF) in
tables. Pump performance data is typically only available for the normal pump zone, where pump speed,
flow rate, head and torque are positive. See Figure 73 and Figure 74 for examples of typical pump
performance data.
Figure 73 Example of centrifugal pump characteristics at GVF = 0%
- 229 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 74 Example of centrifugal pump characteristics at GVF = 70%
To simulate certain transients, such as start-up and shut-down, pump performance data for the non-
standard operating regimes are needed. To effectively provide for the entire operating range the pump is
assumed to be homologous. The homologous scaling laws states that two operating situations reduces to:
(55)
Where H is head, T is torque, Q is volumetric flow rate and N is pump speed. With these relations one can
express the pump performance for the entire operating range using four (because both N and Q can be
zero) dimensionless homologous curves defined in Table 1 and Table 2.
Table 3 Definition of the homologous head curves.
Curves Range Independent variables Dependent variables
1 q/ω h/ω2
ω > 0,
2 ω/q h/q2
q > 0,
3 ω/q h/q2
q < 0,
4 q/ω h/ω2
ω < 0,
- 230 -
The OLGA model
Table 4 Definition of the homologous torque curves.
Curves Range Independent variables Dependent variables
1 q/ω β/ω2
ω > 0,
2 ω/q β/q2
q > 0,
3 ω/q β/q2
q < 0,
4 q/ω β/ω2
ω < 0,
where:
: head ratio
: flow ratio
: speed ratio
: torque ratio
subscript R refers to the rated value.
Figure 75 Single phase homologous head curves
- 231 -
OLGA User manual
A more convenient way of expressing the homologous relations is to use Suter curves, one for head (WH)
and one for torque (WB):
With the Suter format the homologous relations are preserved and the curves are well defined for the
entire range of q and ω (with the exception of q and ω being zero at the same time), such that only two
curves are needed instead of eight.
The centrifugal pump model in OLGA has tabulated pump performance data in Suter format and only the
rated values of the pump is needed as input, alternatively you can give the complete pump performance
data in homologous format or a combination of pump data (typically for the normal range) and the built-in
data can be used.
Single phase performance
The homologous scaling laws, equation (55), is valid for two operating conditions for the same pump, but
the pump performance curves tend to have the same shape for geometrically similar pumps. The most
common parameter for describing the geometry of a pump is the specific speed defined as:
where NR is given in rpm, QRin m3/s and HRin m. OLGA has three sets of built-in
single phase Suter curves, for specific speed 25,147, and 262 (radial, mixed and axial pump). For
pumps with specific speed between these values linear interpolation is used to determine built-in
head and torque Suter curves for the given pump.
Two phase performance
The pump performance depends on the gas volume fraction (GVF) . A typical centrifugal pump degrades
with increasing GVF until it reaches fully-degraded two-phase conditions around 60–70% GVF. The pump
head H and hydraulic torque TH in OLGA under two-phase conditions are determined by using two-phase
mulitpliers:
where HS and THS are the single phase (liquid) head and torque, HT and THT are the fully-degraded two-
phase head and torque, HM and TM are the two-phase head and torque multiplier and α the gas volume
fraction at the pump inlet. OLGA has one set of default curves for fully degraded two-phase conditions and
multipliers.
In calculating the hydraulic torque, TH, the difference between actual fluid density and rated density must
be corrected as:
- 232 -
The OLGA model
Energy balance
The total power input to the fluid from the OLGA centrifugal pump is:
where TH is the pump hydraulic torque, ω the pump speed and ηM the pump mechanical efficiency.
The OLGA centrifugal pump model also includes embedded numerical models for typical recycle and
bypass lines, including user-specified orifices that may be linked to OLGA controllers. For more detail, see
Pump Bypass And Recycle.
How to use
General setup
Add the CENTRIFUGALPUMP keyword to the desired flowpath.
(an alias).
Pump setup
The OLGA Centrifugal Pump requires DENSITYR (same 900 kg/m3 default, or specified), FLOWRATED,
SPEEDR, HEADRATED and TORQR as a minimum, to scale the general transient response surface of
either the built-in default or user-specified Homologous Centrifugal Pump Curves to your actual pump.
You can optionally enter custom transient centrifugal pump performance curves to precisely represent the
exact transient response surface for your actual pump. However, note that most manufacturers do not
publish pump curves directly in this format, and it may also be difficult to obtain degraded multiphase
performance curves up to the maximum degraded Gas Volume Fraction (GVF) for your particular
hardware and application (often somewhere in the range of 30 - 70% vapor volume).For more specific
information about the theoretical basis of these special OLGA input requirements, consult Table 3, Table 4
and Figure 73 in Model description.
The OLGA Centrifugal Pump will run without any further inputs, already representing a much more realistic
transient modeling upgrade to the Simplified Centrifugal Pump model at only slightly greater modeling cost
in setup time and runtime.
This pump also includes additional provisions for simple 'branch-less' Bypass and Recycle modeling to
further increase the realism of OLGA's transient responses for typical pump packages. The setup
procedures and modeling assumptions for these Built-in Bypass and Recycle features are described in
detail in Pump Bypass And Recycle.
Notes
 The recycle flow and bypass flows around the OLGA centrifugal pumps are considered as flows
through controlled chokes. Each flow is calculated with the given pressure difference between the two
sides of the choke and the choke upstream conditions. The pipeline effect of the recycle flowline and
bypass flowline is not considered. However, you can make a separate recycle flow line and bypass
flows line, which is connected to the pump upstream pipeline and downstream pipeline.
 The recycle flow can only flow from the pump downstream section to the upstream section, and the
bypass flow can only flow from the pump upstream section to the downstream section. It is impossible
to insert any component in the recycle flowline or bypass flowline, because no pipeline is considered.
 Pumps can not be positioned at the first or last section boundary of a flowpath.
- 233 -
OLGA User manual
OneSubsea pump
The OneSubseaPUMP keyword is used to model a OneSubsea Helico-axial pump, which can operate
from 0-100% gas volume fractions.
Use the OneSubsea pump when the design contains a OneSubsea Helico-axial pump system or when
such a pump system is to be used.
The OneSubsea pump is part of the Multiphase pump module that requires a separate license.
Model description
OneSubsea multiphase pump module
The OneSubsea pump module in OLGA is a system model of a complete multiphase pumping system. The
module includes all the elements given in Figure 76 below, integrated with OneSubsea standard control
system. This represents a typical OneSubsea subsea multiphase pumping system.
Figure 76 The OneSubsea multiphase pump layout
Multiphase pump
The OneSubsea multiphase pump is a Helico-axial design that can operate from 0–100% gas volume
fractions. The figure below is a typical operation envelope with all limitations included. The operation
envelope is dynamic and dependent on the operation inlet conditions as suction pressure, gas volume
fraction and densities.
- 234 -
The OLGA model
Flow mixer
The OneSubsea flow mixer is a static device that provides a homogenous flow to enable stable operation
for the multiphase pump during slugging. Below is an example of a typical flow mixer characteristic. The
characteristic gives flow mixer outlet gas volume fraction dependent on liquid level. The characteristic is
dynamic and dependent on operation conditions.
- 235 -
OLGA User manual
Recirculation choke
The recirculation valve is used to protect the pump from minimum flow operation and to extend the
operation envelope. The recirculation choke is a standard choke and choke equations are applied. The
figure below gives the predefined choke curve defined in the model that can be scaled by giving the
maximum CV of the specified choke.
Figure 77 Default CV for recycle valve
- 236 -
The OLGA model
Control system
The control system is divided into two main functions. Pump protection control and pump operation control.
The control system has two independent control loops that regulates on pump speed and recirculation
choke position.
Pump speed control
The pump speed is manipulated to meet the specified inlet pressure setpoint. A tolerance of +/-1 bar is
applied internally in the pump model. The inlet pressure setpoint is given by the PRESSURESETPOINT
key or the PRESSURESETPOINT signal.
The change in pump speed is limited to a change rate (SPEEDRATE). The speed of the pump can be
controlled setting SPEEDSETPOINT or the SPEEDSETPOINTSIG signal.
Figure 78 Speed control ramp example (SPEEDRATE=25 rpm/s)
Recycle choke control
The recycle choke is controlled to keep the pump above the minimum flow limit of the pump. To avoid too
frequent changes in the choke opening, a dead band (CHOKEDEADBAND) is used. After the dead band,
the choke movement is restricted to a user given rate of change (CHOKERATE). To improve controllability
of the choke flow, the minimum position of the choke can be set (CHOKEMINOPENING).
- 237 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 79 Recycle choke ramp and dead band example (CHOKERATE=0.01 1/s and
CHOKEDEADBAND=10 s)
Pump trip
A trip can be caused by an internal violation in the model or by a user defined trip.
The model trips if the following parameters are trespassed
 Minimum flow
 Maximum thrust load
 TRIPMODE is set to 1.
The default behavior, TRIPMODE=0, is to ignore the trip signal. PUMPTRIP output tells if the pump should
have tripped
If TRIPMODE=-1, the pump trips if a trip signal is received from the internal protection system.
If TRIPMODE=1, a trip is initiated by the user.
TRIPTIME key specifies a time series when TRIPMODE is changed.
When we have a trip situation, the following happens:
 The pump stops. (The speed spins down to zero rpm.)

 The bypass line is opened. (BYPASSSIG is overridden.)
 When the pump speed is zero, the inlet valve is closed. (VALSIG is overridden.)
Bypass and inlet valve
The inlet valve and bypass valve, uses a simplified choke flow calculation. The flow is calculated with a
given pressure difference between the two sides of the choke, DPch, and the choke upstream conditions.
The flow, GR, can be regulated by a controller.
where Cd is the choke discharge coefficient and Ach the choke opening area. If a CV vs. opening table is
given instead of the choke area, the CV is converted to area and used in the equation.
- 238 -
The OLGA model
How to use
General setup
Add the OneSubseaPUMP keyword to the desired flowpath.
(an alias).
Note: Pumps cannot be positioned at the first or last section boundary of a flowpath.
Model description
Parallel operation of multiple pumps is possible through an integer input, NPUMP. The NPUMP key does
affect the inlet valve or bypass line. Default valve is 1 and means single pump. When you specify the
parallel pumps, the recirculation line defined, applies per pump.
The MAXDP key is the user defined limit on differential pressure for the pump. The pump characteristic file
also includes a maximum DP that is always the absolute maximum.
The MAXPOW key is the user defined limit on shaft power. If not set, an infinite number is used. The input
is per pump if parallel pumps are selected
Control parameters
The OneSubsea pump module is a model that includes all control loops as for a standard OneSubsea
system. The control loops are separated into protection control and pump performance control. In this
chapter, the control parameter set points for pump performance control are presented. The protection
control algorithms alway have priority. For further description, see Model description.
The pump performance control system consists of two independent control loops: pump speed control and
recirculation choke control.
Pump speed controller
The pump speed controller can be set by using the SPEEDSETPOINT key to regulate to a fixed speed set
point. Normal operation of OneSubsea pumps is to control the speed by a suction pressure set point to
minimize process variations. This controller is set by using the PRESSURESETPOINT key. One set point
must be defined and PRESSURESETPOINT has priority if both are defined. PRESSURESETPOINT
controller is blocked by setting the key to -1. The controller selection can be determined by using the
CONTROLMODE key. By setting CONTROLMODE to default the selection behaves as mentioned above.
The speed controller is defined with the time series key SPEEDTIME.
The SPEEDRATE key specifies the ramp of the speed controller. For further description, see Model
description.
The pump speed controller can also be set by connecting OLGA controllers to the OneSubsea module.
The set points defined by these controllers have priority, but the SPEEDRATE defined limits the maximum
pump speed change.
- 239 -
OLGA User manual
Recirculation choke controller
The recirculation choke is mainly used for protection purposes, see Model description.
The recirculation choke is controlled to keep the pump outside the minimum flow limit of the pump. To
avoid too frequent changes in the choke opening, a dead band (CHOKEDEADBAND) is used. After the
dead band, the choke movement is restricted to a user given rate of change (CHOKERATE). To improve
controllability of the choke flow, a minimum opening of the choke can be set (CHOKEMINOPEN).
In addition to the minimum flow controller, the choke can be adjusted by two separate controllers: either
the relative flow controller (RELFLOWCONTR) or a manual choke controller (CHOKEPOSSET). These
controllers cannot be used at the same time. If both are specified, RELFLOWCONTR has priority.
The RELFLOWCONTR key gives a set point to the relative flow controller. This controller is used to adjust
the recirculation choke position to an optimum area in the operation envelope. The RELFLOWCONTR key
is related to the relative pump differential pressure with reference to minimum and maximum flow. Hence if
RELFLOWCONTR is set to 1 the choke tries to fully close. If set to zero the choke fully opens. If set to 0.5
the choke opens/closes to an operating point approximately in the middle of the pump operation envelope.
The controller is disabled with a value of -1.
The CHOKEPOSSET key gives a set point to the manual choke controller. This controller is used to
manually adjust the recirculation choke position. The controller is disabled with a value of -1.
All choke control parameter set points are defined with the time series key CHOKETIME.
Trip
By default the pump does not trip when the TRIPMODE key is equal to zero. The pump reports a trip
situation, that is, minimum flow or maximum differential pressure limits are trespassed.
To enable pump tripping, the TRIPMODE key must be set -1.
To initiate a pump trip the TRIPMODE key must be set to 1.
The TRIPTIME key sets the time series where the different TRIPMODEs are initiated. See Model
description for details on pump trip.
Initial conditions
Initial conditions can be specified for pump speed and recirculation choke. These values are used when
both the steady state preprocessor is active, and when initial conditions are used. The initial speed of the
pump is set using the INITIALSPEED key. The initial recirculation valve position is set using the
INITIALCHOKEOPEN key.
Reporting
A set of guidance parameters are given that give useful information related to pump operation.
 The GPTHRUST gives the pump differential pressure related to the maximum differential pressure of
the pump.
 The GPMINFLOW gives the pump differential pressure to the differential pressure at minimum flow.
 The GPPOW gives the pump power to the available shaft power.
 The GPRECFLOW giver the recirculation rate related to the pump inlet flow rate.
For flow mixer operation, the liquid level in flow mixer (LLM) output parameter gives useful information. If
the liquid level in the flow mixer is not drained or does not fill up during slugging, the mixer provides stable
operation conditions for the pump.
- 240 -
The OLGA model
System components
Multiphase pump
The characteristic of the OneSubsea multiphase pump is defined through a data file. A list of 13 standard
OneSubsea pumps is available in PUMPCHAR keyword. See Table 5. It is also possible to use
characteristic files for other configurations using the PUMPFILE keyword. These data files must be
prepared by OneSubsea Engineering.
Table 5 Library of OneSubsea pump characteristics
Pump name Impeller diameter Nominal flow rate Max. differential pressure
[mm] (inlet conditions) [bar]
[Am3/h]
OneSubsea-HX360-1800-38 360 1800 38
OneSubsea-HX360-1500-38 360 1500 38
OneSubsea-HX360-1200-38 360 1200 38
OneSubsea-HX310-1100- 310 1100 120

120
OneSubsea-HX310-1100-45 310 1100 45
OneSubsea-HX310-900-45 310 900 45
OneSubsea-HX310-800-120 310 800 120
OneSubsea-HX310-700-45 310 700 45
OneSubsea-HX310-600-120 310 600 120
OneSubsea-HX310-500-180 310 500 180
OneSubsea-HX310-500-45 310 500 45
OneSubsea-HX310-400-180 310 400 180
OneSubsea-HX310-250-180 310 250 180
- 241 -
OLGA User manual
Pump file settings
The following values are the default settings in the standard pump files:
Table 6 Default settings
Pump file setting Default setting
Dead band for CHOKEPOSSET 0.01 s
Dead band for RELFLOWCONTR 0.1 s
Dead band for PRESSURESETPOINT 1 bar
Minimum speed 1500 rpm
Max speed 4600 rpm
Spin down rate 230 rpm/s
Start-up rate 46 rpm/s
Flow mixer
The characteristics of the flow mixer can be defined in the same manner as the multiphase pump using the
MIXERCHAR (one general OneSubsea flow mixer characteristic) and MIXERFILE.
The inlet flow mixer is either configured by an input file (MIXERFILE) or by a reference to a generic
OneSubsea flow mixer for initial simulations. The volume of the mixer, given by the characteristics file, can
be overridden for sensitivity simulations using the MIXERVOLUME key.
Recirculation line
The recirculation choke is defined by CHOKECV or a CV-opening curve, CHOKECVTABLE. When using
the CHOKECV, a default CV-opening curve will be used where the CHOKECV key is the maximum CV of
the choke and used to scale the default curve, see Figure 80.
- 242 -
The OLGA model
Figure 80 Default CV for recycle valve
Bypass valve
The bypass line is defined by BYDIAMETER and BYCD or BYCVTABLE. You can connect a bypass
controller using the BYPASSSIG signal. By default, the bypass line is closed. To add a check valve in the
bypass line, set BYCHECK to YES. The opening/closing time of the bypass choke is set by the
BYSTROKETIME key.
Inlet valve
The inlet valve is defined by DIAMETER and CD or CVTABLE. The opening/closing time of the inlet valve
is set by the STROKETIME key.
Notes
 The recirculation flow and bypass flows around the OneSubsea pump are considered as flows through
controlled chokes. Each flow is calculated with the given pressure difference between the two sides of
the choke and the choke upstream conditions. The pipeline effect of the recirculation line and bypass
line is not considered.
 The recirculation flow can only flow from the pump downstream section to the upstream section, and
the bypass flow can only flow from the pump upstream section to the downstream section. You cannot
insert any component in the recirculation line or bypass line, because no pipeline is considered.
Note: Heat loss in the recirculation line is accounted for in the model.
ESPump (ESP)
The ESPUMP keyword is used to model single- or multistage electric submersible pumps (ESPs) for use in
single- or multi-phase flow.
If the inlet pressure of a well is too low to drive the fluid to the outlet of the pipeline, or if you want to
increase the oil production, an electric submersible pump (ESP, keyword ESPUMP) can be installed to
increase the production rate.
- 243 -
OLGA User manual
Use the ESP to model the transient operation of a single- or multi-stage ESP for single or multiphase flow.
OLGA calculations are based on the pump characteristics of a given ESP taken from either a default or a
user-specified pump characteristics database. These pump characteristics are used for the normal
operation range. Built-in nonlinear curves for a typical pump, handling speed ranges outside the database
range and multi-phase behavior are applied to complete pump data required by a transient OLGA
simulation.
The ESP is part of both the Wells module and the Multiphase pump module that requires a separate
license.
Model description
Each stage of an ESP is using the pressure increase relations as for a centrifugal pump. See the
centrifugal pump for details.
The pump characteristics data for a single stage, single phase flow are taken from a database (either
internal or user-specified) for the normal operation range. These are combined with internal data for the
operation ranges not covered by the normal operation database, and also internal data for multiphase
degradation are applied.
For a multiple-stage ESP, the same pump characteristics are applied for each stage, adding up the
pressure increase and power consumption for each stage to get the total pressure increase and power
consumption over the ESP. For multi-phase flow, the gas volume flow is adjusted according to the
differences in local pressures between the stages by using isothermal, ideal gas compression. It is
assumed that the gas fraction is sufficiently low to make the temperature increase due to compression
negligible.
Viscosity correction method for ESP and Centrifugal pump
Hydraulic Institute viscosity correction method
The model computes correction factors for head, flow and efficiency based on the performance data for
pure water, fluid viscosity and the pump speed [40].
Given the pump speed (N) (rpm) and the best efficiency point for flow rate and head, when the fluid is pure
water, , and the current volume flow (Q) through the pump,we can
compute the scalars that scales the water performance curves to account for a given fluid
viscosity (cSt).
The power correction factor can be expressed as:
The method is an empirical method constructed from experimental data from many typical pumps but does
not claim to be accurate for particular pumps. The type of pumps and the operational region must fall into
the limits of the method.
- 244 -
The OLGA model
Limitations of the HI method stated in [40] are:
 Viscosities must be less than 4000 cSt. For viscosities lower than the water viscosity, the water curve
is used.
 The specific speed of the pump must be less than 60, where the specific speed is defined as
The method can be selected by the keyword
VISCMETHOD = OFF/HI [default: OFF]
Liquid viscosity in the pump
The inlet viscosity of the fluid is used where a volume fraction average is used to calculate one value for
the combined oil and water phase.
Where
Kinematic viscosity used to modify pump performance (cSt)
Volume fraction of oil in the liquid phase (oil and water)
Oil dynamic viscosity (cP)
Oil density (kg/m3)
Water dynamic viscosity (cP)
Water density (kg/m3)
How to use
General setup
1. Add the ESPUMP keyword to the desired flowpath.

POSITION (an alias)
3. Choose any applicable means of controlling the pump speed.
Pump setup
The OLGA ESP requires a pump model to be chosen through the key PUMPMODEL. The model is taken
from either a default internal pump characteristics database or from a user-defined database specified
through the key FILES ESPDBFILE. A PUMPMODEL draw-down menu showing the pump model names
contained in the database is available through the GUI.
The number of required stages can be specified through the key NSTAGES.
- 245 -
OLGA User manual
Controlling the ESP speed
The following options are available for controlling the pump speed:
1. Pump speed regulated by controller:

1. Controlled manually by specifying time and speed series in the controller definition.
2. Regulated by a physical parameter. The speed is calculated by:
N = u*Nop
where Nop is the speed defined by the normal operation speed given in the database and u the
signal from the controller.
Note: It is not possible to model recycle or bypass flows with the ESP model. If such models are
required, the centrifugal pump can be used.
Note: ESPs cannot be positioned at the first or last section boundary of a flowpath.
Jet pump
The purpose of the Jet pump is to convert a flow of high pressure/low velocity into a flow of low
pressure/high velocity, and thereby create suction that can draw fluid from another low pressure flowpath.
The combined fluids flow through a mixing tube and a venturi type diffuser, where the velocity is reduced
and the pressure is recovered.
The Jet pump connects three flowpaths: the high pressure (power fluid) flowpath, the low pressure (suction
fluid) flowpath and the outlet (mixture fluid) flowpath. Single-phase and multi-phase fluids can be used in
either flowpath.
Use the Jet pump model to simulate the ability to create suction, and thereby pump the (low pressure)
suction fluid to the surface/outlet. The simulation includes the effect of the jet pump on the flow dynamics
of the entire flow network.
Model description
The Jet pump connects three flowpaths: the high pressure (power fluid) flowpath, the low pressure (suction
fluid) flowpath and the outlet (mixture fluid) flowpath. Potential energy (pressure) in the power fluid is
converted to kinetic energy at the exit of the nozzle (low pressure and high velocity). Kinetic energy is
converted back to potential energy in the mixing tube and the diffuser.
- 246 -
The OLGA model
The power fluid enters at position (1) in the figure. Upon entering, the pressure is high and the velocity low.
The power fluid then flows through a nozzle. Downstream of the nozzle at point (3) the pressure is low and
the velocity high. This creates a suction which draws fluid from the low pressure flowpath. The combined
power- and suction-fluids then flow through the mixing tube and the Venturi type diffuser where pressure
recovery takes place.
As the fluids flow through the different parts of the Jet pump, four pressure changes can be distinguished.
One of these is the pressure drop as the suction fluid flows from point (2), where the diameter is Ds to
point (3) where it experiences a flow area equal to
The second pressure change is the pressure drop in the power fluid as it flows from point (1), where the
diameter is Di, to point (3), where the diameter is Dn. The last two pressure changes (pressure recovery)
are experienced by the mixture of power and suction fluid as it flows through the mixing tube and the
diffuser respectively.
The pressure drop calculations for the suction and the nozzle make use of the same calculation method as
the standard OLGA choke model. Frozen equilibrium (no mass transfer between phases) is assumed.
These two pressure drops are available as output variables called DPSUCTION and DPPOWER,
respectively. Critical flow may occur in these parts of the Jet pump, and critical velocities and flow rates are
therefore available as output variables (UCSUCTION, UCPOWER and GCSUCTION and GCPOWER).
More details about the standard OLGA choke model and how critical flow is computed and handled can be
found in Hydro valve.
The calculation of the pressure recovery for the mixture fluid as it flows through the mixing tube is
calculated based on conservation of momentum.The recovery part of the standard OLGA choke model is
used. The pressure recovery in the diffuser is calculated using the Bernoulli equation in the same way as
for a Venturi Valve. Refer to Venturi valve for details. The pressure changes in the mixing tube and the
diffuser are available as output variable DPMIXTUBE and DPDIFFUSER respectively.
The input keys in the Geometry group of the JETPUMP keyword relate to the figure in the following
manner:
 DINLET is Di in the figure.

 DSUCTION is Ds in the figure.
 DNOZZLE is Dn in the figure.
 DTHROAT is Dt in the figure.
 DOUTLET is Do in the figure.
The input keys in the Loss Coefficient group of the JETPUMP keyword enter the model in the manner
described in the following.
KNOZZLE relates to the discharge coefficient used in the pressure drop calculation for the nozzle
KSUCTION relates to the discharge coefficient used in the pressure drop calculation for the suction
KTHROAT relates to the discharge coefficient used in the pressure change calculation for the mixing tube
- 247 -
OLGA User manual
KDIFFUSER relates to the recovery tuning coefficient used in the pressure recovery calculation for the
diffuser
The JETLOSS key represents a different effect compared to the other loss coefficients. It relates the
pressure at the outlet of the nozzle (P3n) to the pressure at the suction inlet (P2) and the pressure in the
entrance of the throat (P3).
The JETLOSS can be interpreted as including the effect of how the nozzle outlet is positioned relative to
the mixing tube entrance. JETLOSS=0 represents that the nozzle ends inside the mixing tube and
JETLOSS=1 represents that the nozzle ends upstream of the mixing tube entrance as shown in the figure
below.
How to use
Input
The Jet pump has three flow connection terminals: Jet, Suction and Outlet.
 Connect the outlet of the high pressure flowpath to the Jet terminal.
 Connect the outlet of the low pressure flowpath to the Suction terminal.
 Connect the inlet of the flowpath where the mixture fluid is flowing in to the Outlet terminal.
The Jet pump has two groups of input keys in addition to the LABEL key. The two groups are the
Geometry group, which contains diameters, and the Loss Coefficients group, which contains loss
coefficients. Refer to Model description for a description of these keys and how they are used in the model.
Output
The Jet pump has its own set of output variables.
Notes
 The pressure drops in the Jet pump are calculated assuming that no mass transfer takes place (frozen
equilibrium).
 Counter current flow is disabled in the Jet pump. This means that different fluid phases must flow in
the same direction through the Jet pump.
 Tracer tracking cannot be used with the Jet pump.
 Plug-in cannot be used with the Jet pump.
- 248 -
The OLGA model
Optional Built-In Bypass and Recycle
The bypass and recycle line is included for the:
 Centrifugal pump
 Displacement pump
 OneSubsea pump
To activate OLGA's simplified Bypass feature, specify BYDIAMETER or BYCVTABLE, and connect a
bypass controller of your choice. Use BYCHECK to enable/disable a check valve in bypass line.
BYSTROKETIME sets the valve opening/closing time. (Only the OneSubsea pump supplies -
BYCVTABLE, BYCHECK and BYSTROKETIME).
To activate OLGA's simplified Recycle feature for any Centrifugal or Displacement Pump, specify at least
RECDIAMETER and MAXRECYCLE, plus any non-default values for RECPHASE, MINRECYCLE, and
ACCECOEFF. Then connect a recycle controller of your choice. The OneSubsea recycle is required, and
is specified with CHOKECV or CHOKEVTABLE.
Further details about the internal workings of these simplified Bypass and Recycle features are provided in
the following text, equations, and block flow diagrams.
A common multiphase transportation system with pump is shown in Figure 81.
Figure 81 Multiphase Transportation System with Pump
Within OLGA, this system is simplified as shown in Figure 82. Note that in this implementation the pump is
abstracted into a volume-less element on the section boundary J between section J-1 and section J. The
recycle flow is out of section J and into Section J-1, and the bypass flow out of section J-1 and into section
J.
No-slip flow is assumed for all of gas, liquid, and droplets moving through section boundary J, as:
OLGA also enables you to add a separate VALVE keyword at the same section boundary where a
centrifugal pump or OneSubsea pump is located. You can then close that optional OLGA Valve to block
any possible backflow transients (that might otherwise occur due to higher downstream pressure at any
moment when the centrifugal pump is shut down).
- 249 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 82 Multiphase Transportation System modeled in OLGA
The centrifugal pump model requires a pump table with the characteristics of the pump. The displacement
pump model requires a backflow table. The pump manufacturers usually characterize their pumps by
pump operating characteristics. There is a default implementation of such tables in OLGA. If other tables
are needed, they should be given with the TABLE keyword. Each of the characteristics is assigned a label,
which is referred to in the PUMP keyword.
You can choose the recycle flow as gas only, liquid mixture, water only, or fluid mixture.
Recycle and bypass flow
Recycle and bypass flows are only defined for centrifugal (not simplified) and displacement pumps. The
recycle flow, GR, is considered as the flow through a controlled choke. The flow is calculated with a given
pressure difference between the two sides of the choke, ΔPch, and the choke upstream conditions. The
choke upstream condition is taken from the pump downstream section (pump pressure side). The choke
flow can be regulated by a controller.
If the recycle flow is in subcritical condition, GR is calculated by:
where Cd is the choke discharge coefficient and Ach the choke opening area.
If the mass flow through the choke exceeds the critical flow rate, critical flow conditions is used. The flow
rate through a critical choke is governed by the choke upstream conditions and the choke opening. No
forward flow is allowed in the recycle loop.
The bypass flow, Gb, is controlled by a choke and calculated in the same way as for the recycle flow. If the
bypass flow line is opened, the fluid flows from the pump inlet to the pump outlet in the normal pumping
flow direction without going through the pump. Back flow is not allowed through the bypass line.
- 250 -
The OLGA model
Controlling the pump speed
1. Pump speed regulated by controller (All pump models(*) except PressureBoost):

1. Controlled manually by specifying time and speed series in the controller definition.
2. Regulated by a physical parameter. The speed is calculated by:
where Nmax is the maximum pump speed (defined by user), Nmin is the minimum pump speed
(defined by user) and u the signal from the controller.
2. Controlled by an override controller (only for centrifugal and displacement pumps):
To adapt the pump to the production change (because the recycle flow is at upper or lower limits), the
pump speed is changed automatically according to the required speed variation (speed acceleration).
The speed variation can be given in form of:
where A is a constant pump speed variation rate (acceleration). The speed variation stops when the
recycle flow is within a defined range below MAXRECYCLE and above MINRECYCLE.
3. If the maximum pump torque has been given by users (only for centrifugal and displacement pumps):
The effective pump torque is calculated from the total power input to the fluid, QPt :
where TQpump is given in [N/m], QPt is the total power input to the fluid. If the pump shaft torque is over
the limit ,the pump speed is reduced, and a warning message is given in the output file.
(*) The OneSubsea pump model has built in speed control, and input speed changes are restricted by a
speed rate change.
Compressor
A compressor is included to increase the pressure of the gas. The compressor is described by compressor
characteristics that give the pressure and temperature increase over the compressor as a function of flow
through the compressor and the rotational speed of the compressor. The compressor characteristics also
give information about the minimum inlet flow (surge flow) on which the compressor can operate. If the
inlet flow drops below the surge flow multiplied by a safety factor, a recirculation loop around the
compressor is opened. The recirculation loop secures stable conditions for the compressor. A heat
exchanger (cooler) can be included in the recirculation loop.
Model description
The compressor is modeled as a flow-dependent and rotational-speed-dependent pressure jump and

energy source. Any recirculation around the compressor is treated by a source into the section upstream of
the compressor, and a sink out of the section downstream of the compressor, as OLGA cannot handle
recirculation directly.
The compressor characteristics and the surge volume flow are given in the form of tables. The compressor
surge volume flow is the lowest volume flow the compressor can operate on without becoming unstable.
Compressor data needed for the model are found by linear interpolation in the compressor tables.
- 251 -
OLGA User manual
Pressure increase and derivatives of pressure increase are calculated from the pressure characteristics
and are used for setting new coefficients in the momentum equations. Temperature increase is calculated
from the temperature characteristics and is used for setting new coefficients in the energy equation.
The compressor speed and the recirculation around the compressor are governed by the control system.
In addition, the compressor speed is limited by a user-specified range. The surge volume flow calculated
from the compressor tables is used together with an optional security factor to establish a set point for the
controller that controls the recirculation around the compressor.
It is assumed that during operation the control system keeps the compressor within the bounds of validity
of the characteristics.
Compressor pressure step evaluation
The compressor pressure characteristics give compressor pressure ratio as a function of reduced
rotational speed and reduced mass flow, equation (56) below.
(56)
where л (-) is the pressure ratio, p1 (N/m2) is the inlet pressure, p2 (N/m2) is the outlet pressure, R (kg/s) is
reduced inlet mass flow and S (rpm) is reduced rotational speed. R and S are defined as
(57)
where G (kg/s) is the mass flow, Θ (-) is the normalized inlet pressure and δ (-) is the normalized inlet
temperature and r (rpm) is rotational speed. Θ and δ are defined as
where T1 is the inlet temperature given in Kelvin.
where P1 is the inlet pressure given in Pascal.
- 252 -
The OLGA model
Figure 83 shows a typical compressor characteristic diagram.
Figure 83 Compressor characteristic diagram
The pressure increase over the compressor is calculated from the compressor pressure characteristics.
For calculation of the operating point, the compressor speed is necessary. The speed is governed by the
control system and is limited by a user-specified range. The range is normally determined by the speed
range in the compressor tables.
(58)
where r is the compressor speed, and u is the signal from the control model. u is in the range from 0 to 1,
where u equal to 1 means that the compressor speed is at its maximum.
Compressor temperature calculation
To calculate gas temperatures, the power supplied by the compressor, PWc, is added as an enthalpy
source to the enthalpy balance for the pipe section following a compressor boundary. The temperature
resulting from this balance is used for calculating fluid properties, while the compressor outlet temperature
is only used for informative purposes.
Polytropic compression is assumed. The enthalpy source due to the compressor is:
where W is the mass flux through the compressor and Δz is the section length of the section downstream
of the boundary where the compressor is located.
For an inlet at pressure p1 and a density of r1, the power required for compression to an outlet pressure p2
is:
- 253 -
OLGA User manual
The relation between pressure ratio, temperature and the polytropic exponent n is:
The compressor temperature characteristics are also given in the form of tables, and the temperature ratio
is found by linear interpolation.
The polytropic factor (n-1)/n is calculated from pressure ratio and temperature ratio using equation (59).
(59)
Calculation of surge volume flow
The surge flow is in the form of tables, with reduced surge mass flow as a function of reduced compressor
speed, see Figure 83. The surge volume flow is used together with an optional security factor to establish
a set point for the anti-surge controller (ASC) that controls the recirculation around the compressor,
preventing unstable compressor operation. Reduced surge mass flow as a function of compressor speed
is found by linear interpolation.
For a compressor the surge volume flow is calculated as follows:
Recirculation flow modeling
Recirculation flow around a compressor is modeled as a set of negative and positive sources, because
OLGA cannot handle recirculation directly. The flow is controlled by a choke with the choke opening
governed by the control system.
The recirculation is between two neighboring sections with a compressor on the common boundary, see
Figure 84. Only gas is allowed to flow in the recirculation loop. The recirculation flow is treated as a source
into the section volume ahead of the compressor boundary, and a source out of the section volume after
the compressor boundary.
Figure 84 Recirculation loop
The pressure drop across the restriction is equal to the pressure difference between the sections
downstream and upstream of the compressor.
The recirculation flow is restricted by the critical pressure difference. If the pressure difference between the
section upstream and downstream of the compressor is higher than the critical value, the critical value is
used.
The pressure drop over the restriction is:
- 254 -
The OLGA model
Solving for W:
where the positive sign relates to a positive source, and the negative sign relates to a negative source. W
is the mass flux, ρg is the gas density in the section it is flowing out of (section after the compressor), D is
the diameter of the section with the source, and Do is the orifice diameter of the controlled choke.
For subcritical flow through the controlled choke the pressure difference between the section upstream and
downstream of the compressor is used in equation (i). For critical flow through the controlled choke, the
critical pressure difference is used for calculating the recirculation flow. Critical pressure difference is
based on single phase gas flow with constant specific heat ratio, γ = cp/cv. Specific heat ratio of 1.3 is used.
where pcrit is critical pressure ratio, p is the pressure in the section it is flowing out of and Δpch, crit is critical
pressure difference.
The energy leaving the section downstream of the compressor and entering the section upstream of the
compressor through the recirculation loop is calculated as follows.
hg is the specific gas enthalpy in the compressor downstream volume, Wrec,g is the mass flux based on the
section area of the section with a source and Δz is the section length of the section with a source.
A heat exchanger can also be included in the recirculation loop. The aim of the heat exchanger is to
extract energy to obtain a desired heat exchanger outlet temperature. In this case, the temperature of the
recirculation source entering the section upstream of the compressor has to be specified. The heat
exchanger is modeled as an ideal heat loss.
The energy source entering the upstream section in a situation with a heat exchanger in the recirculation
loop is calculated as:
is specific gas enthalpy based on the desired heat exchanger outlet temperature and pressure in the
section where the source is entering. Δhhex is specific enthalpy decrease in the heat exchanger. The
energy extracted through the heat exchanger is limited by the heat exchanger capacity.
The orifice opening of the controlled choke is governed by the control system. The control model also
takes care of the stroke time of the controlled choke. The orifice opening is calculated as:
where u is the signal from the control model, and is in the range from 0 to 1. u equal to 1 means that the
controlled choke is fully open.
- 255 -
OLGA User manual
How to use
To use a compressor, you must add a compressor and two controllers (speed controller and anti-surge
controller). There must be one compressor table for each compressor.
Note: The compressor cannot be positioned at the first or last section boundary of the pipeline. In that
position, the controlled bypass is unrealizable because it is defined as going from the downstream
section to the upstream section.
Note: It is recommended to avoid liquid flow through the compressor. Numerically, the compressor
model works with liquid phase present but the results make no sense.
Controlling rotational speed
You can specify the compressor minimum rpm, MINRPM, and maximum rpm, MAXRPM. These two
parameters determine the operating range of the compressor and they must be within the rpm range of the
com-pressor tables. A controller can be used to regulate the speed within the operating range. The speed
is calculated by equation (58) in Model description on page 251. If the speed controller is omitted, the
controller signal is zero and the compressor uses its minimum speed.
Note: If the controllers are omitted, the speed is kept at minimum speed (MINRPM) and the recycle loop
is closed.
Recycle loop
The anti-surge security factor, SECURITYFACTOR, determines the anti-surge con-trol line. To protect the
compressor against surge conditions, always select a security factor > 1. A typi-cal value for security factor
is from 1.1 to 1.3. A security factor of 1.2 means that the control valve in the recirculation loop starts to
open at a compressor inlet flow that is 20% higher than the surge flow speci-fied in the compressor tables.
The anti-surge controller (ASC) should be configured as a PI controller. The ASC is a kind of non-linear
controller that have two amplification factors, AMP1 and AMP2. AMP1 is used if the inlet flow to the
compressor is less than the surge flow, and AMP2 if the inlet is greater than the surge flow. Both AMP1
and AMP2 have to be negative, and the absolute value of AMP1 should be higher than the corresponding
absolute value of AMP2 to rapidly open the recycle valve and to impose an inertia to close it again. A short
stroke time for the recycle valve should also be selected. Select also the controller initial output signal
(BIAS), equal to zero. To send information from the compressor to the ASC about surge flow, connect the
OUTSIG_n out-signal from the compressor to the MEASRD input-signal of the controller. Then select
QGSURGE as the measured variable.
If the anti-surge controller is omitted, the controller signal is zero, which causes the recycle choke to be
closed, that is, there is no flow in the recycle loop.
To add a cooler to the recirculation loop, set COOLER=ON and also set the COOLCAPACITY.
Only gas flows in the recirculation loop. Critical flow calculations are based on single-phase gas flow with a
constant specific heat ratio of 1.3. If the pressure in the section upstream of the compressor exceeds the
pressure in the section downstream of it, the recirculation flow is set to zero.
- 256 -
The OLGA model
Phase split node

The phase split node is based upon the functionality of an internal node (NODE TYPE = INTERNAL), but
the phase fractions can be specified in the outgoing branches. For a normal internal node, the composition
flowing out of each terminal connected is equal to the total composition in the node itself, but for a phase
split node there will be different distributed phase flows through each of the outgoing branches according
to the actual type of terminal chosen. The behavior of the phase split node can be seen as a simple type of
network SEPARATOR, where there are no level controls and no internal separator efficiencies included.
The phase split node is recommended to be used in a finger type separator and in nodes where the in/over
pipe connections where the phases tend to have an uneven split.
Model description
The phase split node has an arbitrary number of inlets/outlets. It has six different types of terminals: GAS,
OIL, WATER, LIQUID, DRYGAS and MIXTURE.
Terminal = GAS - gas +droplets
Terminal = OIL - oil bulk
Terminal = WATER - water bulk
Terminal = LIQUID - oil and water bulk
Terminal = DRYGAS - gas only
Terminal = MIXTURE - all phases within the node itself(default)
When the volume fraction of the connected phase(s) is sufficiently low(0.01), the flow in the outgoing
branch will be as from an internal NODE.
How to use
Input
Connections to external pipelines
The following connections are defined:
 MIXTURE_1, … MIXTURE _N inlets and outlets

 GAS_1, … GAS_N outlets
 OIL_1, …OIL_N outlets
 WATER_1, …WATER_N outlets
 LIQUID_1, ... LIQUID_N outlets
 DRYGAS _1, … DRYGAS _N outlets
Internal volume
If the volume is not given, it is by default assigned a value by OLGA. In some cases it might be more
useful to give a larger value for the key VOLUME to get more stable node conditions during the
simulations.
Output
All of the output variables specified under section 'VOLUME VARIABLES' that are available for the internal
NODE are also available for the phase split node.
- 257 -
OLGA User manual
Notes
The phase split node is not intended for design purposes. It only distributes the phase fractions in the
outgoing branches according to the user defined type of terminals chosen:
 The phase split node is only treated as a simple volume tank with no internal separation equipment.
 There are no level controls and no separator efficiencies.
Separator
The network separator is not intended to accurately model separation phenomena, but is meant to include
the influence of a separator on transient pipeline dynamics. The behavior of the separator is based mainly
upon user given input for the separation efficiency (gas/liquid, oil/water), and set critical levels for oil and
water drainage.
You are recommended to use the separator model whenever a 'real' separator is present in the flow
network and the effect of the downstream flow pattern is of interest. If it is only interesting to look at the
upstream flow pattern, it sometimes is appropriate to replace the separator with an ordinary pipe with large
diameter to stabilize the boundary conditions and in that way avoid the need for more a complex
specification of outgoing pipes, valves and controllers linked up to the separator.
It can also be useful to employ a separator as a downstream boundary condition for controlling the
boundary pressure. This can reduce unwanted flow oscillations in the network compared to using a
constant pressure boundary condition.
Model description
Separator type
The separator can be two-phase or three-phase and the geometry orientation is horizontal, vertical or table
specified.
Connections to external pipelines
The separator has an arbitrary number of inlets/outlets. Two phase separators must have connected at
least one inlet, one gas-outlet and one oil-outlet to pipes. Three phase separators must in addition also
have one water-outlet connected.
Valves/controllers
The separator has no internal valves and controllers, so they have to be specified on the outgoing pipes.
Level control
The separator levels are controlled by the valves and controllers in the outlet pipes. For a three-phase
separator, the water level limit for when the water will be drained together with the oil can be specified in
the separator keys:
 HHWATHOLDUP
or
 HHWATLEVEL
- 258 -
The OLGA model
Separation efficiencies
1. Liquid carryover in gas outlet.
The gas-liquid separation efficiency is defined as one minus the volume fraction of the liquid droplets
in the gas outlet stream. By default, the gas-liquid separation efficiency is equal to one, that is, no
liquid carryover in the gas outlet. You can, however, specify a constant gas-liquid separation
efficiency, effg by the key EFFICIENCY in the keyword SEPARATOR. The liquid droplet volume
fraction in the gas stream is then equal to one minus the value assigned to EFFICIENCY.
For three phase flow the liquid droplet volume fraction is distributed to water and oil droplet volume
fractions according to the water and oil volume fractions in the settled liquid in the separator.
To prevent instabilities in the separator when the liquid holdup becomes very large, it is possible to
specify two input keys, EFFLOW and EFFHIGH, to assure a continuous transition from effg =
EFFICIENCY to effg = 0.0. EFFLOW is the liquid volume fraction when efficiency is being reduced
and EFFHIGH is the liquid volume fraction when efficiency becomes zero and the gas outlet is treated
as a normal flowpath. The gas-liquid separation efficiency, effg is modified by the following set of
rules:
The liquid volume fraction, αl ≤ EFFLOW:
αl > EFFLOW and αl < EFFHIGH:
αl ≥ EFFHIGH:
2. Oil in water drain.
The oil volume fraction in the water drain is determined by the following relation for separation
efficiency:
where Kso is the time constant, OILTCONST, for separating oil from water and Trsp is the residence
time which is defined as the separator liquid volume / liquid volume flow into the separator.
The oil volume fraction in the water drain is then 1 - eff0.
3. Water in oil drains.
The water volume fraction in the oil drains is determined by an equation similar to the one above:
where Ksw is the time constant, WATTCONST, for separating water from oil. If the water level is above
a certain limit, HHWATHOLDUP or HHWATLEVEL, the water above this limit is assumed to be
drained together with the oil and the separation efficiency for separating water from oil is modified as
follows:
- 259 -
OLGA User manual
where Hof is the ratio of the water layer height above the limit to the liquid height above the same limit.
The water volume fraction in the oil stream is then 1eff w.
Heat transfer
The heat transfer, qtr into the separator or out from the separator is given by:
where U is the overall heat transfer coefficient, A is the surface area, Tsep is the separator temperature and
Tamb is the ambient temperature. If adiabatic temperature option is given for the total flow network, U is set
to zero for all separators in the network.
How to use
Figure 85 An illustration of a three-phase separator
Input
Connections to external flowpaths
For a two phase separator, the following connections are defined:
 INLET_1, …INLET_N inlets

 GAS_1, … GAS_N outlets (Use GAS_2 to model flare outlet)
 OIL_1, …OIL_N outlets(Use OIL_2 to model emergency outlet)
For a three phase separator, the following connections are defined:
 INLET_1, …INLET_N inlets

 GAS_1, … GAS_N outlets (Use GAS_2 to model flare outlet)
 OIL_1, …OIL_N outlets(Use OIL_2 to model emergency outlet)
 WATER_1, …WATER_N outlets(Use WATER_2 to model emergency outlet)
Initial conditions
 Key INITTEMPERATURE gives initial value for the separator temperature

 Key INITPRESSURE gives initial value for the separator pressure
 Key INITWATLEVEL gives initial value for the water level
 Key INITOILLEVEL gives initial value for the oil level
- 260 -
The OLGA model
The feed or drilling fluid given to the separator must be consistent with the initoilevel and initwaterlevel.
That is, if the initial level says there is gas, the feed must have the gas phase when flashed at the
separator P and T. The same applies for other phases. If a test case contains only oil, the initoilevel must
be set to be equal to the separator height.
Geometry
There are two methods to specify the geometry of the separator. One method is to specify the separator
length, LENGTH and the separator diameter, DIAMETER. The surface area and volume is then calculated
by using the knowledge of the cylindrical form. The other method is to define a specific level table
LEVELTABLE, a set of user defined values giving the volume as a function of the level (height). Using this
method the surface area, SURFACEAREA also has to be given.
Separator valves/controllers
The separator has no internal valves and controllers. All valves must be defined on the outgoing pipes and
might be positioned at the first section boundary of the pipes. The controllers are connected to the valves
and must also be defined outside the separator. It is recommended that the water valve opening is
controlled by a water level controller, the oil valve opening is controlled by an oil level controller and the
gas valve opening is controlled by a separator pressure controller.
Output
Many of the plot variables specified under Volume Output Variables on page 554 are available for the
separator. In addition, a number of separator specific plot variables are available:
 Mass flow rates for each mass field for each pipe connection.
 Separator levels (oil, water).
 Separator efficiency.
Notes
The network separator is not intended for design purposes. It only simulates a predefined behavior of a
'real' separator.
 The separator is only treated as a simple volume tank with no internal separation equipment.
 The separator efficiencies are user given.
 No wall temperatures are calculated.
 There are no time restrictions for calculation of the flash contributions. The total mass internally is
taken into account and treated as at equilibrium. Due to the internal geometry of the separator, this
might give incorrect results if the separator pressure or temperature suddenly changes.
Heat exchanger
A heat exchanger is included to raise or lower the temperature in the fluid. There are two different types of
heat exchangers in OLGA: 'Setpoint Heat Exchanger' and 'Controlled Heat Exchanger'. Both can be
configured to give practically the same results, but each is configured differently and this allows for
different usages.
When a heat exchanger is used in the anti-surge recirculation loop of a compressor, it is specified through
the keys of the COMPRESSOR keyword (keys COOLER and COOLCAPACITY). Otherwise, use this
HEATEXCHANGER keyword to create a heat exchanger.
- 261 -
OLGA User manual
Model description
The setpointheat exchanger is an idealized heat source/sink, and no descrip-tion of the real heat transfer
process is included. It simply provides a way of specifying a temperature at the heat exchanger outlet,
consistent with the energy equation in OLGA. In the setpoint heat exchanger, a heat source/sink is
estimated that gives the specified fluid temperature for a particular section. More specifically, the heat
exchanged is equal to the enthalpy difference corresponding to the difference between the inlet
temperature and the specified outlet temperature of the heat exchanger.
The controlled heat exchanger has a simpler model. In the controlled heat exchanger, the effect of the
heat exchanger is determined by the controller system. The heat source/sink is not estimated as the heat
exchanger has no knowledge of any target temperature. The CONTROLLER for the heat exchanger
knows the current temperature and the target temperature and adjusts the effect of the heat exchanger to
obtain the target temperature.
How to use
To select between a setpoint heat exchanger and a controlled exchanger, simply set the TYPE.
To use a setpoint heat exchanger, specify the position, an outlet temperature and an upper limit of the heat
source, the capacity.
To use a controlled heat exchanger, specify the position and the capacity, but instead of setting the outlet
temperature, connect the heat exchanger to a controller. The controller typically measures the temperature
at a specified position along the pipeline and compare the measured temperature to a setpoint. Based on
the difference between the setpoint and the measured temperature, the controller delivers a signal to the
heat exchanger that determines how large a fraction of the heat exchanger’s capacity is applied. Different
types of controllers can be used, making the input of a controlled heat exchanger more flexible than that of
the setpoint heat exchanger. For example, you can measure the average temperature over several
sections by using a Linear Combination Controller.
Note: A heat exchanger can not be positioned at the first or last section boundary of a pipeline.
Leak
Leak provides a means to let mass to escape from a pipe based on the difference between the pressure
inside the pipe and an outside pressure. The mass escaping through a leak either can be removed from
the system altogether, or can be re-injected into another part of the system modeled. Thus, a leak can
serve both to model leaks/pipe ruptures as well as, for example, gas lift and unloading valves.
Model description
The flow rate through a leak is calculated from the flow equations of a valve/choke. Both sub-critical and
critical flow is supported in OLGA. For subcritical flow, the flowrate depends on both the upstream and the
downstream pressure of the leak. For critical flow, the flow rate is independent of the downstream
pressure. The leak flow is always limited to critical flow.
There are five different types of flow equations to choose from. Depending on the flow equation type
selected, the flow is either removed from the system (external leak) or is routed to any pipe section in any
branch by using the subkey TOPOSITION (internal leak). For an external leak, only flow out of the system
is allowed. For an internal leak, depending on the flow equation type, a check valve function can be
switched on or off. When the check valve function is on, the flow can be only from the position where the
leak is defined to the destination position. When the check function is off, the flow can be in both
directions.
- 262 -
The OLGA model
The following types of flow equations are available.
 OLGA choke model. The flow is calculated, based on the opening area and discharge coefficient, by
the OLGA choke model. The option can be applied for an internal and an external leak. For an internal
leak, the check valve function can be applied. The opening of the leak is regulated by a controller. For
details of the choke model, see the description of the OLGA Hydro valve model.
 OLGA venturi model. The flow is calculated, based on the opening area and loss coefficients for the
entry- and exit-cones, by the OLGA venturi valve model. The option can be applied for an internal and
an external leak. For an internal leak, the check valve function can be applied. The opening of the leak
is regulated by a controller. For details of this model, see the description of the OLGA venturi valve.
 CV table of the valve. The flow is calculated by the valve sizing equation. The option is applicable to
both an internal and an external leak. For an internal leak, the check valve function can be applied.
The opening of the valve is regulated by a controller. See the description of the flow equation based
on the Cv table.
 Gas lift valve (GLV) performance curves in a tabular form. The flow is calculated based on the gas lift
performance given in tables. This option is only applicable for internal leaks. The check valve function
is always on. The opening is controlled by the casing and tubing pressure. See the description of GLV
performance.
 GLV performance from the correlations licensed through the Valve Performance Clearinghouse TM
(VPCTM). The method is similar to the third option, but the flow is calculated based on the correlations
licensed through VPCTM. This option is only applicable for internal leaks. The check valve function is
by default on, but you can switch it off. The size of the valve opening is determined by the correlations
from the data base. See the description of GLV performance.
Remark:
The fluid upstream of the leak is assumed to be well mixed, that is, the phase mass fractions flowing
through the leak equal the phase mass fractions of the section the leak is connected to.
How to use
Position the leak. Leaks can be placed anywhere along the pipeline. A LEAK has two main functions:
1. It can be used to model a valve or rupture where the mass out of the pipe is removed from the
simulated system, that is, the mass is lost to the surroundings (requires the key BACKPRESSURE).
2. It can also be used to model interconnections in the model, where the mass out of one section is
transferred to mass into another section (requires the key TOPOSITION). BACKPRESSURE cannot
be defined in this case as the back pressure is equal to the pressure in the section defined in
TOPOSITION.
Back flow is not allowed for functionality 1, that is, there is no back flow if the section pressure is lower
than the back pressure.
For the second function, five valve types are available: GASLIFTTABLE, GASLIFTVALVE, CVTABLE,
OLGAVALVE and OLGAVENTURI.
Back flow is not allowed for valve type GASLIFTTABLE. Back flow is allowed for valve types CVTABLE,
OLGAVALVE, OLGAVENTURI and GASLIFTVALVE.
 If valve type is GASLIFTTABLE, gas lift tables, which define the GLV response curves, must be
referred to.
 If valve type is GASLIFTVALVE, the GLV response is computed by correlations, using parameters
which are read from a database. This allows for use of the Valve Performance ClearinghouseTM
(VPCTM) database.
- 263 -
OLGA User manual
 If valve type is CVTABLE, OLGAVALVE or OLGAVENTURI, the flow area can be manipulated by a
controller. Connect a controller to the leak input signal terminal VALVESIG. If no controller is
connected to the leak, the entire flow area is used. See Valve - Purpose for details.
Note: All valve types can be used for functionality 1. See Gas Lift Valve (GLV) for more information.
Signal connections
The LEAK has one optional input terminal, VALVESIG. VALVESIG scales the LEAK flow area.
Remark:
Leaks are discarded in the steady state preprocessor.
Related keywords:
LEAK (on Flowpath) on page 457, POSITION (on Flowpath) on page 442
Loss
Loss provides a generic means to account for pressure losses not intrinsically included in OLGA, for
example, pressure losses associated with bends, local contractions/expansions, or other type of
obstructions encountered.
Loss - Model description
A generic loss is modeled in terms of a loss coefficient, k, according to
where ρ is the density and U is the fluid velocity. The model provides two pressure loss coefficients, one
for positive flow and one for negative flow, to allow for asymmetric pressure losses depending on flow
direction.
How to use
1. Add a loss to the flowpath.

2. Position the loss, see Position on page 36.
3. Define the loss coefficients. POSCOEFF is the loss coefficient used for flow in the positive flow
direction along the flowpath while NEGCOEFF is used for flow in the opposite direction.
Related keywords
LOSS (on Flowpath) on page 460, POSITION (on Flowpath) on page 442
- 264 -
The OLGA model
Control systems
Controller introduction
Controllers are, in OLGA terms, a network component labeled 'signal component', which means that they
can communicate with other network components by sending and receiving signals. Other network
components can be other signal components or flow components (that is, a branch). Controllers are typical
signal components but also other types of network components can be signal components.
All controllers have one common key; LABEL, which is used to identify the controller.
There are 13 different types of controller:
 Algebraic controller on page 270

 ASC controller on page 271
 Cascade controller on page 273
 ESD controller on page 275
 Manual controller on page 278
 Override controller on page 278
 PID controller on page 280
 PSV controller on page 286
 Scaler controller on page 288
 Selector controller on page 289
 STD controller on page 291
 Switch controller on page 292
 Table controller on page 293
Both analog and digital controllers can be simulated in OLGA (see Analog vs. digital controllers for further
details).
A controller can be set to one of five different modes operation, either by using time series in the MODE
sub-key or by hooking a defined controller up to the MODE terminal (see Controller modes for further
details).
In addition to implementing the possibility to switch the controller mode, the current version of OLGA also
implements the possibility to 'activate' and 'deactivate' the controllers by hooking an external controller up
to the ACTIVATE terminal (see controller activation/deactivation for further details).
The controller output is constrained; see Constraining the controller output for further details.
The most advanced use of the OLGA controllers utilizes the possibilities of interconnecting controllers by
the use of terminals. A description to the different terminals is given in controller details.
- 265 -
OLGA User manual
Controller details
Figure 86 below shows a block diagram of how different inputs and outputs relate to different parts of the
controller implementation.
Figure 86 Overall block diagram for controller implementation.
In Figure 86 above and Figure 87 below:
 Inputs in terms of sub-keys are given in boxes framed by an orange line.

 Inputs given through terminals are given in boxes framed by a green line.
 Internal calculation boxes are framed by a black line and gray background color.
The larger block Controller function + Controller mode in Figure 86, implements:
 the controller functionality given by the controller type

 the controller modes
 the controller activation deactivation
Output A from the Controller function + Controller mode block represents the unconstrained output. The
unconstrained output is checked against sub-keys MAX/MINSIGNAL and forms the constrained output B.
Finally, output B is checked against a rate of change constrains (OPENINGTIME and CLOSINGTIME) to
form the final constrained output CONTR.
Note: The additional outputs SATURATED and RATELIMITED are used to signal saturation and rate of
change limitation to other controllers.
- 266 -
The OLGA model
Figure 87 Implementation of controller modes and activation/deactivation mechanisms.
Figure 87 shows the implementation of modes and activation/deactivation mechanisms. Depending on the
controller type, the controller function block might need the Setpoint sub-key. Controller type PID is an
example of a controller type that makes use of the Setpoint sub-key, whereas controller type OVERRIDE
does not use the Setpoint sub-key. The controller function block can also use additional terminals and sub-
keys not shown in Figure 87. If the mode is AUTOMATIC (mode value one), the Setpoint is taken from the
sub-keys and if mode is EXTERNALSETPOINT (mode value four), the Setpoint is connected to the
Setpoint terminal. This is illustrated by the upper left switch in Figure 87.
The lower left switch in the figure determines how MODE is set. This switch cannot be changed during run-
time. If a controller is connected to the MODE terminal, its value is obtained through the terminal that
determines the mode of the controller, irrespective of what is set in the MODE sub-key. If no controller is
connected to the MODE terminal, the MODE sub-key determines the mode of the controller.
 If MODE is AUTOMATIC or EXTERNALSETPOINT, the output of the controller function (CF) block is
routed through the larger switch in the figure (position one or four at the input of the switch) and the
corresponding setpoint is connected to the controller function.
 If MODE is MANUAL, the manual output signal is routed through the switch (position two at the input
of the switch).
 When the MODE is EXTERNALSIGNAL, the SIGNAL TERMINAL is connected to the output of the
switch (position three at the input of the switch).
 When MODE is FREEZE, the lower memory block is connected to the output of the switch (position
five at the input of the switch). The memory blocks hold the previous output value. Thus the output is
frozen (kept constant).
The activation/deactivation mechanism is illustrated by the switch with two inputs and memory block on the
right in the figure.
 If the controller is activated (ACTIVATE = true, or value greater or equal to 0.5), the activate switch is
in position two connecting the controller to the output A.
 If the controller is deactivated (ACTIVATE = false, or value less than 0.5), the activate switch is in
position one connecting the output A to the previous value, thus the output is frozen (kept constant).
- 267 -
OLGA User manual
Controller mode
A controller in OLGA can be set in one of the five different modes:
Automatic
In MODE = AUTOMATIC, the controller behaves according to the controller function as specified for the
different controller types. For those controllers that make use of setpoint, the value in MODE =
AUTOMATIC is taken from the SETPOINT key.
Manual
In MODE = MANUAL, the controller function is bypassed and the controller output is set according to the
time series definition of key MANUALOUTPUT.
External signal
In MODE = EXTERNALSIGNAL, the controller function is bypassed and the controller output is set
according to the external controller connected to the SIGNAL terminal.
External setpoint
The controller MODE = EXTERNALSETPOINT is similar to MODE = AUTOMATIC, except that the
setpoint is taken from the controller connected to the SETPOINT terminal.
Freeze
In MODE = FREEZE, the controller function is bypassed and the controller output is kept constant (equal
to the previous output value).
The controller MODE can be manipulated either by time series or by another controller. To manipulate the
mode of a controller by time series, specify the sequence in the MODE sub-key. The predefined literals:
AUTOMATIC value 1
MANUAL value 2
EXTERNALSIGN value 3
AL
EXTERNALSETP value 4
OINT
FREEZE value 5
are used when specifying the MODE through MODE sub-key in the GUI and input file. The MODE sub-key
is interpreted together with the TIME sub-key.
When you use the terminal to change the mode of a controller you must connect an external controller to
the MODE terminal. For example, to manipulate the mode of controller A by a controller labeled A.MODE
connect controller A.MODE to the MODE terminal of controller A. The mode of controller A id the
dependent on the output value of A.MODE
A.MODE < 1.5 gives AUTOMATIC
1.5 <= A.MODE < 2.5 gives MANUAL
- 268 -
The OLGA model
2.5 < = A.MODE < 3.5 gives EXTERNALSIGNAL
3.5 < = A.MODE < 4.5 gives EXTERNALSETPOINT
4.5 < = A.MODE gives FREEZE
All controllers except Table and Scaler have MODE implemented.
The definition on MODE through the use of the MODE terminal overrules the definition of MODE given by
the MODE sub-key.
Controller activation/deactivation
In addition to implementing the possibility to switch the controller mode, the current version of OLGA also
implements the possibility to 'activate' and 'deactivate' the controllers by hooking an external controller up
to the ACTIVATE terminal.
A controller A might be deactivated and activated by connecting an external controller A.ACTIVATE to the
ACTIVATE terminal of controller A. Then controller A is active if the output of A.ACTIVATE is greater or
equal to 0.5. When a controller is 'deactivated' (A.ACTIVATE < 0.5) the controller function is bypassed and
the controller output is kept constant (equal to the previous output value). When a controller is activated
the output is calculated according to the controller function and any specification of MODE.
The deactivation of controllers takes precedence over controller function and mode. For further details see
the description of the controller details.
Actuator time of controlled device
There are no restrictions on the rate of change of the out-put from the controller algorithms. The output
from the controller frequently changes faster than the device is cap-able of following. This situation is taken
care of by passing all output from the controllers through an actuator filter that computes a 'real' output (as
observed by the devices) according to the rule:
or
where
tact,open The actuator time when increasing U
tact,close The actuator time when decreasing U
Δt The time step
old The previous output signal from the controller
U The output signal from the controller
Umax The maximum output signal from the controller
Umin The minimum output signal from the controller
- 269 -
OLGA User manual
The actuator time is specified as the stroke time or the time required to open/close. You specify the
minimum and maximum controller output signal, Umin and Umax. These two parameters determine the
operating range of the controller. Usually, the operating range is from 0 to 1, that is, an output of 0 from a
controller operating on a valve means that the valve is closed, whereas an output of 1 means that the
valve is fully open.
Analog vs. digital controllers
For all the controller types, the digital controller option can be selected by using the key SAMPLETIME.
The difference between analog and digital sampling in an OLGA simulation is as follows:
The analog controller collects input and gives a corresponding output at each simulation time step. The
MAXCHANGE sub-key specifies the maximum allowed change in controller output from one time step to
the next. The default value is 0.2. The automatic integration time step mechanism ensures that the relative
change in the output signal of the controller from one time step to the next never exceeds MAXCHANGE.
The digital controller collects input and generates a corresponding output at time points separated by time
intervals given in sub-key SAMPLETIME. There can be one or more OLGA integration time steps in
between each sample time point. The automatic time step control assures that a simulation time point
always agrees with a sample time point (to the accuracy specified in the MAXCHANGE sub-key). The
output signal from the controller is kept constant during the sample time interval.
Constraining the controller output

The controller output is constrained in two steps. First, the controller output is checked against signal
constrains. Second, the controller output is checked against rate of change constraints.
The signal constraints are specified in the keys MAXSIGNAL and MINSIGNAL.
If the controller output is greater than or equal to MAXSIGNAL, then the output signal is set equal to
MAXSIGNAL and the SAUTRATED output is set equal to 1.0 to signal 'high saturation'.
If the controller output is less than or equal to MINSIGNAL, then the output is set equal to MINSIGNAL and
the SATURATED output is set equal to -1.0 to signal “low saturation”.
If the rate of change in the controller output violates the OPENINGTIME (or STROKETIME), the controller
output is set equal to the maximum allowed output, satisfying the rate of change constraint and the
RATELIMITED variable is set equal to 1.0 to signal a 'high rate of change saturation'. If the rate of change
in the controller output violates the CLOSINGTIME (or STROKETIME), the controller output is set equal to
the minimum allowed output satisfying the rate of change constraint and the RATELIMITED variable is set
equal to -1.0 to signal a 'low rate of change saturation'.
Algebraic controller
The algebraic controller is used when algebraic equations and logical expressions are required to
manipulate the input signals into a desired controller output. The algebraic controller issues a control signal
to a device (for example, a valve) or as an input signal to other controllers. Examples of use are:
 Valve opening depending on more than one signal and an algebraic expression.
 Valve opening depending on a logical expression.
 Activation/deactivation of controllers based on a logical expression.
 Non-linear transformation of a measured signal.
- 270 -
The OLGA model
Model description
The algebraic controller takes a number of input signals and combines these according to the specified
VARIABLEFUNCTION key.
The computed output signal is affected by maximum, minimum constraints and by rate of change
constraints (opening, closing time or stroke time). See Constraining the controller output and Actuator time
of controlled device.
How to use
Connect the required input signal(s) to the INPSIG_1..N terminal(s). Specify the operators to act on the
input signal(s) in the VARIABLEFUNCTION key. Connect the controller output signal CONTR_1..N to a
device variable.
The figure below shows how multiple controller blocks can be combined in one algebraic controller.
ASC controller
The main purpose of the ASC unit, is to prevent a compressor from operating to the left of the surge line in
a compressor performance map. For more information, see the following figures: Figure 83 Compressor
characteristic diagram, Figure 84 Recirculation loop and Figure 88 Anti Surge Controller.
Model description
An ASC should be able to open the recirculation valve very fast to prevent a dangerous surge condition.
This can be achieved by choosing a high amplification factor for the ASC and selecting a recycle valve with
a short stroke time. But the ASC must also be capable of managing a situ-ation where the compressor inlet
or discharge is closed. The high amplification factor could give excessive compensation, which would
cause the recirculation valve to hunt between open and closed position and aggravate the surge due to
- 271 -
OLGA User manual
pressure and flow pulsation. Therefore, it is necessary to have a controller that can operate on a non-linear
control algorithm. In essence, the controller applies one level of amplification and integral action to a
positive error input signal and a different level of amplification and integral action to a negative error input
signal. In this way, the recycle valve can be opened rapidly while an inertia is imposed when it is closed
again.
The ASC unit uses a standard PID controller formula, except that it allows for two different controller
amplifications (AMP1 and AMP2) that are necessary when operating on a non-linear control algorithm.
AMP1 is used when the deviation parameter (e, see equation (61) in PID - Model description) is negative
(left of anti surge control-line in the compressor performance map) and AMP2 when it is positive. The anti
surge control-line is the setpoint for the ASC unit and is calculated by multiplying the compressor surge
flow at different RPM's with a constant security factor specified by the user through the compressor input
group, COMPRESSOR (that is, a security factor of 1.2 means that the set point for the ASC unit is 20%
higher than the surge flow). The surge flow at different RPM's, is specified in the compressor data file. The
surge flow increases with increasing RPM, which means that the setpoint for the ASC unit is not constant.
By using a large AMP1 and a (corresponding) small AMP2, the anti surge control valve is forced to a rapid
opening whereas the closing operation is more relaxed. Figure 88 shows the ASC application.
Figure 88 Anti Surge Controller
The cascade controller uses the PID algorithm, see Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Algorithm. The
ASC controller has the same functionality as the PID controller, in addition to the functionality described in
this section. See PID controller.
How to use
1. Connect the compressor output (QGSURGE) to the ASC controller setpoint (SETPOINT). (Connect
the compressor CONTR to the ASC setpoint and specify QGSURGE as variable.) This is the volume
flow (default unit m3/s) at predicted surge multiplied with a security factor. The security factor is given
in the compressor SECURITYFACTOR key.
2. Put a transmitter at the same section boundary as the compressor. Connect the gas volume flow QG
to the ASC controller measurement terminal (MEASRD). Make sure that QG and QGSURGE have the
same units. The MEASRD terminal must be connected.
3. Connect the ASC controller output to the Compressor ASVSIG input terminal.
- 272 -
The OLGA model
Figure 89 shows the connection possibilities of the ASC controller.
Figure 89 ASC controller connection terminals
Cascade controller
The purposes of a cascade control loop are to:
1. reduce the effects of some disturbances

2. improve the dynamic performance of the control loop
Cascade control is used when there are disturbance associated with the manipulated variable, or when the
final control element exhibits nonlinear behavior. To achieve this, cascade control utilizes multiple
feedback loops.
Examples of use:
Level control in a separator. The separator holdup changes are slow compared to flow dynamics. See
Figure 90 Cascade control.
Temperature control when two fluid flows are heat exchanged. The temperature dynamics are slow
compared to the flow dynamics.
Model description
As illustrated below in Figure 90, a cascade control uses two (or more) controllers with the output of the
primary controller changing the setpoint of the secondary controller. The output of the secondary controller
regulates the control device, here the drain valve.
Figure 90 Cascade control
The OLGA cascade controller represents the inner loop. That is, the secondary controller shown in Figure
90. The cascade controller uses the PID algorithm, see Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) Algorithm.
See also the PID Controller Model description on page 280. The Cascade controller has the same
functionality as the PID controller, in addition to the functionality described in this section.
- 273 -
OLGA User manual
The cascade controller can be in normal or extended mode. The difference between the two is how the
setpoint of the secondary controller is determined.
For the normal cascade controller, the setpoint of the secondary controller is determined by the output of
the primary controller:
where S is the setpoint of the secondary controller, Smin is the minimum setpoint, Smax is the maximum
setpoint and Cp is the output from the primary controller.
For the extended cascade controller, the setpoint is calculated differently:
where
if
if
Sn setpoint of the secondary controller at the current time point
Sn-1 setpoint of the secondary controller at the previous time point
Cp output from primary controller
Cp,min minimum of output from primary controller
Cp,max maximum of controller output from primary controller
Ps setpoint of the primary controller
dt numerical time step (tn - tn-1)
PM moving averaged of the primary controller variable P
Tav user defined (moving) averaging time period
C constant that can take two different values
C1 user defined constant
C2 user defined constant
Cswitch user defined constant
For the level control as illustrated above, suppose the separator pressure increases. The pressure drop
over the drain valve is larger, so the liquid flow increases. With a single level controller, the drain flow rate
is not corrected until the increased drain flow decreases the liquid level. Thus, the separator pressure
disturbs both the liquid level and the liquid drain rate.
- 274 -
The OLGA model
With the cascade control loop, the flow controller (secondary controller) immediately sees the change in
the flow rate and correct the valve opening to return the drain flow rate to the setpoint set by the level
controller. Thus it gives a better control on the liquid level and a smoother liquid drain rate.
How to use
The cascade control loop is built as two separate PID controllers, where the output from the primary
controller is used as a setpoint of the secondary controller.
The cascade controller requires that the measurement terminal (MEASRD) and the setpoint terminal
(SETPOINT) are connected.
Figure 91 shows the connection possibilities of the Cascade controller.
Figure 91 Cascade controller connection terminals
Note: Secondary loop process dynamics should be at least four times faster than primary loop process
dynamics.
ESD controller
Emergency-Shut-Down (ESD) logics are used to avoid damage on the process equipment and the
pipeline. As an ESD controller closes, output goes from 1 to 0, when a measured process variable rises
above (or fall below) a safety limit.
The ESD controller is used to model safety control systems.
Example of use
Shutdown of a pump downstream a separator. If the liquid level in a separator becomes too low, gas might
flow in the pump feed. Gas in the feed might damage the pump.
Model description
Under normal operation the ESD controller output is set to the maximum value (fully open), as opposed to
PSV where the output is set to the minimum value (closed) in normal operation. The purpose with the ESD
controller is then to drive the controller output to the minimum value within the controller stroke time when
a certain situation occurs. Normally, the controller is connected to an emergency shutdown valve and then
the result of the controller action is to close the valve.
If the key OPENMODE is set to ABOVE, the controller monitors the measured variables and compares
them to the corresponding setpoint variables. If one or more measured variable goes above the setpoint,
the ESD controller performs its action and drives the output to the minimum value specified in key
MINSIGNAL. If key RESET is specified, the ESD controller resets its output to the value specified by the
- 275 -
OLGA User manual
key MAXSIGNAL, when all measured variables become less than the reset value (that is, the controller
opens the valve connected to the controller). Figure 92 shows the behavior of the ESD controller when key
OPEMMODE is set to ABOVE, SETPOINT is 80 and RESET is 30. The measured variable (controller
input) is shown in red and the corresponding controller output is shown in black.
Figure 92 SD with opening mode above, setpoint equal to 80 and reset equal to 30.
If the key OPENMODE is set to BELOW, the controller monitors the measured variables and compares
them to the corresponding setpoint variables. If one or more measured variable goes below the setpoint,
the ESD controller performs its action and drives the output to the minimum value specified in key
MINSIGNAL. If key RESET is specified, the ESD controller resets its output to the value specified by the
key MAXSIGNAL, when all measured variables become greater than the reset value (that is, the controller
opens the valve connected to the controller). Figure 93 shows the behavior of the ESD controller when the
key OPEMMODE is set to BELOW, SETPOINT is 30 and RESET is 80. The measured variable (controller
- 276 -
The OLGA model
Figure 93 ESD with opening mode below, setpoint equal to 30 and reset equal to 80.
Note: To obtain the desired hysteresis effect built into the controller, the value given in the key
SETPOINT should be greater than RESET when opening mode (OPENMODE) is above. When opening
mode (OPENMODE) is below, the value given in the key RESET should be greater than SETPOINT to
obtain hysteresis effect.
The controller output signal is limited with stroke time. See Actuator time of controlled device.
How to use
1. Connect the measured value (for example, a pressure). The MEASRD terminal must be connected.
2. The ESD output is typically connected to some process equipment or a pressure driven source/leak.
3. Set the setpoint where the controller should close. If the controller must open automatically, enter a
reset value.
4. Include sufficient hysteresis for the reset value compared to the setpoint value. In this way, a situation
where the ESD output oscillates is avoided. That is, a situation where the ESD closes in one time
step, opens the next, closes again in the next, and so on.
Note: To obtain the desired hysteresis effect built into the controller, the value of SETPOINT must be
greater than RESET when the opening mode (OPENMODE) is set to above. When opening mode
(OPENMODE) is below, RESET should be greater than SETPOINT.
- 277 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 94 shows the connection possibilities of the ESD controller.
Figure 94 ESD controller connection terminals
Manual controller
The manual controller is used to simulate the actions of an operator. The manual controller issues a
control signal to a device (for example, a valve).
Model description
The manual controller takes a setpoint as an internally defined time series, or as a input signal. The
changes in setpoint are applied immediately. That is, the setpoint changes in a step wise manner.
The input signal is filtered through with stroke time limitations. This can be avoided by setting a low stroke
time. See Actuator time of controlled device.
How to use
Give the required setpoint changes, and connect to a device variable.
The manual controller does not require any of the signal terminals to be connected. Figure 95 shows the
possible connections of the manual controller.
Figure 95 Manual controller connection terminals
Override controller
The Override controller acts as a minimum or maximum operator on its input. It can be configured to select
the lowest or highest value among several inputs.
Model description
The override controller can be a low select or high select operator. The override controller requires one or
more input signals. The input signals can come from any other output terminal. In low select mode, the
minimum input signal is selected as the final output signal from the unit. A typical application of the
controller unit in a process model is shown in Figure 96.
- 278 -
The OLGA model
Figure 96 Double PID controller used as a turbine speed controller
Here the output signal from two pressure controllers (PC) is connected as input to the override controller.
One of the pressure controllers is controlling the suction pressure before the first compressor stage, and
the other is controlling the pressure downstream of the second compressor stage. In normal oper-ation,
the speed is controlled by the suction pressure controller, but in situations where the outlet pressure
approaches the maximum operating pressure, the speed is controlled by the high pressure controller.
Figure 97 shows a typical application of the override controller (OC) with input signal from three controllers
in a process model. The override controller is in low select mode. The flow controller (FC) is controlling the
flow downstream of the control valve (choke), while the pressure controllers (PC) are controlling the
pressures upstream and downstream of the control valve. In normal operation, the valve is controlled by
the flow controller. In situations where the pressure downstream of the control valve approaches the
maximum operating pressure (set-point for downstream pressure controller), the valve is controlled by the
high-pressure controller. In situations where the pressure upstream of the control valve approaches the
minimum operating pressure (set-point for upstream pressure controller), the valve is controlled by the low-
pressure controller.
Figure 97 Triple PID controller used as flow regulator
The output signal is limited with stroke time. See Actuator time of controlled device.
- 279 -
OLGA User manual
How to use
Select the mode of operation by setting SELECTIONMODE. Connect the signals the override controller
should operate on.
The Override controller requires that at least one input terminal is connected.
Figure 98 shows the connection possibilities of the Override controller.
Figure 98 Override controller connection terminals
Note: When there are fewer variables to manipulate than there are variables to control, the controllers
(or measurements) of the controlled variables must share the manipulated variables.
PID controller
The main function of a PID controller is to maintain process parameters within specified bounds by
controlling process equipment parameters such as valve opening and compressor speed.
A typical application of a PID controller in a process model is to control a separator level (Figure 99) and it
is then called a level controller. The input process parameter is the liquid level in the separator and the
output signal from the controller is used to control the opening of a drain valve. The controller can
alternatively have flow, pressure, and so on, as input signal, and is then called a flow controller, a pressure
controller and so on.
Figure 99 PID controller used as a level controller
Model description
The PID controller uses the Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) Algorithm, see below.
The PID controller limits the output with the stroke time of the connected device (for example, Valve). See
Actuator time of controlled device on page 269.
The controller uses anti-windup. When the controller reaches maximum or minimum output (saturates), the
integral is kept to a proper value so that the controller is ready to resume action, as soon as the control
error changes. The anti-windup used is a tracking/back calculation scheme.
Transfer between setpoint modes are made bumpless. When the setpoint mode change, the integral term
is corrected to remove a sudden jump in the controller output.
- 280 -
The OLGA model
If the PID controller output is connected to a Selector or an Override controller, it might become inactive.
See Selector controller on page 289 and Override controller on page 278. There are four different modes
for the controller when it becomes inactive. The Selector or Override controller automatically sets the PID
controller in an active/inactive state.
Actions taken when the controller becomes inactive (keyword INACTIVEMODESUBC):
 ONHOLD
Restore old values, everything is on hold.
 INTERLOCK
The PID controller get feedback on the output signal used (uused) from the connected controller (Selector or
Override). If the PID controller becomes inactive, it uses uused to back-calculate its integral error.
 DEFAULTINPUT
Compute output signal based on default input, given in key DEFAULTINPUT.
 NORMAL
No action for normal mode.
Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Algorithm
A PID algorithm can be formulated mathematically as:
(60)
(61)
where x is the input process parameter (pressure, level, and so on),  is the time constant, u is the output
signal from the controller, t is the time and bias the initial value. The subscript 'stp' is the set point (or
reference point), i is the integral, d is the derivative and '0' is the time at start of simulation.
The amplification factor Kc is a dimensioned quantity. If the option with normalized amplification factor is
used, the program will calculate Kc using the range given with the following expression:
For non-linear controllers, Kc, i, d can be given in tabular form as a function of the error signal e. An error
e is then given as a vector (keyword input). The PID parameters keys for K c, i and d must be specified as
vectors with the same dimension as e. The controller parameters are found by linear interpolation in the
actual controller error, e. The non-linear controller option is activated when the PID parameters are given
as vectors, and not as single values.
By using this general formula, simpler controllers as P and PI controllers can be defined by giving proper
values to the time constants in the PID formula. The table below shows time constants for simpler
controllers.
- 281 -
OLGA User manual
Table 7 Time constants for P, PI and PD controllers
Time constants d i
P controller 0.0 109
PI controller 0.0 < 108
PD controller > 0.0 109
This controller formula is frequently referred to as a standard PID controller in the manual.
How to use
The PID controller requires a measurement value to be connected to the controller. (Signal terminal
MEASRD). The setpoint must be given in the key SETPOINT, or connected to the SETPOINT input
terminal.
Figure 100 shows the connection possibilities of the PID controller.
Figure 100 PID controller connection terminals
PID controller example
Three parameters are at our disposal for tuning a PID controller: Kc, d and i. However, for petroleum
applications  d is rarely used (d = 0), because there is usually quite a lot of noise on the input process
signal. This results in rapid oscillations in the derivative of the signal, and if the derivative term in the
controller equation were included this would result in oscillations in the controller output, which is not
desirable.
We have the following relation between the symbols used in this description and the OLGA input variables
in the CONTROLLER keyword:
Kc AMPLIFICATION
d DERIVATIVECONST
i INTEGRALCONST
bias BIAS
x VARIABLE
xstp SETPOINT
- 282 -
The OLGA model
Note: The stroke-time of the controller valve (defined through STROKETIME) does not directly influence
the controller output as discussed here. However, the opening and closing speed of the controller valve
is limited by the stroke-time. That is, if the stroke-time is given as 100 s, the opening of the valve at
maximum changes by 1% per second.
Level control
A typical application of a level controller is shown in Figure 99 PID controller used as a level controller.
The change in the liquid volume fraction in the vessel is given by
where Qin [m3/s] is the liquid volume flow into the vessel, Qout [m3/s] is the liquid volume flow out of the
vessel and V [m3] is the volume of the vessel. The flow out of the vessel can be written
where Qmax is the maximum flow when the controller is fully open.
For the current case, the error (equation (61) in Model description on page 280) is defined as liquid volume
fraction minus the volume fraction at the setpoint, and the derivative time constant is set to zero. Taking
the time derivative of the above two equations with the use of the control equation (equation (60) in Model
description on page 280), the following differential equation is obtained
Where f(t) is a disturbance that the control system should compensate for. Casting it into the standard form
we get the time constant of the control loop
and the damping coefficient
Kc must be positive for p and z to be real numbers. The figure below shows the performance of control
loop for different damping constants for a step disturbance at t = 0 (f(t) has a step increase). This could, for
instance, be that the setpoint of the level control is changed.
- 283 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 101 Response of level control to step disturbance.
From this figure, you can see that a damping coefficient from 0.5–0.7 gives satisfactory results for level
control. Therefore, you can use the following procedure to select the parameters for level control:
1. Size the drain valve so that it can deliver Qmax = two times the normal drain rate for the pressure
difference between separator pressure and backpressure of the drain valve.
2. Set Kc < 2 and choose i (the integral time constant) to make the damping coefficient between 0.5 and
0.7.
Flow control
Assuming constant upstream and downstream pressure over the valve, the flow rate can be written as:
where:
F = flow rate (mass or volumetric flow rate)
Fmax = max flow rate through the fully open valve at the given pressure drop
u = output signal from controller
- 284 -
The OLGA model
Taking the time derivative of the above equation and using the control equation we obtain
or
For the solution to be stable, Kc must be negative. The time constant of the solution is
Figure 102 shows the response of the flow to a step change in, for example, setpoint (f(t) has a step
increase).
Figure 102 Response of flow control to step disturbance.
The shorter the time constant, the faster the response goes to the setpoint. One could use the following
procedures to select the controller parameters for flow control.
1. Estimate the upstream and downstream pressure over the control valve at the design flow rate. If the
pressure difference is less than, for example 0.2 bar, adjust the upstream or downstream pressure so
that the difference is at least 0.2 bar. This is considered a convenient pressure drop over a valve
being used for flow control.
2. Size the valve so that it can deliver maximum flow rate = 2 times the designed value for the same
pressure drop over the valve.
3. Set with A ranging from 1 to 10.

4. p can be selected from the above chart, depending on how fast you want the flow rate to reach e.g.
90% of the set point. When p has been chosen i is found from the definition of p.
5. By choosing a different A, the same p can be obtained for a different i.
- 285 -
OLGA User manual
PSV controller
A Pressure-Safety-Valve (PSV) typically opens fast when the pressure rises above a defined value. When
the valve is opened, the pressure is relieved. The safety valves are included to avoid damage on the
process equipment and the pipeline.
The PSV controller and a valve (or source) simulates the behavior of the Pressure-Safety-Valve.
Model description
Under normal operation, the PSV controller output is set to the minimum value (closed), as opposed to
ESD where the output is set to the maximum value (fully open) in normal operation. The purpose with the
PSV controller is then to drive the controller output to the maximum value within the controller stroketime
when a certain situation occurs. Usually, the controller is connected to a pressure safety valve and then
the result of the controller action is to open the valve.
If the key OPENMODE is set to ABOVE, the controller monitors the measured variables and compares
them with the corresponding setpoint variables. If one or more measured variable goes above the setpoint,
the PSV controller performs its action and drives the output to the maximum value specified in key
MAXSIGNAL. If key RESET is specified, the PSV controller resets its output to the value specified by the
key MINSIGNAL, when all measured variables become less than the reset value, that is, the controller
closes the valve connected to the controller. Figure 103 shows the behavior of the PSV controller when
key OPEMMODE is set to ABOVE, SETPOINT is 80 and RESET is 30. The measured variable (controller
Figure 103 PSV with opening mode above, setpoint equal to 80 and reset equal to 30.
- 286 -
The OLGA model
If the key OPENMODE is set to BELOW, the controller monitors the measured variables and compares
them with the corresponding setpoint variables. If one or more measured variable goes below the setpoint,
the PSV controller will perform its action and drive the output to the maximum value specified in key
MAXSIGNAL. If key RESET is specified, the PSV controller will reset its output to the value specified by
the key MINSIGNAL, when all measured variables become greater than the reset value, e.g. the controller
will close the valve connected to the controller. Figure 104 shows the behavior of the PSV controller when
key OPEMMODE is set to BELOW, SETPOINT is 30 and RESET is 80. The measured variable (controller
Figure 104 PSV with opening mode below, setpoint equal to 30 and reset equal to 80. To obtain the
desired hysteresis effect built into the controller, the key SETPOINT must be greater than RESET
when opening mode (OPENMODE) is above. When opening mode (OPENMODE) is below, RESET
must be greater than SETPOINT to obtain hysteresis effect.
The controller output signal is limited with stroke time. See Actuator time of controlled device.
How to use
1. Connect the measured value (for example, a pressure). The MEASRD terminal must be connected.
2. Connect the PSV controller output to a valves, pressure driven sources or leaks.
3. Set the setpoint where the controller should open. If the controller should automatically close, enter a
reset value.
4. Include sufficient hysteresis for the reset value compared to the setpoint value to avoid a situation
where the PSV output oscillates. That is, a situation where it opens in one time step, closes the next,
opens again in the next, and so on.
Note: To obtain the desired hysteresis effect built into the controller, the key SETPOINT must be
greater than RESET when opening mode (OPENMODE) is above. When opening mode
(OPENMODE) is below, RESET must be greater than SETPOINT.
- 287 -
OLGA User manual
5. Change the default OPENMODE to BELOW if the controller must open when the measurement falls
below the setpoint.
Figure 105 shows the connection possibilities of the PSV controller.
Figure 105 PSV controller connection terminals
Scaler controller
The scaler controller is used to scale input signals linearly from an input range to an output range. The
scaler controller issues a control signal to a device (for example, a valve) or as an input signal to other
controllers. The scaler controller can be used to
 scale controller output signal from range 0 - 100% to input valve signal range 0–1.
 scale signal from transmitter range to controller input range.
 limit transmitter signal to stay in configured range.
Model description
The scaler controller scales the input signal linearly from the input range (LOWLIMIT to HIGHLIMIT) to the
output range (MINSIGNAL to MAXSIGNAL).
u = (MAXSIGNAL-MINSIGNAL) / (HIGHLIMIT - LOWLIMIT) * (y - LOWLIMIT) + MINSIGNAL
where
y: measured variable
u : unconstrained output
constraints (opening, closing time or stroke time), see Constraining the controller output and Actuator time
of controlled device.
How to use
Connect the required input signal to the MEASRD terminal. Specify input range and the output range by
setting LOWLIMIT, HIGHLIMIT and MINSIGNAL, MAXSIGNAL keys. Connect the controller output signal
CONTR_1..N to a device variable.
- 288 -
The OLGA model
The figure below shows transformation of input to output through a scaler controller C.
Selector controller
A SELECTOR controller is a controller that uses two sub-controllers that are selected based on the value
of selected variables relative to low and high limits of these variables. The controller operates as a kind of
hysteresis controller, selecting the signal from one of the sub-controllers, and using this sub-controller until
the low (or high) variable limit is reached. Then the controller selects another sub-controller, and keeps it
until the high (or low) variable limit is reached.
Model description
The controller algorithm is best described by an example:
Figure 106 shows a system that consists of a pipeline with a separator. The separator has liquid and gas
valves attached to it, in addition to an emergency liquid drain valve. In addition, there is a separator inlet
valve having a fixed opening. Upstream of the separator, at some distance from it, is a gamma
densitometer used for measuring the local liquid volume fraction.
- 289 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 106 Separator using SELECTOR controller to control the liquid outlet valve.
We want to control the separator level by controlling the liquid level in the separator with a level PID
controller. As long as the liquid level is below a given value, we want the controller to act slowly /
moderately fast. If a liquid slug arrives, we want the level control on the separator liquid outlet to be faster
to prevent the level from increasing to very high levels. This means that for normal operation we have a
moderately fast PID level controller, and for transient operation (when a slug arrives) we have a fast PID
operation.
In addition, a gamma densitometer is placed at some distance from the separator inlet. When the time-
averaged signal from the meter reaches a certain limit, a slug is expected to arrive. We also want this to
trigger a faster operation of the separator liquid valve.
Our control structure for the separator liquid outlet valve is then:
Normal operation:
1. Slow separator liquid level controller used to control the liquid outlet valve.
2. If the separator liquid level reaches a given high level, or the time averaged gamma densitometer
signal becomes higher than a given limit, the fast separator liquid outlet valve controller takes over.
Transient operation:
1. The fast liquid valve controller that is controlled by the separator liquid level is acting.
2. If the separator liquid level drops below a given low limit, the slow / normal separator liquid level
controller starts controlling the liquid outlet valve. The operation is back to normal.
There is no restriction on the number of variables that can be used for switching between the sub-
controllers. The variables and their low and high limits are given as input to OLGA.
If the sub-controllers are PID controllers, the integral term of the non-acting controller can be saved
(interlocked), reset to zero, or still be integrated. You can determine this in the input to the OLGA sub-
controllers.
- 290 -
The OLGA model
How to use
1. Connect one or more limit signals (HIGHLIMITSIG/LOWLIMITSIG).

2. Define the controller used at start of simulation (keyword INITIALCONTROLLER).
3. Define the limits where the Selector controller changes its output (LOWLIMIT, HIGHLIMIT).
4. Connect the controller used below LOWLIMIT (SUBCONLOW), and the controller used above
HIGHLIMIT (SUBCONHIGH).
Figure 107 shows the connection possibilities of the Selector controller.
Figure 107 Selector controller connection terminals
Note: When there are fewer variables to manipulate than there are variables to control the controllers
(or measurements) of the controlled variables need to share the manipulated variables.
STD controller
The controller converts mass flow rate to volumetric flow rate at standard conditions.
Model description
The controller converts mass flow rate to volumetric flow rate at standard conditions.
Fluid properties are calculated from the given fluid table (FLUID), or composition (FEEDNAME) at standard
conditions.
Note: Standard conditions; pressure = 1 atm and temperature = 60 °F (~15.5 °C).
If neither of GOR/CGR/WGR/WATERCUT/MOLWEIGHT is given, the fluid table/composition phase

distribution at standard conditions will be used to calculate the overall mass flow rate.
- 291 -
OLGA User manual
How to use
To convert from mass flow at to volumetric flow rate at standard conditions:
1. Set correct phase in PHASE key.

2. Specify the fluid in the FLUID or FEEDNAME keys.
3. Specify the wanted GOR/CGR/WGR/WATERCUT/MOLWEIGHT, and the volumetric flow rate at
standard conditions are calculated.
Switch controller
The main purpose of the switch controller is to switch between alternative inputs values. The output of the
controller is selected based on the setpoint in MODE = AUTOMATIC or SETPOINT terminal if MODE =
EXTERNALSETPOINT.
Model description
The output of the switch controller is selected based on the setpoint in MODE = AUTOMATIC or
SETPOINT terminal if MODE = EXTERNALSETPOINT.
SP < 1.5 unconstrained output A is set equal to controller at terminal INPSIG_1
1.5 <= SP < 2.5 unconstrained output A is set equal to controller at terminal INPSIG_2
(N-0.5) <= SP unconstrained output A is set equal to controller at terminal INPSIG_N
Where N is the number of connected input terminals INPSIG_1..N
constraints (opening, closing time or stroke time).
See Constraining the controller output and Actuator time of controlled device.
How to use
1. Connect the required input signal(s) to the INPSIG_1..N terminal(s).

2. Specify the SETPOINT key or connect the SETPOINT terminal.
3. Connect the controller output signal CONTR_1..N to a device variable.
The figure below shows how INPSIG_1..4 is connected to CONTR.
- 292 -
The OLGA model
Table controller
The table controller makes it possible to tabulate a relation between the controller input and the controller
output, for example, when there is a non-linear relation for a process variable.
Model description
A table controller uses the input variables as lookup variable, x, in a table, u = f(x). The controller output is
u.
It is possible to use nested tables, that is; u = f(g(x)). This is done in the table definition, where one table
can reference another. The result from interpolating one table is used to interpolate in another.
How to use
1. Define a table, with XVARIABLE and YVARIABLE set to NOTGIVEN. Reference the table in the
controller definition.
2. Make the input signal available from a transmitter with the correct units, and connect to the controller.
The table controller requires that the input signal (INPSIG) terminal is connected.
Figure 108 shows the connection possibilities of the table controller.
Figure 108 Table controller connection terminals
Note: The table controller is limited to one variable tables. It is only possible to calculate u = f(x 1), and
not u = f(x1,x2) and so on.
Transmitter
Transmitters are used to provide measured values from flowpaths, process equipment, nodes, separators
and phase split nodes to be used together with controllers. All output signals, apart from output signals
from controllers, need to be defined using transmitters.
Model description
The transmitter creates a trend object and update the signal terminal every time step. That implies that
every variable available for trending is available from a transmitter.
The signal is converted to user specified units. If no unit is given, the value is given in SI units.
One transmitter can measure only one variable. However, it can transmit to an arbitrary number of
controllers (from a single position).
How to use
The transmitter is positioned on a flowpath, node, separator or a phase split node. Make the connection
between the transmitter, and the receiving signal terminal. The variable and unit are defined in the
transmitter keyword.
After making a connection from the transmitter (ex. OUTSIG_1), a new terminal is made available (ex.
OUTSIG_2) that transmits the same signal.
Note: One transmitter can only transmit one variable.
- 293 -
OLGA User manual
OLGA extensibility
OLGA enables you to use extensions to expand the catalog of models available. OLGA extensions are
managed by the OLGA GUI, as described in the OLGA GUI User manual.
The extensibility framework of OLGA enables you to deploy the following types of models:
 Flow models to be used by the steady-state preprocessor

 Particle flow models
Extensions integrate seamlessly to OLGA, both in use and performance. As for any other model, they can
be used both from the OLGA GUI and through the OLGA key file. The compatibility of the extensions
corresponds to the compatibility of the module they are extending.
To enable you to create OLGA Extensions, a Software Development Kit (SDK) is provided. The OLGA
SDK can be installed as a custom step when installing OLGA, as explained in the OLGA Installation guide.
More information on how to create extensions is provided in the SDK.
Note: The extensibility framework that is described here is not directly related to the plug-in interface
module described in OLGA Plug-in framework. However, in future the functionality available in the plug-
in interface module will be ported to the new extensibility framework.
How to use
When an extension is installed and enabled, it appears for you to select in any OLGA case. When an
extension is used, this is indicated in the output files generated. In particular, a watermark is shown when
you create plots using these files. This is to make it clear that the results obtained can have been
influenced by an extension.
Extensions are identified by the company name, the extension name, and the version number. This is used
as reference in the input (when choosing a model), as well as to identify any error or message coming from
the extension.
Any issues related to an extension must be addressed to the creator of the extension. You can access
more information about the extension developer and the extension model through the extension details in
the OLGA GUI.
Details about how to use Point Model type of extensions are given in Steady State Processor - How to
Use, while for Particle Flow extensions details are given in Particle Flow - How to Use.
- 294 -
The OLGA model
REFERENCES
[1] O. Baker and W. Swerdloff. Calculation of Surface Tension 6 - Finding Surface Tension of
Hydrocarbon Liquids. Oil & Gas Journal, 2 Jan. 1956.
[2] K.H. Bendiksen. An experimental investigation of the motion of long bubbles in inclined tubes. Int. J.
Multiphase Flow, 10(4):467-483, 1984. doi:10.1016/0301-9322(84)90057-0.
[3] A.T. Bourgoyne Jr., K.K. Millheim, M.E. Chenevert, and F.S. Young Jr. Applied Drilling Engineering.
SPE Textbook Series, Vol. 2. Society of Petroleum Engineers, Second Printing, 1991. ISBN 1-55563-001-
4.
[4] H.B. Bradley. Petroleum Engineering Handbook. Society of Petroleum Engineers, 1987. ISBN 1-
55563-010-3.
[5] J.M. Campbell. Gas Conditioning and Processing, Volume 1: The Basic Principles. Campbell
Petroleum Series, 1984. ISBN 9-99500-821-1.
[6] H. Chanson. Hydraulics of Open Channel Flow: An Introduction. Elsevier Butterworth Heinemann,
Second Edition, 2004. ISBN 0-75065-978-5.
[7] M. Cook and M. Behnia. Slug length prediction in near horizontal gas-liquid intermittent flow. Chem.
Eng. Sci., 55(11):2009-2018, 2000. doi:10.1016/S0009-2509(99)00485-6.
[8] R. Darby and J. Melson. How to predict the friction factor for flow of Bingham plastics. Chemical
Engineering, 28:59-61, 28 Dec. 1981.
[9] D. Biberg, G.,Staff, N. Hoyer, and H. Holm. Accounting for flow model uncertainties in gas-condensate
field design using the OLGA High Definition Stratified Flow Model. 17th International Conference on
Multiphase Technology, pp. 375-387. 10-12 June 2015, Cannes, France. ISBN: 978-1-85598-147-8
[10] J.R. Fagundes Netto, J. Fabre, P. Grenier, and L. Peresson. An experimental study of an isolated
long bubble in a horizontal liquid flow. 3rd Int. Conf. Multiphase Flow, Lyon, 8-12 June, Paper 654, 1998.
[11] J.R. Fagundes Netto, J. Fabre, L. Peresson, and P. Duchet-Suchaux, P. Evolution of the flow
structure in a horizontal two-phase slug flow. Two-phase Flow Modelling and Experimentation, Celata, G.
P., Di Marco, P. and Shah, R. K. (Eds.), Edizioni ETS, Pisa., II-723, 1999.
[12] Ø. Glasø. Generalized Pressure-Volume-Temperature Correlations. The Journal of Petroleum

Technology, 32(5):785-795, May 1980. doi:10.2118/8016-PA.
[13] R.E. Henry and H.K. Fauske. The Two-Phase Critical Flow of One-Component Mixtures in Nozzels,
Orifices, and Short Tubes. Journal of Heat Transfer, 93(2):179-187, May 1971. doi:10.1115/1.3449782.
[14] E.G. Hammerschmidt. Gas Hydrate Formations: A Further Study on Their Prevention and Elimination
from Natural Gas Pipe Lines. GAS, 15(5):30-35, May 1939.
[15] F.P. Incropera and David B. Dewitt. Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer. Wiley, Fourth Edition,
1996. ISBN 0-471-30460-3.
[16] R.W. Johnson. The Handbook of Fluid Dynamics. CRC Press, First Edition, 1998. ISBN 3-540-
64612-4
[17] D.L. Katz, D. Cornell, J.A. Vary, R. Kobayashi, J.R. Elenbaas, F.H. Poettmann, and C.F. Weinaug.
Handbook of Natural Gas Engineering. McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1959. ISBN 0-07033-384-X.
- 295 -
OLGA User manual
[18] I.M. Krieger and T.J. Dougherty. A Mechanuism for Non-Newtonian Flow in Suspensions of Rigid
Spheres. Transactions of The Society of Rheology, 3(1):137-152, March 1959. doi:10.1122/1.548848.
[19] J.A. Lasater. Bubble Point Pressure Correlation. The Journal of Petroleum Technology, 10(5):65-67,
May 1958. doi:10.2118/957-G.
[20] C.J. Lawrence, J. Nossen, R. Skartlien, O. Sendstad, O. Skjaeraasen, J. Hua, L. Liu, K. Hald, T. Sira,
E. Holm, B. Hu, D. Biberg, P. Andersson, G. Staff, L. Wollebaek, J. Henriksson, T. Wangensteen, and Z.
G. Xu. Mechanistic models for three-phase stratified and slug flows with dispersions. 16th Int. Conf.
Multiphase Production Technology, pp. 283-196. 12-14 June 2013, Cannes, France. ISBN: 978-1-62993-
295-8
[21] J.C. Mantecon. The Virtual Well: Guidelines for the Application of Dynamic Simulation To Optimise
Well Operations, Life Cycle Design, and Production. Society of Petroleum Engineers, SPE-109829-MS.
SPE Annual Technical Conference and Exhibition. 11-14 Nov. 2007, Anaheim, California, U.S.A.
doi:10.2118/109829-MS.
[22] A. Matzain, A.S. Apte, H.-Q. Zhang, M. Volk, C.L. Redus, J.P. Brill, and J.L. Creek. Multiphase Flow
Wax Deposition Modeling. Proceedings of ASME ETCE Petroleum Production Technology Symposium. 5-
7 Feb. 2001, Houston, Texas, U.S.A.
[23] W.D. McCain. The Properties of Petroleum Fluids. PennWell Corp., Second Edition, 1990. ISBN 0-
878-14335-1.
[24] M. Nordsveen, R. Nyborg, and L. Hovden. Implementation of CO2 corrosion models in the OLGA
three-phase flow code. BHR Group. 9th International Conference, Multiphase '99, pp. 279-292. 16-18 June
1999, Cannes, France. ISBN 1-86058-212-5.
[25] R. Nyborg, P. Andersson, and M. Nordsveen. Implementation of CO2 Corrosion Models in a Three-
Phase Fluid Flow Model. NACE International, NACE-00048. CORROSION 2000. 26-31 March 2000,
Orlando, Florida, U.S.A.
[26] S. Olsen and A. Dugstad. Corrosion under Dewing Conditions. NACE. CORROSION/91, Paper No.
472. 11-15 March 1991, Cincinnati, U.S.A.
[27] R. Pal and E. Rhodes. Viscosity/Concentration Relationships for Emulsions. Journal of Rheology,
33(7):1021-1045, Oct. 1989. doi:10.1122/1.550044.
[28] K.S. Pedersen and H.P. Rønningsen. Effect of Precipitated Wax on Viscosity - A Model for Predicting
Non-Newtonian Viscosity of Crude Oils. Energy & Fuels, 14(1):43-51, 2000. doi:10.1021/ef9901185.
[29] T.D. Reed and A.A. Pilehvari. A New Model for Laminar, Transitional, and Turbulent Flow of Drilling
Muds. Society of Petroleum Engineers, SPE-25459, 1 Jan. 1993. doi:10.2118/25456-MS.
[30] R.C. Reid, J.M. Prausnitz, and B.E. Poling. The Properties of Gases and Liquids. McGraw-Hill,
Fourth Edition, 1989. ISBN 0-071-00284-7.
[31] E. Eng Johnsen and H.P. Rønningsen. Viscosity of ’live’ water-in-crude-oil emulsions: experimental
work and validation of correlations. Journal of Petroleum Science and Engineering, 38(1-2):23-36, May
2003.
[32] O.B. Rygg, A.K. Rydahl, and H.P. Rønningsen. Wax deposition in offshore pipeline systems. BHR
Group. 1st North American Conference on Multiphase Technology, pp. 193-205. 10-11 June 1998. Banff,
Canada. ISBN 1-86058-139-0.
- 296 -
The OLGA model
[33] S. Selmer-Olsen, H. Holm, K. Haugen, P.J. Nilsen, and R. Sandberg. Subsea Chokes as Multiphase
Flowmeters. BHR Group. 7th International Conference on Multiphase Production, pp. 441-466. 7-9 June
1995, Cannes, France. ISBN 0-85298-974-1
[34] Probjot Singh, Ramachandran Venkatesan, H. Scott Fogler, and Nagi Nagarajan. Formation and
aging of incipient thin film wax-oil gels. AIChE Journal, 46(5):1059–1074, May 2000.
doi:10.1002/aic.690460517.
[35] R.M. Turian, F.-L. Hsu, and T.-W. Ma. Estimation of critical velocity in pipeline flow of slurries.
Powder Technology, 51(1):35-47, June 1987.
[36] P.M. Ujang, L. Pan, P.D. Manfield, C.J. Lawrence, and G.F. Hewitt. Prediction of the translational
velocity of liquid slugs in gas-liquid slug flow using computational fluid dynamics. Multiphase Science and
Technology, 20(1):25-79, 2008. doi:10.1615/MultScienTechn.v20.i1.20.
[37] M.U. Vazquez and H.D. Beggs. Correlations for Fluid Physical Property Prediction. The Journal of
Petroleum Technology, 32(6):968-970, June 1980. doi:10.2118/6719-PA.
[38] H.W. Winkler and P.T. Eads. Algorithm for More Accurately Predicting Nitrogen-Charged Gas-Lift
Valve Operation at High Pressures and Temperatures. Society of Petroleum Engineers, SPE-18871-MS.
SPE Production Operations Symposium. 13-14 March 1989, Oklahoma City, Oklahoma, U.S.A.
doi:10.2118/18871-MS.
[39] F. White. Fluid Mechanics. McGraw-Hill Book Company, Second Edition, 1986. ISBN 0-070-66525-7.
[40] Hydraulic Institute. Effects of Liquid Viscosity on Rotodynamic (Centrifugal and Vertical) Pump
Performance. ANSI/HI 9.6.7-2010. ISBN 978-1-935762-04-01
[41] K.L.Decker (Otis Engineering Corp.) Gas-Lift Valve Performance Testing and Data Correlation. SPE
2544. 8(2) May 1993.doi:10.2118/22789-PA
[42] R. Nyborg, A. Dugstad, Top of line corrosion and water condensation rates in wet gas pipelines,
CORROSION/2007, paper no. 07555. Houston, Texas: NACE International, 2007. ISBN 0-7555-2007 CP
[43] G. Svenningsen, R. Nyborg, Modeling of top of line corrosion with organic acid and glycol,
CORROSION/2014, paper no. 4057. Houston, Texas: NACE International, 2014.
[44] S. D. Joshi, Horizontal Well Technology, PennWell, 2001.
[45] D.K. Babu and Aziz S. Odeh, Productivity of a Horizontal Well, SPE Reservoir Engineering 1989.
- 297 -
OLGA User manual
Server
OLGA OPC server

To consume data an OPC server, an OPC client is required. OLGA comes with a customized OPC client
for viewing and accessing data on the OLGA OPC server called OLGA Namespace Explorer (ONE). This
tool can be accessed from the OLGA Tools menu. In addition, several third- party vendors provide OPC
clients that can be used to access OPC servers such as the OLGA OPC server.
By default you need administrator privileges to run OLGA using the OPC server. In the OLGA installer,
there is an option to pre-install five OPC servers that can be run by non-administrator users. For more
information, see the OLGA Installation guide.
See the OLGA OPC server guide located in the Documentation folder in OLGA for more information.
Submodelling
Introduction
OLGA submodeling allows for greater flexibility when it comes to engineering of large scale models
covering a scope from well inflow to processing facilities. Typically, engineering of the different parts of a
production system is done by different engineering teams. Examples of such teams are; well engineering,
flow assurance and process engineering. When modeling and simulation of these subsystems have been
done by separate teams, the submodeling and scheduling functionality provides an efficient method for
integrating such models into larger models covering the full production system.
A great advantage with submodeling is that it can also lead to a faster execution of the OLGA simulation
compared with putting such models in one large OLGA case.
Example: You have a Well model and a Pipeline model. The Pipeline model has more sections and a
coarser grid (longer section lengths) than the Well model. This means that the Well model requires a
smaller time step than the Pipeline model (CFL-criteria). If you put the models in one large OLGA model,
all the sections in the Pipeline model are run at a small time step. This slows down the simulation. When
running submodeling, the individual models run on separate time steps enabling faster simulation
execution of the total model scope.
See the OLGA Submodeling guide located in the Documentation folder in OLGA for more information.
- 298 -
Reference manual
Reference manual
Keywords
CaseDefinition
ANIMATE (on CaseLevel)
This keyword generates the data needed by OLGA 3D Plot. The OLGA 3D Plot displays the liquid holdup
for two or three phases in a three dimensional view.
Key Type Parameter Description

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
DTPLOT Real (s) Time interval between subsequent data printouts. DTPLOT should only be
given once in the input file, if given more than once, OLGA will use the last
value given.
CASE (on CaseLevel)
This keyword defines information about a simulation.
Key Type Parameter set Description
Unit:( ) Default:[ ]
AUTHOR String Author of the input file.
DATE String Date.
INFO String General information about the case.
PROJECT String Project name.
TITLE String Case title.
- 299 -
OLGA User manual
DTCONTROL (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines switches for stability control.
See time step control for more information.
CFL Symbol [ON] The Courant-Friedrichs-Lewy (CFL) criterion based on the

flow velocity.
CFLFACTOR Real [0.8] Tuning factor for the CFL time-step criterion.
ENERGY Symbol <None> | ON | Time-step control based on change in energy from one time
[OFF] step to the next.
ENERGYFACTOR Real [0.05] Tuning factor for energy change time-step criterion.
GRADPRESSURE Symbol <None> | ON | Time-step control based on the first-order derivative of

[OFF] pressure w.r.t. time.
MASS Symbol <None> | ON | Time-step control based on change in mass from one time
MASSFACTOR Real [0.05] Tuning factor for mass change time-step criterion.
PREFACTOR Real [0.8] Tuning factor for pressure time-step criterion.
PRESSURE Symbol [OFF] Time-step control based on the second-order derivative of

pressure w.r.t. time.
RHEOLOGY Symbol <None> | ON | Time-step control based on change in viscosity from one
[OFF] time step to the next.
RHEOLOGYFACTOR Real [0.5] Tuning factor for viscosity change time-step criterion.
SOUND_CFL Symbol [OFF] Time-step control based on the speed of pressure waves.
VELFRONT Symbol <None> | ON | Time-step control based on propagation of velocity change

[OFF] in section from one time step to the next.
VELFRONTFACTOR Real [0.05] Tuning factor for propagation of velocity change time-step
criterion.
- 300 -
Reference manual
Signal connections - Input
Name Description
CFLFACTOR
ENERGYFACTOR
MASSFACTOR
PREFACTOR
RHEOLOGYFACTOR
VELFRONTFACTOR
ECLIPSEOPTIONS (on CaseLevel)
ECLIPSEOPTIONS contains options related to the coupling of OLGA with the ECLIPSE reservoir
simulator.
The keys are only active if OPTIONS RESERVOIRMODEL=ECLIPSE.
Note: The keys affect the numerical properties of the wellbore-reservoir interaction only, they have no
effect on the numerical solution of the reservoir equations solved internally in ECLIPSE.

set
Unit:(
) Default:[ ]
COUPLINGLEVEL Integer [2] Size of the reservoir implicit region. Minimum value allowed=1,
maximum=10. A large value can improve the numerical stability
but will require more computational time than a smaller value. A
typical value is between 1 and 5.
MAXRESFLOWITER Integer [3] Maximum number of iterations on flow between reservoir and
wellbore. Minimum value allowed=1, maximum=10.
TOLRESFLOW Real [0.5] Tolerance (in bara) to use in the computation of flow sensitivities.
Minimum value allowed=0.001, maximum=1.
- 301 -
OLGA User manual
EVENTLOGGING (on CaseLevel)
EVENTFILE String File with previously recorded events to play back.
EXPOSE SymbolList States which keys should be made available as input

variables on the OPC server. Only keys that are
explicitly set can be exposed. To use the default
value, you must define this explicitly..
PLAYEVENTS Symbol ON | [OFF] Enables or disables the playback functionality
RECORDEVENTS Symbol <None> | ON | Turns on or off logging of external inputs to the

USERINPUTONLY | simulator. Must be ON or USERINPUTONLY if later
[OFF] playback for reproducibility of simulation results
should be possible. OFF: Nothing is logged.
USERINPUTONLY: External user input is logged
(excluding input from an OLGA scheduler). ON: All
external input is logged (including input from an OLGA
scheduler).
FILES (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines the additional input files, e.g., PVT lookup table files for fluid properties, pump
data table files, compressor table files, feed file for the Compositional Tracking model and wax file for
the wax deposition model.
Several files can be listed for COMPRESSORFILE, PUMPFILE and PVTFILE.
For definition of a restart file, click here.
If drilling fluids are used and the fluid properties are given in files, these are specified as additional files in
the PVTFILE key.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
COMPRESSORFILE StringList Name of COMPRESSOR file(s). The files can contain several
compressors each.
ECLIPSEFILE String Name of ECLIPSE input file
ESPDBFILE String Name of ESP (Electric Submersible Pump) database file. One
file can contain multiple pumps.
FANNFILE StringList Name of the file containing Fann readings.
- 302 -
Reference manual
FEEDFILE String Name of FEED file (used by Compositional Tracking). Select a

file with extension .mfl for the Multiflash PVT package. Note
that only one file may be specified.
PUMPFILE StringList Name of PUMP file(s). Each file can contain only one pump.
PVTFILE StringList Name of the file(s) containing fluid properties.
RHEOLOGYFILE StringList Name of the file containing the rheology table.
UDFEEDFILE String Name of User Defined (UD) feed file (used by the Plug-in
module). Note that only one file can be specified. The file can
contain several feeds.
UDPVTFILE StringList Name of User Defined (UD) property file (used by the Plug-in
module)
VPCFILE String Name of VPC (Valve Performance Clearinghouse) database

file
WAXFILE String Name of the file containing the WAX table. Note that only one
wax table can be specified.
INTEGRATION (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines the start and end times of the simulation. It also defines the start value, the
maximum value and the minimum value of the time step.
A controller can be used to setup a conditional stop of the simulation before the specified end time. The
simulation stops when the signal from the controller is zero.
DTSTART Real (s) Initial time-step.
ENDCONTROLLER Symbol PIDCONTROLLER | ASCCONTROLLER Label of the controller

| PSVCONTROLLER | determining conditional
MANUALCONTROLLER | termination of the simulation.
OVERRIDECONTROLLER | Note that the simulation
SELECTORCONTROLLER | stops when the signal equals
CASCADECONTROLLER | 0 (zero).
ESDCONTROLLER |
LINEARCOMBINATION |
TABLECONTROLLER |
SCALERCONTROLLER |
SWITCHCONTROLLER |
ENDTIME Real (s) Simulation end time.
- 303 -
OLGA User manual
EXPOSE SymbolList States which keys should be

made available as input
variables on the OPC server.
Only keys that are explicitly
set can be exposed. To use
the default value, you must
define this explicitly.
INITTIME String Initital time offset for

simulation. The string must
be formatted as "YYYY-MM-
DD hh:mm:ss".
MAXDT RealList [1.0] Largest time-step allowed.

(s)
MAXLAGFACT Real [0.3] Maximum lagging factor (see

LAGFACT output variable) to
allow before the output
variable LAGIND is set to 1.
MAXTIME RealList [0.0] Timetable for changing

(s) MAXDT.
MINDT RealList [0.001] Smallest time-step allowed.

(s)
MINTIME RealList [0.0] Timetable for changing

(s) MINDT.
NSIMINFO Real [-1] Number of times to print

simulation progress
information to standard
output. Set -1 to use default
settings. These depend on
the values set for the
OPTIONS.DEBUG key.
RUNTIMESTEPAGAIN Symbol <None> | FALSE | [TRUE] Select whether or not to

recompute the time-step if
the first-stage solution is
unsatisfactory.
- 304 -
Reference manual
SIMULATIONSPEED Real [0] Simulation speed relative to

real-time. Zero means
simulate at highest possible
speed. Any other positive
number means that the
simulator will slow down the
simulation so it matches the
factor given relative to real
time.
STARTTIME Real (s) Simulation start time.
OPTIONS (on CaseLevel)
This statement specifies the different calculating options to be applied in the simulation.
OPTIONS is a required keyword.
COMPOSITIONAL Symbol <None> | ON | MEG | MEOH OFF: No compositional tracking, just

| ETOH | BLACKOIL | use the fluid table. ON: Enable
STEAMWATER-HC | compositional tracking.
SINGLE | | [OFF] MEG/MEOH/ETOH: Use Inhibitor
tracking with the given component.
BLACKOIL: Use Black oil model.
STEAMWATER-HC: Use steam model.
SINGLE: Use single-component model
CONSOLELOG Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] Turn on or off writing of console output

to log file
DEBUG Symbol <None> | ON | LIMITED | Turn on or off printing of time step

[OFF] information to standard output. DEBUG
= OFF reports only essential warnings.
DEBUG = ON will report all informative
messages and can slow down
simulation significantly. DEBUG =
LIMITED will be more silent about fluid
table warnings and some informative
messages, but otherwise report the
same as DEBUG = ON.
- 305 -
OLGA User manual
DEBUGINFO SymbolList ALL | FLOWPATH | NODE | Select the information to print. The
CONTROLLER | FLUID | possible values refers to different sets
INTEGRATION | INPUT | of modules or functionality in OLGA.
OUTPUT | SERVER | For example, if SERVER is chosen,
STATE | SCHEDULER | information related to the OLGA server
OPC | SUBMODEL | functionality is printed. The default
[DEFAULT] behavior is to print any information
except some information related to the
OPC server (STATE and SERVER).
DRILLING Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] Set it to ON for simulation drilling

process
ELASTICWALLS Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] Turn on or off the use of the effect of
expanding/contracting walls.
FLASHMODEL Symbol <None> | HYDROCARBON Mass transfer model. WATER: Mass

| [WATER] transfer between gas-oil and gas-
water. HYDROCARBON: Only mass
transfer between gas-oil.
FLOWMODEL Symbol OLGA | [OLGAHD] The type of flow model to use for
dynamic flow.
HYDSLUG Symbol <None> | OFF | [ON] This key (HYDSLUG) makes it possible
to turn off the distributed flow regimes
(hydrodynamic slug flow and dispersed
bubble flow). HYDSLUG OFF will
enforce stratified or annular flow (both
including liquid droplets).
MASSEQSCHEME Symbol <None> | 2NDORDER | Discretization scheme used for solving

[1STORDER] the mass equations.
NOSLIP Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] OFF: Slip between phases is

calculated (recommended). ON:
Should only be used for sensitivity
simulations. The gas and liquid (oil and
water) is treated as one single
homogenized phase in the pressure
drop and momentum calculations. The
other calculations, mass conservation,
mass transfer, etc, will be as for a
normal simulation with slip. The no-slip
option is implemented in both the
steady state pre-processor and the
dynamic code.
PARTICLEFLOW Symbol <None> | SIMPLE | SIMPLE: Simulate flow of suspended

ADVANCED | [NO] particles. ADVANCED: Simulate
particle transport including entrainment
and deposition effects.
- 306 -
Reference manual
PHASE Symbol [THREE] Define the number of phases to be

simulated. In OLGA 6 the only option is
THREE.
RESERVOIRMODEL Symbol <None> | ECLIPSE | The model to use for the near well
[ROCX] reservoir calculation
SLUGTRACKINGMODEL Symbol <None> | OLGA6 | The type of slugtracking model to use

[OLGA2015] for hydrodynamic slug initiation and
slug evolution.
SLUGVOID Symbol <None> | AIR | [SINTEF] Select correlations for determining gas
volume fraction in liquid slugs.
SSFLOWMODEL Symbol Extension_PointModel | The flow model to use for the steady-
[DEFAULT] state preprocessor. Only models from
enabled extensions can be selected. If
not given or no extensions are
installed, the model specified in
FLOWMODEL is used.
STEADYSTATE Symbol <None> | OFF | NOTEMP | Turns off the initial value (steady state)
[ON] pre-processor or only turn off the
temperature calculation in the pre-
processor.
TABLETOLERANCE Symbol OFF | ON | UNLIMITED | Define the upper and lower limits of
[<default>] pressure and temperature allowed in
the simulation. OFF: The limits will be
the ones specified in the fluid tables
(recommended). ON: This option
should only be used when old PVT files
with too narrow pressure/temperature
ranges cannot be reproduced and
improved. UNLIMITED: This option will
remove the upper an lower limits of
temperature and pressure and will use
the end values in the table outside the
table range without extrapolation. Use
with extreme care. When
DRILLINGFLUIDs are defined
UNLIMITED is <default>. For other
fluid table based configurations OFF is
<default>
- 307 -
OLGA User manual
TEMPERATURE Symbol <None> | ADIABATIC | Specify the desired temperature

UGIVEN | OFF | FASTWALL calculation option. OFF: No
| [WALL] temperature calculation, initial values
are used. ADIABATIC: No energy
exchange with the walls. Adiabatic flow
is assumed. UGIVEN: Total heat
transfer coefficient for the pipe-wall is
given. No wall temperatures are
calculated. WALL: Heat transfer on wall
inside and outside, wall heat
conduction and heat storage is
accounted for. FASTWALL: Same as
option WALL except that heat storage
is neglected. This option is used for a
fast approach to steady state thermal
conditions.
TRACERTRACKING Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] Switch for using tracertracking
UDPLUGIN Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] Set to ON to use User Defined phases

and a plugin dll
WAXDEPOSITION Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] Switch wax deposition model on or off.
WRITEPVTFILES Symbol <None> | YES | [NO] For STEAMWATER-HC and SINGLE

only. YES: PVT table file(s) and
saturation line file are written for steam
and single component properties.
WRITERHEOLOGYFILES Symbol <None> | YES | [NO] YES: A rheology file is stored for each
FANNFILE given on the FILES
keyword. NO: A rheology file is created
and used but not stored. If YES, a file
with extension ".genrheofit" is also
created where the fitted parameters
and the calculated shear stresses are
stored
RESTART (on CaseLevel)
The restart statement defines a restart of the program from a previous run. The restart file contains data
necessary to restore the state of the simulation engine from a previous run. OLGA will not contain a
complete snapshot of the in-memory data structures. This means in particular that the original input file has
to be read to get information about e.g. the pipe line, sources, walls, time integration, and output
information. The content of the restart file can be thought of as specialized initial conditions, but with more
information than the standard user specified initial conditions.
Note that it is not allowed to change any geometry data in a restart run. For example, all pipes must have
the same number of sections, section lengths, elevations and diameters. Nodes must have the same
connections. Walls and materials must be the same. The setting for component tracking (keyword
OPTIONS, key COMPOSITIONAL) cannot be changed.
- 308 -
Reference manual
By default, without using the RESTART keyword, a restart file is written at the end of the simulation. To
save restart files generated at other times, either of the keys DTWRITE or WRITETIME can be used.
Several actions, such as activate/deactivate SLUGTRACKING, change valve openings, modify controller
settings etc. may be performed in a restart.
Discrepancies between the original and the restart case will be reported as info messages when the restart
case is started. Watch out for these to catch any unintended effects in the restart run (e.g. a missing
source or something else that will influence results).
For the READTIME key, note that the MAXDT value is added to the READTIME value to account for any
restart point written at a timestep which not exactly matches the given READTIME.
The RESTOREPOLICY key is primarily intended for server cases where certain settings is to be ignored
from the restart file. The key specify which type of settings to ignore. The default option is to include all
settings when reading the restart file.
Example:
You have a case (Case B) that you want to restart from the conditions at 1 hour from a previous simulated
case (Case A). The restart file (*.rsw) for Case A contains the restart properties for the following points in
time: 0 s, 3603 s, 7201 s. In Case B you want to start the simulation from the conditions at 1 hour, so you
do the following: In the RESTART keyword you define:
READFILE = Case A.rsw
READTIME = 1 hour
When Case B is run, OLGA looks for the restart properties from Case A by use of the following criteria:
Case A’s restart point in time is greater than or equal to READTIME in Case B + MAXDT in Case B.
If MAXDT = 2 s in Case B - Case B starts simulating from the conditions written at time 0 s
If MAXDT = 5 s in Case B - Case B starts simulating from the conditions written at time 3603 s
DTWRITE Real (s) Define the time interval at which to write

restart data to file.
FILE String The name of the restart file from which to

restart the simulation.
READFILE Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] ON: Enable reading of the restart file. OFF:
Restart is disabled.
READTIME Real (s) Time from previous simulation where the

state is read for the restart of the current
simulation. Only one time point is allowed.
Note that the MAXDT value is added to the
READTIME value to account for any restart
point written at a timestep which not
exactly matches the given READTIME.
- 309 -
OLGA User manual
RESTOREPOLICY SymbolList USESTARTTIME | Restart restore policy. RESTOREALL: The

IGNORETIME | time variables and the simulation speed
IGNORESIMULATIONSPEED | are read from the restart file and applied to
[RESTOREALL] the case when doing a restart.
USESTARTTIME: The value given in
INTEGRATION.STARTTIME is used (or
zero if not given) as the new simulation
time after loading the restart.
IGNORETIME: The variable TIME is
unaltered, SIMTIME is set equal to the time
of the CPU clock, and INITTIME is set so
that SIMTIME=INITTIME + TIME.
IGNORESIMULATIONSPEED: The
simulation speed from the restart file is
ignored, the SIMULATIONSPEED variable
is not modified by loading the restart.
WRITE Symbol <None> | APPEND | OFF | OVERWRITE: Replace any existing restart
[OVERWRITE] file with the current data. APPEND: Add
data to an existing restart file. OFF: No
restart data is written to file.
WRITETIME RealList A specific time or time series when restart

(s) data is written to the restart file.
SERVEROPTIONS (on CaseLevel)
This statement activates and specifies the different settings for the OLGA OPC Server.
MODELNAME String The model or submodel name.
MODULENAME String [Sim] OLGA namespace name. This is the name of the total
model. All submodels are logically attached beneath this
name. OPC-wise this means the naming hierarchy is:
SERVERNAME.MODULENAME.MODELNAME.*
SERVERNAME String [OLGAOPCServer] The OPC server name. The server name should be a
single word, with no spaces (' ') or dots ('.').
SIMULATORMODE Symbol <None> | Simulator mode. 'Simulator' means a free-running

EXTERNAL | simulator operating on its own. 'External' means that the
[SIMULATOR] simulator will try to keep synchronized with the ticking of
the external clock - it will halt the execution when it
catches up with the external clock and start execution
again when the external clock is increased to a new time.
- 310 -
Reference manual
STOPATENDTIME Symbol ON | [OFF] Specify if the server should follow the ENDTIME setting on
the INTEGRATION keyword. Default is OFF which means
that the server case will continue running until explicitly
stopped.
SCHEDULER (on CaseLevel)
LABEL String [Scheduler] The model name to use for the scheduler.
MAJORTIMESTEP Real The initial synchronization interval for the attached

(s) submodels. This also represent the initial time increment
for the external clocks in the attached submodels. Typically
the value of MAJORTIMESTEP should be larger than the
time steps of the submodels. A suggested initial value is 10
seconds.
SIMULATORCLOCK Symbol <None> | Simulator mode. INTERNAL means the scheduler operates
EXTERNAL | as the master clock and locks all connected submodels to
[INTERNAL] its own internal clock. EXTERNAL means that the
scheduler follows a clock operated externally and will wait
whenever it catches up with the external clock.
STARTUPSTATE Symbol <None> | The startup state for the scheduler. If set to PAUSED, all
PAUSED | scheduler controlled modules will be paused initially.
[RUNNING]
SUBMODELTIMEOUT Real [60] The time for the scheduler to wait for submodels to start.
(s)
UDFEED (on CaseLevel)
This keyword contains only a label key. The label is used to refer feeds recognized by the plug-in dll.
To use UDFEED, UDOPTIONSCOMPOSITIONALmust be set to ON. UDFEEDs can also be defined

through the UDFEEDFILE. OLGA parses the file looking for the following strings: <Number of
compositions> and <Composition labels>
If <Number of compositions> is found the next line will be read as number of feeds (Nfeeds).
If<Composition labels> are found theNfeedslines followingwill be read and added to the list of UDFEEDs.
Example:
<Number of compositions>
<Composition labels>
FEED-1
- 311 -
OLGA User manual
FEED-2
Will add the FEED-1 and FEED-2 to the list of UDFEEDs available in SOURCE UDFEED etc.
LABEL String [UDFEED] Name of user defined feed recognized by plug-in.
UDOPTIONS (on CaseLevel)
UDOPTIONS contains options for simulation of user defined dispersions such as hydrates and sand.
To use UDOPTIONS, OPTIONS UDPLUGIN must be set to YES.
Component tracking of user defined phases can be activated by setting COMPOSITIONAL = ON. This
option is not compatible with the standard Compositional tracking module activated through OPTIONS
COMPOSITIONAL = ON. To run this option, a plug-in DLL describing the components and containing the
proper interfaces must be provided. These interfaces are described in the 'Model, Numerics and
Programmers Guide for the OLGA Plug-In'. Furthermore a file describing the composition is needed and
must be referred to with FIELD UDFEEDFILE.
When running with a user defined plug in, the name of the plug-in DLL should be given through the key
PLUGINDLL.
The PLUGINMODEL key allows definition of a model type that is transported to the plug-in and can be
stored for easy selection of different plug-in models by the plug-in programmer.
COMPOSITIONAL Symbol <None> | ON | Turn on component tracking (can not be combined with
[OFF] OPTIONS COMPOSITIONAL)
PLUGINDLL String Name of PlugIn dll, used to calculate flashing,

entrainment/deposition and PVT properties.
PLUGINMODEL String The plug-in model to use. Will be sent to the plug-in.
Compositional
BLACKOILCOMPONENT (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines a component (gas, oil or water) for the black oil options.
APIGRAVITY Real [30] API gravity. API = 141.5/(oil specific gravity)–131.5.

Cannot be given if OILSPECIFICGRAVITY is given.
- 312 -
Reference manual
CO2MOLEFRACTION Real (-) [0.0] Mole fraction of CO2 in gas at standard conditions.
CO2MOLEFRACTION has to be less than 10%.
GASSPECIFICGRAVITY Real [0.64] Gas specific gravity (gas density/air density).

GASSPECIFICGRAVITY has to be larger than 0
(0.55 is pure methane).
H2SMOLEFRACTION Real (-) [0.0] Mole fraction of H2S in gas at standard conditions.
H2SMOLEFRACTION has to be less than 10%.
LABEL String [BOCOMP] Name of the blackoil component.
N2MOLEFRACTION Real (-) [0.0] Mole fraction of N2 in gas at standard conditions.

N2MOLEFRACTION has to be less than 10%.
OILSPECIFICGRAVITY Real [0.876] Oil specific gravity (oil density/water density). Cannot
be given if APIGRAVITY is given.
TYPE Symbol <None> | OIL | Define if the component is an oil, Gas or water
GAS | WATER component.
|
WATERSPECIFICGRAVITY Real [1.0] Water specific gravity (water density/fresh water

density). Used in order to include density effect on
water due to components other than salt, e.g. MEG.
BLACKOILFEED (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines a black oil feed.
GASCOMPONENT Symbol BLACKOILCOMPONENT Ref. to blackoil component label of type

| gas.
GLR Real Gas/liquid ratio. Alternative to GOR.

(Sm3/Sm3)
GOR Real Gas/oil ratio. Alternative to GLR.

(Sm3/Sm3)
LABEL String [BOFEED] Blackoil feed label.
LGR Real Liquid/gas ratio. Alternative to GLR (to be

(Sm3/Sm3) used for gas feeds).
OGR Real Oil/gas ratio. Alternative to GOR (to be

(Sm3/Sm3) used for gas feeds).
- 313 -
OLGA User manual
OILCOMPONENT Symbol BLACKOILCOMPONENT Ref. to blackoil component label of type

| oil.
WATERCOMPONENT Symbol BLACKOILCOMPONENT Ref. to blackoil component label of type

| water.
WATERCUT Real (-) [0.0] Watercut.
BLACKOILOPTIONS (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines the black oil options.
APIGRAVITY Real [] API gravity. API = 141.5/(oil specific gravity)–

131.5. Cannot be given if OILSPECIFICGRAVITY
is given.
BUBBLEPRESS Real (Pa) Bubble pressure at a given temperature.
BUBBLETEMP Real (C) [] The temperature corresponding to the bubble

pressure.
GASSPECIFICGRAVITY Real [] Gas specific gravity (gas density/air density).

GASSPECIFICGRAVITY has to be larger than 0.5
(0.55 is pure methane).
GOR Real Gas/oil ratio. The GOR should not be larger than
(Sm3/Sm3) 1000 Sm3/Sm3.
GORMODEL Symbol <None> | Correlation used to calculate the gas/oil ratio.

STANDING |
BEGGS |
GLASO |
[LASATER]
OILSPECIFICGRAVITY Real [] Oil specific gravity (oil density/water density).

Cannot be given if APIGRAVITY is given.
OILVISC Real (N- Measured oil viscosity at a given pressure and

s/m2) temperature.
OILVISC-TUNING Symbol <None> | ON | Enable tuning of oil viscosity.

[OFF]
- 314 -
Reference manual
RSGO_BP-TUNING Symbol <None> | ON | Activate this key to tune relevant parameters in the
[OFF] selected blackoil correlation to match given GOR
at standard conditions and given bubble point. (I.e.
BUBBLEPRESS and corresponding temperature
BUBBLETEMP.)
VISCPRESS Real (Pa) [] The pressure at which the viscosity is measured.
VISCTEMP Real (C) [] The temperature at which the viscosity is

measured.
COMPOPTIONS (on CaseLevel)
This statement specifies the different options used in the PVT routines for calculating material properties
and flashing terms in the Compositional tracking on page 58 model.
The FLASHTYPE key specifies the type of flash calculations to use. TWOPHASE is the simplest
calculations and is the default value if no aqueous components (H2O, MEG, etc) are part of the feed.
SIMPLETHREEPHASE is the default value if there are at least one aqueous component.
FULLTHREEPHASE is the most time-consuming option, but provides full mixing in all phases. This option
must be used if any salt components are defined in the feed.
The TCONDENSATION/TVAPORIZATION keys are non-equilibrium delay constants for the mass transfer
from liquid phase to gas phase and vice versa. The keys can be introduced for each component specified
with theCOMPONENT key. The equilibrium state reached in the flash calculations will then be delayed for
the specified components. The default value is no delay.
The DENSITYLIMIT key can be used to specify the limit for the dense phase region density. In the dense
phase region, where there are no good criteria to distinguish gas from oil, a fluid with higher density than
the given value is defined as liquid and a fluid with lower density is defined as gas.
COMPONENT SymbolList Components to specify delay constants for

(defined in feed file).
DENSITYLIMIT Real Used in the dense phase region. A fluid with a

(kg/m3) density higher than this limit is defined as a liquid
and a fluid with lower density is identified as gas.
If used, it should preferably be set equal to the
fluid density at the critical point. If not used,
internal routines will decide the phase (may
cause instabilities when crossing bubble/dew
point).
- 315 -
OLGA User manual
FLASHTYPE Symbol TWOPHASE | Algorithm used in flash calculations. TWOPHASE

SIMPLETHREEPHASE | is <default> if no aqueous components are part
FULLTHREEPHASE | of the feed file. SIMPLETHREEPHASE is
[<default>] <default> if there is at least one aqueous
component in the feed file. FULLTHREPHASE is
<default> if there are salt-components in the feed
file.
GASCOMPONENT Symbol ComponentData | Component for gas phase properties in sections

with only water.
OILCOMPONENT Symbol ComponentData | Component for oil phase properties in sections

with only water.
PVTPACKAGE Symbol [MULTIFLASH] The PVT package used in Compositional

Tracking simulations. Currently the Multiflash
package from Infochem is available.
TBOILING RealList [1.0] Time constant for mass transfer from liquid phase
(s) to gas phase due to boiling for components in
COMPONENT. (Non-equilibrium delay constant).
Only for STEAMWATER-HC.
TCONDENSATION RealList Time constant for mass transfer from gas phase
(s) to liquid phase (Non-equilibrium delay constant).
When COMPOSITIONAL=ON, the default value
is no delay and each value must have a
corresponding component in COMPONENT.
When COMPOSITIONAL=STEAMWATER-HC,
TCONDENSATION may be defined as a time
series and the default value is 1 s.
TIME RealList [0.0] Time points for which TBOILING,

(s) TVAPORIZATION and TCONDENSATION
changes. Only for STEAMWATER-HC.
TVAPORIZATION RealList Time constant for mass transfer from liquid phase
(s) to gas phase (Non-equilibrium delay constant).
When COMPOSITIONAL=ON, the default value
is no delay and each value must have a
corresponding component in COMPONENT.
When COMPOSITIONAL=STEAMWATER-HC
TVAPORIZATION may be defined as a time
series and the default value is 1 s.
FEED (on CaseLevel)
This keyword defines a feed, which is a fluid composition that can be used in a source or at a boundary.
The components used in the feed must be defined in the OLGA case. Components are defined differently
for the different fluid-modules. For Blackoil and correlation based Drillingfluid, components are defined in
OLGA. However for Compositional Tracking and table based Drilling, the components are are defined in
the fluid files (FEEDFILE and PVTTABLE)
- 316 -
Reference manual

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
COMPONENT SymbolList Components in feed. For COMPOSITIONAL=ON the

components are defined in the feed file. Else, for DRILLING=ON
available components are HC, H2O, MEG/MEOH/ETOH and
MUD components (a CUTTING component is available if
PARTICLEFLOW=SIMPLE/ADVANCED).
LABEL String [FEED] Name of feed.
MASSFRACTION RealList Mass fractions of the components of the feed.
MOLEFRACTION RealList Mole fractions of the components of the feed.
SINGLEOPTIONS (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines options for simulation of single component systems in OLGA, turned on by
specifying COMPOSITIONAL=SINGLE in keyword OPTIONS.
There are three single component systems that can be specified. These are H2O, CO2 and OTHER, and
is specified by key COMPONENT in SINGLEOPTIONS. For COMPONENT equal H2O and CO2 most
physical parameters are implemented in OLGA, while for COMPONENT=OTHER the user needs to
specify these parameters in SINGLEOPTIONS.
COMPONENT Symbol <None> | H2O | Name of single-component.

CO2 | OTHER |
CPIC RealList Coefficients in equation for specific heat. Only for

SINGLECOMPONENT=OTHER.
MAXPRESSURE Real Maximum pressure for PVT table generated.

(Pa)
MAXTEMPERATURE Real (C) Maximum temperature for PVT table generated.
MINPRESSURE Real Minimum pressure for PVT table generated.

(Pa)
MINTEMPERATURE Real (C) Minimum temperature for PVT table generated.
MW Real Molecular weight. Only for

(g/mol) SINGLECOMPONENT=OTHER.
OMEGA Real Accentric factor. Only for

- 317 -
OLGA User manual
PC Real Critical pressure. Only for

(Pa) SINGLECOMPONENT=OTHER.
TBOILING RealList [1.0] Time constant for mass transfer from liquid phase to gas
(s) phase due to boiling for component. (Non-equilibrium
delay constant).
TC Real (C) Critical temperature. Only for

TCONDENSATION RealList [1.0] Time constant for mass transfer from gas phase to liquid
(s) phase for the component. (Non-equilibrium delay
constant).
TIME RealList [0.0] Time points for which TBOILING and TCONDENSATION
(s) changes.
VISX Real [1.0] Viscosity tuning factor. Only for

VOLX RealList [0.0] Volume tuning factor. Only for

Controller
AlgebraicController
The controller type ALGEBRAIC can combine signals from other controllers using a defined set of
operators, see below. The controller loops over all operators given in VARIABLEFUNCTION key. The
number of operands is defined by the operation. The operators are applied to the current result (result from
previous operation) as the first operand and additional operands in terms of input signals terminals
(INPSIG_i). The initial current result (result from previous operation) is input signal one (INPSIG_1).
The following unary operator has been implemented:
ABS – Take the absolute value of the current result
The following binary operators have been implemented:
ADD – Add next input signal (INPSIG_i) to the current result
SUB – Subtract next input signal (INPSIG_i) from the current result
MUL – Multiply the current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i)
DIV – Divide the current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i)
GT – Compare current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i), return value one if current result is
greater than next input signal, value zero otherwise
LT – Compare current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i), return value one if current result is less
than next input signal, value zero otherwise
GE – Compare current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i), return value one if current result is
greater than or equal to the next input signal, value zero otherwise
LE – Compare current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i), return value one if current result is less
than or equal to the next input signal, value zero otherwise
- 318 -
Reference manual
EQ – Compare current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i), return value one if current result is
equal to the next input signal, value zero otherwise.
NEQ – Compare current result with the next input signal (INPSIG_i), return value one if current result is not
equal to the next input signal, value zero otherwise.
Controller type Algebraic makes use of the following signal terminals:
INPSIG_1..N (Required input)
MODE (Optional input)
SIGNAL (Optional input)
ACTIVATE (Optional input)
CONTR_1..N (Optional output)
BIAS Real [0.0] Initial output signal.
CLOSINGTIME Real (s) [0] Time required to change valve settings or

compressor speed from maximum to
minimum value.
EXPOSE SymbolList States which keys should be made available

as input variables on the OPC server.
LABEL String [CONTR] Identification label for this controller.
MANUALOUTPUT RealList Manual output.
MAXCHANGE Real [0.2] Maximum allowed change in controller

output signal from one time-step to the next.
This restriction is used by the time-step
control. If the change in output exceeds this
value, OLGA will go back to the previous
point in time and integrate with a shorter
time-step.
MAXSIGNAL Real [1.0e10] Maximum output signal.
MINSIGNAL Real [-1.0e10] Minimum output signal.
- 319 -
OLGA User manual
MODE SymbolList MANUAL | AUTOMATIC: The setpoint is defined on the

EXTERNALSIGNAL | controller. MANUAL: The controller output is
FREEZE | [AUTOMATIC] given by key MANUALOUTPUT.
EXTERNALSIGNAL: The controller output
is given by the controller connected to the
SIGNAL terminal. EXTERNALSETPOINT
the setpoint is given by the controller
connected to the SETPOINT terminal.
FREEZE the controller output is frozen (kept
constant).
OPENINGTIME Real (s) [0] Time required to change valve settings or

compressor speed from minimum to
maximum value.
STROKETIME Real (s) [0] Stroke or actuator time. Time required to

change valve settings or compressor speed
from minimum to maximum value or vice
versa.
TIME RealList Time series for the MANUALOUTPUT key.

(s)
TIMESTEPCONTROL Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] If TIMESTEPCONTROL=OFF the time step

control is bypassed. If STROKETIME is less
than DTMIN the time step control is also
bypassed.
VARIABLEFUNCTION SymbolList ADD | SUB | MUL | DIV | For use when one or more variables are
POW | MOD | GT | LT | GE specified. The values of the variables are
| LE | EQ | NEQ | SQRT | subject to the operator specified. The first
ABS | EXP | LN | LOG10 | operator is used on the first
COS | SIN | TAN | ACOS | operand(s)=INPSIG terminal(s). The second
ASIN | ATAN | SGN | HSF | operator is used on the result for the first
CEIL | FLOOR | RAND | operation and possibly any additional
INPSIG terminal.
Name Description
INPSIG* When connected, these terminals define the input signals to the
controller.
ACTIVATE When connected, this terminal defines the controller activate signal.
MODE When connected, this terminal defines the controller MODE.
SIGNAL When connected, this terminal defines the controller output signal in
MODE = EXTERNALSIGNAL.
*
Required signal.
- 320 -
Reference manual
Signal connections - Output
Name Description
CONTR When this output signal is connected, it defines the value of a key in
the external device.
GETMODE When this output signal is connected, it provides the controller mode
signal to an external device.
ISACTIVE When this output signal is connected, it controls if the external device
is active or not.
MEASVAR When this output signal is connected, it provides the measured

variable to an external device.
RATELIMITED When this output signal is connected, it provides the controller rate
limited signal to an external device.
SATURATED When this output signal is connected, it provides controller saturated

ASCController
The main purpose of the Anti Surge Controller (ASC) is to prevent a compressor from operating to the left
of the Surge Line in a compressor performance map.
The controller uses a non-symmetrical PID algorithm. Two amplification constants must therefore be given.
One amplification for positive and one for negative controller error.
The ASC controller has the following signal terminals:
MEASRD (Required input)
SETPOINT (Optional input)
AMP1 Real Anti Surge Controller amplification

(proportional term). Used for negative
deviation from setpoint.
AMP2 Real Anti Surge Controller amplification

(proportional term). Used for positive
deviation from setpoint.
BIAS Real Initial output signal.
- 321 -
OLGA User manual
CLOSINGTIME Real (s) [10.0] Time required to change valve settings or

minimum value.
DELAY Real (s) [0.0] Time from when the measured value is read
to when it is used by the controller.
DERIVATIVECONST Real (s) [0.0] Coefficient in front of the derivative term of a

PID controller.

INTEGRALCONST Real (s) [1.0E+10] Coefficient in front of the integral of PID

controllers. It represents a characteristic
time. N.b., it is the inverse of the coefficient
which appears in the expression for the
output signal. If the non-linear option is
chosen, this is an array as a function of the
ERROR array.
MAXCHANGE Real [0.2] Analog controller: Maximum allowed change

in controller output signal from one time-step
to the next. This restriction is used by the
time-step control. If the change in output
exceeds this value, OLGA will go back to the
previous point in time and integrate with a
shorter time-step. Digital controller:
Maximum discrepancy between the instance
a sample should be taken and the actual
time in the simulation in terms of a fraction of
the sample time interval. (E.g., with
SAMPLETIME=2.0s and MAXCHANGE=0.2,
the maximum discrepancy will be ±0.4s.)
MAXSIGNAL Real [1.0] Maximum output signal.
MINSIGNAL Real [0.0] Minimum output signal.
MODE SymbolList AUTOMATIC | MANUAL | AUTOMATIC: The setpoint is defined on the

FREEZE | given by key MANUALOUTPUT.
[EXTERNALSETPOINT] EXTERNALSIGNAL: The controller output is
given by the controller connected to the
SIGNAL terminal. EXTERNALSETPOINT the
setpoint is given by the controller connected
to the SETPOINT terminal. FREEZE the
controller output is frozen (kept constant).
- 322 -
Reference manual
NORMRANGE Real For normalized controllers (used together

with AMPLIFICATION). Indicates measuring
range for input to controller.
OPENINGTIME Real (s) [10.0] Time required to change valve settings or

maximum value.
SAMPLETIME Real (s) Time interval between each sampling of

input. Activates digital controller option.
SETPOINT RealList Setpoint values.
STROKETIME Real (s) [10.0] Stroke or actuator time. Time required to

from minimum to maximum value and vice
versa.
TIME RealList Time series for the SETPOINT key.

(s)
TIMESTEPCONTROL Symbol <None> | OFF | [ON] If TIMESTEPCONTROL=OFF the time step

bypassed.
Name Description
MEASRD* When connected, these terminals define the controller measured variable
signal.
SETPOINT When connected, this terminal defines the controller external setpoint
signal.
*
Required signal.
Name Description
- 323 -
OLGA User manual
is active or not.

CascadeController
A cascade controller (normal or extended) is a PID controller. The cascade controller is used in the inner
loop of a cascade control. The output of the primary controller changes the setpoint of the secondary
(cascade) controller.
A cascade controller has the following terminals:
AMPLIFICATION RealList PID amplification factor. If the non-linear option is

chosen, this is an array as a function of the
ERROR array.
AVERAGETIME Real (s) For use with EXTENDED CASCADE controller.

Average time for the moving averaging function of
the primary controller variable.

compressor speed from maximum to minimum
value.
CONSTONE Real (1/s) For use with EXTENDED CASCADE controller:

Constant C1.
CONSTSWITCH Real For use with EXTENDED CASCADE controller:

Switching value for using C1 and C2.
CONSTTWO Real (1/s) For use with EXTENDED CASCADE controller:

Constant C2.
- 324 -
Reference manual
DEFAULTINPUT Real Setpoint for INACTIVEMODE=DEFAULTMODE.
DELAY Real (s) [0.0] Time from when the measured value is read to
when it is used by the controller.
DERIVATIVECONST RealList [0.0] Coefficient in front of the derivative term of PID

(s) controllers. If the non-linear option is chosen, this
is an array as a function of the ERROR array.
ERROR RealList [0.0] Activate the non-linear option for the PID.
Coefficients are given as an array of values
representing each value in ERROR. Error is the
deviation.
EXPOSE SymbolList States which keys should be made available as

input variables on the OPC server.
EXTENDED Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] Select ON to use the EXTENDED CASCADE

controller.
INACTIVEMODE Symbol <None> | ONHOLD | Specifies how the controller acts when it is
INTERLOCK | deactivated by a selector or override controller.
DEFAULTINPUT | ONHOLD: Keeps output value from before the
[NORMAL] controller was deactivated. INTERLOCK: The
cascade controller gets feedback on the output
signal calculated by the connected controller.
When the cascade controller is deactivated, it
back calculates its integral error to match the
output signal of the connected controller.
NORMAL: Computes controller output signal (PID
action) based on set point and measured values.
DEFAULTINPUT: Computes controller output
signal (PID action) based on set point value and
measured value given by key DEFAULTINPUT.
INITIALSETPOINT Real Initial setpoint for extended cascade.
INTEGRALCONST RealList [1.0E+10] Coefficient in front of the integral of PID

(s) controllers. It represents a characteristic time.
N.b., it is the inverse of the coefficient which
appears in the expression for the output signal. If
the non-linear option is chosen, this is an array as
a function of the ERROR array.
- 325 -
OLGA User manual
MAXCHANGE Real [0.2] Analog controller: Maximum allowed change in

controller output signal from one time-step to the
next. This restriction is used by the time-step
control. If the change in output exceeds this value,
OLGA will go back to the previous point in time
and integrate with a shorter time-step. Digital
controller: Maximum discrepancy between the
instance a sample should be taken and the actual
time in the simulation in terms of a fraction of the
sample time interval. (E.g., with
SAMPLETIME=2.0s and MAXCHANGE=0.2, the
maximum discrepancy will be ±0.4s.)
MAXSETPOINT Real Maximum setpoint for secondary controller in

cascade control loop.
MINSETPOINT Real Minimum setpoint for secondary controller in

cascade control loop.

EXTERNALSIGNAL | controller. MANUAL: The controller output is given
FREEZE | by key MANUALOUTPUT. EXTERNALSIGNAL:
[AUTOMATIC] The controller output is given by the controller
connected to the SIGNAL terminal. FREEZE the
NORMRANGE Real For normalized controllers (used together with

AMPLIFICATION). Indicates measuring range for
input to controller.

compressor speed from minimum to maximum
value.
SAMPLEDT Real (s) For use with EXTENDED CASCADE controller.

Logging time interval for the primary controller
variable.
SAMPLETIME Real (s) Time interval between each sampling of input.

Activates digital controller option.
STROKETIME Real (s) [10.0] Stroke or actuator time. Time required to change
valve settings or compressor speed from minimum
to maximum value or vice versa.
- 326 -
Reference manual
TIME RealList Time series for the MANUALOUTPUT key.

(s)

control is bypassed. If STROKETIME is less than
DTMIN the time step control is also bypassed.
Name Description
signal.
SETPOINT* When connected, this terminal defines the controller external setpoint
signal.
*
Required signal.
Name Description
ERRVAR When this output signal is connected, it provides the error signal to an
external device.
INTGVAR When this output signal is connected, it provides the controller integral
value to an external device.
is active or not.

PMCAS
- 327 -
OLGA User manual

SETPVAR When this output signal is connected, it provides the controller

setpoint signal to an external device.
ESDController
ESD - Emergency shutdown controller. The ESD controller sends a signal intended to close a valve when
the measured variable is above or below (depending on the OPENMODE key) the setpoint value. The
setpoint is given as a signal or a key. The valve is opened again if RESET is given, and if the measured
variable is below or above (depending on the OPENMODE key) the setpoint value.
The ESD controller has the following signal terminals:
MEASRD_1..N (Required input)

minimum value.

MANUALOUTPUT RealList Manual output. Set by time series.
- 328 -
Reference manual

shorter time-step. Digital controller: Maximum
discrepancy between the instance a sample
should be taken and the actual time in the
simulation in terms of a fraction of the sample
time interval. (For example, with
SAMPLETIME=2.0s and MAXCHANGE=0.2,
the maximum discrepancy will be ±0.4s.)

EXTERNALSETPOINT | given by key MANUALOUTPUT.
FREEZE | [AUTOMATIC] EXTERNALSIGNAL: The controller output is
controller output is frozen (kept constant). Set
by time series.

maximum value.
OPENMODE Symbol <None> | BELOW | Either ABOVE or BELOW depending on

[ABOVE] whether the valve is to close when the signal
goes above or below the setpoint.
RESET RealList The valve closes if the input variable gets

below or exceeds the reset value depending
on OPENMODE. The list refers to the list of
measured signals.

SETPOINT RealList Setpoint values. The list refers to the list of

measured signals.

versa.
- 329 -
OLGA User manual
TIME RealList Time series for MODE and MANUALOUTPUT

(s) keys.

bypassed.
Name Description
signal.
RESET When connected, this terminal defines the controller external reset signal.
signal.
*
Required signal.
Name Description
is active or not.


- 330 -
Reference manual
ManualController
The manual controller simulates an operator. It provides a valve opening directly from a user specified
series, only dependent on time. The user specified series is given in the setpoint key, or as a setpoint
signal. The manual controller limits the setpoint with STROKETIME or CLOSINGTIME/OPENINGTIME.
A manual controller has the following signal terminals:
CONTR..N (Optional output)

minimum value.

HTEXT Real (s) [-1] External time step limitation. If HTEXT is less
than or equal to zero, external timestep
limitation is disabled.

time interval. (E.g., with SAMPLETIME=2.0s
and MAXCHANGE=0.2, the maximum
discrepancy will be ±0.4s.)
- 331 -
OLGA User manual


maximum value.
RANGECHECK Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] If RANGECHECK=ON MINSIGNAL and

MAXSIGNAL will be used to limit the output
signal.


versa.

(s)

bypassed.
Name Description
signal.
- 332 -
Reference manual
Name Description
is active or not.


OverrideController
An override controller is a low select or high select operator. An override controller uses any number of
input signals. The input signals are compared, and the minimum/maximum (depending on the
SELECTIONMODE key) input signal is chosen as the output signal from the override controller.
An override controller has the following signal terminals:
INPSIG_1..N (Required input)

value.

- 333 -
OLGA User manual

value, OLGA will go back to the previous point in
time and integrate with a shorter time-step. Digital
controller: Maximum discrepancy between the
instance a sample should be taken and the actual
time in the simulation in terms of a fraction of the
sample time interval. (E.g., with

[AUTOMATIC] EXTERNALSIGNAL: The controller output is
given by the controller connected to the SIGNAL
terminal. FREEZE the controller output is frozen
(kept constant).

value.

SELECTIONMODE Symbol <None> | HIGH | An override controller selects either minimum or

[LOW] maximum of the signals from all the
subcontrollers. Key SELECTIONMODE
determines the selection of minimum or maximum
signal.
valve settings or compressor speed from
minimum to maximum value or vice versa.

(s)

- 334 -
Reference manual
Name Description
controller.
*
Required signal.
Name Description
is active or not.

PIDController
PID (Proportional-Integral-Derivative) controllers are designed to maintain a specified value (given by a

setpoint signal or key) for a measured flow variable (given as an input signal).
The user can specify if the controller is linear or non-linear. If a controller is non-linear, the user has to give
tables for specifying the amplification factors, integral time constants, and derivative time constants as
functions of the error input.
The PID controller has the following signal terminals:
WINDUP (Optional input)
- 335 -
OLGA User manual
AMPLIFICATION RealList PID amplification factor. If the non-linear option

is chosen, this is an array as a function of the
ERROR array.

value.
DEFAULTINPUT Real Setpoint for

INACTIVEMODE=DEFAULTMODE.
DELAY Real (s) [0.0] Time from when the measured value is read to
when it is used by the controller.
DERIVATIVECONST RealList [0.0] Coefficient in front of the derivative term of PID

(s) controllers. If the non-linear option is chosen,
this is an array as a function of the ERROR
array.
ERROR RealList [0.0] Activate the non-linear option for the PID.
Coefficients are given as an array of values
representing each value in ERROR. Error is
the deviation.

INACTIVEMODE Symbol <None> | ONHOLD | Specifies how the controller acts when it is
INTERLOCK | deactivated by a selector or override controller.
DEFAULTINPUT | ONHOLD: Keeps output value from before the
[NORMAL] controller was deactivated. INTERLOCK: The
PID controller gets feedback on the output
signal calculated by the connected controller.
When the PID controller is deactivated, it back
calculates its integral error to match the output
signal of the connected controller. NORMAL:
Computes controller output signal (PID action)
based on set point and measured values.
DEFAULTINPUT: Computes controller output
signal (PID action) based on set point value
and measured value given by key
DEFAULTINPUT.
- 336 -
Reference manual
INTEGRALCONST RealList [1.0E+10] Coefficient in front of the integral of PID

(s) controllers. It represents a characteristic time.
N.b., it is the inverse of the coefficient which
appears in the expression for the output signal.
If the non-linear option is chosen, this is an
array as a function of the ERROR array.
MAXCHANGE Real (s) [0.2] Analog controller: Maximum allowed change in

controller output signal from one time-step to
the next. This restriction is used by the time-
step control. If the change in output exceeds
this value, OLGA will go back to the previous
point in time and integrate with a shorter time-
step. Digital controller: Maximum discrepancy
between the instance a sample should be
taken and the actual time in the simulation in
terms of a fraction of the sample time interval.
(E.g., with SAMPLETIME=2.0s and
MAXCHANGE=0.2, the maximum discrepancy
will be ±0.4s.)

FREEZE | EXTERNALSIGNAL: The controller output is
[AUTOMATIC] given by the controller connected to the
setpoint is given by the controller connected to
the SETPOINT terminal. FREEZE the
NORMRANGE Real For normalized controllers (used together with

AMPLIFICATION). Indicates measuring range
for input to controller.

value.

- 337 -
OLGA User manual

from minimum to maximum value or vice versa.

(s)

bypassed.
Name Description
signal.
signal.
WINDUP When connected, this terminal defines the controller windup signal.
*
Required signal.
Name Description
ERRVAR When this output signal is connected, it provides the error signal to an
external device.
INTGVAR When this output signal is connected, it provides the controller integral
value to an external device.
is active or not.

- 338 -
Reference manual


PSVController
A Pressure Safety Valve controller (PSV) opens a valve when the pressure at a specified position (given
by a measured signal) is above or below (depending on SETPOINTMODE) the setpoint value. The
setpoint can be given as a key or as an input signal. The PSV controller closes the valve when the
pressure is below or above (depending on SETPOINTMODE) a specified RESET value.
The PSV controller has the following signal terminals:
MEASRD_1..N (Required input)

minimum value.

MANUALOUTPUT RealList Manual output. Set by time series.
- 339 -
OLGA User manual

time interval. (E.g., with SAMPLETIME=2.0s
and MAXCHANGE=0.2, the maximum
discrepancy will be ±0.4s.)

controller output is frozen (kept constant). Set
by time series.

maximum value.
OPENMODE Symbol <None> | BELOW | Either ABOVE or BELOW depending on

[ABOVE] whether the valve is to open when the signal
goes above or below the setpoint.
RESET RealList The valve closes if the input variable gets

below or exceeds the reset value depending
on OPENMODE. The list refers to the list of
measured signals.

SETPOINT RealList Setpoint values. The list refers to the list of

measured signals.

versa.
- 340 -
Reference manual
TIME RealList Time series for MODE and MANUALOUTPUT

(s) keys.

bypassed.
Name Description
signal.
RESET When connected, this terminal defines the controller external reset signal.
signal.
*
Required signal.
Name Description
is active or not.


- 341 -
OLGA User manual
ScalerController
The main purpose of a SCALER controller is to scale the measured signal from range
LOWLIMIT..HIGHLIMIT to range MINSIGNAL..MAXSIGNAL. Output U is set:
U = (Y -LOWLIMIT)/(HIGHLIMIT - LOWLIMIT)*(MAXSIGNAL-MINSIGNAL) + MINSIGNAL
where Y is the measured signal, value at the MEASRD terminal.
A scaler controller has the following terminals:

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
CLOSINGTIME Real (s) [10.0] Time required to change valve settings or compressor
speed from maximum to minimum value.
DELAY Real (s) [0.0] Time from when the measured value is read to when it is
used by the controller.

HIGHLIMIT Real High limit for measured signal.
LOWLIMIT Real Low limit for measured signal.
MAXCHANGE Real [0.2] Maximum allowed change in controller output signal from
one time-step to the next. This restriction is used by the
time-step control. If the change in output exceeds this
value, OLGA will go back to the previous point in time and
integrate with a shorter time-step.
OPENINGTIME Real (s) [10.0] Time required to change valve settings or compressor
speed from minimum to maximum value.
STROKETIME Real (s) [10.0] Stroke or actuator time. Time required to change valve
settings or compressor speed from minimum to maximum
value or vice versa.
- 342 -
Reference manual
TIMESTEPCONTROL Symbol <None> | If TIMESTEPCONTROL=OFF the time step control is

ON | [OFF] bypassed. If STROKETIME is less than DTMIN the time
step control is also bypassed.
Name Description
signal.
*
Required signal.
Name Description
is active or not.


SelectorController
The selector controller has two sub controllers, SUBCONLOW and SUBCONHIGH. The selector controller
switches between these sub-controllers depending of the low and high limits given as input through the
HIGHLIMITSIG and LOWLIMITSIG signal terminals. A sub-controller that is active due to a limit being
reached stays active until another limit is reached. Then another sub-controller takes over, and stays
active until yet another limit is reached.
Any number of limits (HIGHLIMITSIG/LOWLIMITSIG) can be given.
A selector controller has the following signal terminals:
SUBCONLOW (Required input)
SUBCONHIGH (Required input)
HIGHLIMITSIG_1.. Required input)
LOWLIMITSIG_1..N (Required input)
- 343 -
OLGA User manual

value.

input variables on the OPC server. Only keys
that are explicitly set can be exposed. To use the
default value, you must define this explicitly.
HIGHLIMIT RealList HIGHLIMIT is compared with the HIGHLIMITSIG

signal input. If the signal from SUBCONLOW is
used, the controller will switch to the
SUBCONHIGH signal if HIGHLIMITSIG >
HIGHLIMIT. If multiple
HIGHLIMIT/HIGHLIMITSIG is given, the
controller will loop all connections and test if
HIGHLIMITSIG_i > HIGHLIMIT[i]
INITIALCONTROLLER Symbol <None> | Active sub-controller at the start of the

SUBCONHIGH | simulation. Has to refer to a SUBCON terminal.
SUBCONLOW |
LOWLIMIT RealList LOWLIMIT is compared with the LOWLIMITSIG

signal input. If the signal from SUBCONHIGH is
used, the controller will switch to the
SUBCONLOW signal if LOWLIMITSIG <
LOWLIMIT. If multiple LOWLIMIT/LOWLIMITSIG
is given, the controller will loop all connections
and test if LOWLIMITSIG_i < LOWLIMIT[i].

value, OLGA will go back to the previous point in
time and integrate with a shorter time-step.
Digital controller: Maximum discrepancy between
the instance a sample should be taken and the
actual time in the simulation in terms of a fraction
of the sample time interval. (E.g., with
- 344 -
Reference manual

[AUTOMATIC] EXTERNALSIGNAL: The controller output is
given by the controller connected to the SIGNAL
terminal. FREEZE the controller output is frozen
(kept constant).

value.

valve settings or compressor speed from
minimum to maximum value or vice versa.

(s)

Name Description
SUBCONHIGH* When connected, this terminal defines the high sub-controller.
SUBCONLOW * When connected, this terminal defines the low sub-controller.
HIGHLIMITSIG When connected, this terminal defines the high limit signal.
LOWLIMITSIG When connected, this terminal defines the low limit signal.
*
Required signal.
- 345 -
OLGA User manual
Name Description
is active or not.

STDController
The STD Controller converts mass flow rate to volumetric flow rate at standard conditions.
Set correct phase in PHASE key. Specify the fluid in the FLUID or FEEDNAME keys. Specify the wanted
GOR/CGR/WGR/WATERCUT/MOLWEIGHT, and the overall mass flow rate will be calculated.
Connect the STD Controller output terminal Contr to an PID controller Measrd terminal.
CGR Real Condensate-gas ratio. The default value is

(Sm3/Sm3) the equilibrium value from PVT data.

FEEDMASSFRACTION RealList (-) Mass fraction of each feed.
FEEDMOLEFRACTION RealList (-) Mole fraction of each feed.
FEEDNAME SymbolList Label of feeds feeding to terminal nodes.

Requires COMPOSITIONAL=ON or
BLACKOIL under the OPTIONS keyword.
FEEDVOLFRACTION RealList (-) Volume fraction of each feed given in

FEEDNAME for choke model (only for
Blackoil model).
- 346 -
Reference manual
FLUID Symbol PVTData | Label or number of fluid table to apply for the
specific branch. If a keyword based pvt-file is
used, FLUID must be the same as the
LABEL given in the pvt-file, i.e., numbering is
not valid for this format.
GLR Real Gas/liquid volumetric flow ratio at standard

(Sm3/Sm3) conditions.
GOR Real [-1.0] Gas/oil volumetric flow ratio at standard

(Sm3/Sm3) conditions. By default, the GOR from the
PVT table is used.
LABEL String [STD] Identification label for this controller.
MOLWEIGHT Real Molecular weight of equivalent gas (total

(kg/kmol) flow). By default, the gas density at standard
conditions from the PVT table is used to
determine the molecular weight.
OUTPUTUNIT Symbol <None> | Sm3/h | Unit of controller output.

Sm3/d | scf/d | MMscf/d
| STB/d | STB/M | scf/s |
scf/h | MSm3/d | Mscf/d
| [Sm3/s]
PHASE Symbol <None> | GAS | OIL | The phase for which the volumetric flow rate
WATER | LIQUID | ALL | is specified.
UDPVTFILE Symbol SlurryPvtData | Name of User Defined property file used by

the plug-in module.
WATERCUT Real (-) [-1.0] Water volume fraction in oil/water mixture.

With a value of -1.0 the total water fraction is
taken from the fluid table.
WGR Real [-1.0] Ratio between water (including water in gas

(Sm3/Sm3) phase) and gas.
Name Description
INPSIG* When connected, these terminals define the input signals to the controller.
*
Required signal.
Name Description
- 347 -
OLGA User manual
is active or not.

SwitchController
The main purpose of the switch controller is to switch between alternative inputs values. The output of the
controller is selected based on the setpoint in MODE = AUTOMATIC or SETPOINT terminal if MODE =
EXTERNALSETPOINT.
SP < 1.5 unconstrained output A is set equal to controller at terminal INPSIG_1
….
(Ni-0.5) <= SP unconstrained output A is set equal to controller at terminal INPSIG_N
Where Ni is the number of connected input terminals INPSIG
A switch controller has the following terminals:
INPSIG_1..Ni (Required input)

minimum value.

- 348 -
Reference manual
MAXCHANGE Real [0.2] Maximum allowed change in controller output

signal from one time-step to the next. This
restriction is used by the time-step control. If
the change in output exceeds this value,
OLGA will go back to the previous point in
time and integrate with a shorter time-step.


maximum value.

versa.

(s)

bypassed.
Name Description
controller.
signal.
- 349 -
OLGA User manual
*
Required signal.
Name Description
is active or not.


TableController
A table controller uses the input signal (terminal INPSIG) as lookup variable, x, in a table. The controller
output is y = f(x). The look-up function is linear interpolation.
The table controller has the following terminals:
INPSIG (Required input)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
CLOSINGTIME Real (s) [10] Time required to change valve settings or compressor
DELAY Real (s) [0.0] Time from when the measured value is read to when it is
used by the controller.

- 350 -
Reference manual
MAXCHANGE Real [0.2] Time required to change valve settings or compressor

OPENINGTIME Real (s) [10] Time required to change valve settings or compressor
speed from minimum to maximum value.
STROKETIME Real (s) [10] Stroke or actuator time. Time required to change valve
settings or compressor speed from minimum to maximum
value or vice versa.
TABLE Symbol TABLE | Label of the table. The table consist of x and y. Input
signal x1 gives output signal y1 by table interpolation.
TIMESTEPCONTROL Symbol <None> | ON If TIMESTEPCONTROL=OFF the time step control is

| [OFF] bypassed. If STROKETIME is less than DTMIN the time
step control is also bypassed.
Name Description
INPSIG* When connected, these terminals define the input signals to the controller.
*
Required signal.
Name Description
is active or not.

Output
OUTPUTDATA (on PIDController)
This statement defines the controller variables to be printed to the output file (*.out).
Note: The output data definition is the same for all controllers. The PID controller is used as illustration.
- 351 -
OLGA User manual
See Controller Output Variables on page 568 for available variables.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
VARIABLE SymbolList List of variables to be printed. Units may be

(ValueUnitPair) specified.
SERVERDATA (on PIDController)
This statement defines the server data output from controllers. Server data serves two purposes, it
provides variables available through the OPC server interface and variables for interactive plotting and
viewing of values in the GUI.
Note: The server data definition is the same for all controllers. The PID controller is used as illustration.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
DTPLOT Real (s) [0] Interval for update of server data.
VARIABLE SymbolList List of variables to be plotted. Units should not be

(ValueUnitPair) used.
TRENDDATA (on PIDController)
This statement defines the trend data to be plotted for controllers. A trend plot is a time series plot for a
specified variable.
Note: The trend data definition is the same for all controllers. The PID controller is used as illustration.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
VARIABLE SymbolList List of variables to be plotted. Units may be

- 352 -
Reference manual
Drilling
TOOLJOINT (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines the geometrical data for internal and external pipe upsets in the flowpath. The
purpose is to calculate a correction factor for the pipe wall roughness due to the pipe upsets.
The TOOLJOINT keyword is part of the Wells module.
Figure 109 Side view and cross section of flowpath with upsets
D1EXUP Real (m) External upset of pipe/tubing.
D2INUP Real (m) Internal upset in annulus/tubing.
DD1 Real (m) Inner diameter of annulus.
DD2 Real (m) Outer diameter of annulus.
GEOMETRY Symbol GEOMETRY | Geometry label to where the tool-joint is located.
LABEL String [TOOLJ] Tool-joint label, default is tool-joint number.
LJOINT Real (m) Distance between upsets.
LUPSET Real (m) Length of upset.
PIPE SymbolList Label of pipe(s) for which the wall roughness shall be adjusted.
- 353 -
OLGA User manual
FA-models
FLUID (on CaseLevel)
Note: The Complex fluid module will be retired after the release of OLGA 2018 and will not be included
in later versions. Existing OLGA Complex Fluid module users on active maintenance will get support on
this feature until the release of OLGA 2019.1. The functionality is replaced by the RHEOLOGY keyword.
This statement enables the use of the complex viscosity model and the complex fluid model for simulation
of non-Newtonian flows and high viscosity liquids. Note that the RHEOLOGY keyword can be used for the
same purpose.
The complex fluid model
The Complex fluid module requires a separate license. The module utilizes either the Bingham, the power
law or a Newtonian model. As opposed to the complex viscosity model, the complex fluid model includes
numerous modifications to the physical models for both separated and distributed flow taking into account
the non-Newtonian behavior of the fluids. As soon as TYPE is set to COMPLEXFLUID the modified
physical models are used, even if CFLUML or CFLUMW are set to NEWTONIAN.
Due to limited testing against Newtonian data, the complex fluid model is not recommended used on gas-
condensate and oil-gas systems with oil viscosity less than 50 cp.
For the complex fluid model, the fluid properties can be given in two ways, simple or full (FULL = YES). In
the simple mode the power law exponent or yield stress is given in the main input file. In the full mode, the
power law exponent or the yield stress is given as a function of pressure and temperature in the fluid
property table file specified in PVTFILE in FILES. This implies that the FLUID keyword must be given
above the FILES keyword in the OLGA input file because the fluid property files are read as soon as OLGA
reads the FILES keyword.
In all cases the hydrocarbon liquid and/or the water viscosity part of the usual PVT file is used. In the
power law formulation it is used as the consistency factor K, and in the Bingham formulation it is used as
the coefficient of rigidity. Therefore, setting CFLUML = NEWTONIAN is equivalent to CFLUML =
BINGHAM with YIELDSTRL = 0, and CFLUML = POWERLAW with POWEXPL = 1.
CFLUML Symbol <None> | BINGHAM | POWERLAW | Type of complex fluid model of the liquid
[NEWTONIAN] hydrocarbon phase.
CFLUMW Symbol <None> | BINGHAM | POWERLAW | Type of complex fluid model of the water
[NEWTONIAN] phase.
CONSFL Real Consistency factor for hydrocarbon liquid in

the complex viscosity model.
CONSFW Real Consistency factor for water phase in the

complex viscosity model.
CVISL Symbol <None> | BINGHAM | POWERLAW | Type of complex viscosity model of the liquid
HERSCHELBUCKLEY | hydrocarbon phase.
[NEWTONIAN]
- 354 -
Reference manual
CVISW Symbol <None> | BINGHAM | POWERLAW | Type of complex viscosity model of the water
HERSCHELBUCKLEY | phase.
[NEWTONIAN]
FULL Symbol <None> | YES | [NO] Whether or not to use power exponent/yield
stress as function of P and T from the fluid
property file in a complex fluid model.
PLASTL Real (N- Hydrocarbon liquid plastic viscosity, used in

s/m2) the complex viscosity model.
PLASTW Real (N- Water plastic viscosity used in the complex

s/m2) viscosity model.
POWEXPL Real Exponent for hydrocarbon liquid phase

model, used in both the complex viscosity
and complex fluid model.
POWEXPW Real Exponent for water phase model, used in

both the complex viscosity and complex fluid
model.
TYPE Symbol <None> | COMPLEXFLUID | Fluid model type.

COMPLEXVISCOSITY |
[NEWTONIAN]
YIELDSTRL Real Yield stress for hydrocarbon liquid phase in

(Pa) the complex viscosity and complex fluid
models.
YIELDSTRW Real Yield stress for water phase in the complex

(Pa) viscosity and complex fluid models.
PARTICLEOPTIONS (on CaseLevel)
This statement specifies the different parameters for the particle deposition model.
These parameters become available with PARTICLEFLOW = ADVANCED in the OPTIONS keyword. If
PARTICLEOPTIONS is not specified, the default values are used in the calculations.
ANGLEOFREPOSE Real [30] Angle of repose for the particles (see User's
(degree) manual).
BEDPOROSITY Real (-) [0.35] Porosity of particle bed.
GASDIFFUSIVITY Real [1] Gas diffusivity tuning coefficient.
OILDIFFUSIVITY Real [1] Oil diffusivity tuning coefficient.
- 355 -
OLGA User manual
PARTICLEMODEL Symbol Extension_Particle | The particle transport model to use. Only models
[DEFAULT] from enabled extensions can be selected. If not
given or no extensions are installed, the internal
ADVANCED model is used.
WATERDIFFUSIVITY Real [1] Water diffusivity tuning coefficient.
SLUGTRACKING (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines the slug tracking option. This statement has two main sub-options for initiation of
liquid slugs: the level slug option (LEVEL) and the hydrodynamic slug option (HYDRODYNAMIC).
These two options may be used together or separately. Terrain slugging will be detected in ordinary
simulations without the Slug tracking module, and the interactions between terrain and hydrodynamic
slugging can be investigated using the key HYDRODYNAMIC. The level slug option is mostly used for
startup-slugs.
If HYDRODYNAMIC = ON, the code will set up a new slug in a section whenever the flow regime at the
section boundary changes from separated to slug flow and the initiation criteria are fulfilled. The initiation
criteria used depend on the model selected with the key SLUGTRACKINGMODEL under the OPTIONS
keyword. More details about this can be found in the description of Slug tracking.
If HYDRODYNAMIC = MANUAL, the user can specify a fixed number of slugs to be set up at predefined
positions and times. Using this option, liquid will be injected into the pipeline to generate slugs of required
size.
Slugs are not allowed to be generated at the inlet and outlet sections by default. That is, the boundary
sections are automatically set to illegal for slugs by the program itself. However, the slug front is allowed to
move into the outlet section, and the slug tail into the inlet section. Users can specify the sections where
slugs are not allowed to be generated by using SLUGILLEGAL keyword.
The slug tracking option offers full temperature calculation capabilities.
Remark: The availability of the slug tracking option depends on the user’s licensing agreement with
Schlumberger.
To turn off slug-tracking in a restart there are two possibilities:
1. Set both LEVEL and HYDRODYNAMIC to OFF. Then the only slugs in the system will be
the ones read from restart.
2. Remove SLUGTRACKING keyword. Average values will be used in the sections. No slugs
in the simulation.
More details can be found in the description of the Slug tracking module.
BUBBLEVOID Real (-) Minimum void required behind a level tail and ahead of
a level front at initiation time
DELAYCONSTANT Real [150] Number of pipe diameters a slug needs to propagate

before the next hydrodynamic slug is initiated.
- 356 -
Reference manual
ENDTIME Real (s) End time for level slug initiation. If not given no end
time restriction is enforced.
GASENTRAINMENT Symbol <None> | NYDAL Gas entrainment into slug from bubble for
| [VOIDINSLUG] breaking/level front in slug tracking. NYDAL: Nydal
correlation for entrainment. VOIDINSLUG: Entrainment
based on correlation for void in slug.
HYDRODYNAMIC Symbol <None> | ON | Option for initiating hydrodynamic slugs.

MANUAL | [OFF]
INITBUBBLEVOIDS RealList (-) [1] Void fractions in the slug bubbles.
INITENDTIMES RealList End times for slug generation.

(s)
INITFREQUENCY Real (1/s) The minimum distance between two consecutive slugs
is defined as (bubble vel./INITFREQUENCY). If
INITFREQUENCY is not given the minimum distance
between two consecutive slugs is set to 10 pipe
diameters.
INITLENGTH Real Maximum initial length of hydrodynamic slugs in

number of pipe diameters.
INITPERIODS RealList Time interval between initiations of consecutive slugs.

(s)
INITPOSITIONS SymbolList Labels of section boundaries where slug generation

zones are located.
INITSLUGVOIDS RealList (-) [0.0] Void fraction in the liquid slug.
INITSTARTTIMES RealList Start times for slug generation.

(s)
INITZONELENGTHS RealList The length of zones where slugs are to be generated.

(m)
LEVEL Symbol <None> | ON | Option for detecting and initiating level slugs.
[OFF]
MAXNOSLUGS Integer Max number of slugs allowed in the system, if not

given there are no restrictions.
SLUGFREQCONST Real [1] Tuning multiplier for models regulating slug initiation
frequency and slug growth. Higher factor increases
initiation frequency and favors shorter slugs.
SLUGVOID Real (-) The maximum void allowed in a level slug at initiation
time.
- 357 -
OLGA User manual
STARTTIME Real (s) Start time for level slug initiation. If not given, level
detection is on from simulation start.
SLUGTUNING (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines the slug tuning option, witch makes it possible to tune certain parameters in the
slug model. The parameters available for tuning are at the moment very limited.
The SLUGTUNING keyword may be used for adjusting the OLGA model to specific sets of measured data
or for sensitivity studies. This keyword is available both in batch and server mode. SLUGTUNING should
be applied with great care, as the validation and verification of the OLGA model may not be valid for such
cases.

set
Unit:(
) Default:[ ]
DPFACT Real [1.0] Tuning coefficient for slug front pressure drop (with and without
SLUGTRACKING). Has no effect for a large value of
SLUGLENGTH when not SLUGTRACKING.
DPONSET Real [1.0] Tuning coefficient for onset of slug front pressure drop (with and
without SLUGTRACKING). The slug front pressure drop is set to 0
when the film velocity in the slug bubble region is larger than a
certain critical velocity which can be tuned.
SLUGLENGTH Real [1e+09] Slug length (number of diameters) in slug front pressure drop
correlation for unit cell model (ignored for SLUGTRACKING).dP/dz
is inversly proporsional to SLUGLENGHT.
UBCOEFF1 Real [1.0] Tuning coefficient 1 in Taylor bubble velocity calculation (with and
without SLUGTRACKING).
UBCOEFF2 Real [1.0] Tuning coefficient 2 in Taylor bubble velocity calculation (with and
without SLUGTRACKING).
VOIDINSLUG Real [1.0] Tuning coefficient for void in horizontal slug (with and without
SLUGTRACKING).
VOIDINVERTSLUG Real [1.0] Tuning coefficient for void in vertical slug (with and without
SLUGTRACKING).
WATEROPTIONS (on CaseLevel)
In WATEROPTIONS several options are available for modeling the dispersion viscosity
(DISPERSIONVISC) and the slip between the water and oil phases (WATERSLIP).
If WATERSLIP = CONSTANT, the slip between the oil and water phases must be specified with
VELOCITYDIFFERENCE.
- 358 -
Reference manual
If WATERSLIP = ON, the velocities of liquid hydrocarbon and water is calculated by separate momentum
balance equations.
DISPERSIONVISC specifies which model is used to calculate the dispersion phase viscosity.
If DISPERSIONVISC= OFF, a continuous phase is assumed (no dispersion).
If DISPMODEL = PALRHODES, the parameter PHI100 must be specified. PHI100 is the volume fraction of
the emulsion phase when the relative viscosity is 100. The relative viscosity is the viscosity of the
dispersion divided by the viscosity of the continuous phase.
If DISPMODEL = EXPERIMENT, values for the dispersed phase volume fraction (PHIREL) for each given
value of the relative viscosity (VISCREL) must be specified.
If DISPMODEL = WOELFLIN, the user may specify the two parameters a (AWOELFLIN) and b
(BWOELFLIN) of this relative viscosity model:
No parameters are needed for the option DISPERSIONVISC = BARNEA, for which the Barnea & Mizrahi
model is used:
where
Here μc and μd are the viscosities for the continuous and dispersed phases, respectively.
A table based model is available using input as given in this example:
WATEROPTIONS DISPMODEL=INPUTVISC, \
VISCMOD=(1,1.05,1.2,1.4,1.9,2.8,2.7,1.3,1.15,1.05,1)\,
WATERCUT=( 0,0.1,0.2,0.3,0.4,0.5,0.6,0.7,0.8,0.9,1),\,
WATERFLASH=ON, WATERSLIP=ON
Note that one should use WATERFLASH=ON and WATERSLIP=ON with this model.
The flowing water volume fraction inversion point (INVERSIONWATERFRAC) can be specified for any
Dispersion Viscosity model. An intermediate dispersion range is introduced. Between the lower critical
water cut (FWLOW, default value 0.0) and the inversion point (given by INVERSIONWATERFRAC) the
flow is assumed to be a water-in-oil dispersion flowing above a free water layer. The degree of mixing of
water into oil is predicted by the standard OLGA model, but the maximum fraction of the total water stream
that can be mixed into the oil is given by EMAX (default value 1.0):
(Volume flow of water in oil)/(Total volume flow of water) ≤ EMAX

Both parameters should be defined under the WATEROPTIONS keyword.
- 359 -
OLGA User manual
This is how OLGA works with the different combinations of DISPERSIONVISC = ON/OFF and
WATERSLIP=ON/OFF:
DISPERSIONVISC=OFF, WATERSLIP=OFF
WATERSLIP=OFF forces the oil-water layers to be fully dispersed. The direction of dispersion is given by
the inversion point and the ration of superficial velocities: IF USW/(USH+USW)<INVERSIONPOINT THEN
oil continuous dispersion ELSE water continuous dispersion ENDIF.
DISPERSIONVISC=OFF turns off the emulsion viscosity models. This means that the effective viscosity of
the fully dispersed layer is computed as a linear interpolation of the viscosity for the oil and water, based
on the volume fraction of the two liquids as a fraction of volume of the liquid layer
DISPERSIONVISC=OFF, WATERSLIP=ON
WATERSLIP=ON computes ordinary oil-water dispersion based on the OLGA oil-water dispersion model.
DISPERSIONVISC=OFF turns off the computation of the effective emulsion viscosity, meaning that the
effective viscosity for each liquid layer is the viscosity of the continuous phase in each layer.
DISPERSIONVISC=OFF, WATERSLIP=CONSTANT,VELOCITYDIFFERENCE=XXX
Same as DISPERSIONVISC=OFF, WATERSLIP=ON, but the slip velocity between the oil and the water
layer is given by VELOCITYDIFFERENCE. This will only indirectly effect the dispersion computation.
DISPERSIONVISC=ON, WATERSLIP=OFF
WATERSLIP=OFF forces the oil-water layers to be fully dispersed. The direction of dispersion is given by
the inversion point and the ration of superficial velocities: IF USW/(USH+USW)<INVERSIONPOINT THEN
oil continuous dispersion ELSE water continuous dispersion ENDIF
DISPERSIONVISC=ON means that the effective viscosity of the emulsion is computed by the model given
by the DISPMODEL input key
DISPERSIONVISC=ON, WATERSLIP=ON
The slip between oil and water and the amount of liquid-liquid dispersion is computed by the OLGA
models. The effective viscosity of the emulsion is computed by the model given by the DISPMODEL input
key.
DISPERSIONVISC=ON, WATERSLIP=CONSTANT,VELOCITYDIFFERENCE=XXX
Same as DISPERSIONVISC=ON, WATERSLIP=ON, but the slip velocity between the oil and the water
layer is given by VELOCITYDIFFERENCE. This will only indirectly affect the dispersion computation.
Note: The liquid layer always holds the same viscosity as the current phase. That is, a liquid with any
dispersed gas but no other dispersed liquid holds the viscosity given by the PVT table. Any time a liquid
- liquid emulsion occurs, the effective viscosity is calculated based on the DISPERSIONVISC and
DISPMODEL.
- 360 -
Reference manual
AWOELFLIN Real [4.2] Constant A in Woelflin viscosity correlation
BWOELFLIN Real [2.5] Constant B in Woelflin viscosity correlation
DISPERSIONVISC Symbol <None> | OFF | [ON] ON: Dispersion viscosity calculated according
to DISPMODEL settings. OFF: Viscosity
volume weighting if WATERSLIP = OFF or
CONSTANT. Viscosity from tables for
continuous phase is used if WATERSLIP = ON.
DISPMODEL Symbol <None> | Specify which model to be used to calculate the

RONNINGSEN | dispersion viscosity (DISPERSIONVISC=ON).
EXPERIMENT |
WOELFLIN | BARNEA
| INPUTVISC |
[PALRHODES]
EMAX Real (-) [1.0] Maximum fraction of water dispersed for

FWLOW < WC < INVERSIONWATERFRAC
ENTRAINMENTFACTOR Real [1.0] Scaling factor for water entrainment rate from
bulk to droplets
FWLOW Real (-) [0.0] Critical water fraction above which the fraction
of the water dispersed into oil < EMAX
INVERSIONWATERFRAC Real (-) [0.5] Flowing water volume fraction at inversion

point.
PHI100 Real (-) [0.765] Dispersed phase volume fraction when the
relative viscosity (ratio between the viscosity of
the emulsion and the viscosity of the
continuous phase) is 100.
PHIREL Real (-) [0.0] Dispersed phase volume fraction given the
relative viscosity (VISCREL). Used if
DISPMODEL=EXPERIMENT.
VELOCITYDIFFERENCE Real [0.0] Define the velocity difference between the oil
(m/s) and water phases.
VISCMOD RealList Viscosity tuning factors corresponding to given

WATERCUT values. Used if
DISPERSIONVISC=OFF.
VISCREL Real [0.0] Relative viscosity for a given dispersed phase

volume fraction (PHIREL). Used if
DISPMODEL=EXPERIMENT.
- 361 -
OLGA User manual
WATERCUT RealList Watercut values corresponding to a given

(-) viscosity tuning factor (VISCMOD). Used if
DISPERSIONVISC=OFF.
WATERSLIP Symbol <None> | OFF | ON: Oil/water slip velocity is calculated within
CONSTANT | [ON] the flow model. OFF: No velocity difference.
CONSTANT: A constant velocity difference
between oil and water is specified. Should be
used with great care.
FlowComponent
Node
This statement defines the nodes in the flow network system. All NODE TYPEs except CLOSED need a
reference to a fluid table for fluid properties calculations.
There are the following types of nodes:
 CLOSED: The node represents a closed boundary (zero flow). This can be combined with a
source or a well definition in the flowpath.
 PRESSURE: The node represents a pressure boundary. Values for pressure, temperature and
fluid must be given.
 INTERNAL: For definition of internal node with finite volume. Fluid must be given. Momentum is
not conserved. A zero volume node may be defined by using the JUNCTIONNODE. This also
allows for transfer of momentum across the node.
Heat exchange with the surroundings is accounted for in an internal node. It gets the overall heat
transfer coefficients and the corresponding ambient temperatures from the connected pipes.
The current implementation of internal nodes require a finite volume in the node. If no volume is
specified (or given as less than or equal to zero), a default volume is calculated by OLGA based
on the sizes of incoming and outgoing sections:
where i is taken over all incoming/outgoing sections.
 MASSFLOW: The node represents a mass flow boundary. Values for pressure, temperature, fluid
and mass flow or standard mass flow must be given. The behavior of the MASSFLOW node is
very similar to a mass source. The main exception is that the MASSFLOW node has an internal
pressure calculation for obtaining the correct pressure that will set up the user given mass flow
rate into the connected pipe.
User defined phases
For nodes of type PRESSURE, the boundary conditions for user defined phases may be specified:
 UDPVTFILE refers to the PVT file that gives the properties of the user defined phases that may flow in
through the node
 UDGROUP refers to the group(s) of user defined phases in the inflow, that is, the mass fractions of
the user defined phases in the flowing layers (gas, oil and water).
 UDFEED refers to a feed defined in a plug-in DLL
- 362 -
Reference manual
CGR RealList Condensate-gas ratio. By default, CGR from

(Sm3/Sm3) the PVT table is used.
DENSITY RealList Density of the drilling fluid for each time point.
(kg/m3) The density must be at standard conditions and
within the min and max density as specified in
the keyword DRILLINGFLUID.
DPDGG Real (Pa- [0.0] Pressure - gas mass flow differential

s/kg)
DPDGLTHL Real (Pa- [0.0] Pressure - oil mass flow differential

s/kg)
DPDGLTWT Real (Pa- [0.0] Pressure - water mass flow differential

s/kg)
DRILLINGFLUID Symbol DRILLINGFLUID | Refer to the drilling fluid defined by the keyword
DRILLINGFLUID. Requires access to the Wells
module.

FEEDMASSFLOW RealList Mass rate for each feed (used when mass
(kg/s) source is defined). One item per time and feed.
FEEDMOLEFLOW RealList Mole rate for each feed (used when mass
(kmol/s) source is defined). One item per time and feed.
FEEDNAME SymbolList Label of feeds feeding to terminal nodes.

Requires COMPOSITIONAL=ON or BLACKOIL
under the OPTIONS keyword.
FEEDSTDFLOW RealList Volumetric flow rate at standard conditions of

(Sm3/s) phase PHASE for each feed specified by
FEEDNAME (only for Blackoil model).

FEEDNAME for choke model (only for Blackoil
model).
- 363 -
OLGA User manual
specific branch. If a keyword based pvt-file is
used, FLUID must be the same as the LABEL
given in the pvt-file, i.e., numbering is not valid
for this format.
FLUIDTYPE Symbol <None> | GAS | The phase of a fluid from a single-phase

OIL | WATER | source.
GASCMASS RealList Normalized gas masses for each component

(kg/m3) (volumefractions multiplied by density)
GASFRACEQ RealList (-) [1.0] By default, the equilibrium gas fraction of the
total flow is used for the gas flow in the
compositional or the Blackoil model
(GASFRACEQ=1). However, the user may
specify a fraction of the gas equilibrium flow to
be sent into the pipeline.
GASFRACTION RealList (-) [-1.0] Gas mass fraction of the inflow gas+oil mixture.
Specify -1 for OLGA to use the equilibrium
values from the PVT table. A list of both positive
and negative values is not allowed.
GLR RealList Gas/liquid volumetric flow ratio at standard

GOR RealList [-1.0] Gas/oil volumetric flow ratio at standard

(Sm3/Sm3) conditions. By default, GOR from the PVT table
is used.
HTEXT Real (s) [-1] External time step limitation. If HTEXT is less
than or equal to zero, external timestep
INFO String General information about the node. For

information purposes only.
INHIBFRACTION RealList (-) [0.0] Mass fraction of inhibitor in the water phase.
LABEL String Network component label (if nothing is given

the NC tag is used).
LINE Symbol <None> | YES | NO: connected to three-phase flowpath. YES:

[NO] connected to a single-phase flowpath.
CROSSOVER for a crossover node (not
available in OLGA 7.0)
MASSFLOW RealList Total mass flow rate at different instants in time.

(kg/s)
- 364 -
Reference manual
MAXPRESSUREBOOST RealList Maximum pressure boost for a crossover node.

(Pa)
MOLWEIGHT RealList Molecular weight of equivalent gas (total flow).

(kg/kmol) By default, the gas density at standard
OILCMASS RealList Normalized oil masses for each component

OILFRACEQ RealList (-) [1.0] By default, the equilibrium oil fraction of the
total flow is used for the oil flow in the
compositional or the Black oil model
(OILFRACEQ=1).
PARTICLEFRACTION RealList (-) [0.0] Mass fraction of particles in total mixture. If a

PARTICLES keyword is not specified in Library,
default values for the density and diameter of
the particles are used (see documentation of
PARTICLES keyword).
PHASE Symbol <None> | LIQUID | The phase for which the volumetric flow rate is
GAS | OIL | specified.
WATER |
PRESSURE RealList Boundary pressure. For internal nodes, this key

(Pa) can be used in conjunction with
INITIALCONDITIONS to specify the initial
pressure.
STDFLOWRATE RealList Volumetric flow rate at standard conditions.

(Sm3/s)
STEAMFRACTION RealList (-) [-1.0] Fraction of total mass of H2O component in the
gas phase. By default (=-1), the mass of H2O
component is in the gas phase if the
temperature is greater than the saturation
temperature, otherwise, the mass of H2O
component is distributed between the gas
phase and the water phase according to the
vapor pressure of H2O in the gas phase. A list
of both positive and negative values is not
allowed.
TEMPERATURE RealList (C) Temperature of the inflow mixture on boundary

nodes. For internal nodes, this key can be used
in conjunction with INITIALCONDITIONS to
specify the initial temperature.
TIME RealList (s) [0.0] Instants in time for the specified values of the
boundary conditions.
- 365 -
OLGA User manual
TOTALINHIBFRACTION RealList (-) [0.0] Mass fraction of inhibitor in total water (water
phase+water vapor).
TOTALWATERFRACTION RealList (-) [-1.0] Mass fraction of total water in the total
boundary fluid mixture. Use –1 for the total
water fraction to be taken from the PVT table.
Either this key or WATERFRACTION can be
specified.
TYPE Symbol CLOSED | Boundary type. CLOSED: Closed inlet or outlet

PRESSURE | node. INTERNAL: Nodes that have a volume
MASSFLOW | and connect two or more branches.
INTERNAL | PRESSURE: Inlet or outlet node with a
pressure condition. MASSFLOW: Inlet or outlet
node with a massflow condition.
UDFEED Symbol UDData | Labels of User Defined (UD) feeds. The feeds
must be defined by the UDFEEDFILE in FILES.
UDGROUP SymbolList The User defined (UD) group to use
UDPVTFILE Symbol UDPvtData | Name of User Defined (UD) property file used
by the plug-in module.
VISCOSITY RealList (N- Viscosity of the drilling fluids for each time
s/m2) point. The viscosity must be at standard
conditions and within the min and max viscosity
as specified in the keyword DRILLINGFLUID.
VOLUME Real (m3) [-1] Volume of internal node. If specified volume is

less than or equal to 0, OLGA will estimate the
volume.
WATERCMASS RealList Normalized water masses for each component

WATERCUT RealList (-) [-1.0] Water volume fraction in oil/water mixture. With
a value of -1.0 the total water fraction is taken
from the PVT table.
WATERFRACEQ RealList (-) [1.0] By default, the equilibrium water fraction of the
total flow is used for the water flow in the
(WATERFRACEQ=1).
WATERFRACTION RealList (-) Mass fraction of free water in the total boundary
fluid mixture. Either this key or
TOTALWATERFRACTION can be specified.
- 366 -
Reference manual
WAXFRACTION RealList (-) [1.0] Scaling factor for determining the amount of
wax forming components relative to HC
mixture. The value must be in the range [0,1]. 1
means the amount of wax forming components
is equal to values from the wax table. Requires
WAXDEPOSITION=ON under OPTIONS and
access to the waxdeposition module.
WGR RealList [-1.0] Ratio between water (including water in gas

(Sm3/Sm3) phase) and gas. By default, WGR from the PVT
table is used.
X Real (m) [0] x-coordinate of node in network. Used for 3D

graphics only.
Y Real (m) [0] y-coordinate (vertical axis) of node in network.

Used for 3D graphics only.
Z Real (m) [0] z-coordinate of node in network. Used for 3D

graphics only.
Name Description
CGR
DENSITY
DPDGG
DPDGLTHL
DPDGLTWT
GASFRACTION
GLR
GOR
INHIBFRACTION
MASSFLOW When connected, this terminal value defines the

MASSFLOW key value.
MASSFLOWSIG When connected, this terminal value scales the

MASSFLOW key value.
MOLWEIGHT
PARTICLEFRACTION When connected, this terminal value defines the

PARTICLEFRACTION key value.
- 367 -
OLGA User manual
PARTICLEFRACTIONSIG When connected, this terminal value scales the

PRESSURE PRESSURE, overrides key value
PRESSURESIG When connected, this terminal value scales the

PRESSURE key value.
STDFLOWRATE
TEMPERATURE
TOTALINHIBFRACTION
TOTALWATERFRACTION
VISCOSITY
WATERCUT
WATERFRACTION
WGR
DTCONTROL (on Node)
ENERGY Symbol <None> | ON | Time-step control based on change in energy from one time
MASS Symbol <None> | ON | Time-step control based on change in mass from one time
VELFRONT Symbol <None> | ON | Time-step control based on propagation of velocity change

[OFF] in section from one time step to the next.
VELFRONTFACTOR Real [0.2] Tuning factor for propagation of velocity change time-step
criterion.
- 368 -
Reference manual
Name Description
CFLFACTOR
ENERGYFACTOR
MASSFACTOR
PREFACTOR
RHEOLOGYFACTOR
VELFRONTFACTOR
OUTPUTDATA (on Node)
This statement defines the node variables to be printed to the output file (*.out).
See Node Output Variables on page 581 for available variables.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

SERVERDATA (on Node)
This statement defines the SERVERDATA. The variables that are defined in SERVERDATA serves two
purposes. The variables that will be available through the OPC interface and available for the interactive
plotting and viewing of values in GUI.
More than one server data statement can be specified for each node on caselevel. The DTPLOT can differ
from statement to statement, meaning that the plotting frequency can vary between different variables.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
TRANSMITTER SymbolList Transmitter for which the variable is to be plotted.

- 369 -
OLGA User manual
TRANSMITTER (on Node)
This keyword is used to define output signals from flowpath, process equipment, node, separator and
phase split node.
The signals can be received by a controller. The signals are defined through the variable key, for example,
fluid pressure in the flowpath (PT) or liquid level in the separator (LIQLV). Controllers that receive these
measured values use them to calculate new signals which in turn are used to regulate, for example, a
valve opening (see Controllers). If several different output signals are needed form the same position, add
a transmitter per output signal. However, the several controllers can receive the output signal from one
transmitter.
Note: If a branch variable is to be controlled, add a transmitter to the flowpath at a dummy location (use
a valid absolute position or pipe/section). The location is only used graphically to position the transmitter
along the flowpath.
LABEL String [TM] Transmitter Terminal label.
VARIABLE Symbol (ValueUnitPair) 2048 | Variable to be transmitted. Unit may be specified.
Name Description
OUTSIG
TRENDDATA (on Node)
This statement defines the trend data to be plotted for nodes. A trend plot is a time series plot for a
specified variable.
For available variables see Node Output Variables on page 581.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
TRANSMITTER SymbolList Transmitter for which the variable is to be

plotted.

- 370 -
Reference manual
Flowpath
This statement defines the label of the flowpath.
FLUIDTYPE Symbol <None> | GAS | OIL | The phase of the fluid flowing in the single-phase line.
WATER |
INFO String General information about the flowpath. For information

purposes only.
LABEL String Network component label (if nothing is given the NC tag is
used).
LINE Symbol <None> | YES | [NO] NO: Three-phase flow. YES: Use a single-phase fluid in
the flowline.
Boundary and Initial Conditions
HEATTRANSFER (on Flowpath)
This statement specifies the heat transfer data for the pipe walls. The temperature of the surroundings
must be given. In addition to this one of the following three options must be used:
1. Specify overall heat transfer coefficient: UVALUE (requires TEMPERATURE=UGIVEN in OPTIONS)

2. Specify ambient heat transfer coefficient: HAMBIENT (HOUTEROPTION=HGIVEN, requires
TEMPERATURE=WALL in OPTIONS)
3. Specify properties of the ambient fluid (HOUTEROPTION=OTHER / WATER / AIR, requires
TEMPERATURE=WALL in OPTIONS)
For options 2 and 3, the overall heat transfer coefficient is calculated and the keyword WALL have to be
specified. If option 3 is used, the ambient heat transfer coefficient is a function of the pipe diameter, the
fluid velocity, and fluid properties such as density and viscosity. Velocity and fluid properties have to be
given only if a user specified fluid is used (HOUTEROPTION=OTHER). The VELOCITY can be specified
for HOUTEROPTION=AIR or WATER, otherwise the default values 4 m/s and 1 m/s, respectively, will be
used. Default values are applied for all other properties when HOUTEROPTION=AIR or WATER.
OLGA provides two different ways to simplify the input of the ambient temperature distribution along a
predefined pipeline. The user can either specify start and end ambient temperature, and OLGA will
perform an interpolation along the pipeline using the coordinates of the pipe-section. The second way is to
specify ambient temperatures in a TABLE, where OLGA will interpolate in the TABLE using the
coordinates of the pipe-section.
- 371 -
OLGA User manual
There are four different options for interpolation that are available. For SECTIONWISE interpolation, the
ambient temperature is given by the user for the midpoint of the first and last section. The interpolation is
performed between these points using the distance between section midpoints to achieve a linear
temperature profile with respect to the distance along the pipeline. For the HORIZONTAL, LENGTH, and
VERTICAL interpolation options, the ambient temperature is either specified at the inlet and outlet
boundaries (INTAMBIENT and OUTTAMBIENT) or in a TABLE. The interpolation is then based on either
horizontal length, actual length, or vertical depth. For INTAMBIENT/OUTTAMBIENT the interpolation
method is given by the INTERPOLATION key. For tabulated ambient data, the interpolation method is
given by the chosen XVARIABLE. Note that only the HORIZONTAL, LENGTH, and VERTICAL
interpolation options are available for tabulated ambient data.
CAPACITY RealList Heat capacity of ambient fluid. If

(J/kg-C) HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 1005 J/KG-K is used. If
HOUTEROPTION is WATER, 3978 J/KG-K is
used. Input can either be a single value (constant
along range of sections), two values (length-
interpolated) or given explicitly for each section.
CONDUCTIVITY RealList Thermal conductivity of ambient fluid. If

(W/m-C) HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 0.0251 W/mK is used.
If HOUTEROPTION is WATER, 0.587 W/mK is
DENSITY RealList Density of ambient fluid. If HOUTEROPTION is

(kg/m3) AIR, 1.217 kg/m3 is used. If HOUTEROPTION is
WATER, 1028.4 kg/m3 is used. Input can either
be a single value (constant along range of
sections), two values (length-interpolated) or
given explicitly for each section.
EXPANSION RealList Thermal expansion coefficient of ambient fluid. If

(1/C) HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 3.47E-3 1/K is used. If
HOUTEROPTION is WATER, 1.72E-4 1/K is
HAMBIENT RealList Mean heat transfer coefficient on outer wall

(W/m2-C) surface. Input can either be a single value
(constant along range of sections) or given
explicitly for each section.
HAMBIENTTABLE Symbol TABLE | Table with mean heat transfer coefficient on outer
wall surface. Type of table determines the
INTERPOLATION used assigning values. If
position is outside XVALUE in table, the
coefficient is held constant.
- 372 -
Reference manual
HMININNERWALL RealList [0.0] Minimum inner heat transfer coefficient on inner

(W/m2-C) wall surface.
HOUTEROPTION Symbol <None> | AIR | Option for ambient heat transfer coefficient.
WATER | OTHER |
[HGIVEN]
INHAMBIENT Real Overall heat transfer coefficient at the inlet of the

(W/m2-C) first pipe in a pipeline section where interpolation
is used for overall heat transfer coefficient.
INTAMBIENT Real (C) Ambient temperature at the inlet of the first pipe
in a branch where interpolation is used for
ambient temperature.
INTERPOLATION Symbol <None> | LENGTH | Type of interpolation used to calculate the

HORIZONTAL | ambient temperature and outer heat transfer
VERTICAL | coefficient. Note that the INTERPOLATION key is
[SECTIONWISE] not used in TAMBIENTTABLE,
HAMBIENTTABLE and VELOCITYTABLE, as the
interpolation is given by the type of table. Also
outer heat transfer coefficient is only affected by
the INTERPOLATION key when
HOUTEROPTION = HGIVEN.
INVELOCITY Real (m/s) Speed of ambient fluid at the inlet of the first pipe
in a pipeline section where interpolation is used
for speed of ambient fluid.
LABEL String [HEATTRANS] Heattransfer label. Default is heattransfer

number.
OUTHAMBIENT Real Overall heat transfer coefficient at the outlet of

(W/m2-C) the last pipe in a pipeline section where
interpolation is used for overall heat transfer
coefficient.
OUTTAMBIENT Real (C) Ambient temperature at the outlet of the last pipe
for ambient temperature.
OUTVELOCITY Real (m/s) Speed of ambient fluid at the outlet of the last
pipe in a pipeline section where interpolation is
used for speed of ambient fluid.
PIPE SymbolList [ALL] Pipe label or pipe number (single or continuous

range in the form x-y).
SECTION IntegerList Section number.
TAMBIENT RealList Ambient temperature. Input can either be a single

(C) value (constant along range of sections) or given
- 373 -
OLGA User manual
TAMBIENTSERIES SymbolList List of reference to TIMESERIES keywords. The

(C) value of each time series is scaled with a
corresponding factor in TAMBSERIESFACTOR
and added as an increment to the temperature
defined in TAMBIENT or INTAMBIENT and
OUTTAMBIENT.
TAMBIENTTABLE Symbol TABLE | Table with ambient temperatures. Type of table

determines the INTERPOLATION used assigning
values. If position is outside XVALUE in table, the
temperature is held constant.
TAMBSERIESFACTOR RealList [1] List of factors to be used to scale ambient

temperature time series in TAMBIENTSERIES.
Note that this key also introduces the unit of the
function.
UVALUE RealList Overall heat transfer coefficient given by user

(W/m2-C) based on the inner pipe diameter.
VELOCITY RealList Speed of ambient fluid. If HOUTEROPTION is

(m/s) AIR, default is 4 m/s. If HOUTEROPTION is
WATER, default is 1 m/s. Input can either be a
single value (constant along range of sections),
two values (length-interpolated) or given explicitly
for each section.
VELOCITYTABLE Symbol TABLE | Table with speed in ambient fluid. Type of table
velocity is held constant.
VISCOSITY RealList Viscosity of ambient fluid. If HOUTEROPTION is

(N-s/m2) AIR, 1.78E-5 N-s/m2 is used. If
HOUTEROPTION is WATER, 1.40E-3 N-s/m2 is
Name Description
HAMBIENT
HMININNERWALL When connected, this terminal value defines the

HMININNERWALL key value.
INHAMBIENT When connected, this terminal value defines the INHAMBIENT

key value.
- 374 -
Reference manual
INTAMBIENT When connected, this terminal value defines the INTAMBIENT

key value.
OUTHAMBIENT When connected, this terminal value defines the OUTHAMBIENT

key value.
OUTTAMBIENT When connected, this terminal value defines the OUTTAMBIENT

key value.
TAMBIENT When connected, this terminal value defines the TAMBIENT key
value.
INITIALCONDITIONS (on Flowpath)
This statement defines initial conditions for the dynamic calculation. The initial conditions are given
flowpath-, pipe- or section-wise. The total mass flow is defined at section boundaries while the remaining
parameters are given for section volumes.
There are several ways to define initial data, depending on the key STEADYSTATE in the OPTIONS
statement:
1. STEADYSTATE=OFF (initial conditions not calculated by steady state pre-processor): User defines
the pressure, temperature, gas volume fraction, mass flow, and water volume fraction in the liquid
phase for all sections in each flowpath.
2. STEADYSTATE=NOTEMP (initial temperature not calculated by steady state pre-processor): User
defines the temperature for all sections in each flowpath.
The latter option can be useful if the pre-processor has problems finding a solution. This implies that the
simulation must be run for some time to achieve a steady state solution.
Compositional Tracking input such as FEEDMOLEFRACTION can be given for all settings of
STEADYSTATE (in OPTIONS). For STEADYSTATE=ON or NOTEMP, the given FEEDMOLEFRACTION
will be an initial input to the steady state pre-processor.
To simplify the input for certain initial condition variables, OLGA can perform interpolation along pre-
defined flowpath segments. Three different interpolation options are available; HORIZONTAL, LENGTH
and VERTICAL. The variable is specified at the inlet and outlet of the pipeline segment, and the
interpolation is performed based on horizontal length, actual length or vertical depth along the pipeline.
LENGTH is the default option.
BEDFORMATION RealList [0.0] The amount of bed initially deposited in each

(kg/m) section
module.
FEEDMASSFRACTION RealList (-) Mass fraction of each feed given in

FEEDNAME.
- 375 -
OLGA User manual
FEEDMOLEFRACTION RealList (-) Mole fraction of each feed given in FEEDNAME.
FEEDNAME SymbolList Label(s) of initial feed(s) to be used for

calculating the local fluid compositions in the
pipe(s)/section(s). A list means mixing of feeds.
Requires COMPOSITIONAL=ON/BLACKOIL or
DRILLING=ON under the OPTIONS keyword.

FEEDNAME (only for blackoil model).
INHIBFRACTION RealList (-) [0.0] Mass fraction of inhibitor in water phase in each
section.
ININHIBFRACTION Real (-) [0.0] Mass fraction of inhibitor in water phase at the
inlet to the first pipe in a pipeline section where
interpolation is used.
INPRESSURE Real (Pa) Pressure at the inlet to the first pipe in a branch
where interpolation is used.
INSTEAMFRACTION Real (-) [0.0] Fraction of total mass of h2o component in the
gas phase inlet to the first pipe in a pipeline
section where interpolation is used. The default
is zero mass of h20 component is in the gas
phase.
INTEMPERATURE Real (C) Temperature at the inlet to the first pipe in a

branch where interpolation is used.
INTERPOLATION Symbol <None> | Type of interpolation used to calculate the initial

HORIZONTAL | conditions.
VERTICAL |
[LENGTH]
INVOIDFRACTION Real (-) Void fraction at the inlet to the first pipe in a
INWATERCUT Real (-) Watercut at the inlet to the first pipe in a branch
where interpolation is used.
MASSFLOW RealList [0.0] Total mass flow at each section boundaries.

(kg/s)
OUTINHIBFRACTION Real (-) [0.0] Mass fraction of inhibitor in water phase at the
outlet of the last pipe in a pipeline section where
interpolation is used.
OUTPRESSURE Real (Pa) Pressure at the outlet of the last pipe in a

branch where interpolation is used
- 376 -
Reference manual
OUTSTEAMFRACTION Real (-) [0.0] Fraction of total mass of h2o component in the
gas phase outlet to the last pipe in a pipeline
section where interpolation is used. The default
is zero mass of h20 component is in the gas
phase.
OUTTEMPERATURE Real (C) Temperature at the outlet of the last pipe in a

OUTVOIDFRACTION Real (-) Void fraction at the outlet of the last pipe in a
branch section where interpolation is used.
OUTWATERCUT Real (-) Watercut at the outlet of the last pipe in a

branch section where interpolation is used.
PARTICLEBEDFRACTION Real (-) [0.0] Ratio between mass of particles deposited on

the bed and total mass of particles.
PARTICLEFRACTION Real (-) [0.0] Mass fraction of particles in total mixture. If a

default values for the density and diameter of
the particles are used (see documentation of
PARTICLES keyword).
PIPE SymbolList [ALL] Pipe label or pipe number (single or continuous

range in the form x-y).
PRESSURE RealList Initial pressure in each section.

(Pa)
REFPIPE Symbol PIPE | Pipe label for REFPRESSURE.
REFPRESSURE Real (Pa) Reference pressure used if no pressure

boundary condition is used. To be given for one
section only.
REFSECTION Integer Section number for REFPRESSURE.
SECTION IntegerList Section number.
STEAMFRACTION RealList (-) [0.0] Fraction of total mass of h2o component in the
gas phase. The default is zero mass of h20
component is in the gas phase.
TEMPERATURE RealList Initial temperature in each section.

(C)
UDFEED Symbol UDData | Labels of User Defined (UD) feeds. The feeds
must be defined by the UDFEEDFILE in FILES.
UDGROUP SymbolList The User Defined (UD) group to use
VOIDFRACTION RealList (-) Initial void fraction in each section.
- 377 -
OLGA User manual
WALLFORMATION RealList [0.0] The amount of wall initially deposited in each

(kg/m) section
WATERCUT RealList (-) [0.0] Initial watercut in each section.
NEARWELLSOURCE (on Flowpath)
The NEARWELLSOURCE keyword defines a link between a section in OLGA and a boundary/grid block in
a reservoir model. OLGA delivers boundary conditions to the reservoir model, and the production from (or
injection into) the reservoir is received by OLGA from the reservoir model as mass rate for each phase.
OLGA can be connected to two different reservoir models: ROCX and ECLIPSE.
Areas for use
The link provides coupled transient simulation of near-wellbore reservoir flow and well flow. Dynamic
phenomena not accurately predicted or even not seen with the steady-state inflow performance
relationship model (WELL) may therefore be simulated in a more realistic way. Typical examples are well
shut-in and start-up, dynamic gas and water coning, cross flow between layers, etc.
General input
The position of the NEARWELLSOURCE is given by referring to the distance from the inlet of the branch
(ABSPOSITION), a pipe and a section number, or by reference to a defined POSITION.
Both reservoir models can be run as a stand-alone tool. This is a useful approach to obtain a suitable
condition for the reservoir before initiating a coupled (and more time consuming) simulation.
Both reservoir models may be run with the RESTART option. Definition of where to find the restart data for
the reservoir models should be given in the Reservoir model (restart-) input files.
There is no automatic check of the correspondence in positioning and size between numerical sections in
OLGA and boundary grid blocks in the reservoir simulators. You must therefore discretize both grids in
such a way that this is satisfied. The flow area at the wellbore and near-wellbore interface is calculated
based on the Reservoir model grid block rather than the corresponding OLGA numerical section.
OLGA coupled with ROCX
RESBOUNDNAME must refer to a boundary label defined in the ROCX input file. Each ROCX boundary
label can only be referred once, which means it is not allowed to split the flow from one ROCX boundary
into two or more OLGA sections. But for one OLGA section, there can be several near-well sources.
ROCX reads a separate input file describing the reservoir properties, boundary conditions and initial
conditions. The file name should be given under the key ROCX. This input file is edited with the ROCX
GUI. ROCX writes both formatted and binary industry standard ECLIPSE output files for post processing
(3D visualization). Refer to the ROCX User Manual for how to define a proper input file for the ROCX
simulator.
In PVT table simulations (OPTIONS COMPOSITIONAL=OFF), ROCX may be set up to read the same
PVT data file as OLGA.
- 378 -
Reference manual
OLGA-ROCX limitations
OLGA ROCX is not compatible with these fluid property models:
 Compositional Tracking module

 Drilling fluid
Other limitations on the ROCX reservoir simulator are given in the ROCX User Manual.
OLGA coupled with ECLIPSE
Each NEARWELLSOURCE will be coupled to a completion in ECLIPSE by specification of the well name
(ECLIPSEWELL), the reservoir block indices (BLOCKINDICES) and possibly a local grid refinement name
(LGRNAME). A completion at this position must exist in the ECLIPSE input file. Refer to the documentation
in the ECLIPSE installation for how to define a proper input file for ECLIPSE.
ECLIPSE reads a separate input file. The file name should be given in the key ECLIPSEFILE in the
keyword FILES.
OLGA-ECLIPSE link limitations
OLGA coupled with ECLIPSE can only be run when OPTIONS COMPOSITIONAL=BLACKOIL using
exactly three blackoil components (one gas-, one oil- and one water-component). For other limitations in
ECLIPSE, refer to the ECLIPSE documentation.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
ABSPOSITION Real Absolute position. Distance from branch inlet.

(m)
BLOCKINDEX_I Integer ECLIPSE block index of the x-axis, defining the position of this
connection. If local grid refinement is used in ECLIPSE, the index
refers to the local grid.
BLOCKINDEX_J Integer ECLIPSE block index of the y-axis, defining the position of this
BLOCKINDEX_K Integer ECLIPSE block index of the z-axis, defining the position of this
ECLIPSEWELL String Name of corresponding well in ECLIPSE. ECLIPSE uses this

information to know which wells that are controlled and computed
by OLGA.
LABEL String [NWSOUR] Near Well Source label.
LGRNAME String [GLOB] Name of Local Grid in ECLIPSE. Use default name (GLOB) if no
grid refinement is used.
- 379 -
OLGA User manual
PIPE Symbol PIPE | Pipe number for well.
POSITION Symbol POSITION | Position label for where the well is located.
RESBOUNDNAME String Name of boundary in OLGA Rocx.
ROCX String Name of input filename for boundary in OLGA Rocx.
SECTION Integer Section number for well.
SOURCE (on Flowpath)
This statement specifies the input data needed for the simulation of sources. OLGA uses mass flow rate
for internal calculations, but input flow rate may also be given as volumetric flow at standard conditions.
Also, this statement may be used to specify the fraction of wax forming components in the inflow
hydrocarbon mixture.
A drilling fluid used with the Wells module can be defined.
There are two options to specify a mass source:
1. The mass flow rate is given. For a positive mass source (flowing into the pipe), users can specify the
upstream pressure as well as the upstream temperature. If the upstream pressure is given in the
input, the expansion from the upstream pressure to the pressure inside the pipe section will be taken
into account for the temperature calculations. If the upstream pressure is not given, the upstream
pressure is set to the pressure inside the pipe section where the source is introduced.
If a controller is used, the actual mass rate into/out of the section is a fraction of the mass rate given in
the time series with the fraction regulated by the controller.
2. The mass flow rate is to be calculated based on the opening of the choke through which a mass
source is introduced into or taken out of the pipe section. The choke opening is regulated by a
controller. Both critical and sub-critical flow through the choke are modeled.
When the mass flow rate is to be specified at the source temperature and pressure without compositional
tracking, do the following:
Use key: Specify:
MASSFLOW Total mass flow rate (if option 1)
GASFRACTION Gas mass fraction in gas and oil mixture at the source
temperature and pressure. Free water is excluded. As
default, the gas mass fraction is determined from the
PVT table.
WATERFRACTION Mass fraction of free water in the gas-oil-water

mixture at the source temperature and pressure.
Default value is zero, that is, no free water.
TOTALWATERFRACTION Mass fraction of total water in the gas-oil-water

mixture at the source temperature and pressure.
Default value is zero. Only one of WATERFRACTION
or TOTALWATERFRACTION could be defined.
INHIBFRACTION Mass fraction of inhibitor in water phase at source
- 380 -
Reference manual
temperature and pressure. Only used together with

inhibitor tracking, default value is zero for inhibitor
tracking.
TOTALINHIBFRACTION Mass fraction of inhibitor in total water at source

temperature and pressure. Only used together with
inhibitor tracking, default value is zero for inhibitor
tracking.
When the mass flow rate is to be specified at the source temperature and pressure with compositional
tracking, do the following:
Use key: Specify:
FEEDMASSFLOW Total mass flow rate (if option 1)
GASFRACEQ Fraction of gas mass flow relative to equilibrium flow at the

source temperature and pressure. As default, the gas mass
flow is equal to the equilibrium flow determined from the feed
file (equilibrium gas mass fraction) and
FEEDMASSFLOW: (GG = FEEDMASSFLOW * RSEQ *
GASFRACEQ).
OILFRACEQ Fraction of oil mass flow relative to equilibrium flow at the

source temperature and pressure.
WATERFRACEQ Fraction of water mass flow relative to equilibrium flow at the

source temperature and pressure.
Note: If GASFRACEQ, OILFRACEQ or WATERFRACEQ is lower than 1 (default value), the total flow
will not add up to the specified FEEDMASSFLOW.
When the volumetric flow rate at the standard conditions is given, do the following:
Use key: Specify:
STDFLOWRATE Volumetric flow rate at standard conditions for the specified

phase (if option 1)
PHASE The phase for which the volumetric flow rate is specified. The
allowed options are GAS, OIL, WATER, LIQUID. The total
source flow is determined so that the specified flow is obtained,
for the phase in question, at standard conditions. If the total
volumetric flow is meant to represent equivalent gas flow
instead of the single gas phase flow, the molweight of the total
flow must be given.
GOR Gas/oil ratio. By default, the GOR from PVT table is used.
GLR Gas/liquid ratio. Note that GOR and GLR can not be used at the
same time.
WATERCUT Water cut, that is, water volume fraction in water and oil mixture.
- 381 -
OLGA User manual
MOLWEIGHT If the equivalent gas volumetric flow rate is specified, the

molecular weight of the total flow should be given to account for
the density of the equivalent gas. By default, the gas density at
the standard condition from the PVT table is used.
When volumetric flow rate at standard conditions is used, the table for PVT-data must cover the standard
conditions for pressure and temperature.
Internal dependencies of keys:

either
BRANCH = 1
PIPE = 1
SECTION = [1]
or
POSITION = SOURCE-1
end
TIME = (0, 100 )
If the mass flow rate is given, then
CONTROLLER = C-101 ! Controls fraction of given mass flow
either
MASSFLOW = (0.0, 10.0) [kg/s]
GASFRACTION = [(-1,-1)]
PRESSURE = [Section pressure]
either
WATERFRACTION = [(0.0, 0.0)]
INHIBFRACTION = [(0.0, 0.0)] ! only for inhibitor tracking
or
TOTALWATERFRACTION = [(0.0, 0.0)]
either
or
TOTALINHIBFRACTION = [(0.0, 0.0)] ! only for inhibitor tracking
end
end
if WAXDEPOSITION=ON in OPTIONS
WAXFRACTION = [2:1.0]
end if
- 382 -
Reference manual
or
STDFLOWRATE = (0.0, 1000) STB/D
WATERCUT = (0.1, 0.1)
PHASE = LIQUID
If PHASE = GAS
MOLWEIGHT = (20.5) ! If equivalent gas stdflowrate (gas+liquid)
end if
either
GLR = (100, 100)
or
GOR = (120, 120)
end
if WAXDEPOSITION=ON in OPTIONS
WAXFRACTION = [2:1.0]
end if
or if COMPOSITIONAL=ON in OPTIONS, then
FEEDNAME = (FEED-1, FEED-3)
either
FEEDMASSFLOW = (20, 35.3, 20, 35.3) [kg/s]
or
FEEDMOLEFLOW = (50, 30.5, 50, 30.5) [kmol/s]
end
PRESSURE = [section pressure]
GASFRACEQ = (0.5,0.5) ! override equilibrium phase fractions
OILFRACEQ = (0,0) ! override equilibrium phase fractions
WATERFRACEQ = (0,0) ! override equilibrium phase fractions
or if the COMPOSITIONAL = BLACKOIL, then
FEEDNAME = (BO-1, BO-3)
STDFLOWRATE = (0.0, 0.0, 1000, 1000) STB/D
PHASE = GAS || OIL
or if DRILLING = ON, then
MASSFLOW = (0.0, 10.0) [kg/s]
- 383 -
OLGA User manual
DRILLINGFLUID = DRILLINGFLUID-1
if drillingfluid properties are NOT given in a separate file, then
DENSITY = (1000, 1000)
VISCOSITY = (1, 1) cP
end
end
end if
If the mass flow is to be calculated based on the opening of the choke, then (standard conditions not
allowed)
CD = [0.84]
DIAMETER = 0.45
CONTROLLER = C-101
PRESSURE = 2:40 bara
either
GASFRACTION = 2:-1
either
WATERFRACTION = 2:0
or
TOTALWATERFRACTION = 2:0
TOTALINHIBFRACTION = [(0.0, 0.0)] ! only for inhibitor tracking
end
or if COMPOSITIONAL = ON, (multiple time and feeds, see note below)
either
FEEDMASSFRACTION = (0.7, 0.3, 0.7, 0.3)
or
FEEDMOLEFRACTION = (0.6, 0.4, 0.5, 0.5)
end
WATERFRACEQ = (0,0) ! override equilibrium phase fractions
or if COMPOSITIONAL = BLACKOIL then
FEEDVOLFRACTION = ( 0.7, 0.3, 0.7, 0.3 )
or if DRILLING = ON then
DRILLINGFLUID = DRILLINGFLUID-1
DENSITY = 2:1000
- 384 -
Reference manual
VISCOSITY = 2:1 cP
end
end if
Note: For the subkeys FEEDMASSFLOW, FEEDMOLEFLOW, FEEDMASSFRACTION and

FEEDMOLEFRACTION, the array is a function of both feed and time as shown below.
FEEDMASSFRACTION = FEED-1 (T1), FEED-2(T1), FEED1(T2), FEED-2(T2))
User defined phases are included in two ways:
1. UDGROUP refers to one or more UDGROUPs of user defined phases

2. UDFEED refers to a feed defined in a plug-in DLL
ABSPOSITION Real (m) Absolute position. Distance from branch

inlet.
CD Real [0.84] Discharge coefficient. Used for pressure

driven source.
CF Real (-) Ratio between gas and liquid sizing

coefficient.
CGR RealList Condensate-gas ratio. By default, CGR from

(Sm3/Sm3) the PVT table is used.
COMPONENT Symbol <None> | Component specify the fluid that is going to

PRODUCTION | be extracted by a negative source. ALL
DRILLINGFLUID | defines that both types shall be exstracted,
[ALL] production fluid and drillingfluids. If only one
of more drilling fluids are to be extracted,
DRILLINGFLUID = <name of drilling fluid>
must be specified instead.
DENSITY RealList The density of the drilling fluid injected at a

(kg/m3) given time point. The density must be at
standard conditions and within the min and
max density as specified in the keyword
DRILLINGFLUID
DGGDP Real (kg/s- [0.0] Gas mass flow - pressure differential

Pa)
- 385 -
OLGA User manual
DGLTHLDP Real (kg/s- [0.0] Oil mass flow - pressure differential

Pa)
DGLTWTDP Real (kg/s- [0.0] Water mass flow - pressure differential

Pa)
DIAMETER Real (m) Maximum orifice diameter in pressure driven

source.
DRILLINGFLUID Symbol DRILLINGFLUID | Refer to the drilling fluid defined by the

keyword DRILLINGFLUID. Requires access
to the Wells module.
EQUILIBRIUMMODEL Symbol <None> | Equilibrium model used in the choke model.

HENRYFAUSKE | FROZEN - No mass transfer.
EQUILIBRIUM | HENRYFAUSKE - Partial equilibrium.
[FROZEN] EQUILIBRIUM - Gas/liquid equilibrium.

as input variables on the OPC server. Only
keys that are explicitly set can be exposed.
To use the default value, you must define
this explicitly.
FEEDMASSFLOW RealList Mass rate for each feed (used when mass
(kg/s) source is defined). One item per time and
feed.
FEEDMASSFRACTION RealList (-) Mass fraction of each feed (used when

pressure driven source is defined). One item
per time and feed.
FEEDMOLEFLOW RealList Mole rate for each feed (used when mass
(kmol/s) source is defined). One item per time and
feed.
FEEDMOLEFRACTION RealList (-) Mole fraction of each feed (used when

pressure driven source is defined). One item
per time and feed.
FEEDNAME SymbolList Labels of feeds in the mass source defining

the fluid composition. Requires
COMPOSITIONAL=ON or BLACKOIL under
the OPTIONS keyword.
FEEDSTDFLOW RealList Volumetric flow rate at standard condition of

(Sm3/s) phase PHASE for each feed specified by
FEEDNAME (only for Blackoil model).

FEEDNAME for choke model (only for
Blackoil model).
- 386 -
Reference manual
GASCMASSFLOW RealList Gas mass flow rate. For compositional

(kg/s) tracking it’s the flow rate of the gas phase for
each component.
GASFRACEQ RealList (-) [1.0] By default, the equilibrium gas fraction of the
total flow is used for the gas flow in the
(GASFRACEQ=1), however the user may
specify a fraction of the gas equilibrium flow
to be sent into the pipeline.
GASFRACTION RealList (-) [-1.0] Gas mass fraction in gas and oil mixture. By
default, the gas mass fraction from the PVT
table is used for inflow (GASFRACTION=-1).
A list of both positive and negative values is
not allowed. For outflow, the gas mass
fraction can be specified as equal to the gas
mass fraction in the source section by
setting GASFRACTION<0.
GLR RealList Gas/liquid volumetric flow ratio at standard

GOR RealList [-1.0] Gas/oil volumetric flow ratio at standard

(Sm3/Sm3) conditions. By default, GOR from the PVT
table is used.
HTEXT Real (s) [-1] External time step limitation. If HTEXT is

less than or equal to zero, external timestep
INHIBFRACTION RealList (-) [0.0] Mass fraction of inhibitor in the water phase.
LABEL String [SOUR] Source label. Default is source number.
MASSFLOW RealList Total mass flow rate for the time series.
(kg/s)
MOLWEIGHT RealList Molecular weight of equivalent gas (total

(kg/kmol) flow). By default, the gas density at standard
OILCMASSFLOW RealList Oil mass flow rate. For compositional

(kg/s) tracking it’s the flow rate of the oil phase for
each component.
OILFRACEQ RealList (-) [1.0] By default, the equilibrium oil fraction of the
total flow is used for the oil flow in the
(OILFRACEQ=1), however the user may
specify a fraction of the oil equilibrium flow to
be sent into the pipeline.
- 387 -
OLGA User manual
PARTICLEFRACTION RealList (-) [0.0] Mass fraction of solid particles in total

mixture. If a PARTICLES keyword is not
specified in Library, default values for the
density and diameter of the particles are
used (see documentation of PARTICLES
keyword).
PHASE Symbol <None> | LIQUID | The phase for which the volumetric flow rate
GAS | OIL | WATER | is specified.
PIPE Symbol PIPE | Pipe label.
POSITION Symbol POSITION | Position label where the source is located. If

this is defined, PIPE and SECTION should
not be used.
PRESSURE RealList Upstream pressure for a positive source

(Pa) (flow into pipeline). Downstream pressure for
a negative source. Required key if pressure
driven source.
SECTION Integer Section number where the source is located.
SOURCETYPE Symbol PRESSUREDRIVEN Type of source.

| TRACER | [MASS]
SOVAPHASE Symbol <None> | GAS | The type of the flow through the pressure
LIQUID | driven source. For two or three phase flow,
use LIQUID.
STDFLOWRATE RealList Volumetric flow rate at standard conditions.

(Sm3/s)
STEAMFRACTION RealList (-) [-1.0] Fraction of total mass of H2O component in

the gas phase. By default (=-1), the mass of
H2O component is in the gas phase if the
temperature is greater than the saturation
temperature, otherwise, the mass of H2O
component is distributed between the gas
phase and the water phase according to the
vapor pressure of H2O in the gas phase. A
list of both positive and negative values is
not allowed.
STROKETIME Real (s) [0.0] Stroke time of valve.
TABLE SymbolList Label of table for valve characteristics.
TEMPERATURE RealList Mixture temperature of the mass flow rate at

(C) all points in time specified.
- 388 -
Reference manual
THERMALPHASEEQ Symbol <None> | YES | [NO] If YES, thermal equilibrium between gas and
liquid is assumed, otherwise the gas is
expanded isentropical while the liquid is
isothermal. Only used in HYDROVALVE.
The Henry-Fauske model assues isothermal
liquid and isentropic expansion og the gas.
This option is therefore inavailable when
CRITFLOWMODEL=HENRYFAUSKE.
TIME RealList (s) Points in time when the flow is to be

changed. Note that the value used by the
program is interpolated between the values
specified by the given timetable.
TOTALINHIBFRACTION RealList (-) [0.0] Mass fraction of inhibitor in total water (water
phase+water vapor).
TOTALWATERFRACTION RealList (-) [-1.0] Mass fraction of total water in the total
source flow mixture. With a value of -1.0 the
total water fraction is taken from the fluid
table. Either this key or WATERFRACTION
can be specified. For outflow, this key is
ignored if GASFRACTION<0 (the water
fraction in the source section is used).
TRACERAGE RealList (s) [0.0] Age of tracer feed in source.One item per
time and feed.
TRACERFEED SymbolList Tracer feed name
TRACERMASSFLOW RealList Mass rate for each tracer feed. One item per
(kg/s) time and feed.
TRACERRESIDENCETIME RealList (s) [0.0] Residence time of tracer feed in source. One
item per time and feed.
UDFEED Symbol UDData | Labels of User Defined (UD) feeds. The

feeds must be defined by the UDFEEDFILE
in FILES.
UDGROUP SymbolList The User defined (UD) group to use
VALVEMODEL Symbol <None> | Valve model.

GASSIZING |
[HYDROVALVE]
VISCOSITY RealList The viscosity of the drilling fluid injected at a

(N-s/m2) given time point. The viscosity must be at
standard conditions and within the min and
max viscosity as specified in the keyword
DRILLINGFLUID
- 389 -
OLGA User manual
WATERCMASSFLOW RealList Water mass flow rate. For compositional

(kg/s) tracking it’s the flow rate of the water phase
for each component.
WATERCUT RealList (-) [-1.0] Water volume fraction in oil/water mixture.

With a value of -1.0 the total water fraction is
taken from the fluid table.
WATERFRACEQ RealList (-) [1.0] By default, the equilibrium water fraction of

the total flow is used for the water flow in the
(WATERFRACEQ=1), however the user
may specify a fraction of the water
equilibrium to be sent into the pipeline.
WATERFRACTION RealList (-) Mass fraction of free water in the total

source flow mixture. Either this key or
TOTALWATERFRACTION can be specified.
For outflow, this key is ignored if
GASFRACTION<0 (the water fraction in the
source section is used).
WAXFRACTION RealList (-) [1.0] Scaling factor for determining the amount of
wax forming components relative to HC
mixture. The value must be in the range
[0,1]. 1 means that the amount of wax
forming components is equal to the values
from the wax table. Requires
WAXDEPOSITION=ON under the OPTIONS
keyword and access to the wax deposition
module.
WGR RealList [-1.0] Ratio between water (including water in gas

(Sm3/Sm3) phase) and gas. By default, WGR from the
PVT table is used.
Name Description
CGR When connected, this terminal value defines the CGR

key value.
DENSITY When connected, this terminal value defines the

DENSITY key value.
DGGDP When connected, this terminal value defines the DGGDP

key value.
DGLTHLDP When connected, this terminal value defines the

DGLTHLDP key value.
- 390 -
Reference manual
DGLTWTDP When connected, this terminal value defines the

DGLTWTDP key value.
GASFRACTION When connected, this terminal value defines the

GASFRACTION key value.
GLR When connected, this terminal value defines the GLR

key value.
GOR When connected, this terminal value defines the GOR

key value.
INHIBFRACTION When connected, this terminal value defines the

INHIBFRACTION key value.
MASSFLOW When connected, this terminal value defines the

MASSFLOW key value.
MASSFLOWSIG When connected, this terminal value scales the

MASSFLOW key value.
MOLWEIGHT When connected, this terminal value defines the

MOLWEIGHT key value.


PRESSURE When connected, this terminal value defines the

PRESSURE key value.
STDFLOWRATE When connected, this terminal value defines the

STDFLOWRATE key value.
TEMPERATURE When connected, this terminal value defines the

TEMPERATURE key value.
TOTALINHIBFRACTION When connected, this terminal value defines the

TOTALINHIBFRACTION key value.
TOTALWATERFRACTION When connected, this terminal value defines the

TOTALWATERFRACTION key value.
TRACERAGE When connected, this terminal value defines the

TRACERAGE key value.
TRACERMASSFLOW When connected, this terminal value defines the

TRACERMASSFLOW key value.
TRACERRESIDENCETIME When connected, this terminal value defines the

TRACERRESIDENCETIME key value.
- 391 -
OLGA User manual
VALVESIG When connected, this terminal value defines the orifice

opening of the pressure driven source. When not
connected, the orifice opening is set to 1.
VISCOSITY When connected, this terminal value defines the

VISCOSITY key value.
WATERCUT When connected, this terminal value defines the

WATERCUT key value.
WATERFRACTION When connected, this terminal value defines the

WATERFRACTION key value.
WGR When connected, this terminal value defines the WGR

key value.
WELL (on Flowpath)
The well statement is used to define required data for calculating the flow performance of wells.
There are two ways of specifying the data for flow between the reservoir and the well. You can either
specify the coefficients used in the inflow correlations directly, or you can specify traditional well/reservoir
variables, such as permeability and net pay. When you use the latter, the well/reservoir variables are
translated into the coefficients used in the inflow correlations. This option is only available with the Wells
module.
Observe that the linear coefficient BPROD can not be zero if the well is located in the first (inlet) section of
a flowpath.
Internal dependencies of keys: ! Alphanumeric values are only
! given as samples
either
BRANCH = 1
PIPE = 1
SECTION = 1
or
POSITION = POSITION-1
end
If you want to use the coefficients directly for standard inflow types:
either
WATERFRACTION = [0.0]
or
TOTALWATERFRACTION = [0.0]
end
end if
GASFRACTION = -1
- 392 -
Reference manual
If INJOPTION = LINEAR, then
AINJ = 0.0 [kg/s]
BINJ = 0.1E-5 [kg/s/Pa]
else if INJOPTION = QUADRATIC, then
AINJ = 0.0 [Pa2]
BINJ = 0.0 [Pa2-s/kg]
CINJ = 0.3354E08 [Pa2-s2/kg2]
else if INJOPTION = TABULAR, then
INJTABLE = TABLE-1
end if
If PRODOPTION = LINEAR, then
APROD = 0.0 [kg/s]
BPROD = 0.1E-5 [kg/s/Pa]
else if PRODOPTION = QUADRATIC, then
APROD = 0.0 [Pa2]
BPROD = 0.0 [Pa2-s/kg]
CPROD = 0.3354E08 [Pa2-s2/kg2]
else if PRODOPTION = TABULAR, then
PRODTABLE = TABLE-2
If phase front transient is to be simulated, then
GASDIS = [0.0] [m]
GASPLIMIT = [RESPRESSURE] [Pa]
GFRTC = [0.0] [s]
OILDIS = [0.0] [m]
OILPLIMIT = [RESPRESSURE] [Pa]
OFRTC = [0.0] [s]
WATDIS = [0.0] [m]
WATPLIMIT = [RESPRESSURE] [Pa]
WFRTC = [0.0] [s]
end if
end if
If you want to use the coefficients directly for Advanced Well inflow types:
WATERCUT = [0.0] [-]
ROGST = [from PVT tables] [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = [from PVT tables] [kg/Sm3]
- 393 -
OLGA User manual
GORST = [from PVT tables] [kg/Sm3]
if INJOPTION = FORCHHEIMER, then
BINJ = 0.6 [psi2-d/scf]
CINJ = 1.E-9 [psi2-d2/scf2]
else if INJOPTION = SINGLEFORCHHEIMER, then
BINJ = 1.E-4 [psi-d/scf]
CINJ = 1.E-9 [psi-d2/scf2]
else if INJOPTION = BACKPRESSURE, then
EXPONENTN = 1
CINJ = 1 [scf/d/psi2]
end if
if PRODOPTION = FORCHHEIMER, then
BPROD = 0.6 [psi2-d/scf]
CPROD = 1.E-9 [psi2-d2/scf2]
else if PRODOPTION = SINGLEFORCHHEIMER, then
BPROD = 1.E-4 [psi-d/scf]
CPROD = 1.E-9 [psi-d2/scf2]
else if PRODOPTION = BACKPRESSURE, then
EXPONENTN = 1
CPROD = 1 [scf/d/psi2]
end if
If you want to use well/reservoir variables:
WATERCUT = [0.0] [-]
If INJOPTION = LINEAR, then
either
INJECTIVITY = 240 stb/d/Psi
FRACPR = 1000 bar
ROGST = 0.8 [kg/Sm3]
ROLST = 700 [kg/Sm3]
GORST = 1000 [Sm3/Sm3]
PHASE = [OIL]
- 394 -
Reference manual
or
FRACPR = 1000 bar
VISLRES = 0.2 cP
BOOIL = 1.4
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
end
else if INJOPTION = FORCHHEIMER, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
VISGRES = 0.03 cP
ZFACT = 1
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
SKIND = 0.01
else if INJOPTION = SINGLEFORCHHEIMER, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
VISGRES = 0.03 cP
ZFACT = 1
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
- 395 -
OLGA User manual
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
SKIND = 0.01
else if INJOPTION = VOGELS, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
QMAX = 10 000 Sm3/d
else if INJOPTION = BACKPRESSURE, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
VISGRES = 0.03 cP
ZFACT = 1
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
SKIND = 0.01
EXPONENTN = 1
else if INJOPTION = NORMALIZEDBACKPR, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
QMAX = 10 000 Sm3/d
EXPONENTN = 1
PHASE = [OIL]
else if INJOPTION = UNDERSATURATED, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
- 396 -
Reference manual
VISLRES = 0.2 cP
BOOIL = 1.4
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
BPPRESSURE = 600 bar
end if
If the user wants to define a specific linear injectivity index for one or more of the phases
GASINJ = 100 stb/d/Psi
OILINJ = 100 stb/d/Psi
WATINJ = 180 stb/d/Psi
end if
If PRODOPTION = LINEAR, then
either
PRODI = 240 stb/d/Psi
FRACPR = 1000 bara
PHASE = [OIL]
or
FRACPR = 1000 bara
VISLRES = 0.2 cP
BOOIL = 1.4
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
- 397 -
OLGA User manual
end
else if PRODOPTION = FORCHHEIMER, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
VISGRES = 0.03 cP
ZFACT = 1
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
SKIND = 0.01
else if PRODOPTION = SINGLEFORCHHEIMER, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
VISGRES = 0.03 cP
ZFACT = 1
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
SKIND = 0.01
else if PRODOPTION = VOGELS, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
QMAX = 10 000 Sm3/d
else if PRODOPTION = BACKPRESSURE, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
- 398 -
Reference manual
VISGRES = 0.03 cP
ZFACT = 1
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
SKIND = 0.01
EXPONENTN = 1
else if PRODOPTION = NORMALIZEDBACKPR, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
QMAX = 10 000 Sm3/d
EXPONENTN = 1
PHASE = [OIL]
else if PRODOPTION = UNDERSATURATED, then
FRACPR = 1000 bara
VISLRES = 0.2 cP
BOOIL = 1.4
KPERM = 20 mD
HPAY = 20 [m]
RESEXT = 1000 [m]
HOLES = 8.5 in
SKINS = 3
BPPRESSURE = 600 bar
end if
If COMPOSITIONAL = ON in OPTION, then (multiple time and feeds, see note below)
TIME = (0, 5) h
- 399 -
OLGA User manual
either
FEEDMASSFRACTION = (0.7, 0.3, 0.7, 0.3)
or
FEEDMOLEFRACTION = (0.6, 0.4, 0.5, 0.5)
end
or if COMPOSITIONAL = BLACKOIL in OPTIONS, then
TIME = (0, 5) h
FEEDVOLFRACTION = [1.0, 0.0, 0.5, 0.5]
end if
Note: For the subkeys FEEDMASSFRACTION, FEEDMOLEFRACTION and FEEDVOLFRACTION, the

array is a function of both feed and time as shown below.
FEEDMASSFRACTION = FEED-1 (T1), FEED-2(T1), FEED1(T2), FEED-2(T2))
ABSPOSITION Real (m) Absolute position. Distance from

branch inlet.
AINJ RealList Well flow equation coefficient A for

injection. Coefficient given at in situ
conditions - uses gas mass fraction
from the PVT table to calculate the
split between the phases. Unit:
Linear formula: kg/s, Non-linear
formula: Pa2.
APROD RealList Well flow equation coefficient A for

production. Coefficient given at in
situ conditions - uses gas mass
fraction from the PVT table to
calculate the split between the
phases. Unit: Linear formula: kg/s,
Non-linear formula: Pa2.
- 400 -
Reference manual
BINJ RealList Well flow equation coefficient B for

injection. Injectivity index for linear
inflow equation. Coefficient given at
in situ conditions - uses gas mass
phases. Unit: Linear formula:
kg/s/Pa, Non-linear formula: Pa2-
s/kg, Forchheimer: psi2-d/scf, Single
Forchheimer: psi-d/scf.
BOOIL Real Oil formation volume factor
BPPRESSURE RealList Bubble point pressure at reservoir

(Pa) temperature for Undersaturated oil
wells.
BPROD RealList Well flow equation coefficient B for

phases. Productivity index for linear
inflow equation. Unit: Linear formula:
CGR RealList [-1.0] Condensate-gas ratio. By default,

(Sm3/Sm3) CGR from the PVT table is used.
CINJ RealList Well flow equation coefficient C for

injection. Unit: Non-linear formula:
Pa2-s2/kg2, Forchheimer: psi2-
d2/scf2, Single Forchheimer: psi-
d2/scf2. Backpressure: scf/d/psi2n.
CPROD RealList Well flow equation coefficient C for

production. Unit: Non-linear formula:
Pa2-s2/kg2 for the non-linear
formula, Forchheimer: psi2-d2/scf2,
Single Forchheimer: psi-d2/scf2,
Backpressure: scf/d/psi2n
(dependent on EXPONENTN).
EXPONENTN RealList [1.0] Constant in Backpressure inflow

equation. It normally varies between
0.5 and 1.0.
- 401 -
OLGA User manual
EXPOSE SymbolList States which keys should be made

available as input variables on the
OPC server. Only keys that are
explicitly set can be exposed. To use
the default value, you must define
this explicitly.
FEEDNAME SymbolList Label of initial feed to be used for

calculating local fluid compositions in
the branch (from feed file and FEED
keyword). A list means mixing of
feeds for each section in the branch.
Note that this key can only be
specified branch-wise. Requires
COMPOSITIONAL=ON or
BLACKOIL under the OPTIONS
keyword.

FEEDNAME (only for blackoil
model).
FRACPR RealList Fracture pressure.

(Pa)
GASDIS Real (m) [0.0] Distance gas front has to travel

before it reaches the well bore.
Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
GASFRACTION RealList (-) [-1.0] Gas mass fraction in the gas+oil

mixture for positive flow. -1 indicates
equilibrium. A list of both positive
GASINJ RealList Linear injectivity index for gas

(Sm3/s/Pa) entering the well section. Normally
given in (Sm3/d/bar).
GASPLIMIT Real (Pa) Pressure at which the gas front will

be at the well bore at steady-state
conditions. Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
GFRTC Real (s) Time constant for the gas front

movement. Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
- 402 -
Reference manual
GORST RealList [-1.0] Gas/oil volumetric ratio. By default,

(Sm3/Sm3) GOR from the PVT table is used.
HOLES RealList Hole size (diameter). Normally given

(m) in inches (in).
HPAY RealList Net pay from inflow zone.

(m)
INJECTIVITY RealList Injectivity. Given at std conditions -

(Sm3/s/Pa) uses GOR from the PVT table (or the
specified GORST) and the PHASE
to calculate the split between the
phases.
INJOPTION Symbol <None> | LINEAR | Negative well flow equation type.

QUADRATIC |
SINGLEFORCHHEIMER |
FORCHHEIMER |
BACKPRESSURE |
UNDERSATURATED |
VOGELS | TABULAR |
NORMALIZEDBACKPR |
INJPOSTFRACFACTOR Real [1.0] Multiplier for injection rate when BH

pressure is above fracture pressure.
If BH pressure has been above
fracture pressure this is a multiplier
when BH pressure is above
INJTHRESHOLD as well.
INJPREFRACFACTOR Real [1.0] Multiplier for injection rate when BH

pressure is below fracture pressure.
If the BH pressure has been above
only below INJTHRESHOLD.
INJTABLE Symbol TABLE | Table reference for negative well

flow performance. Option for
supporting coning. The table
variables must be given at reservoir
conditions.
INJTHRESHOLD RealList Pressure. If BH pressure has been

(Pa) above fracture pressure the injection
rate multiplied by the
INJPOSTFRACFACTOR will be
used when the BH pressure is above
INJTHRESHOLD.
ISOTHERMAL Symbol <None> | NO | [YES] Turn on or off isothermal.
- 403 -
OLGA User manual
KPERM RealList Effective permeability.

(mD)
LABEL String [WELL] Well label.
LOCATION Symbol <None> | BOTTOM | Well location in the well section.

[MIDDLE] MIDDLE if the reservoir pressure at
the middle of the zone is specified.
BOTTOM if the reservoir pressure
given is at the bottom of the zone.
OFRTC Real (s) Time constant for the oil front

movement. Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
OILDIS Real (m) Distance oil front has to travel before

it reaches the well bore. Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
OILINJ RealList Linear injectivity index for oil entering

(Sm3/s/Pa) the well section. Normally given in
(Sm3/d/bar).
OILPLIMIT Real (Pa) Pressure at which the oil front will be

at the well bore at steady-state
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
PARTICLEFRACTION RealList (-) [0.0] Mass fraction of solid particles in

total mixture. If a PARTICLES
keyword is not specified in Library,
default values for the density and
diameter of the particles are used
(see documentation of PARTICLES
keyword).
PHASE Symbol <None> | GAS | OIL | The phase for which productivity
WATER | LIQUID | index or absolute open flow rate is
given.
PIPE Symbol PIPE | Pipe number for well.
POSITION Symbol POSITION | Position where the well is located. If

POSITION is defined, BRANCH,
PIPE, and SECTION should not be
used.
- 404 -
Reference manual
PRODI RealList Productivity index for linear inflow

(Sm3/s/Pa) equation. Normally given in
(Sm3/d/bar). Given at std conditions
- uses GOR from the PVT table (or
the specified GORST) and the
PHASE to calculate the split
between the phases.
PRODOPTION Symbol <None> | LINEAR | Positive well flow equation type.

QUADRATIC |
SINGLEFORCHHEIMER |
FORCHHEIMER |
BACKPRESSURE |
UNDERSATURATED |
VOGELS | TABULAR |
NORMALIZEDBACKPR |
PRODPOSTFRACFACTOR Real [1.0] Multiplier for production rate after the

reservoir is fractured. Use when the
well parameters are given for
conditions before the reservoir is
fractured.
PRODPREFRACFACTOR Real [1.0] Multiplier for production rate before

the reservoir is fractured. Used when
the well parameters are given for
conditions after the reservoir is
fractured.
PRODTABLE Symbol TABLE | Table reference for positive flow

performance. Option for supporting
coning. The table variables must be
given at reservoir conditions.
QMAX RealList Maximum flow in Vogels and

(Sm3/s) Normalized Backpressure inflow
equation.
RESEXT RealList Reservoir extension.

(m)
RESPRESSURE RealList Reservoir pressure.

(Pa)
RESTEMPERATURE RealList Reservoir temperature.

(C)
ROGST Real [-1.0] Gas density at standard conditions.

(kg/Sm3) By default value from PVT table is
used.
- 405 -
OLGA User manual
ROLST Real [-1.0] Oil density at standard conditions. By

(kg/Sm3) default value from PVT table is used.
SECTION Integer Section number for well.
SKIND RealList Turbulent non-darcy skin. Normally

(1/Sm3/s) given in (1/MMSCF/d).
SKINS RealList Mechanical damage skin.
STEAMFRACTION RealList (-) [-1.0] Fraction of total mass of H2O

component in the gas phase. By
default (=-1), the mass of H2O
temperature is greater than the
saturation temperature, otherwise,
the mass of H2O component is
distributed between the gas phase
and the water phase according to the
vapor pressure of H2O in the gas
phase. A list of both positive and
negative values is not allowed.
TIME RealList (s) [0.0] Time series when the reservoir

conditions are to be changed. Note
that the value actually used by the
program is interpolated between the
values specified by the time table.
TOTALWATERFRACTION RealList (-) [-1.0] Mass fraction of total water in the in

the total fluid mixture of the reservoir.
With a value of –1, the total water
fraction is taken from the fluid table.
Either this key or WATERFRACTION
can be specified.
VISGRES Real (N- [-1] Viscosity of gas reservoir conditions.

s/m2) By default value from PVT table is
used.
VISLRES Real (N- [-1] Viscosity of oil reservoir conditions.

used.
WATDIS Real (m) Distance water front has to travel

before it reaches the well bore. This
key can only be used if water option
is available. Non-zero values are
ignored for two-phase simulations,
even if the water option is available.
Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
- 406 -
Reference manual
WATERCUT RealList (-) [-1.0] Watercut at standard conditions.

With a value of -1.0 the total water
WATERFRACTION RealList (-) Mass fraction of free water in the

total flow mixture of the reservoir.
Either this key or
TOTALWATERFRACTION can be
specified. For outflow, this key is
ignored if GASFRACTION<0 (the
water fraction in the source section is
used).
WATINJ RealList Linear injectivity index for water

WATPLIMIT Real (Pa) Pressure at which the water front will

conditions. This key can only be
used if water option is available.
Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
WAXFRACTION RealList (-) [1.0] Scaling factor for determining the

amount of wax forming components
relative to HC mixture. The value
must be in the range [0,1]. 1 means
that the amount of wax forming
components is equal to the values
WAXDEPOSITION=ON under the
OPTIONS keyword and access to
the wax deposition module.
WFRTC Real (s) Time constant for the water front

movement. This key can only be
Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
WGR RealList [-1.0] Ratio between water (including water

(Sm3/Sm3) in gas phase) and gas. By default,
WGR from the PVT table is used.
ZFACT Real [1] Gas compressibility factor.
- 407 -
OLGA User manual
Name Description
AINJ When connected, this terminal value defines the AINJ key
value.
APROD When connected, this terminal value defines the APROD

key value.
BINJ When connected, this terminal value defines the BINJ key
value.
BPROD When connected, this terminal value defines the BPROD

key value.
CGR When connected, this terminal value defines the CGR key
value.
CINJ When connected, this terminal value defines the CINJ key
value.
CPROD When connected, this terminal value defines the CPROD

key value.
EXPONENTN When connected, this terminal value defines the

EXPONENTN key value.
GASFRACTION When connected, this terminal value defines the

GASFRACTION key value.
GORST When connected, this terminal value defines the GORST

key value.
HPAY When connected, this terminal value defines the HPAY

key value.
INJECTIVITY When connected, this terminal value defines the

INJECTIVITY key value.
KPERM When connected, this terminal value defines the KPERM

key value.


PRESERVOIR When connected, this terminal value defines the

PRESERVOIR key value.
- 408 -
Reference manual
PRODI When connected, this terminal value defines the PRODI

key value.
QMAX When connected, this terminal value defines the QMAX

key value.
RESEXT When connected, this terminal value defines the RESEXT

key value.
SKIND When connected, this terminal value defines the SKIND

key value.
SKINS When connected, this terminal value defines the SKINS

key value.
TOTALWATERFRACTION When connected, this terminal value defines the

TOTALWATERFRACTION key value.
TRESERVOIR When connected, this terminal value defines the

TRESERVOIR key value.
WATERCUT When connected, this terminal value defines the

WATERCUT key value.
WATERFRACTION When connected, this terminal value defines the

WATERFRACTION key value.
WGR When connected, this terminal value defines the WGR

key value.
ZONE (on Flowpath)
The ZONE keyword defines an area between two positions in the PIPELINE (STARTPOSITION AND
ENDPOSITION).
If INTERPOLATION=OFF, PRESSURE and TEMPERATURE must be given. These are used for the
whole zone.
If INTERPOLATION=VERTICAL, STARTPRESSURE and STARTTEMPERATURE as well as

ENDPRESSURE and ENDTEMPERATURE must be given. The reservoir pressure and temperature are
then interpolated in the sections between STARTPOSITION and ENDPOSITION.
If INTERPOLATION=AUTOMATIC, either START- or END-values of pressure and temperature must be

given. Pressures between start- and endposition are then computed using the hydrostatic gradient.
The ZONE keyword refers to a RESERVOIRINFLOW keyword in which reservoir inflow data must be
given. This means that reservoir inflow points are created in all pipeline sections in the ZONE. A ZONE
with reference to a RESERVOIRINFLOW is equivalent to specification of one WELL keyword for each
section between the start- and endposition of the ZONE.
The PRESSURE and TEMPERATURE keys in the ZONE keyword can be given as time series. Note that
the number of elements in these time series must correspond to the number of elements in the TIME key
that is used for the RESERVOIRINFLOW keyword. The same correspondence must exist if
STARTPRESSURE/ENDPRESSURE and STARTTEMPERATURE/ENDTEMPERATURE are used.
- 409 -
OLGA User manual
All plot variables for WELL are also available for ZONE.
On global level:
TRENDDATA VARIABLE=GGWELL (plots GGWELL for all ZONES)
On flowpath level:
TRENDDATA ZONE=ALL, VARIABLE=GTWELL, ZONEDETAILS=YES (plots GTWELL for all ZONES

and for all inflow points in the ZONE)
COEFTYPE Symbol <None> | PERMETER | TOTAL: Production and injection coefficents are
[TOTAL] given for the entire well zone. PERMETER:
Production and injection parameters are given
per meter.
ENDPOSITION Symbol POSITION | Position where the well zone ends.
ENDPRESSURE RealList Pressure at the end of the well zone

(Pa)
ENDTEMPERATURE RealList Temperature at the end of the well zone

(C)
INTERPOLATION Symbol <None> | VERTICAL | Type of interpolation used for the pressure and
AUTOMATIC | [OFF] temperature distribution in the reservoir. OFF:
constant reservoir pressure and temperature
given by PRESSURE and TEMPERATURE,
respectively. AUTOMATIC: the reservoir
pressure varies hydrostatically and the reservoir
temperature is constant. The pressure and
temperature is specified at either the zone start
or end position. VERTICAL: reservoir
temperature and reservoir pressure are given by
vertical interpolation between the start and end
position.
LABEL String [ZONE] Well zone label.
PRESSURE RealList Reservoir pressure at specified location

(Pa)
RESERVOIRINFLOW Symbol RESERVOIRINFLOW | Reference to a template specifying the phase

properties of the reservoir and the inflow
performance relationship for production and
injection.
STARTPOSITION Symbol POSITION | Position where the well zone begins.
STARTPRESSURE RealList Pressure at the start of the well zone

(Pa)
- 410 -
Reference manual
STARTTEMPERATURE RealList Temperature at the start of the well zone

(C)
TEMPERATURE RealList Reservoir temperature at specified location

(C)
FA-models
CORROSION (on Flowpath)
This statement is used to define Corrosion module input parameters.
If the corrosion rate in single phase liquid flow is to be calculated correctly, PTMAX must be set equal to
the pressure in the pipeline where gas is formed (bubble point pressure). That is, if a simulation shows
single phase liquid flow, a new simulation should be performed with the correct PTMAX set to the pressure
in the section where gas is formed. Alternatively, the output variable PCO2 can be read and PCO2MAX
can be set to the PCO2 value in the section where gas is formed.
The Corrosion module cannot be applied together with the Wax deposition module.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
BICARBONATE Real [0.0] Total alkalinity of the aqueous bulk phase in Molar
(M=mol/l).
CO2FRACTION Real Mole percentage of CO2 in gas phase.
GLYCOLFRACTION Real [0.0] Glycol concentration in weight-% in a glycol/water mixture.

Only used if Inhibitor tracking is not used. If Inhibitor
tracking is used, the glycol fraction will be calculated.
INHIBITOREFFICIENCY Real [0.0] Corrosion inhibitor (not glycol) efficiency in %. The effect
of glycol and corrosion inhibitor (through
INHIBITOREFFICIENCY) depends on the model used.
For the NORSOK model, the larger of the two resulting
reduction factors is used, while for the de Waard models
the product of the two factors is used.
INHIBITOREFFICIENCY=100% means no corrosion.
IONICSTRENGTH Real [0.0] Total ionic strength in Molar (M=mol/l).
LABEL String [CORR] Corrosion label. Default is a string.
MODEL SymbolList [ALL] Which model to use. MODEL1: NORSOK. MODEL2: Top
of Line corrosion model. MODEL3: de Waard 95.
PCO2MAX Real (Pa) [1000000] Maximum CO2 partial pressure in single phase liquid flow.
PHSAT Symbol [OFF] Whether or not to calculate the pH for condensed water
saturated with ion carbonate.
- 411 -
OLGA User manual
PTMAX Real (Pa) Bubble point pressure from which the CO2 partial
pressure for a single phase liquid flow will be calculated.
TOTALACETICACID Real [0.0] Sum of acetic acid (CH3COOH) and acetate (CH3COO-)
concentration in bulk aqueous phase given in Molar (M =
mol/l).
WCWET Real [30.0] Water droplet wall wetting limit. Has to be given as
watercut in %. If the liquid film watercut is higher than this
value, the water droplets will wet the wall, even if no
continuous water film is present. It is only used in the
corrosion module to detect if water droplets are wetting
the wall. It has no influence on the flow conditions. If a
continuous water film is predicted by the flow model, water
wetting is detected by the corrosion module regardless of
the water cut set as the wetting limit.
Name Description
BICARBONATE When connected, this terminal value defines the

BICARBONATE key value.
CO2FRACTION When connected, this terminal value defines the

CO2FRACTION key value.
GLYCOLFRACTION When connected, this terminal value defines the

GLYCOLFRACTION key value.
INHIBITOREFFICIENCY When connected, this terminal value defines the

INHIBITOREFFICIENCY key value.
IONICSTRENGTH When connected, this terminal value defines the

IONICSTRENGHT key value.
PCO2MAX When connected, this terminal value defines the PCO2MAX

key value.
PTMAX When connected, this terminal value defines the PTMAX

key value.
WCWET When connected, this terminal value defines the WCWET

key value.
- 412 -
Reference manual
DTCONTROL (on Flowpath)
ABSPOSITION RealList Pipeline position where the criteria changes will be

(m) applied. Absolute position. Distance from branch inlet.
CFL Symbol [ON] The Courant-Friedrichs-Lewy (CFL) criterion based on

the flow velocity.
CFLFACTOR Real [0.8] Tuning factor for the CFL time-step criterion.
ENERGY Symbol <None> | ON | Time-step control based on change in energy from

[OFF] one time step to the next.
GRADPRESSURE Symbol <None> | ON | Time-step control based on the first-order derivative of

[OFF] pressure w.r.t. time.
LABEL String [DTCONTROL] Label for time step control.
MASS Symbol <None> | ON | Time-step control based on change in mass from one
[OFF] time step to the next.
PIPE SymbolList [ALL] Pipe numbers or labels where the criteria changes will
be applied.
POSITION SymbolList Labels of specified positions where the criteria

changes will be applied.
PREFACTOR Real [0.8] Tuning factor for pressure time-step criterion.
PRESSURE Symbol [OFF] Time-step control based on the second-order

derivative of pressure w.r.t. time.
RHEOLOGY Symbol <None> | ON | Time-step control based on change in viscosity from

[OFF] one time step to the next.
RHEOLOGYFACTOR Real [0.5] Tuning factor for viscosity change time-step criterion.
SECTION IntegerList Section numbers where the criteria changes will be

applied.
SOUND_CFL Symbol [OFF] Time-step control based on the speed of pressure

waves.
- 413 -
OLGA User manual
SOURCE SymbolList Labels of specified sources where the criteria changes

will be applied.
VELFRONT Symbol <None> | ON | Time-step control based on propagation of velocity

[OFF] change in section from one time step to the next.
VELFRONTFACTOR Real [0.2] Tuning factor for propagation of velocity change time-
step criterion.
Name Description
CFLFACTOR
ENERGYFACTOR
MASSFACTOR
PREFACTOR
RHEOLOGYFACTOR
VELFRONTFACTOR
HYDRATECHECK (on Flowpath)
This keyword can be used to specify a set of hydrate formation curves and how these should be treated in
the flowpath.
See also:
See 'Hydrate check' on page 163
HAMCONST Real (C) [1297] Constant in Hammerschmidt equation. Note that unit is
delta temperature.
HAMMERSCHMIDT Symbol <None> | ON | Switch for activating the Hammerschmidt formula for
[OFF] computing hydrate temperature curves for different
inhibitor concentrations. Can only be used with a single
hydrate curve without any specified inhibitor concentration
(i.e. INHIBITORCONC=0).
HYDRATECURVE SymbolList Labels of the HYDRATECURVEs (from Library) that shall

be used in this flowpath.
INHIBITORFILE String Name of file with inhibitor corrections to hydrate

equilibrium.
- 414 -
Reference manual
PRESSOVERRIDE Real (Pa) [-5000000] With PRESSOVERRIDE the limit for the difference
between hydrate and section pressure, DPHYD (default -
50 bar), can be changed. Such sections are not used
when calculating the maximum DPHYD in a branch.
TEMPOVERRIDE Real (C) [-50] With TEMPOVERRIDE the limit for the difference
between hydrate and section temperature, DTHYD
(default -50 C), can be changed. Such sections are not
used when calculating the maximum DTHYD in a branch.
TRACERFEED Symbol TRACERFEED Label of tracer feed. Requires TRACERTRACKING = ON

| under the OPTIONS keyword. If given the hydrate
temperature will be corrected according to
INHIBITORFILE.
WATERLIMIT Real (-) [0] Hydrates will not form in sections with less water than the
waterlimit (default = 0).
HYDRATEKINETICS (on Flowpath)
The Hydrate kinetics module combines the hydrate kinetics and rheological model developed by Colorado
School of Mines with the flow equations of the OLGA model. The Hydrate kinetics model determines the
amount of gas and water consumed by hydrate formation and the effective viscosity of the hydrate particle
laden oil phase. The flow model integrates the mass consumption rate to obtain the amount of hydrate
phase and uses the effective viscosity for the flow calculations.
The model is still in the research phase, and the initial emphasis has been on flowing liquid dominated
systems with excess of water and gas for hydrate formation. Future versions will likely also address gas
dominated systems and include deposition mechanisms. Special care should be taken when using the
model because the model has only been validated against limited data sets. Further, it is not designed for
shut-in and depressurization studies.
COIL Real [1.0] Weighting factor for hydrate velocity related to oil velocity
CWATER Real [0.0] Weighting factor for hydrate velocity related to water
velocity
DRIFTFLUX Symbol <None> | YES | NO: Use OLGA flow model. YES: Forces the gas velocity
[NO] to be proportional to the liquid velocity, and the keys
VELOCITYRATIO and DRIFTVELOCITY become active.
DRIFTVELOCITY Real [0] DRIFTVELOCITY is a constant slip velocity of the gas.

(m/s) Used when DRIFTFLUX = YES. gas velocity =
VELOCITYRATIO times liquid velocity +
DRIFTVELOCITY
- 415 -
OLGA User manual
FOGEXPONENT Real [0] FOGEXPONENT is used to adjust the gas-liquid interface

friction. The scaling factor for the interfacial friction is
equal to the viscosity ratio of the oil phase raised to the
power of FOGEXPONENT.
FULLDISPERSION Symbol <None> | YES | NO: Use OLGA oil/water dispersion model. YES: Force
[NO] all of oil or water to be dispersed in water or oil depending
on inversion point. The inversion point can be adjusted
through the WATEROPTIONS keyword.
METHANECONCFILE String File containing methane concentration in oil.
MODEL Symbol <None> | Type of hydrate model. KINETIC should be used in most
KINETIC | cases. Two prototype models are available from Colorado
TRANSPORT | School of Mines: TRANSPORT and COLDFLOW.
COLDFLOW | KINETIC calculates the rate of hydrate formation using a
chemical kinetics equation based on the temperature
driving force. TRANSPORT accounts for mass and heat
transfer resistances in the calculation of the hydrate
formation rate. COLDFLOW adapted transport model for
simulation of the stabilized flow concept.
STRUCTURE Symbol <None> | SI | Type of hydrate structure. Structure I tends to enclathrate

[SII] smaller natural gas molecules such as methane, whereas
structure II tends to enclathrate larger natural gas
molecules such as propane (Sloan and Koh, 2008)
SUBCOOLING Real [3.611111] Subcooling (given as temperature difference) from

(C) hydrate equilibrium before nucleation. Default 6.5 F.
VELOCITYRATIO Real [1] Distribution coefficient for gas velocity. Used when
DRIFTFLUX = YES
HYDRATEOPTIONS (on Flowpath)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
CSMFATTRACTION Symbol <None> | [NO] Constant adhesion force between hydrate particles,
YES | [NO] FATTRACTION. [YES] Adhesion force between hydrate
particles is calculated as a function of temperature.
CSMPARTICLEDIAMETER Symbol <None> | NO: Use MEANDIAMETER. YES: Use diameter

YES | [NO] calculated by CSM.
- 416 -
Reference manual
CSMSURFAREA Symbol <None> | NO: Surface area for hydrate formation is calculated by
YES | [NO] OLGA. (Recommended for Kinetic model) YES: Surface
area for hydrate formation is calculated internally in CSM
code based on the particle diameter. (Recommended for
Transport model)
DIFFUSIVITY Real [1.0e-16] Diffusivity of methane through hydrate shell. For cold
(m2/s) flow model: Diffusivity of methane in water.
FATTRACTION Real [50.0] Constant adhesion force between hydrate particles.

(mN/m)
GASGUESTFRACTION Real (-) [1] Mass fraction of hydrate guest molecules in gas phase
HEATCAPACITY Real Heat capacity of hydrate particles.

(J/kg-C)
HEATFORMATION Real Heat generated by hydrate formation, or heat consumed

(J/kg) by hydrate dissociation.
K1SCALINGFACTOR Real [1.0] Scaling factor for first kinetic reaction coefficient.
Suggested value for oil-dominated systems is 0.002, for
gas-dominated systems is 1.
K2SCALINGFACTOR Real [1.0] Scaling factor for the second reaction coefficient
MEANDIAMETER Real [4.0e-5] Mean droplet diameter

(m)
OILGUESTFRACTION Real (-) [0] Mass fraction of hydrate guest molecules in oil phase
USEDLL Symbol <None> | NO: The routines embedded in the OLGA executable
YES | [NO] are used. YES: csmhyddll.dll is used. This dll must exist
together with the OLGA executable.
PIG (on Flowpath)
This statement defines the pig option.
The pig keyword should be used when the user wants to simulate a pig or plug in the pipeline. The pig is
inserted at LAUNCHPOSITION and taken out when it reaches either the TRAPPOSITION or a boundary
NODE. TRAPPOSITION can be in the same flowpath as LAUNCHPOSITION or in a different flowpath.
When the pig comes to an internal NODE or SEPARATOR it will take the path with the highest volume
flow. The path the pig takes in a network can be overridden by the ROUTING key. If the TRAPPOSITION
is specified in a different flowpath than LAUNCHPOSITION and the pig does not reach the
TRAPPOSITION (because highest volume flow or ROUTING does not take it there) the pig is taken out
when it reaches a boundary node.
The keys LINEARFRIC, QUADRATICFRIC and STATICFORCE are the usual way to define the friction of
the pig.
The keys LEAKAGEFACTOR, LEAKDPCOEF or LEAKOPENING are used to specify the leakage in the
propagation direction of the pig.
- 417 -
OLGA User manual
The key DIAMETER is used to calculate the liquid backflow around the pig.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
DIAMETER Real (m) Pig diameter. If pig diameter is smaller than pipe diameter,
back leakage between the pig and the wall will occur. NOTE!
If no diameter is given, the diameter of the pig is set to the
inner pipe diameter minus 4 times the wall roughness.

variables on the OPC server. Only keys that are explicitly set
can be exposed. To use the default value, you must define
this explicitly.
INSERTTIME RealList (s) Pig launch time for the time series.
LABEL String [PIG] Pig label, default is pig number.
LAUNCHPOSITION Symbol Position for pig launch. The pig is launched downstream of
the section boundary closest to the launch position.
LEAKAGEFACTOR Real (-) Pig leakage factor. Leakage factor at 0 corresponds to no

fluid flowing past pig, and 1.0 corresponds to all fluid flowing
past pig. When not given for the hydrate model, the program
will calculate the leakage factor from the cross sectional area.
Note that this key only influences the pressure induced flow
from upstream to downstream of the pig.
LEAKDPCOEF Real [1E199] Pressure loss coefficient measured by letting the fluid flow
past a pig that is fixed to the pipe wall. Note that this key only
influences the pressure induced flow from upstream to
downstream of the pig.
LEAKOPENING Real (-) [0.0] Leakage opening relative to pipe cross section area. Note
that this key only influences the pressure induced flow from
upstream to downstream of the pig.
LINEARFRIC Real [10] Linear friction factor coefficient for fluid friction of fluid film
(Ns/m) between pig and pipe wall.
MASS Real (kg) [140] Pig mass.
PGWXFORMFAC Real (-) [0.0] Pig form factor in the wax breaking force equation. Only
available with the wax module. (See the Pig - Model
description)
QUADRATICFRIC Real [0.0] Quadratic friction factor coefficient for fluid friction of fluid film
(Ns2/m2) between pig and pipe wall.
- 418 -
Reference manual
ROUTING SymbolList Name of branches a pig passes from the launch position to
trap position. This key is optional. If not given, a pig goes to
the branch that has the highest volumetric flowrate out of the
node the pig enters. When given, the launch branch name
must be the first in the list.
STATICFORCE Real (N) [1000.0] Force necessary to tear pig loose from the wall.
TRACKSLUG Symbol <None> | When turned on the slug in front of the pig is generated and
ON | [OFF] tracked, else no slug is set up in front of the pig. Activating
this key requires access to the slugtracking module.
TRAPPOSITION Symbol POSITION | Position for pig trap. The pig is trapped at the boundary
closest to the trap position. Trap position is optional and if not
given, the pig is removed when it exits through a terminal
node.
WALLFRICTION Real [1000.0] Factor for wall friction between pig and pipe.
(Ns/m)
WPPLASTVISC Real (N- [-1] Plastic viscosity of wax plug in front of pig. The wax plug is
s/m2) assumed to exhibit Bingham fluid behavior. –1 implies using
internal model for estimating the plastic viscosity. Only
description)
WPPOROSITY Real (-) [-1] Porosity of wax plug in front of pig. Used for wax plug friction
calculation. Default value –1 implies that the porosity of the
wax wall layer is used for the wax plug. A value = 1 implies
that no wax plug friction will be applied. Only available with
the wax module. (See the Pig - Model description)
WPYIELDSTRESS Real (Pa) [-1] Yield stress of wax plug in front of pig. The wax plug is
assumed to exhibit Bingham fluid behavior. –1 implies using
internal model for estimating the yield stress. Only available
with the wax module. (See the Pig - Model description)
WXBRFCOEF Real (-) [0.0] Coefficient C in the wax breaking force equation. Only
description)
WXRMEFF Real (-) [1.0] Wax removal efficiency. Only available with the wax module.
(See the Pig - Model description)
WXYIELDSTR Real (Pa) [-1] Yield stress of wax layer on the wall. –1 implies that the
internal yieldstress correlation is used. Only available with the
wax module. (See the Pig - Model description)
- 419 -
OLGA User manual
Name Description
LAUNCH When connected, this terminal defines the PIG launch signal.
LEAKAGEFACTOR When connected, this terminal value defines the

LEAKAGEFACTOR key value.
LINEARFRIC When connected, this terminal value defines the LINEARFRIC

key value.
MASS When connected, this terminal value defines the MASS key
value.
QUADRATICFRIC When connected, this terminal value defines the

QUADRATICFRIC key value.
STATICFORCE When connected, this terminal value defines the STATICFORCE

key value.
WALLFRICTION When connected, this terminal value defines the

WALLFRICTION key value.
RHEOLOGY (on Flowpath)
This keyword contains parameters that are used to account for non-Newtonian behavior of the flowing
phases.
See non-Newtonian rheology for more information.
AGAS Real coefficient A in Robertson-Stiff

rheology model for gas phase
AOIL Real coefficient A in Robertson-Stiff

rheology model for oil phase
AWATER Real coefficient A in Robertson-Stiff

rheology model for water phase
BGAS Real coefficient B in Robertson-Stiff

BOIL Real coefficient B in Robertson-Stiff

BWATER Real coefficient B in Robertson-Stiff

- 420 -
Reference manual
CGAS Real coefficient C in Robertson-Stiff

COIL Real coefficient C in Robertson-Stiff

CWATER Real coefficient C in Robertson-Stiff

GASCONSISTENCY Real Consistency factor of gas phase in

production fluid.
GASEXPONENT Real Exponent of gas phase in production

fluid.
GASFANNTABLE Symbol FannData | | Label of Fann table in Fann file, used

for gas phase in production fluid.
GASPLASTICVISCOSITY Real Plastic viscosity of gas phase in

(N- production fluid.
s/m2)
GASRHEOLOGYDATA Symbol <None> | CONSTANT | Option for gas rheology data: PVT =
RHEOLOGYTABLE | from pvt file, CONSTANT = rheology
FANNTABLE | [PVT] parameters do not change,
RHEOLOGYTABLE = rheology
parameters are from a rheology table,
or FANNTABLE = rheology
parameters are from Fann table.
GASRHEOLOGYMODEL Symbol <None> | BINGHAM | Type of rheology model used for gas
POWERLAW | phase in production fluid if
HERSCHELBULKLEY | RHEOLOGYTABLE or FANNTABLE is
ROBERTSONSTIFF | given.
[NEWTONIAN]
GASRHEOLOGYTABLE Symbol RheologyData | | Label of rheology table in rheology file,

used for gas phase in production fluid.
GASVISCOSITY Real Viscosity of gas phase in production

(N- fluid.
s/m2)
GASYIELDSTRESS Real Yield stress of gas phase in production

(Pa) fluid.
OILCONSISTENCY Real Consistency factor of oil phase in

production fluid.
OILEXPONENT Real Exponent of oil phase in production

fluid.
- 421 -
OLGA User manual
OILFANNTABLE Symbol FannData | | Label of Fann table in Fann file, used

for oil phase in production fluid.
OILPLASTICVISCOSITY Real Plastic viscosity of oil phase in

s/m2)
OILRHEOLOGYDATA Symbol <None> | CONSTANT | Option for oil rheology data: PVT =
OILRHEOLOGYMODEL Symbol <None> | BINGHAM | Type of rheology model used for oil
POWERLAW | phase in production fluid if
HERSCHELBULKLEY | RHEOLOGYTABLE or FANNTABLE is
ROBERTSONSTIFF | given.
[NEWTONIAN]
OILRHEOLOGYTABLE Symbol RheologyData | | Label of rheology table in rheology file,

used for oil phase in production fluid.
OILVISCOSITY Real Viscosity of oil phase in production

(N- fluid.
s/m2)
OILYIELDSTRESS Real Yield stress of oil phase in production

(Pa) fluid.
WATERCONSISTENCY Real Consistency factor of water phase in

production fluid.
WATEREXPONENT Real Exponent of water phase in production

fluid.
WATERFANNTABLE Symbol FannData | | Label of Fann table in Fann file, used

for water phase in production fluid.
WATERPLASTICVISCOSITY Real Plastic viscosity of water phase in

s/m2)
WATERRHEOLOGYDATA Symbol <None> | CONSTANT | Option for water rheology data: PVT =
- 422 -
Reference manual
WATERRHEOLOGYMODEL Symbol <None> | BINGHAM | Type of rheology model used for water
POWERLAW | phase in production fluid.
HERSCHELBULKLEY |
ROBERTSONSTIFF |
[NEWTONIAN]
WATERRHEOLOGYTABLE Symbol RheologyData | | Label of rheology table in rheology file,

used for water phase in production
fluid.
WATERVISCOSITY Real Viscosity of water phase in production

(N- fluid.
s/m2)
WATERYIELDSTRESS Real Yield stress of water phase in

(Pa) production fluid.
SHUTIN (on Flowpath)
The SHUTIN keyword can be used to stabilize the numerical behavior for shut-in like simulations in a
flowpath, selected pipes or individual sections. It may also be repeatedly activated/deactivated at specific
points in time.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
ACTIVATE SymbolList [ON] Activate (ON) or deactivate (OFF) SHUTIN
EXPOSE SymbolList States which keys should be made available as input variables on the
OPC server. Only keys that are explicitly set can be exposed. To use
the default value, you must define this explicitly.
LABEL String [SHUTIN] Label of the shutin keyword.
PIPE SymbolList [ALL] Pipe label or pipe number (single or continuous range in the form x-y).
SECTION IntegerList Section numbers.
TIME RealList Time points when shut in is activated/deactivated

(s)
Name Description
ACTIVATE When connected, this terminal defines the SHUTIN activate signal.
- 423 -
OLGA User manual
SLUGILLEGAL (on Flowpath)
SLUGILLEGAL is part of the SLUGTRACKING keyword.
Slugs are not allowed to be generated at illegal sections. A slug front or tail may propagate into an illegal
section, but it will not propagate through it. The first and the last section in a pipeline are by definition
illegal sections. This means that slugs do not propagate through a network. The user may add extra illegal
section by using the SLUGILLEGAL keyword. This may speed up the simulation or make the simulation
more robust.
More info on when to use illegal sections can be found under Slug tracking module.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
ILLEGALSECTION Symbol <None> | Specify whether or not slugs are allowed in sections defined by
OFF | [ON] PIPE and SECTION. OFF: Slugs are allowed. Used for
sections where illegal sections previously have been switched
on. ON: Slugs are not allowed to be generated. Slugs
generated elsewhere may move into the section, but are not
allowed to pass through this section. The slugs will be
destroyed when both the front and tail are within the section.
PIPE Symbol PIPE | Pipe numbers/pipe labels for illegal sections.
POSITION SymbolList Define the positions of illegal sections. If this option is used,
sub-keys PIPE and SECTION should not be used.
SECTION IntegerList Section numbers for illegal sections.
SLUGTRACKING (on Flowpath)
This statement defines the slug tracking option. This statement has two main sub-options for initiation of
liquid slugs: the level slug option (LEVEL) and the hydrodynamic slug option (HYDRODYNAMIC).
These two options may be used together or separately. Terrain slugging will be detected in ordinary
simulations without the Slug tracking module, and the interactions between terrain and hydrodynamic
slugging can be investigated using the key HYDRODYNAMIC. The level slug option is mostly used for
startup-slugs.
If HYDRODYNAMIC = ON, the code will set up a new slug in a section whenever the flow regime at the
section boundary changes from separated to slug flow and the initiation criteria are fulfilled. The initiation
criteria used depend on the model selected with the key SLUGTRACKINGMODEL under the OPTIONS
keyword. More details about this can be found in the description of slug tracking.
If HYDRODYNAMIC = MANUAL, the user can specify a fixed number of slugs to be set up at predefined
positions and times. Using this option, liquid will be injected into the pipeline to generate slugs of required
size.
Slugs are not allowed to be generated at the inlet and outlet sections by default. That is, the boundary
sections are automatically set to illegal for slugs by the program itself. However, the slug front is allowed to
move into the outlet section, and the slug tail into the inlet section. Users can specify the sections where
slugs are not allowed to be generated by using SLUGILLEGAL keyword.
The slug tracking option offers full temperature calculation capabilities.
- 424 -
Reference manual
Note: The availability of the slug tracking option depends on the users licensing agreement with
Schlumberger.
To turn off slug-tracking in a restart there are two possibilities:
1. Set both LEVEL and HYDRODYNAMIC to OFF. Then the only slugs in the system will be the ones
read from restart.
2. Remove SLUGTRACKING keyword. Average values will be used in the sections. No slugs in the
simulation.
More details can be found in the description of the Slug tracking module.
BUBBLEVOID Real (-) Minimum void required behind a level tail and ahead of
a level front at initiation time
DELAYCONSTANT Real [150] Number of pipe diameters a slug needs to propagate

before the next hydrodynamic slug is initiated.
ENDTIME Real (s) End time for level slug initiation. If not given no end
time restriction is enforced.
GASENTRAINMENT Symbol <None> | NYDAL Gas entrainment into slug from bubble for
| [VOIDINSLUG] breaking/level front in slug tracking. NYDAL: Nydal
correlation for entrainment. VOIDINSLUG: Entrainment
based on correlation for void in slug.
HYDRODYNAMIC Symbol <None> | ON | Option for initiating hydrodynamic slugs.

MANUAL | [OFF]
INITBUBBLEVOIDS RealList (-) [1] Void fractions in the slug bubbles.
INITENDTIMES RealList End times for slug generation.

(s)
INITFREQUENCY Real (1/s) The minimum distance between two consecutive slugs
is defined as (bubble vel./INITFREQUENCY). If
INITFREQUENCY is not given the minimum distance
between two consecutive slugs is set to 10 pipe
diameters.
INITLENGTH Real Maximum initial length of hydrodynamic slugs in

number of pipe diameters.
INITPERIODS RealList Time interval between initiations of consecutive slugs.

(s)
INITPOSITIONS SymbolList Labels of section boundaries where slug generation

zones are located.
- 425 -
OLGA User manual
INITSLUGVOIDS RealList (-) [0.0] Void fraction in the liquid slug.
INITSTARTTIMES RealList Start times for slug generation.

(s)
INITZONELENGTHS RealList The length of zones where slugs are to be generated.

(m)
LEVEL Symbol <None> | ON | Option for detecting and initiating level slugs.
[OFF]
MAXNOSLUGS Integer Max number of slugs allowed in the system, if not

given there are no restrictions.
SLUGFREQCONST Real [1] Tuning multiplier for models regulating slug initiation
frequency and slug growth. Higher factor increases
initiation frequency and favors shorter slugs.
SLUGVOID Real (-) The maximum void allowed in a level slug at initiation
time.
STARTTIME Real (s) Start time for level slug initiation. If not given, level
detection is on from simulation start.
TUNING (on Flowpath)
This statement defines the tuning option, witch makes it possible to tune certain parameters in the model.
The parameters available for tuning are at the moment very limited.
The TUNING keyword may be used for adjusting the OLGA model to specific sets of measured data or for
sensitivity studies. TUNING should be applied with great care, as the validation and verification of the
OLGA model may not be valid for such cases.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
ANGLEDIAMPOWER RealList [1.0] Power of diameter scaling in inclination sensitive part of

droplet entrainment function
ANGLESCALE RealList [1.0] Scaling of inclination sensitive part in droplet entrainment

function
AREA RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for AREA in PIPE (used for equivalent
pipes). NOTE: Cannot be applied on individual sections.
Pipe level and higher is allowed.
DIAMETER RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for diameter. NOTE: Cannot be applied
on individual sections. Pipe level and higher is allowed.
- 426 -
Reference manual
DIAMPOWER RealList [1.0] Power of diameter scaling in constant part of droplet

entrainment function.
ENTRAINMENT RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for entrainment rate of liquid droplets in
gas
GASDENSITY RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for gas density
GASVISC RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for gas viscosity
GROUGHNESS Real [1.0] Tuning coefficient for roughness from droplets.
LABEL String [TUNING] Tuning label. Default is tuning number.
LAM_GWALLI RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for friction factor between gas and wall
LAM_LGI RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for interfacial friction factor between
liquid and gas
LAM_OWALLI RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for friction factor between oil and wall
LAM_WOI RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for interfacial friction factor between oil
and water
LAM_WWALLI RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for friction factor between water and
wall
LIQHCFAC RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for liquid hydrocarbon fraction of total
hydrocarbon mass (1-Rsg)/(1-RsgRsw). This option will
only work with non-compositional modules.
MASSTRANSFER RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for mass transfer between gas and oil.
OILDENSITY RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for oil density
OILENTRAINMENT RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for entrainment rate of oil droplets in
gas
OILVISC RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for oil viscosity
PIPE SymbolList [ALL] Pipe numbers or labels where the tuning parameters will
be applied.
POSITION SymbolList Positions where the tuning parameters will be applied. If

this key is defined, PIPE and SECTION can not be used
in the same keyword statement.
REHIGH RealList [3000] Maximum of laminar and turbulent friction factor will be
used for Reynold's number higher than REHIGH, and an
interpolated value will be used for Re between RELOW
and REHIGH. Can be applied on individual sections,
pipes and branches.
- 427 -
OLGA User manual
RELOW RealList [2300] Laminar friction factor will be used for Reynold's number
lower than RELOW, and an interpolated value will be
used for Re between RELOW and REHIGH. Can be
applied on individual sections, pipes and branches.
ROUGHNESS RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for inner wall roughness. NOTE:
Cannot be applied on individual sections. Pipe level and
higher is allowed.
SECTION RealList Section or section boundary numbers where the tuning

parameters will be applied.
SIGGH RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for gas/oil surface tension
SIGGL RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for gas/oil and gas/water surface
tension
SIGGW RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for gas/water surface tension
SIGHW RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for oil/water surface tension
TAMBIENT RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for ambient temperature.
TC_GHFAC RealList [1.0] Scaling of the turbulence parameter for gas at the gas-oil
interface.
TC_HGFAC RealList [1.0] Scaling of the turbulence parameter for oil at the gas-oil
interface.
TC_HWFAC RealList [1.0] Scaling of the turbulence parameter for oil at the oil-water
interface.
TC_WHFAC RealList [1.0] Scaling of the turbulence parameter for water at the oil-
water interface.
VOIDINOIL RealList [1.0] Scaling of void fraction in oil film
VOIDINWATER RealList [1.0] Scaling of void fraction in water film
WATERDENSITY RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for water density
WATERENTRAINMENT RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for entrainment rate of water droplets in
gas
WATERVISC RealList [1.0] Tuning coefficient for water viscosity
WETFRACTION RealList [1.0] Scaling of fraction of wall wetted by droplets
- 428 -
Reference manual
Name Description
AREA When connected, this terminal value defines the AREA key value.
DIAMETER When connected, this terminal value defines the DIAMETER key
value.
ENTRAINMENT When connected, this terminal value defines the ENTRAINMENT key
value.
GASDENSITY When connected, this terminal value defines the GASDENSITY key
value.
GASVISC When connected, this terminal value defines the GASVISC key value.
GROUGHNESS When connected, this terminal value defines the GROUGHNESS key
value.
LAM_GWALLI When connected, this terminal value defines the LAM_GWALLI key
value.
LAM_LGI When connected, this terminal value defines the LAM_LGI key value.
LAM_OWALLI When connected, this terminal value defines theLAM_OWALLI key

value.
LAM_WOI When connected, this terminal value defines the LAM_WOI key value.
LAM_WWALLI When connected, this terminal value defines the LAM_WWALLI key
value.
MASSTRANSFER When connected, this terminal value defines the MASSTRANSFER

key value.
OILDENSITY When connected, this terminal value defines the OILDENSITY key
value.
OILVISC When connected, this terminal value defines the OILVISC key value.
ROUGHNESS When connected, this terminal value defines the ROUGHNESS key
value.
WATERDENSITY When connected, this terminal value defines the WATERDENSITY

key value.
WATERVISC When connected, this terminal value defines the WATERVISC key
value.
- 429 -
OLGA User manual
WAXDEPOSITION (on Flowpath)
This group is used to define input parameters for the Wax deposition module. Wax deposition is defined for
all flowpaths, that is, all flowpaths must have assigned a wax table. If multiple wax tables are used in a
network, the fluid properties must be generated in a specific manner.
The derivative of wax porosity (if POROSITYOPTION=AGEING) is defined in this manner:
(INITPOROSITY-HARDPOROSITY)/AGEINGTIME
Full temperature calculation (OPTIONS TEMPERATURE = WALL) is necessary when simulating wax
deposition.
Notes:
The availability of the wax deposition option depends on the user's licensing agreement with
Schlumberger.
The Wax deposition module cannot be applied together with the Slug Tracking or Corrosion modules.
The wax file is generated in a fluid program such as Multiflash.
AGEINGOPT Symbol <None> | AGEING | Options for treatment of porosity of deposited wax as
[CONSTANT] function of time. If CONSTANT, no aging mechanism
is activated. The porosity will either be directly given
by WAXPOROSITY or an average value calculated
by OLGA . If AGEING, INITPOROSITY,
HARDPOROSITY and AGEINGTIME will be used to
find change in porosity with time. New deposits will
still have the porosity according to WAXPOROSITY
settings. If INITPOROSITY is to be used as porosity
values of new deposits, WAXPOROSITY must be
set to the same values.
AGEINGTIME Real (d) [7] Time for reduction of porosity from INITPOROSITY
to HARDPOROSITY. Used to describe change in
porosity with time due to aging.
COEFSHEAR Real [0.0] Shear deposition rate constant for deposition of

(kg/m2) precipitated wax.
CONDUCTIVITY Real [0.242] Pure paraffin wax thermal conductivity. Branch-wise

(W/m-C) input. Currently not available.
CONDUCTOPT Symbol <None> | TABLE | Options for pure wax thermal conductivity. TABLE:
[MANUAL] The wax conductivity is taken from the wax tables.
MANUAL: The conductivity is given through the key
CONDUCTIVITY. Currently not available.
DIFFCOEFFMULT Real [1.0] Linear multiplier for modification of the component

specific diffusion coefficients given in the wax-table.
DISSOLPRESS RealList Pressures at which the values of DISSOLTDIFF
- 430 -
Reference manual
(Pa) apply. The melting/dissolve table is defined by

DISSOLRATE, DISSOLTDIFF and DISSOLPRESS.
Linear interpolation between table values. Works
only for MODEL=RRR with DISSOLUTION=ON.
DISSOLRATE RealList [1.e+12] Maximum melting/diffusion rate. The melting/dissolve

(kg/s- table is defined by DISSOLRATE, DISSOLTDIFF
m2) and DISSOLPRESS. Linear interpolation between
table values. Works only for MODEL=RRR with
DISSOLUTION=ON.
DISSOLTDIFF RealList [0.0] Difference between dissolution temperature and wax

(C) appearance temperature as function of pressure.
The melting/dissolve table is defined by
DISSOLRATE, DISSOLTDIFF and DISSOLPRESS.
Linear interpolation between table values. Works
only for MODEL=RRR with DISSOLUTION=ON.
DISSOLUTION Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] Switch for turning on/off dissolution. Only applicable
with RRR model.
HARDPOROSITY Real (-) [0.2] Lower value of porosity after the given ageing period
through AGEINGTIME. Has the following purposes:
1. To calculate change in porosity with time due to
ageing. 2. Giving lower limit for porosity in the case
of ageing when INSTPOROSITYOPT = MANUAL.
When INSTPOROSITYOPT = AUTOMATIC, the
lower limit for the porosity is given by
MINPOROSITY, and HARDPOROSITY is only used
for calculating the porosity change rate.
HARDPOROSITY must be equal to or larger than
MINPOROSITY.
INITPOROSITY Real (-) [0.8] Initial porosity of deposited wax, used only for
describing change in porosity with time due to
ageing.
INSTPOROSITYOPT Symbol <None> | MANUAL | Options for calculating instantaneous porosity of

[AUTOMATIC] deposited wax. MANUAL: A constant value is used,
given by WAXPOROSITY. AUTOMATIC: The
porosity will be calculated by the internal flow
dependent model. The keys MINPOROSITY and
MAXPOROSITY are used to determine the minimum
and maximum limits for the porosity. The wax
porosity may be changing with changing flow
conditions, and the average porosity seen at a given
point may be different from the instantaneous
porosity given by the internal porosity model.
- 431 -
OLGA User manual
MAXPOROSITY Real (-) [0.8] The maximum limit for the calculated porosity is
given by this key. Used when
INSTPOROSITYOPT=AUTOMATIC. The porosity of
new deposits is calculated by OLGA and an volume
averaging of the porosity of new and old layers will
be performed.
MAXROUGHNESS Real [1.0E6] Maximum wax layer roughness allowed.

(m)
MINPOROSITY Real (-) [0.2] The minimum limit for the calculated porosity is given
by this key. Used when
INSTPOROSITYOPT=AUTOMATIC. The porosity of
new deposits is calculated by OLGA and an volume
averaging of the porosity of new and old layers will
be performed.
MODEL Symbol <None> | MATZAIN | Wax deposition model.

HEATANALOGY |
[RRR]
SHEARMULTC2 Real [1.0] Tuning multiplier for empirical constant C2 in

MATZAIN wax deposition model.
SHEARMULTC3 Real [1.0] Tuning multiplier for empirical constant C3 in

MATZAIN wax deposition model.
VISCMULTD Real [1.0] Tuning multiplier for the “D” parameter in the internal
non-newtonian viscosity correlation. Only used when
VISCOPTION = RONNINGSEN2000. If these are
also specified in the wax-table (see userguide), user-
specified values for the multiplier will override those
in the wax-table file.
VISCMULTE Real [1.0] Tuning multiplier for the “E” parameter in the internal
VISCMULTF Real [1.0] Tuning multiplier for the “F” parameter in the internal
VISCOPTION Symbol [RONNINGSEN2000] Option for calculating the wax/oil dispersion viscosity
TABULAR: Currently not available.
RONNINGSEN2000: Use internal model.
- 432 -
Reference manual
VISMULTIPLIER RealList Ratio of viscosity of wax/oil dispersion to oil viscosity.

(-) The viscosity multiplier table is defined by
VISMULTIPLIER and WAXVOLFRACTION. Linear
interpolation between table values. Currently not
available.
WAXPOROSITY Real (-) [0.6] Porosity of new deposits in wax layer. Used when
INSTPOROSITYOPT=MANUAL.
WAXROUGHNESS Real (-) [0.0] Fraction of wax layer thickness that is interpreted as
wax layer roughness (that is, wall roughness).
Limited by MAXROUGHNESS.
WAXTABLE Symbol WaxData | Name of wax table.
WAXVOLFRACTION RealList Volume fractions of precipitated wax dispersed in

(-) oil.The viscosity multiplier table is defined by
VISMULTIPLIER and WAXVOLFRACTION. Linear
interpolation between table values. Currently not
available.
Output
ANIMATETRENDDATA (on Flowpath)
POSITION SymbolList Labels of specified positions where the velocity profile will be
plotted.
VARIABLE SymbolList [VELOCITYPROFILE] List of variables to be plotted. Units should not be used.
CROSSDATA (on Flowpath)
Cross sectional plots of particle concentration and dispersion velocity are available:
 Concentration of dispersion (particles) from bottom to top of line along vertical diameter: P-CON
 Volume velocity profile from bottom to top of line along vertical diameter: U-PROFILE
These data files have extension "csp" and can be plotted in the GUI. The concentration profile will be
plotted for each UD phase, and the plot variables will automatically be labeled accordingly in the csp file.
The plot interval is the same as for the TREND plots.
- 433 -
OLGA User manual

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
ABSPOSITION RealList (m) Pipeline position where the variable will be plotted.
Absolute position. Distance from branch inlet.
PIPE SymbolList Pipe numbers or labels where the variables will be

plotted.
POSITION SymbolList labels where the variables will be plotted.
SECTION IntegerList Section numbers where the variables will be plotted.
VARIABLE SymbolList List of variables to be plotted. Units may be included in

(ValueUnitPair) the list.
PROFILEDATA (on Flowpath)
This statement defines profile plot variables along the pipeline at specified time points.
For available profile variables see Output Variables.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
AGEGROUPID IntegerList Age group for plotting inhibitors variables with aging effect,
e.g. Kinetic hydrate inhibitor (KHI).
COMPONENT SymbolList Component names. Using the Inhibitor tracking module,

available components are HC, H2O and MEG/MEOH/ETOH.
For compositional models the names of the available
components are given in the feed file. Else, for
DRILLING=ON under OPTIONS, available components are
HC, H2O, MEG/MEOH/ETOH and MUD components (a
CUTTING component is available if
DISPERSION SymbolList User Defined (UD) dispersion names.
FLOWLAYER SymbolList ALL | GAS | Flowing layers

OIL |
WATER |
BED | WALL
|
HYKPID IntegerList Array element index of HYKPLIST.
- 434 -
Reference manual
LAYER IntegerList Wall layer number for plotting of wall temperatures. Layer no.
1 is the innermost one.
PHASE SymbolList User Defined (UD) phase names.
TRACERFEED SymbolList Tracer label that the tracer type variables are plotted for.
UDVARIABLES SymbolList List of user-defined variables to be plotted. Write ALL to plot

all variables defined in the PlugIn dll.
VARIABLE SymbolList Variables to be written to the profile plot file. Units should not
(ValueUnitPair) be used.
OUTPUTDATA (on Flowpath)
This statement defines the variables to be printed to the output file (*.out). Global variables are not
available on this level.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]


OIL |
WATER |
BED | WALL
|
LAYER IntegerList Wall layer numbers for plotting of wall temperatures. Layer
no. 1 is the innermost one.
PIPE SymbolList Pipe numbers or labels where the variables will be printed.
SECTION IntegerList Section or section boundary numbers where the variables will
be printed.
- 435 -
OLGA User manual
VARIABLE SymbolList List of variables to be printed. Units may be specified.

(ValueUnitPair)
SERVERDATA (on Flowpath)
If the position is given either through pipe/section or through a reference to an equipment label e.g.
VALVE-1, the variables are trend variables.
However, if the position is not specified, the variables are treated as profile variables.
More than one server data statement can be specified for each flowpath. The DTPLOT can differ from
statement to statement, meaning that the plotting frequency can vary between different variables.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
AGEGROUPID IntegerList Age group for plotting inhibitors variables with aging
effect, e.g. Kinetic hydrate inhibitor (KHI).
BORNEMANNPUMP SymbolList Bornemann pump for which the variable is to be

plotted.
CENTRIFUGALPUMP SymbolList Centrifugal pump for which the variable is to be

plotted.
CHECKVALVE SymbolList Checkvalve for which the variable is to be plotted.
COMPONENT SymbolList Component names. Using the Inhibitor tracking

module, available components are HC, H2O and
MEG/MEOH/ETOH. For compositional models the
names of the available components are given in the
feed file. Else, for DRILLING=ON under OPTIONS,
available components are HC, H2O,
MEG/MEOH/ETOH and MUD components (a
COMPRESSOR SymbolList Compressor for which the variable is to be plotted.
- 436 -
Reference manual
DISPLACEMENTPUMP SymbolList Displacement pump for which the variable is to be

plotted.
ESPUMP SymbolList ESP (Electric submersible pump) for which the

variable is to be plotted.

OIL |
WATER |
BED |
WALL |
HEATEXCHANGER SymbolList HeatExchanger for which the variable is to be plotted.
LAYER IntegerList Wall layer number for plotting of wall temperatures.

Layer number 1 is the innermost one.
LEAK SymbolList Leak for which the variable is to be plotted.
NEARWELLSOURCE SymbolList NearWellSource for which the variable is to be

plotted.
ONESUBSEAPUMP SymbolList OneSubsea pump for which the variable is to be

plotted.
PIG SymbolList Pig for which the variable is to be plotted.

plotted.
POSITION SymbolList Labels of specified positions where the variables will

be plotted.
PRESSUREBOOST SymbolList Pressure boost for which the variable is to be plotted.
PUMPBATTERY SymbolList Pump battery for which the variable is to be plotted.
SECTION IntegerList Section or section boundary numbers where the

variables will be plotted.
SIMPLIFIEDPUMP SymbolList Simplified pump for which the variable is to be

plotted.
SLUGID IntegerList [0] Unique identity defining a slug or a pig.
SOURCE SymbolList Source for which the variable is to be plotted.
- 437 -
OLGA User manual
TRACERFEED SymbolList Tracer label that the tracer type variables are plotted
for.
VALVE SymbolList Valve for which the variable is to be plotted.

WELL SymbolList Well for which the variable is to be plotted.
ZONE SymbolList Well for which the variable is to be plotted.
ZONEDETAILS Symbol <None> | Switch telling whether to store server data for all
YES | [NO] autogenerated sources/wells within zones
TRENDDATA (on Flowpath)
This statement defines the trend data to be plotted. A trend plot is a time series plot for a specified
variable. Global and branch variables are not available on this level.
For available variables see the Output Variables section.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
AGEGROUPID IntegerList Age group for plotting inhibitors variables with aging
effect, e.g. Kinetic hydrate inhibitor (KHI).
BORNEMANNPUMP SymbolList Bornemann pump for which the variable is to be

plotted.
CENTRIFUGALPUMP SymbolList Centrifugal pump for which the variable is to be

plotted.
CHECKVALVE SymbolList Checkvalve for which the variable is to be plotted.
COMPONENT SymbolList Component names. Using the Inhibitor tracking

module, available components are HC, H2O and
MEG/MEOH/ETOH. For compositional models the
names of the available components are given in the
feed file. Else, for DRILLING=ON under OPTIONS,
available components are HC, H2O,
MEG/MEOH/ETOH and MUD components (a
- 438 -
Reference manual
COMPRESSOR SymbolList Compressor for which the variable is to be plotted.
DISPLACEMENTPUMP SymbolList Displacement pump for which the variable is to be

plotted.
ESPUMP SymbolList ESP (Electric submersible pump) for which the

variable is to be plotted.

OIL |
WATER |
BED |
WALL |
HEATEXCHANGER SymbolList HeatExchanger for which the variable is to be plotted.
LAYER IntegerList Wall layer number for plotting of wall temperatures.

Layer number 1 is the innermost one.
LEAK SymbolList Leak for which the variable is to be plotted.
NEARWELLSOURCE SymbolList NearWellSource for which the variable is to be

plotted.
ONESUBSEAPUMP SymbolList OneSubsea pump for which the variable is to be

plotted.
PIG SymbolList Pig for which the variable is to be plotted.

plotted.
POSITION SymbolList Labels of specified positions where the variables will

be plotted.
PRESSUREBOOST SymbolList Pressure boost for which the variable is to be plotted.
PUMPBATTERY SymbolList Pump battery for which the variable is to be plotted.
SECTION IntegerList Section or section boundary numbers where the

SIMPLIFIEDPUMP SymbolList Simplified pump for which the variable is to be

plotted.
SLUGID IntegerList [0] Unique identity defining a slug or a pig.
- 439 -
OLGA User manual
SOURCE SymbolList Source for which the variable is to be plotted.
SURGEVOL_HLQMAX Real (m3/d) [0] Maximum oil drainage rate
SURGEVOL_LTQMAX Real (m3/d) [0] Maximum liquid drainage rate
SURGEVOL_WTQMAX Real (m3/d) [0] Maximum water drainage rate
TRACERFEED SymbolList Tracer label that the tracer type variables are plotted
for.
UDVARIABLES SymbolList List of user-defined variables to be plotted. Write ALL

to plot all variables defined in the PlugIn dll. The key
can only be used when PIPE and SECTION are
specified.
VALVE SymbolList Valve for which the variable is to be plotted.

WELL SymbolList Well for which the variable is to be plotted.
ZONE SymbolList Zone for which the variable is to be plotted.
ZONEDETAILS Symbol <None> | Switch telling whether to store trend data for all
YES | [NO] autogenerated sources/wells within zones
Piping
BRANCH (on Flowpath)
This statements defines a grouping of pipes by reference to a GEOMETRY.
FLUID Symbol PVTData | Label or number of the fluid table to apply for this branch. If a
keyword based pvt-file is used, FLUID has to be the LABEL given in
the pvt-file, that is, numbering is not valid for this format.
INIFLOWDIR Symbol <None> | Preprocessor input. Defines whether the initial guess on the flow
NEGATIVE | direction for a branch should be positive or negative. Changing the
[POSITIVE] direction might avoid a crash in the preprocessor or result in a
solution closer to the transient steady state solution.
UDPVTFILE Symbol UDPvtData | Name of User Defined (UD) property file used by the plugin module.
- 440 -
Reference manual
GEOMETRY (on Flowpath)
This statement defines the geometry label and the co-ordinates of the starting point for a branch. The
pipes belonging to this geometry must be defined sequentially after the geometry statement by use of the
PIPE-keyword for each pipe.
GLOBAL Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] Use global geometry
GLOBALGEOM Symbol GLOBALGEOM | Reference to global geometry defined in Geometries
LABEL String [GEOM] Geometry label
XSTART Real (m) [0] x-coordinate of the starting point of the geometry
YSTART Real (m) [0] y-coordinate of the starting point of the geometry
ZSTART Real (m) [0] z-coordinate of the starting point of the geometry
PIPE (on Flowpath)
This statement defines the pipe elements in a geometry. A pipe is one straight part of a pipeline. Pipe data
such as geometrical data: elevation are specified.
If the temperature option is WALL or FASTWALL in , a WALL for the pipe must be specified.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
AREA Real Total cross-sectional flow area in case of equivalent pipes. Equivalent
(m2) pipe means one single pipe representing a number of equal parallel
pipes with a correct total flow area.
DIAMETER Real (m) Hydraulic diameter of the pipe. Equivalent to the pipe's inner diameter
for normal pipe flow.
ELEVATION Real (m) End point elevation relative to starting point of the pipe.
IDIAMETER Real (m) Inner diameter of external pipe for simple annulus flow. This is used
together with ODIAMETER to calculate a hydraulic diameter, see also
ODIAMETER.
LABEL String [PIPE] Pipe label. Pipe labels cannot be formatted as a number (e.g. "1") or
as a number range (e.g. "1-4").
LENGTH Real (m) Length of the pipe.
- 441 -
OLGA User manual
LSEGMENT RealList Section lengths.

(m)
NEQUIPIPE Integer Total number of pipes represented in the equivalent pipe. The total
flow area in the equivalent pipe will correspond to this number of
original parallel pipes.
NSEGMENT Integer Number of sections in the pipe.
ODIAMETER Real (m) Outer diameter for internal pipe for simple annulus flow. Zero for
internal flow. This is used together with IDIAMETER to calculate a
hydraulic diameter which is equal to IDIAMETER - ODIAMETER,
instead of DIAMETER.
ROUGHNESS Real (m) Absolute roughness of the pipe wall.
WALL Symbol WALL | Label of the wall used.
XEND Real (m) x-coordinate of the pipe end.
YEND Real (m) y-coordinate of the pipe end.
ZEND Real (m) [0] z-coordinate of the pipe end.
Positions
POSITION (on Flowpath)
This statement specifies a position along the pipeline. It may either specify a distance from flowpath inlet
(ABSPOSITION), or a reference to a pipe and a section-volume/-boundary number.
ABSPOSITION Real (m) Absolute position. Distance from branch inlet.
LABEL String [POS] Position label.
PIPE Symbol PIPE | Pipe label.
SECTION Integer Section number of position.
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer Section boundary number of position.
ProcessEquipment
BORNEMANNPUMP (on Flowpath)
For a Bornemann pump, the pump flow rate is expressed as the difference between the theoretical flow
rate and the back flow rate. The theoretical rate is proportional to pump speed while the back flow rate is
proportional to the pressure difference.
- 442 -
Reference manual
1. Set manually by specifying PREFSPEED in the range [0 – 2400 rpm].

2. Regulated by a controller signal. The speed is calculated by N = u * MAXSPEED in the range [0 –
2400 rpm], u being the controller signal.
Note: A pump cannot be defined at the first or last section boundary of a flowpath.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
LABEL String [BMPUMP] Label of the pump.
MAXSPEED Real [2400] Maximum pump speed. Used with a controller signal. Must
(rpm) be between 0 and 2,400 rpm.
MODEL Symbol BMP_Model | Pump model.
PIPE Symbol PIPE | Pipe label for pump location.
PITCH Symbol BMP_Pitch | Pump pitch in mm. A list of predefined pitches is available
for each pump model.
POSITION Symbol POSITION | Position where the pump is located.
PREFSPEED Real [1000] Pump reference speed. Used without controller. Must be
(rpm) between 0 and 2,400 rpm.
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer Section boundary number where the pump is located.
VOLUME Symbol BMP_Volume Geometric volume capacity of the pump in cm3. Given by
| MODEL and PITCH.
Name Description
SPEEDSIG When connected, this terminal value will scale the MAXSPEED value. If
not connected the PREFSPEED will be used.
- 443 -
OLGA User manual
CHECKVALVE (on Flowpath)
Defines a check valve in the pipeline. Allows flow only in the defined flow direction.
ABSPOSITION Real Absolute position. Distance from branch inlet.

(m)
DIRECTION Symbol <None> | NEGATIVE Allowed direction. Positive direction refers to

| [POSITIVE] direction of increasing section number.
LABEL String [CHECK] Check valve label.
PIPE Symbol PIPE | Pipe number or pipe label where the check valve is
located.
POSITION Symbol POSITION | Position label where the source is located. If this is
defined, PIPE and SECTION should not be used.
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer Section boundary number where the checkvalve is

located.
CENTRIFUGALPUMP (on Flowpath)For the centrifugal pump, the pressure increase over the pump, ∆P, is dependent on the
flow rate Q, pump speed N, inlet gas volume fraction αI, and the pump inlet pressure PI.
A valve can be located at the centrifugal pump section boundary for controlling flow through the pump.
The transient pump characteristics for a centrifugal pump presented in the form of four quadrant curves.
The four quadrant curves are converted to a simpler form by the development of homologous curves
where the head and torque ratios (actual value to rated value) are functions of the pump speed and flow
rate ratios. A complete default set of homologous curves is tabulated in the code. These are based on
experimental data and are representative for centrifugal pumps. If other curves shall be used they must be
given with the TABLE keyword, or the CURVES keyword.
CURVES refers to CENTPUMPCURVEs given in the library.The pump curve data, head, flow efficiency
given in the CENTPUMPCURVE will be automatically converted to a homologous table used by the
centrifugal pump model.
1. Controlled manually by specifying time and speed series in the controller definition. The setpoint
specifies the required N (MAXSPEED > N > MINSPEED)
2. Regulated by a physical parameter. The speed is calculated by N = MINSPEED + u (MAXSPEED -
MINSPEED)
Here MAXSPEED is the maximum pump speed (defined by user), MINSPEED is the minimum pump
speed (defined by user) and u the signal from the controller.
Note: A pump cannot be defined at the first or last section boundary of a pipeline.
- 444 -
Reference manual

branch inlet.
ACCECOEFF Real [0.0] Pump speed acceleration. When

(rad/s2) recycle flow is over or below the
limits, this value will be used to
increase or decrease the pump
speed.
BYDIAMETER Real (m) [0.0] Diameter of the valve in the bypass

flow line.
CURVEMODE Symbol <None> | SINGLEPHASE | Curve input mode for centrifugal

[TWOPHASE] pump.
CURVES SymbolLis List of CENTPUMPCURVEs.

t
DENSITYR Real [900] Rated pump density.

(kg/m3)
DPRATED Real (bar) Pump pressure increase at rated

conditions.
EFFIMECH Real [0.7] Mechanical efficiency.
FLOWRATED Real Rated pump flow.

(m3/s)
HEADRATED Real (m) Rated pump head.
LABEL String [CENTRIFUGALPUMP] Label of the pump.
MAXPOWER Real (kW) Maximum shaft power allowed.
MAXRECYCLE Real [30.0] Maximum recycle mass flow rate.

(kg/s)
MAXSPEED Real (rpm) Maximum pump speed.
MINRECYCLE Real [0.0] Minimum recycle mass flow rate.

(kg/s)
MINSPEED Real (rpm) [0.0] Minimum pump speed.
- 445 -
OLGA User manual
ONECURVEPERSPEE Symbol <None> | YES | [NO] If YES: The input data deviate too
D much from the pump laws, and one
homologous curve is generated per
speed. Each curve is interpolated
in model speed. Outside the range
of the input data the pump laws are
used. If NO: the pump is assumed
to follow the pump laws, and all
curve data is combined in one
homologous curve.
POSITION Symbol POSITION | Position where pump is located.
POWERRATED Real (kW) Rated pump shaft power.
RECDIAMETER Real (m) [0.0] Choke diameter for recycle flow.
RECPHASE Symbol <None> | GAS | LIQUID | WATER Phase of recycle flow.

| [MIXTURE]
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer Section boundary number where

the pump is located.
SPEEDR Real (rpm) Rated pump speed.
TABLE Symbol CentrifugalData | Name of the tables of pump back

flow data or pump characteristic
data.
TORQMAX Real (Nm) Maximum motor torque allowed.
TORQR Real (Nm) Rated pump hydraulic torque.
TWOPHASEOPTION Symbol <None> | CALCMULTIPLIERS: Calculate two

CALCMULTANDDEGRADEDHEA phase multipliers and use default
D | INTERPOLATEINGVF | fully degraded head.
[CALCMULTIPLIERS] CALCMULTANDDEGRADEDHEA
D: Calculate two phase multipliers
and calculate fully degraded head
from largest GVF.
INTERPOLATEINGVF: Don't use
two phase multiplier. Create one
curve per GVF and interpolate
using model GVF. (No
extrapolation)
- 446 -
Reference manual
USEPHASEMULT Symbol <None> | NO | [YES] If NO: The two phase multiliers will
be set to zero, and only the single
phase curves will be used. If YES:
The two phase multipliers will be
used.
VISCMETHOD Symbol <None> | HI | [OFF] Viscosity correction method for

pump performance. OFF: No
correction applied. HI: Hydraulic
institute method applied.
Name Description
BYPASSSIG When connected, this terminal controls the bypass choke.
RECYCLESIG When connected, this terminal controls the recycle choke.
SPEEDSIG When connected, this terminal defines the speed of the pump. Read
more about the alternatives in Controlling the pump speed.
VALVESIG
DISPLACEMENTPUMP (on Flowpath)
For the displacement pump, the pump flow rate can be expressed as the difference between the
theoretical flow rate and the back flow rate. For a given pump the theoretical rate is proportional to pump
speed. The back flow is tabulated as a function of pump speed, pressure increase across the pump, void
fraction at pump inlet, liquid kinetic viscosity and pressure at pump inlet. A default table is included in the
code. If other table values shall be used they must be given with the TABLE keyword.
MINSPEED)
- 447 -
OLGA User manual
ACCECOEFF Real [0.0] Pump speed acceleration. When recycle flow is

(rad/s2) over or below the limits, this value will be used to
increase or decrease the pump speed.
ACOEFFICIENT Real [1.6] Experimentally determined exponent for

calculating the mechanical friction loss.
BCOEFFICIENT Real [1.6] Experimentally determined exponent for

calculating the viscous friction loss.
BYDIAMETER Real (m) [0.0] Diameter of the valve in the bypass flow line.
LABEL String [DISP-PUMP] Label of the pump.
MAXRECYCLE Real [30.0] Maximum recycle mass flow rate.

(kg/s)
MAXSPEED Real Maximum pump speed.

(rpm)
MDISSIPATION Real (W) [0.0] Mechanical dissipation at nominal speed.
MINRECYCLE Real [0.0] Minimum recycle mass flow rate.

(kg/s)
MINSPEED Real [0.0] Minimum pump speed.

(rpm)
PREFSPEED Real [3000] Pump reference speed.

(rpm)
RECDIAMETER Real (m) [0.0] Choke diameter for recycle flow.
RECPHASE Symbol <None> | GAS | LIQUID Phase of recycle flow.

| WATER | [MIXTURE]
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer Section boundary number where the pump is

located.
SPECAPACITY Real Pump specific volumetric capacity, Qspc.

(m3/R)
- 448 -
Reference manual
TABLE Symbol CentrifugalData | Name of the tables of pump back flow data or
pump characteristic data.
VDISSIPATION Real (W) [0.0] Viscous dissipation at nominal speed.
Name Description
RECYCLESIG When connected, this terminal controls the recycle choke.
COMPRESSOR (on Flowpath)
Describes the configuration of a compressor in the system. The compressor is represented through its
characteristics which give pressure increase and temperature as a function of flow and rotating speed
(RPM). Note that the compressor characteristics are given in a separate file. It is possible to specify
characteristics for more than one compressor. Each of the characteristics is assigned to a label, which is
referred to in the COMPRESSOR statement.
The compressor RPM is governed by the compressor speed controller:
RPM = RPMmin + urpm × (RPMmax - RPMmin)
where
urpm = output signal from compressor speed controller
The recirculation is governed by the anti surge controller (ASC).
Note: A compressor cannot be defined at the first or last section boundary of a pipeline.
CD Real [0.84] Discharge coefficient of valve/choke in recycle loop.
COMPRDATA Symbol CompressorData Name of compressor data. This refers to a label in the
| compressor characteristics file.
COOLCAPACITY Real (W) Maximum heat transfer rate from fluid flowing through
the heat exchanger in the recycle loop.
COOLER Symbol <None> | ON | Switch for turning on or off heat exchanger in recycle
[OFF] loop.
- 449 -
OLGA User manual
DIAMETER Real (m) Orifice diameter of valve/choke in recycle loop.
LABEL String [COMPR] Label of the compressor.
MAXRPM Real Maximum RPM.

(rpm)
MINRPM Real Minimum RPM.

(rpm)
PIPE Symbol PIPE | Number/name of pipe where compressor is located.
POSITION Symbol POSITION | Position of the compressor. If POSITION is defined,

PIPE and SECTIONBOUNDARY should not be used.
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer Section boundary number where compressor is

located.
SECURITYFACTOR Real Security factor (e.g. 1.2 implies that the min. flow is
120% of surge rate).
TEMPERATURE RealList Temperature values out of heat exchanger. Number of

(C) temperature values must correspond to the number of
times given in the TIME-key.
TIME RealList Time series for temperature out of heat exchanger.

(s)
Name Description
ASVSIG When connected, it controls the recycle valve depending on the flow
being less og higher than the surge flow. If not connected, the recycle
choke will be closed.
SPEEDSIG When connected, this terminal defines the speed of the compressor.
MINRPM and MAXRPM set the range. If not connected, MINRPM will be
used.
ESPUMP (on Flowpath)
For the ESP, the pressure increase over the pump, ∆P, is dependent on the number of stages, NSTAGES,
flow rate, pump speed N, inlet gas volume fraction and the pump inlet pressure.
A valve can be located at the ESP section boundary for controlling flow through the pump.
specifies the required speed.
2. Regulated by a physical parameter. The speed is calculated by N = u * Nnorm.
- 450 -
Reference manual
Here Nnorm is the normal operation or BEP speed given by the pump characteristics database for the
specified pump model and u the signal from the controller.
Note: An ESP cannot be defined at the first or last section boundary of a pipeline.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
LABEL String [ESP] Label of the pump.
NSTAGES Integer [1] Number of stages within the ESP
PREFSPEED RealList If given, PREFSPEED defines the nominal pump rotational

(rpm) speed. Else, the nominal speed is taken from the
corresponding pump database. A controller for defining the
speed (SpeedSig) must be used if PREFSPEED is not
given.
PUMPMODEL Symbol ESPumpData | Name of the ESP model from the pump database file
given in the FILES keyword in Case Definition. The same
pumpcurves are used for Reda N1500-A as for N1500AC
and for Reda GN2700 as for G2701.
TIME RealList [0.0] Time series for rotational speed

(s)
VISCMETHOD Symbol <None> | HI | Viscosity correction method for pump performance. OFF:
[OFF] No correction applied. HI: Hydraulic institute method
applied.
Name Description
VALVESIG
- 451 -
OLGA User manual
ONESUBSEAPUMP (on Flowpath)
The OneSubsea pump module in OLGA is a system model of a complete multiphase pumping
system. The module includes all the components given in Figure 110 below integrated with
OneSubsea standard control system. This represents a typical OneSubsea subsea multiphase
pumping system.
The OneSubsea multiphase pump is a Helico-axial pump that can operate at all gas volume fractions and
capable to handle different flow regimes. The pump has a wide operation envelope and is operated by
variable speed.
The OneSubsea flow mixer in which the fluid is mixed into a homogeneous mixture, provides stable
operating conditions for the pump independent on upstream flow conditions, eliminating transients from
slug flow and hence minimize the dynamic loading effects.
The recirculation line includes a standard choke and is used to prevent minimum flow operation and to
increase the operational envelope of the pumping system.
Figure 110 The OneSubsea multiphase pump layout

branch inlet.
BYCD Real [0.84] Bypass valve discharge

coefficient.
BYCHECK Symbol <None> | YES | [NO] Set to YES if the bypass line has
a check valve.
BYCVTABLE Symbol TABLE | Label of table for bypass valve

characteristics.
BYDIAMETER Real (m) Diameter of the bypass valve.
BYSTROKETIME Real (s) [10.0] Stroke time of bypass valve.
- 452 -
Reference manual
CD Real [0.84] Inlet valve discharge coefficient.
CHOKECV Real [70] Recirculation choke sizing

coefficient. Maximum CV value
specified is used to scale a
standard CV characteristic curve.
CHOKECVTABLE Symbol TABLE | Label of table for recirculation

choke characteristics.
CHOKEDEADBAND Real (s) [1] Choke dead band time before

opening/closing of the
recirculation choke for minimum
flow controller.
CHOKEMINOPENING RealList (-) [0.0] Minimum recirculation choke

opening. The recirculation choke
will not be allowed to close more
than this value.
CHOKEPOSSET RealList [-1] Recirculation choke set point.

Cannot be used simultaneously
with RELFLOWCONTR. Value=-
1 disables the controller. Note
that if the terminal RecycleSig is
connected this terminal
determines the value of
CHOKEPOSSET. The dead band
of the controller is given in the
pump characteristics.
CHOKERATE Real (1/s) [0.0033333333] Change rate of recirculation

choke opening/closing control.
Used for minimum flow controller
and CHOKEPOSSET.
CHOKERATESLOW Real (1/s) [0.00033333333] Change rate of recirculation

choke opening/closing control for
RELFLOWCONTR. Normally
slower control than
CHOKERATE.
CHOKETIME RealList [0.0] Time series for CHOKEPOSSET,

(s) RELFLOWCONTR and
CHOKEMINOPEN. Note that
there is a stepwise change in
values for the time points.
- 453 -
OLGA User manual
CONTROLMODE SymbolList SPEEDCONTROL | Determines whether to use

PRESSURECONTROL | [DEFAULT] PRESSURESETPOINT or
SPEEDSETPOINT when both
are given. DEFAULT lets the
PRESSURESETPOINT and
SPEEDSETPOINT input values
select the controller.
PRESSURESETPOINT will then
have priority if both are specified.
CVTABLE Symbol TABLE | Label of table for inlet valve

characteristics.
DIAMETER Real (m) Maximum inlet valve diameter.
INITIALCHOKEPOS Real (-) [0.0] Initial recycle choke position
INITIALSPEED Real (rpm) [1500] Initial pump speed
LABEL String [PUMP] Label of the pump.
MAXDP Real (Pa) Maximum pump differential

pressure. If specified MAXDP
exceeds value given in pump
characteristics, value from
characteristics will be used.
MAXPOW Real (W) Maximum available shaft power

per pump.
MAXSPEED Symbol PUMP_ONESUBSEA_MAXSPEED | Maximum pump speed in rpm (of

(rpm) selected pump). Automatically set
when a pump is chosen.
MIXERCHAR Symbol PUMP_ONESUBSEA_MIXERCHAR Reference to Flow mixer

| characteristics.
MIXERFILE String The name of the file containing

the Flow mixer characteristics.
MIXERVOLUME Real (m3) [1] Volume of Flow mixer.
NPUMPS Integer [1] Number of pumps in parallel

operation
- 454 -
Reference manual
PRESSURESETPOINT RealList Suction pressure set point

(Pa) controller. The pump speed will
regulate to the assigned suction
pressure set point. The controller
has a dead band given in the
pump characteristics.
PUMPCHAR Symbol PUMP_ONESUBSEA_PUMPCHAR Reference to standard

| OneSubsea pump
characteristics.
PUMPFILE String The name of the file containing

the pump characteristics.
RELFLOWCONTR RealList (-) [1] Relative flow control. Automatic

recirculation choke control. The
choke will be controlled relative to
operational envelope minimum
and maximum flow. Cannot be
used simultaneously with
CHOKEPOSSET. Default
value=1, the choke will close as
much as possible. Value=-1
disables the controller. The dead
band of the controller is given in
the pump characteristics.
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer Section boundary number where

the pump is located.
SPEEDRATE Real [0.87266463] Pump speed rate. Input ramp for

(rad/s2) speed controller.
SPEEDSETPOINT RealList Speed set point controller. The

(rpm) pump speed will regulate to the
assigned speed set point. Note
that if the terminal
SpeedSetpointSig is connected
the speed set point is the pump
max speed (shown in the key
MAXSPEED) scaled by
SpeedSetpointSig.
SPEEDTIME RealList [0.0] Time series for

(s) PRESSURESETPOINT,
SPEEDSETPOINT and
CONTROLMODE. Note that
there is a stepwise change in
STROKETIME Real (s) [10.0] Stroke time of inlet valve.
- 455 -
OLGA User manual
TRIPMODE RealList [0] Pump trip modes: -1: Trip

handled by the built-in trip
control, that is, a limit is
exceeded. 0: No trip, but an
indicator will tell if trip(s)
occurred. 1: Manual trip is
initiated.
TRIPTIME RealList [0.0] Time series for TRIPMODE. Note

(s) that there is a stepwise change in
Name Description
PRESSURESETPOINT When connected, this terminal value defines the

PRESSURESETPOINT key value.
RECYCLESIG When connected, this terminal value defines the

CHOKEPOSSET key.
SPEEDSETPOINTSIG When connected, the pump max speed (shown in the key
MAXSPEED) scaled by this terminal defines the
SPEEDSETPOINT key value.
TRIPMODE When connected, this terminal value defines the TRIPMODE

key
VALVESIG When connected, this terminal controls the inlet valve.
HEATEXCHANGER (on Flowpath)
This statement describes the effects of a heat exchanger. There are two types of heat exchangers;
setpoint and controlled.
The setpoint heat exchanger is represented as an ideal loss. The heat exchanged is equal to the enthalpy
difference corresponding to the difference between the inlet temperature and a user specified outlet
temperature of the heat exchanger.
The controlled heat exchanger does not know the outlet temperature and does not calculate the heat
exchanged. Instead it uses a controller to specify the effect to be used. The controller signal (which should
be between 0 and 1) is the fraction of the heat exchangers maximum capacity. A controller signal of 1
implies that the heat exchanger uses its maximum capacity.
Note: A heat exchanger cannot be defined at the first or last section boundary of the pipeline.
- 456 -
Reference manual
CAPACITY Real (W) Maximum heat exchanger capacity. Positive value is

for heating and negative value for cooling.
LABEL String [HEATEX] Heat exchanger label.
PIPE Symbol PIPE | Number/name of the pipe where heat exchanger is

located.
POSITION Symbol POSITION | Position of the heat exchanger. If POSITION is

defined, PIPE and SECTIONBOUNDARY should not
be used.
SECTION Integer Section number where the heat exchanger is located.
TEMPERATURE RealList Heat exchanger outlet temperature set points.

(C)
TIME RealList Time series in temperature set point table.

(s)
TYPE Symbol <None> | Heat exchanger type.

CONTROLLED |
[SETPOINT]
Name Description
HEATSIG When connected for controlled heat exchanger, the effect applied is
HEATSIG*CAPACITY. The controller signal, HEATSIG, should be between
0 and 1.
LEAK (on Flowpath)
The following table lists and describes the available keys for the LEAK keyword on flowpath level.
See Leak - Model description for details on the model itself.
- 457 -
OLGA User manual
See Leak - How to use for details on use.
ALFA Real For TEMPDEPENDENCY=ON. Constant used for

a temperature dependent GLV. 0 means that the
bellows temperature equals the injection
temperature, 1 means the production
temperature, and interpolation for <0,1>.
BACKPRESSURE RealList Leak back pressure.

(Pa)
BELLOWSPRESSURE Real (Pa) For TEMPDEPENDENCY=ON. Pressure in GLV

bellows (dome) at REFTEMPERATURE, used for
a temperature dependent GLV.
CD Real [0.84] Leak discharge coefficient.
CF Real (-) Ratio between gas and liquid sizing coefficient.
CHECKVALVE Symbol <None> | YES | [NO] Check valve active on the leak valve: NO: No
check valve, YES: Check valve present to stop
backflow.
CHOKESIZE Symbol VPC_Choke | Size of choke in units of 1/64 inches, required

dependent on valve name, correlation used, and
portsize. Use -1 if no choke is present.
CORRELATION Symbol VPC_Correlation | Correlation used to calculate the gas injection

rate.
DIAMETER Real (m) Maximum equivalent diameter of leak area.

HENRYFAUSKE | FROZEN - No mass transfer. HENRYFAUSKE -
EQUILIBRIUM | Partial equilibrium. EQUILIBRIUM - Gas/liquid
[FROZEN] equilibrium.

input variables on the OPC server. Only keys that
are explicitly set can be exposed. To use the
default value, you must define this explicitly.
GASLIFTTABLES SymbolList Names of tables (defined in keyword TABLE) that

define the curves of a GLV.
- 458 -
Reference manual
GASLIFTVALVE Symbol VPC_Label | Name of the gas lift valve (defined in the VPC
database).
GLVOPERATION Symbol <None> | For TEMPDEPENDENCY=ON. Specify whether

PRODOPERATED | a GLV is operated by injection pressure or
[INJOPERATED] production pressure. Used for a temperature
dependent GLV.
INLETDIAMETER Real (m) Inlet diameter (= outlet diameter) of the venturi

valve.
KLOSSENTRY Real [0.01] Loss coefficient for the entry cone of a venturi
valve. Range from 0 (no loss) to 100.
KLOSSEXIT Real [0.01] Loss coefficient for the exit cone of a venturi
LABEL String [LEAK] Label of the leak.
LIQUIDVOLUME Real [-1] Liquid volume in the dome in cubic inches. By

default (-1), the value is taken from the VPC data
base.
LOADRATE Real [-1] Measured loadrate in psig per inch at 800 psig
from loadrate test. By default (-1), the value is
taken from the VPC data base.
MAXSTEMTRAVEL Real [-1] Max allowed stem travel in inches. By default (-

1), the value is taken from the VPC data base.
PARTICLEFLOW SymbolList [YES] Allows particle flow through the leak.
PHASE Symbol <None> | GAS | Predominant phase. Used with valve

[LIQUID] characteristics.
PIPE Symbol PIPE | Number/name of pipe where leak is located.
PORTSIZE Symbol VPC_Port | Size of port in units of 1/64 inches.
POSITION Symbol POSITION | Position of the leak. If POSITION or

ABSPOSITION is defined, PIPE and SECTION
should not be used.
PTRO Real (Pa) Test rack opening pressure at 60 F.
R Real For TEMPDEPENDENCY=ON. Geometry factor

used for a temperature dependent GLV.
REFTEMPERATURE Real (C) For TEMPDEPENDENCY=ON. The temperature

for which the gas lift response curve is defined.
SECTION Integer Section number where the leak is located.
- 459 -
OLGA User manual
TABLE SymbolList Label of table containing valve characteristics.
TEMPDEPENDENCY Symbol ON | [OFF] Specify the temperature dependency of a GLV.

OFF: No temperature dependency. ON:
Temperature dependency for a nitrogen charged
bellow. Sub-keys ALFA, BELLOWPRESSURE,
GLVOPERATION, R and REFTEMPERATURE
must be specified.
THERMALPHASEEQ Symbol <None> | YES | [NO] If YES, thermal equilibrium between gas and
liquid is assumed, otherwise the gas is expanded
isentropical while the liquid is isothermal. Only
used in HYDROVALVE. The Henry-Fauske
model assumes isothermal liquid and isentropic
expansion of the gas. This option is therefore
unavailable when
CRITFLOWMODEL=HENRYFAUSKE.
THROATDIAMETER Real (m) Throat diameter of the venturi valve.
TIME RealList The time series for the leak back pressure.
(s)
TOPOSITION Symbol POSITION | Refer to position the leak is targeted to. When
this key is used, the following sub-keys cannot be
defined: TIME, BACKPRESSURE.
VALVETYPE Symbol <None> | The general type of valve used for the leak.
GASLIFTTABLE |
GASLIFTVALVE |
CVTABLE |
OLGAVENTURI |
[OLGAVALVE]
Name Description
BACKPRESSURE When connected, this terminal value defines the

BACKPRESSURE key value.
VALVESIG When connected, this terminal value defines the orifice opening.
When not connected, the orifice opening is set to 1.
LOSS (on Flowpath)
The following table lists and describes the available keys for the LOSS keyword on flowpath level.
See Loss - Model description on page 264 for details on the model itself.
See How to use on page 264 for details on use.
- 460 -
Reference manual

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
ABSPOSITION Real Absolute position where the pressure loss is located.

(m) Distance from branch inlet.
LABEL String [LOSS] Loss label.
NEGCOEFF Real Loss coefficient when the flow is in negative direction.
PIPE Symbol PIPE | Pipe label with pressure loss.
POSCOEFF Real Loss coefficient when the flow is in positive direction.
POSITION Symbol POSITION | Position where the pressure loss is located.
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer Section boundary where pressure loss is located.
PRESSUREBOOST (on Flowpath)
A constant pressure increase is used for modeling the behavior of a pump. An constant isentropic
efficiency is used to model the heat added to the fluid from the pump.
The PRESSUREBOOST pump has one optional input terminal, DPSIG. DPSIG scales the pressure
increase between 0 and DELTAPRESSURE.
DELTAPRESSURE Real (Pa) Pressure increase over pump.
EFFICIENCY Real (-) [1] Isentropic efficiency. Must be between 10% and 100%.
LABEL String [BOOST] Label of the pump.
- 461 -
OLGA User manual
Name Description
DPSIG When connected, this terminal value scales the DELTAPRESSURE key
value.
PUMPBATTERY (on Flowpath)
Pump Battery is a positive displacement pump of piston type used for liquid systems, e.g., in drilling
applications. The purpose is to get an overall estimate of pump power needed as well as the volume of
liquid pumped. The volume delivered by the pump is proportional to the rate of pump strokes.
The pump rate is subject to limitations on:
 maximum hydraulic horsepower allowed

 maximum pump rate
 minimum pump rate
 maximum pump pressure allowed
Volumetric efficiency as given by the ratio between the clearance volume and the swept volume can be
accounted for.
Note: A pump cannot be positioned on the first or last section boundary of a flowpath.
CLEARANCERATIO Real (-) [0.0] Ratio between clearance volume and swept volume,
used in volume efficiency calculation.
HPMAX Real (W) Maximum hydraulic horsepower for each single pump
in the pump battery.
LABEL String [PUMPBATTERY] Label of the pump.
MAXCAPACITY Real Maximum flow capacity.

(m3/s)
MAXPRESSURE Real (Pa) Maximum downstream pressure.

(rpm)
MINCAPACITY Real Minimum flow capacity.

(m3/s)
- 462 -
Reference manual

(rpm)
Name Description
SIMPLIFIEDPUMP (on Flowpath)
A simplified description of a centrifugal pump is used for modeling the behavior of a centrifugal pump
around an operational point. Simple algebraic expressions are used to calculate pressure increase over
the pump and pump efficiency.
MINSPEED)
DCOEFF1 Real [0.0] Relative change in pump pressure increase with

(1/rpm) pump speed.
DCOEFF2 Real [0.0] Relative change in pump pressure increase with

(1/m3/s) flow rate.
DCOEFF3 Real [0.0] Relative reduction in pump pressure increase with

gas volume fraction.
DENSITYR Real [900] Rated pump density. If DENSITYR = 0, the effect of

(kg/m3) rated density on the pressure increase is neglected
- 463 -
OLGA User manual
DPRATED Real (bar) Pump pressure increase at rated conditions.
ECOEFF1 Real [0.0] Relative change in pump efficiency with pump

(1/rpm) speed.
ECOEFF2 Real [0.0] Relative change in pump efficiency with flow rate.
(1/m3/s)
ECOEFF3 Real [0.0] Relative reduction in pump efficiency with gas

volume fraction.
EFFRATED Real [0.5] Adiabatic efficiency of pump at rated conditions.
FLOWRATED Real Rated pump flow.

(m3/s)
LABEL String [SIMPLIFIEDPUMP] Label of the pump.

(rpm)

(rpm)
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer Section boundary number where the pump is

located.
SPEEDR Real Rated pump speed.

(rpm)
Name Description
TRANSMITTER (on Flowpath)
phase split node.
- 464 -
Reference manual
transmitter.
along the flowpath.
ABSPOSITION Real (m) Absolute position. Distance from branch

inlet.
AGEGROUPID Integer Age group for plotting inhibitors variables

with aging effect, e.g. Kinetic hydrate
inhibitor (KHI).
BORNEMANNPUMP Symbol BORNEMANNPUMP | Bornemann pump where the transmitter is

located.
CENTRIFUGALPUMP Symbol CENTRIFUGALPUMP | Centrifugal pump where the transmitter is

located.
CHECKVALVE Symbol CHECKVALVE | Checkvalve where the transmitter is

located.
COMPONENT Symbol ComponentData | Component name for transmitting

compositional variable. Using the Inhibitor
tracking module, available components
are HC, H2O and MEG/MEOH/ETOH. For
compositional models the names of the
available components are given in the
feed file. Else, for DRILLING=ON under
OPTIONS, available components are HC,
H2O, MEG/MEOH/ETOH and MUD
components (a CUTTING component is
available if
COMPRESSOR Symbol COMPRESSOR | Compressor where the transmitter is

located.
DISPLACEMENTPUMP Symbol DISPLACEMENTPUMP Displacement pump where the transmitter

| is located.
ESPUMP Symbol ESPUMP | ESP (Electrical Submersible Pump) where

the transmitter is located.
- 465 -
OLGA User manual
HEATEXCHANGER Symbol HEATEXCHANGER | HeatExchanger where the transmitter is

located.
HYKPID Integer Array element index of HYKPLIST.
LABEL String [TM] Name of transmitter
LAYER Integer Wall layer number for plotting of wall

temperature. Layer number 1 is the
innermost one.
LEAK Symbol LEAK | Leak where the transmitter is located.
NEARWELLSOURCE Symbol NEARWELLSOURCE | NearWellSource where the transmitter is

located.
ONESUBSEAPUMP Symbol ONESUBSEAPUMP | OneSubsea pump where the transmitter is

located.
PIG Symbol PIG | Pig from which variable is retrieved.
PIPE Symbol PIPE | Pipe name where the transmitter is

located.
POSITION Symbol POSITION | Position where the transmitter is located.
PRESSUREBOOST Symbol PRESSUREBOOST | Pressure boost where the transmitter is

located.
PUMPBATTERY Symbol PUMPBATTERY | Pump battery where the transmitter is

located.
SECTION Integer Section number where the transmitter is

located.
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer Section boundary number where the

transmitter is located.
SIMPLIFIEDPUMP Symbol SIMPLIFIEDPUMP | Simplified pump where the transmitter is

located.
SOURCE Symbol SOURCE | Source where the transmitter is located.
TRACERFEED Symbol TRACERFEED | Tracer label that the tracer type variables
are plotted for.
VALVE Symbol VALVE | Valve where the transmitter is located.
VARIABLE Symbol 2| Name of variable to be transmitted. Note:

(ValueUnitPair) if the unit is not specified, SI units will be
used.
- 466 -
Reference manual
WELL Symbol WELL | Well where the transmitter is located.
ZONE Symbol ZONE | Zone where the transmitter is located.
Name Description
OUTSIG
VALVE (on Flowpath)
The position of the valve can be specified in three ways:
1. by referring to a pipe and a section boundary number

2. by referring to a pre-defined position
3. by specifying the distance from the left end of the branch (absolute position)
The valve performance is either obtained from a discharge coefficient and the maximum choke diameter,
or from a table with valve characteristics. The relative opening of the valve can be prescribed as a function
of time, or it can be driven by a controller.
There are two valve models (GASSIZING and HYDROVALVE). Model selection is done with the MODEL
key. GASSIZING is a implementation of the gas sizing equation given in Valve . The GASSIZING option
requires gas valve characteristics given by the TABLE key. HYDROVALVE can be used to simulate
chokes, liquid valves and gas valves.
BACKPRESSUREVALVE Symbol <None> | YES | [NO] Select Yes/No to include/exclude the

backpressure valve.
BPVCD Real (-) [0.84] Discharge coefficient of the backpressure

valve.
BPVDELTAP Real (Pa) [] Back pressure valve differential pressure

threshold value. The back pressure valve
opens when the pressure upstream of the
back pressure valve exceeds the pressure
downstream by this value. Note upstream and
downstream is relative to the direction of the
back pressure valve and the direction of the
back pressure valve is opposite of the
standing valve.
BPVDIAMETER Real (m) Backpressure valve port size.
CD Real (-) [0.84] Discharge coefficient.
- 467 -
OLGA User manual
CF Real Ratio between gas and liquid sizing

coefficient.
CR Real (-) [1.0] Recovery tuning. 1 gives maximum recovery

and 0 gives zero recovery.
DIAMETER RealList Maximum valve diameter. If NNOZZLE is

(m) defined: nozzle diameter for each nozzle
group.

HENRYFAUSKE | FROZEN - No mass transfer.
EQUILIBRIUM | HENRYFAUSKE - Partial equilibrium.
[FROZEN] EQUILIBRIUM - Gas/liquid equilibrium.

as input variables on the OPC server. Only
keys that are explicitly set can be exposed. To
use the default value, you must define this
explicitly.
FLOWDIRECTION Symbol <None> | NEGATIVE Flow direction through the standing valve.
| [POSITIVE] POSITIVE means in the same direction as the
flowpath positive direction, NEGATIVE means
opposite of the flowpath positive direction. The
flow direction of the back pressure valve is
opposite of the standing valve.
INLETDIAMETER RealList Inlet diameter (= outlet diameter) of the venturi

(m) valve.
KLOSSENTRY Real [0.01] Loss coefficient for entry cone of a venturi

KLOSSEXIT Real [0.01] Loss coefficient for exit cone of a venturi

LABEL String [VALVE] Valve label. Default value is valve number.
- 468 -
Reference manual
MODEL Symbol <None> | GASSIZING The valve model option. HYDROVALVE -

| STANDINGVALVE | Uses OLGA choke model to determine
VENTURI | flowrate or pressure drop over the choke.
[HYDROVALVE] GASSIZING - Use the gas sizing equation for
subcritial and critical flow. STANDINGVALVE
- The upstream/downstream pressure opens
or closes the valve. An optional back pressure
valve can be added. The STANDINGVALVE
option uses the same flowrate/pressurdrop
calculation method as the HYDROVALVE
option. VENTURI - assumes a gradual flowing
area contraction followed by a gradual flowing
area expansion. For this valve type the
Bernoulli equation is used to relate throat
conditions to downstream conditions.
NNOZZLES IntegerList [1] Number of nozzles. A NNOZZLES-

() DIAMETER list can be given to specify groups
of nozzles of different sizes.
OPENING RealList [1.0] Relative openings in the valve opening

timetable.
PHASE Symbol <None> | GAS | Flow type through the valve. For two or three
LIQUID | phase flow, use LIQUID.
PIPE Symbol PIPE | Pipe label where the valve is located.
POSITION Symbol POSITION | Position where the valve is located. If this

value is defined PIPE and
SECTIONBOUNDARY should not be used.
RECOVERY Symbol <None> | NO | [YES] Enable/disable the pressure recovery

downstream valve. Only used for
HYDROVALVE and STANDINGVALVE.
Cv/Cg include recovery and this option will
therefore be unavailable when using the
TABLE key.
SECTIONBOUNDARY Integer Section boundary number where the valve is

located.
SLIPMODEL Symbol <None> | CHISHOLM Slip model for choke throat. Only used for
| [NOSLIP] HYDROVALVE and STANDINGVALVE.
STROKETIME Real (s) [0.0] Stroke time of the valve.
TABLE SymbolList Table label for valve characteristics.
- 469 -
OLGA User manual
THERMALPHASEEQ Symbol <None> | YES | [NO] If set to YES, thermal equilibrium between gas
and liquid is assumed, otherwise the gas is
expanded isentropical while the liquid is
isothermal. Only used for HYDROVALVE and
STANDINGVALVE.
THROATDIAMETER RealList Throat diameter of the venturi valve.

(m)
TIME RealList [0.0] Time series for valve opening table.

(s)
VALVEGEOMETRY Symbol <None> | BEAN | Valve geometry used in the choke model.
[ORIFICE] ORIFICE - Orifice type with no spatial
extension, vena contracta appears behind the
valve. BEAN - Bean type with spatial
extension, vena contracta appears inside the
valve.
Name Description
CVTUNINGSIG When connected, this terminal scales the valve characteristics (CV) if
defined for the valve.
STROKETIME When connected, this terminal sets the STROKETIME for the valve.
VALVESIG When connected, this terminal defines the orifice opening and the
OPENING key will be ignored. The value range is 0-1, only.
JunctionNode
This statement defines a JUNCTIONNODE in the flow network system. The node has zero voulme. There
is one mixing terminal, while the node can have one or more flow terminals.
The fluids are mixed in the first/last section of the flowpath connected to the mixing terminal.
The momentum transferred over the node is calculated, and the contribution can be scaled by the user:
MOMTRANSFERFACTOR = 1 yields full transfer of momentum, while there is complete loss of
momentum for MOMTRANSFERFACTOR = 0.
Note: Plots in the mixing section for the junction node may show values that are not consistent with the
values obtained at the connected flowpaths. This is because of how the node calculations are
performed. In particular, volume variables such as PT and TM show values at the section center that in
reality correspond to the values at the inlet boundary of the mixing volume closest to the node. These
inconsistencies can be safely ignored.
- 470 -
Reference manual

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

LABEL String Network component label (if nothing is given the NC

tag is used).
MOMTRANSFERFACTOR Real (-) [0] Scaling momentum transferred over a node
Name Description
MOMTRANSFERFACTOR When connected, this terminal value defines the

MOMTRANSFERFACTOR key value.
OUTPUTDATA (on JunctionNode)
This statement defines the Junction Node variables to be printed to the output file (*.out).
See Node Output Variables on page 581 for available variables.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

SERVERDATA (on JunctionNode)
- 471 -
OLGA User manual
More than one server data statement can be specified for each node on caselevel. The DTPLOT can differ
from statement to statement, meaning that the plotting frequency can vary between different variables.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

TRENDDATA (on JunctionNode)
This statement defines the trend data to be plotted for Junction Nodes. A trend plot is a time series plot for
a specified variable.
For available variables see Node Output Variables on page 581.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

plotted.

TRANSMITTER (on JunctionNode)
phase split node.
The signals can be received by a controller. The signals are defined through the variable key, for example,.
measured values use them to calculate new signals which in turn are used to regulate, for example,. a
transmitter.
along the flowpath.
- 472 -
Reference manual
Name Description
OUTSIG
GlobalGeom
The GlobalGeom is a geometry defined globally.
A flowpath can use this geometry by referring to it at the GEOMETRY keyword.
LABEL String [GEOM] Global geometry label
XSTART Real (m) [0] x-coordinate of the starting point of the geometry
YSTART Real (m) [0] y-coordinate of the starting point of the geometry
ZSTART Real (m) [0] z-coordinate of the starting point of the geometry
PIPE (on GlobalGeom)
This statement defines the pipe elements in a geometry. A pipe is one straight part of a pipeline. Pipe data
such as geometrical data: elevation are specified.
If the temperature option is WALL or FASTWALL in , a WALL for the pipe must be specified.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
AREA Real Total cross-sectional flow area in case of equivalent pipes. Equivalent
(m2) pipe means one single pipe representing a number of equal parallel
pipes with a correct total flow area.
DIAMETER Real (m) Hydraulic diameter of the pipe. Equivalent to the pipe's inner diameter
for normal pipe flow.
- 473 -
OLGA User manual
ELEVATION Real (m) End point elevation relative to starting point of the pipe.
IDIAMETER Real (m) Inner diameter of external pipe for simple annulus flow. This is used
together with ODIAMETER to calculate a hydraulic diameter, see also
ODIAMETER.
LABEL String [PIPE] Pipe label. Pipe labels cannot be formatted as a number (e.g. "1") or
as a number range (e.g. "1-4").
LENGTH Real (m) Length of the pipe.
LSEGMENT RealList Section lengths.

(m)
NEQUIPIPE Real Total number of pipes represented in the equivalent pipe. The total
flow area in the equivalent pipe will correspond to this number of
original parallel pipes.
NSEGMENT Integer Number of sections in the pipe.
ODIAMETER Real (m) Outer diameter for internal pipe for simple annulus flow. Zero for
internal flow. This is used together with IDIAMETER to calculate a
hydraulic diameter which is equal to IDIAMETER - ODIAMETER,
instead of DIAMETER.
ROUGHNESS Real (m) Absolute roughness of the pipe wall.
WALL Symbol WALL | Label of the wall used.
XEND Real (m) x-coordinate of the pipe end.
YEND Real (m) y-coordinate of the pipe end.
ZEND Real (m) [0] z-coordinate of the pipe end.
GroupData
UDGroup
Located under the GroupData section, this input group defines how the defined dispersions are to enter
the pre-defined phases in initial conditions, mass sources and for nodes with pressure boundary condition.
Each unique combination should be defined as a separate UDGROUP.
UDGROUP can be referred to by SOURCE, INITIALCONDITIONS and NODE.The SOURCE and the
NODE use the fractions in the three flowing layers (gas, oil, water), while all may be used for the initial
conditions.
- 474 -
Reference manual
The UDGROUP is composed by a set of UDFRACTIONs, each specifying the mass fraction of a given
user defined phase in a given layer (gas, oil, water, bed and wall).
LABEL String Network component label (if nothing is given the NC tag is used).
UDFRACTION (on UDGroup)
UDFRACTION specifying the mass fraction of a given user defined phase in a given layer (gas, oil, water,
bed and wall) within a UDGROUP.
MASSFRACTION defines the mass fraction of the dispersion relative to the total mass of the
corresponding carrying layer. Giving more than one value, the input is interpreted as a time series and the
number of values should correspond to the time points given under UDFRACTIONTIME. The value
between the given time points is determined through interpolation.
The dispersed phase to be tracked in this carrying phase can be referred to in two ways:
1. Use the PHASE key to refer directly to a UDPHASE defined in the Library section of the input, or
2. Use the DISPERSION key to refer to a UDDISPERSION defined in the Library section of the input.
Note: For initial conditions giving the user defined phase mass fractions in a bed/wall, the UDGROUP
referenced must have MASSFRACTION > 0 for LAYER = BED/WALL.
DISPERSION Symbol UDDISPERSION | User Defined (UD) dispersions that will mix with
the predefined phase(s)
LAYER Symbol <None> | GAS | OIL | The layer the User Defined (UD) phase/dispersion
WATER | BED | WALL | will flow in (gas, oil, water) or be deposited in (bed,
wall)
MASSFRACTION RealList Mass fraction in layer

(-)
PHASE Symbol UDPHASE | User Defined (UD) phases that will mix with the
predifined phase(s)
TIME RealList The time points for the mass fractions.

(s)
- 475 -
OLGA User manual
Library
DRILLINGFLUID (on Library)
This statement enables the use of drilling fluids. The usage requires DRILLING = ON. Drilling fluids are
treated as extra fluids and are tracked through the pipeline. They do not replace any of the phases. The
fluid properties of a drilling fluid can be given in three different ways:
1. Define the range of density and viscosity at standard conditions for a drilling fluid. The density and
viscosity used at the inlet is given in SOURCE or NODE.
2. Get the fluid properties for the drilling fluid from a separate fluid property file. The fluid property file
must then have an appropriate string in the header of the file:
 string "GASMUD" if gas phase is used as drilling fluid
 string "OILMUD” if oil phase is used as drilling fluid
 string "WATERMUD" if water phase is used as drilling fluid
 A combination of the correlation based method (1), the PVT table tracking method (2) and the
compositional mud tracking method (3) cannot be used in the same case.
3. Compute the fluid properties by a compositional equation of state computation. The components
comprising the base fluid of the mud must then be included in the .mfl file, and the base fluid must be
defined as a FEED either in the .mfl file or as a user defined FEED under the COMPOSITIONAL
group in the OLGA GUI.
Non-Newtonian rheology can be accounted for. Four non-Newtonian models are available: Bingham,
Power Law, Herschel-Bulkley and Robertson-Stiff, see Drilling fluids.
The DRILLINGFLUID keyword requires access to the Wells Module. To utilize the compositional mud
tracking method, COMPOSITIONAL=ON must be selected under OPTIONS. This option requires access
to the Compositional Tracking Module.
FANNTABLE Symbol FannData | | Label of Fann table in Fann file.
FLUIDCOMPOSITION Symbol CompositionData | Label of the Feed that defines the drilling
fluid composition. Requires
COMPOSITIONAL=ON under the
OPTIONS keyword.
FLUIDTABLE Symbol PVTData | Label or number of fluid table in PVT file.
GASRATIO Real The gas volume in the drilling fluid at

standard conditions. The unit of
GASRATIO, OILRATIO, WATERRATIO
and WEIGHTMATERIALRATIO must be
the same, but any volumetric unit in
addition to percent and fraction can be
used.
LABEL String [DRILLINGFLUID] Drilling fluid label.
- 476 -
Reference manual
MAXDENSITY Real The maximum density of the drilling fluid

(kg/m3) to be used in the entire drilling process.
The densisty must be given at standard
conditions.
MAXVISCOSITY Real The maximum viscosity of the drilling fluid

(N- to be used in the entire drilling process.
s/m2) The viscosity must be given at standard
conditions.
MINDENSITY Real The minimum density of the drilling fluid to

(kg/m3) be used in the entire drilling process. The
density must be given at standard
conditions.
MINVISCOSITY Real The minimum viscosity of the drilling fluid

(N- to be used in the entire drilling process.
s/m2) The viscosity must be given at standard
conditions.
OILRATIO Real The oil volume in the drilling fluid at

used.
RHEOLOGYMODEL Symbol <None> | NEWTONIAN | Type of rheology model to use for this
BINGHAM | POWERLAW | drilling fluid if RHEOLOGYTABLE or
HERSCHELBULKLEY | FANNTABLE is given.
ROBERTSONSTIFF |
RHEOLOGYTABLE Symbol RheologyData | | Label of rheology table in rheology file.
STDMUDWEIGHT Real Mud weight at standard conditions.

(kg/m3)
TYPE Symbol <None> | WATERMUD | Type of drilling fluid. The following types
OILMUD | GASMUD | are allowed: WATER, OIL, and GAS.
VISCOSITYBCONST Real B constant in the Vogel viscosity model for

oil and water based muds. visc =
visc0*exp(B/(T+C)) where visc0 is given in
SOURCE and/or NODE.
VISCOSITYCCONST Real C constant in the Vogel viscosity model for

oil and water based muds. visc =
visc0*exp(B/(T+C)) where visc0 is given in
SOURCE and/or NODE.
- 477 -
OLGA User manual
WATERRATIO Real The water volume in the drilling fluid at

used.
WEIGHTMATERIAL Symbol MATERIAL | Name of the weight material in the drilling

fluid.
WEIGHTMATERIALRATIO Real The weight material volume in the drilling

fluid at standard conditions. The unit of
used.
HYDRATECURVE (on Library)
This keyword defines a hydrate formation curve to be used with the HYDRATECHECK keyword.
See also:
Hydrate check on page 163
COLUMNHEADER SymbolList TEMPERATURE | Units and orders of columns of the temperature

(ValueUnitPair) PRESSURE | and pressure in the HYDRATEFILE. By default
the first column is for temperature and the
second for pressures.
FROMFILE Symbol <None> | YES | [NO] YES: The hydrate dissociation curve is to be
read from a data file. NO: The hydrate curve is
specified using the keys PRESSURE and
TEMPERATURE.
HYDRATEFILE String The name of the file containing hydrate

temperature as a function of pressure or vice
versa. Must be specified when
FROMFILE=YES.
INHIBCONC Real (-) [0] Inhibitor concentration (in weight percent) for a
hydrate curve (default = 0).
- 478 -
Reference manual
INHIBITOR Symbol InhibitorCompData | The inhibitor component to use with the hydrate
curve. For Compositional Tracking only. The
inhibitor component must be defined in the feed
file, possible selections are: EtOH, MeOH,
MEG, DEG and TEG.
LABEL String [HYD] The label of this hydrate curve.
PRESSURE RealList (Pa) Hydrate formation pressure for each given

temperature point. The pressure points have be
unique and entered in increasing order.
TEMPERATURE RealList (C) Temperature points defining the hydrate curve.

The temperature points have to be unique and
entered in increasing order.
MATERIAL (on Library)
This statement specifies physical properties of the materials associated with WALLS (pipe wall, pipeline
coating, insulation and soil) and SHAPES (FEMTherm). The main purpose of the material is to define the
heat transfer properties in thermal computations. When the elastic wall option is used, the Young's
modulus of elasticity (EMOD) can be used by OLGA to compute the flexibility of the pipe WALL.
OLGA has four types of material models for heat transfer computations:
 TYPE = SOLID: A simple model with constant thermal properties. The equations solved are that of
heat transfer in solid medium. This is the default model in OLGA.
 TYPE = FLUID: If a fluid is enclosed between two concentric cylinders, natural convection will be
significant for the heat transfer rate. By choosing TYPE = FLUID, OLGA will also include the effect of
natural convection. The viscosity and expansion coefficient of the fluid must then be given. If the fluid
is a gas at low pressure (< 100 bar) natural convection will have less influence on the heat transfer
rate and radiation will become important as well. Radiation is included in heat transfer calculation by
setting RADIATION = YES. INNEREMISSIVITY and OUTEREMISSIVITY must then be specified.
(High emissivity means low reflectivity). Stefan-Boltzmann's law for long concentric cylinders is used
to calculate the heat transfer rate. The heat transfer rate due to radiation is negligible if one or both of
the emissivities are small. This model is only valid in WALLS.
 TYPE = PCM: In situations with freezing/thawing materials, it is important to capture the effect of both
temperature dependent material properties as well as the latent heat of fusion. This model is designed
to provide a simplified input option for this type of simulations. The phase change is assumed to occur
when the temperature is in the region PHCHMIN < T < PHCHMAX and the latent heat of fusion is
accounted for with the heat capacity multiplier FUSIONMULT. In this region, the conductivity is linearly
interpolated between CONDMULT*CONDUCTIVITY and CONDUCTIVITY, while the heat capacity is
set to FUSIONMULT*CAPACITY. When the temperature is below PHCHMIN, the conductivity used is
CONDMULT*CONDUCTIVITY and the heat capacity is set to HCAPMULT*CAPACITY. Above
PHCHMAX, CONDUCTIVITY and CAPACITY is used directly.
 TYPE = TEMPDEPENDENT: This is a generic, temperature dependent model. When this model is
chosen, the CONDUCTIVITY, CAPACITY and DENSITY can be given as lists, where each entry
corresponds to a temperature point in the key TEMPERATURE. Between temperature points, the
conductivity is linearly interpolated. For the inertial terms, the product of the heat capacity and density
is linearly interpolated.
- 479 -
OLGA User manual
CAPACITY RealList Thermal capacity of the material.

(J/kg-C)
CONDMULT Real Conductivity multiplier below PHCHMIN. Between

PHCMIN and PHCMAX, the multiplier is linearly
interpolated from CONDMULT to 1.
CONDUCTIVITY RealList Thermal conductivity of the material.

(W/m-C)
DENSITY RealList Material density.

(kg/m3)
EMOD Real Young's modulus of elasticity. Used to compute the

(Pa) radial flexibility of the pipe (typical value for steel:
2.1e11 Pa).
EXPANSION Real Expansion coefficient of fluid layer.

(1/C)
FUSIONMULT Real Heat capacity multiplier between PHCHMIN and

PHCHMAX used to model latent heat of fusion. If
FUSIONMULT is 0, the heat capacity multiplier is
linearly interpolated from HCAPMULT to 1
between PHCMIN and PHCMAX.
HCAPMULT Real Heat capacity multiplier below PHCHMIN
INNEREMISSIVITY Real [0] Emissivity of inner surface of fluid layer.
LABEL String [MAT] Material label.
OUTEREMISSIVITY Real [0] Emissivity of outer surface of fluid layer.
PHCHMAX Real (C) Upper temperature limit for phase change region
PHCHMIN Real (C) Lower temperature limit for phase change region
RADIATION Symbol <None> | YES | [NO] NO: No radiation across fluid layer. Yes: Radiation
across fluid layer.
TEMPERATURE RealList Temperature points for interpolating CAPACITY,

(C) CONDUCTIVITY and DENSITY. Used only if
TYPE = TEMPDEPENDENT
- 480 -
Reference manual
TYPE Symbol <None> | FLUID | PCM | Type of wall material. SOLID: Normal wall layer
TEMPDEPENDENT | material. FLUID: Stagnant fluid material. PCM:
[SOLID] Phase changing material. TEMPDEPENDENT:
Temperature dependent solid material (heat
transfer properties tabulated as a function of
TEMPERATURE).
VISCOSITY Real (N- Dynamic viscosity of fluid material

s/m2)
PARTICLES (on Library)
This statement defines the properties of particles. This keyword can be used for example to account for
cuttings in drilling simulations and for sand/fines in well simulations. Particles can be included in the
simulation by setting PARTICLEFLOW = SIMPLE or ADVANCED in the OPTIONS keyword. Only one type
of particles can be defined in a simulation.
CAPACITY Real (J/kg-C) [2210] Thermal capacity of particles.
DENSITY Real (kg/m3) [2100.0] Density of particles.
DIAMETER Real (m) [0.000635] Diameter of particles.
LABEL String [PARTICLE] Label of particle phase.
RESERVOIRINFLOW (on Library)
AINJ RealList Well flow equation coefficient A for

injection. Coefficient given at in situ
conditions - uses gas mass fraction
from the PVT table to calculate the
split between the phases. Unit:
Linear formula: kg/s, Non-linear
formula: Pa2.
APROD RealList Well flow equation coefficient A for

phases. Unit: Linear formula: kg/s,
Non-linear formula: Pa2.
- 481 -
OLGA User manual
BINJ RealList Well flow equation coefficient B for

injection. Injectivity index for linear
inflow equation. Coefficient given at
in situ conditions - uses gas mass
phases. Unit: Linear formula:
BOOIL Real Oil formation volume factor
BPPRESSURE RealList Bubble point pressure at reservoir

(Pa) temperature for Undersaturated oil
wells.
BPROD RealList Well flow equation coefficient B for

phases. Productivity index for linear
inflow equation. Unit: Linear formula:
CGR RealList [-1.0] Condensate-gas ratio. By default,

(Sm3/Sm3) CGR from the PVT table is used.
CINJ RealList Well flow equation coefficient C for

injection. Unit: Non-linear formula:
Pa2-s2/kg2, Forchheimer: psi2-
d2/scf2, Single Forchheimer: psi-
d2/scf2. Backpressure: scf/d/psi2n.
CPROD RealList Well flow equation coefficient C for

production. Unit: Non-linear formula:
Pa2-s2/kg2 for the non-linear
formula, Forchheimer: psi2-d2/scf2,
Single Forchheimer: psi-d2/scf2,
Backpressure: scf/d/psi2n
(dependent on EXPONENTN).
EXPONENTN RealList [1.0] Constant in Backpressure inflow

equation. It normally varies between
0.5 and 1.0.
EXPOSE SymbolList States which keys should be made

available as input variables on the
OPC server.
- 482 -
Reference manual
FEEDNAME SymbolList Labels of feeds that define the fluid

composition in the reservoir.
Requires COMPOSITIONAL=ON or
BLACKOIL under the OPTIONS
keyword.

FEEDNAME (only for blackoil
model).
FRACPR RealList Fracture pressure.

(Pa)
GASDIS Real (m) [0.0] Distance gas front has to travel

before it reaches the well bore.
Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
GASFRACTION RealList (-) [-1.0] Gas mass fraction in the gas+oil

mixture for positive flow. -1 indicates
equilibrium. A list of both positive
GASINJ RealList Linear injectivity index for gas

GASPLIMIT Real (Pa) Pressure at which the gas front will

PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
GFRTC Real (s) Time constant for the gas front

movement. Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
GORST RealList [-1.0] Gas/oil volumetric ratio. By default,

(Sm3/Sm3) GOR from the PVT table is used.
HOLES RealList Hole size (diameter). Normally given

(m) in inches (in).
HPAY RealList Net pay from inflow zone.

(m)
INJECTIVITY RealList Injectivity. Given at std conditions -

(Sm3/s/Pa) uses GOR from the PVT table (or the
specified GORST) and the PHASE to
calculate the split between the phases.
- 483 -
OLGA User manual
INJOPTION Symbol <None> | LINEAR | Negative well flow equation type.

QUADRATIC |
SINGLEFORCHHEIMER |
FORCHHEIMER |
BACKPRESSURE |
UNDERSATURATED |
VOGELS | TABULAR |
NORMALIZEDBACKPR |
INJPOSTFRACFACTOR Real [1.0] Multiplier for injection rate when BH

pressure is above fracture pressure.
If BH pressure has been above
when BH pressure is above
INJTHRESHOLD as well.
INJPREFRACFACTOR Real [1.0] Multiplier for injection rate when BH

pressure is below fracture pressure.
If the BH pressure has been above
only below INJTHRESHOLD.
INJTABLE Symbol TABLE | Table reference for negative well

flow performance. Option for
supporting coning. The table
variables must be given at reservoir
conditions.
INJTHRESHOLD RealList Pressure. If BH pressure has been

(Pa) above fracture pressure the injection
rate multiplied by the
INJPOSTFRACFACTOR will be
used when the BH pressure is above
INJTHRESHOLD.
ISOTHERMAL Symbol <None> | NO | [YES] Turn on or off isothermal.
KPERM RealList Effective permeability.

(mD)
LABEL String [RESERVOIRINFLOW] Reservoir inflow label
OFRTC Real (s) Time constant for the oil front

movement. Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
OILDIS Real (m) Distance oil front has to travel before

it reaches the well bore. Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
- 484 -
Reference manual
OILINJ RealList Linear injectivity index for oil entering

(Sm3/s/Pa) the well section. Normally given in
(Sm3/d/bar).
OILPLIMIT Real (Pa) Pressure at which the oil front will be

at the well bore at steady-state
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
PARTICLEFRACTION RealList (-) [0.0] Mass fraction of solid particles in

total mixture. If a PARTICLES
keyword is not specified in Library,
default values for the density and
diameter of the particles are used
(see documentation of PARTICLES
keyword).
PHASE Symbol <None> | GAS | WATER | The phase for which productivity
LIQUID | [OIL] index or absolute open flow rate is
given.
PRODI RealList Productivity index for linear inflow

(Sm3/s/Pa) equation. Normally given in
(Sm3/d/bar). Given at std conditions
- uses GOR from the PVT table (or
the specified GORST) and the
PHASE to calculate the split
between the phases.
PRODOPTION Symbol <None> | LINEAR | Positive well flow equation type.

QUADRATIC |
SINGLEFORCHHEIMER |
FORCHHEIMER |
BACKPRESSURE |
UNDERSATURATED |
VOGELS | TABULAR |
NORMALIZEDBACKPR |
PRODPOSTFRACFACTOR Real [1.0] Multiplier for production rate after the

reservoir is fractured. Use when the
well parameters are given for
conditions before the reservoir is
fractured.
PRODPREFRACFACTOR Real [1.0] Multiplier for production rate before

the reservoir is fractured. Used when
the well parameters are given for
conditions after the reservoir is
fractured.
- 485 -
OLGA User manual
PRODTABLE Symbol TABLE | Table reference for positive flow

performance. Option for supporting
coning. The table variables must be
given at reservoir conditions.
QMAX RealList Maximum flow in Vogels and

(Sm3/s) Normalized Backpressure inflow
equation.
RESEXT RealList Reservoir extension.

(m)
ROGST Real [-1.0] Gas density at standard conditions.

(kg/Sm3) By default value from PVT table is
used.
ROLST Real [-1.0] Oil density at standard conditions. By

(kg/Sm3) default value from PVT table is used.
SKIND RealList Turbulent non-darcy skin. Normally

(1/Sm3/s) given in (1/MMSCF/d).
SKINS RealList Mechanical damage skin.
STEAMFRACTION RealList (-) [-1.0] Fraction of total mass of H2O

component in the gas phase. By
default (=-1), the mass of H2O
temperature is greater than the
saturation temperature, otherwise,
the mass of H2O component is
distributed between the gas phase
and the water phase according to the
vapor pressure of H2O in the gas
phase. A list of both positive and
TIME RealList (s) [0.0] Time series when the reservoir

conditions are to be changed. Note
that the value actually used by the
program is interpolated between the
values specified by the time table.
TOTALWATERFRACTION RealList (-) [-1.0] Mass fraction of total water in the in

the total fluid mixture of the reservoir.
With a value of –1, the total water
Either this key or WATERFRACTION
can be specified.
VISGRES Real (N- [-1] Viscosity of gas reservoir conditions.

used.
- 486 -
Reference manual
VISLRES Real (N- [-1] Viscosity of oil reservoir conditions.

used.
WATDIS Real (m) Distance water front has to travel

before it reaches the well bore. This
key can only be used if water option
is available. Non-zero values are
ignored for two-phase simulations,
even if the water option is available.
Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
WATERCUT RealList (-) [-1.0] Watercut at standard conditions.

With a value of -1.0 the total water
WATERFRACTION RealList (-) Mass fraction of free water in the

total flow mixture of the reservoir.
Either this key or
TOTALWATERFRACTION can be
specified. For outflow, this key is
ignored if GASFRACTION<0 (the
water fraction in the source section is
used).
WATINJ RealList Linear injectivity index for water

WATPLIMIT Real (Pa) Pressure at which the water front will

conditions. This key can only be
Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
WAXFRACTION RealList [1.0] Scaling factor for determining the

amount of wax forming components
relative to HC mixture. The value
must be in the range [0,1]. 1 means
that the amount of wax forming
components is equal to the values
WAXDEPOSITION=ON under the
OPTIONS keyword and access to
the wax deposition module.
WFRTC Real (s) Time constant for the water front

movement. This key can only be
Requires
PRODOPTION=TABULAR.
- 487 -
OLGA User manual
WGR RealList [-1.0] Water-gas ratio. By default, WGR

(Sm3/Sm3) from the PVT table is used.
ZFACT Real [1] Gas compressibility factor.
SHAPE (on Library)
This keyword describes the external contour of a material. The type of the shape can be one of the
following: CIRCLE, ELLIPSE, RECTANGLE,POLYGON. The material inside the shape is being described
with the MATERIAL keyword. The shape keyword is being used for solid bundles.
LABEL String [SHAPE] Name of shape.
MATERIAL Symbol MATERIAL | Name/label of solid inside the shape.
RADIUS Real (m) Radius of the circle.
TYPE Symbol <None> | CIRCLE | Type of shape. CIRCLEs are automatically

RECTANGLE | POLYGON | placed in the origin.
X_LOWER_LEFT Real (m) x-coordinate of the lower left corner of the

rectangle.
X_UPPER_RIGHT Real (m) x-coordinate of the upper right corner of the

rectangle.
XPOINTS RealList x-coordinates of the polygon points. Polygon

(m) points have to be specified counter clockwise.
Y_LOWER_LEFT Real (m) y-coordinate of the lower left corner of the

rectangle.
Y_UPPER_RIGHT Real (m) y-coordinate of the upper right corner of the

rectangle.
YPOINTS RealList y-coordinates of the polygon points. Polygon

(m) points have to be specified counter clockwise.
- 488 -
Reference manual
TABLE (on Library)
This statement defines a function in tabular form either valve sizing coefficient or well flow parameters.
INJECTIONPRESSURE Real (Pa) Injection pressure at which the

GLV curve is defined.
LABEL String [TABLE] Table label.
LOOKUP Symbol ON | [OFF] Turn on look-up function.
OPENING Real (-) Define the opening for which

DELTAP-CV relationship is
valid. Instead of defining one
OPEN-CV table for a valve, you
can instead define a list of
DELTAP-CV tables, and the CV
for the valve is found by
interpolating w.r.t. both DELTAP
and OPENING. This
functionality is only valid for
valves with PHASE=LIQUID.
POINT RealList Define the list of values of both

independent and dependent
variables in the table (x1, y1, x2,
y2, ...).
TABLE Symbol TABLE | Table where

XLOOKUPVARIABLE input is
sampled.
XLOOKUPVARIABLE Symbol <None> | XVAR | [YVAR] Name of x variable
XVARIABLE SymbolList NOTGIVEN | OPEN | DELTAP | Independent variable name.

(ValueUnitPair) LEVEL | Enter a unit (recommended).
PRODUCTIONPRESSURE |
MASSFLOW | ELEVATION |
DISTANCE | LENGTH |
YVARIABLE SymbolList NOTGIVEN | CV | FLOW | Dependent variable name. Enter

(ValueUnitPair) GASFL | LIQFL | PILIQ | a unit (recommended).
WATFR | OILTC | GASTC |
WATTC | STDGASFLOW |
VOLUME | FRACTION |
TAMBIENT | HAMBIENT |
VELOCITY |
- 489 -
OLGA User manual
TIMESERIES (on Library)
The TIMESERIES keyword is a generic function of time. This means that it can be used for different
physical properties. There is a built in sine function, normal point series can be used, and in addition a
combination of these are possible. The time series functionality is implemented for ambient temperature,
soil temperature and radiation.
AMPLITUDE Real Amplitude of the sine function
COMBINETYPE Symbol <None> | This key determines how the time series in SERIESREF
SEQUENTIAL | are combined. When using SEQUENTIAL, the time series
[ADDITIVE] are combined in sequence according to the order in which
they are defined. The transition from one to the next is
defined in the keys TRANSITIONTIME and TRANSITION.
If ADDITIVE is used, the values are simply added.
FACTOR RealList [1] Scaling factor for each time series in SERIESREF. If this
key is not given, a factor of 1 is used.
INTERPOLATION Symbol <None> | STEP | Type of interpolation between each point in time.
[LINEAR]
LABEL String [TIMESERIES] Label of timeseries
PERIOD Real (s) The time it takes for the sine function to start repeating
itself.
PERIODIC Symbol <None> | ON | If this key is set to ON, the function will be repeated. If the
[OFF] first and last value of the function are equal, the function
will be smooth. If PERIODIC = OFF, the last value will be
used for the remainder of the simulation when the time
exceeds the defined range.
SERIES RealList Series of function values at corresponding times defined

in key TIME
SERIESREF SymbolList List of TIMESERIES labels to be used. Note that circular

references are not allowed.
TIME RealList Points in time for every given value in the key SERIES
(s)
TIME0 Real (s) [0] This key is used to define the phase shift of the sine
function. If it is set to a quarter period, a cosine function is
created.
TRANSITION Symbol <None> | STEP | Type of transition from one time series in SERIESREF to
[LINEAR] the next.
- 490 -
Reference manual
TRANSITIONTIME RealList This key is used to determine the points in time when the
(s) transition from one time series in SERIESREF to the next
occur. If PERIODIC = ON, the difference between the first
and last point is used to determine the period of the
function.
TYPE Symbol <None> | Option for type of time series.

POINTS |
COMBINE |
[SINE]
TRACERFEED (on Library)
This statement defines a feed of tracer, for instance a feed of kinetic hydrate inhibitor or corrosion inhibitor.
When used for tracking a tracer with aging effect, a distribution in age groups may be chosen, otherwise
the key AGING should be set to OFF. The tracer mass, residence time and age are tracked through the
pipeline system. Tracers are, however, assumed to be present in such small concentrations that they do
not influence the hydraulics. TRACERFEEDs may be referenced in a SOURCE or MASSFLOW node. To
use TRACERFEED, the key TRACERTRACKING must be set to ON under the OPTIONS keyword.
AGEBOUNDARIES RealList Boundaries of age groups [s]. N AGEBOUNDARIES give N+1

(s) age groups, one below the lowest boundary, one above the
highest boundary, and N-1 groups bounded by the N
boundaries.
AGING Symbol <None> | ON | Switch for activating aging effect on.

[OFF]
CARRIERPHASE Symbol <None> | GAS Carrying phase of the inhibitor. KHI will not follow any
| OIL | vaporization to the gas phase. Gas/liquid phase transfer will
[WATER] not affect the KHI amounts in the carrying phase, only the
concentrations.
HIGHLOWBOUND Real (-) [0.0] Age output variables are set to zero if (tracer mass)/(tracer
mass + carrier phase mass) of the requested feed/age group
is lower than this value and the ratio hasn't been above
HIGHLOWBOUND since it was lower than LOWLOWBOUND.
LABEL String [TFEED] Tracer feed label.
LOWLOWBOUND Real (-) [0.0] Age output variables are set to zero if (tracer mass)/(tracer
mass + carrier phase mass) of the requested feed/age group
is lower than this value.
- 491 -
OLGA User manual
UDDISPERSION (on Library)
This keyword is used for combinations of user defined dispersions (or dispersions in dispersions). An
example is the combination of hydrates and water in a hydrate slurry. One user defined dispersion should
be defined for each such combination. The user defined phases to be included must be listed under
UDPHASES.
PREDEFPHASES is used to include one or more of the built in phases gas, oil and water.
LABEL String [UDDISPERSION] Name dispersion phase
PREDEFPHASES SymbolList GAS | OIL | WATER | List of predefined phases
UDPHASES SymbolList List of User Defined (UD) phases
UDPHASE (on Library)
UDPHASE is the basic building block for defining and tracking new user defined phases. The user defined
phase could be, for example, a type of sand, asphaltenes, wax or hydrate slurry.
TYPE is limited to PARTICLE (solid dispersion).
The value of the HEATCAPACITY is used for thermal calculations.
PARTDIAMETER defines the particle diameter of the user defined phase.
PARTDENSITY is the density of the user defined phase.
HEATCAPACITY Real (J/kg-C) [0.0] Thermal capacity of the new phase.
LABEL String [UDPHASE] User Defined Phase label.
PARTDENSITY Real (kg/m3) Density of the particles.
PARTDIAMETER Real (mm) Diameter of the particles.
TYPE Symbol [PARTICLE] Type of phase. Currently only particle (solid).
WALL (on Library)
This statement specifies the wall data for pipes. In the wall statement the user specifies the wall layer
geometry and the name of the wall. These data are required if the TEMPERATURE option is "WALL" or
"FASTWALL" in OPTIONS. The user also specifies the required data if the walls are to be heated. Heated
walls can only be used together with TEMPERATURE = WALL.
- 492 -
Reference manual
The pipe wall may consist of different material layers, specified by the keys "MATERIAL" and
"THICKNESS". Each material layer can be divided into sub layers either by specifying each sub layer as a
new material layer or by automaticdiscretizationof the material layers by the use of the key
"DISCRETIZATION".
Heat can be provided to a user specified wall layer in each wall. Constant heat or heat varying with time.
Each wall in OLGA can contain only one heat source, that is, the heat per unit length supplied to the wall is
constant along the pipe having this specific wall. The heat sources may vary along the pipelines by
specifying different walls along the line. A combination of walls having constant power supply and no
power supplied at all can be specified in the same OLGA case.
CONTROLLERLABEL Symbol PIDCONTROLLER | Name of controller for electric

ASCCONTROLLER | heating
PSVCONTROLLER |
MANUALCONTROLLER |
OVERRIDECONTROLLER |
SELECTORCONTROLLER |
CASCADECONTROLLER |
ESDCONTROLLER |
TABLECONTROLLER |
SWITCHCONTROLLER |
ALGEBRAICCONTROLLER |
SCALERCONTROLLER |
DISCRETIZATION SymbolList [OFF] Switch on or off auto-

discretization for each wall
material layer.
ELASTIC Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] Calculate the effect of

contraction/expansion of wall in
pressure equation
ELECTRICHEAT Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] Switch electric heating on or off.
ERATIOMIN Real (-) [0.1] Cut off ratio for material elasticity
in adjacent wall layers. If the
Young's modulus of the material
in a wall layer is less than
ERATIOMIN times the Young's
modulus of the material in the
inside wall layer, this and all
subsequent layers will be
ignored in the calculation of the
total wall elasticity.
INNERDIAMETER Real (m) Pipe's inner diameter.
- 493 -
OLGA User manual
KAPPA Real Radial flexibility of pipe (increase

(1/Pa) in area for a unit change in
pressure relative to area of
pipe). This key can be used to
override the value calculated by
OLGA. If this key is not given,
OLGA will calculate the flexibility
based on the pipe wall geometry
and Young's modulus of
elasticity (EMOD) of the
materials.
LABEL String [WALL] Label of the wall.
MATERIAL SymbolList Names of the materials that

constitutes the wall layers.
MAXNOLAYERS IntegerList Maximum number of sub-layers

allowed for each of the layers.
MAXRATIO RealList (-) [2] Maximum ratio of outer to inner

radius of sub-layers.
POWER RealList Power per unit length for the

(W/m) electric heating time series.
POWERCONTROL Symbol <None> | ON | [OFF] Switch power control on or off.
POWERMAX Real Max. power per unit length for

(W/m) electric heating if it is restricted
by a control system.
THICKNESS RealList Thickness of each wall layer.

(m)
TIME RealList [0.0] Time series when POWER is to

(s) be modified.
WALLAYER Integer Wall layer for electric heating.
Name Description
INPSIG
- 494 -
Reference manual
Output
OUTPUT (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines the time intervals for when the variables defined in OUTPUTDATA is reported. The
information is saved as an output file (*.out) which can be opened in a text editor.
It is possible to specify either time points for output (TIME) or a time interval for output (DTOUT). It is also
possible to specify different time intervals for output using a combination of TIME and DTOUT.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
COLUMNS Integer [4] Number of variable columns per page. Must not be greater than 6.
DTOUT RealList Time interval(s) between subsequent printings of output. The time
(s) interval is changed at the times specified in TIME. If TIME is not
specified or only contains one value, only one value must be given for
DTOUT. This value is used throughout the entire simulation.
TIME RealList [0.0] Instants in time when the plot interval is changed.
(s)
WRITEFILE Symbol <None> | Enable plotting to file

OFF | [ON]
OUTPUTDATA (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines the variables to be printed to the output file (*.out).Only the global variables are
available on this level.
FLOWLAYER SymbolList ALL | GAS | OIL | WATER | Flowing layers

BED | WALL |
VARIABLE SymbolList List of variable names to be printed.

(ValueUnitPair) Units may be specified.
PLOT (on CaseLevel)
The graphical presentation of results can be used to understand the calculated state in the pipeline. You
can also use the ANIMATE keyword to present some data.
- 495 -
OLGA User manual
Both the trend plot file and the profile plot file consist of a heading and the time and variables specified
with the keyword statement TREND and PROFILE in the input file.
Both the trend plot file and the profile plot file consist of a heading and the time and variables specified
with the keyword statement TREND and PROFILE in the input file (extension inp).

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
DTPLOT RealList (s) Time interval between subsequent printouts of the plot
variables.
TIME RealList (s) [0.0] Instants in time when the plot interval is changed.
VARIABLE SymbolList List of variable names to be plotted. Units may be included

(ValueUnitPair) in the list. Note: Variables from different groups can be
defined on the same line.
WRITEFILE Symbol <None> | OFF Enable plotting to file

| [ON]
PROFILE (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines either time points (TIME) or a time interval (DTPLOT) for the profile plot variables.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
DTPLOT RealList Time interval between subsequent printouts to the profile plot file. As
(s) a default, the profile plot is divided into 5 profiles. i.e. (ENDTIME-
STARTTIME)/5.
DTTIME RealList [0.0] Points in time when the plot interval is changed.
(s)
TIME RealList Instants in time when data is written to the profile plot file.
(s)
WRITEFILE Symbol <None> | OFF Enable plotting to file

| [ON]
- 496 -
Reference manual
PROFILEDATA (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines profile plot variables along the pipeline at specified time points. flowpath variables
defined on this level will be reported for all flowpaths.
For available profile variables see the Output Variables section.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]


OIL |
WATER |
BED | WALL
|
LAYER IntegerList Wall layer numbers for plotting of wall temperatures. Layer
no. 1 is the innermost one.
UDVARIABLES SymbolList List of user-defined variables to be plotted. Write ALL to plot

all variables defined in the PlugIn dll.
VARIABLE SymbolList List of variable names to be plotted. Units may be specified.

(ValueUnitPair)
SERVERDATA (on CaseLevel)
- 497 -
OLGA User manual
More than one server data statement can be specified for each caselevel. The DTPLOT can differ from
statement to statement, meaning that the plotting frequency can vary between different variables.

BED | WALL |
VARIABLE SymbolList List of variable names to be plotted.

TREND (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines the time interval for trend plotting. The time intervals may be given as single time
interval (DTPLOT), directly as a set of time points (TIME) or as a set of time intervals changing at specified
time points (combination of DTPLOT and TIME).

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
DTPLOT RealList Time interval between subsequent trend variable printouts. DTPLOT
(s) should only be given once in the input file, if given more than once,
OLGA will use the last value given. As a default, the trend plot is
divided into 100 data points, i.e. (ENDTIME-STARTIME)/100.
NPLOT IntegerList Number of data points. A list of NPLOT values refers to the time
points given in TIME, i.e., the sample period will be DTIME/NPLOT.
TIME RealList [0.0] Instants in time when the plot interval is changed.
(s)
WRITEFILE Symbol <None> | Enable plotting to file

OFF | [ON]
- 498 -
Reference manual
TRENDDATA (on CaseLevel)
This statement defines the trend data to be plotted. A trend plot is a time series plot for a specified
variable. Only global and branch variables are available on this level.

BED | WALL |
HYKPID Integer Array element index of HYKPLIST.
VARIABLE SymbolList List of variable names to be plotted.

Submodelling
FLOWIN (on Submodel)
The FLOWIN keyword specifies the input and output variable names (OPC item names for the source) that
are used when coupling a FLOWIN keyword to a FLOWOUT keyword.
For a FLOWIN/FLOWOUT connection, the input keys in a FLOWIN keyword are coupled to the output
keys in a FLOWOUT keyword. The output keys in a FLOWIN keyword are coupled to the input keys in a
FLOWOUT keyword.
CMG String [CMG] Source tagname in the module representing the

linked namespace item in the submodel. Mass in
gas phase for each component (output).
CMLTHL String [CMLTHL] Source tagname in the module representing the

oil phase for each component (output).
CMLTWT String [CMLTWT] Source tagname in the module representing the

water phase for each component (output).
DGGDPB String [DGGDP] Source tagname in the module representing the

linked namespace item in the submodel. Gas
phase mass flow rate sensitivity with respect to
pressure for each component (input).
- 499 -
OLGA User manual
DGLTHLDPB String [DGLTHLDP] Source tagname in the module representing the

linked namespace item in the submodel. Oil
phase mass flow sensitivity with respect to
pressure (input).
DGLTWTDPB String [DGLTWTDP] Source tagname in the module representing the

linked namespace item in the submodel. Water
pressure (input).
DPDGG String [DPDGGS] Source tagname in the module representing the

pressure (output).
DPDGLTHL String [DPDGLTHLS] Source tagname in the module representing the

linked namespace item in the submodel. Pressure
sensitivity with respect to total oil phase mass flow
(output).
DPDGLTWT String [DPDGLTWTS] Source tagname in the module representing the

sensitivity with respect to total water phase mass
flow (output).
GASCMASSFLOW String [GASCMASSFLOW] Source tagname in the module representing the

phase mass flow rate for each component (input).
LABEL String Label to identify this group of FLOWIN tags.
OILCMASSFLOW String [OILCMASSFLOW] Source tagname in the module representing the

linked namespace item in the submodel. Oil
PRESSURE String [PRESSURE] Source tagname in the module representing the

(input).
PT String [PT] Source tagname in the module representing the

(output).
SOURCE String Source object in OLGA model where the FLOWIN

enters into the OLGA pipeline network.
TEMPERATURE String [TEMPERATURE] Source tagname in the module representing the

linked namespace item in the submodel.
Temperature (input).
TM String [TM] Source tagname in the module representing the

linked namespace item in the submodel.
Temperature (output).
- 500 -
Reference manual
TYPE Symbol CUSTOM | The type of flow terminal the group represents.
[MASSFLOWSOURCE] MASSFLOWSOURCE is used to connect to a
corresponding PRESSURENODE in a FLOWOUT
keyword. With the CUSTOM type, you can map
up custom tags in the OPC namespace and use
these for inputs and outputs.
WATERCMASSFLOW String [WATERCMASSFLOW] Source tagname in the module representing the

linked namespace item in the submodel. Water
FLOWOUT (on Submodel)
The FLOWOUT keyword specifies the input and output variable names (OPC item names for the pressure
boundary) that are used when coupling a FLOWOUT to a FLOWIN keyword.
For a FLOWIN/FLOWOUT connection the input keys in a FLOWIN keyword are coupled to the output keys
in a FLOWOUT keyword. Output keys in a FLOWIN keyword are coupled to the input keys in a FLOWOUT
keyword.
CGG String [CGGBOU] Source tagname in the module representing the linked
namespace item in the submodel. Gas phase mass flow for
each component (output).
CGLTHL String [CGLTHLBOU] Source tagname in the module representing the linked
namespace item in the submodel. Oil phase mass flow for
each component (output).
CGLTWT String [CGLTWTBOU] Source tagname in the module representing the linked
namespace item in the submodel. Water phase mass flow
for each component (output).
DGGDPB String [DGGDPB] Source tagname in the module representing the linked
namespace item in the submodel. Gas phase mass flow
sensitivity with respect to pressure (output).
DGLTHLDPB String [DGLTHLDPB] Source tagname in the module representing the linked
namespace item in the submodel. Oil phase mass flow
DGLTWTDPB String [DGLTWTDPB] Source tagname in the module representing the linked
namespace item in the submodel. Water phase mass flow
DPDGG String [DPDGG] Source tagname in the module representing the linked
namespace item in the submodel. Pressure sensitivity with
respect to total gas phase mass flow (input).
- 501 -
OLGA User manual
DPDGLTHL String [DPDGLTHL] Source tagname in the module representing the linked
respect to total oil phase mass flow (input).
DPDGLTWT String [DPDGLTWT] Source tagname in the module representing the linked
respect to total water phase mass flow (input).
GASCMASS String [GASCMASS] Source tagname in the module representing the linked
namespace item in the submodel. Normalized gas phase
masses for each component (input).
LABEL String Label to identify this group of FLOWOUT tags.
NODE String Node object in OLGA model where the FLOWOUT appears
in the OLGA pipeline network.
OILCMASS String [OILCMASS] Source tagname in the module representing the linked
namespace item in the submodel. Normalized oil phase
PRESSURE String [PRESSURE] Source tagname in the module representing the linked
namespace item in the submodel. Pressure (input).
PT String [PTBOU] Source tagname in the module representing the linked

namespace item in the submodel. Pressure (output).
TEMPERATURE String [TEMPERATURE] Source tagname in the module representing the linked
namespace item in the submodel. Temperature (input).
TM String [TMBOU] Source tagname in the module representing the linked

namespace item in the submodel. Temperature (output).
TYPE Symbol CUSTOM | The type of flow terminal the group represents.
[PRESSURENODE] PRESSURENODE is used to connect to a corresponding
MASSFLOWSOURCE in a FLOWIN keyword. With the
CUSTOM type, you can map up custom tags in the OPC
namespace and use these for inputs and outputs.
WATERCMASS String [WATERCMASS] Source tagname in the module representing the linked
namespace item in the submodel. Normalized water phase
SIGNALIN (on Submodel)
INTERPOLATION Symbol STEPWISE | Interpolation type between submodels. LINEAR: linear

[LINEAR] interpolation. STEPWISE: No interpolation
- 502 -
Reference manual
LABEL String Label to identify this group of SIGNALIN tags.
MANUALCONTROLLER String Label of the manual controller. The setpoint of the

manual controller is modified
SIGNALOUT (on Submodel)
CONTROLLER String Controller label
LABEL String Label to identify this group of SIGNALOUT tags.
TRANSMITTER String Transmitter label
TYPE Symbol CONTROLLER | The type of output signal terminal the group
TRANSMITTER | represents: CONTROLLER or TRANSMITTER
VARIABLE Symbol 256 | Name of controller variable to be transmitted.

(ValueUnitPair) Note: if the unit is not specified, SI units will be
used.
Submodel
CASEFILE String For a LOCAL OLGA submodel: The case

file defining the submodel to start up and
connect to.
CPURATIO Real [0] The ratio of total CPU power to utilize for
the submodel. This is only effective for
OLGA submodels and with LOCATION set
as INTERNAL or LOCAL. The value 1
means use all the available CPU power.
The value 0 causes the CPU power to be
evenly distributed among local OLGA
submodels. If the sum of all CPURATIOs
over all submodels differs from one, the
given ratios will be normalized and the
resulting ratios are used.
DEBUGOPTIONS SymbolList <None> | Various debug options that can be set to

KEEP_CONSOLE_WINDOW | help trace down a problem.
TRACE_MESSAGES | [OFF]
- 503 -
OLGA User manual
ENABLED Symbol <None> | NO | [YES] Enable or disable the submodel with this
key. Disabled submodels will not start and
signals or flowin/flowouts will not be
connected.
INFO String General information about the submodel.

This is for information purposes only.
LABEL String Network component label. The label is used

to identify the submodel in OLGA. It is tied
to a module previously loaded into the
namespace.
SCHEDULING Symbol <None> | OFF | [ON] States whether the submodel is time
controlled by a scheduler or if it is a free-
running, autonomous model.
TYPE Symbol OTHER | [OLGA] The type of submodel this is. Use OLGA for
OLGA submodels, use OTHER for
submodels that are not OLGA. Note: for
OLGA 5 submodels OTHER must be used.
SUBMODELCONTROL (on Submodel)
The SUBMODELCONTROL keyword specifies input and output OPC items that are required to enable the
SCHEDULER keyword to schedule the time integration of the submodel. The required keys fall into these
categories: Input, Output, and Commands.
The output items are used by the scheduler to retrieve information from the submodel. The information
includes system settings in the model, model state, model time and time step etc. One of the outputs is
used to verify consistency in components between different submodels that are connected by
FLOWIN/FLOWOUT specifications.
The input items are used by the scheduler to control the simulation progress and speed.
The commands are used to dispatch specific commands to the submodel, such as snapping, pausing and
stopping.
In an OLGA – OLGA coupled submodel system, the SUBMODELCONTROL keyword is automatically

configured and should not be specified.
COMPONENTS String Source tagname for the item

representing the list of components
in the module.
DELETESNAP String [DeleteSnap] Source tagname for the item

representing the delete snap
command in the module.
- 504 -
Reference manual
DELETESNAPENFORCEPAUSE String [DeleteSnap.EnforcePause] Source tagname for the item

representing the delete snap
enforcepause parameter in the
module.
DELETESNAPFILE String [DeleteSnap.File] Source tagname for the item

representing the delete snap file
parameter in the module.
EXTERNALCLOCK String [ExternalClock] Source tagname for the item

representing the external clock in
the module.
INITTIME String [INITTIME] Source tagname for the item

representing the simulation start-up
time in the module.
LASTMESSAGE String [LastMessage] Source tagname for the item

representing the last message in
the module.
LOADSNAP String [LoadSnap] Source tagname for the item

representing the load snap
LOADSNAPENFORCEPAUSE String [LoadSnap.EnforcePause] Source tagname for the item

representing the load snap
module.
LOADSNAPFILE String [LoadSnap.File] Source tagname for the item

representing the load snap file
MAXSPEED String [MAXSPEED] Source tagname for the item

representing the maximum speed
possible in the module.
NCLOCKS String [NCLOCKS] Source tagname for the item

representing the number of
(external) clock updates received
NSYNCHOPS String [NSynchOps] Source tagname for the item

representing the number of time
discontinuities detected
PAUSE String [PAUSE] Source tagname for the item

representing the pause command
in the module.
SAVESNAP String [SaveSnap] Source tagname for the item

representing the save snap
- 505 -
OLGA User manual
SAVESNAPENFORCEPAUSE String [SaveSnap.EnforcePause] Source tagname for the item

representing the save snap
module.
SAVESNAPFILE String [SaveSnap.File] Source tagname for the item

representing the save snap file
SETTIME String [SetTime] Source tagname for the item

representing the set time command
in the module.
SETTIMEENFORCEPAUSE String [SaveSnap.EnforcePause] Source tagname for the item

representing the set time
module.
SETTIMETIME String [SetTime.Time] Source tagname for the item

representing the set time time
SIMTIME String [SIMTIME] Source tagname for the item

representing the current simulation
time (the OLGA SIMTIME output
variable) in the module.
SIMULATIONSPEED String [SIMULATIONSPEED] Source tagname for the item

representing the simulation speed
in the module.
STATE String [State] Source tagname for the item

representing the state in the
module.
STOP String [Stop] Source tagname for the item

representing the stop command in
the module.
TIME String [TIME] Source tagname for the item

representing the time in the
module.
TIMESTEP String [HT] Source tagname for the item

representing the timestep (HT) in
the module.
- 506 -
Reference manual
SUBMODELTAG (on Submodel)
The SUBMODELTAG keyword can be used to map specific submodel namespace tags to the scheduler
namespace for easy lookup.
INTERPOLATION Symbol <None> | INTERPOLATE | The interpolation type to use for this
CURRENTVALUE | tag.
LABEL String Label to identify the tag in the

submodel.
SOURCETAG String The source tagname to map up in the

submodel.
ProcessEquipment
PhaseSplitNode
The phase split node behaves as something in-between the internal network node and the network
separator. There are no level controls and separator efficiencies included, but the phase distributions for
the outgoing branches can be specified.
The phase split node has an arbitrary number of inlets/outlets. It has six different types of terminals: GAS,
OIL, WATER, LIQUID, DRYGAS and MIXTURE.
Terminal = GAS - gas +droplets
Terminal = OIL - oil bulk
Terminal = WATER - water bulk
Terminal = LIQUID - oil and water bulk
Terminal = DRYGAS - gas only
Terminal = MIXTURE - all phases within the node itself(default)
The following connections are defined:
 MIXTURE_1, … MIXTURE _N inlets and outlets

 GAS_1, … GAS_N outlets
 OIL_1, …OIL_N outlets
 WATER_1, …WATER_N outlets
 LIQUID_1, ... LIQUID_N outlets
 DRYGAS _1, … DRYGAS _N outlets
- 507 -
OLGA User manual
DRILLINGFLUID Symbol DRILLINGFLUID Refer to the drilling fluid defined by the keyword
| DRILLINGFLUID. Requires access to the Wells
module.
FEEDNAME SymbolList Label of feeds feeding to terminal nodes. Requires

COMPOSITIONAL=ON or BLACKOIL under the
OPTIONS keyword.
FEEDVOLFRACTION RealList (-) Volume fraction of each feed given in FEEDNAME for
choke model (only for Blackoil model).
FLUID Symbol PVTData | Label or number of PVT table to apply for the specific
branch. If a keyword based pvt-file is used, FLUID
must be the same as the LABEL given in the pvt-file,
i.e., numbering is not valid for this format.
INFO String General information about the PhaseSplitNode. For

information purposes only.
INHIBFRACTION Real (-) [0.0] Mass fraction of inhibitor in the water phase.
LABEL String Network component label (if nothing is given the NC

tag is used).

default values for the density and diameter of the
particles are used (see documentation of
PARTICLES keyword).
PRESSURE Real (Pa) Initial pressure when using INITIALCONDITIONS.
STEAMFRACTION Real (-) [-1.0] Fraction of total mass of H2O component in the gas
phase. By default (=-1), the mass of H2O component
is in the gas phase if the temperature is greater than
the saturation temperature, otherwise, the mass of
H2O component is distributed between the gas phase
and the water phase according to the vapor pressure
of H2O in the gas phase. A list of both positive and
TEMPERATURE Real (C) Initial temperature when using INITIALCONDITIONS.
- 508 -
Reference manual
VOIDFRACTION Real (-) Gas volume fraction when using

INITIALCONDITIONS.. Specify –1 for OLGA to use
the equilibrium values from the fluid property tables.
VOLUME Real (m3) [-1] Volume of PhaseSplitNode. If specified volume is less

than or equal to 0, OLGA will estimate the volume
(see User's manual).
WATERCUT Real (-) [0.0] Initial watercut when using INITIALCONDITIONS.
X Real (m) [0] x-coordinate of node in network. Used for 3D

graphics only.
Y Real (m) [0] y-coordinate (vertical axis) of node in network. Used

for 3D graphics only.
Z Real (m) [0] z-coordinate of node in network. Used for 3D

graphics only.
Separator
The network separator model in OLGA is not intended to accurately model separation phenomena, but is
meant to include the influence of a separator on transient pipeline dynamics.
The network separators have arbitrary number of outlets. Two phase separators must have connected at
least one gas-outlet and one oil-outlet to pipes. Three phase separators must have connected at least one
gas-outlet, one oil-outlet and one water-outlet to pipes.
The user can define the separation efficiency (gas/liquid and oil/water), and set critical levels for oil and
water drainage.
Model description and user guidelines:
1. Separator type: The separator may be horizontal or vertical, two-phase of three-phase.

2. Pipelines downstream of network separators. For a two phase separator, the following outlets are
defined:
 GAS_1, .., GAS_N outlets (Use Gas_2 to model flare outlet)
 OIL_1, .., OIL_N outlets (Use OIL_2 to model emergency outlet)
For a three-phase separator, the following outlets are defined:
 GAS_1, .., GAS_N outlets

 OIL_1, .., OIL_N outlets
 WATER_1, .., WATER_N outlets
3. Valves. The network separators have no internal valves. All valves must be defined on the outgoing
branches, using the VALVE keyword.
4. Levels used by a network separator. The separator levels are controlled by the valves and controllers
in the outlet branches. Moreover, the water level limit for when the water will be drained together with
the oil can be specified by the keys: HHWATHOLDUP or HHWATLEVEL
- 509 -
OLGA User manual
DIAMETER Real (m) Separator diameter.
module.
EFFHIGH Real (-) [0.995] Liquid volume fraction when the efficiency goes
toward zero and the separator is treated as a
normal section.
EFFICIENCY Real (-) [1.0] Gas/liquid separation efficiency. (One minus the
volume fraction of liquid droplets in the gas outlet
stream.)
EFFLOW Real (-) [0.995] Liquid volume fraction when the efficiency is
reduced.
FEEDNAME SymbolList Label of feeds used to initialize separator.

Requires COMPOSITIONAL=ON or BLACKOIL
under the OPTIONS keyword.

FEEDNAME for choke model (only for Blackoil
model).
separator. If a keyword based pvt-file is used,
FLUID must be the same as the LABEL given in
the pvt-file, that is, numbering is not valid for this
format.
HHWATHOLDUP Real (-) Water hold-up upper limit. If the water hold-up
exceeds this value water will be drained together
with oil through the oil drain.
HHWATLEVEL Real (m) Water level upper limit. If the water level exceeds
this value water will be drained together with oil
through the oil drain.
INITOILLEVEL Real (m) The initial oil level.
INITPRESSURE Real (Pa) Initial pressure.
INITTEMPERATURE Real (C) Initial temperature.
- 510 -
Reference manual
INITWATLEVEL Real (m) [0.0] The initial water level.
LABEL String Network component label (if nothing is given the

NC tag is used).
LENGTH Real (m) Separator length.
LEVELTABLE Symbol TABLE | Label of the table where the relation between
level (height) in the separator and volume of the
separator is given.
OILTCONST Real (s) [0.0] Time constant for separation of oil from water.
ORIENTATION Symbol <None> | Orientation of the separator..

VERTICAL |
HORIZONTAL |

default values for the density and diameter of the
particles are used (see documentation of
PARTICLES keyword).
PHASE Symbol <None> | TWO | Number of phases separated in the separator.

THREE |
SURFACEAREA Real (m2) Surface area of the separator.
TAMBIENT RealList Ambient temperature.

(C)
TIME RealList (s) [0.0] Time series for specified boundary values.
UVALUE Real [0.0] Overall heat transfer coefficient given by user

(W/m2-C) based on inner pipe diameter.
WATTCONST Real (s) [0.0] Time constant for separation of water from oil.
X Real (m) [0] x-coordinate of separator in network. Used for 3D

graphics only
Y Real (m) [0] y-coordinate (vertical axis) of separator in

network. Used for 3D graphics only
Z Real (m) [0] z-coordinate of separator in network. Used for 3D

graphics only
- 511 -
OLGA User manual
BitNode

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
ANNULUSLIST SymbolList List of annuli that compose the drill path.
EFFICIENCY RealList (-) [0.1] The fraction of the drill string power required to cut rock.

FRACTIONTOBIT RealList (-) [0.4] The fraction of heat generated at bit position during
drilling, the rest of the heat is distributed along the drill
string.
INITBITMD Real (m) Initial position of bit (measured depth from stand node).
Default = INITDRILLEDMD
INITDRILLEDMD Real (m) [0.0] Initial drilled measured depth. Default, out of hole.
LABEL String Network component label (if nothing is given the NC tag
is used).
ROP RealList Rate of penetration ( PARTICLEFLOW key on OPTIONS

(m/s) keyword should be turned on when drilling )
ROTATION RealList Rotational speed of the drill string

(rpm)
SURFACEWALLTEMP Real (C) Temperature of the drill string above the stand node.
TIME RealList (s) Time series
TORQUE RealList [0.0] Drill string torque

(Nm)
Name Description
ROP
ROTATION
TORQUE
- 512 -
Reference manual
StandNode
DRILLSTRING Symbol FLOWPATH | The reference to the flowpath of the drill string
JetPump
A Jet pump can be used to suck up fluid from a low pressure flowpath to the surface/outlet. The Jet pump
connects three flowpaths, a high pressure (power fluid) flowpath, a low pressure (suction fluid) flowpath
and an outlet flowpath where the mix of power- and suction fluid flows out. The fluids experience pressure
changes as they flow through parts of the Jet pump where the diameters change. The input keys for the
Jet pump belong to one of two groups
1. Geometry (diameters of the different parts of the Jet pump)

2. Loss Coefficients (used in the computation of pressure drop and pressure recovery)
Refer to the Model descriptions for a description of how the keys are used in the model.
DINLET Real (m) Diameter at the inlet of the power branch
DNOZZLE Real (m) Diameter of the nozzle
DOUTLET Real (m) Diameter at the outlet of the diffuser
DSUCTION Real (m) Diameter at the inlet of the suction branch
DTHROAT Real (m) Diameter of the throat
JETLOSS Real Jet loss coefficient. Range from 0 (no loss) to 1.
KDIFFUSER Real Loss coefficient for diffuser. Range from 0 (no loss) to 1.
KNOZZLE Real Loss coefficient for nozzle. Range from 0 (no loss) to 100.
KSUCTION Real Loss coefficient for suction line. Range from 0 (no loss) to 100.
KTHROAT Real Loss coefficient for throat. Range from 0 (no loss) to 100.
- 513 -
OLGA User manual
Output
PHASESPLITNODE
OUTPUTDATA (on PhaseSplitNode)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

TRANSMITTER (on PhaseSplitNode)
phase split node.
transmitter.
along the flowpath.
Name Description
OUTSIG
- 514 -
Reference manual
TRENDDATA (on PhaseSplitNode)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

plotted.

SERVERDATA (on PhaseSplitNode)
More than one server data statement can be specified for each phasesplitnode on caselevel. The DTPLOT
can differ from statement to statement, meaning that the plotting frequency can vary between different
variables.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

SEPARATOR
OUTPUTDATA (on Separator)
This statement defines the separator variables to be printed to the output file (*.out).
See Separator Output Variables on page 588 for available variables.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

- 515 -
OLGA User manual
TRANSMITTER (on Separator)
phase split node.
transmitter.
along the flowpath.
VARIABLE Symbol (ValueUnitPair) 4096 | Variable to be transmitted. Unit may be

specified.
Name Description
OUTSIG
TRENDDATA (on Separator)
This statement defines the trend data to be plotted for separators. A trend plot is a time series plot for a
specified variable.
For available variables see Separator Output Variables on page 588.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

plotted.

- 516 -
Reference manual
SERVERDATA (on Separator)
More than one server data statement can be specified for each separator on caselevel. The DTPLOT can
differ from statement to statement, meaning that the plotting frequency can vary between different
variables.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

BITNODE
OUTPUTDATA (on BitNode)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

TRANSMITTER (on BitNode)
phase split node.
transmitter.
along the flowpath.
- 517 -
OLGA User manual
Name Description
OUTSIG
TRENDDATA (on BitNode)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

plotted.

SERVERDATA (on BitNode)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

- 518 -
Reference manual
STANDNODE
OUTPUTDATA (on StandNode)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

TRANSMITTER (on StandNode)
phase split node.
transmitter.
along the flowpath.
Name Description
OUTSIG
- 519 -
OLGA User manual
TRENDDATA (on StandNode)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

plotted.

SERVERDATA (on StandNode)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

JETPUMP
OUTPUTDATA (on JetPump)
This statement defines the jet pump variables to be printed to the output file (*.out).
See Jet pump Output Variables on page 578 for available variables.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

TRANSMITTER (on JetPump)
phase split node.
- 520 -
Reference manual
transmitter.
along the flowpath.
Name Description
OUTSIG
TRENDDATA (on JetPump)
This statement defines the trend data to be plotted for Jet pumps. A trend plot is a time series plot for a
specified variable.
For available variables, see Jet pump Output Variables on page 578 .

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

plotted.

SERVERDATA (on JetPump)
More than one server data statement can be specified for each separator on caselevel. The DTPLOT can
differ from statement to statement, meaning that the plotting frequency can vary between different
variables.
- 521 -
OLGA User manual

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]

ThermalComponent
Annulus
Annulus is a network component. See ANNULUS COMPONENT for more description.
See also ANNULUS COMPONENT Keys
AMBIENTDATA (on Annulus)

along bundle length), two values (length-

(W/m-C) HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 0.0251 W/mK is used. If
HOUTEROPTION is WATER, 0.587 W/mK is

be a single value (constant along bundle length),
for each section.
- 522 -
Reference manual


(constant along bundle length) or given explicitly
for each section.
HAMBIENTTABLE Symbol TABLE | Table with mean heat transfer coefficient on outer
(W/m2-C) wall surface. Type of table determines the
WATER | OTHER |
[HGIVEN]

INTAMBIENT Real (C) Ambient temperature at the inlet of the first pipe in
a branch where interpolation is used for ambient
temperature.
INTERPOLATION Symbol <None> | LENGTH Type of interpolation used to calculate the ambient
| HORIZONTAL | temperature and outer heat transfer coefficient.
VERTICAL | Note that the INTERPOLATION key is not used in
[SECTIONWISE] TAMBIENTTABLE and HAMBIENTTABLE, as the
interpolation is given by the type of table. Also
outer heat transfer coefficient is only affected by
the INTERPOLATION key when
OUTHAMBIENT Real Overall heat transfer coefficient at the outlet of the

(W/m2-C) last pipe in a pipeline section where interpolation

(C) value (constant along bundle length) or given
- 523 -
OLGA User manual

defined in TAMBIENT or
INTAMBIENT/OUTTAMBIENT.
TAMBIENTTABLE Symbol (C) TABLE | Table with ambient temperatures. Type of table

function.

single value (constant along bundle length), two
values (length-interpolated) or given explicitly for
each section.

(N-s/m2) AIR, 1.78E-5 N-s/m2 is used. If HOUTEROPTION
is WATER, 1.40E-3 N-s/m2 is used. Input can
either be a single value (constant along bundle
length), two values (length-interpolated) or given
COMPONENT (on Annulus)
This statement defines the configuration of pipes which are bundled together and have thermal interaction.
Gas-lifted wells are typical examples, where gas is injected in the annulus between the casing and tubing
while the production fluid together with the injected gas is produced in the tubing.

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
FLOWPATH Symbol FLOWPATH Label of a FLOWPATH that resides inside the BUNDLE.
|
FROM Symbol POSITION | Label of the POSITION on the FLOWPATH where it enters the
BUNDLE.
OUTERHVALUE Real Heat transfer coefficient at the wall surface of a branch to the
(W/m2-C) bulk fluid in the carrier line. Forced/free convection will be
applied if this key is not defined.
- 524 -
Reference manual
TO Symbol POSITION | Label of the POSITION on the FLOWPATH where it exits the
BUNDLE.
XOFFSET Real (m) [0.0] The component's displacement along the x-axis relative to the
center of the bundle.
YOFFSET Real (m) [0.0] The component's displacement along the y-axis relative to the
PROFILEDATA (on Annulus)
VARIABLE SymbolList (ValueUnitPair) List of variables to be plotted.
XPOS RealList (m) List of X coordinates where the variables are plotted
YPOS RealList (m) List of Y coordinates where the variables are plotted
SERVERDATA (on Annulus)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
ABSPOSITION RealList (m) Position where the variable will be plotted. Absolute
position. Distance from bundle start position
SECTIONNUMBER IntegerList Section numbers in bundle definition where the

VARIABLE SymbolList List of variables to be plotted.

(ValueUnitPair)
- 525 -
OLGA User manual
TRENDDATA (on Annulus)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]


(ValueUnitPair)
FluidBundle
FLUIDBUNDLE is a network component. See FLUIDBUNDLE COMPONENT for details.
See also FLUIDBUNDLE COMPONENT Keys
AMBIENTDATA (on FluidBundle)


(W/m-C) HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 0.0251 W/mK is used.
If HOUTEROPTION is WATER, 0.587 W/mK is
- 526 -
Reference manual

be a single value (constant along bundle length),
for each section.


(constant along bundle length) or given explicitly
for each section.
HAMBIENTTABLE Symbol TABLE | Table with mean heat transfer coefficient on

(W/m2-C) outer wall surface. Type of table determines the
WATER | OTHER |
[HGIVEN]

INTAMBIENT Real (C) Ambient temperature at the inlet of the first pipe
in a branch where interpolation is used for
ambient temperature.

HORIZONTAL | ambient temperature and outer heat transfer
VERTICAL | coefficient. Note that the INTERPOLATION key
[SECTIONWISE] is not used in TAMBIENTTABLE and
HAMBIENTTABLE, as the interpolation is given
by the type of table. Also outer heat transfer
coefficient is only affected by the
INTERPOLATION key when HOUTEROPTION =
HGIVEN.
OUTHAMBIENT Real Overall heat transfer coefficient at the outlet of

(W/m2-C) the last pipe in a pipeline section where
interpolation is used for overall heat transfer
coefficient.
- 527 -
OLGA User manual

(C) value (constant along bundle length) or given

defined in TAMBIENT or INTAMBIENT and
OUTTAMBIENT.
TAMBIENTTABLE Symbol (C) TABLE | Table with ambient temperatures. Type of table

function.

single value (constant along bundle length), two
values (length-interpolated) or given explicitly for
each section.

(N-s/m2) AIR, 1.78E-5 N-s/m2 is used. If
HOUTEROPTION is WATER, 1.40E-3 N-s/m2 is
COMPONENT (on FluidBundle)
This keyword defines a carrier line that encloses one or several FLOWPATHS, LINES and/or
FLUIDBUNDLES. The carrier line itself must be specified as either a FLOWPATH or a LINE. The length
and elevation of each pipe section contained in the bundle must be maintained. Pipe diameters must be
constant in the axial direction. The effects of heat transfer between all the pipelines will be accounted for.
A LINE is a FLOWPATH for which simplified one-phase calculations are performed. It is activated by
choosing LINE=YES as a parameter for a FLOWPATH. FLOWPATHS must be connected to nodes when
the sub key LINE=YES. The CROSSOVER functionality must be set up explicitly with nodes of type
CROSSOVER with a specified reference pressure and boost pressure.
The outer heat transfer coefficients and the ambient temperatures used by the Fluid Bundle are the values
given for the outermost pipeline.
- 528 -
Reference manual
The outer surface heat transfer coefficient for each OLGA FLOWPATH can be calculated by the code or
specified by the user. If calculated by the code the forced/free convection on the outer surface will be taken
into account. The user can specify the outer surface heat transfer coefficient by the sub key
OUTERHVALUE.
See also FLUIDBUNDLE COMPONENT Keys
FLOWPATH Symbol FLOWPATH | Label of a FLOWPATH that resides inside the BUNDLE.
FLUIDBUNDLE Symbol FLUIDBUNDLE Label of a bundle that resides inside the BUNDLE.
|
FROM Symbol POSITION | Label of the POSITION on the FLOWPATH where it enters the
BUNDLE.
LINE Symbol FLOWPATH | Label of a line (FLOWPATH) that resides inside the BUNDLE.
OUTERHVALUE Real Heat transfer coefficient at the wall surface of a branch to the
(W/m2-C) bulk fluid in the carrier line. Forced/free convection will be
applied if this key is not defined.
TO Symbol POSITION | Label of the POSITION on the FLOWPATH where it exits the
BUNDLE.
XOFFSET Real (m) [0.0] The component's displacement along the x-axis relative to the
YOFFSET Real (m) [0.0] The component's displacement along the y-axis relative to the
SERVERDATA (on FluidBundle)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]


(ValueUnitPair)
- 529 -
OLGA User manual
TRENDDATA (on FluidBundle)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]


(ValueUnitPair)
SolidBundle
This network component stores all information that is required to configure a solid bundle. This may be
done by either editing the keywords and keys directly, or through the Bundle Editor in the GUI.
Associated keywords:
COMPONENT AMBIENTDATA TRENDDATA PROFILEDATA
Example - Buried pipeline
In the following example, a (partially) buried pipeline is modeled. The pipe is assumed to have a center
line, yc, located 25 cm below the soil surface. The air temperature is measured to be 25 °C and the soil
temperature 1 m under the ground is 20 °C. The soil temperature reading is assumed to be uninfluenced
by the presence of the pipe.
- 530 -
Reference manual
1. Start by adding a COMPONENT and associate the flowpath to this. A natural choice for the soil
surface is y = 0, so the pipe must be moved down 25 cm. This is done by setting YOFFSET = -25 cm
for this COMPONENT.
2. The soil is modeled by using a rectangular SHAPE with an associated soil MATERIAL. We assume
that the effect of the pipe on the soil temperature is negligible at a distance of approximately 1.5 m to
each side and 2 m down. The parameters for the shape then becomes: X_LOWER_LEFT = -1.5 m,
Y_LOWER_LEFT = -2 m, X_UPPER_RIGHT = 1.5 m, Y_UPPER_RIGHT = 0 m.
- 531 -
OLGA User manual
3. Finally, the ambient conditions must be specified. In this case, we can use a single AMBIENTDATA
with TYPE = SIMPLEBURIED. Above ground we have air at 25 °C, thus HOUTEROPTION = AIR and
TAMBIENT = 25 °C. We have positioned the soil surface at y = 0 m, so SOILSURFACELEVEL = 0 m.
The soil temperature is set by specifying SOILTEMPERATURE = 20 °C and SOILTEMPLEVEL = -1
m.
COMMENTS:
In this example, the OLGA WALL is in contact with both air and the solid SHAPE. Due to the potentially
large temperature difference between the top and bottom of the pipe, it can be advisable to remove some
of the outer wall layers from the OLGA WALL and use one or more SHAPES to model the wall layers. This
is done by simply creating a circular SHAPE with the outer radius of the wall layer. Note that the order of
the SHAPE COMPONENTS is important and that the wall layer COMPONENT must be defined after the
rectangular soil COMPONENT. Otherwise, the wall layer COMPONENT is hidden by the soil
COMPONENT.
The vertical boundaries of the soil above SOILTEMPLEVEL was modeled using the default NOFLUX
option for SOILVERTBOUND. This option assumes that there naturally is no heat flux across these
boundaries. However, if the boundaries are too close to the pipe, the temperature in the soil can be
overestimated. A better choice may then be to use the FIXEDTEMP option. This forces the temperature to
be equal to the SOILTEMPERATURE on these boundaries

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]
DELTAT Real Time-step in thermal calculations.

(s)
DTPLOT Real Time-step for saving thermal data.

(s)
MESHFINENESS Integer [32] The number of nodes on the largest SHAPE in the
SOLIDBUNDLE. The higher the number the finer the mesh.
Minimum value is 32 and it will always be rounded down to
nearest multiple of 32.
PLOTTING Symbol <None> | Key for turning ON/OFF detailed plot of Finite Element results in
OFF | [ON] .osi file
AMBIENTDATA (on SolidBundle)
This statement specifies the ambient conditions of bundles, which is quite similar to the HEATTRANSFER
keyword with respect to input data and axial variation. To facilitate different configurations in the cross
section plane, the ambient conditions can vary in the vertical axis as well as along the bundle axis.
The vertical variation is controlled by the key TYPE:
1. Simplified input for buried pipelines (TYPE=SIMPLEBURIED)
This option is intended to offer a simplified input for the discontinuous data encountered when
modeling buried pipelines. If TYPE=SIMPLEBURIED, only a single AMBIENTDATA may be given.
- 532 -
Reference manual
The VERTPOS key will then be inactive, while the keys SOILSURFACELEVEL,
SOILTEMPERATURE, SOILTEMPLEVEL and SOILVERTBOUND are active.
SOILSURFACELEVEL define a horizontal line, above which the ambient conditions apply (e.g.
ambient temperature and heat transfer coefficient).
The scalar SOILTEMPERATURE define the temperature at the horizontal line that intersects the
lowest point of all SHAPEs (YMIN). This will be constant along the pipeline.
Between YMIN and SOILSURFACELEVEL, the temperature at the boundaries will either be
calculated by OLGA (SOILVERTBOUND=NOFLUX) based on the assumption of no heat flux normal
to the boundaries, or set by SOILTEMPEATURE (SOILVERTBOUND=FIXEDTEMP). The latter will in
most circumstances give a rough but conservative estimate on the overall heat loss from the pipeline.
2. Detailed (TYPE=VERTICALPOINTS)
If this option is used, a set of AMBIENTDATA may be given, where each will have a key VERTPOS to
identify the vertical position to which it applies. Ambient conditions will be interpolated linearly between
each AMBIENTDATA. Conditions will be constant above/below the higher/lowest VERTPOS. A single
AMBIENTDATA with TYPE=VERTICALPOINTS results in ambient conditions that are uniform in the
cross section plane.
One important consideration is what to do when the ambient conditions are discontinuous. This may
solved by defining two AMBIENTDATA keywords positioned very close on the vertical axis. (NOTE:
only available for SOLIDBUNDLE)

(J/kg-C) HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 1005 J/KG-K is
used. If HOUTEROPTION is WATER,
3978 J/KG-K is used. Input can either be
a single value (constant along bundle
length), two values (length-interpolated) or

(W/m-C) HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 0.0251 W/mK is
0.587 W/mK is used. Input can either be a
single value (constant along bundle
DENSITY RealList Density of ambient fluid. If

(kg/m3) HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 1.217 kg/m3 is
1028.4 kg/m3 is used. Input can either be
a single value (constant along bundle
- 533 -
OLGA User manual
EMISSIVITY Real (-) [0] The emissivity is a measure of the ability

of a material to emit heat by radiation. It is
given as the ratio of energy radiated by a
particular material to energy radiated by a
black body at the same temperature.
EXPANSION RealList Thermal expansion coefficient of ambient

(1/C) fluid. If HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 3.47E-3
1/K is used. If HOUTEROPTION is
WATER, 1.72E-4 1/K is used. Input can
either be a single value (constant along
bundle length), two values (length-
interpolated) or given explicitly for each
section.
HAMBIENT RealList Mean heat transfer coefficient on outer

(W/m2-C) wall surface. Input can either be a single
value (constant along bundle length) or
HAMBIENTTABLE Symbol TABLE | Table with mean heat transfer coefficient

(W/m2-C) on outer wall surface. Type of table
determines the INTERPOLATION used
assigning values. If position is outside
XVALUE in table, the coefficient is held
constant.
HOUTEROPTION Symbol <None> | AIR | Option for ambient heat transfer

WATER | OTHER | coefficient.
[HGIVEN]
INHAMBIENT Real Overall heat transfer coefficient at the inlet

(W/m2-C) of the first pipe in a pipeline section where
interpolation is used for overall heat
INTAMBIENT Real (C) Ambient temperature at the inlet of the

first pipe in a branch where interpolation is
used for ambient temperature.

HORIZONTAL | ambient temperature and outer heat
VERTICAL | transfer coefficient. Note that the
[SECTIONWISE] INTERPOLATION key is not used in
TAMBIENTTABLE and
HAMBIENTTABLE, as the interpolation is
given by the type of table. Also outer heat
transfer coefficient is only affected by the
INTERPOLATION key when
LABEL String [AMBIENTDATA] Ambientdata label. Default is ambientdata

number.
- 534 -
Reference manual
OUTHAMBIENT Real Overall heat transfer coefficient at the

(W/m2-C) outlet of the last pipe in a pipeline section
where interpolation is used for overall heat
OUTTAMBIENT Real (C) Ambient temperature at the outlet of the

last pipe in a pipeline section where
interpolation is used for ambient
temperature.
RADIATION RealList [0] Heat flux into solid due to external

(W/m2) radiation.
RADIATIONSERIES SymbolList List of reference to TIMESERIES

(W/m2) keywords. The value of each time series
is scaled with a corresponding factor in
RADIATIONSERIESFACTOR and added
to the heat flux defined in RADIATION.
RADIATIONSERIESFACTOR RealList [1] List of factors to be used to scale heat

radiation time series in
RADIATIONSERIES.
SOILSURFACELEVEL Real (m) [0] Vertical level that defines the surface of
the soil (SIMPLEBURIED only). At and
above this level, ambient conditions given
in the "Radiation", "Heat transfer
coefficient", "Ambient temperature" and
"Outer heat transfer coefficient" groups
apply. Conditions specified in "Soil data"
apply below this level.
SOILTEMPERATURE RealList Temperature at SOILTEMPLEVEL (or

(C) lowest vertical position of cross section if
SOILTEMPLEVEL is not given). If
SOILTEMPERATURE is not given,
TAMBIENT is used (TAMBIENTSERIES
is not used). Input can either be a single
value (constant along bundle length), two
values (length-interpolated) or given
SOILTEMPLEVEL Real (m) Vertical level where the soil temperature is

given. If this key is not given, the lowest
vertical position of the cross section is
used.
- 535 -
OLGA User manual
SOILTEMPSERIES SymbolList List of reference to TIMESERIES

(C) keywords. The value of each time series
SOILTEMPSERIESFACTOR and added
as a temperature increment to the
temperature defined in
SOILTEMPERATURE.
SOILTEMPSERIESFACTOR RealList [1] List of factors to be used to scale soil

temperature time series in
SOILTEMPSERIES.
SOILVERTBOUND Symbol <None> | Ambient conditions for boundaries

FIXEDTEMP | between SOILSURFACELEVEL and
[NOFLUX] SOILTEMPLEVEL. When NOFLUX is
used, there is no heat flow across external
boundaries. For FIXEDTEMP, the
temperature is determined by
SOILTEMPERATURE. FIXEDTEMP is
always used for boundaries at or below
SOILTEMPLEVEL.
TAMBIENT RealList Ambient temperature. Input can either be

(C) a single value (constant along bundle
length) or given explicitly for each section.
TAMBIENTSERIES SymbolList List of reference to TIMESERIES

(C) keywords. The value of each time series
TAMBSERIESFACTOR and added as an
increment to the temperature defined in
TAMBIENT or INTAMBIENT and
OUTTAMBIENT.
TAMBIENTTABLE Symbol (C) TABLE | Table with ambient temperatures. Type of

table determines the INTERPOLATION
used assigning values. If position is
outside XVALUE in table, the temperature
is held constant.

temperature time series in
TAMBIENTSERIES. Note that this key
also introduces the unit of the function.
- 536 -
Reference manual
TYPE Symbol <None> | Type of ambient data input. If TYPE =

SIMPLEBURIED | VERTICALPOINTS, ambient heat transfer
[VERTICALPOINTS] coefficient, ambient temperature, radiation
and emissivity will be linearly interpolated
in the vertical axis between
AMBIENTDATA definitions. For TYPE =
SIMPLEBURIED, only a single
AMBIENTDATA can be defined but
different ambient conditions are used for
boundaries that are below or above
SOILSURFACELEVEL.
VELOCITY RealList Speed of ambient fluid. If

(m/s) HOUTEROPTION is AIR, default is 4 m/s.
If HOUTEROPTION is WATER, default is
1 m/s. Input can either be a single value
(constant along bundle length), two values
(length-interpolated) or given explicitly for
each section.
VERTPOS Real (m) [0] Vertical position of given ambient

conditions. Used only if TYPE =
VERTICALPOINTS. Ambient heat transfer
coefficient, ambient temperature, radiation
and emissivity will be linearly interpolated
in the vertical axis between
AMBIENTDATA definitions.
VISCOSITY RealList Viscosity of ambient fluid. If

(N-s/m2) HOUTEROPTION is AIR, 1.78E-5 N-s/m2
is used. If HOUTEROPTION is WATER,
1.40E-3 N-s/m2 is used. Input can either
be a single value (constant along bundle
COMPONENT (on SolidBundle)
The COMPONENT keyword is used to define the geometric layout of the SOLIDBUNDLE cross section.
The keyword has a reference to a geometric object and an offset from the origin (XOFFSET and
YOFFSET). The following objects may be placed within a solid bundle:
 SHAPE
 Line
 FLUIDBUNDLE
 BRANCH
When using FLUIDBUNDLE or BRANCH (flow components), the POSITION keyword must be used to
define the start and end pipe between which the solid bundle applies.
Note a pipe wall is not allowed to intersect another pipe wall. However, a SHAPE may intersect another
SHAPE or a pipe wall, unless it has already been placed in the interior of another shape. The cross section
of the bundle is the union of all SHAPES and flow components. When two objects intersect, the following
rules are used:
- 537 -
OLGA User manual
 Intersecting SHAPES:
If the first SHAPE is defined in COMPONENT[i] and the second in COMPONENT[j] (i < j), the SHAPE
in COMPONENT[j] will have the highest rank and it will remain unchanged. For the SHAPE in
COMPONENT[i], the intersecting area will be removed.
 Intersecting SHAPE and flow components:
Flow components always has infinite rank
ANNULUS Symbol ANNULUS | Label of an annulus that

reside inside the
BUNDLE.
CONTROLLERLABEL Symbol PIDCONTROLLER | ALGEBRAICCONTROLLER Name of controller for

| ASCCONTROLLER | PSVCONTROLLER | POWER input/output.
MANUALCONTROLLER |
OVERRIDECONTROLLER |
SELECTORCONTROLLER |
SCALERCONTROLLER | STDCONTROLLER |
SWITCHCONTROLLER | TABLECONTROLLER |
CASCADECONTROLLER | ESDCONTROLLER |
LINEARCOMBINATION | TABLECONTROLLER |
FLOWPATH Symbol FLOWPATH | Label of a FLOWPATH

that resides inside the
BUNDLE.
FLUIDBUNDLE Symbol FLUIDBUNDLE | Label of a bundle that

resides inside the
BUNDLE.
FROM Symbol POSITION | Label of the POSITION

on the FLOWPATH
where it enters the
BUNDLE.
LINE Symbol FLOWPATH | Label of a line

(FLOWPATH) that
resides inside the
BUNDLE.
OUTERHVALUE Real Heat transfer coefficient

(W/m2- at the wall surface of a
C) branch to the bulk fluid in
the carrier line.
Forced/free convection
will be applied if this key
is not defined.
- 538 -
Reference manual
POWER Real [0] Power input/output per

(W/m) unit length, due to e.g.
electric heating
(SHAPES only). The
specified amount of
energy input/output will
be distributed evenly
over the volume
occupied by the SHAPE.
SHAPE Symbol SHAPE | Label of a shape that

reside inside the
BUNDLE. The SHAPE
with the largest
circumference is
automatically the outer
surface of BUNDLE.
TO Symbol POSITION | Label of the POSITION

on the FLOWPATH
where it exits the
BUNDLE.
XOFFSET Real [0.0] The component's

(m) displacement along the
x-axis relative to the
YOFFSET Real [0.0] The component's

(m) displacement along the
y-axis relative to the
PROFILEDATA (on SolidBundle)
VARIABLE SymbolList (ValueUnitPair) List of variables to be plotted.
- 539 -
OLGA User manual
SERVERDATA (on SolidBundle)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]


(ValueUnitPair)
TRENDDATA (on SolidBundle)

set
Unit:( )
Default:[ ]


(ValueUnitPair)
Output variables
The variables belonging to a section in the pipeline are divided between boundary variables and volume
variables. This is due to the staggered mesh used in the numeric solution of the problem, where some
variables are computed at the section boundaries (boundary variables) while others are computed in the
middle of the section (volume variables).
Branch variables will give quantities, relating to the branch, such as, for instance, liquid content. Global
variables will give quantities relating to the total system, such as total mass in the system, or relating to the
integration, such as the time step.
- 540 -
Reference manual
In addition to the variables describing the pipeline, we have variables describing the process equipment,
such as compressors, sources etc.
All variables listed can be written to the trend plot data file. Variables defined as boundary or volume
variables can also be written to the profile plot data file. The abbreviations for the use of the variables (in
the «Use as» column in the listing) are as follows:
O: Printed output variable (to be specified with keyword OUTPUTDATA).
TP: Trend plot variable (to be specified with keyword TRENDDATA).
PP: Profile plot variable (to be specified with keyword PROFILEDATA).
C: Controller signal input variable (to be specified as the controlled variable for a controller, input group
CONTROLLER).
S: For server output and interactive plotting.
GTP: Global trend variables.
GPP: Global profile variables.
AV: Animation variables.
NC: Network controller variables.
GTO: Global output variables.
BNDL: Bundle trend/profile variables.
NN: Network node variables.
NS: Network separator variables.
Variables belonging to different groups cannot be specified together in the input for trend plotting (except
the boundary and volume variable groups). A new TRENDDATA entry has to be specified for each variable
group.
Global Output Variables
Use as Name Units Definition
Global Variables
O|TP|C|GTP ABSMASSERR KG Absolute mass error
GTO|GTP ACCRECOVERIES NoUnit Accumulated number of recoveries done in

Compositional Tracking fluid library if
RECOVERYMODE=ON in COMOPTIONS.
Otherwise this output variable is zero
GTO|GTP DRIFTTIME S Drift Time: SIMTIME - SIMULATONSPEED

* ELAPSEDCLOCKTIME. Will return 0.0 for
SIMULATIONSPEED=0
TP|PP|GTO|GTP|NC|NN|NS|FUSD HT S Time step
- 541 -
OLGA User manual
GTO|GTP HTCRIT NoUnit The current criterion used to limit the time
step
O|TP|C|GTP HTCRITSEC NoUnit Section causing time step limitation
GTO|GTP ICLKTIME 1 The value of the simulator internal clock
GTO|GTP LAGFACT NoUnit Lag (drift) factor compared to reference

clock expressed in number of timesteps.
GTO|GTP LAGIND NoUnit Lag indicator for detecting simulation is

lagging compared to a reference clock.
Goes to 1 when output variable LAGFACT
> INTEGRATION.MAXLAGFACT, else it
remains at zero.
GTO|GTP MAXSPEED NoUnit Maximum speed achievable (theoretical

limit when no overhead)
GTO|GTP NINTGR NoUnit Number of time steps
GTO|GTP REDEL - Relative changes of energy from start
GTO|GTP REERR - Accumulated energy balance error
GTO|GTP RELGT J Total amount of energy
O|TP|C|GTP RELMASSERR NoUnit Relative mass error
GTO|GTP RETOT J Total amount of energy time integrated
GTO|GTP RETOT0 J Initial total amount of energy
GTO|GTP RMDEL - Relative changes of mass from start
GTO|GTP RMERR - Accumulated mass balance error
GTO|GTP RMLGT KG Total amount of mass
GTO|GTP RMOUT KG Cumulative mass release pipeline exit
GTO|GTP RMTOT KG Total amount of mass time integrated
GTO|GTP RMTOT0 KG Initial total amount of mass
GTO|GTP SIMTIME 1 Simulated time in true time
GTO|GTP SPEED NoUnit Simulation speed relative to real-time speed
GTO|GTP TIME S Simulated time
GTO|GTP VOLGBL - Global max volume error since last write
- 542 -
Reference manual
Branch Output Variables
Branch Variables
TP|C|GTP CVALVES NoUnit Number of closed valves in the branch
TP|C|GTP DPABR PA Additional pressure drop
TP|C|GTP DPBR PA Total pressure drop
TP|C|GTP DPFBR PA Frictional pressure drop
TP|C|GTP DPGBR PA Gravitational pressure drop
TP|C|GTP DTBR C Total temperature drop (inlet minus outlet) in branch
TP|C|GTP GASC M3 Gas content in branch
TP|C|GTP GASCFR - Gas volume fraction in branch
TP|C|GTP GASCST SM3 Gas content in branch converted to standard conditions
TP|C|GTP GASIN KG Accumulated gas flow inlet boundary
TP|C|GTP GASMASS KG Gas mass in branch
TP|C|GTP GASOUT KG Accumulated gas flow outlet boundary
TP|C|GTP HTMAX S Maximum allowed timestep for flowpath
TP|C|GTP INHIBMASS KG Total mass of inhibitor in branch
TP|C|GTP LIQBC M3 Liquid bulk content in branch
TP|C|GTP LIQC M3 Total liquid content in branch
TP|C|GTP LIQCFR - Liquid volume fraction in branch
TP|C|GTP LIQDC M3 Liquid droplet content in branch
TP|C|GTP LIQIN KG Accumulated liquid flow inlet boundary
TP|C|GTP LIQMASS KG Total liquid mass in branch
TP|C|GTP LIQOUT KG Accumulated liquid flow outlet boundary
TP|C|GTP MASOUT KG Accumulated mass flow outlet boundary
TP|C|GTP MASSIN KG Accumulated mass flow inlet boundary
- 543 -
OLGA User manual
TP|C|GTP MAXPTBR PA Maximum pressure in branch since start
TP|C|GTP MAXPTBRCT PA Maximum pressure in branch at current time
TP|C|GTP MAXPTPOS M Distance from branch inlet where maximum pressure since start occurs
TP|C|GTP MAXTMBR C Maximum temperature in branch since start
TP|C|GTP MAXTMBRCT C Maximum temperature in branch at current time
TP|C|GTP MAXTMPOS M Distance from branch inlet where maximum temperature since start
occurs
TP|C|GTP MDPHYD PA Maximum difference between section and hydrate pressure since last
write
TP|C|GTP MDPPOS M Distance where section and hydrate pressure differs most since last
write
TP|C|GTP MDTHYD C Maximum difference between hydrate and section temp since last write
TP|C|GTP MDTPOS M Distance where section and hydrate temperature differs most since last
write
TP|C|GTP MEANPTBRCT PA Mean pressure in branch at current time
TP|C|GTP MEANTMBRCT C Mean temperature in branch at current time
TP|C|GTP MINPTBR PA Minimum pressure in branch since start
TP|C|GTP MINPTBRCT PA Minimum pressure in branch at current time
TP|C|GTP MINPTPOS M Distance from branch inlet where minimum pressure since start occurs
TP|C|GTP MINTMBR C Minimum temperature in branch since start
TP|C|GTP MINTMBRCT C Minimum temperature in branch at current time
TP|C|GTP MINTMPOS M Distance from branch inlet where minimum temperature since start
occurs
TP|C|GTP OILBC M3 Oil film content in branch
TP|C|GTP OILC M3 Total oil content in branch
TP|C|GTP OILCFR - Oil volume fraction in branch
TP|C|GTP OILCST SM3 Total oil content in branch converted to standard conditions
TP|C|GTP OILDC M3 Oil droplet content in branch
TP|C|GTP OILIN KG Accumulated oil flow inlet boundary
- 544 -
Reference manual
TP|C|GTP OILMASS KG Total oil mass in branch
TP|C|GTP OILOUT KG Accumulated oil flow outlet boundary
TP|C|GTP RGASIN KG Accumulated gas flow after restart at inlet boundary
TP|C|GTP RGASOUT KG Accumulated gas flow after restart at outlet boundary
TP|C|GTP RLIQIN KG Accumulated liquid flow after restart at inlet boundary
TP|C|GTP RLIQOUT KG Accumulated liquid flow after restart at outlet boundary
TP|C|GTP RMASIN KG Accumulated mass flow after restart at inlet boundary
TP|C|GTP RMASOUT KG Accumulated mass flow after restart at outlet boundary
TP|C|GTP ROILIN KG Accumulated oil flow after restart at inlet boundary
TP|C|GTP ROILOUT KG Accumulated oil flow after restart at outlet boundary
TP|C|GTP RWATIN KG Accumulated water flow after restart at inlet boundary
TP|C|GTP RWATOUT KG Accumulated water flow after restart at outlet boundary
TP|C|GTP RWINHIBTOT - Total mass fraction in water phase in branch for inhibitor
TP|C|GTP TOTMASS KG Total mass in branch
TP|C|GTP TOTRHO KG/M3 Density of total fluid mixture in branch
TP|C|GTP WATBC M3 Water film content in branch
TP|C|GTP WATC M3 Total water content in branch
TP|C|GTP WATCFR - Water volume fraction in branch
TP|C|GTP WATCST SM3 Total water content in branch converted to standard conditions
TP|C|GTP WATDC M3 Water droplet content in branch
TP|C|GTP WATIN KG Accumulated water flow inlet boundary
TP|C|GTP WATMASS KG Total water mass in branch
TP|C|GTP WATOUT KG Accumulated water flow outlet boundary
- 545 -
OLGA User manual
Boundary Output Variables

WCST, GORST, QGST, QLST, QOST and QWST are given at standard conditions (60°F, 1 atm). A single
stage flash from in-situ to standard conditions has been performed, that is, mass transfer between the
phases from in-situ to standard conditions is accounted for. The gas is not dehydrated unless
WATERFLASH = OFF. For table-based simulations, OLGA uses the gas mass fractions and densities
from the fluid property file to perform the conversion.
Note: These variables are CPU demanding for Compositional Tracking simulations because a flash
must be performed for each section and time they are plotted, and should be used with care.
Inconsistencies between volumetric variables derived from velocities and mass flow rates
OLGA integrates conservation equations for momentum, mass and energy in separate stages. The main
stages are:
1. By integrating the conservation equations for momentum and by combining with volume equation,
OLGA finds pressure and phase velocities.
2. By, integrating the conservation equations for mass, OLGA finds in-situ masses.
3. By integrating the conservation equation for energy, OLGA finds temperature.
Additional steps apply for different options. Between the stages, fluid properties are updated. Because fluid
properties are updated between the stages, and mass and momentum equations are solved in different
stages, the volumetric variables derived from momentum / velocities and the volumetric variables derived
from mass flow rates are not consistent when volume error is present. In other words, SUM{CQ(phase)} is
not equal to Q(phase) due to the presence of volume error. As the volume error approaches zero, the
volumetric variables based on velocities and mass flow rates become consistent.
Volumetric variables based on velocities are aggregated variables for the phases such as QG, QLTHL,
QLTWT, and so on. Volumetric variables based on mass flow rates are component-specific variables such
as CQG, CQLTHL, CQLTWT and all the volumetric variables at standard conditions.
It is worth noting that volumetric flow rates based on mass flow rates are derived variables for the purpose
of output. They are not primary internal variables used in the main calculations.
Erosional Velocity ratio
The erosional velocity ratio (EVR) defined in API RP-14E is:
EVR = C-1(EVRVACTUAL)(EVRRHOMIX)1/2
where
EVRVACTUAL =|Usg| + |Usl| + |Usd|,
EVRRHOMIX = [ρg|Usg| + ρl(|Usl| + |Usd)|]/(|Usg|+|Usl| + |Usd|),
and
C = 100 for U in ft/s and ρ in Lb/ft3
C = 121.99 for U in m/s and ρ in kg/m3
Here |Usg|, |Usl| and |Usd| denote the absolute value of the superficial velocity for gas, liquid film and liquid
droplets respectively. Similarly ρg and ρl denote the gas and liquid density.
- 546 -
Reference manual
Boundary Variables
O|TP|PP|C ACCGAG KG Accumulated gas mass flow
O|TP|PP|C ACCGAQ M3 Accumulated gas volume flow
O|TP|PP|C ACCGT KG Accumulated total mass flow
O|TP|PP|C ACCLIG KG Accumulated liquid mass flow
O|TP|PP|C ACCLIQ M3 Accumulated liquid volume flow
O|TP|PP|C ACCOIG KG Accumulated oil mass flow
O|TP|PP|C ACCOIQ M3 Accumulated oil volume flow
O|TP|PP|C ACCQGST SM3 Accumulated gas volume flow at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C ACCQLST SM3 Accumulated liquid volume flow at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C ACCQOST SM3 Accumulated oil volume flow at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C ACCQWST SM3 Accumulated watervolume flow at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C ACCWAG KG Accumulated water mass flow
O|TP|PP|C ACCWAQ M3 Accumulated water volume flow
O|TP|PP|C CFLFACT NoUnit Local CFL factor
O|TP|PP|C CGR SM3/SM3 Ratio between condensate and dry gas (with water vapour).
O|TP|PP|C DPZ PA/M Space derivative of pressure
O|TP|PP|C DPZ_GRAV_FACTOR NoUnit Factor describing the gravity domination of the flow
O|TP|PP|C DPZA PA/M Additional pressure drop gradient
O|TP|PP|C DPZF PA/M Frictional pressure drop gradient
O|TP|PP|C DPZG PA/M Gravitational pressure drop gradient
O|TP|PP|C DS NoUnit Distribution slip ratio
O|TP|PP|C DUG M/S2 Time derivative of gas velocity
O|TP|PP|C DUL M/S2 Time derivative of liquid velocity
O|TP|PP|C EVR NoUnit Erosional velocity ratio
- 547 -
OLGA User manual
O|TP|PP|C EVRRHOMIX KG/M3 Mixed density used in calculation of erosional velocity ratio
O|TP|PP|C EVRVACTUAL M/S Actual volume flux used in calculation of erosional velocity
ratio.
O|TP|PP|C FROUDE2P NoUnit Froude number for the 2-phase approximation.

FROUDE2P=0 if the flow is not stratified or no gas is
present.
O|TP|PP|C FRRG KG/M3-S Gas wall drift friction factor
O|TP|PP|C FRRH KG/M3-S Oil wall drift friction factor
O|TP|PP|C FRRW KG/M3-S Water wall drift friction factor
O|TP|PP|C GASMFRBOUN - Gas mass fraction at boundary
O|TP|PP|C GD KG/S Droplet mass flow
O|TP|PP|C GDHL KG/S Mass flow rate of oil in droplet field
O|TP|PP|C GDWT KG/S Mass flow rate of water in droplet field
O|TP|PP|C GG KG/S Gas mass flow
O|TP|PP|C GL KG/S Liquid bulk mass flow
O|TP|PP|C GLHL KG/S Mass flow rate of oil in film
O|TP|PP|C GLRST SM3/SM3 Gas/liquid ratio at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C GLT KG/S Total liquid mass flow
O|TP|PP|C GLTHL KG/S Mass flow rate of oil
O|TP|PP|C GLTWT KG/S Mass flow rate of water excluding vapour
O|TP|PP|C GLWT KG/S Mass flow rate of water in film
O|TP|PP|C GLWV KG/S Mass flow rate of water vapour
O|TP|PP|C GLWVT KG/S Total mass flow rate of water including Vapour
O|TP|PP|C GORST SM3/SM3 Gas/oil ratio at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C GORST_DRY SM3/SM3 Dry gas/oil ratio at standard conditions. Gas does not include
water vapour.
O|TP|PP|C GT KG/S Total mass flow
O|TP|PP|C HOLHLNS - No-slip oil volume fraction
O|TP|PP|C HOLNS - No-slip liquid volume fraction
- 548 -
Reference manual
O|TP|PP|C HOLWTNS - No-slip water volume fraction
O|TP|PP|C HTOT W Total Enthalpy flow rate
O|TP|PP|C ID NoUnit Flow regime: 1=Stratified, 2=Annular, 3=Slug, 4=Bubble.
O|TP|PP|C IDWHBUB NoUnit Oil/water flowregime indicator for slug bubble: 0=Stratified
smooth, 1=Stratified wavy, 2=Dispersed, -1= not applicable.
O|TP|PP|C IDWHSEP NoUnit Oil/water flowregime indicator for separated flow: 0=Stratified
smooth, 1=Stratified wavy, 2=Dispersed, -1= not applicable.
O|TP|PP|C IDWHSLU NoUnit Oil/water flowregime indicator for slug: 0=Stratified smooth,
1=Stratified wavy, 2=Dispersed, -1= not applicable.
O|TP|PP|C IKH NoUnit Inviscid Kelvin-Helmoltz factor
O|TP|PP|C IKHFROUDE NoUnit Inviscid Kelvin-Helmholtz Froude number for the 2-phase
approximation. IKHFROUDE=0 if the flow is not stratified or
no gas is present.
O|TP|PP|C INHIBMFRBOUN - Inhibitor mass fraction in water at boundary
O|TP|PP|C LAMTURB_GAS NoUnit Blending parameter between laminar and turbulent flow, gas
layer
O|TP|PP|C LAMTURB_OIL NoUnit Blending parameter between laminar and turbulent flow, oil
layer
O|TP|PP|C LAMTURB_WATER NoUnit Blending parameter between laminar and turbulent flow,
water layer
O|TP|PP|C MDHLCONV KG/M3 Specific convective mass of oil droplets
O|TP|PP|C MDHLSLOPE KG/M3 Specific mass adjustment of oil droplets
O|TP|PP|C MDWTCONV KG/M3 Specific convective mass of water droplets
O|TP|PP|C MDWTSLOPE KG/M3 Specific mass adjustment of water droplets
O|TP|PP|C MGCONV KG/M3 Specific convective mass of gas
O|TP|PP|C MGSLOPE KG/M3 Specific mass adjustment of gas
O|TP|PP|C MLHLCONV KG/M3 Specific convective mass of oil in film
O|TP|PP|C MLHLSLOPE KG/M3 Specific mass adjustment of oil in film
O|TP|PP|C MLWTCONV KG/M3 Specific convective mass of water in film
O|TP|PP|C MLWTSLOPE KG/M3 Specific mass adjustment of water in film
O|TP|PP|C PSID KG/M3-S Deposition rate
- 549 -
OLGA User manual
O|TP|PP|C PSIE KG/M3-S Entrainment rate
O|TP|PP|C QD M3/S Droplet volume flow
O|TP|PP|C QDHL M3/S Volumetric flow rate oil droplets
O|TP|PP|C QDWT M3/S Volumetric flow rate water droplets
O|TP|PP|C QG M3/S Gas volume flow
O|TP|PP|C QGST SM3/S Gas volume flow at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C QGST_DRY SM3/S Dry gas volume flow at standard conditions. Water vapour is
removed from flow.
O|TP|PP|C QL M3/S Liquid bulk volume flow
O|TP|PP|C QLHL M3/S Volumetric flow rate oil film
O|TP|PP|C QLST SM3/S Liquid volume flow at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C QLT M3/S Total liquid volume flow
O|TP|PP|C QLTHL M3/S Volumetric flow rate oil
O|TP|PP|C QLTWT M3/S Volumetric flow rate water
O|TP|PP|C QLWT M3/S Volumetric flow rate water film
O|TP|PP|C QOST SM3/S Oil volume flow at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C QT M3/S Total volume flow
O|TP|PP|C QWST SM3/S Water volume flow at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C QWTST SM3/S Total water (liquid and vapour) volume flow at standard
conditions
O|TP|PP|C SHRHL 1/s Oil film - shear strain rate. Note: This is not valid for the slug
flow regime.
O|TP|PP|C SHRWT 1/s Water film - shear strain rate. Note: This is not valid for the
slug flow regime.
O|TP|PP|C SLAG KG/M3-S Gas friction coefficient
O|TP|PP|C SLAI KG/M3-S Interfacial friction coefficient
O|TP|PP|C SLAIGHL KG/M3-S Gas/oil film interfacial friction factor
O|TP|PP|C SLAIHLWT KG/M3-S Oil film/water film interfacial friction factor
O|TP|PP|C SLAIWTG KG/M3-S Water film/gas interfacial friction factor
- 550 -
Reference manual
O|TP|PP|C SLAL KG/M3-S Liquid friction coefficient
O|TP|PP|C SLALHL KG/M3-S Oil film wall friction factor
O|TP|PP|C SLALWT KG/M3-S Water film wall friction factor
O|TP|PP|C SLGH KG/M3-S Oil wall friction due to gas
O|TP|PP|C SLGW KG/M3-S Water wall friction due to gas
O|TP|PP|C SLHG KG/M3-S Gas wall friction due to oil
O|TP|PP|C SLWG KG/M3-S Gas wall friction due to water
O|TP|PP|C STDROG KG/M3 Standard gas density
O|TP|PP|C STDROHL KG/M3 Standard oil density
O|TP|PP|C STDROWT KG/M3 Standard water density
TP SURGEVOLHL M3 Surge oil volume calculation from OLGA. Drainage rate for
this variable is defined by the SURGEVOL_HLQMAX key in
TRENDDATA.
TP SURGEVOLHLMAX M3 Maximum surge oil volume calculated in OLGA. Drainage

rate for this variable is defined by the SURGEVOL_HLQMAX
key in TRENDDATA.
TP SURGEVOLHLWT M3 Surge liquid volume calculation from OLGA. Drainage rates

for this variable is defined by SURGEVOL _WTQMAX and
SURGEVOL_HLQMAX keys in TRENDDATA.
TP SURGEVOLHLWTMAX M3 Maximum surge liquid volume calculated in OLGA. Drainage

rates for this variable is defined by SURGEVOL _WTQMAX
and SURGEVOL_HLQMAX keys in TRENDDATA.
TP SURGEVOLLT M3 Surge liquid volume calculation from OLGA. Drainage rate

for this variable is defined by the SURGEVOL _LTQMAX key
in TRENDDATA.
TP SURGEVOLLTMAX M3 Maximum surge liquid volume calculated in OLGA. Drainage

rate for this variable is defined by the SURGEVOL
_LTQMAX key in TRENDDATA.
TP SURGEVOLWT M3 Surge water volume calculation from OLGA. Drainage rate

for this variable is defined by the SURGEVOL _WTQMAX
key in TRENDDATA.
TP SURGEVOLWTMAX M3 Maximum surge water volume calculated in OLGA. Drainage

rate for this variable is defined by the SURGEVOL
_WTQMAX key in TRENDDATA.
O|TP|PP|C TAUWG PA Gas - wall shear stress
- 551 -
OLGA User manual
O|TP|PP|C TAUWGA PA Gas - average wall shear stress
O|TP|PP|C TAUWHL PA Oil film - wall shear stress
O|TP|PP|C TAUWHLA PA Oil film - average wall shear stress
O|TP|PP|C TAUWWT PA Water film - wall shear stress
O|TP|PP|C TAUWWTA PA Water film - average wall shear stress
O|TP|PP|C TC_GH NoUnit Turbulence parameter gas-oil interface, gas side
O|TP|PP|C TC_HG NoUnit Turbulence parameter gas-oil interface, oil side
O|TP|PP|C TC_HW NoUnit Turbulence parameter oil-water interface, oil side
O|TP|PP|C TC_WH NoUnit Turbulence parameter oil-water interface, water side
O|TP|PP|C TINHIBMFRBOUN - Inhibitor mass fraction in water+vapour at boundary
O|TP|PP|C TWATMFRBOUN - Total water mass fraction at boundary
O|TP|PP|C UD M/S Droplet velocity
O|TP|PP|C UDHL M/S Oil droplet velocity
O|TP|PP|C UDO M/S Relative velocity droplets
O|TP|PP|C UDWT M/S Water droplet velocity
O|TP|PP|C UG M/S Gas velocity
O|TP|PP|C UHLCONT M/S Oil continuous velocity
O|TP|PP|C UL M/S Average liquid film velocity
O|TP|PP|C ULHL M/S Oil film velocity
O|TP|PP|C ULWT M/S Water film velocity
O|TP|PP|C UO M/S Relative velocity
O|TP|PP|C USD M/S Superficial velocity total liquid droplets
O|TP|PP|C USDHL M/S Superficial oil droplet velocity
O|TP|PP|C USDWT M/S Superficial water droplet velocity
O|TP|PP|C USG M/S Superficial velocity gas
O|TP|PP|C USL M/S Superficial velocity total liquid film
O|TP|PP|C USLHL M/S Superficial oil film velocity
- 552 -
Reference manual
O|TP|PP|C USLT M/S Superficial velocity liquid (USL+USD)
O|TP|PP|C USLTHL M/S Superficial velocity oil
O|TP|PP|C USLTWT M/S Superficial velocity water
O|TP|PP|C USLWT M/S Superficial water film velocity
O|TP|PP|C USTOT M/S Total volume flux
O|TP|PP|C UWTCONT M/S Water continuous velocity
O|TP|PP|C VKH NoUnit Viscous Kelvin-Helmoltz factor
O|TP|PP|C WATMFRBOUN - Water mass fraction at boundary
O|TP|PP|C WCST - Water cut at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C WD KG/S-M2 Droplet mass flux
O|TP|PP|C WDHL KG/S-M2 Mass flux of oil in droplet field
O|TP|PP|C WDWT KG/S-M2 Mass flux of water in droplet field
O|TP|PP|C WG KG/S-M2 Gas mass flux
O|TP|PP|C WGR SM3/SM3 Ratio between water (including water in gas phase) and dry
gas (with water vapour).
O|TP|PP|C WL KG/S-M2 Liquid mass flux
O|TP|PP|C WLHL KG/S-M2 Mass flux of oil in film
O|TP|PP|C WLWT KG/S-M2 Mass flux of water in film
O|TP|PP|C WTOT KG/S-M2 Total mass flux
O|TP|PP|C YBOU M Vertical distance from branch inlet boundary to section

boundary
O|TP|PP|C ZZBOU M Distance along the pipeline from branch inlet boundary to
section boundary
- 553 -
OLGA User manual
Volume Output Variables

SSP gives an average speed of sound in fluid. However, it is only calculated if SOUND_CFL = ON in
keyword DTCONTROL. Otherwise, the value is 0.
Volume Variables
O|TP|PP|C ACCDPZA PA Integrated additional pressure drop along branch
O|TP|PP|C ACCDPZF PA Integrated frictional pressure drop along branch
O|TP|PP|C ACCDPZG PA Integrated gravitational pressure drop along branch
O|TP|PP|C ACCLIQBR M3 Accumulated liquid volume along branch
O|TP|PP|C ACCOILBR M3 Accumulated oil volume along branch
O|TP|PP|C ACCWATBR M3 Accumulated water volume along branch
O|TP|PP|NS|NN AL - Void (gas volume fraction)
O|TP|PP|C ANGLE NoUnit Pipe angle
O|TP|PP|C AREA M2 Pipe area
O|TP|PP|NS|NN BE - Liquid film volume fraction
O|TP|PP|NS|NN BEHL - Oil film volume fraction
O|TP|PP|C BEHLCONT - Oil continuous fraction
O|TP|PP|C BEHLDISP - Oil dispersed in water fraction
O|TP|PP|NS|NN BEWT - Water film volume fraction
O|TP|PP|C BEWTCONT - Water continuous fraction
O|TP|PP|C BEWTDISP - Water dispersed in oil fraction
O|TP|PP|C CPG J/KG-C Specific heat of gas phase
O|TP|PP|C CPHL J/KG-C Specific heat of oil phase
O|TP|PP|C CPWT J/KG-C Specific heat of water phase
O|TP|PP|C CVWALLROUGH M Wall roughness of CV, for use with PlugIn
O|TP|PP|C DIAM M Pipe diameter
- 554 -
Reference manual
O|TP|PP|C DIAMEFF M Effective Pipe Diameter
O|TP|PP|C DPHYD PA Difference between section and hydrate pressure
O|TP|PP|C DPT PA/S Time derivative of pressure
O|TP|PP|C DRGP KG/M-N Pressure derivative of gas density
O|TP|PP|C DRHLDP S2/M2 Pressure derivative of oil density
O|TP|PP|C DRWTDP S2/M2 Pressure derivative of water density
O|TP|PP|C DTHYD C Difference between hydrate and section temperature
O|TP|PP|C DTM C/S Time derivative of temperature
O|TP|PP DXWL M Thickness of wall layer deposited at wall
O|TP|PP|C ESTRESTIMEW S Residence time of water
O|TP|PP|NS|NN GA - Liquid droplet volume fraction
O|TP|PP|NS|NN GAHL - Oil droplet volume fraction
O|TP|PP|C GASMFR - Gas mass fraction relative to the mass from all phases
O|TP|PP|NS|NN GAWT - Water droplet volume fraction
O|TP|PP|C HDIAM M Hydraulic diameter
O|TP|PP|C HG J/KG Enthalpy gas
O|TP|PP|C HGAS J/KG Enthalpy gas
O|TP|PP|C HL J/KG Enthalpy liquid
O|TP|PP|C HLIQ J/KG Enthalpy liquid
O|TP|PP|C HOIL J/KG Enthalpy oil
O|TP|PP|NS|NN HOL - Holdup (liquid volume fraction including solids)
O|TP|PP|C HOLHL - Oil volume fraction
O|TP|PP|C HOLHTOT - Volume fraction of oil layer including user defined

dispersions. Equivalent to BEHL if the Plug-in interface is
not used.
O|TP|PP|C HOLWT - Water volume fraction
O|TP|PP|C HOLWTOT - Volume fraction of water layer including user defined

dispersions. Equivalent to BEWT if the Plug-in interface is
not used.
- 555 -
OLGA User manual
O|TP|PP|C HTK W/M2-C Heat transfer coefficient of inner wall
O|TP|PP HTKNWL W/M2-C Heat transfer coefficient of inner wall without correction for
wall layer
O|TP|PP|C HTKO W/M2-C Ambient heat transfer coefficient
O|TP|PP|C HWATER J/KG Enthalpy water
O|TP|PP|C IDIAM M Inner diameter
O|TP|PP|C INCL DEGREE Inclination from horizontal
O|TP|PP|C INHIBMFR - Inhibitor mass fraction in water
O|TP|PP|NS|NN ISSECTB NoUnit Section blocked (1-yes: 0-no)
TP|PP ISSHUTIN NoUnit SHUTIN algorithm activated (1-yes: 0-no)
O|TP|PP|C KAPPA 1/Pa Compressibility of fluid
O|TP|PP|C KAPPAWALL 1/Pa Compressibility of pipe wall
O|TP|PP|C MACH - Mach number
O|TP|PP|NS|NN MD KG/M3 Specific mass droplet
O|TP|PP|NS|NN MDHL KG/M3 Specific mass of oil droplets
O|TP|PP|NS|NN MDWT KG/M3 Specific mass of water droplets
O|TP|PP|NS|NN MG KG/M3 Specific mass gas
O|TP|PP|C MHLCONT KG/M3 Specific oil continuous mass
O|TP|PP|C MHLDISP KG/M3 Specific oil dispersed in water mass
O|TP|PP|NS|NN ML KG/M3 Specific mass liquid
O|TP|PP|NS|NN MLHL KG/M3 Specific mass of oil in film
O|TP|PP|C MLT KG/M3 Total liquid mass
O|TP|PP|C MLTHL KG/M3 Specific mass oil
O|TP|PP|C MLTWT KG/M3 Specific mass water
O|TP|PP|NS|NN MLWT KG/M3 Specific mass of water in film
O|TP|PP|C MWTCONT KG/M3 Specific water continuous mass
O|TP|PP|C MWTDISP KG/M3 Specific water dispersed in oil mass
- 556 -
Reference manual
O|TP|PP|C OILMFR - Oil mass fraction relative to the mass from all phases
O|TP|PP|C PSI KG/M3-S Mass rate of flashing to gas phase
O|TP|PP|C PSIHL KG/M3-S Mass rate of flashing from oil phase
O|TP|PP|C PSIWT KG/M3-S Mass rate of flashing from water phase
O|TP|PP|NS|NN PT PA Pressure
O|TP|PP|C PTMAX PA Maximum pressure
O|TP|PP|C PTMIN PA Minimum pressure
O|TP|PP|C Q2 W/M2-C Overall heat transfer coefficient
O|TP|PP|C QIN W/M Heat transfer from inner pipe wall to fluid
O|TP|PP|C QM W/M Heat loss per unit length from pipe wall to fluid
O|TP|PP|C RELLENGTH M Relative section Length from start of flowpath
O|TP|PP|C|NS|NN ROF KG/M3 Fluid mixture density including all phases (also any solids,
drilling fluids and deposits) in all layers.
O|TP|PP|C ROG KG/M3 Density of gas
O|TP|PP|C ROHL KG/M3 Oil density
O|TP|PP|C ROL KG/M3 Density of liquid
O|TP|PP|C ROWT KG/M3 Water density
O|TP|PP|C RS - Gas mass fraction relative to hydrocarbon liquid and gas

mass: (MG/(MG+MLTHL)) from PVT table
O|TP|PP|C RSW - Mass fraction of water vapour in gas
O|TP|PP|C SECLENGTH M Section length
O|TP|PP|C SEG J/KG-K Gas entropy
O|TP|PP|C SEL J/KG-K Liquid entropy
O|TP|PP|C SIG N/M Surface tension
O|TP|PP|C SSP M/S Speed of sound in fluid
O|TP|PP|C TCONG W/M-K Thermal conductivity of gas phase
O|TP|PP|C TCONHL W/M-K Thermal conductivity of oil phase
O|TP|PP|C TCONWT W/M-K Thermal conductivity of water phase
- 557 -
OLGA User manual
O|TP|PP|C TINHIBMFR - Total inhibitor mass fraction in water+ vapor
O|TP|PP|NS|NN TM C Fluid temperature
O|TP|PP|C TMMAX C Maximum Fluid temperature
O|TP|PP|C TMMIN C Minimum Fluid temperature
O|TP|PP|C TU C Ambient temperature
O|TP|PP|C TW C Temperature in center of gravity of wall (-100 C for non-

existing layers)
O|TP|PP|C TWATMFR - Total water mass fraction
O|TP|PP|C TWS C Inner wall surface temperature
O|TP|PP|C TWSO C Outer wall surface temperature
O|TP|PP|C UHLDISP M/S Oil dispersed in water velocity
O|TP|PP|C UWTDISP M/S Water dispersed in oil velocity
O|TP|PP|C VISG N-S/M2 Effective gas viscosity including mud and non-Newtonian
effects = shear stress divided by shear rate of Newtonian
fluid flow in pipe
O|TP|PP|C VISHL N-S/M2 Effective oil viscosity including wax/meg/mud/non-

Newtonian/effects = shear stress divided by shear rate of
Newtonian fluid flow in pipe
O|TP|PP|C VISHLEFF N-S/M2 Effective oil viscosity including dispersion effects in the
liquid layer. Note: This is not valid for the slug flow regime..
O|TP|PP|C VISHLTAB N-S/M2 Oil viscosity from fluid tables
O|TP|PP|C VISL N-S/M2 Liquid viscosity (no water-slip)
O|TP|PP|C VISWT N-S/M2 Effective water viscosity including wax/meg/mud/non-

Newtonian effects = shear stress divided by shear rate of
Newtonian fluid flow in pipe
O|TP|PP|C VISWTEFF N-S/M2 Effective water viscosity including dispersion effects in the
liquid layer. Note: This is not valid for the slug flow regime.
O|TP|PP|C VISWTTAB N-S/M2 Water viscosity from fluid tables
O|TP|PP|NS|NN VOL - Volume error
O|TP|PP|C VOLCHANGE - Relative change in volume
O|TP|PP|C VOLUME M3 Section volume
- 558 -
Reference manual
O|TP|PP|C WACBEWA - Volume fraction of continuous water to total liquid in film
O|TP|PP|C WACWA - Volume fraction of continuous water to total water in film
O|TP|PP|C WALLROUGH M Pipe wall roughness
O|TP|PP|C WATMFR - Water mass fraction relative to the mass from all phases
O|TP|PP|C WC - Water cut (In-situ)
O|TP|PP|C WCWALL - Water cut near wall
O|TP|PP|C YVOL M Vertical distance from branch inlet section midpoint to

section midpoint
O|TP|PP|C ZZVOL M Distance along the pipeline from branch inlet section
midpoint to section midpoint
Bundle Output Variables

Bundle variables can only be used when a SOLIDBUNDLE, FLUIDBUNDLE or an ANNULUS is given.
Bundle Variables
BNDL HAMBBUN W/M2-C Ambient heat transfer coefficient at specified position in bundle
BNDL TBUNXY C Temperature at specified position in bundle
Check valve Output Variables
Check valve Variables
TP|C|GTP CHECK NoUnit Check valve position: 0=open 1=closed
Compositional Output Variables

Compositional variables can only be used when compositional mass equations are used. This means
when the COMPOSITIONAL key in the OPTIONS keyword is either ON, MEG, MEOH, ETOH, BLACKOIL
or STEAMWATER-HC
- 559 -
OLGA User manual
When compositional variables can be used:
1. GLTWTLEAK is the same variable as CGWLEAK

2. GLTWTSOUR is the same variable as CGWSOUR
3. GLTWTWELL is the same variable as CGWWELL
GLTWTLEAK, GLTWTSOUR, GLTWTWELL are only available when using inhibitor tracking (MEG, MEOH
or ETOH).
Boundary Variables
O|TP|PP|C CACCGAG KG Accumulated gas mass flow
O|TP|PP|C CACCGAQ M3 Accumulated gas volume flow
O|TP|PP|C CACCGT KG Accumulated total mass flow
O|TP|PP|C CACCLIG KG Accumulated liquid mass flow
O|TP|PP|C CACCLIQ M3 Accumulated liquid volume flow
O|TP|PP|C CACCOIG KG Accumulated oil mass flow
O|TP|PP|C CACCOIQ M3 Accumulated oil volume flow
O|TP|PP|C CACCWAG KG Accumulated water mass flow
O|TP|PP|C CACCWAQ M3 Accumulated water volume flow
TP|PP|S CGDH KG/S Component mass rate in oil droplets
TP|PP|S CGDW KG/S Component mass rate in water droplets
TP|PP|S CGG KG/S Component mass rate in gas phase
TP|PP|S CGHT KG/S Component mass rate in oil phase
TP|PP|S CGLH KG/S Component mass rate in oil film
TP|PP|S CGLW KG/S Component mass rate in water film
TP|PP|S CGWT KG/S Component mass rate in water phase
TP|PP CMGEXP KG/M3 Component mass in gas phase of slug (Slug tracking
only. no slug: CMG)
TP|PP CMHDEXP KG/M3 Component mass in oil droplets of slug (Slug tracking
only. no slug: CMHD)
- 560 -
Reference manual
TP|PP CMHLEXP KG/M3 Component mass in oil film of slug (Slug tracking
only. no slug: CMHL)
TP|PP CMWDEXP KG/M3 Component mass in water droplets of slug (Slug

tracking only. no slug: CMWD)
TP|PP CMWLEXP KG/M3 Component mass in water film of slug (Slug tracking
only. no slug: CMWL)
O|TP|PP|C CQG M3/S Gas volume flow rate
O|TP|PP|C CQL M3/S Liquid volume flow rate
O|TP|PP|C CQLTHL M3/S Oil volume flow rate
O|TP|PP|C CQLTWT M3/S Water volume flow rate
TP|PP PTG Pa Partial pressure in gas phase
Branch Variables
TP|C|GTP CGASIN KG Accumulated component gas flow inlet boundary
TP|C|GTP CGASOUT KG Accumulated component gas flow outlet boundary
TP|C|GTP CLIQIN KG Accumulated component liquid flow inlet boundary
TP|C|GTP CLIQOUT KG Accumulated component liquid flow outlet boundary
TP|C|GTP CMASOUT KG Accumulated component mass flow outlet boundary
TP|C|GTP CMASSIN KG Accumulated component mass flow inlet boundary
TP|C|GTP CMASSOUT KG Accumulated component mass flow outlet boundary
TP|GTP|S CMTOT KG Total mass in branch
TP|C|GTP COILIN KG Accumulated component oil flow inlet boundary
TP|C|GTP COILOUT KG Accumulated component oil flow outlet boundary
TP|C|GTP CWATIN KG Accumulated component water flow inlet boundary
TP|C|GTP CWATOUT KG Accumulated component water flow outlet boundary
- 561 -
OLGA User manual
Leak Variables
TP|GTP CGGLEAK KG/S Leak mass rate in gas phase
TP|GTP CGHLEAK KG/S Leak mass rate in oil phase
TP|GTP CGTLEAK KG/S Leak mass rate in all phases
TP|GTP CGWLEAK KG/S Leak mass rate in water phase
TP|GTP GLTWTLEAK KG/S Leak mass rate in water phase
TP|GTP XGLEAK - Leak mole fraction in gas phase
TP|GTP XGMLEAK - Leak mass fraction in gas phase
TP|GTP XHLEAK - Leak mole fraction in oil phase
TP|GTP XHMLEAK - Leak mass fraction in oil phase
TP|GTP XWLEAK - Leak mole fraction in water phase
TP|GTP XWMLEAK - Leak mass fraction in water phase
TP|GTP ZLEAK - Leak mole fraction in all phases
TP|GTP ZMLEAK - Leak mass fraction in all phases
Separator Variables
NS CAEDLM KG Accumulated emergency drain liquid mass flow
NS CAEDOM KG Accumulated emergency drain oil mass flow
NS CAEDWM KG Accumulated emergency drain water mass flow
NS CAGOGM KG Accumulated gas outlet gas mass flow
NS CAGOLM KG Accumulated gas outlet liquid mass flow
NS CAGOOM KG Accumulated gas outlet oil mass flow
NS CAGOTM KG Accumulated gas outlet total mass flow
NS CAGOWM KG Accumulated gas outlet water mass flow
NS CAODLM KG Accumulated oil drain liquid mass flow
NS CAODOM KG Accumulated oil drain oil mass flow
NS CAODWM KG Accumulated oil drain water mass flow
- 562 -
Reference manual
NS CATDGM KG Accumulated total drain gas mass flow
NS CATDLM KG Accumulated total drain liquid mass flow
NS CATDOM KG Accumulated total drain oil mass flow
NS CATDTM KG Accumulated total drain total mass flow
NS CATDWM KG Accumulated total drain water mass flow
NS CAWDLM KG Accumulated water drain liquid mass flow
NS CAWDOM KG Accumulated water drain oil mass flow
NS CAWDWM KG Accumulated water drain water mass flow
NS CEDLMF KG/S Emergency drain liquid mass flow
NS CEDOMF KG/S Emergency drain oil mass flow
NS CEDWMF KG/S Emergency drain water mass flow
NS CGOGMF KG/S Gas outlet gas mass flow
NS CGOLMF KG/S Gas outlet total liquid mass flow
NS CGOOMF KG/S Gas outlet oil mass flow
NS CGOTMF KG/S Gas outlet total mass flow
NS CGOWMF KG/S Gas outlet water mass flow
NS CODLMF KG/S Oil drain liquid mass flow
NS CODOMF KG/S Oil drain oil mass flow
NS CODWMF KG/S Oil drain water mass flow
NS CTDGMF KG/S Total drain gas mass flow
NS CTDLMF KG/S Total drain liquid mass flow
NS CTDOMF KG/S Total drain oil mass flow
NS CTDTMF KG/S Total drain total mass flow
NS CTDWMF KG/S Total drain water mass flow
NS CWDLMF KG/S Water drain liquid mass flow
NS CWDOMF KG/S Water drain oil mass flow
NS CWDWMF KG/S Water drain water mass flow
- 563 -
OLGA User manual
Slug Variables
TP CMGFSB KG/M3 Component mass in gas phase ahead of slug front

(Slug tracking only)
TP CMGFSL KG/M3 Component mass in gas phase behind slug front

TP CMGTSB KG/M3 Component mass in gas phase behind slug tail (Slug
tracking only)
TP CMGTSL KG/M3 Component mass in gas phase ahead of slug tail

TP CMHDFSB KG/M3 Component mass in oil droplets ahead of slug front

TP CMHDFSL KG/M3 Component mass in oil droplets behind slug front

TP CMHDTSB KG/M3 Component mass in oil droplets behind slug tail (Slug
tracking only)
TP CMHDTSL KG/M3 Component mass in oil droplets ahead of slug tail

TP CMHLFSB KG/M3 Component mass in oil film ahead of slug front (Slug
tracking only)
TP CMHLFSL KG/M3 Component mass in oil film behind slug front (Slug
tracking only)
TP CMHLTSB KG/M3 Component mass in oil film behind slug tail (Slug
tracking only)
TP CMHLTSL KG/M3 Component mass in oil film ahead of slug tail (Slug
tracking only)
TP CMWDFSB KG/M3 Component mass in water droplets ahead of slug

front (Slug tracking only)
TP CMWDFSL KG/M3 Component mass in water droplets behind slug front

TP CMWDTSB KG/M3 Component mass in water droplets behind slug tail

TP CMWDTSL KG/M3 Component mass in water droplets ahead of slug tail

TP CMWLFSB KG/M3 Component mass in water film ahead of slug front

- 564 -
Reference manual
TP CMWLFSL KG/M3 Component mass in water film behind slug front (Slug
tracking only)
TP CMWLTSB KG/M3 Component mass in water film behind slug tail (Slug
tracking only)
TP CMWLTSL KG/M3 Component mass in water film ahead of slug tail

Source Variables
TP|GTP CGGSOUR KG/S Source mass rate in gas phase
TP|GTP CGHSOUR KG/S Source mass rate in oil phase
TP|GTP CGTSOUR KG/S Source mass rate in all phases
TP|GTP CGWSOUR KG/S Source mass rate in water phase
TP|GTP GLTWTSOUR KG/S Source mass rate in water phase
TP|GTP XGMSOUR - Source mass fraction in gas phase
TP|GTP XGSOUR - Source mole fraction in gas phase
TP|GTP XHMSOUR - Source mass fraction in oil phase
TP|GTP XHSOUR - Source mole fraction in oil phase
TP|GTP XWMSOUR - Source mass fraction in water phase
TP|GTP XWSOUR - Source mole fraction in water phase
TP|GTP ZMSOUR - Source mass fraction in all phases
TP|GTP ZSOUR - Source mole fraction in all phases
Volume Variables
O|TP|PP|C CACCLIQBR M3 Accumulated liquid volume along branch
O|TP|PP|C CACCOILBR M3 Accumulated oil volume along branch
O|TP|PP|C CACCWATBR M3 Accumulated water volume along branch
TP|PP CGPSI KG/M3-S Mass rate of flashing to gas phase
O|TP|PP|C CHOLHG - Gas volume fraction (mass in gas phase divided by

gas phase density)
- 565 -
OLGA User manual
O|TP|PP|C CHOLHL - Oil volume fraction (mass in oil phase divided by oil
phase density)
O|TP|PP|C CHOLWT - Water volume fraction (mass in water phase divided

by water phase density)
TP|PP CHPSI KG/M3-S Mass rate of flashing to oil phase
TP|PP|S CMG KG/M3 Specific mass in gas phase
TP|PP|S CMHD KG/M3 Mass in oil droplets
TP|PP|S CMHL KG/M3 Mass in oil film
TP|PP|S CMLTHL KG/M3 Specific mass in oil phase
TP|PP|S CMLTWT KG/M3 Specific mass in water phase
TP|PP|S CMWD KG/M3 Mass in water droplets
TP|PP|S CMWL KG/M3 Mass in water film
TP|PP CWPSI KG/M3-S Mass rate of flashing to water phase
TP|PP DMGE KG/M3 (Equilibrium mass - mass) in gas phase
TP|PP DMHE KG/M3 (Equilibrium mass - mass) in oil phase
TP|PP DMWE KG/M3 (Equilibrium mass - mass) in water phase
TP|PP MWGAS KG/KMOL Mole weight of gas phase
TP|PP MWOIL KG/KMOL Mole weight of oil phase
TP|PP MWWAT KG/KMOL Mole weight of water phase
O|TP|PP PHASEDESCRIPTORGAS NoUnit Gas phase descriptor: -1=non-existing phase,

0=shadow phase, 1=existing phase
O|TP|PP PHASEDESCRIPTOROIL NoUnit Oil phase descriptor: -1=non-existing phase,

O|TP|PP PHASEDESCRIPTORWATER NoUnit Water phase descriptor: -1=non-existing phase,

TP|PP XG - Mole fraction of gas phase
TP|PP XGE - Equilibrium mole weight in gas phase
TP|PP XGM - Mass fraction in gas phase
TP|PP XGME - Equilibrium mole weight of gas phase
- 566 -
Reference manual
TP|PP XH - Mole fraction of oil phase
TP|PP XHE - Equilibrium mole weight of gas phase
TP|PP XHM - Mass fraction in oil phase
TP|PP XHME - Equilibrium mass fraction in oil phase
TP|PP XPG - Total mole fraction of gas phase
TP|PP XPO - Total mole fraction of oil phase
TP|PP XPW - Total mole fraction of water phase
TP|PP XW - Mole fraction in water phase
TP|PP XWE - Equilibrium mole fraction in water phase
TP|PP XWM - Mass fraction in water phase
TP|PP XWME - Equilibrium mass fraction in water phase
TP|PP Z - Total molar composition
TP|PP ZM - Total mass composition
Well Variables
TP|GTP CGGWELL KG/S Well mass rate in gas phase
TP|GTP CGHWELL KG/S Well mass rate in oil phase
TP|GTP CGTWELL KG/S Well mass rate in all phases
TP|GTP CGWWELL KG/S Well mass rate in water phase
TP|GTP GLTWTWELL KG/S Well mass rate in water phase
TP|GTP XGMWELL - Well mass fraction in gas phase
TP|GTP XGWELL - Well mole fraction in gas phase
TP|GTP XHMWELL - Well mass fraction in oil phase
TP|GTP XHWELL - Well mole fraction in oil phase
TP|GTP XWMWELL - Well mass fraction in water phase
TP|GTP XWWELL - Well mole fraction in water phase
TP|GTP ZMWELL - Well mass fraction in all phases
TP|GTP ZWELL - Well mole fraction in all phases
- 567 -
OLGA User manual
Compressor Output Variables
Compressor Variables
TP|C|GTP DHRCOO W Compressor recycle heat exchanger Enthalpy
TP|C|GTP GCOMP KG/S Compressor mass flow rate
TP|C|GTP GREC KG/S Compressor recycle mass flow rate
TP|C|GTP HCOMP W Compressor enthalpy
TP|C|GTP HREC W Compressor recycle enthalpy
TP|C|GTP QGSURGE M3/S Corrected compressor surge flow
TP|C|GTP RPM RPM Compressor speed
Controller Output Variables
Controller Variables
GTP|NC ACTIVATED NoUnit Controller activate signal
GTP|NC CONTR NoUnit Controller output
GTP|NC ERRVAR NoUnit Controller error signal
GTP|NC INTGVAR NoUnit Controller integral signal
GTP|NC MEASVAR NoUnit Controller measured variable
GTP|NC MODE NoUnit Controller mode: 1=Automatic, 2=Manual, 3=External signal, 4=External
setpoint, 5=Freeze
GTP|NC PMCAS NoUnit Moving averaged of primary controller variable
GTP|NC RATELIMITED NoUnit Controller rate limited signal
GTP|NC SATURATED NoUnit Controller saturated signal
GTP|NC SETPOINT NoUnit Setpoint of extended cascade controller
GTP|NC SETPVAR NoUnit Controller setpoint variable
- 568 -
Reference manual
Corrosion Output Variables

Corrosion variables can only be used when the CORROSION keyword is given. Corrosion variables which
are not relevant for a simulation (e.g., CORR1 of Model 1 is not used) are given the value -999 if plotted.
Volume Variables
O|TP|PP|C COBICARB NoUnit Bicarbonate concentration (Molar)
O|TP|PP|C CONDRATE KG/S-M2 Conden.rate in pipe upper half
O|TP|PP|C CORR1 MM/Y Corrosion rate
O|TP|PP|C CORRW1 MM/Y Corr. rate, full water wet.
O|TP|PP|C GLYCOL NoUnit Glycol concentration
O|TP|PP|C INHIB NoUnit Inhibitor efficiency
O|TP|PP|C IONIC NoUnit Ionic strength concentration (Molar)
O|TP|PP|C PCO2 PA Partial pressure of CO2
O|TP|PP|C PH1 NoUnit pH for model 1
O|TP|PP|C SOLFE NoUnit Saturated iron concentration in PPM
- 569 -
OLGA User manual
Drilling Output Variables

Drilling variables can only be used when DRILLING=ON in the OPTIONS keyword.
Bitnode Variables
NN BITMD M Bit position (measured depth)
NN BITROP M/S Penetration speed of drill bit
NN BITSEC NoUnit Bit section number from top of drillingstring
NN DRDMD M Measured depth drilled
NN DRDSEC NoUnit Drilled section number from top of drillingstring
NN DRILLINGPOWER W Drill string power
NN DRILLINGROT RPM Angular velocity of drillstring
NN DRILLINGTORQUE NM Drill string torque
NN DRNPTA Pa Pressure at bit position, annulus string
NN DRNPTD Pa Pressure at bit position, drilling string
NN ISDRILLING NoUnit 1 if bit measured depth equals measured drilled depth. 0

otherwise.
Boundary Variables
O|TP|PP|C DRLFROGSTD KG/M3 Flowing standard gas density
O|TP|PP|C GDOMUD KG/S Mass flow rate of oil-based mud in droplet
O|TP|PP|C GDPH2O KG/S Mass flow rate of produced water in droplet
O|TP|PP|C GDPHC KG/S Mass flow rate of produced hc in droplet
O|TP|PP|C GDWMUD KG/S Mass flow rate of water-based mud in droplet
O|TP|PP|C GGFM KG/S Mass flow of composite gas
O|TP|PP|C GGFMEXTGAS KG/S Mass flow of gas in composite gas
O|TP|PP|C GGFMINTOIL KG/S Mass flow of oil in composite gas
- 570 -
Reference manual
O|TP|PP|C GGFMINTWAT KG/S Mass flow of water in composite gas
O|TP|PP|C GGGMUD KG/S Mass flow rate of gas-based mud
O|TP|PP|C GGOMUD KG/S Mass flow rate of oil-based mud in gas phase
O|TP|PP|C GGPH2O KG/S Mass flow rate of produced water in gas phase
O|TP|PP|C GGPHC KG/S Mass flow rate of produced hc in gas phase
O|TP|PP|C GGWEIGHT KG/S Mass flow of weight material in composite gas
O|TP|PP|C GGWMUD KG/S Mass flow rate of water-based mud in gas phase
O|TP|PP|C GLOMUD KG/S Mass flow rate of oil-based mud in film
O|TP|PP|C GLPH2O KG/S Mass flow rate of produced water in film
O|TP|PP|C GLPHC KG/S Mass flow rate of produced hc in film
O|TP|PP|C GLTHLFM KG/S Mass flow of composite oil
O|TP|PP|C GLTHLFMEXTOIL KG/S Mass flow of oil in composite oil
O|TP|PP|C GLTHLFMINTGAS KG/S Mass flow of gas in composite oil
O|TP|PP|C GLTHLFMINTWAT KG/S Mass flow of water in composite oil
O|TP|PP|C GLTHLWEIGHT KG/S Mass flow of weight material in composite oil
O|TP|PP|C GLTPH2O KG/S Mass flow rate of produced water in film and droplets
O|TP|PP|C GLTPHC KG/S Mass flow rate of produced hydrocarbons in film and droplets
O|TP|PP|C GLTWTFM KG/S Mass flow of composite water
O|TP|PP|C GLTWTFMEXTWAT KG/S Mass flow of water in composite water
O|TP|PP|C GLTWTFMINTGAS KG/S Mass flow of gas in composite water
O|TP|PP|C GLTWTFMINTOIL KG/S Mass flow of oil in composite water
O|TP|PP|C GLTWTWEIGHT KG/S Mass flow of weight material in composite water
O|TP|PP|C GLWMUD KG/S Mass flow rate of water-based mud in film
O|TP|PP|C GTOMUD KG/S Total mass flow rate of oil-based mud
O|TP|PP|C GTPH2O KG/S Total mass flow rate of produced water
O|TP|PP|C GTPHC KG/S Total mass flow rate of produced hc
O|TP|PP|C GTWMUD KG/S Total mass flow rate of water-based mud
- 571 -
OLGA User manual
Volume Variables
O|TP|PP|C ACTIVE NoUnit Not drilled yet if active=0. Ordinary section if active=1
O|TP|PP|C|NN ALFM - Composite gas volume fraction
O|TP|PP|C|NN ALFMEXTGAS - Volume fraction of external gas in composite gas
O|TP|PP|C|NN ALFMINTOIL - Volume fraction of internal oil in composite gas
O|TP|PP|C|NN ALFMINTWAT - Volume fraction of internal water in composite gas
O|TP|PP|C ALMUD - Total gas volume fraction for all muds
O|TP|PP|C ALPF - Void (gas volume fraction) for mud-free gas
O|TP|PP|C|NN ALWEIGHT - Volume fraction of weight materials in composite gas
O|TP|PP|C ANNDRILLSTATUS NoUnit Section status in Annulus. NotApplicable = -1, NotDrilled = 0,

BelowBit = 1, AboveBit = 2, WithBit = 3
O|TP|PP|C BEFM - Volume fraction of composite liquid film
O|TP|PP|C BEHLFM - Volume fraction of composite oil film
O|TP|PP|C BEWTFM - Volume fraction of composite water film
O|TP|PP|C ECD KG/M3 Equivalent circulating density
O|TP|PP|C GAFM - Volume fraction of composite droplets
O|TP|PP|C GAHLFM - Volume fraction of composite oil droplets
O|TP|PP|C GAWTFM - Volume fraction of composite water droplets
O|TP|PP|C HOLFM - Volume fraction of composite liquid
O|TP|PP|C|NN HOLHLFM - Volume fraction of composite oil
O|TP|PP|C|NN HOLHLFMEXTOIL - Volume fraction of external oil in composite oil
O|TP|PP|C|NN HOLHLFMINTGAS - Volume fraction of internal gas in composite oil
O|TP|PP|C|NN HOLHLFMINTWAT - Volume fraction of internal water in composite oil
O|TP|PP|C HOLHLMUD - Total oil volume fraction for all muds
O|TP|PP|C HOLHLPF - Oil volume fraction for mud-free oil
O|TP|PP|C|NN HOLHLWEIGHT - Volume fraction of weight materials in composite oil
O|TP|PP|C|NN HOLWTFM - Volume fraction of composite water
- 572 -
Reference manual
O|TP|PP|C|NN HOLWTFMEXTWAT - Volume fraction of external water in composite water
O|TP|PP|C|NN HOLWTFMINTGAS - Volume fraction of internal gas in composite water
O|TP|PP|C|NN HOLWTFMINTOIL - Volume fraction of internal oil in composite water
O|TP|PP|C HOLWTMUD - Total water volume fraction for all muds
O|TP|PP|C HOLWTPF - Water volume fraction for mud-free water
O|TP|PP|C|NN HOLWTWEIGHT - Volume fraction of weight materials in composite water
O|TP|PP|C|NN MDOMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of oil-based mud in droplet
O|TP|PP|C|NN MDPH2O KG/M3 Specific mass of produced water in droplet
O|TP|PP|C|NN MDPHC KG/M3 Specific mass of produced hc in droplet
O|TP|PP|C|NN MDWMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of water-based mud in droplet
O|TP|PP|C|NN MFAMUD - Mass fraction of all muds in total mass
O|TP|PP|C|NN MFGMUD - Mass fraction of gas-based mud in total mass
O|TP|PP|C|NN MFOMUD - Mass fraction of oil-based mud in total mass
O|TP|PP|C|NN MFPH2O - Mass fraction of produced water in total mass
O|TP|PP|C|NN MFPHC KG/M3 Mass fraction of produced hc in total mass
O|TP|PP|C|NN MFWMUD - Mass fraction of water-based mud in total mass
O|TP|PP|C|NN MGFM KG/M3 Specific mass of composite gas
O|TP|PP|C|NN MGFMEXTGAS KG/M3 Specific mass of gas in composite gas
O|TP|PP|C|NN MGFMINTOIL KG/M3 Specific mass of internal oil in composite gas
O|TP|PP|C|NN MGFMINTWAT KG/M3 Specific mass of internal water in composite gas
O|TP|PP|C|NN MGGMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of gas-based mud
O|TP|PP|C|NN MGOMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of oil-based mud in gas phase
O|TP|PP|C|NN MGPH2O KG/M3 Specific mass of produced water in gas phase
O|TP|PP|C|NN MGPHC KG/M3 Specific mass of produced hc in gas phase
O|TP|PP|C|NN MGWEIGHT KG/M3 Specific mass of weight materials in composite gas
O|TP|PP|C|NN MGWMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of water-based mud in gas phase
O|TP|PP|C|NN MLOMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of oil-based mud in film
- 573 -
OLGA User manual
O|TP|PP|C|NN MLPH2O KG/M3 Specific mass of produced water in film
O|TP|PP|C|NN MLPHC KG/M3 Specific mass of produced hc in film
O|TP|PP|C|NN MLTHLFM KG/M3 Specific mass of composite oil
O|TP|PP|C|NN MLTHLFMEXTOIL KG/M3 Specific mass of oil in composite oil
O|TP|PP|C|NN MLTHLFMINTGAS KG/M3 Specific mass of internal gas in composite oil
O|TP|PP|C|NN MLTHLFMINTWAT KG/M3 Specific mass of internal water in composite oil
O|TP|PP|C|NN MLTHLWEIGHT KG/M3 Specific mass of weight materials in composite oil
O|TP|PP|C|NN MLTWTFM KG/M3 Specific mass of composite water
O|TP|PP|C|NN MLTWTFMEXTWAT KG/M3 Specific mass of water in composite water
O|TP|PP|C|NN MLTWTFMINTGAS KG/M3 Specific mass of internal gas in composite water
O|TP|PP|C|NN MLTWTFMINTOIL KG/M3 Specific mass of internal oil in composite water
O|TP|PP|C|NN MLTWTWEIGHT KG/M3 Specific mass of weight materials in composite water
O|TP|PP|C|NN MLWMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of water-based mud in film
O|TP|PP|C|NN MTAMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of all muds
O|TP|PP|C|NN MTOMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of oil-based mud
O|TP|PP|C|NN MTPH2O KG/M3 Specific mass of produced water
O|TP|PP|C|NN MTPHC KG/M3 Specific mass of produced hc
O|TP|PP|C|NN MTWMUD KG/M3 Specific mass of water-based mud
O|TP|PP|C ROGFM KG/M3 Density of composite gas
O|TP|PP|C ROHLFM KG/M3 Density of composite oil
O|TP|PP|C ROWTFM KG/M3 Density of composite water
O|TP|PP TSATOMUD C Saturation temperature of oil based mud
O|TP|PP TSATWMUD C Saturation temperature of water based mud
- 574 -
Reference manual
Heat exchanger Output Variables
Heat exchanger Variables
TP|C|GTP DHCOOL W Heat exchanger enthalpy
HTCRIT Numerical codes

Below is an overview of the HTCRIT Numerical codes:
Number Value Description

0 CRIT_NONE No criterion
1 CRIT_CFL_MASS Time step reduced due to the CFL criterion (DTCONTROL
CFL=ON).
2 CRIT_PRESSURE Time step reduced due to the second order derivative dP/dt
criterion (DTCONTROL PRESSURE=ON).
3 CRIT_GRADPRESSURE Time step reduced due to the first order derivative dP/dt
criterion (DTCONTROL GRADPRESSURE=ON).
4 CRIT_SOUND_CFL Time step reduced due to the speed of sound criterion
(DTCONTROL SOUND_CFL=ON).
5 CRIT_CVDISC Time step reduced due to the discretization limitation when
using Slug Tracking.
6 CRIT_NODE_CFL Time step reduced due to the CFL criterion limitation on node
(DTCONTROL CFL=ON).
7 CRIT_NODE_VOLERR Time step reduced due to the too large volume error change
in a node, internal or boundary, pressure induced.
8 CRIT_NODE_GRADPRESSURE Time step reduced due to the first order derivative dP/dt
criterion on Node (DTCONTROL GRADPRESSURE=ON).
9 CRIT_DTMAX Time step limited by MAXDT.
10 CRIT_DTMIN Time step limited by MINDT.
11 CRIT_INCR_TOO_SMALL
This is an OLGA time step limiting criterion that will keep the
old time step if the newly calculated time step is less than
11% higher than the old one. The reason for this limitation is
a worry that some cases might encounter numerical
instabilities if the time step is frequently changed; hence a
small potential increase in time step length is ignored to
maximize numerical stability. See also note below.
12 CRIT_VOLERR Time step reduced due to volume error.

13 CRIT_VOLERR_GLOB Time step reduced due to global volume error.
14 CRIT_MAXNEXT Time step increase is limited by a factor of 1.33 from one
step to the next step.
15 CRIT_ARISSTON Arisston is a connection to Roxc, hence it is related to a Roxc
initiated limitation.
- 575 -
OLGA User manual
Number Value Description

16 CRIT_CONTROLLER Time step reduced due to controller. Setting
TIMESTEPCONTROL = OFF removes this criterion.
17 CRIT_FLOWDIRCHANGE Time step reduced due to flow direction change.
18 CRIT_FEMTHERM Time step reduced due to FemTherm.
19 CRIT_PUMP Time step reduced due to pump.
20 CRIT_TRYAGAIN Run time step again is triggered.
21 CRIT_RESSIM_RUNAGAIN Reserved for future use with reservoir simulator.
22 CRIT_RESSIM_ITER Reserved for future use with reservoir simulator.
23 CRIT_DRILLING Time step reduced due to movement of bit in drilling.
24 CRIT_MASS_CHANGE Time step reduced due to change in mass criterion
(DTCONTROL MASS=ON).
25 CRIT_VELOCITY_CHANGE Reserved for future use.
26 CRIT_ENERGY_CHANGE Time step reduced due to change in energy criterion
(DTCONTROL ENERGY=ON).
27 CRIT_VELOCITY_FRONT Time step reduced due to velocity front criterion
(DTCONTROL VELFRONT=ON).
28 CRIT_HTEXT Time step reduced due to external component.
29 CRIT_RHEOLOGY Time step reduced due to change in viscosity criterion
(DTCONTROL RHEOLOGY=ON).
Numerical code 11
Concerns have been raised that this criterion can result in a significant reduction of simulation speed,
however the maximum speed-up gained by removing this criterion is 11%. This gain is achieved under the
assumption that HTCRIT=11 is the limiting criterion close to 100% of the time, and that the new, discarded,
time step is just below the 11% threshold. In typical simulations where HTCRIT=11 is the criterion at play,
other dominating time step limiting criteria might result in new time steps well below 11%, and, thus, the
impact will be even smaller.
Examples:
1.In a test case where HTCRIT=11 was the limiting criterion 95% of the time, the difference in simulation
speed was only 5-6% in the end as compared to eliminating this criterion.
2.In a different, but similar, case where slug tracking was used, the difference was seen to be less than
1%, because HTCRIT=11 was rarely the criterion used to limit the time step.
- 576 -
Reference manual
Hydrate kinetics Output Variables

Hydrate Kinetics variables can only be used when the HYDRATEKINETICS keyword is given.
Boundary Variables
O|TP|PP|C GLHYD KG/S Hydrate mass flow
O|TP|PP|C SRATEHYD 1/S Shear rate used for hydrate kinetic model
O|TP|PP|C UHYD M/S Hydrate slurry velocity
O|TP|PP|C WLHYD KG/S-M2 Hydrate mass flux
Branch Variables
TP|C|GTP MASSHYD KG Hydrate mass in branch
TP|C|GTP MDPHYDC PA Current maximum difference between section and hydrate pressure
TP|C|GTP MDPPOSC M Current distance where section and hydrate pressure differs most
TP|C|GTP MDTHYDC C Current maximum difference between hydrate and section temperature
TP|C|GTP MDTPOSC M Current distance where section and hydrate temperature differs most
TP|C|GTP VOLHYD M3 Hydrate volume in branch
Volume Variables
O|TP|PP|C BEHYD - Hydrate volume fraction
O|TP|PP|C CPHYD J/KG-C Specific heat of hydrate phase
O|TP|PP|C GASRATE KG/M3-S Hydrate gas consumption rate
O|TP|PP|C HHYD J/KG Hydrate enthalpy
O|TP|PP|C HYDFRAC - Hydrate volume fraction in slurry
O|TP|PP|C HYDMASS KG/M3 Specific hydrate mass
O|TP|PP|C HYDPT PA Hydrate formation pressure
O|TP|PP|C HYDTM C Hydrate formation temperature
- 577 -
OLGA User manual
O|TP|PP|C HYKPLIST NoUnit CSMHYK parameter
O|TP|PP|C NPARTICLE NoUnit Number of hydrate monomer particles
O|TP|PP|C PSIHYD KG/M3-S Hydrate formation rate per unit volume
O|TP|PP|C SAREA 1/M Hydrate formation area per per unit volume
O|TP|PP|C VISRATIO - Hydrate slurry viscosity ratio
Jet pump Output Variables

The Jet pump output variables are related to:
 The flow in the power line through the nozzle

 The flow in the suction line through the orifice caused by the presence of the nozzle
 The flow through the mixing tube and the diffuser
In each of these areas, pressure differentials, flow rates, velocities and pressures are available. For the
suction and power line orifices, critical flow may occur, therefore critical data are also available.
Jet pump Variables
JP DPDIFFUSER PA Diffuser pressure change
JP DPMIXTUBE PA Mixing tube pressure change
JP DPPOWER PA Power line pressure change
JP DPSUCTION PA Suction line pressure change
JP GCPOWER KG/S Critical mass flow rate in power line
JP GCSUCTION KG/S Critical mass flow rate in suction line
JP GDIFFUSER KG/S Mass flow rate in diffuser
JP GPOWER KG/S Mass flow rate in power line
JP GSUCTION KG/S Mass flow rate in suction line
JP ICPOWER NoUnit Critical flow in power line: 0=subcrit, 1=crit
JP ICSUCTION NoUnit Critical flow in suction line: 0=subcrit, 1=crit
JP PDIFFUSERIN PA Pressure at diffuser inlet
JP PDIFFUSEROUT PA Pressure at diffuser outlet
- 578 -
Reference manual
JP PPOWERIN PA Pressure at power line inlet
JP PPOWEROUT PA Pressure at power line outlet
JP PSUCTIONIN PA Pressure at suction line inlet
JP PSUCTIONOUT PA Pressure at suction line outlet/mixing tube inlet
JP UCPOWER M/S Critical velocity in power line
JP UCSUCTION M/S Critical velocity in suction line
JP UDIFFUSERIN M/S Velocity at diffuser inlet
JP UDIFFUSEROUT M/S Velocity at diffuser outlet
JP UPOWERIN M/S Velocity at power line inlet
JP UPOWEROUT M/S Velocity at power line outlet
JP USUCTIONIN M/S Velocity at suction line inlet
JP USUCTIONOUT M/S Velocity at suction line outlet
Leak Output Variables

QGSTLK, QLSTLK, QOSTLK and QWSTLK are given at standard conditions (60°F, 1 atm). A single stage
flash from in-situ to standard conditions has been performed, that is, mass transfer between the phases
from in-situ to standard conditions is taken into account. The gas is not dehydrated unless WATERFLASH
= OFF. For table-based simulations, OLGA uses the gas mass fractions and densities from the fluid
property file to perform the conversion.
Leak Variables
TP|C|GTP ACGLK KG Leakage accumulated released gas mass upstream
TP|C|GTP ACGLKEX KG Leakage accumulated released gas mass downstream
TP|C|GTP ACHLLK KG Leakage accumulated released oil mass upstream
TP|C|GTP ACHLLKEX KG Leakage accumulated released oil mass downstream
TP|C|GTP ACMLK KG Leakage accumulated released mass
TP|C|GTP ACQGLKEX M3 Accumulated gas volume downstream of leakage
- 579 -
OLGA User manual
TP|C|GTP ACQOLKEX M3 Accumulated oil volume downstream of leakage
TP|C|GTP ACQWLKEX M3 Accumulated water volume downstream of leakage
TP|C|GTP ACWTLK KG Leakage accumulated released water mass upstream
TP|C|GTP ACWTLKEX KG Leakage accumulated released water mass downstream
TP|C|GTP DPPROD PA GLV change in opening production pressure
TP|C|GTP GGLEAK KG/S Gas mass flow upstream of leakage
TP|C|GTP GGLKEX KG/S Gas mass flow downstream of leakage
TP|C|GTP GLHLLK KG/S Oil mass flow upstream of leakage
TP|C|GTP GLLEAK KG/S Liquid mass flow upstream of leakage
TP|C|GTP GLLKEX KG/S Liquid mass flow downstream of leakage
TP|C|GTP GLVTEMP C GLV bellows temperature
TP|C|GTP GLWTLK KG/S Water mass flow upstream of leakage
TP|C|GTP GOLKEX KG/S Oil mass flow downstream of leakage
TP|C|GTP GTLEAK KG/S Leakage total mass flow rate
TP|C|GTP GWLKEX KG/S Water mass flow downstream of leakage
TP|C|GTP HLEAK W Leakage enthalpy flow rate
TP|C|GTP LMLEAK KG Leakage accumulated released liquid mass upstream
TP|C|GTP PTLEAK PA Pressure at the position where Leak is targeted
TP|C|GTP PTLKUP PA Pressure at the position where Leak is positioned
TP|C|GTP PTROPEN PA Test rack pressure at 60 F that is required to open the valve
TP|C|GTP QGLKEX M3/S Gas volume flow rate downstream of leakage
TP|C|GTP QGSTLK SM3/S Leak gas volume flow at standard conditions
TP|C|GTP QLSTLK SM3/S Leak liquid volume flow at standard conditions
TP|C|GTP QOLKEX M3/S Oil volume flow rate downstream of leakage
TP|C|GTP QOSTLK SM3/S Leak oil volume flow at standard conditions
TP|C|GTP QTLKEX M3/S Total volume flow rate downstream of leakage
TP|C|GTP QWLKEX M3/S Water volume flow rate downstream of leakage
- 580 -
Reference manual
TP|C|GTP QWSTLK SM3/S Leak water volume flow at standard conditions
TP|C|GTP TLEAEX C Temperature of fluid coming out of the leak. Only relevant when there is
flow through the leakage.
TP|C|GTP TLEAK C Fluid temperature upstream of leakage(into leak)
TP|C|GTP VPCGG KG/S VPC gas mass flow rate
TP|C|GTP WLLEAK KG/S- Leakage liquid mass flux

M2
Node Output Variables

The NODE variables are available only for boundary NODES. In addition, many VOLUME variables are
available to all NODES.
Node Variables
NN CGGBOU KG/S Gas mass flow for each component at boundary node
NN CGLTHLBOU KG/S Oil mass flow for each component at boundary node
NN CGLTWTBOU KG/S Water mass flow for each component at boundary node
NN DGGDPB kg/s-Pa Gas mass flow derivative w.r.t. pressure at boundary node
NN DGLTHLDPB kg/s-Pa Oil mass flow derivative w.r.t. pressure at boundary node
NN DGLTWTDPB kg/s-Pa Water mass flow derivative w.r.t. pressure at boundary node
NN DPBDGG Pa-s/kg Pressure derivative w.r.t. gas mass flow at boundary node
NN DPBDGLTHL Pa-s/kg Pressure derivative w.r.t. oil mass flow at boundary node
NN DPBDGLTWT Pa-s/kg Pressure derivative w.r.t. water mass flow at boundary node
NN GGBOU KG/S Gas mass flow at boundary node
NN GLTHLBOU KG/S Oil mass flow at boundary node
NN GLTWTBOU KG/S Water mass flow at boundary node
NN GTBOU KG/S Total mass flow at boundary node
NN PTBOU PA Pressure at boundary node
NN TMBOU C Fluid temperature at boundary node
- 581 -
OLGA User manual
OneSubsea pump Output Variables
OneSubsea pump Variables
TP|C|GTP ACCTRIP NoUnit Accumulated number of times the trip signal has changed from 0 to 1
TP|C|GTP GPMINFLOW - Minimum flow limit/total flow
TP|C|GTP GPPOW - Used power/available power
TP|C|GTP GPRECFLOW - Volumetric flow in recirculation/total volumetric flow
TP|C|GTP GPTHRUST - Pump pressure differential/maximum pump pressure differential
TP|C|GTP GVFMIX - Gas volume fraction in mixer
TP|C|GTP LLMIX M Liquid level mixer
TP|C|GTP PUMPQTABS M3/S Total absolute volume flow through the pump (PUMPQT + PUREQT)
TP|C|GTP PUREQT M3/S Total volumetric recycle flow
TP|C|GTP TCM NoUnit Choke dead band counter
TP|C|GTP TEMPDISCH C Temperature at pump outlet
Particle flow Output Variables

Particle Flow variables can only be used with PARTICLEFLOW = SIMPLE or ADVANCED in the
OPTIONS keyword.
Boundary Variables
O|TP|PP|C ACCGAGPARTICLE KG Accumulated particle mass flow in gas
O|TP|PP|C ACCGAQPARTICLE M3 Accumulated particle volume flow in gas
O|TP|PP|C ACCGTPARTICLE KG Accumulated particle mass flow (bed + suspension)
O|TP|PP|C ACCGTPARTICLEBED KG Accumulated mass flow of particles in bed
O|TP|PP|C ACCGTPARTICLESUS KG Accumulated mass flow of suspended particles
O|TP|PP|C ACCOIGPARTICLE KG Accumulated particle mass flow in oil
- 582 -
Reference manual
O|TP|PP|C ACCOIQPARTICLE M3 Accumulated particle volume flow in oil
O|TP|PP|C ACCQTPARTICLE M3 Accumulated particle volume flow (bed + suspension)
O|TP|PP|C ACCQTPARTICLEBED M3 Accumulated volume flow of particles in bed
O|TP|PP|C ACCQTPARTICLESUS M3 Accumulated volume flow of suspended particles
O|TP|PP|C ACCWAGPARTICLE KG Accumulated particle mass flow in water
O|TP|PP|C ACCWAQPARTICLE M3 Accumulated particle volume flow in water
O|TP|PP|C GGBED KG/S Mass flow of gas entrained in the bed layer
O|TP|PP|C GGPARTICLE KG/S Mass flow of particles in gas
O|TP|PP|C GLTHLBED KG/S Mass flow of oil entrained in the bed layer
O|TP|PP|C GLTHLPARTICLE KG/S Mass flow of particles in oil
O|TP|PP|C GLTWTBED KG/S Mass flow of water entrained in the bed layer
O|TP|PP|C GLTWTPARTICLE KG/S Mass flow of particles in water
O|TP|PP|C GPARTICLEBED KG/S Mass flow of particles in bed
O|TP|PP|C GPARTICLESUS KG/S Mass flow of suspended particles
O|TP|PP|C GTPARTICLE KG/S Total mass flow of particles (bed + suspension)
O|TP|PP|C UDHLPARTICLE M/S Velocity of particles in oil droplets
O|TP|PP|C UDWTPARTICLE M/S Velocity of particles in water droplets
O|TP|PP|C UGBED M/S Velocity of gas entrained in the bed layer
O|TP|PP|C UGPARTICLE M/S Velocity of particles in gas
O|TP|PP|C ULHLBED M/S Velocity of oil entrained in the bed layer
O|TP|PP|C ULHLPARTICLE M/S Velocity of particles in oil film
O|TP|PP|C ULWTBED M/S Velocity of water entrained in the bed layer
O|TP|PP|C ULWTPARTICLE M/S Velocity of particles in water film
O|TP|PP|C UPARTICLEBED M/S Velocity of particles in bed
- 583 -
OLGA User manual
Branch Variables
TP|C|GTP PARTICLEC M3 Total particle content in branch (bed + suspension)
TP|C|GTP PARTICLECINBED M3 Content of particles in bed in branch
TP|C|GTP PARTICLECINGAS M3 Particle content in gas in branch
TP|C|GTP PARTICLECINOIL M3 Particle content in oil in branch
TP|C|GTP PARTICLECINSUS M3 Content of suspended particles in branch
TP|C|GTP PARTICLECINWAT M3 Particle content in water in branch
TP|C|GTP PARTICLEMASS KG Total particle mass in branch (bed + suspension)
Volume Variables
TP|PP ALBED - Volume fraction of gas in bed layer
O|TP|PP|C|NN ALPARTICLE - Volume fraction of particles in gas
O|TP|PP BEDCONDITION NoUnit Condition of the bed: 1=Stationary bed, 2=Moving bed,
3=No bed (condition of suspension). See user manual
for more details.
O|TP|PP BEDHEIGHT M Total particle bed height
TP|PP HOLHLBED - Volume fraction of oil in bed layer
O|TP|PP|C|NN HOLHLPARTICLE - Volume fraction of particles in oil
TP|PP HOLWTBED - Volume fraction of water in bed layer
O|TP|PP|C|NN HOLWTPARTICLE - Volume fraction of particles in water
TP|PP MBED KG/M3 Total specific mass in bed layer
TP|PP MGBED KG/M3 Specific mass of gas in bed layer
O|TP|PP|C MGPARTICLE KG/M3 Specific mass of particles in gas
TP|PP MLHLBED KG/M3 Specific mass of oil in bed layer
O|TP|PP|C MLTHLPARTICLE KG/M3 Specific mass of particles in oil
O|TP|PP|C MLTWTPARTICLE KG/M3 Specific mass of particles in water
TP|PP MLWTBED KG/M3 Specific mass of water in bed layer
O|TP|PP MOVINGBEDHEIGHT M The height of the moving particle bed layer
- 584 -
Reference manual
O|TP|PP|C MPARTICLE KG/M3 Total specific mass of particles (bed + suspension)
TP|PP MPARTICLEBED KG/M3 Specific mass of particles in bed layer
O|TP|PP|C MPARTICLESUS KG/M3 Specific mass of suspended particles
O|TP|PP PARTICLECRITICALTAU Pa The shear stress required for initiating particle bed
movement
O|TP|PP|C PARTICLEDENS KG/M3 Density of particles
O|TP|PP|C PARTICLEDIAM M Diameter of particles
O|TP|PP|C|NN PARTICLEVOLFRAC - Total volume fraction of particles (bed + suspension)
TP|PP PARTICLEVOLFRACBED - Volume fraction of particles in bed layer
O|TP|PP|C PARTICLEVOLFRACSUS - Volume fraction of suspended particles
O|TP|PP|C ROGPARTICLE KG/M3 Mixture density of gas phase including particles
O|TP|PP|C ROHLPARTICLE KG/M3 Mixture density of oil phase including particles
O|TP|PP|C ROWTPARTICLE KG/M3 Mixture density of water phase including particles
O|TP|PP STATIONARYBEDHEIGHT M The height of the stationary particle bed layer
TP|PP VOLFRACBED - Volume fraction of bed layer
Pig Output Variables

All the variables that are available for Slug tracking can be used with Pig. However, not all of the variables
are relevant. The pig variables with their equivalent Slug Tracking variables are listed below.
Pig variable Equivalent Slug Tracking variable

ALGL ALTSB
ALGR ALTSL
HOLHLL BEHLTSB+GAHLTSB
HOLHLR BEHLTSL
HOLWTL BEWTTSB+GAWTTSB
HOLWTR BEWTTSL
UPIG UST
ZPIG ZTSL
When the key TRACKSLUG=ON, the PIG may be without slug, be a slug tail (pig to the left of the slug) or
be a slug front (pig to the right of the slug)
- 585 -
OLGA User manual
TRENDDATA PIG=PIG-1, VARIABLE=UST : Same as UPIG)
TRENDDATA PIG=PIG-1, VARIABLE=BEHLTSB : Use with caution. If the pig is a slug tail, BEHLTSB
represents the holdup to the left of the pig. If the pig is a slug front, BEHLTSB represents the holdup to the
right of the pig.
TRENDDATA PIPE=PIPE-1, SECTION=5, VARIABLE=HOLEXP : This works the same way as for Slug
Tracking.
Pig Variables
TP|C|GTP ALGL - Void behind pig
TP|C|GTP ALGR - Void ahead pig
TP|C|GTP DPPIG PA Pressure difference across pig
TP|C|GTP GAL - Droplet fraction behind pig
TP|C|GTP GAR - Droplet fraction ahead pig
TP|C|GTP HOLHLL - Oil holdup behind pig
TP|C|GTP HOLHLR - Oil holdup ahead pig
TP|C|GTP HOLWTL - Water holdup behind pig
TP|C|GTP HOLWTR - Water holdup ahead pig
TP|C|GTP IDL NoUnit Flow regime behind pig (only valid without TRACKSLUG)
TP|C|GTP IDR NoUnit Flow regime ahead pig (only valid without TRACKSLUG)
TP|C|GTP LIQCDOWN M3 Liquid content between plug and trap position
TP|C|GTP LIQCUP M3 Liquid content between launch position and plug
TP|C|GTP PIGLAUNCHEDFORCE N Force applied to pig when launched
TP|C|GTP PIGM KG Pig mass
TP|C|GTP PIGSTA NoUnit Pig status: 0=Not pigging, 1=Launched, 2=Pigging, 3=Ready to
launch, 4=Stalled
TP|C|GTP PIGSTATICFORCE N Force required to tear pig loose from wall
TP|C|GTP REMDIST M Remaining distance for pig
TP|C|GTP REMTIME_AVRG S Averaged remaining travel time for pig
TP|C|GTP RPIG NoUnit Pig leakage factor
- 586 -
Reference manual
TP|C|GTP TSINCELAUNCH S Time passed since pig was launched. Time is reset when the
pig is relaunched.
TP|C|GTP TSINCETRAP S Time passed since pig was trapped. Time is reset when the pig
is relaunched.
TP|C|GTP UPIG M/S Pig velocity
TP|C|GTP UPIG_AVRG M/S Averaged velocity for pig
TP|C|GTP ZPIG M Pig position in branch
TP|C|GTP ZZPIG M Pig total distance travelled
Pump Output Variables

The output variable PUMPHEFF defined as the hydraulic efficiency is calculated as follows:
PUMPHEFF = GT * g * PUMPHEAD / (T * w)
where GT is the total mass flow rate, g, is acceleration of gravity, T is the shaft torque, and w is the angular
velocity of the shaft.
Pump Variables
TP|C|GTP PUBYGG KG/S Gas mass flow through bypass line
TP|C|GTP PUBYGL KG/S Liquid mass flow through bypass line
TP|C|GTP PUBYGT KG/S Total mass flow through bypass line
TP|C|GTP PUBYVALVOP - Relative valve opening in bypass line
TP|C|GTP PUMPDP PA Pressure difference between pump outlet and inlet
TP|C|GTP PUMPGG KG/S Gas mass flow through the pump
TP|C|GTP PUMPGL KG/S Liquid mass flow through the pump
TP|C|GTP PUMPGT KG/S Total mass flow through the pump
TP|C|GTP PUMPHEAD M Total pump head
TP|C|GTP PUMPHEAT W Heat added to fluid in pump
TP|C|GTP PUMPHEFF - Hydraulic efficiency
TP|C|GTP PUMPHP W Hydraulic horsepower
- 587 -
OLGA User manual
TP|C|GTP PUMPQB M3/S Pump back flow (volume)
TP|C|GTP PUMPQG M3/S Net gas volume flow through the pump
TP|C|GTP PUMPQL M3/S Net liquid volume flow through the pump
TP|C|GTP PUMPQT M3/S Net total volume flow through the pump
TP|C|GTP PUMPSPEED RPM Pump speed
TP|C|GTP PUMPTH NM Pump hydraulic torque
TP|C|GTP PUMPTT W Total pump power
TP|C|GTP PUMPVALDP PA Pressure drop over valve in pump position
TP|C|GTP PUMPVALVOP - Relative valve opening
O|TP|C|GTP PUMPVOLEFF - Volumetric efficiency. Only calculated when CLEARANCERATIO set on

PUMPBATTERY, 1 otherwise.
TP|C|GTP PUREGG KG/S Recycle gas mass flow
TP|C|GTP PUREGL KG/S Recycle liquid mass flow
TP|C|GTP PUREGT KG/S Total recycle mass flow
TP|C|GTP PUREGW KG/S Recycle water mass flow
TP|C|GTP PUREVALVOP - Relative valve opening in recycle line
Separator Output Variables

QGSTxD, QLSTxD, QOSTxD and QWSTxD (x= E, D, O and W) are given at standard conditions (60°F, 1
atm). A single stage flash from in-situ to standard conditions has been performed, that is, mass transfer
between the phases from in-situ to standard conditions is taken into account. The gas is not dehydrated
unless WATERFLASH = OFF. For table-based simulations, OLGA uses the gas mass fractions and
densities from the fluid property file to perform the conversion. It should be noted that for simulations using
PVT tables (not CompTrack), the variables for each drain is not accurate because the flashing is
performed using the PVT tables for the total composition.
In addition to the SEPARATOR variables are many VOLUME variables available for the separator.
- 588 -
Reference manual
Separator Variables
NS ACMDGS KG Separator: accumulated gas mass flow gas outlet
NS ACMDHL KG Separator: accumulated total oil mass drain
NS ACMDWT KG Separator: accumulated total water mass drain
NS ACMGDGS KG Separator: accumulated gas mass flow gas outlet
NS ACMODHL KG Separator: accumulated oil mass flow oil drain
NS ACMODWT KG Separator: accumulated water mass flow oil drain
NS ACMWDHL KG Separator: accumulated oil mass flow water drain
NS ACMWDWT KG Separator: accumulated water mass flow water drain
NS ACVDGS M3 Separator: accumulated gas volume flow gas outlet
NS ACVDHL M3 Separator: accumulated total oil volume drain
NS ACVDWT M3 Separator: accumulated total water volume drain
NS ACVGDGS M3 Separator: accumulated gas volume flow gas outlet
NS ACVODHL M3 Separator: accumulated oil volume flow oil drain
NS ACVODWT M3 Separator: accumulated water volume flow oil drain
NS ACVWDHL M3 Separator: accumulated oil volume flow water drain
NS ACVWDWT M3 Separator: accumulated water volume flow water drain
NS GGGDCONVST SM3/S Separator gas train gas mass rate divided by standard conditions density
NS GNGDGS KG/S Separator: gas mass flow rate gas outlet
NS GNGDHL KG/S Separator: oil mass flow rate gas outlet
NS GNGDWT KG/S Separator: water mass flow rate gas outlet
NS GNINDHL KG/S Separator: oil droplet mass flow rate inlet
NS GNINDWT KG/S Separator: water droplet mass flow rate inlet
NS GNINGS KG/S Separator: gas mass flow rate inlet
NS GNINLHL KG/S Separator: oil film mass flow rate inlet
- 589 -
OLGA User manual
NS GNINLWT KG/S Separator: water film mass flow rate inlet
NS GNODHL KG/S Separator: oil mass flow rate oil drain
NS GNODWT KG/S Separator: water mass flow rate oil drain
NS GNWDHL KG/S Separator: oil mass flow rate water drain
NS GNWDWT KG/S Separator: water mass flow rate water drain
NS GTDGS KG/S Separator: total gas mass flow gas outlet
NS GTDHL KG/S Separator: total oil mass drain rate
NS GTDWT KG/S Separator: total water mass drain rate
NS LIQLV M Separator liquid level
NS OILLV M Separator oil level
NS PTBOTTUMN PA Pressure at liquid outlets
NS PTSEP PA Separator pressure
NS QGSTGD SM3/S Separator gas train gas volume flow at standard conditions
NS QGSTOD SM3/S Separator oil train gas volume flow at standard conditions
NS QGSTWD SM3/S Separator water train gas volume flow at standard conditions
NS QLSTGD SM3/S Separator gas train liquid volume flow at standard conditions
NS QLSTOD SM3/S Separator oil train liquid volume flow at standard conditions
NS QLSTWD SM3/S Separator water train liquid volume flow at standard conditions
NS QNGD M3/S Separator: flow rate at gas outlet
NS QNOD M3/S Separator: oil drain flow rate
NS QNWD M3/S Separator: water drain flow rate
NS QOSTGD SM3/S Separator gas train oil volume flow at standard conditions
NS QOSTOD SM3/S Separator oil train oil volume flow at standard conditions
NS QOSTWD SM3/S Separator water train oil volume flow at standard conditions
NS QTDGS M3/S Separator: total gas volume flow gas outlet
NS QTDHL M3/S Separator: total oil volume drain rate
NS QTDWT M3/S Separator: total water volume drain rate
- 590 -
Reference manual
NS QWSTGD SM3/S Separator gas train water volume flow at standard conditions
NS QWSTOD SM3/S Separator oil train water volume flow at standard conditions
NS QWSTWD SM3/S Separator water train water volume flow at standard conditions
NS SEPEFF - Separator efficiency
NS TMSEP C Separator temperature
NS WATLV M Separator water level
Slug tracking Output Variables

There are four main groups of slug tracking variables:
1. Global variables:
NSLUG, SLUPRO
2. Variables for plotting properties of a specific unique slug:
ALFSB, ALFSL, ALTSB, ALTSL, BEFSB, BEFSL, BETSB, BETSL, BEHLFSB, BEHLFSL, BEHLTSB,
BEHLTSL, BEWTFSB, BEWTFSL, BEWTTSB, BEWTTS,
GAFSB, GAFSL, GATSB, GATSL, GAHLFSB, GAHLFSL, GAHLTSB, GAHLTSL, GAWTFSB, GAWTFSL,
GAWTTSB, GAWTTSL, DPSB, DPSBF, DPSL,
DPSLF, DPSLG, JSLT, JSLF, LSL, LSB, PTJF, PTJT, SLUQT, SLUQF, SLTYPT, SLTYPF, UGFSB,
UGFSL, UGTSB, UGTSL, ULFSB, ULFSL, ULTSB, ULTSL,
USF, UST, ZTSL, ZFSL, ULHLFSB, ULHLFSL, ULHLTSB, ULHLTSL, ULWTFSB, ULWTFSL, ULWTTSB,
ULWTTSL
These variables show the development of unique slugs as they pass through the pipeline.
3. Variables for plotting properties of slugs passing at a specified section boundary:
SIDEXP, USTEXP, USFEXP, LSLEXP, LSBEXP, QTEXP, QFEXP, ZSTEXP, ZSFEXP
These variables are nonzero only when the specified integer pipeline position is within a liquid slug.
4. Modified "standard" OLGA variables accounting for the effects of the slug tracking option at a
specified section boundary:
ALEXP, BEEXP, BEHLEXP, BEWTEXP, GAEXP, GAHLEXP, GAWTEXP, HOLEXP, HOLHLEXP,

HOLWTEXP, UGEXP, ULEXP, ULHLEXP, ULWTEXP, UDEXP, UDHLEXP, UDWTEXP
- 591 -
OLGA User manual
Figure 111 Definition sketch of position and length plot variables for the slug tracking option
Figure 112 Definition sketch of void plot variables for the slug tracking option
Figure 113 Definition sketch of velocity plot variables for the slug tracking option
Boundary Variables
O|TP|PP|C ALEXP - Void fraction in slug (no slug: AL)
O|TP|PP|C BEEXP - Liquid film fraction in slug (no slug: BE)
O|TP|PP|C BEHLEXP - Oil film fraction in slug (no slug: BEHL)
O|TP|PP|C BEWTEXP - Water film fraction in slug (no slug: BEWT)
O|TP|PP|C GAEXP - Liquid droplet fraction in slug (no slug: GA)
O|TP|PP|C GAHLEXP - Oil droplet fraction in slug (no slug: GAHL)
O|TP|PP|C GAWTEXP - Water droplet fraction in slug (no slug: GAWT)
O|TP|PP|C HOLEXP - Liquid holdup in slug (no slug: HOL)
- 592 -
Reference manual
O|TP|PP|C HOLHLEXP - Oil holdup in slug (no slug: HOLHL)
O|TP|PP|C HOLWTEXP - Water holdup in slug (no slug: HOLWT)
O|TP|PP|C LSBEXP M Bubble length (no slug: 0)
O|TP|PP|C LSLEXP M Slug length (no slug: 0)
O|TP|PP|C QFEXP M/S Volume flux through slug front (no slug: 0)
O|TP|PP|C QTEXP M/S Volume flux through slug tail (no slug: 0)
O|TP|PP|C SIDEXP NoUnit Slug identification (no slug: 0)
O|TP|PP|C SLTYPFEXP NoUnit Type of slug front
O|TP|PP|C SLTYPTEXP NoUnit Type of slug tail
O|TP|PP|C UDEXP M/S Droplet velocity in slug (no slug: UD)
O|TP|PP|C UDHLEXP M/S Oil droplet velocity in slug (no slug: UDHL)
O|TP|PP|C UDWTEXP M/S Water droplet velocity in slug (no slug: UDWT)
O|TP|PP|C UGEXP M/S Gas velocity in slug (no slug: UG)
O|TP|PP|C ULEXP M/S Liquid velocity in slug (no slug: UL)
O|TP|PP|C ULHLEXP M/S Oil film velocity in slug (no slug: ULHL)
O|TP|PP|C ULWTEXP M/S Water film velocity in slug (no slug: ULWT)
O|TP|PP|C USFEXP M/S Slug front velocity (no slug: 0)
O|TP|PP|C USTEXP M/S Slug tail velocity (no slug: 0)
O|TP|PP|C ZSFEXP M Slug front position (no slug: 0)
O|TP|PP|C ZSTEXP M Slug tail position (no slug: 0)
Global Variables
GTO|GTP NSLUG NoUnit Total number of slugs in the pipeline
GTO|GTP SLUPRO NoUnit Number of slugs initiated
Slug Variables
TP ALFSB - Void fraction ahead of slug front
- 593 -
OLGA User manual
TP ALFSL - Void fraction behind slug front
TP ALTSB - Void fraction behind slug tail
TP ALTSL - Void fraction ahead of slug tail
TP BEFSB - Liquid film fraction ahead of slug front
TP BEFSL - Liquid film fraction behind slug front
TP BEHLFSB - Oil film fraction ahead of slug front
TP BEHLFSL - Oil film fraction behind slug front
TP BEHLTSB - Oil film fraction behind slug tail
TP BEHLTSL - Oil film fraction ahead of slug tail
TP BETSB - Liquid film fraction behind slug tail
TP BETSL - Liquid film fraction ahead of slug tail
TP BEWTFSB - Water film fraction ahead of slug front
TP BEWTFSL - Water film fraction behind slug front
TP BEWTTSB - Water film fraction behind slug tail
TP BEWTTSL - Water film fraction ahead of slug tail
TP DPSB PA/M Total pressure gradient in slug bubble
TP DPSBF PA/M Frictional pressure gradient in slug bubble
TP DPSL PA/M Total pressure gradient in liquid slug
TP DPSLF PA/M Frictional pressure gradient in liquid slug
TP DPSLG PA/M Gravitational pressure gradient in liquid slug
TP GAFSB - Droplet fraction ahead of slug front
TP GAFSL - Droplet fraction behind of slug front
TP GAHLFSB - Oil droplet fraction ahead of slug front
TP GAHLFSL - Oil droplet fraction behind of slug front
TP GAHLTSB - Oil droplet fraction behind slug tail
TP GAHLTSL - Oil droplet fraction ahead slug tail
TP GATSB - Droplet fraction behind slug tail
- 594 -
Reference manual
TP GATSL - Droplet fraction ahead slug tail
TP GAWTFSB - Water droplet fraction ahead of slug front
TP GAWTFSL - Water droplet fraction behind of slug front
TP GAWTTSB - Water droplet fraction behind slug tail
TP GAWTTSL - Water droplet fraction ahead slug tail
TP HOLFSB - Liquid holdup ahead of slug front
TP HOLFSL - Liquid holdup behind slug front
TP HOLHLFSB - Oil holdup ahead of slug front
TP HOLHLFSL - Oil holdup behind slug front
TP HOLHLTSB - Oil holdup behind slug tail
TP HOLHLTSL - Oil holdup ahead of slug tail
TP HOLTSB - Liquid holdup behind slug tail
TP HOLTSL - Liquid holdup ahead of slug tail
TP HOLWTFSB - Water holdup ahead of slug front
TP HOLWTFSL - Water holdup behind slug front
TP HOLWTTSB - Water holdup behind slug tail
TP HOLWTTSL - Water holdup ahead of slug tail
TP JSLF NoUnit Section number of slug front
TP JSLT NoUnit Section number of slug tail
TP LSB M Slug bubble length
TP LSL M Slug length
TP PTJF PA Pressure at slug front
TP PTJT PA Pressure at slug tail
TP SID NoUnit Slug id
TP SLTYPF NoUnit Type of slug front
TP SLTYPT NoUnit Type of slug tail
TP SLUQF M/S Volume flux through slug front
- 595 -
OLGA User manual
TP SLUQT M/S Volume flux through slug tail
TP UDFSB M/S Droplet velocity ahead of slug front
TP UDFSL M/S Droplet velocity behind slug front
TP UDHLFSB M/S Oil droplet velocity ahead of slug front
TP UDHLFSL M/S Oil droplet velocity behind slug front
TP UDHLTSB M/S Oil droplet velocity behind slug tail
TP UDHLTSL M/S Oil droplet velocity ahead of slug tail
TP UDTSB M/S Droplet velocity behind slug tail
TP UDTSL M/S Droplet velocity ahead of slug tail
TP UDWTFSB M/S Water droplet velocity ahead of slug front
TP UDWTFSL M/S Water droplet velocity behind slug front
TP UDWTTSB M/S Water droplet velocity behind slug tail
TP UDWTTSL M/S Water droplet velocity ahead of slug tail
TP UGFSB M/S Gas velocity ahead of slug front
TP UGFSL M/S Gas velocity behind slug front
TP UGTSB M/S Gas velocity behind slug tail
TP UGTSL M/S Gas velocity ahead of slug tail
TP ULFSB M/S Liquid velocity ahead of slug front
TP ULFSL M/S Liquid velocity behind slug front
TP ULHLFSB M/S Oil velocity ahead of slug front
TP ULHLFSL M/S Oil velocity behind slug front
TP ULHLTSB M/S Oil velocity behind slug tail
TP ULHLTSL M/S Oil velocity ahead of slug tail
TP ULTSB M/S Liquid velocity behind slug tail
TP ULTSL M/S Liquid velocity ahead of slug tail
TP ULWTFSB M/S Water velocity ahead of slug front
TP ULWTFSL M/S Water velocity behind slug front
- 596 -
Reference manual
TP ULWTTSB M/S Water velocity behind slug tail
TP ULWTTSL M/S Water velocity ahead of slug tail
TP USF M/S Slug front velocity
TP UST M/S Slug tail velocity
TP ZFSL M Slug front position
TP ZTSL M Slug tail position
Source Output Variables

QGSTSOUR, QLSTSOUR, QOSTSOUR and QWSTSOUR are given at standard conditions (60 oF, 1 atm).
A single stage flash from in-situ to standard conditions has been performed, that is, mass transfer between
the phases from in-situ to standard conditions is taken into account. The gas is not dehydrated unless
WATERFLASH = OFF. For table-based simulations, OLGA uses the gas mass fractions and densities
from the fluid property file to perform the conversion.
PTSOUR is the pressure specified in a pressure driven source. If the pressure is not given as input to the
source this variable will return the pressure of the section where the source is located.
Source Variables
O|TP|PP|C ACCQGSTSOUR SM3 Source accumulated gas volume flow at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C ACCQLSTSOUR SM3 Source accumulated liquid volume flow at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C ACCQOSTSOUR SM3 Source accumulated oil volume flow at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C ACCQWSTSOUR SM3 Source accumulated watervolume flow at standard conditions
TP|C|GTP DGGSDP kg/s-Pa Gas mass flow derivative w.r.t. pressure
TP|C|GTP DGLTHLSDP kg/s-Pa Oil mass flow derivative w.r.t. pressure
TP|C|GTP DGLTWTSDP kg/s-Pa Water mass flow derivative w.r.t. pressure
TP|C|GTP DPDGGS Pa-s/kg Pressure derivative w.r.t. gas mass flow
TP|C|GTP DPDGLTHLS Pa-s/kg Pressure derivative w.r.t. oil mass flow
TP|C|GTP DPDGLTWTS Pa-s/kg Pressure derivative w.r.t. water mass flow
TP|C|GTP GGSOUR KG/S Source gas mass rate
- 597 -
OLGA User manual
TP|C|GTP GLHLMA KG/S Source oil mass rate
TP|C|GTP GLSOUR KG/S Source liquid mass rate
TP|C|GTP GLWTMA KG/S Source water mass rate
TP|C|GTP GTSOUR KG/S Source mass rate
TP|C|GTP HSOURC W Source enthalpy flow rate
TP|C|GTP PTSOUR PA Valve-source pressure
TP|C|GTP QGSTSOUR SM3/S Source gas volume flow at standard conditions
TP|C|GTP QLSTSOUR SM3/S Source liquid volume flow at standard conditions
TP|C|GTP QOSTSOUR SM3/S Source oil volume flow at standard conditions
TP|C|GTP QWSTSOUR SM3/S Source water volume flow at standard conditions
TP|C|GTP TMSOUR C Valve-source temperature
TP|C|GTP TSOUR C Source temperature
TP|C|GTP USGSOU M/S Source superf. gas velocity
Steam and Single component Output Variables

Steam and single component variables can only be used when COMPOSITIONAL=STEAMWATER-HC or
COMPOSITIONAL=SINGLE in the OPTIONS keyword.
Volume Variables
O|TP|PP|C PSAT PA Saturation pressure at fluid temperature
O|TP|PP|C PVAP PA Partial pressure of vapor
O|TP|PP|C TSAT C Saturation temperature at system pressure
O|TP|PP|C TSV C Vapor temperature
- 598 -
Reference manual
Tracer tracking Output Variables

Tracer tracking variables can only be used when TRACERTRACKING=ON in the OPTIONS keyword.
Source Variables
TP|GTP GSTRACER KG/S Tracer source mass flow rate
Tracer age Variables
O|TP|PP|C AGEDTRACER S Droplet age of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C AGEFTRACER S Film age of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C AGETRACER S Age of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C CONCTRACEROIL - Conc.wrt. oil carrier phase of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C CONCTRACERWATER - Conc. wrt. water carrier phase of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C GDHLTRACER KG/S Mass flow rate of oil in droplet field of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C GDTRACER KG/S Droplet mass flow of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C GDWTTRACER KG/S Mass flow rate of water in droplet field of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C GGTRACER KG/S Gas mass flow of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C GLHLTRACER KG/S Mass flow rate of oil in film of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C GLTHLTRACER KG/S Mass flow rate of oil of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C GLTRACER KG/S Liquid bulk mass flow of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C GLTTRACER KG/S Total liquid mass flow of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C GLTWTTRACER KG/S Mass flow rate of water excluding vapour of tracer age
group
O|TP|PP|C GLWTTRACER KG/S Mass flow rate of water in film of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C GTTRACER KG/S Total mass flow rate of tracer for tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C MDTRACER KG Droplet mass of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C MGTRACER KG Mass of gas of tracer age group
- 599 -
OLGA User manual
O|TP|PP|C MLHLTRACER KG Mass of oil in film of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C MLTHLTRACER KG Mass of oil of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C MLTRACER KG Film mass of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C MLTTRACER KG Total liquid mass of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C MLTWTTRACER KG Mass of water in film of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C MLWTTRACER KG Mass of water excluding vapour of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C MTRACER KG Mass of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C SMDTRACER KG/M3 Specific droplet mass of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C SMGTRACER KG/M3 Specific mass of gas of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C SMLHLTRACER KG/M3 Specific mass of oil in film of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C SMLTHLTRACER KG/M3 Specific mass oil of of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C SMLTRACER KG/M3 Specific film mass of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C SMLTTRACER KG/M3 Specific total liquid mass of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C SMLTWTTRACER KG/M3 Specific mass of water in film of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C SMLWTTRACER KG/M3 Specific mass of water excluding vapour of tracer age
group
O|TP|PP|C SMTRACER KG/M3 Specific mass of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C XTRACEROIL - Mass fraction wrt. oil carrier phase of tracer age group
O|TP|PP|C XTRACERWATER - Mass fraction wrt. water carrier phase of tracer age group
Tracer feed Variables
O|TP|PP|C CONCTOTTRACEROIL - Conc. wrt. oil carrier phase of tracer feed
O|TP|PP|C CONCTOTTRACERWATER - Conc. wrt. water carrier phase of tracer feed
O|TP|PP|C GTOTTRACER KG/S Total mass flow rate of tracer feed
O|TP|PP|C MTOTTRACER KG Mass of tracer feed
O|TP|PP|C RESTIMED S Droplet residence time of tracer feed
O|TP|PP|C RESTIMEL S Film residence time of tracer feed
- 600 -
Reference manual
O|TP|PP|C RESTIMET S Residence time of tracer feed
O|TP|PP|C SMDTOTTRACER KG/M3 Specific droplet mass of tracer feed
O|TP|PP|C SMLTOTTRACER KG/M3 Specific film mass of tracer feed
O|TP|PP|C SMTOTTRACER KG/M3 Specific mass of tracer feed
O|TP|PP|C TOTAGETRACER S Average age of tracer feed
O|TP|PP|C XTOTTRACEROIL - Mass fraction wrt. oil carrier phase of tracer feed
O|TP|PP|C XTOTTRACERWATER - Mass fraction wrt. water carrier phase of tracer feed
Transmitter Output Variables
Transmitter Variables
O|TP|GTP|S|NC|NS|NN|JP|FUSD OUTPUT NoUnit Output from transmitter
UDPhase Output Variables

These variables can only be used with UDPLUGIN = ON in the OPTIONS keyword.
Boundary Variables
O|TP|PP P-G KG/S Mass flow rate
O|TP|PP P-Q M3/S Volumetric flow rate
O|TP|PP P-U M/S Velocity
O|TP|PP P-US M/S Superficial velocity
CSP U-PROFILE m/s Velocity profile along the pipe diameter
- 601 -
OLGA User manual
Volume Variables
O|TP|PP|NS|NN P-ACCG KG Accumulated mass flow
O|TP|PP|NS|NN P-ACCQ M3 Accumulated volume flow
CSP P-CON - Concentration of particles along the pipe diameter
O|TP|PP P-CP J/KG Specific heat of UD Phase
O|TP|PP P-DRDP KG/M-N Pressure differential of UD Phase
O|TP|PP P-H J/KG-C Enthalpy of UD Phase
O|TP|PP P-HOL - Holdup
O|TP|PP|NS|NN P-M KG/M3 Specific mass
O|TP|PP P-RO KG/M3 Density of UD Phase
Valve Output Variables
Valve Variables
TP|C|GTP ARCH M2 Choke area
TP|C|GTP CV NoUnit Valve CV (0 for chokes)
TP|C|GTP GCRIT KG/S Critical mass flow rate
TP|C|GTP GVALVE KG/S Valve mass flow
TP|C|GTP ICRIT NoUnit Valve critical flow: 0=subcrit, 1=crit
TP|C|GTP NCRITTR NoUnit Number of transitions from sub-critical to critical flow
TP|C|GTP NSACDP NoUnit Number of iterations solution algorithm used to solve for critical pressure
drop
TP|C|GTP NSACMF NoUnit Number of iterations solution algorithm used to solve for critical flow
TP|C|GTP NSADP NoUnit Number of iterations solution algorithm used to solve for sub-critical
pressure drop
TP|C|GTP NSAMF NoUnit Number of iterations solution algorithm used to solve for sub-critical flow
TP|C|GTP PVALVE PA Valve pressure
- 602 -
Reference manual
TP|C|GTP THROATSLIP NoUnit Slip ratio in throat (Ug/Ul)
TP|C|GTP TTHRC C Critical temperature at throat
TP|C|GTP TVALVE C Valve temperature
TP|C|GTP TVALVEOUT C Temperature at valve outlet
TP|C|GTP UCRIT M/S Critical velocity
TP|C|GTP UVALVE M/S Valve velocity
TP|C|GTP VALSCC NoUnit Valve sub-critical coefficient
TP|C|GTP VALVAR M2 Valve flow area
TP|C|GTP VALVDP PA Subcritical pressure drop across valve
TP|C|GTP VALVOP NoUnit Relative valve opening
TP|C|GTP WCRIT KG/S- Critical mass flux at throat

M2
Wax deposition Output Variables

Wax deposition variables can only be used when WAXDEPOSITION=ON in the OPTIONS keyword.
Boundary Variables
O|TP|PP|C ACCGLTWL KG Accumulated dissolved wax mass flow
O|TP|PP|C ACCGLTWS KG Accumulated suspended wax mass flow
O|TP|PP|C GWXDIP KG/S Mass flow rate of wax dispersed in oil
O|TP|PP|C GWXDIS KG/S Mass flow rate of wax dissolved in oil
Branch Variables
TP|C|GTP MLTWLBR KG Mass of dissolved wax in branch
TP|C|GTP MLTWSBR KG Mass of suspended wax in branch
TP|C|GTP MTWXBR KG Total mass of wax in branch
TP|C|GTP WAXMASBR KG Wax deposit mass in branch
- 603 -
OLGA User manual
TP|C|GTP WAXVOLBR M3 Wax deposit volume in branch
Pig Variables
TP|C|GTP ACCPWXM KG Accumulated wax mass removed from wall by pig
TP|C|GTP ACCPWXV M3 Accumulated wax volume removed from wall by pig
TP|C|GTP PIGWXBRF N Pig-wax breaking force
TP|C|GTP PIGWXPFF N Pig-wax plug friction force
TP|C|GTP PIGWXPLASTV N-S/M2 Pig-wax plug plastic viscosity
TP|C|GTP PIGWXPLEN M Pig-wax plug friction length
TP|C|GTP PIGWXYIELDS PA Pig-wax plug yield stress
Volume Variables
O|TP|PP|C BEWX - Volume fraction of wax dispersed in oil film
O|TP|PP|C DXWX M Thickness of wax layer deposited at wall
O|TP|PP|C GAWX - Volume fraction of wax dispersed in oil droplet field
O|TP|PP|C LEWIS NoUnit Lewis number
O|TP|PP|C MWXDIP KG/M3 Mass of wax dispersed in oil
O|TP|PP|C MWXDIS KG/M3 Mass of wax dissolved in oil
O|TP|PP|C MWXWAL KG/M3 Specific wax mass at wall
O|TP|PP|C SCHMIDT NoUnit Schmidt number
O|TP|PP|C TWSWX C Inner wall surface temperature adjusted for wax layer
O|TP|PP|C WAX_TCOND W/M-K Thermal conductivity of wax film, porosity included
O|TP|PP|C WAXAP C Wax appearance temperature
O|TP|PP|C WAXPOROSITY - Wax porosity (oil volume fraction in wax film)
O|TP|PP|C WXAVDC M2/S Molar average wax diffusion coefficient
O|TP|PP|C WXCDCDR 1/M Concentration gradient of dissolved wax near wall
O|TP|PP|C WXCDIFFC M2/S Wax component diffusion coefficient
- 604 -
Reference manual
O|TP|PP|C WXCMCDB NoUnit Molar concentration of dissolved wax components in bulk
O|TP|PP|C WXCMCDW NoUnit Molar concentration of dissolved wax near wall
O|TP|PP|C WXDIFFC M2/S Apparent wax diffusion coefficient
O|TP|PP|C WXDR M Laminar boundary layer thickness
O|TP|PP|C WXMPREC KG/S Wax mass precipitation rate
O|TP|PP|C WXMTRW KG/S Net wax mass transport rate to wall (diffusi+ shear)
O|TP|PP|C WXMTRWD KG/S Wax mass transport rate to wall due to diffusion
O|TP|PP|C WXMTRWS KG/S Wax mass transport rate to wall due to shear
Well Output Variables

QGSTWELL, QLSTWELL, QOSTWELL and QWSTWELL are given at standard conditions. A single stage
flash from in-situ to standard conditions has been performed. For table-based simulations, OLGA uses the
gas mass fractions and densities from the fluid property file to perform the conversion. The gas is not
dehydrated unless WATERFLASH = OFF.
Note: The standard gas density can be given in the well input as ROGST, but this is not used when
calculating QGSTWELL. This means that there will be a difference between the given QGSTWELL and the
standard gas flowrate given by the well equations, because ROGST is used to convert to gas mass rate
and the value in the fluid property file is used to convert back to QGSTWELL (correspondingly for ROLST
and QOSTWELL/QLSTWELL).
For the reservoir inflow models Forchheimer, Single Forchheimer and Backpressure the calculated B
coefficients can be plotted (BINJCALC and BPRODCALC), and in addition the calculated C coefficients
(CPRODCALC and CINJCALC) are available for Backpressure. The variables are plotted as non-units, but
the unit is converted to SI units according to the equations which B and C are based upon. The variables
will have value zero if they are plotted for other reservoir inflow models.
Well Variables
O|TP|PP|C ACCQGSTWELL SM3 Well accumulated gas volume flow at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C ACCQLSTWELL SM3 Well accumulated liquid volume flow at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C ACCQOSTWELL SM3 Well accumulated oil volume flow at standard conditions
O|TP|PP|C ACCQWSTWELL SM3 Well accumulated watervolume flow at standard conditions
TP|C|GTP BINJCALC - Well BINJCALC
- 605 -
OLGA User manual
TP|C|GTP BPRODCALC - Well BPRODCALC
TP|C|GTP CINJCALC - Well CINJCALC
TP|C|GTP CPRODCALC - Well CPRODCALC
TP|C|GTP GASFRT M Well source gas cone front
TP|C|GTP GGSWST KG/S Well source steady-state gas mass flow rate
TP|C|GTP GGWELL KG/S Well source gas mass flow rate
TP|C|GTP GHLWST KG/S Well source steady-state oil mass flow rate
TP|C|GTP GLHLWE KG/S Well source oil mass flow rate
TP|C|GTP GLTWST KG/S Well source steady-state liquid mass flow rate
TP|C|GTP GLWELL KG/S Well source liquid mass flow rate
TP|C|GTP GLWTWE KG/S Well source water mass flow rate
TP|C|GTP GTWELL KG/S Well source mass flow rate
TP|C|GTP GWTWST KG/S Well source steady-state water mass flow rate
TP|C|GTP HWELL W Well enthalpy flow rate
TP|C|GTP OILFRT M Well source oil cone front
TP|C|GTP QGSTWELL SM3/S Well gas volume flow at standard conditions
TP|C|GTP QLSTWELL SM3/S Well liquid volume flow at standard conditions
TP|C|GTP QOSTWELL SM3/S Well oil volume flow at standard conditions
TP|C|GTP QWSTWELL SM3/S Well water volume flow at standard conditions
TP|C|GTP WATFRT M Well source water cone front
Fluid properties and other data files

In addition to the main file describing the simulation model, OLGA also requires a description of the fluid
properties as a unique function of temperature and pressure. These can be given either as a fluid file,
through specific component data given in a feed file (Compositional Tracking) or defined in the main file
(Blackoil), or computed internally (STEAMWATER-HC)
A previous simulation run can be continued through the use of a restart file, as described with the
RESTART keyword.
If a compressor is present in the pipeline, a file specifying the compressor characteristics is also required.
- 606 -
Reference manual
If pumps are used in the simulation, the pump characteristics are specified through a pump file. A complete
set of pump characteristics is given in the code. This set can be used if no pump characteristics are
available.
 If wax deposition is simulated, the wax data are specified through a wax file.
 If the possible formation of hydrate is simulated, a hydrate curve file might be required.
 If the OLGA ROCX module is used for simulating near wellbore, a ROCX input file is required.
If OLGA coupled with ECLIPSE is used for simulating near wellbore, a standard format ECLIPSE 300 input
file is required for the reservoir part. This input file will not be read by OLGA, only by ECLIPSE. For
information about the ECLIPSE 300 input format, refer to the ECLIPSE documentation in the ECLIPSE
installation.
The following sections describe the format of the data files:
Compressor data file

This file contains tables of the compressor characteristics, defined below, as functions of reduced RPM
and reduced inlet mass flow. The reason for giving the characteristics as functions of reduced RPM and
reduced inlet mass flow, is to obtain one table for several inlet conditions (pressure, temperature), instead
of having one table for each inlet condition.
Variables
The definitions of reduced mass flows and reduced RPM are as follows:
Reduced inlet mass flow: MASSRE =
Reduced surge mass flow: MREDSU =
Reduced RPM: RPMRED =
G = inlet mass flow (kg/s)
GSURGE = surge mass flow (kg/s)
RPM = rotational speed (r/min)
 = normalized inlet temp = inlet temp / 288 K (-)
 = normalized inlet pressure = inlet pressure / (1.013*10 5 Pa) (-)
The table values can be equidistant or non-equidistant.
Variables: Name Unit Definition
IDENTF File identification (40 characters)
NCOMTA (-) Number of compressors
COMPID(I) Compressor identification,
compressor(I) (40 characters)
Note! All characters after a blank in a character string are

omitted.
(I = 1, NCOMTA)
NTABWG(I) (-) Number of reduced mass flow points, compressor(I)
NTABOM(I) (-) Number of reduced RPM points, compressor(I)
- 607 -
OLGA User manual
RPMRED(K,I) (r/min) Reduced RPM, compressor(I)
K=1,NTABOM(I)
MASSRE(J,I) (kg/s) Reduced inlet mass flow, compressor(I) J=1,NTABWG(I)
COTEXT(1,I) Heading, pressure ratio table,
PRATIO(J,K,I)(-) Pressure ratio, d.
compressor(I) K=1,NTABOM
J=1,NTABWG(I)
COTEXT(2,I) Heading, temperature ratio table,
TRATIO(J,K,I) (-) Temperature ratio, Q. Compressor(I)
K=1,NTABOM(I), J=1,NTABWG(I)
COTEXT(3,I) Heading, reduced surge mass-flow table, compressor(I) (40 characters)
MREDSU(K,I) (kg/s) Reduced surge mass flow, compressor(I) K=1,NTABOM(I)
Data file structure:
IDENTF
NCOMTA
The following data is repeated for each compressor :
COMPID(I)
NTABWG(I) NTABOM(I)
RPMRED(1,I). . . . . . . RPMRED(NTABOM(I),I)
MASSRE(1,I). . . . . . . MASSRE(NTABWG(I),I)
COTEXT(1,I)
PRATIO(1,1,I). . . . . . PRATIO(1,NTABOM(I),I)
PRATIO(NTABWG(I),1,I). . PRATIO(NTABWG(I),NTABOM(I),I)
COTEXT(2,I)
TRATIO(1,1,I). . . . . . TRATIO(1,NTABOM(I),I)
- 608 -
Reference manual
TRATIO(NTABWG(I),1,I). . TRATIO(NTABWG(I),NTABOM(I),I)
COTEXT(3,I)
MREDSU(1,I). . . . . . . MREDSU(NTABOM(I),I)
Note: The number of compressor tables must equal the number of compressors. The tables must be
given in increasing order; the first table is for compressor number one, and so on.
Fann file
The Fann file contains:
1. Fann table label

2. Measurements of shear stress (Pa) for different shear rates (rpm). The measurements are done for
different temperatures (C) and pressures (bar).
3. Additional info that OLGA needs to make a Rheology file from the Fann table file.
Example - Fann file
An example file is shown below:
In the example above, 'FannTab1' is the Fann table label. The <Shear rate> tag includes the shear
rates (rpm) of the rotary viscometer. The <Shear stress point> tag includes a table with the following
data in each line:
Temperature of measurement (C), Pressure of measurement (Bar), a shear stress point (Pa) for each
shear rate.
The tags <Pressure Range> tag and <Temperature Range> tag define how OLGA generates a rheology
file from the Fann table file. In this example OLGA will make a rheology file with 30 pressure points ranging
from 50 bar to 700 bar, and 30 temperature points ranging from 40 C to 110 C.
No extrapolation will be done in making the Rheology file. The point in the Rheology file for 700 bar and
110 C will correspond to the shear stress point measured at 600 bar and 100 C.
- 609 -
OLGA User manual
The Fann readings of the example shown in the following table:
Limitations on the Shear stress point input
A limitation of the current implementation is that Pressures and Temperatures of the measurements must
be given in a rectangular grid.
Examples
Some examples are shown below:

1. (50,100, ...) One point: OK
2. (50,100, ...) and (50, 600, ...) Two points with same
temperature: OK
2. (50,100, ...) and (40, 600, ...) Two points with different
temperature and pressure: NOT OK
3. (50,100, ...) , (50, 600, ...) and (100, 100, ...) Three points: NOT OK
4. (50,100, ...) , (50, 600, ...), (100, 100, ...) and (100, 600, ...) Four points on rectangular grid
(same as example): OK
4. (50,100, ...) , (50, 600, ...), (100, 100, ...) and (100, 700, ...) Four points on non-rectangular
grid: NOT OK
Hydrate curve definition file

A hydrate curve must be defined as pairs of corresponding temperature and pressure points, which must
be unique and in increasing order. A header line must include the temperature and pressure units.
An example hydrate definition file is shown below:
TEMPERATURE (C) PRESSURE (BAR)
0.4853 32.4656
1.9738 36.7623
3.4717 41.6277
4.9768 47.1369
6.4870 53.3754
7.9997 60.4394
9.5125 68.4384
11.0227 77.4959
- 610 -
Reference manual
OLGA ROCX
ROCX reads a separate input file describing the reservoir properties, boundary conditions and initial
conditions. The file name should be given in the NEARWELLSOURCE keyword. This input file is edited
with the ROCX GUI. Refer to the OLGA ROCX User Manual for how to define a proper input file for use
with OLGA ROCX.
Rheology file
The Rheology file contains rheology parameters for a set of pressure–temperature points. The Rheology
file uses the keyword-based format similar to the one used for PVT tables.
When the pressure or temperature is outside the range of the Rheology file, OLGA will use the closest
pressure-temperature point (no extrapolation). This also applies to PVT tables.
Rheology file format
The format of the Rheology file is described in the following table:

set
LABEL string Name of the rheology table label.
MESHTYPE symbol STANDARD STANDARD: Both temperature and pressure points are fixed
independently. Other options are not currently available.
RHEOMODEL symbol List of rheology models. Possible models are

list HERSCHELBULKLEY, POWERLAW, BINGHAM,
ROBERTSONSTIFF and NEWTONIAN.
PRESSURE real list Pressure points (Pa).
TEMPERATURE real list Temperature points (C).
COLUMNS symbol
list
PT Pressure.
TM Temperature.
BPVIS Plastic viscosity for BINGHAM fluid.
BPYIELDSTR Yield stress for BINGHAM fluid.
HBVIS Flow consistency index for HERSCHELBULKLEY. fluid
HBPOW Flow behavior index (exponent) for HERSCHELBULKLEY

fluid.
HBYIELDSTR Yield stress for HERSCHELBULKLEY fluid.
- 611 -
OLGA User manual

set
PLVIS Flow consistency index for POWERLAW fluid.
PLPOW Flow behavior index (exponent) for POWERLAW fluid.
RSA A parameter for ROBERTSONSTIFF fluid.
RSB B parameter for ROBERTSONSTIFF fluid.
RSC C parameter for ROBERTSONSTIFF fluid.
VISCOSITY Viscosity for NEWTONIAN fluid.
PVTTABLE real list Values for parameters given in COLUMNS.

POINT
The COLUMNS must correspond to the list of models listed in RHEOMODEL, and the order of the points
in the PVTTABLE POINT key must be the same as the one specified in the COLUMNS key. An example
table is given below, where the NEWTONIAN model is not given, and therefore the VISCOSITY column is
not included.
All parameters in the table must be input using SI units, except for the temperature that must be given in
Celsius.
Example of rheology file without NEWTONIAN model:
RHEOTABLE LABEL = "FannTabSample", \

MESHTYPE = STANDARD, \
RHEOMODEL = (HERSCHELBULKLEY, POWERLAW, BINGHAM, ROBERTSONSTIFF), \
PRESSURE = (1.000000e+004, 4.334000e+007, 8.667000e+007, 1.300000e+008), \
TEMPERATURE = (2.500000e+001, 1.000000e+002, 1.750000e+002, 2.500000e+002), \
COLUMNS = (PT, TM, BPVIS, BPYIELDSTR, HBVIS, HBPOW, HBYIELDSTR, PLVIS, PLPOW, RSA,
RSB, RSC)
PVTTABLE POINT = (1.000000e+004, 2.500000e+001, 7.581741e-002, 2.426174e+000, 2.261419e-001,
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
1.216821e+001)
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
1.216821e+001)
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
1.216821e+001)
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
1.216821e+001)
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
1.216821e+001)
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
- 612 -
Reference manual
1.216821e+001)
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
1.216821e+001)
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
1.216821e+001)
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
1.216821e+001)
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
1.216821e+001)
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
1.216821e+001)
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
1.216821e+001)
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
1.216821e+001)
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
1.216821e+001)
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
1.216821e+001)
8.190714e-001, 1.695171e+000, 9.732850e-001, 5.561766e-001, 2.702788e-001, 7.949701e-001,
1.216821e+001)
UDPVT FILE AND UDFEED FILE
UDPVTFILE
File(s) with PVT properties to be used by the plug-in DLL. The format is in principle free, as the file is read
by the user provided DLL.
The file can be referenced by BRANCH and NODE defining what PVT properties to be used for the user
given phases in the corresponding flowpath/node.
UDFEEDFILE
File with definitions of user defined feeds to be used by the Plugin module. The file can contain several
feeds, but only one file can be referenced.
This file must be specified if UDOPTIONS COMPOSITIONAL = ON is chosen.
NODE, SOURCE and INITIALCONDITIONS can refer to feeds defined in this file.
The format is in principle free, because the file is read by the user provided plug-in DLL. For the plug-in
delivered with OLGA, the format is illustrated by the example below.
- 613 -
OLGA User manual
<Number of components>
<Component labels>
HC_G HC_L H2O PC1 PC2
<Mole weights (g/mol)>
20 300 500 600 700
<Property: critical P (atm)>
300 200 100 50 30
<Property: critical T (C)>
501 502 503 504 505
<Number of compositions>
<Composition label>
FEED-1
<Component amount (mole percent)>
20 30 10 22 18
<Composition label>
FEED-2
<Component amount (mole percent)>
5 10 30 30 25
Wax table file

This file can contain tables with the properties of the wax forming components for multiple fluids. The table
for each fluid should have the following format:
1. Name of table. No more than 20 characters and no blanks.

2. Number of wax components.
3. Names of wax components. Each name may take up max. 20 characters. No blanks. Component
names encircled by apostrophes and separated by commas.
 Example: 'C10-C20','C35','C40-C50'
4. Molecular weights (g/mol) of wax components.

5. Liquid densities of wax components (kg/m 3).
6. Heat of melting (J/kg) of wax components.
7. Concentration (mol/mol) of wax components in HC mixture.
8. Number of pressure points, number of temperature points.
9. Pressure points (Pa).
10. Cloud point temperatures (C) for each pressure point.
11. First pressure point.
12. Columns with
 Temperature (C)
 Solubility of wax component 1 (mol/mol) in oil including wax forming components
- 614 -
Reference manual
 Solubility of wax component 2 (mol/mol) in oil including wax forming components

 etc.
 Wax phase density (kg/m3)
 Gas phase molecular weight (g/mol)
 Liquid phase molecular weight (g/mol)
 Wax phase molecular weight (g/mol)
 Enthalpy of wax (J/kg)
 Heat capacity of wax (J/kg K)
 Thermal conductivity of wax (W/m K)
13. Second pressure point

14. etc.
15. Repeat 1-14 for next fluid
Comment lines start with an !. If the temperature is above the cloud point temperature, oil properties
should be used.
The following keyword may be placed on a separate line any place within the lines described in point 1-14
in the list above:
OIL_WAX_VISCOSITY_MULTIPLIERS D = 1.01 ,E = 1.002, F = 1.0003
The values for D,E,F above are multipliers to the corresponding constants in the equation for the apparent
viscosity.
Note: If VISCMULTD, VISCMULTE or VISCMULTF are given in the OLGA input, these values will
override the multiplier values from the wax property file.
The wax file can be generated by a fluid package such as Multiflash.
Note: The following requirements need to be fulfilled when using multiple fluids in networks:
 Same pseudo-components (number of components and lumping) for all fluids.

 All fluids in one wax data file.
Fluid properties file

Feed file for Compositional Tracking
This file is generated in a fluid package, corresponding to the PVT package adopted in the Compositional
Tracking module. This feed file contains data for each component in the characterized fluid. These
components can be used when generating feeds in the FEED keyword.
From Multiflash, it is possible to include up to 150 components in one feed.
In addition, the file contains information about the models set for the fluid, such as the Equation Of State
and models used for calculating transport properties.
In the Multiflash User Interface, only a subset of the available Equation of States and transport properties
can be used for Compositional Tracking simulations.
The following methods can be used in Compositional Tracking via the Multiflash PVT package:
Equations of state: All RKS, PSRK, PR and PR methods are available. Note that GERG 2008 is not
available to estimate vapor densities.
Viscosity: LBC, Pedersen and SuperTRAPP are available
- 615 -
OLGA User manual
Thermal Conductivity: SuperTRAPP and CLS are available.
Surface Tension: Only the two-phase Macleod-Sugden (MCSA) is available. Note that for surface tension
of systems containing water, the Sutton model is used.
PVT properties for non-existing phase
When generating an OLGA fluid properties file (TAB file) all properties need to be given at all pressure and
temperature points in the file. That applies also if the phase the property belongs to does not exist at the
pressure and temperature in question. OLGA does in certain cases use the numbers in the TAB file for the
non-existent phase, so these should generally be sensible numbers rather than for instance a zero. How
this can be done is briefly described below. Some examples of when the non-existent phase is used are:
1. You specify a well or source with non-equilibrium inflow. That is, you can, for example, specify that
there is gas present at conditions where according to the fluid file there is single phase liquid. This is
typically done to adjust the GOR of the fluid or for simulation of gas lift.
2. During a shut-in the liquid in the pipeline redistributes. The gas and liquid volumes in a section are
then no longer well represented by the TAB file. Subsequent pressure and temperature changes can
result in a phase being present outside the region where it should be according to the TAB file.
3. During the numerical solving process, OLGA may stray outside of the 2-phase region as part of its
iteration sequence before converging to a point that is inside the 2-phase region.
There are no specific requirements on how the properties of the non-existent phase should be generated.
However, the numbers should be reasonable, because they in many cases in reality are used to represent
fluids with slightly different composition than what the TAB file was made with. However, two main
approaches have been used:
Extrapolation: The value and its derivative with respect to pressure at the phase boundary are used to
extrapolate into the region where the property does not exist.
Compositional: By addition of gas or condensate the phase envelope is expanded so that it passes
through the P and T for which a property is to be calculated.
The experience is that the extrapolation method is preferable, but unreasonable values are often seen
when extrapolation is performed far into the non-existing region. It is further important that the there are no
abrupt changes in property values with changing pressure and temperature. Step changes in property
values will generally create numerical instabilities when a simulation is performed in that pressure and
temperature region.
The extrapolation of enthalpy and entropy should be consistent with thermal capacity. Extrapolation of
density should be consistent with the derivative of density with regard to pressure.
Note that going vertically up from the critical point, OLGA considers the phase to the left (lower T) to be
dense oil, and the phase to the right to be dense gas. The properties set for the non-existing phase must
ensure that properties are continuous at the critical line so that this is a virtual transition with no actual
effect.
Keyword based format for fluid properties
This format has all the possibilities as the fixed/standard format, and some additional ones. The intention
of introducing a keyword based format is to:
1. Use different units for the various PVT parameters

2. Facilitate conversion between mass flow rate and volumetric flow rate at standard conditions (Not
implemented yet)
3. Be able to adapt more easily the temperature and pressure mesh to the phase envelope
4. Make a format that is easily extendable for new parameters
- 616 -
Reference manual
5. Provide composition information to help customer support for PVT related problems
6. Easily export PVT data to spreadsheets
The syntax of the keyword
The syntax of OLGA input applies to the new table format. Specifically, an input statement has the general
form:
KEYWORD KEY = Parameter list, ...
where the ellipses (...) indicate that the statement can contain more than one 'KEY = Parameter list'
combination. Commas separate such combinations. The KEYWORD identifies the input statement. Each
keyword has a set of variables, each identified by a KEY (for example, SETPOINT).
Separators
Items are separated by commas (,).
Tabulation is treated as one single space.
Line continuation
An input statement can be written on several lines by ending each line with the continuation character: \
(backslash)
Comments
Comments are indicated with the comments mark:
! (exclamation mark)
Any information on a line after a comment mark is ignored.
The comment mark can be put anywhere on the line.
String protector
A string that contains spaces or commas should be protected with double quotes:
" (double quote)
List protector
Any list should be put inside a parenthesis:
( ... )
Table structure
A table is defined through the keyword:
PVTTABLE
The structure of the fluid property table is as follows:
For each of the tables
PVTTABLE LABEL = fluid-1, etc
For each of the pressure and temperature points
PVTTABLE POINT = (…)
End of pressure and temperature points
- 617 -
OLGA User manual
End of tables
The values of all parameters except POINT must be written in a single line. Fluid properties for each
pressure/temperature point must subsequently be specified through the PVTTABLE POINT structure,
repeated for each pressure/temperature point.
Keyword PVTTABLE

Unit: ( ) set Default: [
]
LABEL str. Name of the table.
PHASE sym [TWO] | Two or three phase table

THREE
EOS[1] str. Equation of state used in generating the PVT

table. Optional.
MESHTYPE sym. [STANDARD] | STANDARD: Both temperature and pressure

FREEPRES | points are fixed independently
FREETEMP FREEPRES: Temperature points are fixed first
and the pressure points are specified for each
of the individual temperature points.
FREETEMP: Pressure points are fixed first
and the temperature points are specified for
each of the individual pressure points.
COMPONENTS1 str.l. List of names of the components in the

composition. Optional.
MOLES1 r.l. Mole fraction for each of the components in

the composition. Optional.
DENSITY1 r.l. Density for each of the components in the

(kg/m3) composition. Set to –999 if not available.
Optional.
MOLWEIGHT1 r.l. Molecular weight for each of the components

(g/mol) in the composition. Optional.
STDPRESSURE1 r. (Pa) [ 1 ATM] Pressure at standard conditions (1 atm) .

Optional
STDTEMPERATURE1 r. (°C) [15.5 °C] Temperature at standard conditions (15.5 oC).

Optional.
- 618 -
Reference manual

]
GOR1 r. Gas/oil ratio at standard conditions. For two-

(Sm3/S phase flow, GOR is interpreted as gas/liquid
m3) ratio, that is, it is ratio of gas volume fraction to
the liquid volume fraction at standard
conditions. For cases where there is no
oil/liquid, set GOR = -999.
GLR1 r. Gas/liquid ratio at standard conditions. For

(Sm3/S cases where there is no liquid, set GLR = -999.
m3)
WC1,2 r. (-) Water cut standard conditions, for three-phase

table only.
STDGASDENSITY1 r. Gas density at standard conditions.

(kg/m3)
STDOILDENSITY1 r. Oil density at standard conditions.

(kg/m3)
STDLIQDENSITY1 r. Liquid density at standard conditions. This key

(kg/m3) is only used in two-phase fluid tables
generated from a composition with water, in
which case it replaces STDOILDENSITY.
STDWATDENSITY1,[2] r. Water density at standard conditions.

(kg/m3)
TOTWATERFRACTION2 r. (-) Mass fraction of water component in the

composition.
DEWPRESSURES r.l. (Pa) Dewpoint pressures. The subkeys

DEWPRESSURES and
DEWTEMPERATURES are optional. Leave
out these two subkeys if no dew point curve is
found
DEWTEMPERATURES r.l. (°C) Dewpoint temperatures corresponding to the

dewpoint pressure given in keyword
DEWPRESSURES.
BUBBLEPRESSURES r.l. (Pa) Bubble point pressures
BUBBLETEMPERATURES r.l. (°C) Bubble point temperatures corresponding to

the bubble point pressures given in keyword
BUBBLEPRESSURES
The subkeys BUBBLEPRESSURE and
- 619 -
OLGA User manual

]
BUBBLETEMPERATURE are optional. Leave

out these two subkeys if no bubble point curve
is found.
CRITICALPRESSURE r. (Pa) Pressure at the critical point
CRITICALTEMPERATURE r. (°C) Temperature at the critical point. The subkeys

CRITICALPRESSURE and
CRITICALTEMPERATURE are optional. If the
critical point is not found, either set the values
of critical pressure and temperature to –999, or
leave out these two subkeys.
NOPRES i.l. Number of pressure points for each of

temperature points given in subkey
TEMPERATURE. Only if MESHTYPE =
FREEPRES
TEMPERATURE r.l. (°C) Temperature points if MESHTYPE =

FREEPRES or STANDARD
NOTEMP i.l. Number of temperature points for each of

pressure points given in subkey PRESSURE.
Only if MESHTYPE = FREETEMP
PRESSURE r.l. (pa) Pressure points if MESHTYPE = FREETEMP

or STANDARD
COLUMNS sym.l. The default Specify orders and units of parameters for a
unit is given in table point.
parenthesis
TM (°C) Temperature
PT (Pa) Pressure
RS (-) Gas mass fraction in gas/oil mixture
RSW (-) Water vapour mass fraction in gas phase2
ROG (kg/m3) Gas density
DROGDP Derivative of gas density w.r.t pressure

(s2/m2)
DROGDT Derivative of gas density w.r.t temperature

(kg/m3°C)
- 620 -
Reference manual

]
ROHL (kg/m3) Oil density
Key
Type Parameter set Default [ ] Description
Unit ( )
DROHLDP (s2/m2) Derivative of oil density w.r.t pressure
DROHLDT (kg/m3°C) Derivative of oil density w.r.t

temperature
ROWT (kg/m3) Water density.2
DROWTDP (s2/m2) Derivative of water density w.r.t

pressure.2
DROWTDT (kg/m3°C) Derivative of water density w.r.t

temperature.2
TCG (W/m°C) Gas thermal conductivity.
TCHL (W/m°C) Oil thermal conductivity.
TCWT (W/m°C) Water thermal conductivity.
CPG (J/kg°C) Gas thermal capacity.
CPHL (J/kg°C) Oil thermal capacity.
CPWT (J/kg°C) Water thermal capacity.2
HG (J/kg) Gas enthalpy.
HHL (J/kg) Oil enthalpy.
HWT (J/kg) Water enthalpy.2
VISG (Ns/m2) Gas viscosity.
- 621 -
OLGA User manual
Key
Type Parameter set Default [ ] Description
Unit ( )
VISHL (Ns/m2) Oil viscosity.
VISWT (Ns/m2) Water viscosity.2
SEG (J/kg°C) Gas entropy.
SEHL (J/kg°C) Oil entropy.
SEWT (J/kg°C) Water entropy.2
SIGGHL (N/m) Surface tension between gas and oil.
SIGGWT (N/m) Surface tension between gas and water.

2
SIGHLWT (N/m) Surface tension between oil and water.2
POINT r.l. Values of parameters, see note 1 and 2

below.
Note: The pressure and temperature values must be the same as specified in the keys PRESSURE and
TEMPERATURE for mesh type STANDARD. Pressure must be the same as specified in the keys
PRESSURE for mesh type FREETEMP. Temperature must be the same as specified in the keys
TEMPERATURE for mesh type FREEPRES.
Note: The order and the units must be the same as specified in the key COLUMNS.
Note: The use of pressure and temperature dependent values in the Complex fluid module is not yet
implemented.
Examples
Example 1: Two-phase, Standard mesh type
PVTTABLE LABEL = FLUID-1, PHASE = TWO, \
COMPONENTS =(N2,CO2,C1,C2, C3, IC4, NC4, IC5,NC5, C6,C7) ,\
MOLES = ( 4.64,3.02,65.39,5.04,2.97,0.90,1.72,0.85,0.84,1.6,13.03),\
MOLWEIGHT = (28.0,44.01,16.04,30.1,44.1,58.1,58.1,72.1,72.1,86.2,154.3)
DENSITY = (0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0.789) g/cm3
STDPRESSURE = 1 ATM, \
STDTEMPERATURE = 15.5 C, \
- 622 -
Reference manual
GLR = 768 SM3/SM3, \
STDGASDENSITY = 1.0 KG/M3, \
STDOILDENSITY = 787.7 KG/M3, \
DEWTEMPERATURE = ( 281.27,285.66,291.15,296.62,302.03,\
328.81,330.91,331.56,331.54,330.50,\
327.48,321.73,312.37,298.41,278.85,\
261.62,247.00,228.69,213.56,194.95,\
179.74,170.39,160.41,156.59) C, \
DEWPRESSURE = ( 5.00, 5.99, 7.50, 9.39, 11.74 ,\
14.67, 18.32, 22.87, 28.55, 35.65, \
44.57, 55.79, 67.71, 70.01, 84.78, \
102.96,125.37,152.53,184.55,220.92, \
247.76,267.66,289.40,304.96,321.31, \
332.46,338.34,343.81,345.68) BARA, \
BUBBLETEMPERATURE=( 139.72,125.96,112.46,103.52,92.67,\
73.39, 54.56, 36.12, 26.85,22.85, \
18.85, 18.00, 14.85, 10.85, 6.85,\
2.85, 0.09, -1.15,- 5.15,-9.15,\
-13.15,-17.78,-32.86) C, \
BUBBLEPRESSURE=( 352.44,356.11,358.07,358.44,357.88, \
354.02,346.52,335.35,328.21,324.81, \
321.20,320.41,317.39,313.36,309.13, \
304.68,301.49,300.01,295.12,290.00, \
CRITICALPRESSURE (345.68) BARA, \
CRITICALTEMPERATURE = 156.59 C, \
!both temperature points and pressure points are fixed
TEMPERATURE =(1,2,3,4,5) C,\
PRESSURE = (1,2,3,4,5) BARA, \
COLUMNS =(PT BARA, TM C, ROG KG/M3, ROHL KG/M3, DROGDP, DROHLDP, DROGDT, \
DROHLDT,RS,VISG,VISHL,CPG,CPHL,HG, HHL,TCG,TCHL,SIGGHL,SEG,SEHL)
PVTTABLE POINT = (1,1, 9.628E-01, 7.919E+02, 9.666E-06, 8.513E-07, -3.557E-03, \
-5.931E-01, 4.617E-01, 1.054E-05, 1.299E-03, 1.805E+03, 1.963E+03, \
4.841E+02, -3.884E+05, 2.738E-02, 1.379E-01, 2.284E-02, 3.816E+02, \
- 623 -
OLGA User manual
-7.810E+02)
PVTTABLE POINT = (1,2,…)
PVTTABLE POINT = (1,5,..)
… )
Example 2: Two-phase, freepressure mesh type
MOLES = ( 4.64,3.02,65.39,5.04,2.97,0.90,1.72,0.85,0.84,1.6,13.03) ,\
MOLWEIGHT = (28.0,44.01,16.04,30.1,44.1,58.1,58.1,72.1,72.1,86.2,154.3) ,\
DENSITY = (0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0.789) g/cm3 ,\
GLR = 768 SM3/SM3, \
STDOILDENSITY = 787.7 KG/M3 ,\
DEWTEMPERATURE = ( 281.27,285.66,291.15,296.62,302.03, \
307.32,312.44,317.28,321.74,325.65, \
328.81,330.91,331.56,331.54,330.50, \
327.48,321.73,312.37,298.41,278.85, \
261.62,247.00,228.69,213.56,194.95, \
179.74,170.39,160.41,156.59) C, \
DEWPRESSURE = (5.00,5.99,7.50,9.39,11.74,14.67,18.32,22.87, \
28.55,35.65,44.57,55.79,67.71,70.01,84.78, \
102.96,125.37,152.53,184.55,220.92, \
247.76,267.66,289.40,304.96,321.31, \
332.46,338.34,343.81,345.68) BARA, \
BUBBLETEMPERATURE=( 139.72,125.96,112.46,103.52,92.67, \
73.39, 54.56, 36.12, 26.85,22.85, \
18.85, 18.00, 14.85, 10.85, 6.85,\
2.85, 0.09, -1.15,- 5.15,-9.15,\
-13.15,-17.78,-32.86) C, \
BUBBLEPRESSURE=( 352.44,356.11,358.07,358.44,357.88, \
- 624 -
Reference manual
354.02,346.52,335.35,328.21,324.81, \
321.20,320.41,317.39,313.36,309.13, \
304.68,301.49,300.01,295.12,290.00. \
284.65,278.16,254.79) BARA, \
CRITICALPESSURE (345.68) BARA, \
MESHTYPE = FREEPRES, \
! temperature points are specified here.
! number of pressure points and pressure values can be different for
! (be dependent on) different temperature points.
! number of pressure points for each of the temperature points are given here
!..the pressure values are given in subkey POINT
TEMPERATURE =(1.0,2.0,3.0,4.0,5.0) C,\
NOPRES =(5,5,5,5,6),\
COLUMNS =(PT BARA, TM C,ROG KG/M3, ROHL KG/M3, DROGDP, DROHLDP, \
DROGDT,DROHLDT,RS,VISG,VISHL,CPG,CPHL,HG,HHL,TCG, \
TCHL,SIGGHL,SEG,SEHL)
! first temp. point contains five pressure points ranging from 1 to 10 bara
PVTTABLE POINT = (1.0,1.0, 9.628E-01, 7.919E+02, 9.666E-06, 8.513E-07, \
-3.557E-03,-5.931E-01,4.617E-01, 1.054E-05, 1.299E-03, \
1.805E+03, 1.963E+03, 4.841E+02, -3.884E+05, 2.738E-02, \
1.379E-01, 2.284E-02, 3.816E+02, -7.810E+02)
PVTTABLE POINT = (2.0,1.0,…)
! more temperature points. Each has five pressure points.
!last temperature point contains six pressure points
PVTTABLE POINT = (1.0,5.0,..)
- 625 -
OLGA User manual
Example 3: Two-phase, freetemperature mesh type
MOLES = ( 4.64,3.02,65.39,5.04,2.97,0.90,1.72,0.85,0.84,1.6,13.03),\
MOLWEIGHT = (28.0,44.01,16.04,30.1,44.1,58.1,58.1,72.1,72.1,86.2,154.3),\
DENSITY = (0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0.789) g/cm3, \
GLR = 768 SM3/SM3, \
DEWTEMPERATURE = ( 281.27,285.66,291.15,296.62,302.03,\
307.32,312.44,317.28,321.74,325.65,\
328.81,330.91,331.56,331.54,330.50,\
327.48,321.73,312.37,298.41,278.85,\
261.62,247.00,228.69,213.56,194.95,\
179.74,170.39,160.41,156.59) C, \
DEWPRESSURE = (5.00,5.99,7.50,9.39,11.74,14.67,18.32,\
22.87,28.55,35.65,44.57,55.79,67.71,70.01, \
84.78,102.96,125.37,152.53,184.55,220.92, \
247.76,267.66,289.40,304.96,321.31, \
332.46,338.34,343.81,345.68) BARA, \
BUBBLETEMPERATURE=(139.72,125.96,112.46,103.52,92.67,\
73.39,54.56, 36.12, 26.85,22.85, \
18.85,18.00, 14.85, 10.85, 6.85,\
2.85,0.09, -1.15,- 5.15,-9.15,\
-13.15,-17.78,-32.86) C, \
BUBBLEPRESSURE=( 352.44,356.11,358.07,358.44,357.88, \
354.02,346.52,335.35,328.21,324.81, \
321.20,320.41,317.39,313.36,309.13, \
304.68,301.49,300.01,295.12,290.00, \
284.65,278.16,254.79) BARA, \
- 626 -
Reference manual
! Pressure points are specified here.
! Number of temperature points and temperature values can change for
! (be dependent on) different pressure points.
! Number of temperature points for each of the pressure points are given here
!..The temperature values are given in subkey POINT
MESHTYP = FREETEMP, \
PRESSURE =(1.0,2.0,3.0,4.0,5.0) BARA,\
NOTEMP =(5,5,5,5,6),\
COLUMNS =(PT BARA, TM C, ROG KG/M3, ROHL KG/M3, DROGDP, \
DROHLDP,DROGDT,DROHLDT,RS,VISG,VISHL,CPG,CPHL,HG, \
HHL,TCG,TCHL,SIGGHL,SEG,SEHL)
! First pressure point contains five temperature points
! Temperature ranging from 1 to 20 C
PVTTABLE POINT = (1.0, 1.0, 9.628E-01, 7.919E+02, 9.666E-06, 8.513E-07, \
-3.557E-03,-5.931E-01, 4.617E-01, 1.054E-05, 1.299E-03, \
1.805E+03, 1.963E+03, 4.841E+02,-3.884E+05, 2.738E-02, \
1.379E-01, 2.284E-02, 3.816E+02, -7.810E+02)
PVTTABLE POINT = (1.0, 2.0,…)
PVTTABLE POINT = (1.0, 4.0,…)
! more pressure points. Each has five temperature points.
!last pressure point contains six temperature points
PVTTABLE POINT = (5.0, 1.0,..)
PVTTABLE POINT = (5.0, 5.0,..)
- 627 -
OLGA User manual
Example 4: Three-phase, Standard mesh type
PVTTABLE LABEL = FLUID-1, PHASE = THREE, \
MOLES = ( 4.64,3.02,65.39,5.04,2.97,0.90,1.72,0.85,0.84,1.6,13.03),\
MOLWEIGHT = (28.0,44.01,16.04,30.1,44.1,58.1,58.1,72.1,72.1,86.2,154.3)
DENSITY = (0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0.789) g/cm3
GLR = 768 SM3/SM3, \
STDWATDENSITY = 998. KG/M3, \
DEWTEMPERATURE = ( 281.27,285.66,291.15,296.62,302.03,\
307.32,312.44,317.28,321.74,325.65,\
328.81,330.91,331.56,331.54,330.50,\
327.48,321.73,312.37,298.41,278.85,\
261.62,247.00,228.69,213.56,194.95,\
179.74,170.39,160.41,156.59) C, \
DEWPRESSURE = ( 5.00, 5.99, 7.50, 9.39, 11.74 ,\
14.67, 18.32, 22.87, 28.55, 35.65, \
44.57, 55.79, 67.71, 70.01, 84.78, \
102.96,125.37,152.53,184.55,220.92, \
247.76,267.66,289.40,304.96,321.31, \
332.46,338.34,343.81,345.68) BARA, \
BUBBLETEMPERATURE=( 139.72,125.96,112.46,103.52,92.67,\
73.39, 54.56, 36.12, 26.85,22.85, \
18.85, 18.00, 14.85, 10.85, 6.85,\
2.85, 0.09, -1.15,- 5.15,-9.15,\
-13.15,-17.78,-32.86) C, \
BUBBLEPRESSURE=( 352.44,356.11,358.07,358.44,357.88, \
354.02,346.52,335.35,328.21,324.81, \
321.20,320.41,317.39,313.36,309.13, \
304.68,301.49,300.01,295.12,290.00, \
284.65,278.16,254.79) BARA, \
- 628 -
Reference manual
!both temperature points and pressure points are fixed
TOTWATERFRACTION = 0.112, \
WC=.489380E-02,\
TEMPERATURE =(1,2,3,4,5) C,\
PRESSURE = (1,2,3,4,5) BARA, \
COLUMNS = (PT,TM,ROG,ROHL,ROWT,DROGDP,DROHLDP,DROWTDP,DROGDT,DROHLDT, \
DROWTDT,RS,RSW,VISG,VISHL,VISWT,CPG,CPHL,CPWT,HG,HHL,HWT,TCG, \
TCHL,TCWT,SIGGHL,SIGGWT,SIGHLWT,SEG,SEHL,SEWT)
PVTTABLE POINT = (1,1,.112510E+01,.708593E+03,.677649E+03,.113188E-04, \
.520848E-06,.156303E-06,-.418187E-02,-.332632E+00,.535346E+00, \
.372160E-01,.182867E-02,.979882E-05,.591224E-02,.263150E-02, \
-.196628E+07,.248102E-01,.148744E+00,.570657E+00,.118942E-01, \
.755188E-01,.544038E-01,.435748E+03,-.631419E+03,-.537537E+04)
… )
Standard conditions for keyword based PVT file
Properties at standard condition can be given in the keyword based fluid files. These are used when
converting standard condition properties (for example, GORST) given at boundaries. If no such properties
are given in the header, OLGA uses interpolation in the fluid table to derive the properties needed in this
conversion. However, specifying standard conditions values in the header gives more accurate values,
especially when the pressure and temperature grid is coarse around the standard conditions.
In a fluid table, where such standard conditions are given, STDPRESSURE and STDTEMPERATURE are
the standard pressure and temperature where these properties are calculated. This temperature and
pressure are used as the standard-conditions in the OLGA simulation, If these keys are not in the fluid-file,
default values of 1 atm and 15.56 °C/60 °F are used.
In addition, the following properties can be given at these conditions:
 GOR - Gas-oil ratio at standard conditions.
- 629 -
OLGA User manual
 GLR - Gas-liquid ratio at standard conditions.

 STDGASDENSITY - Density of gas at standard conditions.
 STDOILDENSITY - Density of oil at standard conditions.
 STDWATDENSITY - Density of water at standard conditions.
 STDLIQDENSITY - Density of liquid at standard conditions.
 WC - Water-cut at standard conditions.
Note: The gas includes water vapour in these standard condition properties. Also the keys
STDWATDENSITY and WC are only used for three-phase tables, and STDLIQDENSITY is used for
two-phase fluid tables generated from a composition with water.
Fixed/standard format for fluid properties
Examples of fluid property tables can be found enclosed with the sample cases from the GUI.
The interpretation of tables in the fluid properties file is determined from:
1. Whether there is more than one fluid.

2. The content of the fluid identifier, FLUIDF, as follows:
 If the sub-string 'WATER-OPTION' is present, three phase tables are expected in the file.
 If the sub-string 'NONEQ' is present, non-equidistant spacing in the tables are expected.
 If the sub-string 'ENTROPY' is present, entropy tables for gas, oil and eventually water are
expected.
The input variables FILEID, NCOMP and LC can be collectively omitted for single branch cases.
Name Unit Definition

Variables:
[FILEID] File identification (60 characters)
[NCOMP] Number of fluids in this file.
The following data are repeated for each fluid:
FLUIDF (-) Fluid identifier enclosed in apostrophes.
If FLUIDF contains the sub-string WATER-OPTION,

NONEQ or ENTROPY the tables are read as
explained above.
[LC] Fluid label The label must be unique and can be a

number or a text
string. (LA
B_1,LAB_2, ... ,LAB_NCOMP)
NTABP (-) Number of pressure points in the table
NTABT (-) Number of temperature points in the table
- 630 -
Reference manual

Variables:
[RSWTOTB] (kg/kg) Total water mass fraction for the feed. Optionally,
default value = 0 (Only used together with three-
phase tables)
DP (N/m2) Pressure step in the table
DT (°C) Temperature step in the table
PP(I) (N/m2) Pressure values in the table, I=1,NTABP
TT(J) (°C) Temperature values in the table, J = 1, NTABT
PBB(J) (N/m2) Bubble point pressures,J = 1, NTABT
PDEW(J) (N/m2) Dew point pressures,J = 1, NTABT
For temperatures in the table which indi-cate single

phase flow for the whole range of pressures (all
points are outside the two-phase envelope for a
specific temperature, see Figure A), the
corresponding bubble point pressures must be
greater than the largest pressure point in the tables.
The dew point pressures are not used in the present
OLGA version
TABTEX(L) (-) Text string to identify the different properties.
Note: For all tables below, J = 1, NTABT and I = 1, NTABP
ROGTB(J,I) (kg/m3) Gas densities
ROOTB(J,I) (kg/m3) Oil densities
[ROWTB(J,I)] (kg/m3) Water densities (Optional, only to be given if the sub-

string 'WATER-OPTION' is present in FLUIDF)
DRGPTB(J,I) (s2/m2) Partial derivatives of gas densities with respect to

pressure
DROPTB(J,I) (s2/m2) Partial derivatives of oil densities with respect to

pressure
[DRWPTB(J,I)] (s2/m2) Partial derivatives of water densities with respect to
- 631 -
OLGA User manual

Variables:
pressure. (Optional, only to be given if the sub-string

'WATER-OPTION' is present in FLUIDF)
DRGTTB(J,I) (kg/m3C) Partial derivatives of gas densities with respect to

temperature
DROTTB(J,I) (kg/m3C) Partial derivatives of oil densities with respect to

temperature
[DRWTTB(J,I)] (kg/m3C) Partial derivatives of water densities with respect to

temperature. (Optional, only to be given if the sub-
string 'WATER-OPTION' is present in
FLUIDF)
RSGTB(J,I) (kg/kg) Gas mass fraction in gas and oil mixture; the gas
mass divided by the gas and oil mass. All values in
this table must be set to a constant (between 0 and
1) (for all points) in case of no interphase mass
transfer. ( = 0 gives single phase liquid, =1 gives
single phase gas).
REMARK: The gas may also contain water vapour.
[RSWTB(J,I)] (kg/kg) Water vapour mass fraction in the gas

phase (Optional, only to be given if the sub-string
'WATER-OPTION' is present in FLUIDF)
VSGTB(J,I) (Ns/m2) Dynamic viscosities for gas
VSOTB(J,I) (Ns/m2) Dynamic viscosities for oil
[VSWTB(J,I)] (Ns/m2) Dynamic viscosities for water (Optional, only to be

given if the sub-string 'WATER-OPTION' is present in
FLUIDF)
CPGTB(J,I) (J/kgC) Gas heat capacities at constant pressure
CPOTB(J,I) (J/kgC) Oil heat capacities at constant pressure
[CPWTB(J,I)] (J/kgC) Water heat capacities at constant pressure (Optional,

only to be given if the sub-string 'WATER-OPTION' is
present in FLUIDF)
HGTB(J,I) (J/kg) Gas enthalpies
- 632 -
Reference manual

Variables:
HOTB(J,I) (J/kg) Oil enthalpies
[HWTB(J,I)] (J/kg) Water enthalpies (Optional, only to be given if the

sub-string 'WATER-OPTION' is present in FLUIDF)
TKGTB(J,I) (W/mC) Gas thermal conductivities
TKOTB(J,I) () Oil thermal conductivities
[TKWTB(J,I)] (W/mC) Water thermal conductivities (Optional, only to be

given if the sub-string 'WATER-OPTION' is present in
FLUIDF)
SIGOGT(J,I) (N/m) Surface tension between gas andoil
[SIGWGT(J,I)] (N/m) Surface tension between gas and water (Optional,

present in FLUIDF)
[SIGWOT(J,I)] (N/m) Surface tension between water and oil (Optional,

present in FLUIDF)
SGTB(J,I) (J/kgC) Gas specific entropy
SOTB(J,I) (J/kgC) Oil specific entropy
[SWTB(J,I)] (J/kgC) Water specific entropy. (Optional, only to be given if

the sub-string 'WATER-OPTION' is present in
FLUIDF)
Data file structure:
The data enclosed in brackets can collectively be omitted for single branch cases.
[FILEID]
[NCOMP]
The following data are repeated for each fluid composition.
The file heading for equidistant tables. Note that RSWTOTB is set to zero by OLGA if omitted:
FLUIDF
[LC]
NTABP NTABT RSWTOTB
- 633 -
OLGA User manual
DP DT
PP(1) TT(1)
The file heading for non-equidistant tables. Note that RSWTOTB is set to zero by OLGA if omitted:
FLUIDF
[LC]
NTABP NTABT [RSWTOTB]
PP(1) . . . . . . . . PP(NTABP)
TT(1) . . . . . . . . TT(NTABT)
The fluid property tables:
PBB(1) . . . . . . . . PBB(NTABT)
PDEW(1) . . . . . . . . PDEW(NTABT)
TABTEX(1)
ROGTB(1,1) . . . . . . . ROGTB(NTABT,1)
ROGTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . ROGTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(2)
ROOTB(1,1) . . . . . . . ROOTB(NTABT,1)
ROOTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . ROOTB(NTABT,NTABP)
if FLUIDF contains substring WATER-OPTION, then
TABTEX(3)
ROWTB(1,1) . . . . . ROWTB(NTABT,1)
ROWTB(1,NTABP) . . . ROWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION
TABTEX(4)
DRGPTB(1,1). . . . . . . DRGPTB(NTABT,1)
- 634 -
Reference manual
DRGPTB(1,NTABP). . . . . DRGPTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(5)
DROPTB(1,1). . . . . . . DROPTB(NTABT,1)
DROPTB(1,NTABP). . . . . DROPTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(6)
DRWPTB(1,1). . . . . . . DRWPTB(NTABT,1)
DRWPTB(1,NTABP). . . . . DRWPTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION
TABTEX(7)
DRGTTB(1,1). . . . . . . DRGTTB(NTABT,1)
DRGTTB(1,NTABP). . . . . DRGTTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(8)
DROTTB(1,1). . . . . . . DROTTB(NTABT,1)
DROTTB(1,NTABP). . . . . DROTTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(9)
DRWTTB(1,1). . . . . . . DRWTTB(NTABT,1)
DRWTTB(1,NTABP). . . . . DRWTTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION
TABTEX(10)
RSGTB(1,1). . . . . . . RSGTB(NTABT,1)
- 635 -
OLGA User manual
RSGTB(1,NTABP). . . . . RSGTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(11)
RSWTB(1,1) . . . . . . . RSWTB(NTABT,1)
RSWTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . RSWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION
TABTEX(12)
VSGTB(1,1) . . . . . . . VSGTB(NTABT,1)
VSGTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . VSGTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(13)
VSOTB(1,1) . . . . . . . VSOTB(NTABT,1)
VSOTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . VSOTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(14)
VSWTB(1,1) . . . . . . . VSWTB(NTABT,1)
VSWTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . VSWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION
TABTEX(15)
CPGTB(1,1) . . . . . . . CPGTB(NTABT,1)
- 636 -
Reference manual
CPGTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . CPGTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(16)
CPOTB(1,1) . . . . . . . CPOTB(NTABT,1)
CPOTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . CPOTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(17)
CPWTB(1,1) . . . . . . . CPWTB(NTABT,1)
CPWTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . CPWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION
TABTEX(18)
HGTB(1,1) . . . . . . . HGTB(NTABT,1)
HGTB(1,NTABP). . . . . . HGTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(19)
HOTB(1,1) . . . . . . . HOTB(NTABT,1)
HOTB(1,NTABP). . . . . . HOTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(20)
HWTB(1,1) . . . . . . . HWTB(NTABT,1)
- 637 -
OLGA User manual
HWTB(1,NTABP). . . . . . HWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION
TABTEX(21)
TKGTB(1,1) . . . . . . . TKGTB(NTABT,1)
TKGTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . TKGTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(22)
TKOTB(1,1) . . . . . . . TKOTB(NTABT,1)
TKOTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . TKOTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(23)
TKWTB(1,1) . . . . . . . TKWTB(NTABT,1)
TKWTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . TKWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION
TABTEX(24)
SIGOGT(1,1). . . . . . . SIGOGT(NTABT,1)
SIGOGT(1,NTABP). . . . . SIGOGT(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(25)
SIGWGT(1,1) . . . . . . . SIGWGT(NTABT,1)
SIGWGT(1,NTABP) . . . . . SIGWGT(NTABT,NTABP)
- 638 -
Reference manual
TABTEX(26)
SIGWOT(1,1) . . . . . . . SIGWOT(NTABT,1)
SIGWOT(1,NTABP) . . . . . SIGWOT(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION
if FLUIDF contains substring ENTROPY, then
TABTEX(27)
SGTB(1,1) . . . . . . . SGTB(NTABT,1)
SGTB(1,NTABP). . . . . . SGTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(28)
SOTB(1,1) . . . . . . . SOTB(NTABT,1)
SOTB(1,NTABP). . . . . . SOTB(NTABT,NTABP)
if FLUIDF also contains substring WATER-OPTION, then
TABTEX(29)
SWTB(1,1) . . . . . . . SWTB(NTABT,1)
SWTB(1,NTABP) . . . . . SWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION
end if
Complex fluid - Data from fluid property file (Deprecated)
The liquid viscosity table in the fluid properties file plays different, but related, roles in the three different
rheology models in the Complex fluid module.
1. The Newtonian option (TYPE=COMPLEXFLUID and CFLUML=NEWTONIAN in the FLUID keyword)

yields the original interpretation.
2. The power law model (TYPE=COMPLEXFLUID and CFLUML=POWERLAW in the FLUID keyword)
yields the consistency factor, K.
3. The Bingham fluid model (TYPE=COMPLEXFLUID and CFLUML=BINGHAM in the FLUID keyword)
yields the coefficient of rigidity.
- 639 -
OLGA User manual
If simplified input is used (FULL=NO in the FLUID keyword), the non-Newtonian parameters are used at
the in situ shear stress to calculate the effective viscosity of the fluid at standard conditions. To obtain the
effective viscosity of the fluid at pipeline conditions, the effective viscosity at standard conditions have to
be multiplied by the ratio of the viscosity (as given in the viscosity table in the fluid data file) at pipeline
conditions and standard conditions.
The fluid identifier FLUIDF, see Fixed/standard format for fluid properties on page 630, have to include
certain text strings to enable OLGA to interpret the fluid property file correctly. The strings required are
explained below.
 POWEXPL: The fluid property file contains a table of the power law exponent for the oil phase.
 POWEXPW: The fluid property file contains a table of the power law exponent for the water phase.
 YIELDSTRL: The fluid property file contains a table of yield stress for the oil phase.
 YIELDSTRW: The fluid property file contains a table of yield stress for the water phase.
The text string that identifies the different properties TABTEX(), see Standard format for fluid properties,
also have to include the same text strings as described above.
Example
TABTEX(:)
VSOTB(1,1) . . . VSOTB(NTABT,1)
: :
VSOTB(1,NTABP) . . . VSOTB(NTABT,NTABP)
TABTEX(:)
VSWTB(1,1) . . . VSWTB(NTABT,1)
: :
VSWTB(1,NTABP) . . . VSWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end WATER-OPTION
if FLUIDF contains substring POWEXPL, then
TABTEX(:)
POWNTB(1,1) . . . POWNTB(NTABT,1)
: :
POWNTB(1,NTABP) . . . POWNTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end
if FLUIDF contains substring YIELDSTRL, then
TABTEX(:)
TAUITB(1,1) . . . TAUITB(NTABT,1)
- 640 -
Reference manual
: :
TAUITB(1,NTABP) . . . TAUITB(NTABT,NTABP)
end
if FLUIDF contains substring POWEXPW, then
TABTEX(:)
POWNWTB(1,1) . . . POWNWTB(NTABT,1)
: :
POWNWTB(1,NTABP) . . . POWNWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end
if FLUIDF contains substring YIELDSTRW, then
TABTEX(:)
TAUIWTB(1,1) . . . TAUIWTB(NTABT,1)
: :
TAUIWTB(1,NTABP) . . . TAUIWTB(NTABT,NTABP)
end
TABTEX(:)
CPGTB(1,1) . . . CPGTB(NTABT,1)
: :
CPGTB(1,NTABP) . . . CPGTB(NTABT,NTABP)
Pump Data Files

Pump Data Table for Centrifugal Pumps
The pump characteristics for the centrifugal pump are presented in the form of four quadrant curves.
These curves are empirically developed by the pump manufacturer. The four quadrant curves must be
converted to a dimensionless form by the development of homologous curves where the head and torque
ratios (actual value to rated value) are functions of the pump speed and flow rate ratios. To interpret the
homologous curves, the following variables are defined:
head ratio
flow ratio
- 641 -
OLGA User manual
speed ratio
torque ratio
where subscript R means rated value. Four sets of homologous curves are tabulated:
1. Single phase head HS

2. Two phase head HT
3. Single phase torque THS
4. Two phase torque THT
Each set of homologous curves consists of four curves, comprised of two dependent variables each as
function of two independent variables. A more detailed description is given under Pumps .
The transfer from single phase to fully degraded two phase conditions is described by the two phase head
and two phase torque multipliers.
A complete default set of homologous curves is tabulated in the code. These are based on experimental
data and are representative for centrifugal pumps. However, you can change these data easily by
specifying their own experimental or model-specific data through the pump data table.
The structure of the table is as shown in the example below. The reading of the input is based on
keywords, but the sequence of the keywords must be as shown in the example. For the independent
variables, the keyword QOMEG is used for q/ and the keyword OMEGQ is used for /q. For each
table, the number of dependent and independent variable entries must be the same.
!*************************************************************************************************
! Pump type and label
!*************************************************************************************************
TYPE = CENTRIFUGAL, LABEL = Label of the table
!*************************************************************************************************
! Table for single phase head HS
!*************************************************************************************************
! HS1
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xHS1)
HEADS1 = (y1, y2, … , YHS1)
! HS2
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xHS2)
HEADS2 = (y1, y2, … , YHS2)
! HS3
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xHS3)
- 642 -
Reference manual
HEADS3 = (y1, y2, … , YHS3)
! HS4
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xHS4)
HEADS4 = (y1, y2, … , YHS4)
!*************************************************************************************************
! Table for two phase head HT
!*************************************************************************************************
! HT1
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xHT1)
HEADT1 = (y1, y2, … , YHT1)
! HT2
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xHT2)
HEADT2 = (y1, y2, … , YHT2)
! HT3
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xHT3)
HEADT3 = (y1, y2, … , YHT3)
! HT4
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xHT4)
HEADT4 = (y1, y2, … , YHT4)
!*************************************************************************************************
! Table for single phase torque THS
!*************************************************************************************************
! THS1
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xTHS1)
TORQS1 = (y1, y2, … , YTHS1)
! THS2
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xTHS2)
TORQS2 = (y1, y2, … , YTHS2)
! THS3
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xTHS3)
TORQS3 = (y1, y2, … , YTHS3)
! THS4
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xTHS4)
TORQS4 = (y1, y2, … , YTHS4)
- 643 -
OLGA User manual
!*************************************************************************************************
! Table for two phase torque THT
!*************************************************************************************************
! THT1
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xTHT1)
TORQS1 = (y1, y2, … , YTHT1)
! THT2
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xTHT2)
TORQS2 = (y1, y2, … , YTHT2)
! THT3
OMEGQ = (x1, x2, … , xTHT3)
TORQS3 = (y1, y2, … , YTHT3)
! THT4
QOMEG = (x1, x2, … , xTHT4)
TORQS4 = (y1, y2, … , YTHT4)
!*************************************************************************************************
! Table for two phase head multiplier
!*************************************************************************************************
VOID = (x1, x2, … , xHV)
HEADM = (y1, y2, … , YHV)
!*************************************************************************************************
! Table for two phase torque multiplier
!*************************************************************************************************
VOID = (x1, x2, … , xTV)
TORQM = (y1, y2, … , YTV)
!*************************************************************************************************
! End of the table
!*************************************************************************************************
END
- 644 -
Reference manual
Note: The number of elements for each curve is limited to 10.
Pump Data Table for Displacement Pumps
The back flow rate, Qb , is a function of PI , ΔP, αI, l, and N.
To define Qb a complete table with five independent variables and one dependent variable should be
defined. Linear interpolation is used to calculate the Qb value and its partial derivatives at the operating
point.
The default units of the variables in the table:
PI Pa Pump inlet pressure
ΔP Pa Pump pressure increase
Qb m3/s Volumetric back flow
l m2/s Liquid kinematic viscosity
αI (-) Gas volume fraction
N rpm Pump speed
The units can also be specified by users.
The structure of the table is as shown in the example below. The reading of the input is based on
keywords, but the sequence of the keywords must be as shown in the example.
The structure of the table
!*************************************************************************
! Pump type and label
!*************************************************************************
TYPE = DISPLACEMENT, LABEL = Label of the table
!*************************************************************************
! First pump speed (1)
!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PUMPSPEED = N1
!*************************************************************************
! First suction pressure (2)
!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- 645 -
OLGA User manual
INPRESSURE = Pl,1
!*************************************************************************
! Lists of voidfractions and deltap for first pump speed and
! suction pressure. (3)
!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VOIDFRACTION = (aI,1, aI,2, … , aI,J)
DELTAP = (DP1, DP2, … , DPK)
!*************************************************************************
! First viscosity (4).
! For each viscosity back flow is listed as function of void-
! fraction and DP. Each BACKFLOW entry is for one
! DP and runs over all voidfractions.
!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VISCOSITY = nl,1
BACKFLOW = (Qb,1,1, Qb,1,2, … , Qb,1,J)
BACKFLOW = (Qb,2,1, Qb,2,2, … , Qb,2,J)
BACKFLOW = (Qb,K,1, Qb,K,2, … , Qb,K,J)
!*************************************************************************
! Second viscosity.
!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
VISCOSITY = nl,2
!*************************************************************************
! (2)+(3)+(4) is repeated for each suction pressure
! associated with the first pump speed.
! Different values for voidfraction, deltap and viscosity can
- 646 -
Reference manual
! be used for each suction pressure.
!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
INPRESSURE = Pl,2
!*************************************************************************
! (1)+(2)+(3)+(4) is repeated for each pump speed.
! Different values for suction pressure, voidfraction, deltap
! and viscosity can be used for each suction pressure.
!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PUMPSPEED = N2
!*************************************************************************
! End of the table
!-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ENDTABLE
Note: Note: The number of pump speeds and suction pressures is limited to 5, while the number of
voidfraction, deltap and viscosity entries is limited to 10.
Data Format for ESPDBFILEs
The pump characteristics for the ESP models must be given in ASCII-format as a set of lines with comma-
separated fields.
The data are assumed to be for single-phase water flow and a single pump stage.
There is a header row at the top of the file describing the respective data fields in the subsequent lines
below.
The structure of the data is as shown in the example below.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
version,label,model,frequency,type,units,min_rate,type2,units3,max_rate,type4,units5,flow_rate,type6,u
nits7,head_per_stage,type8,units9,power,type10,units11
1,TestModel,1000 Series
AA1000,50,Calibration,Hz,0.0171500,VolumeFlow,m3/sec,0.038977273,VolumeFlow,m3/sec,0.009123
8,VolumeFlow,m3/sec,1209.11,ZLength,m,903.34,Power,hp
- 647 -
OLGA User manual
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
For the data lines typically, only field 13 (flow_rate), 16 (head_per_stage) and 19 (power) are varying for
a given pump model when data are given in this sequence.
The header line must contain a comma-separated list of the following strings:
"version" : The version of the pump model
"label" : Typically the manufacturer/brand name
"model": ESP model
"frequency": Rotations per second, Hz
 "type":Frequency data type

 "units": Frequency data unit
"min_rate": Minimum flow rate
 "type2": Minimum flow rate data type

 "units3": Minimum flow rate data unit
"max_rate": Maximum flow rate
 "type4": Maximum flow rate data type

 "units5": Maximum flow rate data unit
"flow_rate": Flow rate for data at a specific line
 "type6": Flow rate data type

 "units7": Flow rate data unit
"head_per_stage": Head for flow rate at a specific line
 "type8": Head data type

 "units9": Head data unit
- 648 -
Reference manual
"power": Power input to ESP for flow rate at a specific line
 "type10": Power data type

 "units11": Power data unit
The data in each line below must be given as comma-separated data fields in the same sequence as
defined in the header line.
Data types:
version: Integer number
label: String (Note that spaces will be included in string)
model: String (Note that spaces will be included in string)
frequency: Real number for rotations per second (Hz)
 type: String, only "Calibration" allowed

 units: String, only "Hz" allowed
min_rate: Real number
 type2: String, only "VolumeFlow"allowed

 units3: String, either "m3/sec" or "ft3/sec"
max_rate: Real number

flow_rate: Real number

head_per_stage: Real number
 type8: String, only "ZLength" allowed

 units9: String, either "m" or "ft"
power: Real number
 type10: String, only "Power" allowed

 units11: String, either "w" or "hp"
The strings are case insensitive.
The code will convert to internal units based on the information in the units strings.
Note: The pump model name as referred to in the keyword ESPUMP PUMPMODEL is a composite of
the fields for label, model and version. For example, for the example above, the symbol that will be
available for reference in the PUMPMODEL key, is "TestModel 1000 Series AA1000 Version 1", where
the bold letters are taken directly from the label, model and version fields.
The ESP data can be taken either from a user-defined data file in the format as described above, specified
through the FILES ESPDBFILE keyword, or, by omitting the ESPDBFILE key in input, from the default file
located in the OLGA installation folder for the OLGA executable, e.g. "C:\Program Files
(x86)\Schlumberger\OLGA X.x \OlgaExecutables_7_<version>\Data\ESPDB\espdbfile.txt", where
<version> is 1 or higher.
- 649 -
OLGA User manual
Restrictions and Limitations
Memory consumption
OLGA allocates memory for the simulation as needed. The memory usage is a function of the total number
of pipe sections in the case, any special modules used (for instance: slug-tracking, inhibitor tracking,
compositional tracking) and to some extent the number of plot variables (TREND, PROFILE). In particular,
it is important to be aware that the amount of memory required during the simulation is roughly proportional
to the total number of sections in the network. That is, if you double the number of sections for a given
case, you will double the memory usage.
If the machine running the simulation is short on physical and virtual memory, this ultimately leads to an
unexpected program termination.
Limitations in the use of fluid properties

All fluid properties are normally assumed to be unique functions of temperature and pressure, and have to
be input to OLGA in a particular file. Thus, the total composition (the mole fractions of the components) of
the multiphase mixture is assumed to be constant both in time and space. This limitation is important for
mixtures with pronounced compositional dependent properties. Note, however, that you can use different
fluid properties in different branches in a pipeline network. Network simulations are special cases where
total compositional changes in the pipeline may be important.
Due to the phase velocity differences, the fluid composition in a pipe is generally different from the fluid
compositions used in the PVT table (for example, during the depressurization of a pipeline). If only gas is
released from the pipe, the total composition in the pipe changes. Condensate can accumulate in the
lower parts of the pipe and result in large compositional differences between sections.
This difference does not affect the steady state results provided that the inlet flowing fluid has the same
composition as in the PVT table. In transient simulations, the fluids in the pipes have different
compositions. Thus, changes in physical properties and equilibrium mass fractions due to changes in
temperature and pressure are different from the values in the PVT table. These differences are usually
small.
As an alternative to PVT tables, it is possible to perform a simulation using Compositional Tracking, where
the compositional data is provided in a feed file and the code calculates the fluid properties internally. This
means that the total composition may vary both in time and space, and that no special consideration is
needed for a pipeline network. This procedure is also more accurate in simulations where the fluid
composition will change considerably with time, for example, blowdown of pipelines. However,
Compositional Tracking is more CPU demanding and can prolong the simulation time significantly.
The gas and liquid phases are assumed to be in thermodynamic equilibrium; the temperature and pressure
are equal in both phases, and any interface mass transfer occurs instantaneously. The latter has important
implications for the pressure wave propagation (or speed of sound); if normal condensation takes place,
the mixture appears too compressible in OLGA and the pressure wave velocity is smaller than if the mass
transfer rate was finite.
Due to the instantaneous mass transfer, Compositional Tracking and regular table based OLGA both has
problems handling single component systems and systems with a very narrow phase envelope. This is
because a small change in pressure and temperature might change the holdup and physical properties of
the fluid dramatically
- 650 -
Fluid property assumptions
In addition to having some restrictions on the behavior of fluids in pipes, OLGA also imposes some
restrictions on the physical properties of a fluid, and the pressure and temperature dependency of these.
This is done to ensure the validity of the numerical models, and to try to avoid numerical instabilities.
Unless stated otherwise these restrictions applies to table-based fluids and Compositional Tracking.
 First of all OLGA assumes that gas is the lightest phase, and thus flows at the top. If the gas density
for some reason is larger or equal to the oil density, the gas densities are modified to be slightly
smaller than the oil density. Similarly if the gas density is larger than or equal to the water density, the
water density is modified to be slightly larger than the gas density. A warning of this is then printed.
The density of oil can both be smaller and larger than the water density, but note that the numerical
models in OLGA have only been verified and tuned for fluids where the density of oil is smaller than
density of water. OLGA also checks if all densities are zero, and terminates if they are.
 Secondly OLGA checks if the viscosities are <10-9, and sets these viscosities to 10-9 if they are.
OLGA also checks if the gas viscosity is smaller than the oil and water viscosities. If the gas viscosity
is, for some reason, larger than either of these, the oil or water viscosity is set to a value slightly larger
than the gas viscosity at this point. A warning of this is then printed.
 Thirdly OLGA checks if the surface tension between phases are smaller than 10 -5. If they for some
reason are smaller, OLGA sets these values to 10 -5. A warning of this is then printed.
 Finally OLGA also investigates if the enthalpies and temperature and pressure dependencies of the
enthalpies seem reasonable. A warning is printed if something unexpected is found. This check is not
performed in Compositional Tracking.
Input/Output Limitations
Input pre-processor
The input pre-processor that checks the input data for inconsistencies is not foolproof. Although the most
frequent input errors are found, there may be cases with faulty input that are not detected.
Initial value pre-processor
OLGA contains a steady state pre-processor that computes values to be used as initial conditions in
dynamic computations. The pre-processor uses the OLGA-S interface iteratively over all pipe sections to
calculate pressure gradients and other parameters in the flow network until a consistent steady-state
solution has been found.
However, the solution computed by the steady state pre-processor and the solution obtained when
simulation with the dynamic solver until a steady-state is achieved may not be equal. See limitations in the
steady state pre-processor chapter for an explanation for this.
Printed output
Because this is a user specified quantity, care must be taken to avoid a paper or file 'explosion'. The
amount of printed output is proportional to the number of output intervals and to the number of output
variables and sections specified in the keyword statement OUTPUT.
Output postprocessor
The output postprocessor summarizes the simulation results. Some of the information is dedicated to
steady state cases. Other items, such as the minimum and maximum variable values, are interesting also
for transient simulations. The postprocessor does not give any information on any process equipment that
is simulated.
- 651 -
OLGA User manual
Plot file sizes
There are no formal program restrictions regarding the size of these files. The user implicitly controls the
size through the data specified in the keyword statements PLOT, TREND and PROFILE. The size is
determined by the number of variables, sections and output time intervals. The file size limitation is system
dependent.
Standard Conditions in OLGA

Standard conditions for pressure and temperature normally refer to atmospheric conditions, and there are
varying definitions in different companies, regions and applications. It is generally expected that live
hydrocarbons are processed (stabilized) in some way before the properties of the separated fluid phases
at standard conditions can be measured or estimated.
The fluid phase properties, that is, densities, gas/oil ratio, and so on, depend on how the fluids are
processed from actual (in-situ) conditions to the standard conditions, that is, separator conditions and the
number of separation stages. OLGA, in some situations, accounts for any separation scheme (processing),
while in other cases standard condition fluid properties can only be based on a single-stage separation (a
flash) at built-in standard conditions. The default (built-in) standard conditions in OLGA are 1 atm
(14.7 psia) and 60 °F (15.6 °C).
The limitations with respect to standard conditions in OLGA depend on which type of fluid description is
used in a simulation model, as explained below.
Table-based Fluid Properties – Fixed format
The fixed (legacy) fluid file format contains tables of fluid properties based on single stage flash
simulations at given pressures and temperatures. The pressure and temperature intervals must comprise 1
atm and 60 °F, respectively, to enable the use of standard conditions in a simulation with this fluid file
format. OLGA obtains properties at standard conditions by interpolating in the fluid tables to the built-in
standard conditions of 1 atm and 60 °F. Thus, all input and output referring to standard conditions (for
example, QGST, GORST) is based on a single-stage separation when using this fluid description.
Table-based Fluid Properties – Keyword format
In addition to the information available in the legacy fluid file format, the improved keyword fluid table file
format contains information (in the header) about e.g. gas/oil ratio (GOR), water cut (WC) and phase
densities at standard conditions. Recent versions of OLGA use this information, instead of single-stage
interpolation in the property tables, when converting between actual and standard conditions. These
properties in the fluid file header need not be based on a single-stage flash, but can be the results from, for
example, a multi-stage separation, full process simulation or real field data. Thus, OLGA can account for
any applied processing scheme and standard conditions.
It should be noted, however, that PVT applications usually insert results from a single-stage flash at
standard conditions into the fluid file header when generating fluid files. This means that, to allow OLGA to
account for multi-stage processing, you must manually correct the values in the fluid file or use a different
PVT package to generate the file.
In some situations, PVT packages can fail to provide a reasonable density for one or more phases at
standard conditions. If at least one standard density value is less than or equal to zero, OLGA reverts to
interpolating in the property tables to obtain phase properties and fractions at the standard pressure and
temperature given in the fluid file header. If reasonable standard pressure and temperature values are not
provided in the fluid file, OLGA defaults to using 1 atm and 60 °F.
- 652 -
Compositional Tracking
When using compositional tracking in OLGA, conversion between standard and actual conditions is always
based on the results of a single-stage flash at 1 atm and 60 °F, using the in-situ fluid composition. Multi-
stage separation (processing, stabilization) can be simulated by including a separator train in the OLGA
model. However, this can increase the model complexity and simulation time considerably (depending on
the case) and only provides multi-stage separation phase flow rates at one location (typically at the outlet).
Black Oil Fluid Model
As explained in the section Blackoil - Model description on page 50, any oil component is always in the
liquid phase and does not evaporate at any conditions. Due to this limitation, the GOR in the Black Oil fluid
model is not affected by the number of separation stages. This means that single-stage flash properties or
results from multi-stage separation to standard conditions can be used as input to the simulation model.
However, you are recommended to use the tuning coefficients available for the selected Black Oil
correlation to obtain a good match of the bubble point curve and gas fractions at actual conditions when
such information is available.
General: GOR Adjustments
OLGA enables the GOR (or GLR, CGR) of a fluid to be adjusted by user input in, for example, a SOURCE
or a WELL. In Compositional Tracking, this adjustment is performed by flashing the feed fluid at standard
conditions and recombining the resulting phases according to the specified input value, thus changing the
composition of the fluid source.
For table-based fluid properties, OLGA tries instead to obtain the specified GOR by adjusting the gas
fraction at actual conditions. Therefore, it is impossible to adjust the GOR more than what corresponds to
an in-situ gas fraction of 0 (only liquid) or 1 (pure vapor). You are recommended to use a fluid property
table with the correct GOR instead of performing significant adjustments in the SOURCE or WELL
properties. In cases where adjustments are made, make sure that the specified value actually is obtained,
for example, by plotting the resulting GORST (and/or check if the in-situ gas flow fraction equals 0 or 1 at
the source section). Refer also to Source - Model description on page 91.
Flow Model Limitations

Generally, these limitations are difficult to assess. Their possible consequences, however, are not normally
influenced by the user input.
An exception is the correlation for the void fraction in liquid slugs. An average correlation based on the
diesel, naphtha and stanco experiments at the SINTEF loop is applied by default. The actual correlation
quite significantly influences the transition from stratified to slug flow. The selected correlation yields good
agreement for all the above experiments. For air/water, another correlation should be applied and OLGA
provides an alternative that can be activated by specifying the key SLUGVOID in the keyword OPTIONS.
Unless the slug tracking option is used, OLGA applies an average slug flow description. That is, if slug flow
is predicted at a section boundary, the flow parameters at that boundary, such as slug bubble velocity and
volume fraction, slug fraction, and so on, are computed based on the assumption of fully developed slug
flow with an infinite number of identical slug cells. The detailed flow parameters at another point along the
pipeline normally differ as the average flow parameters (pressure, hold-up, and so on) differ. The average
description implies that if slug flow occurs in two adjacent sections, the detailed slug flow parameters at
one section do not explicitly influence those in the section following it.
The flow history at a pipe location is to a small extent considered in the flow regime determination. For
example, if slug flow is predicted in an upward sloping pipe and stratified flow in a following downward
- 653 -
OLGA User manual
sloping pipe, all slugs die at the entrance of the latter pipe. In reality, slug flow may persist some distance
downstream because a slug needs some time to disintegrate. Eventually, one slug might proceed
downstream and cause liquid blockage at a bend in a riser connection with possible build-up of a terrain
slug. This special type of mechanism for the onset of terrain slugging is not represented in the standard
OLGA model. To simulate this phenomenon accurately, the SLUGTRACKING model with
HYDRODYNAMIC=ON must be used.
Another restriction on the Flow Model is that gas is assumed to be lighter than oil and water. Oil can in
turn, however, be both lighter or heavier than water. Note, however, that the numerical models in OLGA
has been verified and tuned only for fluids where the density of oil is smaller than the density of water. How
OLGA deals with fluids where oil or water densities are equal to or smaller than gas densities is described
in Limitations in the use of fluid properties.
Important Numerical Recommendations
Time step
OLGA has time step control based on several criteria. They can all be given at user specified sections
through the keyword statement DTCONTROL.
 The first time step control is based on the transport criterion of Courant-Friedrich-Levy (CFL):
This criterion is by default switched on. This means that the time step is limited so that no mass is
trans-ported across a whole section in one time step. This is the maximum time step allowed if a mass
transient is to be followed correctly.
 The second time step control, SOUND_CFL, (default OFF) uses the same principles as the CFL but is
based on the speed of the pressure wave instead of the fluid velocity. It has been introduced to better
calculate shock waves (for example, due to water hammer).
 The third time step control, PRESSURE, (default OFF) is based on the second order time derivative of
the pressure.
 The fourth time step control, GRADPRESSURE, (default OFF) is based on the first order time
derivative of the pressure. This has been introduced to be able to reduce the time step earlier for quick
pressure changes, for example, a pipeline with high pressure is opened into a small closed volume.
If all time step control criteria are switched on, OLGA chooses the minimum time step from the activated
time steps controls. The upper and lower limit for the time step is the user-given MINDT and MAXDT in the
keyword statement INTEGRATION.
Additional time step controls are activated when process equipment is simulated, or the slug tracking
option is activated.
Section Lengths
For a pipeline of fixed length the simulation time increases roughly quadratically with the number of
sections in the pipeline. First, the number of arithmetic operations per time step increases proportionally to
the number of sections. Second, the time step decreases with decreasing section length if the CFL
transport criterion is switched on.
The accuracy of the solution increases with smaller sections but in a complex manner that is difficult to
estimate quantitatively. The numerical solution should, however, approach the analytical one as Δt and Δz
approach zero.
- 654 -
Variable Mesh Length
Past experience indicates that the section lengths should not differ too much along the pipeline. A factor of
2 or less in length ratio between adjacent sections is re although factors of 5–10 might work in some
cases.
Pipe-Section discretization
In general, if either the inclination angle or the diameter of the pipes varies, each pipe should be divided
into at least two sections to ensure meaningful results – that is, to reduce numerical 'smearing out' of these
effects.
Wall Layer Thickness
The numerical solution of the wall temperatures in the wall layers is dependent on the wall layer
discretization. For steady state calculations, the wall layer discretization can be quite coarse, one layer for
each material layer.
For transient calculations when the heat storage in the pipe walls can be important (cool down or heat up),
a finer discretization of the pipe walls can be necessary.
Very thin layers, such as paint, should be included in a neighboring layer by adjusting the thickness and
conductivity of that layer. If the thermal conductivity of the thin layer is fairly close to the conductivity of one
of the neighbors, only the thickness must be adjusted.
- 655 -
OLGA User manual
Compatibility matrix – modules/options in OLGA

state
Steady
OLGA HD
Comp tracking
Inhibitor tracking
Tracer tracking
Black oil
Wax deposition*
Corrosion
Process equip
Pig
Slug tracking
Pig tracking
Complex fluid
Rheology
Adv Well IPRs
Annulus/ gas lift
Therm
FEM
Plug-in
Drilling
Drilling fluid/
Tuning
Hydrate kinetics
RMO
water-HC
Steam
Single comp.
Particle Flow Simple
Advanced
Particle Flow
modeling
Sub-
OLGA ROCX
ECLIPSE link
OLGA
Steady OK OK OK OK OK Note 1 OK Note 2 OK Note 3 Note 3 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 1 OK Note 8 Note 8 Note 9 Note 9 Note 11
state
OLGA HD OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 18 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 10 OK OK OK
Comp OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
tracking
Inhibitor OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 4 OK OK OK OK
tracking
Tracer OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 15 OK Note 7 Note 7 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note OK OK OK OK OK Note 16 Note 16

tracking 4
Black oil OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
Wax Note 1 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 12 Note 16 Note 16

deposition
Corrosion OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 16 Note 16
Process Note 2 OK OK OK Note 15 OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 6 OK OK OK OK Note OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

equip 15
Pig OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 13 OK OK
Slug Note 3 OK OK OK Note 7 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 14 OK OK

tracking
- 656 -
state
Steady
OLGA HD
Comp tracking
Inhibitor tracking
Tracer tracking
Black oil
Wax deposition*
Corrosion
Process equip
Pig
Slug tracking
Pig tracking
Complex fluid
Rheology
Adv Well IPRs
Annulus/ gas lift
Therm
FEM
Plug-in
Drilling
Drilling fluid/
Tuning
Hydrate kinetics
RMO
water-HC
Steam
Single comp.
Advanced
Particle Flow
modeling
Sub-
OLGA ROCX
ECLIPSE link
OLGA
Pig tracking Note 3 OK OK OK Note 7 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 13 OK OK
Complex OK OK Note 6 OK Note 20 OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 16 Note 16

fluid
Rheology OK Note 18 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 20 OK Note 19 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 16 Note 16
Adv Well OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 19 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

IPRs
Annulus/ OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 17 Note 17

gas lift
FEMTherm OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 17 Note 17
Plug-in OK OK OK Note 15 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
Drilling OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
fluid/Drilling
Tuning OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 16 Note 16
Hydrate Note 1 OK Note 4 Note 4 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK Note 16 Note 16

kinetics
RMO OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
Steamwater Note 8 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
-HC
- 657 -
OLGA User manual
state
Steady
OLGA HD
Comp tracking
Inhibitor tracking
Tracer tracking
Black oil
Wax deposition*
Corrosion
Process equip
Pig
Slug tracking
Pig tracking
Complex fluid
Rheology
Adv Well IPRs
Annulus/ gas lift
Therm
FEM
Plug-in
Drilling
Drilling fluid/
Tuning
Hydrate kinetics
RMO
water-HC
Steam
Single comp.
Advanced
Particle Flow
modeling
Sub-
OLGA ROCX
ECLIPSE link
OLGA
Single Note 8 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
comp.
Particle Note 9 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
Flow Simple
Particle Note 9 Note 10 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

Flow
Advanced
Sub- Note 11 OK OK OK OK Note 12 OK Note 13 Note 14 Note 13 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK

modeling
OK
OLGA
Note 16 OK Note 16 Note 16 OK OK OK OK Note 16 Note 16 OK Note 17 Note 17 Note 16 Note 16
ROCX
OLGA
ECLIPSE OK Note 16 OK Note 16 Note 16 OK OK OK OK Note 16 Note 16 OK Note 17 Note 17 Note 16 Note 16
link
* - Wax deposition, entrainment, viscosity correlation
Note 1: Steady state preprocessor can be run with wax deposition or hydrate kinetics activated, but the preprocessor does not consider the wax phase or hydrate formation.
Note 2: All process equipment except displacement pump, pump battery, controllers, separator, heated walls (subkey POWER etc in WALL), leaks and check valves are incorporated.
Note 3: Steady state preprocessor can be run to initialize cases with Slug tracking and Pig tracking, but the effect of tracking slugs and pigs is only seen in the transient calculations.
Note 4: The hydrate kinetics module can be run with MEG/MeOH/EtOH and Tracer tracking, but the hydrate formation is not influenced.
Note 5: The Complex Fluid module (CFM) works well with the water option. However, when oil and water form an emulsion, the compatibility with CFM is not complete. For stratified flow, the
resulting emulsion viscosity is used correctly in CFM, but for slug flow only a volume weighted average between tabulated oil and water viscosities is used.
Note 6: Tabulated viscosities are used in the pump and compressor models instead of effective viscosities from the Complex Fluid module.
- 658 -
Note 7: Tracer tracking can be combined with slug tracking, but Tracer tracking uses the standard numeric scheme in OLGA and not the tracking scheme used in Slug tracking. That is, the
tracer masses will be constant in a section and not follow the slug front. In principle, Tracer tracking also works with Pig tracking (which is a special version of Slug tracking), but there might
be problems for sections without liquid. The chance for this happening is much less in a slug tracking simulation.
Note 8: The Steamwater-HC and single component options can both be run in the steady state preprocessor, but numerical problems may arise more easily. Especially cases where the
saturation is crossed when travelling from inlet to outlet in the pipeline can prove difficult.
Note 9: Steady state does not consider (a) bed, (b) slip between particles and fluid, and (c) non-uniform distribution of particles in fluid layers. The particle mass rate is distributed to fluids
according to volumetric rates of the phases.
Note 10: Velocity profiles from HD are not considered in the calculations.
Note 11: The steady state solver does not take into account the interactions between the submodel flow connections.
Note 12: Wax is not transported across the submodel flow connections.
Note 13: Pig will not cross submodel flow connections, that is, pig launch and pig trap positions need to be within the same submodel.
Note 14: Slugs and slug disks will not be passed between submodels.
Note 15: Jet pump is not compatible with Plug-in nor Tracer Tracking.
Note 16: The functionality can be used but it will not have any effect in the reservoir model, only in the flow network.
Note 17: FEMTherm can be used, but the temperature distribution computed by FEMTherm will not be utilized by the reservoir simulator.
Note 18: The functionality can be used, but non-Newtonian rheology for stratified flow will only be taken into account through computation of an apparent viscosity which is used in a
Newtonian friction model.
Note 19: The functionality can be used, but non-Newtonian rheology will not be used in the adv well IPR models.
Note 20: If both Complex Fluid and Rheology is specified, Rheology will be used.
- 659 -

OLGA User Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

OLGA User Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

DYNAMIC MULTIPHASE FLOW SIMULATOR

Trademarks & Service Marks

Table of Contents ....................................................................................................................... 2

Drilling .............................................................................................................................. 126

Controller details .............................................................................................................. 266

TRENDDATA (on CaseLevel) ...................................................................................... 499

Well Output Variables ....................................................................................................... 605

OLGA User manual

The complete program documentation includes:

 OLGA* Release notes

Refer to the Release notes for detailed release information.

In this manual you can find

 a general introduction to OLGA

OLGA as a strategic tool

Design and Engineering

 Sizes of tubing and pipes

Focus on maximizing the production window during field life

Accuracy / Uncertainty management

Risk and Safety

OLGA should be used to establish

 Operational procedures and limitations

OLGA is also a very useful tool for operator training

 Training in flow assurance in general

 Flow stability: permanent or temporary slugging, rate changes, etc..

 .opi; generated and used by the OLGA GUI

Compositional; Compoptions, Feed, Udfeed, Blackoiloptions, Blackoilcomponent, Blackoilfeed,

FA-models; Wateroptions, Fluid, Slugtuning, Slugtracking

Example - text file structure

Below are examples on how this is given in the genkey file:

CASE PROJECT="OLGA Manual", TITLE="Example case", AUTHOR="Schlumberger"

INTEGRATION STARTTIME=0, ENDTIME=7200, DTSTART=0.1, MINDT=0.1, MAXDT=5

MATERIAL LABEL=MAT-1, DENSITY=0.785E+04, CAPACITY=0.5E+03, CONDUCTIVITY=0.5E+02

WALL LABEL=WALL-1, THICKNESS=(0.9000E-02, 0.2E-01), MATERIAL=(MAT-1, MAT-1)

Each network component is enclosed within start (NETWORKCOMPONENT) and end

NETWORKCOMPONENT TYPE=FlowPath, TAG=FP_BRAN

FlowComponent: See 'Flowpath' on page 15, See 'NODE' on page 17

ProcessEquipment: See 'PHASESPLITNODE' on page 18, See 'SEPARATOR' on page 18

Controller: See 'CONTROLLER' on page 18

The following keywords are used for Piping:

BRANCH; Defines geometry and fluid labels.

GEOMETRY; Defines starting point for flowpath.

Example - text file structure

Below are examples on how this is given in the genkey file:

BRANCH LABEL=BRAN-1, GEOMETRY=GEOM-1, FLUID=1

PIPE LABEL=PIPE-1, DIAMETER=0.12, ROUGHNESS=0.28E-04, NSEGMENT=4, LENGTH=0.4E+03,

The following keywords are used for Position:

 POSITION; Defined a named position for reference in other keywords

Boundary and Initial Conditions

HEATTRANSFER; Definition of the heat transfer parameters.

NEARWELLSOURCE; Defines a near-wellbore source used together with OLGA ROCX.

WELL; Defines a well with name, position and flow characteristics.

Example - text file structure

Below are examples on how this is given in the genkey file:

HEATTRANSFER PIPE=ALL, HAMBIENT=6.5, TAMBIENT=6, HMININNERWALL=0.5E+03

SOURCE LABEL=SOUR-1-1, PIPE=1, SECTION=1, TIME=0, TEMPERATURE=62, GASFRACTION=-1,

The following keywords are used for Process equipment:

COMPRESSOR (*); Defines name, position and operating characteristics of a compressor.

PRESSUREBOOST; Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump

CENTRIFUGALPUMP; Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump

ESPUMP(*); Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump

DISPLACEMENTPUMP; Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump

ONESUBSEAPUMP; Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump

BORNEMANNPUMP(*); Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump

PUMPBATTERY; Defines name, type and characteristic data for a pump